Waste Water Pumping Station

DEPARTMENT OF WATER UTILITIES
STILLWATER, OKLAHOMA
KAW PUMP STATION IMPROVEMENTS

CLIENT PROJECT NO. 13WC08
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISIONS 16 - 17

Volume 3 of 5
FINAL SUBMITTAL
MAY 2014
CITY OF STILLWATER
DEPARTMENT OF WATER UTILITIES
STILLWATER, OKLAHOMA
KAW PUMP STATION IMPROVEMENTS
Client Proj. No 13WC08
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Volume 1 of 5
DIVISION 00 BIDDING REQUIREMENTS, CONTRACT FORMS, AND CONDITIONS OF
THE CONTRACT
SECTION NO.
TITLE
_001
PROJECT MANUAL COVER
_002
NOTICE TO BIDDERS
_003
TABLE OF CONTENTS
_005B_01
CITY ATTORNEY PERFORMANCE BOND
_005B_02
CITY ATTORNEY STATUTORY BOND
_005B_03
CITY ATTORNEY MAINTENANCE BOND
_006C
STANDARD GENERAL CONDITIONS
_007D
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
_008E
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
_010G
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
_011H
LIST OF DOCUMENTS REQUIRED
_012I
SIGNATURE DOCUMENTS REQUIRED
_013J
BID FORM
_014K
BID BOND
_015L
BUSINESS RELATIONSHIP AFFIDAVIT
_016M
NONCOLLUSION AFFIDAVIT
May 2014
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/OK/Stillwater/9408A10/Specifications/TOC (FS)
TOC-1
9408A10
_017N
CERTIFICATE NONDISCRIMINATION
_018O
NOTICE OF NO BID
00434
LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS
DIVISION 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION NO.
TITLE
01110
SUMMARY OF WORK
01116
CONTRACT DOCUMENT LANGUAGE
01140
WORK RESTRICTIONS
01201
PAYMENT PROCEDURES
01210
ALLOWANCES
01230
ALTERNATES
01260
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
01292
SCHEDULE OF VALUES
01294
APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
01312
PROJECT MEETINGS
01322
WEB BASED CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENT MANAGEMENT
01324B
PROGRESS SCHEDULES AND REPORTS
01329
SAFETY PLAN
01330
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
01340
PHOTOGRAPHIC AND VIDEOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION
01350
SPECIAL PROCEDURES
01352
ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES
01354
HAZARDOUS MATERIAL PROCEDURES
01355A
STORMWATER POLLUTION PREVENTION
01410
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
01424
ABBREVIATIONS
May 2014
TOC-2
9408A10
01450
QUALITY CONTROL
01455
SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS
01460
CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL PLAN
01500
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
01550
TRAFFIC CONTROL
01562
TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION
01573
FILTER FABRIC FENCE
01600
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
01610
PROJECT DESIGN CRITERIA
01722
FIELD ENGINEERING
01732
CUTTING AND PATCHING
01734
WORK WITHIN PUBLIC RIGHT-OF-WAY
01756
TESTING, TRAINING, AND FACILITY START-UP
01770
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
01782
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

Volume 2 of 5
DIVISION 02 - SITE CONSTRUCTION
SECTION NO.
TITLE
02050
SOILS AND AGGREGATES FOR EARTHWORK
02200
SITE CLEARING
02240
DEWATERING
02260
EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION
02300
EARTHWORK
02312
CONTROLLED LOW STRENGTH MATERIAL (CLSM)
02318
TRENCHING
02581
PRECAST ELECTRICAL HANDHOLES AND ELECTRICAL MANHOLES
May 2014
TOC-3
9408A10
02620
FILTER FABRIC
02772
CONCRETE CURBS, GUTTERS, AND SIDEWALKS
02820
FENCES AND GATES
02900
PLANTING
02952
PAVEMENT RESTORATION AND REHABILITATION

DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE
SECTION NO.
TITLE
03055
EPOXY BONDING REINFORCING BARS AND ALL THREAD RODS IN

CONCRETE
03072
EPOXY RESIN/PORTLAND CEMENT BONDING AGENT
03301
CONCRETE WORK
03366
CONCRETE FINISHES
03600
GROUTING
DIVISION 05 - METALS
SECTION NO.
TITLE
05140
STRUCTURAL ALUMINUM
05190
MECHANICAL ANCHORING AND FASTENING TO CONCRETE AND

MASONRY
05500
METAL FABRICATIONS
DIVISION 06 - WOOD AND PLASTICS
SECTION NO.
TITLE
06072
PRESERVATIVE PRESSURE TREATED WOOD

DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
SECTION NO.
TITLE
07110
DAMPPROOFING
07900
JOINT SEALANTS
DIVISION 08 - DOORS AND WINDOWS
May 2014
TOC-4
9408A10
SECTION NO.
TITLE
08320
FLOOR ACCESS DOORS

DIVISION 09 - FINISHES
SECTION NO.
TITLE
09960
HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS
DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT
SECTION NO.
TITLE
11312D
VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS

DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
SECTION NO.
TITLE
13448
INTELLIGENT ACTUATORS
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL
SECTION NO.
TITLE
15050
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
15052
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR GENERAL PIPING
15061
PIPE SUPPORTS
15075
EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
15076
PIPE IDENTIFICATION
15082
PIPING INSULATION
15084
DUCTWORK INSULATION
15110
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR VALVES
15111
BALL VALVES
15112
BUTTERFLY VALVES
15114
CHECK VALVES
15120
PIPING SPECIALTIES
15121
PIPE COUPLINGS
May 2014
TOC-5
9408A10
15125
STRAINERS AND FILTERS
15277
STEEL TRANSMISSION PIPE: WELDED, GREATER THAN 22-INCH

DIAMETER,
15732
AIR CONDITIONING UNITS
15772
HEAT TRACING CABLE
15812
METAL DUCTWORK
15820
DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES
15954
HVAC SYSTEMS TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
15956
PIPING SYSTEMS TESTING
15958
MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT TESTING

Volume 3 of 5
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL
SECTION NO.
TITLE
16050
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
16060
GROUNDING AND BONDING
16070
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
16075
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
16123
600 VOLT OR LESS WIRES AND CABLES
16124
MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLES
16130
CONDUITS
16133
DUCT BANKS
16134
BOXES
16140
WIRING DEVICES
16150
LOW VOLTAGE WIRE CONNECTIONS
16151
MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLE CONNECTIONS
16210
UTILITY COORDINATION
May 2014
TOC-6
9408A10
16224
MEDIUM VOLTAGE MOTORS
16232
SINGLE DIESEL FUELED ENGINE GENERATOR ABOVE 200 KW
16240
BATTERY SYSTEMS
16267
MEDIUM VOLTAGE VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE
16272
DRY-TYPE TRANSFORMERS
16273
LIQUID FILLED PAD MOUNTED TRANSFORMERS
16285
SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES
16295
PROTECTIVE RELAYS
16305
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM STUDIES
16332
MEDIUM VOLTAGE FUSES
16341
5 KILOVOLT MEDIUM VOLTAGE METAL CLAD SWITCHGEAR
16346
5-KILOVOLT MEDIUM-VOLTAGE METAL-ENCLOSED INTERRUPTER

SWITCHGEAR
16351
MEDIUM VOLTAGE REDUCED VOLTAGE STARTERS
16411
DISCONNECT SWITCHES
16412
LOW VOLTAGE MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
16433
SWITCHGEAR REMOTE CONTROL PANEL (WITH AUTOMATIC

CONTROLS)
16444
LOW VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS
16445
PANELBOARDS
16494
LOW VOLTAGE FUSES
16500
LIGHTING
16670
LIGHTNING PROTECTION
16710
FIRE ALARM AND SMOKE DETECTION SYSTEM
16920
PRE-FABRICATED WALK-IN ELECTRICAL ENCLOSURES
16950
FIELD ELECTRICAL ACCEPTANCE TESTS
16990
CONDUIT SCHEDULE
May 2014
TOC-7
9408A10
DIVISION 17 - INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS

SECTION NO.
TITLE
17050
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PROCESS CONTROL AND

INSTRUMENTATION
17100
CONTROL STRATEGIES
17101
SPECIFIC CONTROL STRATEGIES
17402
PRESSURE/VACUUM MEASUREMENT: INSTRUMENT VALVES
17403
PRESSURE/VACUUM MEASUREMENT: SWITCHES
17404
PRESSURE/VACUUM MEASUREMENT: GAUGES
17406
PRESSURE/VACUUM MEASUREMENT: DIFFERENTIAL
17710
CONTROL SYSTEMS - PANELS, ENCLOSURES, AND PANEL

COMPONENTS
17712
CONTROL SYSTEMS: UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLIES 10

KVA AND BELOW
17720
CONTROL SYSTEMS - PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS
17730
CONTROL SYSTEMS - SCADA COMPUTER EQUIPMENT
17733
CONTROL SYSTEMS - NETWORK MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
17762
CONTROL SYSTEMS - SCADA SOFTWARE
17903
SCHEDULES - I/O LIST
17950
TESTING, CALIBRATION, AND COMMISSIONING

Volume 4 of 5
TYPICAL DETAILS
May 2014
TOC-8
9408A10
SECTION 16050
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
PART 1
1.01
GENERAL
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes:
1.
General requirements applicable to all Electrical Work.
2.
General requirements for electrical submittals.
B.
Related sections:
1.
The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as
binding as if called for by all.
2.
It is the Contractors responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the Work of
subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or
furnishing any of Contractors Work.
3.
The following sections are related to the Work described in this Section. This
list of related sections is provided for convenience only and is not intended to
excuse or otherwise diminish the duty of the Contractor to see that the
completed Work complies accurately with the Contract Documents.
a. Section 00700 - Standard General Conditions.
b. Section 01140 - Work Restrictions.
c. Section 01292 - Schedule of Values.
d. Section 01312 - Project Meetings.
e. Section 01324B - Progress Schedules and Reports.
f. Section 01329 - Safety Plan.
g. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures.
h. Section 01352 - Alteration Project Procedures
i.
Section 01410 - Regulatory Requirements.
j.
Section 01450 - Quality Control.
k. Section 01600 - Product Requirements.
l.
Section 01610 - Project Design Criteria.
m. Section 01770 - Closeout Procedures.
n. Section 01782 - Operation and Maintenance Data.
o. Section 16075 - Electrical Identification.
p. Section 16130 - Conduits.
q. Section 16210 - Utility Coordination.
r. Section 16305 - Electrical System Studies.
s. Section 16950 - Field Electrical Acceptance Tests.
C.
Interfaces to equipment, instruments, and other components:

1.
The Drawings, Specifications, and overall design are based on preliminary
information furnished by various equipment manufacturers which identify a
minimum scope of supply from the manufacturers. This information pertains to,
but is not limited to, instruments, control devices, electrical equipment,
packaged mechanical systems, and control equipment provided with
mechanical systems.
2.
Provide all material and labor needed to install the actual equipment furnished,
and include all costs to add any additional conduit, wiring, terminals, or other
May 2014
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/OK/Stillwater/9408A10/Specifications/16050 (FS)
16050-1
9408A10
3.
4.
5.
electrical hardware to the Work, which may be necessary to make a complete,

functional installation based on the actual equipment furnished:
a. Make all changes necessary to meet the manufacturers wiring
requirements.
Submit all such changes and additions to the Engineer for acceptance as
specified in Document 00700.
Review the complete set of Drawings and Specifications in order to ensure
that all items related to the electrical power and control systems are
completely accounted for. Include any such items that appear on the Drawings
or in the Specifications from another discipline in the scope of Work:
a. If a conflict between Drawings and Specifications is discovered, refer
conflict to the Engineer as soon as possible for resolution.
Loop drawings:
a. Provide all electrical information required in the preparation of loop
drawings including, but not limited to:
1) Conduit numbers and associated signal(s) contained within each
conduit.
2) Wire numbers.
3) Equipment terminal numbers.
4) Junction boxes and signal(s) contained within each junction box.
5) Equipment power sources, and associated circuit numbers.
6) As-built drawings detailing wiring.
D.
All electrical equipment and systems for the entire Project must comply with the
requirements of the Electrical Specifications, whether referenced in the individual
Equipment Specifications or not:
1.
The requirements of the Electrical Specifications apply to all Electrical Work
specified in other sections, including HVAC controls, packaged mechanical
systems, LCPs, VCPs, etc.
2.
Inform all vendors supplying electrical equipment or systems of the
requirements of the Electrical Specifications.
3.
The Owner is not responsible for any additional costs due to the failure of the
Contractor to notify all subcontractors and suppliers of the Electrical
Specifications requirements.
E.
Contract Documents:
1.
General:
a. The Drawings and Specifications are complementary and are to be used
together in order to fully describe the Work.
2.
Specifications:
a. The General and Supplementary Conditions of the Contract Documents
govern the Work.
b. These requirements are in addition to all General Requirements.
3.
Contract Drawings:
a. The Electrical Drawings show desired locations, arrangements, and
components of the Electrical Work in a diagrammatic manner.
b. Locations of equipment, control devices, instruments, boxes, panels, etc.
are approximate only; exercise professional judgment in executing the
Work to ensure the best possible installation:
1) The equipment locations and dimensions indicated on the Drawings
are approximate. Use the shop drawings to determine the proper
layout, foundation, and pad requirements, etc. for final installation.
May 2014
16050-2
9408A10
c.
d.
1.02
Coordinate with all subcontractors to ensure that all electrical

equipment is compatible with other equipment and space
requirements. Make changes required to accommodate differences
in equipment dimensions.
2) The Contractor has the freedom to select any of the named
manufacturers as identified in the individual specification sections;
however, the Engineer has designed the spatial equipment layout
based upon a single manufacturer and has not confirmed that every
named manufacturers equipment fits in the allotted space. It is the
Contractors responsibility to ensure that the equipment being
furnished fits within the defined space.
Installation details:
1) The Contract Drawings include typical installation details the
Contractor is to use to complete the Electrical Work. For cases where
a typical detail does not apply, develop installation details that may
be necessary for completing the Work, and submit these details for
review by the Engineer.
Schematic diagrams:
1) All controls are shown de-energized.
2) Schematic diagrams show control function only. Incorporate other
necessary functions for proper operation and protection of the
system.
3) Add slave relays, where required, to provide all necessary contacts
for the control system or where needed to function as interposing
relays for control voltage coordination, equipment coordination, or
control system voltage drop considerations.
4) Mount all devices shown on motor controller schematic diagrams in
the controller compartment enclosure, unless otherwise noted or
indicated.
5) Schematic diagrams are to be used in conjunction with the
descriptive operating sequences in the Contract Documents.
Combine all information and furnish a coordinated and fully functional
control system.
F.
Alternates/Alternatives:
1.
Coordinate with Document 00700 and Section 01600 for substitute item
provisions.
G.
Changes and change orders:

1.
As specified in Document 00700.
REFERENCES
A.
Code compliance:
1.
As specified in Section 01410.
2.
The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only. The
latest edition accepted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction of referenced
publications in effect at the time of the bid governs.
3.
The standards listed are hereby incorporated into this Section.
a. American National Standards Institute (ANSI).
b. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE):
1) Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures.
May 2014
16050-3
9408A10
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
B.
1.03
ASTM International (ASTM).

Illuminating Engineering Society (IES).
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE).
Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA).
International Code Council (ICC).
1) International Code Council Evaluation Service (ICC-ES).
a) AC 156 Acceptance Criteria for Seismic Certification by Shake
Table Testing of Non-Structural Components (ICC-ES AC 156).
International Society of Automation (ISA).
National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
1) 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 V Maximum).
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
1) 70 - National Electric Code (NEC).
National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST).
Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL).
Compliance with laws and regulations:

1.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Definitions of terms and other electrical and instrumentation considerations as set

forth by:
1.
IEEE.
2.
NETA.
3.
IES.
4.
ISA.
5.
NEC.
6.
NEMA.
7.
NFPA.
8.
NIST.
B.
Specific definitions:
1.
FAT: Factory acceptance test.
2.
ICSC: Instrumentation and controls subcontractor.
3.
LCP: Local control panel: Operator interface panel that may contain an HMI,
pilot type control devices, operator interface devices, control relays, etc. and
does not contain a PLC or RIO.
4.
PCM: Process control module: An enclosure containing any of the following
devices: PLC, RTU, or RIO.
5.
PCIS: Process control and instrumentation system.
6.
RTU: Remote telemetry unit: A controller typically consisting of a PLC, and a
means for remote communications. The remote communications devices
typically are radios, modems, etc.
7.
Space: That portion of the switchgear, motor control center, panelboard,
switchboard or control panel that does not physically contain a device but is
capable of accepting a device with no modifications to the equipment, i.e.,
provide all standoffs, bus, and hardware, as part of the space.
8.
Spare: That portion of the switchgear, motor control center, panelboard,
switchboard or control panel that physically contains a device with no load
connections to be made.
May 2014
16050-4
9408A10
9.
VCP: Vendor control panel: Control panels that are furnished with particular
equipment by a vendor other than the ICSC. These panels may contain PLCs,
RIO, OIT, HMI, etc.
10. Unequipped space: That portion of the switchgear, motor control center,
panelboard, switchboard or control panel that does not physically contain a
device, standoff, bus, hardware, or other equipment.
1.04
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
General requirements:
1.
The Work includes everything necessary for and incidental to executing and
completing the Electrical Work indicated on the Drawings and specified in the
Specifications and reasonably inferable there from:
a. The Electrical Drawings are schematic in nature; use the Structural,
Architectural, Mechanical, and Civil Drawings for all dimensions and
scaling purposes.
2.
It is the intent of these Specifications that the entire electrical power,
instrumentation, and control system be complete and operable. Provide all
necessary material and labor for the complete system from source of power to
final utilization equipment, including all connections, testing, calibration of
equipment furnished by others as well as equipment furnished by the
Contractor, whether or not specifically mentioned but which are necessary for
successful operation.
3.
Provide all Electrical Work, including conduit, field wiring, and connections by
the electrical subcontractor under the provisions of the Electrical Specifications
for all aspects of the Work, including heating, ventilating, and air conditioning.
4.
Coordinate all aspects of the Work with the electrical subcontractor and other
subcontractors before bidding in order to ensure that all costs associated with
a complete installation are included. The Owner is not responsible for any
change orders due to lack of coordination of the Work between the Contractor,
the electrical subcontractor, the other subcontractors or suppliers.
5.
Demolition:
a. Refer to Section 01352.
b. Where demolition is specified or indicated on the Drawings, disconnect all
associated electrical equipment and render the equipment safe.
c. Remove and dispose of all conduit, wire, electrical equipment, controls,
etc. associated with the items and/or areas to be demolished as indicated
on the Drawings unless otherwise indicated.
d. For each piece of equipment to be removed, remove all ancillary
components (e.g. instruments, solenoid valves, disconnect switches, etc.).
e. Conduit:
1) Where conduit removal, other than associated with equipment to be
removed, is indicated on the Drawings:
a) Remove exposed conduit to the point of encasement or burial.
b) Cut conduit flush and plug or cap encased or buried conduit.
2) Where conduits are to remain in place and removal is not indicated
on the Drawings:
a) Cap conduit open ends.
b) Re-label empty conduits as spare.
f. Remove all wire back to the source for all conduits to be removed or
abandoned in place.
May 2014
16050-5
9408A10
g.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Provide new nameplates for modified electrical distribution equipment,

motor control centers etc. to identify equipment and circuits that are no
longer used as spares.
h. Provide new typewritten schedules for all modified panelboards.
Portions of this Project involve installation in existing facilities and interfaces to
existing circuits, power systems, controls, and equipment:
a. Perform and document comprehensive and detailed field investigations of
existing conditions (circuits, power systems, controls, equipment, etc.)
before starting any Work. Determine all information necessary to
document, interface with, modify, upgrade, or replace existing circuits,
power systems, controls, and equipment.
b. Provide and document interface with, modifications to, upgrades, or
replacement of existing circuits, power systems, controls, and equipment.
Provide all trenching, forming, rebar, concrete, back filling, hard surface
removal and replacement, for all items associated with the Electrical Work and
installation:
a. As specified in the Contract Documents.
Defective work:
a. As specified in Document 00700.
Utility coordination: Coordinate with the electric and telephone utilities as
required by Section 16210.
B.
Existing system:
1.
The existing station pumps raw water from the Kaw Reservoir to a water
treatment plant in Stillwater, OK. The pump station currently has five pumps
powered and controlled from an existing electrical and control building. The
facility is controlled remotely via an existing leased line connection from
SCADA consoles at the treatment plant.
2.
Existing prefabricated electrical building containing the following equipment:
a. 4160V switchgear lineup with (5) RVAT pump starters.
b. 480V MCC and ancillary distribution equipment.
c. PCM control system.
d. Ancillary equipment.
3.
Three existing small pumps at 200HP and two existing large pumps at
1000HP.
4.
Existing instrument shed housing a portion of the process instruments.
5.
Existing yard infrastructure.
6.
Five existing pumps with instrumentation and ancillary equipment.
C.
New system:
1.
New prefabricated electrical building adjacent to existing building to contain at
minimum the following equipment:
a. New 4160V switchgear lineup (no automatic transfer).
1) Remote breaker operation panel and coordination between
switchgear supplier, generator supplier, and Instrumentation and
Controls Subcontractor to provide a complete and operable transfer
system.
b. Two new variable frequency drives for 1000HP pumps.
c. Two new lineups of 4160V interrupter switchgear acting as manual
transfer switches.
d. Battery charger and associated battery system.
e. New PCM enclosure with new PLC.
May 2014
16050-6
9408A10
f.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
D.
Low voltage distribution including:

1) Power panel.
2) Transformer.
3) Lighting panel.
g. Fire alarm control panel.
h. Communications panel for fiber termination.
New standby generator.
New pad mount distribution transformer.
New pump motors for Pump Nos. 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5.
New fiber network connection provided through the local utility Ponca City
Utility Authority (PCUA).
General demolition requirements:
a. Demolish existing electrical conduit and wiring associated with Pump Nos.
1, 2, 4, 4, and 5.
b. Demolish existing pump controls and annunciator on the front of the
existing PCM panel.
c. Demolish existing pole lights as indicated on the Drawings.
d. Demolish existing utility pull box as indicated on the Drawings.
New system shall interface with existing system as follows:
a. Provide new utility hand-hole as indicated on the Drawings. Field locate
exiting utility feed and locate hand-hole accordingly.
1) New handhole to include medium voltage terminations.
b. Provide new hand-hole at location of existing utility pullbox to gain access
to existing power conduits entering existing building.
c. New fiber connection will come into the new building and interface with
the new PCM panel as indicated on the Drawings. The new PCM panel
network will interface with the existing PCM panel as indicated on the
Drawings.
d. The existing RVAT starter controls for Pump Nos. 1, 2, and 3 will be
integrated with the new PLC as indicated on the Drawings. Existing RVAT
controls are indicated on the Drawings, but it shall be the responsibility of
the Contractor to field verify existing conditions and interconnect to the
existing RVAT starter in a manner that provides all aspects of control
detailed in Section 17101 and indicated on the Drawings.
e. The existing RVAT starters for Pump Nos. 4 and 5 are to be reused as
maintenance bypass starters. Provide control interlocking as indicated on
the drawings and as described in Section 17101. Existing RVAT controls
are indicated on the Drawings, but it shall be the responsibility of the
Contractor to field verify existing conditions and interconnect to the
existing RVAT starter in a manner that provides all aspects of control
detailed in Section 17101 and indicated on the Drawings.
Operating facility:
1.
2.
The Kaw Raw Water Pump Station is an operating facility. Portions of this
facility must remain fully functional throughout the entire construction period. In
consideration of this requirement, comply with the following guidelines:
a. All outages must be as defined in Section 01140. Adjust the construction
schedule to meet the requirements of the Owner. All changes in schedule
and any needs to reschedule are included in the Work.
May 2014
16050-7
9408A10
b.
3.
4.
1.05
As weather and water demand conditions dictate, re-adjust the

construction schedule to meet the demands placed upon Owner by its
users.
c. Coordinate the construction and power renovation, bear all costs, so that
all existing facilities can continue operation throughout construction.
According to individual circumstances and in compliance with the Drawings,
extend or replace conduit and cable connections from existing locations.
The standards of documentation, instrument tagging, cable and conductor
ferruling, terminal identification and labeling that apply to the new installation
apply equally to the existing installation which forms part of the modified
system. Provide new nameplates for existing equipment based on the
equipment tags indicated on the Drawings.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Furnish submittals as specified in Section 01330 and this Section.
B.
Refer to Section 01312 for Critical Submittals Review Meeting for critical path
equipment.
C.
General:
1.
Instruct all equipment suppliers of submittals and operation and maintenance
manuals of the requirements in this Section.
2.
Furnish the submittals required by each section in the Electrical Specifications.
3.
Adhere to the wiring numbering scheme specified in Section 16075 throughout
the Project:
a. Uniquely number each wire.
b. Wire numbers must appear on all Equipment Drawings.
4.
Use equipment and instrument tags, as indicated on the Drawings, for all
submittals.
D.
Seismic requirements:
1.
Provide electrical equipment with construction and anchorage to supporting
structures designed to resist site seismic loads as specified in Section 01610.
2.
For equipment installed in structures designated as seismic design category C,
D, E or F, prepare and submit the following:
a. Statement of seismic qualification, and special seismic certification:
1) Statement of seismic qualification: Provide manufacturers
statement that the equipment satisfies the seismic design
requirements of the building code indicated in Section 01410,
including the requirements of ASCE 7, Chapter 13.
2) Special seismic certification: Provide manufacturers certification
that the equipment, when subjected to shake table testing in
accordance with ICC-ES AC 156, meets the Post-Test Functional
Compliance Verification requirements of ICC-ES AC 156 for
Components with Ip = 1.5. Compliance shall include both
operability and containment of hazardous materials as appropriate to
the unit being tested.
b. Substantiating test data: With seismic qualification and special seismic
certification statements, submit results of testing in accordance with ICCES AC 156.
c. Anchoring design calculations and details:
May 2014
16050-8
9408A10
1)
3.
E.
Submit project-specific drawings and supporting calculations,

prepared and sealed by a professional engineer licensed in the state
where the Project is being constructed, and showing details for
anchoring electrical equipment to its supports and for anchoring
supports provided with the equipment to the structure. Prepare
calculations in accordance with the requirements of Section 01610.
Exemptions: A statement of seismic qualification and a special seismic
certification are not required for the following equipment:
a. Temporary or moveable equipment.
b. Equipment anchored to the structure and having a total weight of
20 pounds or less.
c. Distribution equipment anchored to the structure and having a total unit
weight of 5 pounds per linear foot, or less.
Submittal organization:
1.
First page:
a. Specification section reference.
b. Name and telephone number of individual who reviewed submittal before
delivery to Engineer.
c. Name and telephone number of individual who is primarily responsible for
the development of the submittal.
d. Place for Contractors review stamp and comments.
2.
Next pages:
a. Provide confirmation of specification compliance in a tabular form that
individually lists each specification section, paragraph, and subparagraphs and unequivocally states compliance with said requirement or
takes exception to the requirement and lists the reason for said exception
and offers alternative means for compliance.
b. Include a response in writing to each of the Engineers comments or
questions for submittal packages which are re-submitted:
1) In the order that the comments or questions were presented
throughout the submittal.
2) Referenced by index section and page number on which the
comment appeared.
3) Acceptable responses to Engineers comments are either:
a) Engineers comment or change is accepted and appropriate
changes are made.
b) Explain why comment is not accepted or requested change is
not made.
c) Explain how requirement will be satisfied in lieu of comment or
change requested by Engineer.
4) Any re-submittal, which does not contain responses to the Engineers
previous comments shall be returned for Revision and Re-submittal.
5) No further review by the Engineer will be performed until a response
for previous comments has been received.
3.
Remaining pages:
a. Actual submittal data:
1) Organize submittals in exactly the same order as the items are
referenced, listed, and/or organized in the specification section.
For submittals that cover multiple devices used in different areas
under the same specification section, the submittal for the individual
devices must list the area where the device is intended to be used.
May 2014
16050-9
9408A10
F.
Operation and maintenance manuals:

1.
2.
Furnish the Engineer with a complete set of written operation and maintenance
manuals 4 weeks before energization start-up and/or commissioning.
G.
Material and equipment schedules:

1.
Furnish a complete schedule and/or matrix of all materials, equipment,
apparatus, and luminaries that are proposed for use:
a. Include sizes, names of manufacturers, catalog numbers, and such other
information required to identify the items.
H.
Schedule of values:
1.
In addition to completing all items referred to in the schedule of values,
Section 01292, submit per unit material and labor costs used in developing the
final bid for the electrical system, for the express purpose of pricing and cost
justification for any proposed change orders. In addition to the items shown on
the schedule of values, provide per unit material and labor costs for conduit
and wire installation for specific types, sizes, and locations as indicated on the
Drawings and Conduit Schedule. It is the responsibility of the electrical
subcontractor to prove to the Engineers satisfaction that said per unit costs
were used in the development of the final Bid amount.
I.
Roof penetrations:
1.
Submit details of all portions of the electrical installation that penetrate the
roof. Include details showing support of the penetrating component, and the
sealing means to be utilized.
J.
Record Documents:
1.
Furnish as specified in Section 01770.
2.
Provide Record Documents of all Electrical Drawings.
3.
Record Drawing requirements:
a. Update Record Drawings weekly.
b. Record Drawings must be fully updated as a condition of the monthly
progress payments.
c. Submit Record Drawings upon completion of the Work for final review.
d. Clearly and neatly show all changes including the following:
1) All existing pipe, conduit, wire, instruments or other structures
encountered or uncovered during construction.
4.
Shop drawings:
a. Generate all drawings developed for this project utilizing AutoCAD by
Auto Desk Version 2004 or later:
1) Furnish on CD-ROM disks containing the following for each drawing:
a) Original CAD files
b) PDF version.
2) Provide hard copies on 11 inch by 17-inch plain bond paper.
b. Furnish written information prepared specifically for this Project using
Microsoft Word 2000 and printed on 8.5-inch by 11-inch plain bond paper:
1) Provide electronic copies of these documents on CD-ROM disks.
5.
Review and corrections:
a. Correct any record documents or other documents found to be
incomplete, not accurate, of poor quality, or containing errors.
b. Promptly correct and re-submit record documents returned for correction.
May 2014
16050-10
9408A10
1.06
K.
Test reports:
1.
2.
Additional requirements for acceptance test reports are specified in
Section 16950.
L.
Calculations:
1.
Where required by specific Electrical Specifications:
a. Because these calculations are being provided by a registered
professional engineer, they will be reviewed for form, format, and content
but will not be reviewed for accuracy and calculation means.
M.
Factory acceptance test:

1.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.07
1.08
Furnish all equipment listed by and bearing the label of UL or of an independent

testing laboratory acceptable to the Engineer and the Authority Having Jurisdiction.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION

A.
Shipping precautions:
1.
After completion of shop assembly and successful factory testing, pack all
equipment in protective crates, and enclose in heavy duty polyethylene
envelopes or secured sheeting to provide complete protection from damage,
dust, and moisture.
2.
Place dehumidifiers, when required, inside the polyethylene coverings.
3.
Skid-mount the equipment for final transport.
4.
Provide lifting rings for moving without removing protective covering.
5.
Display boxed weight on shipping tags together with instructions for unloading,
transporting, storing, and handling at the job site.
B.
Delivery and inspection:

1.
Deliver products in undamaged condition, in manufacturers original container
or packaging with identifying labels intact and legible. Include date of
manufacture on label.
C.
Special instructions:
1.
Securely attach special instructions for proper field handling, storage, and
installation to each piece of equipment before packaging and shipment.
PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS

A.
Site conditions:
1.
Provide an electrical, instrumentation and control system, including all
equipment, raceways and any other components required for a complete
installation that meets the environmental conditions for the Site as specified in
the General Requirements and below.
2.
Seismic load resistance:
a. Provide electrical equipment with construction and anchorage to
supporting structures designed to resist site seismic loads as specified in
Section 01610.
3.
Wind load resistance:
May 2014
16050-11
9408A10
a.
4.
5.
6.
Provide electrical equipment with construction and anchorage to

supporting structures designed to resist site wind loads as specified in
Section 01610.
Altitude, temperature and humidity:
a. As specified in Section 01610.
b. Provide all electrical components and equipment fully rated for continuous
operation at this altitude, with no additional derating factors applied.
c. Provide additional temperature conditioning equipment to maintain all
equipment in non-conditioned spaces subject to these ambient
temperatures, with a band of 10 degrees Fahrenheit above the minimum
operating temperature and 10 degrees Fahrenheit below maximum
operating temperature, as determined by the equipment manufacturers
guidelines:
1) Provide all power conduits wiring for these devices (e.g. heaters,
fans, etc.) whether indicated on the Drawings or not.
Site security:
a. Abide by all security and safety rules concerning the Work on the Site, as
specified in Section 01329.
Outdoor installations:
a. Provide electrical, instrumentation and control equipment suitable for
operation in the ambient conditions where the equipment is located.
b. Provide heating, cooling, and dehumidifying devices incorporated into and
included with electrical equipment, instrumentation and control panels to
maintain the enclosures within the rated environmental operating ranges
as specified in this Section for the equipment:
1) Provide all wiring necessary to power these devices.
B.
Provide enclosures for electrical, instrumentation and control equipment, regardless

of supplier or subcontractor furnishing the equipment, that meet the requirements
outlined in NEMA Standard 250 for the following types of enclosures:
1.
NEMA Type 1: Intended for indoor use, primarily to provide a degree of
protection from accidental contact with energized parts or equipment.
2.
NEMA Type 4: Intended for indoor or outdoor use, primarily to protect
equipment from exposure to windblown dust and rain, splashing or hose
directed water, ice formation and freezing.
3.
NEMA Type 4X: Made from corrosion resistant materials (fiberglass reinforced
plastic, 316 stainless steel or equal) and are intended for indoor or outdoor
use, primarily to protect equipment from exposure to windblown dust and rain,
splashing or hose directed water, ice formation and freezing, and corrosion.
4.
NEMA Type 12: Intended for indoor use, primarily to provide a degree of
protection from dust, falling dirt and dripping non-corrosive liquids.
5.
NEMA Type 6: Rated for submergence.
6.
NEMA Type 6P: Rated for prolonged submergence.
C.
Plant area Electrical Work requirements:

1.
Provide all Electrical Work in accordance with the following table, unless
otherwise specifically indicated on the Drawings:
May 2014
16050-12
9408A10
PLANT AREA
NEMA
ENCLOSURE
TYPE
EXPOSED
CONDUIT TYPE
ENVIRONMENT
W = WET
D = DAMP
C = CLEAN/DRY
X = CORROSIVE
H = HAZARDOUS
1, 12
GRC
GALV STL
4X - 316 SST
PCS
316 SST
Building Interior
(New and
Existing)
Exterior areas
and instrument
shed
2.
SUPPORT
MATERIALS
Modify exposed conduit runs as specified in Section 16130.
1.09
SEQUENCING (NOT USED)
1.10
SCHEDULING
A.
General:
1.
2.
Testing requirements are specified in Section 16950 and other sections.
3.
General scheduling requirements are specified in 01324B.
4.
Work restrictions and other scheduling requirements are specified in
Section 01140.
B.
Pre-submittal conference:
1.
Before producing any submittals, schedule a pre-submittal conference for the
purposes of reviewing the entire Project, equipment, control philosophy,
schedules, and submittal requirements.
2.
The Contractor, instrumentation and control subcontractor, electrical
subcontractor, all suppliers, and individual equipment manufacturers furnishing
major pieces of equipment must attend, including but not limited to:
a. Vendor control panels.
b. Switchgear.
c. Variable frequency drives.
d. Lighting.
e. Engine generators.
C.
Factory acceptance testing:

1.
Where factory acceptance testing is required for equipment covered by these
Specifications, notify the Engineer in writing when the equipment is completed
and ready for factory inspection and testing:
a. Indicate the desired dates for inspection and testing.
b. Schedule the FAT after approval of the FAT procedures submittal:
1) Submit a copy of the test procedures including all forms at least
21 days before any scheduled test date.
2) Notify the Engineer of the scheduled tests a minimum of 15 days
before the date of the test.
May 2014
16050-13
9408A10
1.11
WARRANTY
A.
1.12
Warrant the Electrical Work as specified in Document 01770:

1.
Provide additional warranty as specified in the individual Electrical
Specifications.
SYSTEM START-UP
A.
Replace or modify equipment, software, and materials that do not achieve design
requirements after installation in order to attain compliance with the design
requirements:
1.
Following replacement or modification, retest the system and perform
additional testing to place the complete system in satisfactory operation and
obtain compliance acceptance from the Engineer.
1.13
OWNERS INSTRUCTIONS (NOT USED)
1.14
COMMISSIONING (NOT USED)
1.15
MAINTENANCE
A.
Before Substantial Completion, perform all maintenance activities required by any

sections of the Specifications including any calibrations, final adjustments,
component replacements or other routine service required before placing equipment
or systems in service.
B.
Furnish all spare parts as required by other sections of the Specifications.
PART 2
2.01
PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Provide similar items of same manufacturer throughout the electrical and

instrumentation portion of the Project.
B.
Allowable manufacturers are specified in individual Electrical Specifications.
2.02
EXISTING PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
2.03
MATERIALS
A.
Furnish all materials under this Contract that are new, free from defects, and
standard products produced by manufacturers regularly engaged in the production
of these products and that bear all approvals and labels as required by the
Specifications.
B.
Provide materials complying with the applicable industrial standard as specified in

Document 00700.
C.
Stainless steel:
May 2014
16050-14
9408A10
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Where stainless steel is indicated or used for any portion of the Electrical
Work, provide a non-magnetic, corrosion-resistant alloy, ANSI Type 316, satin
finish.
Provide exposed screws of the same alloys.
Provide finished material free of any burrs or sharp edges.
Use only stainless steel hardware, when chemically compatible, in all areas
that are or could be in contact with corrosive chemicals.
Use stainless steel hardware, when chemically compatible, in all chemical
areas or areas requiring NEMA Type 4X construction.
2.04
MANUFACTURED UNITS (NOT USED)
2.05
EQUIPMENT (NOT USED)
2.06
COMPONENTS (NOT USED)
2.07
ACCESSORIES (NOT USED)
2.08
MIXES (NOT USED)
2.09
FABRICATION (NOT USED)
2.10
FINISHES (NOT USED)
2.11
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A.
Provide all equipment that is new, free from defects, and standard products
produced by manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of these products.
B.
Arrange with all manufacturers of the electrical equipment, to allow the Owner and
Engineer to inspect and witness the testing of the equipment at the site of
fabrication:
1.
Testing includes the cabinets, special control systems, power equipment, and
other pertinent systems and devices.
C.
Factory testing is specified in the individual sections of the Electrical Specifications.
PART 3
3.01
EXECUTION
EXAMINATION
A.
The electrical subcontractor is required to visit the site to examine the premises
completely before bidding. It is the electrical subcontractor's responsibility to be fully
familiar with the existing conditions and local requirements and regulations.
B.
Review the site conditions and examine all shop drawings for the various items of
equipment in order to determine exact routing and final terminations for all wiring
and cables.
C.
Provide a complete electrical system:

1.
Install all extra conduits, cables, and interfaces as may be necessary to
provide a complete and operating electrical, PCIS, and HVAC system.
May 2014
16050-15
9408A10
3.02
PREPARATION (NOT USED)
3.03
INSTALLATION
A.
Equipment locations shown on Electrical Drawings may change due to variations in

equipment size or minor changes made by others during construction:
1.
Verify all dimensions indicated on the Drawings:
a. Actual field conditions govern all final installed locations, distances, and
levels.
2.
Review all Contract Documents and approved equipment shop drawings and
coordinate Work as necessary to adjust to all conditions that arise due to such
changes.
3.
Make minor changes in location of equipment before rough in, as directed by
the Owner or Engineer.
B.
Install the equipment in accordance with the accepted installation instructions and
anchorage details to meet the seismic and wind load requirements at the Project
site.
C.
Cutting and patching:

1.
Perform all cutting, patching, channeling, core drilling, and fitting required for
the Electrical Work, except as otherwise directed:
a. Secure the permission of the Engineer before performing any operation
likely to affect the strength of a structural member such as drilling, cutting
or piercing:
1) Before cutting, channeling, or core drilling any surface, ensure that
no penetration of any other systems will be made:
a) Verify that area is clear and free of conduits, cables, piping,
ductwork, post-tensioning cables, etc.
b) Use tone-locate system or X-ray to ensure that area is clear of
obstructions.
b. Review the complete Drawing set to ensure that there are no conflicts or
coordination problems before cutting, channeling, or core drilling any
surface.
2.
Perform all patching to the same quality and appearance as the original work.
Employ the proper tradesmen to secure the desired results. Seal around all
conduits, wires, and cables penetrating walls, ceilings, and floors in all
locations with a fire stop material, typically:
a. 3M
CP 25WB+ Caulk.
b. 3M
Fire Barrier Putty.
3.
Seal around conduit penetrations of below grade walls with a waterproof, nonshrink, non-metallic grout, unless otherwise indicated on the typical installation
details:
a. Use the installation details indicated on the Drawings as a guide for
acceptable sealing methods.
D.
Install all conduits and equipment in such a manner as to avoid all obstructions and
to preserve headroom and keep openings and passageways clear:
1.
Install all conduits and equipment in accordance with working space
requirements as outlined in the NEC.
May 2014
16050-16
9408A10
a.
2.
3.
4.
This includes any panel, disconnect switch or other equipment that can be
energized while open exposing live parts regardless of whether it is likely
to require examination or has serviceable parts.
Where the Drawings do not show dimensions for locating equipment, install
equipment in the approximate locations indicated on the Drawings.
a. Adjust equipment locations as necessary to avoid any obstruction or
interferences.
Where an obstruction interferes with equipment operation or safe access,
relocate the equipment.
Where the Drawings do not indicate the exact mounting and/or supporting
method to be used, use materials and methods similar to the mounting details
indicated on the Drawings.
E.
Earthwork and concrete:

1.
Install all trenching, shoring, concrete, backfilling, grading and resurfacing
associated with the Electrical Work:
a. Requirements as specified in the Contract Documents.
F.
Roof penetrations:
1.
Seal conduit penetrations in accordance with roofing manufacturers
instructions.
G.
Terminations:
1.
Provide and terminate all conductors required to interconnect power, controls,
instruments, panels, and all other equipment.
H.
Miscellaneous installation requirements:

1.
In case of interference between electrical equipment indicated on the
Drawings and the other equipment, notify the Engineer as specified in
Document 00700.
2.
Location of manholes and pullboxes indicated on the Drawings are
approximate. Coordinate exact location of manholes and pullboxes with
Mechanical and Civil Work.
3.
Provide additional manholes or pullboxes to those shown where they are
required to make a workable installation.
4.
Circuits of different service voltage:
a. Voltage and service levels:
1) Medium voltage: greater than 1.0 kV.
2) Low voltage: 120 V to 480 V.
3) Instrumentation: Less than 50 VDC.
b. Install medium voltage circuits in separate raceways and junction boxes.
c. In handholes, install all cables operating at less than 50 VDC in PVC
coated flexible metallic conduit, with corrosion resistant fittings.
I.
Labeling:
1.
Provide all nameplates and labels as specified in Sections 16075 and Section
16305.
J.
Equipment tie-downs:
1.
Anchor all instruments, control panels, and equipment by methods that comply
with seismic and wind bracing criteria, which apply to the Site.
May 2014
16050-17
9408A10
2.
All control panels, VCPs, LCPs, PCMs, etc., must be permanently mounted
and tied down to structures in accordance with the Project seismic criteria.
3.04
ERECTION, INSTALLATION, APPLICATION, CONSTRUCTION (NOT USED)
3.05
REPAIR/RESTORATION (NOT USED)
3.06
RE-INSTALLATION (NOT USED)
3.07
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A.
Inspection:
1.
Allow for inspection of electrical system installation as specified in Section
01450.
2.
Provide any assistance necessary to support inspection activities.
3.
Engineer inspections may include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Inspect equipment and materials for physical damage.
b. Inspect installation for compliance with the Drawings and Specifications.
c. Inspect installation for obstructions and adequate clearances around
equipment.
d. Inspect equipment installation for proper leveling, alignment, anchorage,
and assembly.
e. Inspect equipment nameplate data to verify compliance with design
requirements.
f. Inspect raceway installation for quality workmanship and adequate
support.
g. Inspect cable terminations.
h. Schedule structural engineer to inspect all mounting of electrical devices
and all penetration and connections to structures.
4.
Inspection activities conducted during construction do not satisfy inspection or
testing requirements specified in Section 16950.
B.
Field testing:
1.
Notify the Engineer when the Electrical Work is ready for field acceptance
testing.
2.
Perform the acceptance tests as specified in Section 16950.
3.
Record results of the required tests along with the date of test:
a. Use conduit identification numbers to indicate portion of circuit tested.
C.
Workmanship:
1.
Leave wiring in panels, manholes, boxes, and other locations neat, clean, and
organized:
a. Neatly coil and label spare wiring lengths.
b. Shorten, re-terminate, and re-label excessive used as well as spare wire
and cable lengths, as determined by the Engineer.
3.08
ADJUSTING (NOT USED)
3.09
CLEANING
A.
May 2014
16050-18
9408A10
3.10
B.
Remove all foreign material and restore all damaged finishes to the satisfaction of
the Engineer and Owner.
C.
Clean and vacuum all enclosures to remove all metal filings, surplus insulation and
any visible dirt, dust or other matter before energization of the equipment or system
start-up:
1.
Use of compressors or air blowers for cleaning is not acceptable.
D.
Clean and re-lamp all new and existing luminaires that were used in the areas
affected by the construction, and return all used lamps to the Owner.
E.
As specified in other sections of the Contract Documents.
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

A.
3.11
3.12
Furnish all personnel and equipment necessary to conduct the demonstration and
training requirements as specified in the individual sections.
PROTECTION
A.
Protect all Work from damage or degradation until Substantial Completion.
B.
Maintain all surfaces to be painted in a clean and smooth condition.
SCHEDULES (NOT USED)

END OF SECTION
May 2014
16050-19
9408A10
SECTION 16060
GROUNDING AND BONDING
PART 1
1.01
1.02
1.03
GENERAL
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes:
1.
Grounding electrodes.
2.
Grounding electrode conductors.
3.
Equipment grounding conductors.
4.
Main bonding jumper.
5.
Ground connections.
6.
General requirements for grounding.
B.
Related sections:
1.
2.
3.
a. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures.
b. Section 16060 - Common Work Results for Electrical.
c. Section 16950 - Field Electrical Acceptance Tests.
REFERENCES
A.
B.
ASTM International (ASTM):

1.
B 3 - Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire.
2.
B 8 - Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors,
Hard, Medium-Hard, or Soft.
C.
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE):

1.
81 - IEEE Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance, and
Earth Surface Potentials of a Grounding System.
D.
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):

1.
467 - Ground and Bonding Equipment.
DEFINITIONS
A.
May 2014
16060-1
9408A10
1.04
1.05
1.06
1.07
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
Ground equipment and raceway systems so that the completed installation

conforms to all applicable code requirements.
B.
Provide a complete electrical grounding system as indicated on the Drawings and

as specified including but not limited to:
1.
2.
Bonding jumpers.
3.
Ground connections.
C.
Provide bonding jumpers and wire, grounding bushings, clamps and appurtenances
required for complete grounding system to bond equipment and raceways to
equipment grounding conductors.
D.
The ground system resistance (electrode to ground) of the completed installation,

as determined by tests specified in Section 16950, shall be:
1.
5 ohms or less for industrial systems.
2.
1 ohm or less for electrical buildings.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Furnish submittals as specified in Sections 01330 and 16060.
B.
Product data:
1.
Catalog cut sheets.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
All grounding components and materials shall be UL listed and labeled.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A.
1.08
PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS (NOT USED)
1.09
1.10
SCHEDULING (NOT USED)
1.11
WARRANTY
A.
1.12
SYSTEM START-UP
A.
1.13
May 2014
16060-2
9408A10
1.14
1.15
MAINTENANCE (NOT USED)
PART 2
2.01
PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Irreversible compression connectors: One of the following or equal:

1.
FCI Burndy.
2.
Thomas & Betts.
B.
Ground rods: One of the following or equal:

1.
Erico.
2.
Harger.
3.
Conex.
C.
Ground cable: One of the following or equal:

1.
Nehring.
2.
Harger.
3.
Southwire.
D.
Precast ground well boxes: One of the following or equal:

1.
Brooks Products, 3-RT Valve Box.
2.
Christy Concrete Products, G12 Valve Box.
2.02
2.03
MATERIALS
A.
Ground rod:
1.
Minimum: 3/4-inch diameter, 10 feet long.
2.
Uniform 10 mil covering of electrolytic copper metallically bonded to a rigid
steel core:
a. The copper-to-steel bond shall be corrosion resistant.
3.
In accordance with UL 467.
4.
Sectional type joined by threaded copper alloy couplings.
5.
Fit the top of the rod with a threaded coupling and steel-driving stud.
B.
Ground cable:
1.
Requirements:
a. Soft drawn (annealed).
b. Concentric lay, coarse stranded in accordance with ASTM B 8.
c. Bare copper in accordance with ASTM B 3.
2.
Minimum size is 4/0 unless otherwise noted, but not less than required by the
NEC.
C.
Irreversible compression connectors:

1.
Manufactured of high copper alloy specifically for the particular grounding
application.
2.
Suitable for direct burial in earth and concrete.
May 2014
16060-3
9408A10
3.
Identifying compression die number inscription to be impressed on

compression fitting.
D.
Equipment grounding conductors:

1.
Conductors shall be the same type and insulation as the load circuit
conductors:
a. Use 600-volt insulation for the equipment grounding conductors for
medium voltage systems.
2.
Minimum size in accordance with the NEC.
E.
Grounding electrode conductors:

1.
F.
Main bonding jumpers and bonding jumpers:

1.
2.04
2.05
2.06
2.07
ACCESSORIES
A.
Precast ground well boxes:

1.
Minimum 10 inch interior diameter.
2.
Traffic-rated cast iron cover.
3.
Permanent GROUND marking on cover.
2.08
MIXES (NOT USED)
2.09
2.10
FINISHES (NOT USED)
2.11
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL (NOT USED)
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION (NOT USED)
3.02
3.03
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
Provide a separate, green insulated, grounding conductor in each raceway

independent of raceway material:
1.
Multi-conductor power and control cables shall include an integral green
insulated grounding conductor.
May 2014
16060-4
9408A10
2.
Provide a separate grounding conductor in each individual raceway for parallel

feeders.
C.
Provide a separate grounding conductor for each motor and connect at motor
terminal box. Do not use bolts securing motor box to frame or cover for grounding
connectors:
1.
When grounding motors driven by variable frequency drives (VFD) comply with
the requirements of the VFD manufacturer.
D.
Provide a grounding type bushing with lug for connection of grounding conductor for
conduits that originate from each motor control center section, switchboard, or
panelboard:
1.
Individually bond these raceways to the ground bus in the equipment.
E.
Provide grounding type bushings with lugs for connection of grounding conductor at
both ends of metallic conduit runs. Bond ground bushings to the grounding system.
F.
Provide a green insulated wire-grounding jumper from the ground screw to a box
grounding screw and, for grounding type devices, to equipment grounding
conductor.
G.
Interconnect the secondary switchgear, switchboard, or panelboard neutral bus to

the ground bus in the secondary switchgear, switchboard, or panelboard
compartment, only at service entrance point or after a transformer.
H.
Duct bank ground system:

1.
Provide a bare copper grounding conductor the entire length of each duct
bank, embedded in the concrete of the duct bank as indicated on the Drawings
and specified in the Specifications.
2.
Bond duct bank ground conductors together where duct banks join, merge,
intersect, or split.
I.
Ground connections:
1.
All connections to the ground grid system, the duct bank grounding system,
equipment, ground rods, etc., shall be made using compression type
grounding connectors as indicated on the Drawings, UL listed, and labeled for
the application.
2.
Make ground connections in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
3.
Do not conceal or cover any ground connections until the Engineer or
authorized representative has established and provided written confirmation
that every grounding connection is as indicated on the Drawings and specified
in the Specifications.
J.
Grounding electrode system:

1.
Ground ring:
a. Provide all trenching and materials necessary to install the ground ring as
b. Ground ring conductor shall be in direct contact with the earth, or where
embedded, concrete, of the size as indicated on the Drawings.
c. Minimum burial depth 36 inches or as indicated on the Drawings.
d. Re-compact disturbed soils to original density in 6-inch lifts.
2.
Ground rods:
a. Locations as indicated on the Drawings.
May 2014
16060-5
9408A10
b.
c.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Length of rods forming an individual ground array shall be equal in length.

Drive ground rods and install grounding conductors before construction of
concrete slabs and duct banks.
d. Pre-crimp all ground rods, as recommended by the manufacturer, before
crimping connector to ground rod.
Metal underground water pipe:
a. Bond metal underground domestic water pipe to grounding electrode
system.
Metal frame of building or structure:
a. Bond metal frame of building or structure to grounding electrode system.
Extend grounding conductors through concrete to accessible points for
grounding equipment and electrical enclosures.
Install grounding system at each structure where switchgear, motor control
centers, switchboards, panelboards, panels, or other electrical equipment are
installed.
K.
Shield grounding:
1.
Shielded instrumentation cable shall have its shield grounded at one end only
unless shop drawings indicate otherwise:
a. The grounding point shall be at the control panel or at the power source
end of the signal carried by the cable.
2.
Terminate the shield drain wire on a dedicated terminal block.
3.
Use manufacturers terminal block jumpers to interconnect ground terminals.
4.
Connection to the panel main ground bus shall be via a green No. 12
conductor to the main ground bus for the panel.
L.
Where indicated on the Drawings, install ground rods in precast ground wells.
3.04
3.05
3.06
3.07
3.08
A.
B.
Measure grounding electrode system resistance to ground in accordance with

IEEE 81.
ADJUSTING
A.
Under the direction of the Engineer, add additional parallel connected ground rods
and/or deeper driven rods until the ground resistance measurement meets the
specified resistance requirements:
1.
Use of salts, water, or compounds to attain the specified ground resistance is
not acceptable.
May 2014
16060-6
9408A10
3.09
CLEANING (NOT USED)
3.10
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING (NOT USED)
3.11
PROTECTION
A.
3.12

END OF SECTION
May 2014
16060-7
9408A10
SECTION 16070
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
PART 1
1.01
1.02
1.03
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes:
1.
Mounting and supporting electrical equipment and components.
B.
Related sections:
1.
2.
3.
b. Section 01410 - Regulatory Requirements.
c. Section 05190 - Mechanical Anchoring And Fastening To Concrete And
Masonry.
d. Section 16070 - Common Work Results for Electrical.
REFERENCES
A.
B.

1.
A 123 - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron
and Steel Products.
2.
A 153 - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware.
3.
A 240 Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless
Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General
Applications.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.04
GENERAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
Design requirements:
1.
Conform to the requirements of the Building Code as specified in
Section 01410.
2.
Demonstrate the following using generally accepted engineering methods:
May 2014
16070-1
9408A10
a.
3.
B.
1.05
That the anchors to the structure are adequate to resist the loads
generated in accordance with the Building Code and equipment
requirements.
b. That the required load capacity of the anchors can be fully developed in
the structural materials to which they are attached.
Design loading and anchoring requirements:
a. As indicated in the Building Code unless otherwise specified.
b. Seismic loading requirements:
1) Freestanding or wall-hung equipment shall be anchored in place by
methods that will satisfy the requirements for the seismic design
c. Wind loading requirements:
1) All exterior freestanding equipment shall be anchored in place by
methods that will satisfy the requirements for wind design specified in
Section 16070.
d. Minimum safety factor against overturning: 1.5.
e. The foundation and structures to which hangers and supports are
attached shall be capable of withstanding all anchor loads.
Performance requirements:
1.
Hangers and supports individually and as a system shall resist all weights and
code-required forces without deflections and deformations that would damage
the supporting elements, the equipment supported, or the surrounding
construction.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Product data:
1.
Supports:
a. Materials.
b. Geometry.
c. Manufacturer.
2.
Hardware:
a. Materials.
b. Manufacturer.
C.
Shop drawings:
1.
Complete dimensioned and scalable shop drawings of all supporting
structures, trapezes, wall supports, etc.
2.
Complete anchoring details for equipment, lighting and raceway, supporting
structures, trapezes, wall supports for all equipment in excess of 200 pounds,
and all freestanding supports:
a. Stamped by a professional engineer licensed in the state where the
Project is being constructed.
b. Said submittals, by virtue of the fact that they bear the stamp of a
registered engineer, will be reviewed for general consistency with the
requirements specified in the Contract Documents, but not for context,
accuracy, or method of calculation.
3.
Include data on attachment hardware and construction methods that will
satisfy the design loading and anchoring criteria.
May 2014
16070-2
9408A10
D.
1.06
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.07

A.
1.08
Installation instructions:
1.
Furnish anchorage instructions and requirements based on the seismic and
wind conditions of the Site:
a. Stamped by a professional engineer licensed in the state where the

A.
1.09
1.10
1.11
WARRANTY
A.
1.12
SYSTEM STARTUP
A.
1.13
OWNER'S INSTRUCTIONS (NOT USED)
1.14
1.15
PART 2
2.01
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.02
PRODUCTS
One of the following or equal:

1.
Thomas & Betts.
2.
Power-Strut.
3.
Unistrut.
4.
Cooper B-Line.
5.
Robroy.
6.
Aickinstrut.
May 2014
16070-3
9408A10
2.03
MATERIALS
A.
Use materials appropriate for the area as specified in Section 16070.
B.
Hot dip galvanized steel:

1.
Supports:
a. In accordance with ASTM A 123 or A 153.
b. Minimum zinc coating thickness of 2.5 mils.
2.
Hardware:
a. Electro-galvanized.
b. In accordance with ASTM A 153.
C.
Stainless steel:
1.
Supports:
a. In accordance with ASTM A 240.
b. ANSI Type 316 material.
2.
Hardware:
a. ANSI Type 316 material.
2.04
2.05
2.06
2.07
ACCESSORIES
A.
Anchor bolts:
1.
2.08
MIXES (NOT USED)
2.09
2.10
FINISHES
A.
2.11
Paint and finish all supporting structures as specified in Section 09960.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
3.02
3.03
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
Mount all raceways, cabinets, boxes, fixtures, instruments, and devices on

Contractor-fabricated racks unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
May 2014
16070-4
9408A10
1.
Provide the necessary sway bracing to keep trapeze type structures from
swaying.
C.
Brace and anchor freestanding equipment supports using methods that provide
structural support based on the seismic loads and wind loads:
1.
Lateral deflection at top of supports not to exceed support height divided by
240 unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
D.
Provide fabricated steel support pedestals for wall mounted panels that weigh more
than 200 pounds:
1.
Fabricate pedestals out of welded angle, tube sections, or preformed channel.
2.
If the supported equipment is a panel or cabinet, match the supported
equipment in physical appearance and dimensions.
3.
Provide auxiliary floor supports for transformers hung from stud walls and
weighing more than 200 pounds.
4.
Mount all equipment, cabinets, boxes, instruments, and devices in damp or
wet locations on minimum of 7/8-inch preformed mounting channel.
a. Mount channel vertically along the length of the device so that water or
moisture may run freely behind the device.
E.
Corrosion protection:
1.
Isolate dissimilar metals, except where required for electrical continuity.
a. Use neoprene washers, 9-mil polyethylene tape, or gaskets for isolation.
F.
Raceway:
1.
Furnish all conduit racks and trapeze structures needed to support the
raceway from the structure.
a. Group conduits and position on racks to minimize crossovers.
b. Provide the necessary bracing to keep trapeze type structures from
swaying under loads from cable installation, seismic forces, or wind
forces.
G.
Anchoring methods:
1.
Solid concrete: Anchor bolts, anchor rods or post-installed anchors as
2.
Metal surfaces: Machine screws or bolts.
3.
Hollow masonry units: Post-installed anchors as specified in Section 05190.
H.
Re-coat all scratches, cuts, and drilled holes in galvanized surfaces with CRC
"Zinc-It" or similar product.
I.
Re-coat all drilled holes and cut surfaces on PVC-coated materials.
3.04
3.05
3.06
3.07

A.
May 2014
16070-5
9408A10
3.08
3.09
CLEANING (NOT USED)
3.10
3.11
PROTECTION
A.
3.12

END OF SECTION
May 2014
16070-6
9408A10
SECTION 16075
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART 1
1.01
1.02
1.03
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes:
1.
Identifying electrical, instrumentation, and process equipment and
components.
2.
Material, manufacturing and installation requirements for identification devices.
B.
Related sections:
1.
2.
3.
c. Section 16130 - Conduits.
d. Section 16990 - Conduit Schedule.
REFERENCES
A.
B.
Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA).
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.04
GENERAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
Nameplates:
1.
Provide a nameplate for each piece of electrical equipment and devices,
control panel and control panel components.
2.
Provide all nameplates of identical style, color, and material throughout the
facility.
3.
Device nameplates information:
a. Designations as indicated on the Drawings and identified on the Process
and Instrumentation Drawings.
May 2014
16075-1
9408A10
B.
Wire numbers:
1.
Coordinate the wire numbering system with all vendors of equipment so that
every field wire has a unique number associated with it for the entire system:
a. Wire numbers shall correspond to the wire numbers on the control
drawings or the panel and circuit numbers for receptacles and lighting.
b. Wire numbers shall correspond to the terminal block number to which they
are attached in the control panel.
c. Internal panel wires on a common terminal shall have the same wire
number.
d. Multi-conductor cables shall be assigned a cable number that shall be
attached to the cable at intermediate pull boxes and stub-up locations
beneath freestanding equipment. All multi-conductor and instrumentation
cables shall be identified at pull points as described above:
1) Label armored multi-conductor cable using the conduit number as
indicated on the Drawings, following the requirements for conduit
markers in Section 16130.
2.
Provide the following wiring numbering schemes throughout the project for
field wires between process control module, (PCM), vendor control panels,
(VCP), motor control centers, (MCC), field starters, field instruments, etc.
OR
Where:
ORIGIN LOC.
ORIGIN TERM.
DEST. LOC.
DEST. TERM.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
= Designation for originating panel or device

= Terminal designation at originating panel or device
= Designation for destination panel or device
= Terminal designation at destination panel or device or PLC
I/O address at destination panel
Identify equipment and field instruments as the origin.

PCMs are always identified as the destination.
Location is the panel designation for VCP, LCP, or PCM. For connections
to MCCs, location is the specific starter tag and loop number. Location is
the tag and loop number for motor starters, field instruments and
equipment. Any hyphen in the panel designation or tag and loop number
shall be omitted.
Terminal designation is the actual number on the terminal block where the
conductor terminates at field devices and vendor control panels. For multiconductor cables, all terminal numbers shall be shown, separated by
commas.
Terminal designations at motor leads shall be the motor manufacturers
standard terminal designation (e.g. T1, T2, T3, etc.).
Terminal designations at PCMs where the field conductor connects to field
terminal blocks for a PLC input or output shall be the PLC address (Note:
the following PLC I/O numbering scheme is typical for Allen-Bradley, the
May 2014
16075-2
9408A10
3.
numbering scheme should be modified to match that of the actual PLC

manufacturer used for the project):
1) Discrete Point:
W:X:Y/Z
Analog Point:
W:X:Y.Z
Where:
W = I for input, O for output
X = PLC number (1, 2, 3)
Y = Slot number (01, 02, 03)
Z = Terminal number (00, 01, 02) for a discrete point or a word
number for an analog point (1, 2, 3)
g. Terminal designations at PCMs where the conductor does not connect to
a PLC I/O point shall be the terminal number with a C prefix (e.g.
C0010). For common power after a fuse or neutrals after a switch, the
subsequent points shall have and capital letter suffix starting with A (e.g.
C0010A).
Case 1: Vendor control panel (VCP) to process control module (PCM):
Field wire number/label: A-B/C-D
A = Vendor control panel number without hyphen (VCP#)
B = Terminal number within VCP (manufacturers or vendors standard
terminal number)
C = Process control module number without hyphen (PCM#)
D = Either the PLC address if the field terminal is connected directly to a PLC
input or output point or the terminal number with a C prefix if not
connected directly to a PLC I/O point (C0010)
Examples:
4.
Case 2: Field instrument to process control module (PCM):

Field wire number/label: E-F/C-D
C = Process control module number without hyphen (PCM#)
E = Field mounted instrument tag and loop numbers without hyphen (EDV#)
F = Manufacturers standard terminal number within instrument. Use both
terminal numbers for analog points separated by a comma
Examples:
5.
VCP#-10/PCM#-I:1:01/01
VCP#-10/PCM#-O:1:10/07
VCP#-10/PCM#-C0100
TIT#-2,3/PCM#-I:1:01.1
TSH#-1/PCM#-I:2:01/00
Case 3: Motor control center (MCC) to process control module (PCM):

Field wire number/label: G-B/C-D
B = Terminal number within Motor Control Center (manufacturers or vendors
standard terminal number)
C = Process control module without hyphen (PCM#)
G = Actual starter designation in the motor control center without hyphen
(MMS#)
May 2014
16075-3
9408A10
Examples:
6.
Case 4: Motor control center (MCC) to vendor control panel (VCP):

Field wire number/label: G-B/A-B
A = Vendor control panel number without hyphen (VCP#)
B = Terminal number within motor control center or vendor control panel
(manufacturers or vendors standard terminal number)
(MMS#)
Example:
7.
MMS#-10/PCM#-I:1:01/01
MMS#-10/PCM#-O:2:10/07
MMS#-10/PCM#-C0010
Identify all spare conductors as required for other field wires with an S prefix:
Example:
1.05
PMP-#-T3/MMS#-T3
Case 6: Remote or separately mounted starter or variable frequency drive

(VFD) to process control module (PCM):
Field wire number/label: J-B/C-D
B = Terminal number within starter or variable frequency drive
(manufacturers standard terminal number)
C = Process control module number without hyphen (VCP#)
J = Starter or variable frequency drive tag and loop number without hyphen
(MMS#)
Examples:
9.
MMS#-X2/VCP#-10
Case 5: Motor leads to a motor control center (MCC):

Field wire number/label: H-I/G-B
B = Terminal number within motor control center (manufacturers standard
terminal number)
(MMS#)
H = Equipment tag and loop number without hyphen (PMP#)
I = Motor manufacturers standard motor lead identification (e.g. T1, T2, T3,
etc.)
Example:
8.
MMS#-10/PCM#-I:1:01/01
MMS#-10/PCM#-O:1:10/07
MMS#-10/PCM#-C0100
S MMS#-10/PCM#-C011
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Product data:
May 2014
16075-4
9408A10
1.
2.
3.
C.
Nameplates:
a. Color.
b. Size:
1) Outside dimensions.
2) Lettering.
c. Material.
d. Mounting means.
Nameplate schedule:
a. Show exact wording for each nameplate.
b. Include nameplate and letter sizes.
Wire numbers:
a. Manufacturers catalog data for wire labels and label printer.
Record documents:
1.
Update the conduit schedule to reflect the exact quantity of wire numbers
including spares and destination points for all wires.
1.06
QUALITY ASSURANCE (NOT USED)
1.07

A.
1.08
PROJECT SITE CONDITIONS (NOT USED)
1.09
1.10
1.11
WARRANTY
A.
1.12
SYSTEM START-UP
A.
1.13
1.14
1.15
PART 2
2.01
PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Nameplates and signs:

1.
a. Brady.
b. Seton.
May 2014
16075-5
9408A10
B.
Conductor and cable markers:

1.
Heat-shrinkable tubing:
a. One of the following or equal:
1) Raychem.
2) Brady.
3) Thomas & Betts.
4) Kroy.
2.
Marker printer:
a. The following or equal:
1) Brady.
C.
Conduit and raceway markers:

1.
a. Almetek: Mini Tags.
b. Lapp Group: Maxi System.
D.
Medium voltage raceway voltage labels:

1.
a. Brady.
b. Seton.
2.02
2.03
MATERIALS
A.
Nameplates:
1.
Fabricated from white-center and red face or black-center, white face
laminated plastic engraving stock:
a. 3/32-inch thick material.
b. Two-ply.
c. With chamfered edges.
d. Block style engraved characters of adequate size to be read easily from a
distance of 6 feet:
1) No characters smaller than 1/8-inch in height.
B.
Signs:
1.
Automatic equipment and high voltage signs:
a. Suitable for exterior use.
b. In accordance with OSHA regulations.
C.

1.
Machine printed black characters on white tubing.
2.
Ten point type or larger.
D.
Conduit and raceway markers:

1.
Non-metallic:
a. UV resistant holder and letters
b. Black letters on yellow background.
c. Minimum letter height: 1/2-inch.
d. Adhesive labels are not acceptable.
E.
Medium voltage circuit raceway labels:

1.
Vinyl plastic.
May 2014
16075-6
9408A10
2.
Minimum 1-inch high letters.
2.04
2.05
2.06
2.07
2.08
MIXES (NOT USED)
2.09
2.10
FINISHES (NOT USED)
2.11

A.
PART 3
Nameplates:
1.
Provide all nameplates for control panel operator devices (e.g. pushbuttons,
selector switches, pilot lights, etc.):
a. Same material and same color and appearance as the device
nameplates, in order to achieve an aesthetically consistent and
coordinated system.
EXECUTION
3.01
3.02
3.03
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
Nameplates:
1.
Attach nameplates to equipment with rivets, bolts or sheet metal screws,
approved waterproof epoxy-based cement or install in metal holders welded to
the equipment.
2.
On NEMA Type 4, NEMA Type 4X, or NEMA Type 7 enclosures, use epoxybased cement to attach nameplates.
3.
Nameplates shall be aligned and level or plumb to within 1/64 inch over the
entire length:
a. Misaligned or crooked nameplates shall be remounted, or provide new
enclosures at the discretion of the Engineer.
C.

1.
Apply all conductor and cable markers before termination.
2.
Heat-shrinkable tubing:
a. Tubing shall be shrunk using a heat gun that produces low temperature
heated air.
b. Tubing shall be tight on the wire after it has been heated.
May 2014
16075-7
9408A10
c.
d.
Characters shall face the open panel and shall read from left to right or
top to bottom.
Marker shall start within 1/32 inch of the end of the stripped insulation
point.
D.
Conduit markers:
1.
Furnish and install conduit markers for every conduit in the electrical system
that is identified in the conduit schedule or part of the process system:
a. Conduit markings shall match the conduit schedule; as specified in
Section 16990.
2.
Mark conduits at the following locations:
a. Each end of conduits that are greater than 10 feet in length.
b. Where the conduit penetrates a wall or structure.
c. Where the conduit emerges from the ground, slab, etc.
d. The middle of conduits that are 10 feet or less in length.
3.
Mark conduits after the conduits have been fully painted.
4.
Position conduit markers so that they are easily read from the floor.
5.
Attach non-metallic conduit markers with nylon cable ties:
a. Provide ultraviolet resistant cable ties for conduit markers exposed to
direct sunlight.
6.
Mark conduits before construction review by Engineer for punch list purposes.
7.
Label intrinsically safe conduits in accordance with the requirements of the
NEC.
E.
Medium voltage raceway labels:

1.
Apply at 50 foot intervals stating the voltage level contained within the
raceway.
F.
Signs and labeling:

1.
Furnish and install permanent warning signs at mechanical equipment that
may be started automatically or from remote locations:
a. Fasten warning signs with round head stainless steel screws or bolts.
b. Locate and mount in a manner to be clearly legible to operations
personnel.
2.
Furnish and install permanent and conspicuous warning signs on equipment
(front and back), doorways to equipment rooms, pull boxes, manholes, etc
where the voltage exceeds 600 volts.
3.
Furnish and install warning signs on equipment that has more than one source
of power.
a. Warning signs to identify every panel and circuit number of the
disconnecting means of all external power sources.
4.
Place warning signs on equipment that has 120 VAC control voltage source
used for interlocking.
a. Identify panel and circuit number or conductor tag for control voltage
source disconnecting means.
May 2014
16075-8
9408A10
3.04
3.05
3.06
3.07

A.
Replace any nameplates, signs, conductor markers, cable markers or raceway

labels that in the sole opinion of the Engineer do not meet the Engineers aesthetic
requirements.
3.08
3.09
CLEANING (NOT USED)
3.10
3.11
PROTECTION (NOT USED)
3.12

END OF SECTION
May 2014
16075-9
9408A10
SECTION 16123
600 VOLT OR LESS WIRES AND CABLES
PART 1
1.01
1.02
GENERAL
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes:
1.
600 volt class wire and cable.
2.
Instrumentation class wire and cable.
3.
Network cable.
4.
Fire alarm wire and cable.
B.
Related sections:
1.
2.
3.
c. Section 16060 - Grounding and Bonding.
d. Section 16075 - Electrical Identification.
REFERENCES
A.
B.

1.
2.
B 8 - Standard Specification for Concentric-LayStranded Copper Conductors,
C.
CSA International (CSA).
D.
Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA):

1.
NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658-1999 - Standard for Nonshielded Power Cables
Rated 2000 Volts or Less for the Distribution of Electrical Energy.
2.
NEMA WC 57/ICEA S-73-532 - Standard for Control, Thermocouple
Extension, and Instrumentation Cables.
E.

1.
250 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 V Maximum).
F.

1.
70 - National Electrical Code (NEC).
May 2014
16123-1
9408A10
2.
3.
G.
1.03
1.04
Underwriter's Laboratories Inc., (UL):

1.
44 - Thermoset-Insulated Wires and Cables.
2.
1424 - Standard for Cables for Power-Limited Fire-Alarm Circuits.
3.
1569 - Standard for Metal-Clad Cables.
4.
2196 - Standard for Tests for Fire Resistive Cables.
5.
2225 - Standard for Cables and Cable-Fittings For Use in Hazardous
(Classified) Locations.
DEFINITIONS
A.
B.
Definitions of terms and other electrical considerations as set forth in the:

1.
ASTM.
2.
ICEA.
C.
NEMA:
1.
Type 4 enclosure in accordance with NEMA 250.
2.
Type 4X enclosure in accordance with NEMA 250.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
1.05
72 - National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code.

101 - Life Safety Code.
Furnish and install the complete wire and cable system.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Product data:
1.
Manufacturer of wire and cable.
2.
Insulation:
a. Type.
b. Voltage class.
3.
American wire gauge (AWG) size.
4.
Conductor material.
5.
Pulling compounds.
C.
Shop drawings:
1.
Show splice locations.
D.
Test reports:
1.
Submit test reports for meg-ohm tests.
E.
Calculations:
1.
Submit cable pulling calculations to the Engineer for review and comment for
all cables that will be installed using mechanical pulling equipment. Show that
the maximum cable tension and sidewall pressure will not exceed
manufacturer recommended values:
May 2014
16123-2
9408A10
a.
b.
1.06
1.07
Provide a table showing the manufacturers recommended maximum

cable tension and sidewall pressure for each cable type and size included
in the calculations.
Submit the calculations to the Engineer a minimum of 2 weeks before
conduit installation.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
All wires and cables shall be UL listed and labeled.

A.
1.08
PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS (NOT USED)
1.09
1.10
1.11
WARRANTY
A.
1.12
SYSTEM START-UP
A.
1.13
OWNER`S INSTRUCTIONS (NOT USED)
1.14
1.15
PART 2
2.01
PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS
A.

1.
600 volt class wire and cable:
a. General Cable.
b. Okonite Company.
c. Southwire Company.
2.
Instrumentation class wire and cable:
a. Alpha Wire Company.
b. Belden CDT.
c. General Cable BICC Brand.
d. Okonite Company.
e. Rockbestos Surprenant Cable Corporation.
3.
Network cables:
May 2014
16123-3
9408A10
4.
a. Belden CDT.
b. General Cable.
c. CommScope.
Fire alarm wire and cable:
a. West Penn Wire.
b. Olympic Wire and Cable.
c. Rockbestos Surprenant Cable Corporation.
d. Draka Lifeline.
2.02
2.03
MATERIALS
A.
2.04
Conductors:
1.
Copper in accordance with ASTM B 3.
MANUFACTURED UNITS
A.
General:
1.
Provide new wires and cables manufactured within 1 year of the date of
delivery to the Site.
2.
Permanently mark each wire and cable with the following at 24-inch intervals:
a. AWG size.
b. Voltage rating.
c. Insulation type.
d. UL symbol.
e. Month and year of manufacture.
f. Manufacturer's name.
3.
Identify and mark wire and cable as specified in Section 16075:
a. Use integral color insulation for Number 2 AWG and smaller wire.
b. Wrap colored tape around cable larger than Number 2 AWG.
B.
600 volt class wire and cable:

1.
Provide AWG or kcmil sizes as indicated on the Drawings or in the Conduit
Schedules:
a. When not indicated on the Drawings, size wire as follows:
1) In accordance with the NEC:
a) Use 75 degree Celsius ampacity ratings.
b) Ampacity rating after all derating factors, equal to or greater than
rating of the overcurrent device.
2) Provide Number 12 AWG minimum for power conductors.
3) Provide Number 14 AWG minimum for control conductors.
2.
Provide Class B stranding in accordance with ASTM B 8:
a. Provide Class C stranding where extra flexibility is required.
3.
Insulation:
a. XHHW-2.
b. 90 degrees Celsius rating.
4.
Multiconductor cables:
a. Number and size of conductors as indicated on the Drawings or in the
Conduit Schedules.
b. Individual conductors with XHHW-2 insulation.
c. Overall PVC jacket.
May 2014
16123-4
9408A10
d.
e.
f.
Tray cable rated.

Color-coding for control wire in accordance with ICEA Method 1, E-2 in
accordance with NEMA WC 57/ICEA S-73-532.
Ground conductor: Insulated, green:
1) Sized in accordance with NEC.
C.
Instrumentation class cable:

1.
Type TC.
2.
Suitable for use in wet locations.
3.
Voltage rating: 600 volts.
4.
Temperature rating:
a. 90 degrees Celsius rating in dry locations.
b. 75 degrees Celsius rating in wet locations.
5.
Conductors:
a. Insulation:
1) Flame-retardant PVC, 15 mils nominal thickness, with nylon jacket
4 mils nominal thickness.
b. Number 16 AWG stranded and tinned.
c. Color code:
1) Pair: Black and white.
2) Triad: Black, white and red.
3) Multiple pairs or triads:
a) Color-coded and numbered.
6.
Drain wire:
a. 18 AWG.
b. Stranded, tinned.
7.
Jacket:
a. Flame retardant, moisture and sunlight resistant PVC.
b. Ripcord laid longitudinally under jacket to facilitate removal.
8.
Shielding:
a. Individual pair/triad:
1) Minimum 1.35-mil double-faced aluminum foil/polyester tape
overlapped to provide 100 percent coverage.
b. Multiple pair or triad shielding:
1) Group shield: Minimum 1.35-mil double-faced aluminum foil/polyester
tape overlapped to provide 100 percent coverage.
2) Completely isolate group shields from each other.
3) Cable shield: 2.35 mils double-faced aluminum and synthetic
polymer backed tape overlapped to provide 100 percent coverage.
c. All shielding to be in contact with the drain wire.
D.
Network cables:
1.
Category 6:
a. General:
1) Provide all Cat 6 cables meeting the standards set by TIA/EIA-568C.2.
b. Conductors:
1) 24 AWG solid bare copper conductors.
c. Insulation:
1) Polyolefin.
2) 4 non-bonded twisted pair cables formed into a cable core.
d. Color code:
May 2014
16123-5
9408A10
e.
f.
1) Pair 1: White/blue stripe and blue.

2) Pair 2: White/orange stripe and orange.
3) Pair 3: White/green stripe and green.
4) Pair 4: White/brown stripe and brown.
Outer jacket:
1) PVC with ripcord.
Electrical characteristics:
1) Frequency range: 0.772-100 MHz.
2) Attenuation: 32.1 dB/100 m.
3) Near-end crosstalk (NEXT): 39.3 dB.
4) Power sum NEXT: 37.3 dB.
5) Attenuation to crosstalk ratio (ACR): 7.2 dB.
6) Power sum attenuation to crosstalk ratio (PSACR): 5.3 dB/100 m.
7) Equal level far-end crosstalk (ELFEXT): 22.8 dB.
8) Power sum ELFEXT: 19.8 dB/100 m.
9) Return loss: 17.3 dB.
10) Propagation delay: 537 ns/100 m.
11) Delay skew: 45 ns/100 m.
12) Propagation delay (skew), max: 2.5 ns/100 m.
2.05
2.06
2.07
ACCESSORIES
A.
Wire ties:
1.
a. T&B "Ty-Rap" cable ties.
b. Panduit cable ties.
B.
Wire markers:
1.
2.08
MIXES (NOT USED)
2.09
2.10
FINISHES (NOT USED)
2.11

A.
Assembly and testing of cable shall comply with the applicable requirements of
ICEA S-95-658-1999.
B.
Test Type XHHW-2 in accordance with the requirements of UL 44.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
3.02
May 2014
16123-6
9408A10
3.03
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
Color-coding:
1.
Color-coding shall be consistent throughout the facility.
2.
The following color code shall be followed for all 240/120 volt and 208/120 volt
systems:
a. Phase A - Black.
b. Phase B - Red.
c. Phase C - Blue.
d. Single phase system - Black for one hot leg, red for the other.
e. Neutral - White.
f. High phase or wild leg - Orange.
g. Equipment ground - Green.
3.
The following color code shall be followed for all 480/277 volt systems:
a. Phase A - Brown.
b. Phase B - Orange.
c. Phase C - Yellow.
d. Neutral - Gray.
e. Equipment ground - Green.
4.
The following color code shall be followed for all 120 VAC control wiring:
a. Power - Red.
b. Neutral - White.
5.
The following color code shall be followed for all general purpose DC control
circuits:
a. Grounded conductors - White with blue stripe.
b. Ungrounded conductors - Blue.
6.
Switch legs shall be violet. Three-way switch runners shall be pink.
7.
Wires in intrinsically safe circuits shall be light blue.
8.
Wire colors shall be implemented in the following methods:
a. Wires manufactured of the desired color.
b. Continuously spiral wrap the first 6 inches of the wire from the termination
point with colored tape:
1) Colored tape shall be wrapped to overlap 1/2 of the width of the tape.
C.
Install conductors only after the conduit installation is complete, and all enclosures
have been vacuumed clean, and the affected conduits have been swabbed clean
and dry:
1.
Install wires only in approved raceways.
2.
Do not install wire:
a. In incomplete conduit runs.
b. Until after the concrete work and plastering is completed.
D.
Properly coat wires and cables with pulling compound before pulling into conduits:
1.
For all Number 4 AWG and larger, use an approved wire-pulling lubricant while
cable is being installed in conduit:
a. Ideal Products.
b. Polywater Products.
c. 3M Products.
d. Greenlee Products.
e. Or equal as recommended by cable manufacturer.
May 2014
16123-7
9408A10
f.
Do not use oil, grease, or similar substances.
E.
Cable pulling:
1.
Prevent mechanical damage to conductors during installation.
2.
For cables Number 1 AWG and smaller, install cables by hand.
3.
For cables larger than Number 1 AWG, power pulling winches may be used if
they have cable tension monitoring equipment.
4.
Provide documentation that maximum cable pulling tension was no more than
75 percent of the maximum recommended level as published by the cable
manufacturer. If exceeded, the Engineer may, at his discretion, require
replacement of the cable.
5.
Ensure cable pulling crews have all calculations and cable pulling limitations
while pulling cable.
6.
Make splices or add a junction box or pullbox where required to prevent cable
pulling tension or sidewall pressure from exceeding 75 percent of
manufacturers recommendation for the specified cable size:
a. Make splices in manholes or pull boxes only.
b. Leave sufficient slack to make proper connections.
F.
Use smooth-rolling sheaves and rollers when pulling cable into cable tray to keep
pulling tension and bending radius within manufacturers recommendations.
G.
Install and terminate all wire in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
H.
Neatly arrange and lace conductors in all switchboards, panelboards, pull boxes,
and terminal cabinets by means of wire ties:
1.
Do not lace wires in gutter or panel channel.
2.
Install all wire ties with a flush cutting wire tie installation tool:
a. Use a tool with an adjustable tension setting.
3.
Do not leave sharp edges on wire ties.
I.
Terminate solid conductors at equipment terminal screws with the conductor tightly
wound around the screw so that it does not protrude beyond the screw head:
1.
Wrap the conductor clockwise so that the wire loop is closed as the loop is
tightened.
2.
Do not use crimp lugs on solid wire.
J.
Terminate stranded conductors on equipment box lugs such that all conductor
strands are confined within the lug:
1.
Use ring type lugs if box lugs are not available on the equipment.
K.
Splices:
1.
Provide continuous circuits from origin to termination whenever possible:
a. Obtain Engineers approval prior to making any splices.
2.
Lighting and receptacle circuit conductors may be spliced without prior
approval from the Engineer.
3.
Where splices are necessary because of extremely long wire or cable lengths
that exceed standard manufactured lengths:
a. Splice box NEMA rating requirements as specified in Section 16123.
b. Make splices in labeled junction boxes for power conductors.
c. Make splices for control and instrument conductors in terminal boxes:
1) Provide terminal boards with setscrew pressure connectors, with
spade or ring lug connectors.
May 2014
16123-8
9408A10
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Power and control conductors routed in common raceways may be spliced in

common junction boxes.
Clearly label junction and terminal boxes containing splices with the word
"SPLICE."
Leave sufficient slack at junction boxes and termination boxes to make proper
splices and connections. Do not pull splices into conduits.
Install splices with compression type butt splices and insulate using a
heat-shrink sleeve:
a. In NEMA Type 4 or NEMA Type 4X areas, provide heat-shrink sleeves
that are listed for submersible applications.
Splices in below grade pull boxes, in any box subject to flooding, and in wet
areas shall be made waterproof using:
a) A heat shrink insulating system listed for submersible applications.
b) Or an epoxy resin splicing kit.
L.
Apply wire markers to all wires at each end after being installed in the conduit and
before meg-ohm testing and termination.
M.
Instrumentation class cable:

1.
Install instrumentation class cables in separate raceway systems from power
cables:
a. Install instrument cable in metallic conduit within non-dedicated manholes
or pull boxes.
b. Install cable without splices between instruments or between field devices
and instrument enclosures or panels.
2.
Do not make intermediate terminations, except in designated terminal boxes
as indicated on the Drawings.
3.
Shield grounding requirements as specified in Section 16060.
N.
Multi-conductor cable:
1.
Where cable is not routed in conduit with a separate ground conductor, use
one conductor in the cable as a ground conductor:
a) Use an internal ground conductor, if it is no smaller than as indicated on
the Drawings and in accordance with NEC requirements for equipment
ground conductor size.
b) Where 2 parallel cables are used, and the internal ground conductor in
each cable does not meet NEC requirements for the combined circuit, use
4-conductor cable, with one of the full-sized conductors serving as
ground.
O.
Fire alarm cable:

1.
Install fire alarm cable in dedicated metallic raceways as indicated on the
Drawings.
P.
Signal cable:
1.
Separate and isolate electrical signal cables from sources of electrical noise
and power cables by minimum 12 inches.
Q.
Wiring allowances:
1.
Equipment locations may vary slightly from the drawings. Include an allowance
for necessary conductors and terminations for motorized equipment, electrical
May 2014
16123-9
9408A10
2.
outlets, fixtures, communication outlets, instruments, and devices within

10 linear feet of locations indicated on the Drawings.
Locations for pull boxes, manholes, and duct banks may vary slightly from the
drawings. Include an allowance for necessary conductors and related
materials to provide conductors to all pull boxes, manholes and duct banks
within 20 linear feet of locations indicated on the Drawings.
3.04
3.05
3.06
3.07

A.
B.
Grounding:
1.
3.08
3.09
CLEANING (NOT USED)
3.10
3.11
PROTECTION
A.
3.12

END OF SECTION
May 2014
16123-10
9408A10
SECTION 16124
MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLES
PART 1
1.01
1.02
GENERAL
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes:
1.
Medium voltage cables rated 5,000 through 35,000 volts.
B.
Related sections:
1.
2.
3.
c. Section 16075 - Electrical Identification.
d. Section 16950 - Field Electrical Acceptance Tests.
REFERENCES
A.
B.

1.
2.
B 8 - Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors,
3.
B 496 - Standard Specification for Compact Round Concentric-Lay-Stranded
Copper Conductors.
C.
Association of Edison Illuminating Companies (AEIC):

1.
CS8 - Specification for Extruded Dielectric, Shielded Power Cables Rated 5
through 46 kV.
D.
Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA):

1.
S-93-639 - ICEA/NEMA Standard for Shielded Power Cables Rated 5-46 kV
for the Distribution of Electrical Energy.
2.
S-96-649 - Standard for Concentric Neutral Cables Rated 5 Through 46 kV.
3.
S-97-682 - Standard for Utility Shielded Power Cables Rated 5 Through 46 kV.
E.
Underwriters Laboratories (UL):

1.
1072 - Standard for Safety for Medium-Voltage Power Cables.
May 2014
16124-1
9408A10
1.03
1.04
DEFINITIONS
A.
B.
Definitions of terms and other electrical considerations as set forth by:

1.
ICEA.
2. ASTM.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
1.05
Furnish and install the complete medium voltage cable system.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Product data:
1.
Manufacturer.
2.
Voltage class.
3.
Conductor:
a. Size.
b. Material.
c. Stranding.
4.
Insulation:
a. Type.
b. Level.
5.
Shielding.
6.
Temperature rating.
7.
Jacket material.
C.
Shop drawings:
1.
Show splice locations.
D.
Calculations:
1.
Submit cable pulling calculations to the Engineer for review and comment
showing that the maximum cable tension and sidewall pressure will not exceed
Manufacturer recommended values:
a. Provide a table showing the manufacturers recommended maximum
cable tension and sidewall pressure for each cable type and size included
in the calculations.
2.
Submit the calculations to the Engineer a minimum of 2 weeks before conduit
installation.
E.
Qualifications:
1.
Submit qualifications for the individual(s) that will be performing medium
voltage cable splices and terminations at least 30 calendar days before
splicing or terminating.
2.
Documentation that the individual has received training by splice/termination
Manufacturer or an independent testing laboratory.
3.
A statement of the number of years in which the individual has been splicing
and terminating medium voltage cable.
May 2014
16124-2
9408A10
1.06
1.07
F.
Test reports:
1.
Submit AC withstand partial discharge (corona) test x-y plots after
manufacture and prior to shipment.
2.
Submit field test reports as specified in Section 16950.
G.
Record documents:
1.
Submit record documents with any field modification.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
Manufacturer qualifications: Minimum of 10 years experience in manufacturing

medium voltage power cables.
C.
Medium voltage cables shall be UL listed and labeled.
DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING

A.
1.08
1.09
1.10
1.11
WARRANTY
A.
1.12
SYSTEM START-UP
A.
1.13
1.14
1.15
PART 2
2.01
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.02
PRODUCTS

1.
Okonite Company.
2.
General BICC Cable.
3.
Southwire.
May 2014
16124-3
9408A10
2.03
2.04
MATERIALS
A.
Conductors:
1.
Annealed uncoated copper in accordance with ASTM B 3.
2.
Stranded in accordance with ASTM B 496.
B.
Insulation:
1.
Ethylene propylene rubber, (EPR).
C.
Jacket:
1.
Chlorinated polyethylene (CPE)
MANUFACTURED UNITS
A.
General:
1.
Permanently mark each cable with the following at 24-inch intervals:
a. American Wire Gauge (AWG) size or circular mill area.
b. Voltage rating.
c. Grade of insulation.
d. UL symbol.
e. Manufacturers name.
B.
Medium voltage cable:

1.
Provide cables manufactured in the last 12 months.
2.
Voltage ratings as indicated on the Drawings or on the conduit schedule.
3.
Type MV-105:
a. Rated for 105 degrees Celsius.
4.
Single-conductor:
a. Stranding:
1) In accordance with ASTM B 3 and B 8 Class B.
5.
Conductor screen:
a. Extruded semiconducting EPR or thermoset compound.
b. Applied directly over the conductor.
c. In accordance with:
1) AEIC CS8.
2) UL 1072.
6. Insulation level:
a. 5kV rated.
b. 133 percent.
c. Insulation screen:
1) Extruded semiconducting EPR or thermoset compound.
2) Applied directly over the insulation.
3) In accordance with:
a) ICEA S-639 and ICEA S-682.
b) Free-striping.
4) Provide color differentiation between semi-conducting layers and
insulation.
7. Shield:
a. 5-mil annealed copper tape with an overlap of 25 percent.
8. Applications:
a. Suitable for use in wet and dry locations in conduit and underground duct
systems.
May 2014
16124-4
9408A10
2.05
2.06
2.07
2.08
MIXES (NOT USED)
2.09
2.10
FINISHES (NOT USED)
2.11

A.
Manufacturer cable in accordance with the latest standards of the ASTM and ICEA
and test full cable length by these standards:
1.
AC withstand partial discharge (corona) test per AEIC CS8 and ICEA S-94649.
a. Results not to exceed 5 picocoulombs.
B.
Provide cable reels with both ends of cables available for high-potential testing
before installation.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
3.02
3.03
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
Install and terminate cable per manufacturer recommendations:

1.
Use proper stripping and terminating tools to ensure integrity of insulation.
2.
Ground shield at all terminations and splices.
3.
Maintain manufacturers or NECs minimum bending radius, whichever is
larger.
4.
Do not bend, kink or nick cable jacket or insulation.
5.
Properly coat wires and cables with pulling compound recommended by cable
manufacturer before pulling into conduits and prevent mechanical damage to
conductors during installation:
a. Other lubricants substituted must be accompanied by a statement from
cable manufacturer as to its acceptable use with cables being installed.
6.
Do not exceed the pulling tension and sidewall pressures recommended by
cable manufacturer. Install additional pull boxes as required to meet cable
manufacturer's recommendations.
7.
Electrical identification: As specified in Section 16075.
8.
Use only tools that are recommended by the termination or splice
manufacturer.
9.
Use a dynamometer during cable pulling operations to monitor cable pulling
tensions.
May 2014
16124-5
9408A10
C.
Do not install cables until the Engineer reviews the Contractor prepared cablepulling calculations:
1.
Cable pulling crew shall have in hand all cable pulling calculations and cable
pulling limitations.
D.
Cable pulling requirements:

1.
Pull cable directly from reels into the ducts.
2.
Cable may not be laid on the ground or otherwise handled for cutting or
sorting.
3.
Do not pull cables through more than one intermediate manhole on one pull.
4.
Seal all cable ends against moisture after pulling.
5.
Use non-metallic pull ropes to prevent cutting of duct materials.
6.
Pull cables from conductor, do not use cable pulling socks that attach to the
insulation.
E.
Installation of cables in manholes and handholes:

1.
Install cables not utilizing the shortest route, but routed along those walls
providing the longest route and the maximum spare cable lengths.
2.
Run all cables closely parallel to the walls, not interfering with duct entrances.
3.
Support cables on brackets and cable insulators spaced at a maximum of four
feet.
4.
In existing manholes and handholes where new ducts are to be terminated or
where new cables are to be installed, modify the existing installation of cables,
cable supports, and grounding as required for a neat and workmanlike
installation with all cables properly arranged and supported.
F.
Splices:
1.
Provide continuous circuits from origin to termination:
a. Provide where necessary when cable pulling tension or sidewall pressure
exceeds manufacturer recommendation for the cable.
2.
Make splices in manholes or pull boxes only:
a. Leave sufficient slack to make proper connections.
b. Do not pull splices into conduit.
3.04
3.05
3.06
3.07

A.
B.
After cable installation, test in accordance with ICEA/NEMA, including voltage tests,
hi-potential tests and partial-discharge tests, before energizing the circuits.
1.
Verify that no equipment is connected to the cables during tests.
3.08
3.09
CLEANING (NOT USED)
3.10
May 2014
16124-6
9408A10
3.11
PROTECTION
A.
3.12

END OF SECTION
May 2014
16124-7
9408A10
SECTION 16130
CONDUITS
PART 1
1.01
1.02
GENERAL
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes:
1.
Metallic conduits.
2.
Nonmetallic conduits.
3.
Conduit bodies.
4.
Conduit fittings and accessories.
5.
Conduit installation.
B.
Related sections:
1.
2.
3.
c. Section 16070 - Hangers and Supports.
d. Section 16133 - Duct Banks.
e. Section 16075 - Electrical Identification.
REFERENCES
A.
B.
American National Standards Institute (ANSI):

1.
C80.1 - Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit.
2.
C80.3 - Steel Electrical Metallic Tubing.
3.
C80.5 - Electrical Rigid Aluminum Conduit.
4.
C80.6 - Electrical Intermediate Metal Conduit.
C.

1.
RN-1 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel
Conduit and Intermediate Steel Conduit.
2.
TC2 - Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Conduit.
3.
TC3 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and
Tubing.
4.
TC7 - Smooth-Wall Coilable Electrical Polyethylene Conduit.
5.
TC13 - Electrical Nonmetallic Tubing.
6.
TC14 - Reinforced Thermosetting Resin Conduit (RTRC) and Fittings.
May 2014
16130-1
9408A10
D.
1.03
1.04
DEFINITIONS
A.
B.
Specific definitions and abbreviations:

1.
Conduit bodies: A separate portion of a conduit system that provides access
through a removable cover to the interior of the system at a junction of 2 or
more conduit sections. Includes, but not limited to: shapes C, E, LB, T, X, etc.
2.
Conduit fitting: An accessory that serves primarily a mechanical purpose.
Includes, but not limited to: bushings, locknuts, hubs, couplings, reducers, etc.
3.
GRC: Galvanized rigid steel conduit.
4.
PCS: PVC coated rigid steel conduit.
5.
PVC: Polyvinyl chloride rigid nonmetallic conduit.
6.
SLT: Sealtight liquid-tight flexible conduit.
7.
NPT: National pipe thread.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
1.05

1.
1 - Standard for Flexible Metal Conduit.
2.
6 - Standard for Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit - Steel.
3.
6A - Standard for Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit - Aluminum, Red Brass, and
Stainless Steel.
4.
360 - Standard for Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit.
5.
651 - Standard for Schedule 40 and 80 Rigid PVC Conduit and Fittings.
6.
651B - Standard for Continuous Length HDPE Conduit.
7.
797 - Standard for Electrical Metallic Tubing - Steel.
8.
1242 - Standard for Electrical Intermediate Metal Conduit - Steel.
9.
1653 - Standard for Electrical Nonmetallic Tubing.
10. 1660 - Standard for Liquid-Tight Flexible Nonmetallic Conduit.
11. 1684 - Standard for Reinforced Thermosetting Resin Conduit (RTRC) and
Fittings.
Provide conduits, conduit bodies, fittings, junction boxes and all necessary
components, whether or not indicated on the Drawings, as required, to install a
complete electrical raceway system.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Product data:
1.
Furnish complete manufacturers catalog sheets for every type and size of
conduit, fitting, conduit body, and accessories to be used on the Project.
2.
Furnish complete manufacturers recommended special tools to be used for
installation if required.
C.
Certifications:
1.
Furnish PVC-coated conduit manufacturers certification for each installer.
D.
Record Documents:
1.
Incorporate all changes in conduit routing on electrical plan drawings.
2.
Dimension underground and concealed conduits from building lines.
May 2014
16130-2
9408A10
3.
1.06
1.07
1.08
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
All conduits, conduit bodies, and fittings shall be UL listed and labeled.
C.
Every installer of PCS conduits shall be certified by the manufacturer for installation
of the conduit.

A.
B.
Do not expose type PVC to direct sunlight.
C.
Do not store conduit in direct contact with the ground.

A.
1.09
Furnish hard copy drawings and electronic files in AutoCAD format Version:
2004.
SEQUENCING
A.
Before installing any conduit or locating any device box:

1.
Examine the complete set of Drawings and Specifications, and all applicable
shop drawings.
2.
Verify all dimensions and space requirements and make any minor
adjustments to the conduit system as required to avoid conflicts with the
building structure, other equipment, or the work of other trades.
1.10
1.11
WARRANTY
A.
1.12
SYSTEM START-UP
A.
1.13
1.14
1.15
May 2014
16130-3
9408A10
PART 2
2.01
2.02
PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Galvanized rigid steel conduit:

1.
a. Western Tube and Conduit.
b. Allied Tube and Conduit.
c. Wheatland Tube Co.
B.
Polyvinyl chloride coated rigid steel conduit:

1.
a. Robroy Industries.
b. Ocal, Inc.
C.
Sealtight liquid-tight flexible conduit:

1.
a. Southwire.
b. AFC Cable Systems.
c. Electriflex.
d. Anaconda.
D.
Rigid nonmetallic polyvinyl chloride conduit:

1.
a. Carlon.
b. Cantex.
c. Triangle Conduit and Cable.
E.
Inner duct:
1.
a. Carlon.
b. Endot Industries.
c. MaxCell.
F.
Conduit bodies:
1.
a. Crouse-Hinds.
b. Appleton.
c. O-Z/Gedney.
d. Ocal.
e. Robroy.
f. Carlon.
G.
Galvanized rigid steel conduit expansion fittings:

1.
a. Crouse-Hinds.
b. Appleton.
c. O-Z/Gedney.
H.
Conduit hangers and supports:

1.
May 2014
16130-4
9408A10
2.03
MATERIALS (NOT USED)
2.04
2.05
2.06
COMPONENTS
A.
GRC:
1.
All threads: NPT standard conduit threads with a 3/4-inch taper per foot:
a. Running conduit threads are not acceptable.
2.
Hot-dip galvanized inside and out:
a. Ensures complete coverage and heats the zinc and steel to a temperature
that ensures the zinc alloys with the steel over the entire surface.
b. Electro-galvanizing is not acceptable.
3.
Manufactured in accordance with:
a. UL-6.
b. ANSI C80.1.
B.
PCS:
1.
The steel conduit, before PVC coating, shall be new, unused, hot-dip
galvanized material, conforming to the requirements for type GRC.
2.
Coated conduit NEMA Standard RN-1:
a. The galvanized coating may not be disturbed or reduced in thickness
during the cleaning and preparatory process.
3.
Factory bonded PVC jacket:
a. The exterior galvanized surfaces shall be coated with primer before PVC
coating to ensure a bond between the zinc substrate and the PVC
coating.
b. Nominal thickness of the exterior PVC coating shall be 0.040 inch except
where part configuration or application of the piece dictate otherwise.
c. PVC coating on conduit and associated fittings shall have no sags,
blisters, lumps, or other surface defects and free of holes and holidays.
d. The PVC adhesive bond on conduit and fittings shall be greater than the
tensile strength of the PVC plastic coating:
1) Confirm bond with certified test results.
4.
A urethane coating shall be uniformly and consistently applied to the interior of
all conduit and fittings:
a. Nominal thickness of 0.002 inch.
b. Conduit having areas with thin or no coating are not acceptable.
c. All threads shall be coated with urethane.
5.
The PVC exterior and urethane interior coatings applied to the conduit shall
afford sufficient flexibility to permit field bending without cracking or flaking at
temperature above 30 degrees Fahrenheit (-1 degree Celsius).
6.
PCS conduit bodies and fittings:
a. Malleable iron.
b. The conduit body, before PVC coating, shall be new, unused material and
shall conform to appropriate UL standards.
c. The PVC coating on the outside of conduit bodies shall be 0.040 inch
thick and have a series of longitudinal ribs to protect the coating from tool
damage during installation.
d. 0.002 inch interior urethane coating.
May 2014
16130-5
9408A10
e.
f.
g.
Utilize the PVC coating as an integral part of the gasket design.

Stainless steel cover screws heads shall be encapsulated with plastic to
assure corrosion protection.
A PVC sleeve extending 1 conduit diameter or 2 inches, whichever is less,
shall be formed at each female conduit opening.
1) The inside diameter of the sleeve shall be the same as the outside
diameter of the conduit to be used.
2) The sleeve shall provide a vapor and moisture tight seal at every
connection.
C.
SLT:
1.
Temperature rated for use in the ambient temperature at the installed location
but not less than the following:
a. General purpose:
1) Temperature range -20 degrees Celsius to +80 degrees Celsius.
b. Oil resistant:
1) Temperature range -20 degrees Celsius to +60 degrees Celsius.
2.
Sunlight resistant, weatherproof, and watertight.
3.
Manufactured from single strip steel, hot-dip galvanized on all 4 sides before
conduit fabrication.
4.
Strip steel spiral wound resulting in an interior that is smooth and clean for
easy wire pulling.
5.
Overall polyvinyl chloride jacket.
6.
With integral copper ground wire, built in the core, in conduit trade sizes
1/2 inch through 1-1/4 inch.
D.
PVC:
1.
Extruded from virgin polyvinyl chloride compound:
a. Schedule 40 unless otherwise specified.
b. Schedule 80 extra heavy wall where specified.
2.
Rated for 90 degrees Celsius conductors or cable.
3.
Rated for use in direct sunlight.
E.
Inner duct:
1.
HDPE and fabric inner duct are considered interchangeable.
2.
HDPE inner duct:
a. High density polyethylene.
b. Corrugated.
c. Resin properties:
1) Density, g/cm3: 0.941 to 0.955.
2) Melt index g/10 minute Condition E: 0.05 to 0.5.
3) Flexural modulus, MPa (pounds per square inch): 80,000 minimum.
4) Tensile strength at yield (pounds per square inch): 3,000 minimum.
5) Environmental stress crack resistance condition B, F10: 96 hours
minimum.
6) Brittleness temperature: -75 degrees Celsius.
d. Size: 1.25-inch.
3.
Fabric inner duct:
a. White polyester and nylon resin polymer textile.
b. Standard outdoor textile inner duct:
1) 3-inch multi-cell inner duct containing pull tape in each cell.
c. Color-coded.
May 2014
16130-6
9408A10
d.
F.
2.07
Pull tape:
1) 1250 lb.
2) Synthetic fiber polyester, flat woven.
3) Printed sequential footage marks.
Conduit bodies:
1.
Material consistent with conduit type:
a. Malleable iron bodies and covers when used with type GRC conduit.
b. Cast aluminum bodies and covers when used with type RAC.
c. PVC bodies and covers when used with type PVC.
d. PVC-coated malleable iron bodies and covers when used with type PCS.
2.
Conduit bodies to conform to Form 8, Mark 9, or Mogul design:
a. Mogul design conforming to NEC requirements for bending space for
large conductors for conduit trade sizes of 1 inch and larger with
conductors #4 AWG and larger, or where required for wire bending space.
3.
Gasketed covers attached to bodies with stainless steel screws secured to
threaded holes in conduit body.
ACCESSORIES
A.
Connectors and fittings:

1.
Manufactured with compatible materials to the corresponding conduit.
B.
Insulated throat metallic bushings:

1.
Construction:
a. Malleable iron or zinc plated steel when used with steel conduit.
b. Aluminum when used with aluminum conduit.
c. Positive metallic conduit end stop.
d. Integrally molded non-combustible phenolic insulated surfaces rated
150 degrees Celsius.
e. Use fully insulated bushings on nonmetallic conduit system made of high
impact 150 degrees Celsius rated non-combustible thermosetting
phenolic.
C.
Insulated grounding bushings:

1.
Construction:
a. Malleable iron or steel, zinc plated, with a positive metallic end stop.
b. Integrally molded non-combustible phenolic insulated surfaces rated
c. Tin plated copper grounding saddle for use with copper or aluminum
conductors.
D.
Electrical unions (Erickson Couplings):

1.
Construction:
a. Malleable iron for use with steel conduit.
b. Aluminum for use with aluminum conduit.
c. Concrete tight, 3-piece construction.
d. Rated for Class I Division 1 Group D in hazardous areas.
E.
SLT fittings:
1.
Construction:
a. Malleable iron.
b. Furnished with locknut and sealing ring.
May 2014
16130-7
9408A10
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.
Liquid-tight, rain-tight, oil-tight.

Insulated throat.
Furnish as straight, 45-degree elbows and 90-degree elbows.
Designed to prevent sleeving:
1) Verify complete bonding of the raceway jacket to the plastic gasket
seal.
g. Equipped with grounding device to provide ground continuity irrespective
of raceway core construction. Grounding device, if inserted into raceway
and directly in contact with conductors, shall have rolled over edges for
sizes under 5 inches.
h. Where terminated into a threadless opening using a threaded hub fitting, a
suitable moisture resistant/oil resistant synthetic rubber gasket shall be
provided between the outside of the box or enclosure and the fitting
shoulder. Gasket shall be adequately protected by and permanently
bonded to a metallic retainer.
Corrosion resistant and outdoor SLT fittings:
a. Construction:
1) PVC-coated liquid-tight fittings with a bonded 0.040-inch thick PVC
coating on the metal connector to form a seal around the SLT
conduit.
2) Insulated throat and an integral sealing ring.
F.
Hubs for threaded attachment of steel conduit to sheet metal enclosures:

1.
Construction:
a. Insulated throat.
b. PVC coated when used in corrosive areas.
c. Bonding locknut.
d. Recessed neoprene O-ring to assure watertight and dust-tight connector.
e. One half (1/2)-inch through 1-1/4-inch steel zinc electroplated.
f. One and one half (1-1/2)-inch through 6-inch malleable iron zinc plated.
g. Aluminum with aluminum conduit.
2.
Usage:
a. All conduits in damp, wet, outdoor, and corrosive areas shall use threaded
hubs for connections to sheet metal enclosures.
G.
PVC fittings:
1.
Shall include the following:
a. Couplings.
b. Terminal adapters.
c. Female adapters.
d. Caps.
e. Reducer bushings.
f. Duct couplings.
g. End bells.
h. Expansion couplings.
i.
Duct couplings 5 degree.
j.
C - pull fittings.
k. E - pull fittings.
l.
LB - pull fittings.
m. LL - pull fittings.
n. LR - pull fittings.
o. T - pull fittings.
May 2014
16130-8
9408A10
2.
p. X - pull fittings.
q. Service entrance caps.
Materials:
a. All devices shall be made of PVC, using the same materials as used for
Type PVC conduit.
b. All metal hardware shall be stainless steel.
H.
Through wall and floor seals:

1.
Materials:
a. Body: casting of malleable or ductile iron with a hot-dip galvanized finish.
b. Grommet: neoprene.
c. Pressure rings: PVC coated steel.
d. Disc material: PVC coated steel.
I.
Expansion/deflection couplings:
1.
Use to compensate for movement in any directions between 2 conduit ends
that they connect.
2.
Shall allow movement of 3/4 inch from the normal in all directions.
3.
Shall allow angular movement for a deflection of 30 degrees from normal in
any direction.
4.
Constructed to maintain electrical continuity of the conduit system.
5.
Materials:
a. End couplings: Bronze or galvanized ductile iron.
b. Sleeve: Neoprene.
c. Bands: Stainless steel.
d. Bonding jumper: Tinned copper braid.
J.
Expansion couplings:
1.
Shall allow for expansion and contraction of conduit:
a. Permitting 8-inch movement, 4 inches in either direction.
2.
Constructed to maintain electrical continuity of the conduit system.
3.
Materials:
a. Head: Malleable or ductile iron.
b. Sleeve: Steel.
c. Insulating bushing: Phenolic.
d. Finish: Hot-dip galvanized.
K.
Inner duct couplings and fittings:

1.
HDPE inner duct:
a. Couplings:
1) Self-threading.
2) Nonmetallic.
b. Fittings:
1) Multi-access fitting:
a) 34 hole.
b) Sized for conduit containing inner duct.
2) Duct plugs:
a) Sized for inner duct diameter.
b) Install in all both ends of all unused ducts.
3) Split plugs:
a) Sized for inner duct and cable diameters.
b) Install at both ends of all utilized ducts.
May 2014
16130-9
9408A10
2.
L.
Fabric inner duct:

a. Termination bags:
1) Inflation-type bags for sealing and securing around one or more
textile inner ducts and cables within 2-inch outside diameter or larger
conduit.
Conduit markers:
1.
2.08
MIXES (NOT USED)
2.09
2.10
FINISHES (NOT USED)
2.11

A.
PART 3

EXECUTION
3.01
3.02
3.03
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
General:
1.
Conduit routing:
a. The Electrical Drawings are diagrammatic in nature:
1) Install conduit runs as specified with schematic representation
indicated on the Drawings and as specified.
2) Modify conduit runs to suit field conditions, as accepted by the
Engineer:
a) Make changes in conduit locations that are consistent with the
design intent but are dimensionally different, or routing to
bypass obstructions.
b) Make changes in conduit routing due to the relocation of
equipment.
3) The Electrical Drawings do not indicate all required junction boxes
and pull boxes:
a) Provide junction boxes and pull boxes to facilitate wire pulling as
required:
(1) To meet cable manufacturers pulling tension requirements.
(2) To limit total conduit bends between pull locations.
b) Install junction boxes and pull boxes at locations acceptable to
the Engineer.
b. The Contractor is responsible for any deviations in general location,
conduit size, routing, or changes to the conduit schedule without the
express written approval or direction by the Engineer:
May 2014
16130-10
9408A10
1)
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
The Engineer is the sole source in determining whether the change is

constituted as a deviation:
2) Perform any changes resulting in additional conduits, or extra work
from such deviations.
3) Incorporate any deviations on the Record Documents.
Use only tools recommended by the conduit manufacturer for assembling
conduit system.
Provide adequate clearances from high-temperature surfaces for all conduit
runs. Provide minimum clearances as follows:
a. Clearances of 6 inches from surfaces 113 degrees Fahrenheit to
149 degrees Fahrenheit.
b. Clearances of 12 inches from surfaces greater than
149 degrees Fahrenheit.
c. Keep conduit at least 6 inches from the coverings on hot water and steam
pipes, 18 inches from the coverings on flues and breechings and
12 inches from fuel lines and gas lines.
d. Where it is necessary to route conduit close to high-temperature surfaces,
provide a high-reflectance thermal barrier between the conduit and the
surface.
Do not install 1 inch or larger conduits in or through structural members unless
approved by the Engineer.
Run conduit exposed to view parallel with or at right angles to structural
members, walls, or lines of the building:
a. Install straight and true conduit runs with uniform and symmetrical elbows,
offsets, and bends.
b. Make changes in direction with long radius bends or with conduit bodies.
Install conduit with total conduit bends between pull locations less than or
equal to 270 degrees.
Route all exposed conduit to preserve headroom, access space and work
space and to prevent tripping hazards and clearance problems:
a. Install conduit runs so that runs do not interfere with proper and safe
operation of equipment and do not block or interfere with ingress or
egress, including equipment removal hatches.
b. Route conduit to avoid drains or other gravity lines. Where conflicts occur,
relocate conduit as required.
Plug conduits brought into pull boxes, manholes, handholes, and other
openings until used to prevent entrance of moisture.
Install conduit through wall and floor seals where indicated on the Drawings.
For existing and new 2-inch and larger conduit runs, snake conduits with
conduit cleaner equipped with a cylindrical mandrel of a diameter not less than
85 percent of nominal diameter of conduit:
a. Remove and replace conduits through which mandrel will not pass.
Provide all sleeves and openings required for the passage of electrical
raceways or cables even when these openings or sleeves are not specifically
Install complete conduit systems before conductors are installed.
Provide metallic conduits terminating in transformer, switchgear, motor control
center or other equipment conduit windows with grounding bushings and
ground with a minimum No. 6 AWG ground wire.
May 2014
16130-11
9408A10
14. Underground and embedded conduits:

a. Install underground conduits, including conduit runs below slabs-on-grade
in concrete-reinforced duct bank construction:
1) As specified in Section 16133.
b. Make underground conduit size transitions at handholes and manholes.
c. Install spare conduits in underground duct banks towards top center of
runs to allow for ease of installation of future cables as conduits enter
underground manholes and handholes.
C.
Lighting, receptacle, and fire alarm conduits:

1.
Install conduit runs for lighting and receptacle circuits, whether or not indicated
on the Drawings:
a. Minimum conduit size:
1) 3/4 inch for exposed conduits.
2) 1 inch for underground or in slab conduits.
2.
Provide conduit materials for the installed location as specified in
Section 16130.
D.
Conduit usage:
1.
Exposed conduits:
a. Rigid conduit:
1) Install the rigid conduit type for each location as specified in
Section 16130.
2) Minimum size: 3/4-inch.
b. Flexible conduit:
1) Use flexible conduit for final connections between rigid conduit and
motors, vibrating equipment, instruments, control equipment or
where required for equipment servicing:
a) Use type SLT with rigid metallic conduit.
2) Minimum size: 3/4-inch:
a) 1/2 when required for connection to instruments.
3) Maximum length:
2.
Conduit Trade Size
Flexible Conduit Length (in)
3/4
18
18
1-1/4
18
1-1/2
18
36
2-1/2
36
36
3-1/2
38
40
Concrete encased and embedded conduits:

a. Type PVC Schedule 40 and PVC coated rigid metallic conduit as specified
below:
1) Use Type PCS in underground and embedded installation as follows:
a) Stub-up and risers to grade floor or equipment from nonmetallic
conduits.
May 2014
16130-12
9408A10
b)
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
E.
Entering and exiting underground or embedded conduit runs a

minimum 12 inches above and below grade or finished floor.
c) For any and all bends where the total deflection is greater than
45 degrees.
b. Minimum size:
1) 2 inches in duct banks unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
2) 1 inch for in slab conduits unless otherwise indicated on the
Drawings.
Direct buried and sand bedded ductbank conduits:
a. Type PCS.
b. Minimum size: 1 inch.
PVC coated rigid metallic conduit:
a. Use specifically manufactured or machined threading dies to
manufacturers specifications to accommodate the PVC jacket.
GRC:
a. Conduit shall be cut square and reamed before threading.
PVC:
a. Conduit terminations shall be via threaded adapters into threaded hubs on
the junction boxes or conduit bodies.
b. Conduit terminations into boxes without threaded hubs shall utilize a
threaded adapter and a flat neoprene washer on the outside of the box.
1) Use a locknut on the inside of the box to tighten the adapter to the
box.
c. Route conduit to afford it the maximum physical protection.
1) If necessary, cover conduit to afford additional protection when it
cannot be shielded by the structure or machinery frames.
a) Use Schedule 80 where exposed runs may be subject to
physical damage.
Inner duct (applicable for fiber optic cable only):
a. Install inner duct in PVC conduit as indicated on the Drawings.
b. Each inner duct conduit shall be a separate color.
Conduit joints and bends:

1.
General:
a. Where conduit is underground, under slabs on grade, exposed to the
weather or in NEMA Type 4 or NEMA Type 4X locations, make joints
liquid-tight.
b. Keep bends and offsets in conduit runs to an absolute minimum.
c. All bends shall be symmetrical.
d. For all types of high-voltage conductors, provide bends as required for
lead-covered conductors of equivalent outside diameter.
e. The following conduit systems shall use large radius sweep elbows:
1) Underground conduits.
2) Conduits containing medium voltage cables.
3) Conduits containing shielded cables.
4) Conduits containing fiber optic cables.
f. Provide large radius factory-made bends for 1-1/4-inch trade size or
larger.
g. Make field bends with a radius of not less than the requirements found in
the NEC:
1) The minimum bending radius of the cable must be less than the
radius of the conduit bend.
May 2014
16130-13
9408A10
2)
2.
3.
F.
Make all field bends with power bending equipment or manual

benders specifically intended for the purpose:
a) Make bends so that the conduit is not damaged and the internal
diameter is not effectively reduced.
b) For the serving utilities, make bends to meet their requirements.
h. Replace all deformed, flattened, or kinked conduit.
Threaded conduit:
a. Cut threads on rigid metallic conduit with a standard conduit cutting die
that provides a 3/4-inch per foot taper and to a length such that all bare
metal exposed by the threading operation is completely covered by the
couplings or fittings used. In addition, cut the lengths of the thread such
that all joints become secure and wrench tight just preceding the point
where the conduit ends would butt together in couplings or where conduit
ends would butt into the ends or shoulders of other fittings.
b. Thoroughly ream conduit after threads have been cut to remove burrs.
c. Use bushings or conduit fittings at conduit terminations.
d. On exposed conduits, repair scratches and other defects with galvanizing
repair stick, Enterprise Galvanizing Galvabar or CRC Zinc It.
e. Coat conduit threads with an approved electrically conductive sealant and
corrosion inhibitor that is not harmful to the conductor insulation:
1) Use KOPR-Shield as manufactured by T&B on threads of ferrous
conduit.
2) Apply to the male threads and tighten joints securely.
3) Clean excess sealant from exposed threads after assembly.
f. Securely tighten all threaded connections.
g. Any exposed threaded surface must be cleaned and coated with a
galvanizing solution so that all exposed surfaces have a galvanized
protective coating.
PVC:
a. Use approved solvent-weld cement specifically manufactured for the
purpose. Spray type cement is not allowed.
b. Apply heat for bends so that conduit does not distort or discolor. Use a
spring mandrel as required to assure full inside diameter at all bends:
1) Utilize a heater specifically for PVC conduit as recommended by the
conduit manufacturer.
Conduit sealing and drainage:

1.
Conduit drainage and sealing other than required for hazardous and classified
areas:
a. Provide sealing and drainage in vertical drops of long (in excess of
20 feet), exterior, above grade conduit runs at the points at which the
conduit enter buildings, switchgear, control panels, lighting panelboards,
and other similar enclosures.
b. Provide seal fittings with drains in vertical drops directly above grade for
exterior, above grade conduit runs that are extended below grade.
c. Provide conduit seals with drains in areas of high humidity and rapidly
changing temperatures:
1) Where portions of an interior raceway pass through walls, ceilings or
floors that separate adjacent areas having widely different
temperatures.
d. Provide conduit seals similar to O/Z Gedney (Type CSM) on all conduits
between corrosive and non-corrosive areas.
May 2014
16130-14
9408A10
e.
2.
Seal one end only of all underground conduits at highest point with O/Z
Gedney sealing (non-hazardous) filling, or equal.
Install seals with drains at any location along conduit runs where moisture may
condense or accumulate. This requirement includes, but is not limited to, the
following locations: control panels, junction boxes, pullboxes, or low points of
conduit.
G.
Conduit supports:
1.
General:
a. Provide appropriate hangers, supports, fasteners, and seismic restraints
to suit applications:
2) Provide support materials consistent with the type of conduit being
installed as specified in Section 16130.
b. Support conduit at the intervals required by the NEC.
c. Perforated strap and plumbers tape are not acceptable for conduit
supports.
2.
Conduit on concrete or masonry:
a. Use 1-hole malleable iron straps with metallic or plastic expansion
anchors and screws or support from preset inserts.
b. Use preset inserts in concrete when possible.
c. Use pipe spacers (clamp backs) in wet locations.
d. On plaster or stucco, use 1-hole malleable iron straps with toggle bolts.
3.
Suspended conduit:
a. Use malleable iron factory-made split-hinged pipe rings with threaded
suspension rods sized for the weight to be carried (minimum 3/8-inch
diameter), Kindorf, or equal.
b. For grouped conduits, construct racks with threaded rods and tiered angle
iron or preformed channel cross members. Clamp each conduit
individually to a cross member. Where rods are more than 2 feet long,
provide rigid sway bracing.
4.
Supports at structural steel members:
a. Use beam clamps.
b. Drilling or welding may be used only as specified or with approval of the
Engineer.
5.
PCS systems:
a. Provide right angle beam clamps and U bolts specially formed and sized
to snugly fit the outside diameter of the coated conduit. Provide "U" bolts
with PVC encapsulated nuts that cover the exposed portions of the
threads.
b. Securely fasten exposed conduits with Type 316 stainless steel clamps or
straps or PVC-coated clamps or straps manufactured and supplied by the
PCS conduit supplier.
H.
Expansion or expansion/deflection fittings:

1.
General:
a. Align expansion coupling with the conduit run to prevent binding.
b. Follow manufacturers instructions to set the piston opening.
c. Install expansion fittings across concrete expansion joints and at other
locations where necessary to compensate for thermal or mechanical
expansion and contraction.
d. Furnish fittings of the same material as the conduit system.
May 2014
16130-15
9408A10
2.
3.
For metallic conduit (PCS and GRC) provide expansion or

expansion/deflection couplings, as appropriate, where:
a. Install expansion fittings a minimum of every 200 feet in straight conduit
runs.
For PVC provide expansion or expansion/deflection couplings, as appropriate,
where length change due to temperature variation exceeds 2 inches:
a. Rigidly fix the outer barrel of the expansion coupling so it cannot move.
b. Mount the conduit connected to the piston loosely enough to allow the
conduit to move as the temperature changes.
I.
Empty conduits:
1.
Provide a polyethylene rope rated 250 pounds tensile strength in each empty
conduit more than 10 feet in length.
2.
Seal ends of all conduit with approved, manufactured conduit seals, caps or
plugs immediately after installation:
a. Keep ends sealed until immediately before pulling conductors.
J.
Miscellaneous:
1.
Seal roof penetrations for raceways and other items that penetrate the roof in
accordance with roofing manufacturers instructions and as indicated on the
Drawings.
2.
Provide electrical unions at all points of union between ends of rigid conduit
systems that cannot otherwise be coupled:
a. Running threads and threadless couplings are not allowed.
3.
Replace any conduit installed that the Engineer determines does not meet the
requirements of this Specification.
3.04
ERECTION, INSTALLATION, APPLICATIONS, CONSTRUCTION (NOT USED)
3.05
3.06
3.07

A.
3.08
3.09
CLEANING (NOT USED)
3.10
3.11
PROTECTION
A.
3.12

END OF SECTION
May 2014
16130-16
9408A10
SECTION 16133
DUCT BANKS
PART 1
1.01
1.02
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes:
1.
Electrical underground duct banks.
2.
Duct spacing and terminations.
3.
Steel reinforcing of concrete.
4.
Excavation and patching.
5.
Coordination with other underground utilities.
6.
Concrete.
B.
Related sections:
1.
2.
3.
b. Section 02318 - Trenching.
c. Section 02952 - Pavement Restoration and Rehabilitation.
d. Section 03301 - Concrete Work.
e. Section 16130 - Conduits.
f. Section 16133 - Common Work Results for Electrical.
REFERENCES
A.
1.03
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.04
GENERAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
Provide trenching, forming, rebar, spacers, conduit, concrete, backfill, and

compaction necessary for the complete installation of the duct banks.
B.
Provide reinforced concrete duct banks for all conduits installed below grade, on the
site, below structures, or in contact with the earth, unless otherwise indicated on the
Drawings.
May 2014
16133-1
9408A10
1.05
1.06
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Product data:
1.
PVC conduit spacers.
2.
Detectable underground marking tape.
3.
Pull line.
C.
Provide applicable submittal documents as specified in:

1.
Section 02318.
2.
Section 03301.
D.
Shop drawings:
1.
Submit site plan drawings of duct banks including underground profiles
indicating all underground utilities.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.07

A.
1.08

A.
1.09
1.10
1.11
WARRANTY
A.
1.12
SYSTEM START-UP
A.
1.13
1.14
1.15
PART 2
2.01
PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Conduit spacers:
May 2014
16133-2
9408A10
1.

a. Carlon Snap-Loc.
b. Cantex.
c. Osburn Associates, Inc.
B.
Detectable underground marking tape:

1.
a. Blackburn Manufacturing Company.
b. Pro-Line Safety Products.
c. Panduit.
C.
Pull line:
1.
a. Arnco.
b. Greenlee.
c. Osburn Associates, Inc.
2.02
2.03
MATERIALS
2.04
A.
Provide conduit as specified in Section 16130:

1.
Use duct suitable for use with 90-degree Celsius rated conductors.
B.
Provide reinforcing steel as specified in Section 03301:

1.
Provide minimum Number 4 reinforcing steel.
MANUFACTURED UNITS
A.
Conduit spacers:
1.
Provide conduit spacers recommended by the conduit manufacturer or
specified above.
2.
Saddle type.
3.
Non-metallic, non-corrosive, non-conductive.
4.
Interlocking type:
a. Vertical interlocking.
b. Horizontal interlocking.
5.
Suitable for concrete encasement.
6.
Molded-in rebar holder.
7.
Accommodates 2-inch through 6-inch conduit sizes.
8.
Relieves the conduit from both horizontal and vertical stresses.
B.
Pull line:
1.
Minimum 1/4-inch wide, flat design.
2.
Polyester.
3.
Minimum pulling strength 1,200 pounds.
C.
Detectable marking tape:

1.
Provide a detectable tape, locatable by a cable or metal detector from above
the undisturbed grade.
2.
Aluminum core laminated between polyethylene film.
3.
Six-inch wide red tape imprinted with black lettering "CAUTION - BURIED
ELECTRIC UTILITIES."
May 2014
16133-3
9408A10
2.05
2.06
2.07
2.08
MIXES
A.
Concrete mix requirements as specified in Section 03301.
2.09
2.10
FINISHES (NOT USED)
2.11
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
3.02
3.03
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
Duct banks:
1.
Install duct banks encased in concrete at least 24 inches below finish grade,
unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
2.
Damage minimization:
a. Conduit should not be left exposed in an open trench longer than is
necessary.
b. Protect all underground duct banks against damage during pouring of
concrete or backfilling.
3.
All plastic conduit fittings to be joined should be exposed to the same
temperature conditions for a reasonable length of time before assembly.
4.
Provide No. 4/0 American Wire Gauge bare copper ground wire the entire
length of duct bank and bond to the grounding system as indicated on the
Drawings.
5.
Install underground ducts to be self-draining:
a. Slope duct banks away from buildings to handholes.
b. Slope duct banks uniformly from handholes and pull boxes to other
handholes or pullboxes or both ways from high points between handholes
or pullboxes.
c. Slope a minimum of 1/4 inch per 10 feet.
6.
Install pull line in spare conduits:
a. Provide adequate pull line at both ends of conduits to facilitate conductor
pulling.
b. Cap above ground spare conduit risers at each end with screw-on conduit
caps.
May 2014
16133-4
9408A10
C.
Trenching:
1.
Perform trenching as specified in Section 02318.
2.
Trench must be uniformly graded with the bottom, rock free and covered with
select material.
3.
Whenever possible, use the walls of the trench as forms for concrete
encasement:
a. Forms are required where the soil is not self-supporting.
4.
Avoid damaging existing ducts, conduits, cables, and other utilities.
D.
Duct spacing:
1.
Separate conduits with manufactured plastic spacers using a minimum space
between the outside surfaces of adjacent conduits of 2 inches:
a. Separate medium voltage ducts a minimum of 7.5 inches on center.
2.
Install spacers to maintain uniform spacing of duct assembly a minimum of
4 inches above the bottom of the trench during concrete pour. Install spacers
on 8-foot maximum intervals:
a. Due to some distortion of conduit from heat, and other means, it may be
necessary to install extra spacers within the duct bank:
1) Install the intermediate set of spacers within normal required spacing
to maintain the proper horizontal clearance:
a) Clearance is required to allow the proper amount of concrete to
infiltrate vertically among the duct to ensure proper protection.
3.
Spacers shall not be located at the center of a bend:
a. Locate spacer in the tangent, free of the coupling on fabricated bends.
b. Locate spacers midway between the tangent and the center bend on
trench formed sweeps.
E.
Terminating:
1.
Use bell ends in duct at entrances into cable vaults.
2.
Make conduit entrances into cable vaults tangential to walls of cable vault.
3.
Form trapezoidal transitions between duct bank and cable vaults as needed in
order to ensure adequate cable bending radius for the duct bank-to-vault
transition.
F.
Concrete:
1.
Install concrete as specified in Section 03301.
2.
Provide nonferrous tie wires to prevent displacement of the conduits during
pouring of concrete:
a. Tie wire shall not act as a substitute for spacers.
3.
Install minimum 3-inch cover around conduit and rebar.
4.
Consolidation of encasement concrete around duct banks shall be by hand
pudding, with no mechanical vibration.
5.
Conduit is subject to temperature rise. As concrete cures, allow the free end to
expand by pouring the concrete from the center of the run or from one tie in
point.
G.
Marking tape:
1.
Install a detectable marking tape 12 inches above the duct bank the entire
length of the duct bank.
May 2014
16133-5
9408A10
H.
For conduit installations beneath building slabs:

1.
Install steel reinforced concrete duct banks under all building slabs as
indicated on the Drawings:
a. Where duct banks enter through building walls, foundation walls, stem
walls, etc. make connections as indicated on the Drawings.
b. Where duct banks terminate with conduit risers entering building walls,
install an expansion/deflection fitting or a flat-wise elbow (elbow parallel to
building wall) in order to accommodate differential movement between the
conduits and structure.
I.
Restore all surfaces to their original condition as specified in Section 02952, unless
otherwise specified.
3.04
3.05
3.06
3.07

A.
3.08
3.09
CLEANING
A.
Clean conduits of dirt and debris by use of an appropriately sized steel mandrel no
less than 1/2 inch smaller than the inside diameter of the conduit.
3.10
3.11
PROTECTION
3.12
A.
B.
Provide shoring and pumping to protect the excavation and safety of workers.
C.
Protect excavations with barricades as required by applicable safety regulations.

END OF SECTION
May 2014
16133-6
9408A10
SECTION 16134
BOXES
PART 1
1.01
1.02
GENERAL
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes:
1.
Device boxes.
2.
Raceway system boxes.
B.
Related sections:
1.
2.
3.
REFERENCES
A.
B.

1.
A 47 - Standard Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings.
2.
D 149 - Standard Test Method for Dielectric Breakdown Voltage and Dielectric
Strength of Solid Electrical Insulating Materials at Commercial Power
Frequencies.
3.
D 495 - Standard Test Method for High-Voltage, Low-Current, Dry Arc
Resistance of Solid Electrical Insulation.
4.
D 570 - Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics.
5.
D 648 - Standard Test Method for Deflection Temperature of Plastics Under
Flexural Load in the Edgewise Position.
6.
D 790 - Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and
Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials.
7.
D 792 - Standard Test Methods for Density and Specific Gravity (Relative
Density) of Plastics by Displacement.
C.
Joint Industry Conference (JIC).
D.

1.
94 - Standard for Tests for Flammability of Plastic Materials for Parts in
Devices and Appliances.
May 2014
16134-1
9408A10
1.03
1.04
1.05
1.06
1.07
DEFINITIONS
A.
B.
1.
Arcing parts: Circuit breakers, motor controllers, switches, fuses, or any device
intended to interrupt current during its operation.
2.
Raceway system boxes: Boxes that are used for wire and cable pullboxes,
conduit junction boxes, or terminal boxes.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
Provide outlet boxes for devices such as switches, receptacles, telephone and
computer jacks, security systems, junction, and pullboxes for use in the raceway
systems, etc.
B.
Provide boxes and conduit bodies as indicated on the Drawings or as needed to

complete the raceway installation.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Product data:
1.
Manufacturer.
2.
Materials.
3.
Dimensions:
a. Height.
b. Width.
c. Depth.
d. Weight.
e. NEMA rating.
4.
Conduit entry locations.
5.
Catalog cut sheets.
6.
Installation instructions.
C.
Shop drawings:
1.
Include identification and sizes of pull boxes.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
Regulatory requirements:
1.
Outlet boxes shall comply with all applicable standards of:
a. JIC.
b. NEC.
c. NEMA.
d. UL.

A.
May 2014
16134-2
9408A10
1.08

A.
1.09
SEQUENCING
A.
1.10
1.11
WARRANTY
A.
1.12
SYSTEM START-UP
A.
1.13
1.14
1.15
PART 2
2.01
PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS
A.

1.
Pressed steel boxes:
a. Steel City.
b. Appleton.
c. Crouse - Hinds.
d. Thomas & Betts.
2.
Plastic coated steel boxes:
a. Rob Roy.
b. OCAL.
3.
Cast device boxes:
a. Appleton.
b. Crouse - Hinds.
c. OZ/Gedney.
4.
Formed steel enclosures:
a. Hoffman.
b. Thomas and Betts.
c. Stahlin.
d. Rittal.
5.
Stainless steel enclosures:
a. Hoffman.
b. Stahlin.
c. Rittal.
6.
Pressed steel boxes and concrete boxes:
a. Appleton.
May 2014
16134-3
9408A10
b.
c.
d.
Steel City.
Cooper/Crouse Hinds.
OZ/Gedney.
2.02
2.03
2.04
MANUFACTURED UNITS
A.
Pressed steel boxes:

1.
One-piece galvanized pressed steel.
2.
Knockout type boxes.
3.
Minimum size 4-inch square by 2-1/8-inch deep.
B.
Threaded-hub boxes:
1.
Construction:
a. With internal green ground screw.
b. Furnished with a suitable gasketed cover.
c. With integral cast mounting lugs when surface mounted.
d. Conduit sizes range from 3/4 inch to 1 inch.
e. Tapered threaded hubs with integral bushing.
2.
Malleable iron boxes:
a. Conforming to ASTM A 47 Grade 32510.
C.
Plastic coated threaded-hub boxes:

1.
Construction:
a. With internal green ground screw.
b. Furnished with a suitable gasketed cover.
c. With integral cast mounting lugs when surface mounted.
d. Conduit sizes range from 3/4 inch to 1 inch.
e. Double coated with a nominal 0.002-inch (2 mil) urethane on both the
interior and exterior before application of PVC coating.
f. With a minimum 0.040-inch (40 mil) PVC coating bonded to exterior.
g. With pressure sealing sleeve to protect the connection with conduit.
D.
Formed steel enclosures:

1.
Steel:
a. NEMA Type 12.
b. Fabricated from 14-gauge steel, minimum.
c. All seams continuously welded ground smooth.
d. Door:
1) Rolled lip around 3 sides.
2) Attached to enclosure by means of a continuous stainless steel hinge
and pin.
e. Neoprene door gasket to provide a watertight, dusttight, oiltight seal:
1) Attached with an adhesive.
2) Retained by a retaining strip.
f. Fabricate all external removable hardware for clamping the door to the
enclosure body from zinc-plated heavy gauge steel:
1) With a hasp and staple for padlocking.
g. Provide large enclosures with door and body stiffeners for extra rigidity.
h. No holes or knockouts.
May 2014
16134-4
9408A10
i.
2.
E.
Finish:
1) ANSI-61 gray electrostatically applied polyester powder inside and
out over cleaned and primed surfaces.
2) White electrostatically applied polyester powder mounting plate.
j.
Heavy gauge steel external mounting brackets when surface mounted.
Stainless steel:
a. NEMA Type 4 or 4X.
b. Fabricated from 14-gauge Type 316 stainless steel.
c. All seams continuously welded.
d. Door:
1) Rolled lip around 3 sides.
2) Attached to enclosure by means of a continuous stainless steel hinge
and pin.
e. Neoprene door gasket to provide a watertight seal:
1) Attached with an adhesive.
2) Retained by a retaining strip.
f. Fabricate all external removable hardware for clamping the door to the
enclosure body from heavy gauge stainless steel:
1) With a hasp and staple for padlocking.
g. Provide large enclosures with door and body stiffeners for extra rigidity.
h. No holes or knockouts.
i.
Finish:
1) Brushed.
j.
Stainless steel external mounting brackets when surface mounted.
Cast iron junction boxes:

1.
NEMA Type 4.
2.
Recessed cover boxes.
3.
Suitable for use outdoors where subject to rain, dripping, or splashing water.
4.
Designed for flush mounting in walls or floors:
a. Can be surface mounted using mounting lugs.
5.
Construction:
a. Cast iron box.
b. Covers:
1) Checkered plate covers suitable for foot traffic.
2) When used in areas subject to vehicular traffic H-20 loading.
c. Hot dip galvanized.
d. Neoprene gasket.
e. Stainless steel screw covers.
2.05
2.06
2.07
ACCESSORIES
A.
Fasteners:
1.
Electroplated or stainless steel in boxes with wiring devices.
2.
Screws, nuts, bolts, and other threaded fasteners:
a. Stainless steel.
B.
Provide breather and drain fittings where appropriate.
May 2014
16134-5
9408A10
C.
Internal panels:
1.
Provide internal panels where required for mounting of terminal strips or other
equipment.
2.
With plated steel shoulder studs.
3.
Steel with white polyester powder finish.
2.08
MIXES (NOT USED)
2.09
2.10
FINISHES (NOT USED)
2.11
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
3.02
3.03
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
General:
1.
Provide materials and construction suitable for environmental conditions at the
location of the box as specified in Section 16134.
2.
Provide outlet box materials to match the conduit system:
a. GRC - Cast ferrous boxes.
b. PCS - PVC coated cast ferrous boxes.
3.
Solid type gang boxes:
a. For more than 2 devices.
b. For barriered outlets.
4.
Support all wall mounted NEMA Type 4 or NEMA Type 4X boxes to maintain a
minimum of 7/8-inch free air space between the back of the enclosure and the
wall:
a. Use machined spacers to maintain air space; built-up washers are not
acceptable.
b. Use stainless steel or nylon materials for spacers.
5.
Use cast malleable iron boxes when box must support other devices.
6.
Boxes serving luminaires or devices:
a. Use as pull boxes wherever possible.
7.
Fit all cast boxes and pressed steel boxes for flush mounting in concrete with
cast, malleable box covers and gaskets.
8.
Size boxes in accordance with NEC requirements and to provide sufficient
room for the future components and cables indicated on the Drawings.
9.
For fire-rated construction, provide materials and installation for use in
accordance with the listing requirements of the classified construction.
C.
Outlet boxes:
1.
Locate outlet boxes as indicated on the Drawings:
May 2014
16134-6
9408A10
a.
2.
3.
4.
Adjust locations so as not to conflict with structural requirements or other

trades.
Use deep threaded-hub malleable iron or aluminum boxes:
a. In hazardous areas.
b. Where exposed to the weather.
c. In unheated areas.
d. Where subject to mechanical damage:
1) Defined as exposed boxes less than 10 feet above the floor.
e. To act as a pull box for conductors in a conduit system.
f. Accommodate wiring devices.
Use deep threaded-hub plastic coated malleable iron boxes in corrosive and
NEMA Type 4X area and when the conduit system is PVC coated steel.
Outlet boxes may be used as junction boxes wherever possible.
D.
Pull boxes and junction boxes:

1.
Size pull boxes in accordance with NEC requirements and to provide sufficient
room for any future conduits and cables as indicated on the Drawings.
2.
Install pull boxes such that access to them is not restricted.
E.
For boxes not indicated:

1.
Provide types and mountings as required to suit the equipment and that will be
consistent with the conduit system and environmental conditions as indicated
in Section 16134.
2.
Outlet, switch, and junction boxes for flush-mounting in general purpose
locations:
a. One-piece, galvanized, pressed steel.
3.
Ceiling boxes for flush mounting in concrete:
a. Deep, galvanized, pressed steel.
4.
Outlet, switch, and junction boxes where surface mounted in exposed
locations:
a. Cast ferrous boxes with mounting lugs, zinc or cadmium plating finish.
5.
Outlet, control station, and junction boxes for installation in corrosive locations:
a. Fiberglass reinforced polyester, stainless steel, or plastic coated steel to
match the conduit system.
b. Furnished with mounting lugs.
6.
Boxes for concealed conduit system:
a. Non-fire rated construction:
1) Depth: To suit job conditions and comply with the NEC.
2) For luminaries: Use outlet boxes designed for the purpose:
a) 50 pounds or less: Box marked For Fixture Support.
b) More than 50 pounds: Box listed and marked with the weight of
the fixture to be supported (or support luminaire independent of
the box.)
3) For junction and pull boxes: Use galvanized steel boxes with flush
covers.
4) For switches, receptacles, etc:
a) Plaster or cast-in-place concrete walls: Use 4-inch or
4-11/16-inch galvanized steel boxes with device covers.
b) Walls other than plaster or cast-in-place concrete: Use type of
galvanized steel box which will allow wall plate to cover the
opening made for the installation of the box.
May 2014
16134-7
9408A10
3.04
3.05
3.06
REINSTALLATION (NOT USED)
3.07

A.
3.08
3.09
CLEANING
A.
3.10
3.11
PROTECTION
A.
3.12

END OF SECTION
May 2014
16134-8
9408A10
SECTION 16140
WIRING DEVICES
PART 1
1.01
1.02
1.03
GENERAL
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes:
1.
Switches.
2.
Receptacles.
3.
Plates.
B.
Related sections:
1.
2.
3.
REFERENCES
A.
B.
Federal Specifications (FS):

1.
W-C 596 - Connector, Electrical, Power, General Specification for.
2.
W-S 896/2 - Switches, Toggle (Toggle and Lock), Flush Mounted (General
Specification).
C.

1.
WD1 - General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices.
2.
ICS 5 - Industrial Control and Systems, Control Circuit and Pilot Devices.
3.
OS1 - Sheet-Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers and Box Supports.
4.
WD6 - Wiring Devices Dimensional Specifications.
D.
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL):

1.
20 - General Use Snap Switches.
2.
498 - Standard for Attachment Plugs and Receptacles.
3.
514D - Cover Plates for Flush-Mounted Wiring Devices.
4.
943 - Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupters.
5.
1472 - Solid State Dimming Controls.
DEFINITIONS
A.
May 2014
16140-1
9408A10
B.
1.04
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
1.05
1.06
1.07
Switches, receptacles, and plates as indicated on the Drawings wired and operable
to form a complete system.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Product data:
1.
Catalog cut sheets.
C.
Shop drawings:
1.
Engraving schedule:
a. Furnish complete engraving schedule for engraved nameplates.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
Wiring devices shall be UL listed and labeled.

A.
1.08
1.
GFCI: Ground fault circuit interrupter.
2.
P-S: Pass and Seymour.
3.
Cooper: Cooper Wiring Devices, a division of Cooper Industries.
4.
T&B: Thomas and Betts.

A.
1.09
1.10
1.11
WARRANTY
A.
1.12
SYSTEM START-UP
A.
1.13
1.14
1.15
May 2014
16140-2
9408A10
PART 2
2.01
PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Switches:
1.
a. Hubbell.
b. Leviton.
c. Cooper.
B.
Receptacles:
1.
General purpose receptacles: One of the following or equal:
a. Hubbell.
b. Leviton.
c. Cooper.
C.
Plates:
1.
General location: The following or equal:
a. P-S.
b. Cooper.
2.
Wet or corrosive areas: One of the following or equal:
a. Hubbell.
b. Cooper.
c. T&B.
d. P-S.
3.
In-use covers: One of the following or equal:
a. TayMac.
b. Cooper.
c. P-S.
d. T&B.
2.02
2.03
2.04
MANUFACTURED UNITS
A.
Switches:
1.
General:
a. 120-277 VAC.
b. 20 ampere.
c. Listed in accordance with UL 20.
d. Designed and constructed in accordance with FS W-S-896/2.
e. Back and side wired unless otherwise indicated.
f. Integral grounding terminal.
g. Totally enclosed:
1) Color-coded body with color corresponding to ampere rating.
h. Provide switches with the operator style and contact arrangement as
indicated on the Drawings and as required for proper operation.
i.
Color:
1) Ivory in finished areas.
2) Brown in all other areas.
2.
General purpose switches:
May 2014
16140-3
9408A10
3.
a. Toggle type.
Switches for use with photocell:
a. Maintained contact.
b. Two circuit.
c. Three position:
1) Center off.
B.
Receptacles:
1.
General purpose receptacles:
a. Single or duplex as indicated on the Drawings.
b. 125 VAC.
c. 20 ampere or as indicated on the Drawings.
d. NEMA Type 5-20R configuration for 20 ampere receptacles.
e. Other NEMA configurations as indicated on the Drawings.
f. Listed in accordance with UL 498.
g. Designed and constructed in accordance with FS W-C-596.
h. Back and side wired.
i.
One-piece, rivet-less mounting strap.
j.
Color:
1) Ivory in finished areas.
2) Brown in all other areas.
3) Orange when powered by a UPS.
2.
Ground fault interrupter receptacles (GFCI):
a. 125 VAC.
b. 20 ampere.
c. Trip level 4-6 milliampere.
d. Individual and feed through protection.
e. UL 943 and UL 498 listed.
f. NEMA Type 5-20R configuration.
g. For damp or wet locations:
1) Weather resistant, in accordance with UL 498.
C.
Plates:
1.
General location:
a. Type 302 or 304 stainless steel.
b. Brushed satin finish.
c. Minimum thickness: 0.032 inches.
d. Rectangular or square shape.
e. Engraving:
1) Engrave each switch plate with the following:
a) Area served.
b) Circuit number.
2) Engrave each receptacle plate with the following:
a) Circuit number.
3) Treat engraving to improve visibility and, except for stainless steel
plates, to prevent corrosion.
4) Characters shall be block letter pantograph engraved with a
minimum character height of 1/8-inch.
f. Coordinate the number of gangs, number, and type of openings with the
specific location.
2.
Outdoor and wet areas requiring NEMA Type 4 or NEMA Type 4X enclosures:
a. General:
May 2014
16140-4
9408A10
1)
2)
3)
3.
UL listed for wet locations.

Gasketed.
Die cast metal:
a) Match material to box material.
b. Switches:
1) Lever operated:
a) Provide toggle switch.
c. Receptacles:
1) Weather proof in-use cover:
a) Die cast metal construction with electrostatic powder coating for
corrosion resistance.
b) Gasketed.
c) Lockable.
d) UL listed and in accordance with NEC.
Corrosive areas:
a. Neoprene.
b. Gasketed.
c. Weatherproof.
2.05
2.06
2.07
2.08
MIXES (NOT USED)
2.09
2.10
FINISHES (NOT USED)
2.11
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
3.02
3.03
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
Mounting heights:
1.
Process and production areas:
a. Switches and receptacles 48 inches from finished floor to top of plate.
C.
Switches:
1.
Over 300 Volts:
a. Where switches used in systems of more than 300 volts between
conductors, are to be ganged in outlet boxes, provide switches having no
exposed live parts or use barriers between the individual switches.
May 2014
16140-5
9408A10
D.
Receptacles:
1.
Provide GFCI receptacles as indicated on the Drawings.
a. Provide weather resistant GFCI receptacles in all wet or damp areas.
2.
Mount non-weatherproof receptacles vertically:
a. Ground slot down.
3.
Mount weatherproof receptacles horizontally:
a. Neutral slot up.
E.
Ensure all plates make a firm seal with wall for recessed mounted devices:
1.
Outside edges of plates parallel with building lines.
3.04
3.05
3.06
3.07

A.
3.08
3.09
CLEANING (NOT USED)
3.10
3.11
A.
B.
Demonstrate the following to the Engineer and Owner:

1.
Switching is as indicated on the Drawings.
2.
All circuits conform to the panel schedules.
3.
All ground fault receptacles operate at levels below or equal to OSHA
maximum allowable fault levels.
PROTECTION
A.
3.12

END OF SECTION
May 2014
16140-6
9408A10
SECTION 16150
LOW VOLTAGE WIRE CONNECTIONS
PART 1
1.01
1.02
1.03
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes:
1.
Wire connecting devices.
2.
Terminations.
3.
Splices.
B.
Related sections:
1.
2.
3.
c. Section 16123 - 600 Volt or Less Wires and Cables.
REFERENCES
A.
B.

1.
D 3005 Standard Specification for Low-Temperature Resistant Vinyl Chloride
Plastic Pressure-Sensitive Electrical Insulating Tape.
C.
CSA International (CSA):

1.
C22.2 - No.197-M1983 (R2208) - PVC Insulating Tape.
D.

1.
510 - Standard for Polyvinyl Chloride, Polyethylene, and Rubber Insulating
Tape.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.04
GENERAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
Provide a complete system of wiring connectors, terminators, fittings, etc. for a

complete wiring system suitable for the cables and conductors used.
May 2014
16150-1
9408A10
1.05
1.06
1.07
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Product data:
1.
Catalog cut sheets.
2.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
All materials shall be UL listed.

A.
1.08

A.
1.09
1.10
1.11
WARRANTY
A.
1.12
SYSTEM START-UP
A.
1.13
1.14
1.15
PART 2
2.01
PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers for each type of technology are specified with the equipment in this
Section.
2.02
2.03
2.04
May 2014
16150-2
9408A10
2.05
EQUIPMENT
A.
Control connections:
1.
Use insulated ring type wire terminators for connections to all screw terminals:
a. With chamfered/funneled terminal barrel entry.
b. Deep internal serrations.
c. Long barrel design to reduce electrical resistance and increased
insulator-barrel surface area to ensure that the insulator remains in
contact with the barrel.
d. Electroplated-tin copper conductor.
e. Manufacturer: One of the following or equal:
1) Thomas and Betts, Stakon.
2.
For process equipment connections work from manufacturer's drawings.
B.
Joints, splices, taps, and connections:

1.
600-volt conductors:
a. Use solderless connectors.
b. Use only plated copper alloy connectors or lugs:
1) Aluminum connectors or lugs are not acceptable for copper
conductors.
c. Under those specific conditions where aluminum conductors have been
allowed or are specified then the connectors for aluminum conductors
shall be specifically designed for that purpose.
d. For wire Number 10 AWG and smaller use compression splice caps, with
insulating caps:
1) Manufacturer: One of the following or equal:
a) Buchanan 2006S or 2011S, with 2007 or 2014 insulating caps.
e. For wire Number 8 AWG and larger, use heavy duty copper compression
connectors:
a) Burndy.
b) Thomas and Betts.
f. Heat shrink tubing:
1) Suitable for indoors, outdoors, overhead, direct burial or submerged
applications.
2) Minimum shrink ratio: 4 to 1.
3) Continuous operating temperature: -55 degrees Celsius to
4) Internally applied adhesive sealant.
5) Cross-linked polyolefin:
a) Manufacturers, one of the following or equal:
(1) 3M ITCSN.
(2) Thomas & Betts Shrink-Kon.
2.
Instrumentation class cable splices:
a. Suitable for indoor, outdoors, weather exposed, direct buried, or
submersed applications.
b. Utilizing an epoxy, polyurethane, and re-enterable compounds.
c. For use with shielded or unshielded plastic- and rubber-jacketed, signal,
control, and power cables rated up to 1 kilovolt.
d. Two-part mold body with tongue and groove seams and built in spacer
webbing.
e. Manufacturer: One of the following or equal:
May 2014
16150-3
9408A10
1)
C.
3M - Scotchcast 72-N.
Insulating tape:
1.
General purpose insulating tape:
a. Minimum 7 mil vinyl tape.
b. Suitable for application in an ambient of -18 degrees Celsius
(0 degrees Fahrenheit).
c. Operating range up to 105 degrees Celsius (220 degrees Fahrenheit).
d. Flame retardant, hot- and cold- weather resistant, UV resistant.
e. For use as a primary insulation for wire cable splices up to 600 VAC.
f. Meeting and complying with:
1) ASTM D 3005 Type I.
2) UL 510.
3) CSA C22.2.
g. Manufacturer: One of the following or equal:
1) 3M - Scotch Number Super 33+.
2.
General-purpose color-coding tape:
a. Minimum 7 mil vinyl tape.
b. Suitable for application on PVC and polyethylene jacketed cables.
c. For use indoors and outdoors in weather protected enclosures.
d. Available with the following colors:
1) Red.
2) Yellow.
3) Blue.
4) Brown.
5) Gray.
6) White.
7) Green.
8) Orange.
9) Violet.
e. For use as phase identification, marking, insulating, and harnessing.
f. Meeting and complying with:
1) UL 510.
2) CSA C22.2.
g. Manufacturer: One of the following or equal:
1) 3M - Scotch Number 35.
2.06
2.07
2.08
MIXES (NOT USED)
2.09
2.10
FINISHES (NOT USED)
2.11
PART 3
3.01
EXECUTION
May 2014
16150-4
9408A10
3.02
3.03
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
Load connections:
1.
Connect loads to the circuits as indicated. Color-code all branch circuits as
C.
Zero to 600-volt systems:

1.
Make all connections with the proper tool and die as specified by the device
manufacturer.
2.
Use only tooling and dies manufactured by the device manufacturer.
3.
Insulate all connections and splices with Scotch 33+ tape and Scotchfill, or
pre-molded plastic covers, or heat shrink tubing and caps.
4.
Number all power and control wires before termination.
3.04
3.05
3.06
3.07

A.
3.08
3.09
CLEANING (NOT USED)
3.10
3.11
PROTECTION
A.
3.12

END OF SECTION
May 2014
16150-5
9408A10
SECTION 16151
MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLE CONNECTIONS
PART 1
1.01
1.02
1.03
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes:
1.
Wire connecting devices.
2.
Terminations.
3.
Splices.
B.
Related sections:
1.
2.
3.
b. Section 16151 - General Requirements for Electrical Work.
c. Section 16124 - Medium Voltage Cables.
REFERENCES
A.
B.

1.
48 - IEEE Standard for Test Procedures and Requirements for AlternatingCurrent Cable Terminations Used on Shielded Cables Having Laminated
Insulation Rated 2.5 kV through 765 kV or Extruded Insulation Rated 2.5 kV
through 500 KV.
2.
386 - Standard for Separable Connectors.
3.
404 - IEEE Standard for Extruded and Laminated Dielectric Shielded Cable
Joints Rated 2.5 kV to 500 kV.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.04
GENERAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
Provide a complete system of cables connectors, terminators, fittings, etc. for a

complete cabling system suitable for the cables and conductors used.
May 2014
16151-1
9408A10
1.05
1.06
1.07
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Product data:
1.
Catalog cut sheets.
2.
3.
Medium voltage systems:
a. Documentation demonstrating compliance with the required tests.
b. Characteristics and installation procedures for all splices, terminators, and
junction modules.
C.
Shop drawings:
1.
Drawings showing the installation of junction modules, splices, and
terminators.
D.

1.
Drawings and data for medium voltage cable connectors, splices, and junction
modules.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
All materials shall be UL listed.

A.
1.08

A.
1.09
1.10
1.11
WARRANTY
A.
1.12
SYSTEM START-UP
A.
1.13
1.14
1.15
May 2014
16151-2
9408A10
PART 2
2.01
PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Section.
2.02
2.03
2.04
2.05
EQUIPMENT
A.
Tape:
1.
Fire and electric arc proofing tape:
a. Minimum 30-mil, flexible, elastomer tape that expands in fire to form an
insulating firewall between flame and cable.
b. Bind in place with glass cloth electrical tape.
c. Manufacturer: One of the following or equal:
2.
Glass cloth electrical tape:
a. Thermosetting, 7.4-mil silicone adhesive that performs at Class H
temperatures 180 degrees Celsius (356 degrees Fahrenheit):
b. Use for the following applications:
1) To secure non-PSA insulations such as glass in high-temperature
areas.
2) Splice wire rated at 150 degrees Celsius, 180 degrees Celsius,
3) For binding fire and electric arc proofing tape.
c. Meeting and complying with:
1) MIL-I-19166C.
2) UL recognized component listing for 200 degrees Celsius (Guide
OANZ2, File E17385).
3) CSA accepted component 180 degrees Celsius file LR93411.
d. Manufactured by one of the following or equal:
3.
Self-fusing silicone rubber tape:
a. High-temperature, 12-mil, track resistant, insulating tape.
b. Composed of fully cured inorganic silicone rubber.
c. Use as a protective overwrap for terminating medium voltage cables.
d. Manufacture: One of the following or equal:
B.

1.
Live front terminators:
a. Terminators for shielded solid dielectric plastic-insulated cables shall
utilize factory engineered kits containing all necessary components to
terminate the primary cables and shield systems.
b. All locations exterior of buildings shall be considered outdoors and
appropriate heat shrinkable skirts of a non-tracking material shall be
installed.
May 2014
16151-3
9408A10
c.
2.
Terminators shall be of a material that will relieve the voltage stresses at

the point of termination.
d. Non-tracking.
e. Ultra-violet, ozone, sulphur dioxide resistant.
f. Terminator insulation shall be of a uniform cross section heat shrinkable
polymeric construction with a linear stress relief system.
g. Electrical requirements:
1) Continuous current rating equal to cable.
2) 5 to 8 kV voltage class:
a) Minimum partial discharge voltage (less than 3 pC) 9 kV.
b) AC withstand, 1 minute: 35 kV.
c) DC withstand, 15 minutes: 65 kV.
d) Impulse withstand, 1.2 by 50 microsecond (outdoor) 95 kV
(crest).
e) Impulse withstand, 1.2 by 50 microsecond (indoor) 80 kV (crest).
f) Wet withstand, 10 seconds: 30 kV RMS.
g) Dry withstand, 6 hours: 25 kV RMS.
3) 15 KV voltage class:
a) Minimum partial discharge voltage (less than 3 pC) 13 kV.
b) AC withstand, 1 minute: 50 kV.
c) DC withstand, 15 minutes: 75 kV.
d) Impulse withstand, 1.2 by 50 microsecond (outdoor) 110 kV
(crest).
e) Impulse withstand, 1.2 by 50 microsecond (indoor) 95 kV (crest).
f) Wet withstand, 10 seconds: 45 kV RMS.
g) Dry withstand, 6 hours: 35 kV RMS.
h. The terminator kit shall accommodate a range of cable sizes and be
completely independent of cable manufacturers tolerances. When
assembled on cables the terminator shall be capable of passing the
electrical test in accordance with:
1) IEEE 48.
i.
Manufacturer: one of the following or equal:
1) Raychem.
Dead front terminators (600 Amperes):
a. Terminators for shielded solid dielectric plastic-insulated cables shall be
factory engineered kits containing all necessary components to terminate
the primary cables and shield systems.
b. Modular, pre-molded, fully shielded dead front system.
c. Submersible.
d. Capable of mating with any manufacturers interface in accordance with
IEEE 386.
e. Crimp connector suitable for copper conductors using standard
compression tools to join the conductor to the interface.
f. To be used as an elbow or a "T.
g. Cable stress relief adapters to connect the cable insulation to the dead
front terminator.
h. Heat shrink seal over the junction between the cable insulation and the
terminator body.
i.
Conductor shield shall be grounded near the termination and connected to
the conductive shield of the terminator.
j.
Terminator shall be bolted to the bushing or connector plug, with an
insulating plug to cover the connection.
May 2014
16151-4
9408A10
k.
l.
3.
Conductive cap covering the insulating plug.

Conductive shield to provide reliable continuity between jacket of cable
and connector.
m. Conductive insert around connector to prevent corona.
n. With a capacitive test point on the insulating plug to allow circuit testing
without disturbing the connection.
o. Electrical requirements:
1) Voltage class: 15 kV:
a) Maximum voltage:
(1) Phase to Ground: 8.3 KV RMS.
(2) Phase to Phase: 14.4 KV RMS.
b) Withstand voltage:
(1) Impulse (1.2 by 50 microseconds) 95 KV Crest.
(2) AC 1 minute: 34 KV.
(3) DC 15 minutes: 53 KV.
c) Minimum corona extinction level:
(1) 11 kV RMS.
d) Continuous current rating:
(1) 600 amps RMS.
e) Momentary rating:
(1) 25,000 amps RMS at .17 seconds.
(2) 10,000 amps RMS at 3.0 seconds.
p. Manufacturer: One of the following or equal:
1) Elastimold.
2) 3M.
3) Cooper.
Dead front terminators (200 Amperes):
a. Terminators for shielded solid dielectric plastic-insulated cables shall be
factory engineered kits containing all necessary components to terminate
the primary cables and shield systems.
b. Modular, pre-molded, fully shielded dead front system.
c. Loadbreak type.
d. Submersible.
e. Capable of mating with any manufacturers interface in accordance with
ANSI 386.
f. Crimp connector suitable for copper conductors using standard
compression tools to join the conductor to the interface.
g. To be used as an elbow or a "T.
h. Heat shrink seal over the junction between the cable insulation and the
terminator body.
i.
Conductor shield shall be grounded near the termination and connected to
the conductive shield of the terminator.
j.
Conductive shield to provide reliable continuity between jacket of cable
and connector.
k. Conductive insert around connector to prevent corona.
l.
With a capacitive test point with protective cover to allow circuit testing
without disturbing the connection.
m. With hold-down bail to hold connector to terminal or junction bushing.
n. Electrical requirements:
1) Voltage class 15 kV.
2) Withstand voltage:
a) Impulse (1.2 by 50 microsecond) 95 kV Crest.
May 2014
16151-5
9408A10
4.
b) AC 1 minute: 34 kV.
c) DC 15 minutes: 53 kV.
3) Minimum corona extinction level:
a) Eleven kV RMS.
4) Continuous current rating:
a) 200 A RMS.
5) Momentary rating:
a) 10,000 A RMS, symmetrical at 0.17 seconds.
b) 3,500 A RMS, symmetrical at 3.0 seconds.
o. Manufacturer: One of the following or equal:
1) Elastimold.
2) 3M.
3) Cooper.
Cap all unused taps with an insulating cap approved for the application:
a. Manufacturer: One of the following or equal:
1) Elastimold.
2) 3M.
3) Cooper.
2.06
2.07
2.08
MIXES (NOT USED)
2.09
2.10
FINISHES (NOT USED)
2.11
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
3.02
3.03
INSTALLATION
A.
B.

1.
Ground shield at all terminators and splices.
2.
Install cable terminators and splices in conformance with the manufacturer's
specifications.
3.
Fireproof all exposed portions of cables.
a. Half-lapped layer of fire and electric arc proofing tape, secured with
double-wrapped band of glass cloth electrical tape at each end.
3.04
3.05
May 2014
16151-6
9408A10
3.06
3.07

A.
3.08
3.09
CLEANING (NOT USED)
3.10
3.11
PROTECTION
A.
3.12

END OF SECTION
May 2014
16151-7
9408A10
SECTION 16210
UTILITY COORDINATION
PART 1
1.01
1.02
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes:
1.
Coordination with the utility companies to provide service.
2.
Contractors responsibilities for connecting to utilities and providing utility
service to the facilities.
3.
Descriptions of utility services required.
B.
Related sections:
1.
2.
3.
REFERENCES
A.
1.03
1.04
GENERAL
DEFINITIONS
A.
B.
Utility contacts:
1.
Electric utility: Ponca City Utility Authority (PCUA).
a. Phone Number: 580-767-0405.
b. 516 E. Grand, Ponca City, OK 74601.
c. Contacts:
1) Phil Johnston (General Manager Electric Utilities)
a) Email: johnspa@poncacityok.gov
2) Steve Sullivan (Assistant Director/Operations Engineer)
a) Email: sullisr@poncacityok.gov
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
Electrical service:
1.
Provide all Work and materials and bear all costs for providing temporary
construction power and the permanent electrical service, including but not
limited to:
May 2014
16210-1
9408A10
a.
b.
c.
2.
B.
1.05
1.06
All Work and materials not provided by the electric utility.

All permits and fees required by the electric utility.
The existing switchgear is segmented with a tie breaker to allow for
feeding portions of the pump station from one of two available utility
sources. The secondary utility source is only used during standby
conditions, and must be coordinated with PCUA prior to use. The
secondary utility source is smaller than the main source, and can only
feed Pump Nos. 1, 2, and 3 along with building loads. Coordinate with the
City and the governing utility prior to using this secondary service.
Provide electrical ducts, raceways, conductors and connections indicated on
the Drawings, and all other Work and materials required for a complete
electrical service, including but not limited to the following:
a. Electrical service conduits and conductors from new utility interconnection
handhole to new 4160V switchgear.
b. Electrical HH-2 terminations to transition from utility conductors to City
conductors in the new utility interconnection handhole, HH-2. Contractor
to make all final connections between utility conductors and customer
conductors.
General:
1.
Coordinate and obtain inspections and final installation approval from the
serving utilities and other authorities having jurisdiction.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Certification:
1.
Submit certification that the intended installation has been coordinated with the
utility companies.
2.
Include a narrative description of the utilitys requirements and points of
connection, names and telephone numbers for contacts at the utilities.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
Materials and equipment used in performance of Electrical Work shall be listed or

labeled by UL, or other equivalent recognized independent testing laboratory, for
the class of service intended.
1.07
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING (NOT USED)
1.08

A.
1.09
1.10
SCHEDULING
A.
General:
1.
Refer to requirements in Section 01140.
May 2014
16210-2
9408A10
B.
Electrical systems:
1.
Before bidding, the electrical contractor shall contact the utilities to determine
the Work and materials that will be required from the Contractor, and all fees
and permits that will be required, so that all utility systems furnished by the
Contractor will be included in the bid.
2.
Coordinate Work with Engineer to minimize downtime of existing operating
equipment and electrical distribution systems and to preclude unsafe
operation:
a. Notify Owner 7 days before power interruptions.
b. Coordinate downtime with Owner and local electric utility.
3.
Before commencing Work, coordinate electric service entrance requirements
with local electric utility to assure that the installation will be complete as
specified in these Contract Documents:
a. Ensure power transformer size, electrical characteristics, and location are
consistent with the design and service voltage provided by the electric
utility coordinated with other trades.
C.
Fiber Network System:

1.
Contractor responsibilities:
a. Provide communications box with UPS power (UPS power sourced as
indicated on the Drawings).
b. Provide conduit from the location where PCUA fiber will enter the site to
the communications box location.
c. Coordinate with PCUA and the City regarding timing for PCUA fiber
installation.
d. Coordinate network testing with PCUA and the City.
2.
Refer to the Network Block Diagram in the drawing set for additional detail
regarding this interconnection.
3.
Provide conduit from where fiber enters the site to communications box in new
electrical building. Coordinate location with PCUA.
4.
Provide communications box in new electrical building with components shown
on the Network Block Diagram and coordinate with PCUA for requirements for
components inside the communications box.
5.
Sequencing:
a. Begin coordination with PCUA and the City to determine scheduling of
fiber interconnection early during construction. Prior to PCUA installation
of fiber, the following equipment must be installed and ready for
interconnection:
1) Fiber conduit site entry point to the communications box completed.
2) Communications box installed with power available.
b. Coordinate with PCUA to install fiber up to interconnection point in the
communications box.
c. Coordinate with the City and PCUA to test network connection after the
City has completed the interconnection from PCUA network to the Citys
internal network off-site.
D.
Before commencing Site Work, coordinate underground conduit installations with

other Work to eliminate conflicts and avoid interferences with other underground
systems.
May 2014
16210-3
9408A10
1.11
WARRANTY
A.
1.12
SYSTEM START-UP
A.
1.13
1.14
1.15
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
MANUFACTURERS (NOT USED)
2.02
2.03
MATERIALS
A.
Furnish materials in accordance with the applicable requirements of the utilities and
as specified in these Specifications.
2.04
2.05
EQUIPMENT
A.
Furnish equipment in accordance with the applicable requirements of the utilities

and as specified in these Specifications.
2.06
2.07
2.08
MIXES (NOT USED)
2.09
2.10
FINISHES (NOT USED)
2.11
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
3.02
May 2014
16210-4
9408A10
3.03
INSTALLATION
A.
3.04
3.05
3.06
3.07

A.
3.08
3.09
CLEANING
A.
3.10
3.11
PROTECTION
A.
3.12

END OF SECTION
May 2014
16210-5
9408A10
SECTION 16224
MEDIUM VOLTAGE MOTORS
PART 1
1.01
1.02
1.03
GENERAL
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes:
1.
3-phase, form-wound, squirrel cage induction motors 4,160 volts, 500
horsepower and larger.
B.
Related sections:
1.
2.
3.
b. Section 11312D - Vertical Turbine Pumps.
c. Section 16224 - Common Work Results for Electrical.
d. Section 16267- Medium Voltage Variable Frequency Drives.
e. Section 16295 - Protective Relays.
f. Section 16305 - Electrical System Studies.
REFERENCES
A.
B.
American Petroleum Institute (API):

1.
541 - Form-Wound Squirrel Cage Induction Motors - 500 Horsepower and
Larger.
2.
547 - General Purpose Form-Wound Squirrel Cage Induction Motors - 250
Horsepower and Larger.
3.
670 - Machinery Protection Systems.
C.

1.
MG-1 - Motors and Generators.
D.

1.
112 - Test Procedures for Polyphase Induction Motors and Generators.
DEFINITIONS
A.
May 2014
16224-1
9408A10
1.04
1.05
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
Motors shall be furnished by the equipment manufacturer as specified in Section

11312D.
B.
Coordinate characteristics and requirements of driven equipment, existing reduced

voltage auto-transformer (RVAT) starters, variable frequency drives, and
accessories, to ensure a complete, fully functional, coordinated installation.
C.
Equipment and motor suppliers shall coordinate starting requirements for constant
speed equipment with existing starters:
1.
Provide minimum starting voltage and ramp time criteria.
2.
Coordinate equipment acceleration requirements under all operating
conditions with motor and starter thermal capabilities and available starter
settings.
D.
Coordinate motor characteristics with the short-circuit and coordination study as

specified in Section 16305:
1.
Provide design data as specified for the preliminary studies.
2.
Provide test data for the final studies.
3.
Coordinate recommended motor protection settings for motor protection
relays.
E.
1.
New motors for Pump Nos. 1, 2, and 3 will be fed from existing RVAT starters.
2.
New motors for Pump Nos. 4 and 5 will be driven by a variable frequency drive
or with existing RVAT bypass starter, and will operate existing pumps. Ensure
motor compatibility with existing pump. Refer to Section 11312D for pump
information.
F.
Motor protections:
1.
Motor to include 4 RTDs per phase for motor temperature protection. Design
intent is that there be 2 RTDs per phase for each motor starter. Each motor
has the capability to be powered from a new VFD or an existing RVAT starter.
To facilitate motor protection, 2 RTDs from each motor phase are to be routed
to each starter. Therefore the motor must contain 12 motor temperature RTDs.
This same philosophy applies to motor differential protection CTs. Provide 2
CTs per phase for differential protection. Additional requirements are included
later in this Section.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Product data:
1.
Descriptive bulletins for motor and accessories.
2.
Complete bill of material identifying all accessories.
3.
Machine tag and loop number as identified in the Contract Documents.
4.
Data verifying conformance with API 541:
a. Include data sheets from API 541 Appendix A:
1) Purchaser data completely filled out by pump manufacturer,
reflecting specific project requirements, including all requirements
May 2014
16224-2
9408A10
indicated on the Drawings and as specified in the specifications, and

requirements for compatibility with the pumps.
2) Manufacturer's proposal data completely filled out by the motor
manufacturer.
5.
Weight of complete motor and of rotating parts.
6.
Electrical data:
a. Voltage and phase.
b. Nameplate horsepower.
c. Nameplate service factor.
d. At rated horsepower and voltage:
1) Full load amps.
2) Revolutions per minute.
e. Efficiency at 1/2 and 3/4 and full load.
f. Power factor at 1/2 and 3/4 and full load.
g. Locked rotor withstand time, with the motor at ambient temperature and at
its maximum rated operating temperature, at 70 percent, 80 percent,
90 percent, and 100 percent of rated voltage.
h. NEMA design.
i.
Description of insulation system.
j.
Winding insulation class and rated ambient temperature.
k. Motor data for short-circuit and coordination study, including:
1) Submit design values for machine characteristics, including the
following:
a) Subtransient reactance (X"d).
b) Transient reactance (X'd).
c) Negative sequence reactance (X2).
d) Zero sequence reactance (Xo).
7.
Performance curves:
a. Torque, current, and power factor vs. speed curves at 100 percent rated
voltage.
b. Torque and current curves at 80 percent rated voltage.
c. Rotor and stator thermal damage curves.
d. Motor damage, safe stall time and acceleration curves at 80 percent,
90 percent and 100 percent of rated voltage.
8.
Accessories data:
a. Space heaters:
1) Voltage.
2) Watts.
b. Winding and bearing temperature detectors:
1) Quantity and location.
2) Type.
3) Rating.
4) Recommended alarm and trip settings in degrees Celsius for the
stator winding and bearing temperature detectors.
9.
Mechanical data:
a. Bearing design and bearing life calculations.
10. Recommended spare parts list.
11. Itemized list of special tools required.
C.
Shop drawings:
1.
Dimensional outline, detail, and cross sectional drawings.
May 2014
16224-3
9408A10
a.
2.
3.
1.06
Show location of all terminal boxes, identifying connections to be made in

each.
Wiring diagrams for all accessory devices, including RTDs, current
transformers, space heaters, and vibration switches.
Dimensions and arrangements of terminal boxes showing terminal
identification and locations, and number and size of conduit entries.
D.
Certification that the selected motor meets the compatibility requirement specified
herein.
E.
Test reports:
1.
Factory test procedure.
2.
Submit certified factory test reports for all tests specified.
3.
Provide final machine characteristic data determined from the tests.
F.
Operations and maintenance data:

1.
Spare parts list with supplier names and part numbers.
2.
Start-up and commissioning instructions and data.
3.
Maintenance manual:
a. Instructions covering all details pertaining to care and maintenance of all
equipment as well as identifying all parts.
b. Include, at a minimum, the following:
1) As-built version of all submittal drawings.
2) Safety procedures, equipment, and precautions.
3) Initial test, adjustment, alignment, and start-up procedures, including
applicable values and tolerances.
4) Procedures for normal starting, running, and shutdown.
5) Procedures for emergency shutdown.
6) Periodic inspections and adjustments.
7) Lubrication requirements.
8) Routine maintenance and repairs.
9) Special tools and recommended spare parts.
10) Test reports.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
Furnish motors meeting the requirements of API 541:

1.
Including optional requirements identified in these specifications and where
required for compatibility with the driven equipment.
C.
Certify that the motor, when installed and driven by the actual variable frequency
drive furnished:
1.
Is capable of satisfactory performance under all specified conditions with the
actual pumps furnished.
2.
Meets the requirements of the latest edition of NEMA MG-1 Part 31.
3.
Is matched to the actual variable frequency drive being furnished.
4.
Will not experience premature bearing failure due to induced voltages or
currents caused by the high frequency output of the drive.
May 2014
16224-4
9408A10
1.07
1.08

A.
B.
Energize space heaters upon receipt of the motor at the jobsite using construction
power source, and keep heaters energized from this source until motors are ready
for service, and heater power is available from the starter or drive.
PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
A.
B.
Environmental requirements:
1.
The equipment shall be de-rated in accordance with the manufacturers
guidelines for the project altitude and ambient temperature as specified in
Section 16224.
1.09
1.10
1.11
WARRANTY
A.
1.12
SYSTEM START-UP (NOT USED)
1.13
1.14
1.15
MAINTENANCE
A.
PART 2
2.01
Furnish the following spare parts:

1.
One complete set of air filters for each motor.
PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS
A.

1.
National Oilwell Varco.
2.
General Electric.
3.
Teco Westinghouse.
4.
Toshiba.
May 2014
16224-5
9408A10
2.02
2.03
2.04
2.05
EQUIPMENT
A.
General:
1.
3 phase induction motors.
2.
Voltage: 4,000 volts, designed to operate on system with nominal 4,160 volts.
3.
Motors driving identical machines shall be identical.
4.
All motors shall be inverter duty rated:
a. Compatible with the variable frequency drives furnished.
b. Inverter duty rated and labeled.
c. In conformance with NEMA MG-1 Part 31.
d. Winding insulation in conformance with NEMA MG-1 Part 31.40.4.2.
e. Capable of running continuously at minimum pump speed, with no harmful
effects or overheating.
f. Provide shaft grounding brushes to prevent bearing damage from induced
shaft voltage.
g. Provide additional features as required to prevent premature failure of any
motor component due to operation with the variable frequency drives
being furnished.
5.
Efficiency and power factor:
a. The guaranteed motor efficiency at rated voltage and frequency shall not
be less than 95.2 percent at full load, 95.0 percent at 3/4 load, and
94.8 percent at 1/2 load.
b. The guaranteed power factor at rated voltage and frequency shall not be
less than 84 percent at full load, 80 percent at 3/4 load, and 72 percent at
1/2 load.
c. Coordinate power factor correction capacitors requirement with starter
supplier. Minimum corrected full-load power factor is 95 percent.
d. Determine efficiencies in accordance with IEEE 112, Method F.
6.
Horsepower as indicated on the Drawings and equipment schedules:
a. Horsepower ratings indicated on the Drawings are based on vendors
estimates. Provide motors sized for the load of the actual equipment
furnished without operating in the service factor.
1) If the size of the motor required to drive the actual equipment
furnished is larger than the size indicated on the Drawings, make
structural, mechanical, and electrical changes that are necessitated
by the increase, including but not limited to:
a) Motor starter or VFD rating.
b) Electrical distribution equipment size and ratings.
c) Electrical service and transformer sizes.
d) Conductor and conduit sizes for service, feeder, and motor
branch circuit.
7.
Service factor:
a. 1.15 service factor when operating on a constant speed starter.
b. 1.0 service factor when operating on a variable frequency drive.
May 2014
16224-6
9408A10
8.
Torque:
a. Provide motors that develop sufficient torque to accelerate the actual load
to full speed at voltage 10 percent less than motor nameplate rating.
b. When started using reduced voltage starters:
1) Provide motors that develop sufficient torque to accelerate the actual
load to full speed at the starting ramp and current limit of the starter.
9.
Enclosures:
a. As specified in the individual equipment specifications.
b. Designed specifically for outdoor installations in areas with wind-blown
dust.
c. Provide with filters for inlet air passages:
1) Filters must remove 90 percent of particulates 10 microns and larger.
2) Easily replaceable while motor is operating.
10. Hardware:
a. Type 316 stainless steel.
11. Conduit boxes:
a. Cast iron or stamped steel.
b. Provide gaskets at the following interfaces:
1) Frames and conduit boxes.
2) Conduit boxes and box covers.
3) Size as required to accommodate conductor and conduit quantities
and sizes indicated on the Drawings and specified in the conduit
schedule.
c. Main power conduit box:
1) Provide NEMA 2-hole pads mounted on standoff insulators for
terminating medium-voltage power cables.
2) Provide space for medium-voltage terminations including stress
cones, and adequate space to allow connections without bending
incoming cables beyond cable manufacturer's minimum bending
radius recommendations.
3) Suitable for bottom conduit entry as indicated on the Drawings.
4) Provide a grounding bus inside the conduit box for motor frame
grounding.
d. Accessory terminal boxes:
1) Provide a separate conduit box for motor winding heater
connections.
2) Provide a separate conduit box for RTD connections.
3) Provide a separate conduit box with short-circuiting terminal blocks
for current transformer connections:
a) Current transformer terminals may be located in the main power
conduit box provided that suitable barriers are installed to isolate
the terminals from medium-voltage connections, the conduit
entry for CT leads into the isolated terminal section, and that the
terminals are accessible without removing the main power
conduit box cover.
12. Motor bearings:
a. Antifriction.
b. Bearings and lubrication suitable for ambient temperature and
temperature rise.
c. Suitable for intended application and have ABMA L-10 rating life of
60,000 hours or more.
d. Provide water cooling if required to meet the L-10 life rating:
May 2014
16224-7
9408A10
1)
2)
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
B.
Using pump discharge water.

Coordinate pressure and flow rate requirements with the pump
manufacturer.
3) Coordinate inlet and outlet connection details and requirements with
the pump manufacturer.
4) Use stainless steel for all water pipes and coding coils.
Fit bearings with easily accessible lubrication fittings.
Provide sight glasses for all oil reservoirs.
Thrust bearings suitable for the weight of the rotor and pump plus
maximum down thrust delivered by the pump, and for any up thrust that
can be delivered by the pump.
Insulate all bearings.
Coordinate all motor protection methods for VFD-driven motors with the
VFD provider, including but not limited to, protection from induced
currents in the motor bearings.
1) It is the intent of these specifications that all equipment necessary to
protect the motor be coordinated and confirmed between the motor
and VFD supplier.
2) Provide insulated bearings for motors driven by variable frequency
drives.
3) Refer to Section 16267.
Stator:
1.
Stator core:
a. Built up from high grade, non-aging laminated silicon steel.
b. Insulate each lamination to minimize eddy current losses.
2.
Stator windings:
a. Form-wound copper coils.
b. All coils of the same size and shape.
c. Strand insulation: Polyester glass fiber or equal high temperature
insulating film.
d. Turn-to-turn insulation:
1) Designed to prevent insulation damage from voltage surges.
2) For variable frequency drive applications, design for surges as
identified in NEMA MG1 part 31, paragraph 31.40.4.2.
e. Coil insulation: Suitable for voltage class of the motor, tightly applied to
prevent all voids.
f. Insulation class: F.
g. Design temperature rise consistent with Class B insulation when
delivering full motor service factor at an ambient temperature of
40 degrees Celsius.
h. Crimp and silver solder all coil and lead connections.
i.
Fully insulate and brace end turns, including all coil and lead connections.
Provide surge ring and bracing suitable for maximum fault current as
determined by the short-circuit and coordination study.
3.
Entire stator vacuum pressure impregnated with nonhygroscopic polyester or
epoxy resin, and heat cured.
4.
Motor leads:
a. Insulated leads with non-wicking, non-hydroscopic material. Class F
insulation.
5.
Noise:
a. Maximum operating noise level of 85 dB measured as per IEEE 85.
May 2014
16224-8
9408A10
C.
Rotor:
1.
Shaft:
a. Constructed of forged or rolled steel, machined and finished.
b. Sufficient strength to withstand all stresses resulting from normal
operation at any speed up to 125 percent of synchronous speed.
c. Connections to match driven equipment.
2.
Rotor core:
a. Built up from high grade, non-aging laminated silicon steel.
b. Insulate each lamination to minimize eddy current losses.
3.
Rotor bars:
a. Copper or copper alloy.
b. Size and shape as required to provide starting and running characteristics
compatible with the driven load and starting method.
c. Secured to the rotor slots to minimize movement or vibration.
d. Attach bars to end rings by induction or torch brazing.
4.
Statically and dynamically balance rotor before assembly into the motor.
5.
Provide anti-reverse ratchet.
2.06
2.07
ACCESSORIES
A.
Surge arresters:
1.
Furnish metal oxide surge arresters in the main power conduit box.
2.
Install low-impedance ground connection between stator core and ground bus
in main power conduit box.
a. No. 4/0 AWG minimum.
B.
Nameplates:
1.
Provide all motors with a permanent, stainless steel nameplate indelibly
stamped or engraved with:
a. NEMA standard motor data.
b. Bearing description and lubrication instructions.
C.
Space heaters:
1.
Provide belted or cartridge space heaters mounted within the motor enclosure
sized to heat the motor winding to approximately 5 degrees Celsius above
ambient temperature.
2.
Space heater rating shall be 120 volts, single-phase, unless otherwise
specified.
3.
Power leads for heaters wired into a separate conduit box.
4.
Installed within motor enclosure adjacent to core iron.
D.
Winding temperature detectors:

1.
Provide factory installed winding temperature detector with leads terminating in
a separate conduit box:
a. Motors 200 HP and less:
1) Winding:
a) RTD type, 1 per phase.
b. Motors greater than 200 HP:
1) Winding:
a) RTD type, 4 per phase.
May 2014
16224-9
9408A10
c.
d.
Platinum, 100 ohms nominal at 0 degrees Celsius.

Temperature coefficient of resistance compatible with monitoring
equipment.
E.
Vibration detectors:
1.
As indicated on the Drawings.
2.
Vibration switches:
a. Furnish three switches, one installed to respond to vibration along the X
axis, the other to vibration along the Y axis, and the third to vibration along
the Z axis.
b. 20-second time delay on motor start, as determined from motor running
input.
c. Two form C output relays:
1) Each rated for 120 VAC, 5 amperes.
2) Manual reset.
3) One shutdown contact adjustable from 0.1 to 1.5 inches per second.
4) One alarm contact adjustable from 10 to 90 percent of the shutdown
setting.
5) Time delay for each output, independently adjustable from 2 to 15
seconds.
d. Metrix 440, or equal.
e.
3.
Vibration transducers:
a. Remote-mounted accelerometer in outdoor weather-protected housing,
Class I, Div 2.
b. Same manufacturer as vibration switch. Metrix SA6200A with 7295
housing or equal.
c. Securely threaded directly into motor frame near the top of the motor.
d. Connect each transducer to its switch with moisture-resistant cable with
stainless steel armor and jacket, as recommended by the transducer
manufacturer. Length as required to connect transducer to remotemounted switch. Metrix 9344-111, or equal
4.
Vibration Monitor:
a. Convert accelerometer input to vibration velocity.
b. Power supply: 120 VAC.
5.
Provide dedicated junction box(es) and PCS conduit system to serve as
protection for vibration monitor sensor(s) to vibration monitor. Make every
effort to limit exposure, and minimize lengths to vibration sensors and
associated cables. Protect equipment in conduit as much as possible:
a. Acceptance of the vibration monitoring conduit and protection system is at
the sole discretion of the ENGINEER.
1) Replace all items that do not meet the requirements as specified.
F.
Current transformers:
1.
Furnish current transformers as specified in Section 16295 in the main power
conduit box for motor differential protection as indicated on the Drawings.
2.
Connect to short-circuiting terminal blocks in the current transformer accessory
conduit box.
3.
Six current transformers, two per each phase.
a. One set of CTs will be connected to the new VFD starter while the other
set of CTs will be connected to the existing RVAT starter.
4.
Core balance, compatible with motor protection relay furnished.
May 2014
16224-10
9408A10
5.
Ratio and accuracy class as determined by the short-circuit and coordination

study, and for the actual connections (core balance).
2.08
MIXES (NOT USED)
2.09
2.10
FINISHES (NOT USED)
2.11

A.
Factory tests:
1.
The test may be observed by the ENGINEER and OWNER.
2.
Submit test procedure a minimum of six weeks before factory tests.
3.
Perform tests on all motors in accordance with API 541 and IEEE 112.
Perform tests required by these standards for all motors, and the following
tests as described in API 541:
a. Surge comparison test.
b. Component balance.
c. Bearing dimensional and alignment checks.
d. DC high-potential test to establish reference values for field tests.
e. Air filter differential pressure test.
f. Temperature rise at service factor load:
1) In accordance with actual loading method as defined in IEEE 112.
4.
Perform API 541 complete tests on one motor for each application to
determine the following:
a. Efficiency and power factor at 50 percent, 75 percent, and 100 percent of
full load and at full service factor load:
1) In accordance with Method F as defined in IEEE 112.
b. Locked rotor power factor.
c. Full load current and slip.
d. Locked rotor and breakdown torque.
e. Speed-torque curve.
f. Noise levels.
B.
Test one or more motors with complete equipment system as required by Section
11312D.
PART 3
3.01
EXECUTION
EXAMINATION
A.
3.02
3.03
INSTALLATION
A.
May 2014
16224-11
9408A10
3.04
3.05
3.06
3.07
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL (NOT USED)
3.08
3.09
CLEANING
A.
3.10

A.
3.11
PROTECTION
3.12

A.
Motor Data Sheet.
May 2014
16224-12
9408A10
MEDIUM-VOLTAGE MOTOR DATA SHEET

MOTOR
NUMBER
SPECIFICATION
MACHINE
__________________
NUMBER
OF
MOTOR
NAME
DRIVEN
EQUIPMENT
____________________
____________________________________________
MOTOR NAMEPLATE DATA

MANUFACTURER
____________
_
MODEL/SERIES
___________
___
MODEL
NO.
___________
__
FRAME
ENCLOSURE
NEMA DESIGN
HP
SERVICE FACTOR
RPM
INSULATION CLASS
VOLTS
FULL LOAD AMPS
AMBIENT TEMP
PHASE
NO LOAD AMPS
DESIGN TEMP RISE
HERTZ
LOCK ROTOR AMPS
100 PERCENT
LOAD
INRUSH CODE
LETTER
75 PERCENT
50 PERCENT
LOAD
LOAD
GUARANTEED MINIMUM EFFICIENCIES:
_____
_____
_____
GUARANTEED MINIMUM POWER

FACTOR:
_____
_____
_____
MAXIMUM SIZE OF POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CAPACITOR: _____________ KVAR

ACCESSORIES
MOTOR WINDING HEATER
________________________
VOLTS
THERMAL PROTECTION - STATOR WINDINGS
RTD:
_______________________
WATTS
TYPE
________________________
QUANTITY PER PHASE

____________
# OF WIRES
___________
NOMINAL RESISTANCE
NOMINAL TEMP
COEFFICIENT
RECOMMENDED ALARM _____DEGREES

CELSIUS
RECOMMENDED TRIP _______DEGREES

CELSIUS
THERMAL PROTECTION - BEARINGS

RTD:
TYPE
QUANTITY
# OF WIRES
NOMINAL RESISTANCE
NOMINAL TEMP
COEFFICIENT
RECOMMENDED ALARM _____DEGREES

CELSIUS
RECOMMENDED TRIP _______DEGREES

CELSIUS
SPECIAL APPLICATIONS
INVERTER DUTY* (YES/NO)
CONFORMS TO API 541 (YES/NO) _____________

* Conforms to NEMA MG-1 Part 31.
May 2014
16224-13
9408A10
END OF SECTION
May 2014
16224-14
9408A10
SECTION 16232
SINGLE DIESEL FUELED ENGINE GENERATOR ABOVE 200 KW
PART 1
1.01
1.02
GENERAL
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes:
1.
Packaged automatic "standby" diesel engine generator system including:
a. Diesel engine.
b. Generator.
c. Supporting and mounting skid.
d. Engine liquid cooling system.
e. Exhaust system.
f. Control system.
g. Engine starting batteries and battery charger.
h. Weatherproof acoustical housing.
i.
All other equipment required for a complete and operable power
generation system.
B.
Related sections:
1.
2.
3.
b. Section 01410 - Regulatory Requirements.
c. Section 01756 - Testing, Training, and Facility Start-Up.
d. Section 09960 - High-Performance Coatings.
e. Section 15082- Piping Insulation.
f. Section 16232 - Common Work Results for Electrical.
g. Section 16075 - Electrical Identification.
h. Section 16305 - Electrical System Studies.
i.
Section 17101 - Specific Control Strategies.
REFERENCES
A.
B.

1.
A 53 - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, ZincCoated Welded and Seamless.
2.
A 106 - Standard Specification for Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for HighTemperature Service.
May 2014
16232-1
9408A10
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.03
1.04
A 181 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Forgings for General Purpose
Piping.
A 240 - Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless
Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General
Applications.
A 536 - Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings.
D 2310 - Standard Classification for Machine-Made Fiberglass (Glass-FiberReinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe.
C.
National Electrical Code (NEC).
D.

1.
250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts Maximum).
2.
MG-1 - Motor and Generators.
E.

1.
30 - Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code.
2.
37 - Standard for the Installation and Use of Stationary Combustion Engines
and Gas Turbines.
3.
110 - Standard for Emergency and Standby Power Systems.
F.

1.
142 Standard for Steel Aboveground Tanks for Flammable and Combustible
Liquids.
2.
508 Standard for Industrial Control Equipment.
3.
1008 Standard for Transfer Switch Equipment.
4.
1236 Standard for Battery Chargers for Charging Engine-Starter Batteries.
5.
2200 Standard for Stationary Engine Generator Assemblies.
DEFINITIONS
A.
B.
1.
Standby rated duty: Continuous operation for the duration of any power outage
of a utility power source.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
Provide a complete automatic diesel engine driven generator system, with all
necessary components and accessories to make a complete and operating standby
power supply.
1.
Coordinate the generator control system with the transfer equipment specified
in the Electrical Specifications and as indicated on the Drawings.
B.
Provide such minor details of electrical, plumbing, or mechanical work not specified
or indicated on the Drawings, which are necessary for the successful operation of
the diesel engine-driven generator required by these Specifications.
C.
Auxiliary power:
1.
Design provides (1) 208V 3-phase 60A power feed for auxiliary loads such as
the battery system and jacket water heater. Provide an internal power
distribution panel to distribute power from the single 208V 3-phase feed
May 2014
16232-2
9408A10
provided. Contractor to ensure that an adequate breaker is provided in LP2033 to facilitate generator requirements.
1.05
D.
Installation details:
1.
Installation location as indicated on the Drawings.
2.
Orient exhaust to face south, away from neighboring properties to the north
and west.
3.
Fueling location to be located near the north end for easy access from the
road.
E.
Description of operation:
1.
There are two load scenarios for the generator. The generator must be sized
to accommodate either scenario. Refer to one-lines and panelboard schedules
indicated in the Drawings for load values.
2.
Scenario 1 step sequence:
a. Step 1: Non-controllable loads.
b. Step 2: PMP-1010 - 200HP motor on RVAT starter
c. Step 3: PMP-1020 - 200HP motor on RVAT starter
d. Step 4: PMP-1030 - 200HP motor on RVAT starter
3.
Scenario 2 step sequence:
a. Step 1: Non-controllable loads.
b. Step 2: PMP-1040 - 1000HP motor on VFD
1) The generator will not be required to start when a 1000HP pump is
operating in bypass condition on RVAT start. The 1000HP pump may
only run on generator power when driven by VFD.
F.
Controls coordination:
1.
Coordinate with Instrumentation and Controls Subcontractor as specified in
Section 17101 and with the switchgear supplier as specified in Section 16341
and Section 16433..
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Product data:
1.
General:
a. Manufacturer of:
1) Engine.
2) Generator.
3) Governor.
4) Voltage regulator.
5) Generator control panel.
6) Radiator.
7) Battery charger.
8) Batteries.
9) Silencer.
10) Enclosure.
11) Fuel storage tank.
b. Wet weight of engine generator system:
1) List weight of fuel separately.
c. Dimensions of engine generator system:
May 2014
16232-3
9408A10
2.
3.
4.
1) Length.
2) Width.
3) Height.
d. Type and grade of fuel recommended.
e. Fuel oil consumption at:
1) 50 percent load.
2) 75 percent load.
3) 100 percent load.
f. Type and grade lubricating oil recommended.
g. Amount of lubricating oil required per oil change.
h. Normal lubricating oil consumption.
i.
Recommended lubricating oil change periods:
1) By hours run.
2) By time.
j.
Heat rejection by engine generator to the room area.
k. Time interval from start-up contact closure until full load capabilities are
available.
Engine:
a. Number of cylinders, bore, stroke, and piston speed.
b. Displacement in cubic inches.
c. Compression ratio.
d. Engine RPM at 60 hertz.
e. Combustion air required.
f. Cooling air required.
g. Size of exhaust outlet.
h. Gauges.
i.
Jacket water heater:
1) Rating.
2) Voltage and phase requirements.
Emissions:
a. Certification of EPA compliance.
b. Other exhaust emissions as required by the local air quality management
district issuing the permit for the engine generator system.
c. Reported at rated speed and load as measured by SAE J177 and J215 or
ISO 8178 recommended practices.
Generator (alternator):
a. Rated output:
1) kW standby.
2) power factor.
3) Voltage.
4) Current.
b. Number of poles.
c. Number of leads and wires per lead.
d. Pitch.
e. Stator and field ratings including temperature rise at full and overload
conditions.
f. Insulation system:
1) Insulation class.
2) Stator rise.
3) Rotor rise.
4) Heat dissipated (kW).
5) Air flow (m3/min).
May 2014
16232-4
9408A10
g.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Impedances (per unit and ohms):

1) Synchronous reactance - direct axis (Xd).
2) Synchronous reactance - quadrature axis (Xq).
3) Transient reactance - saturated (Xd).
4) Subtransient reactance - direct axis (Xd).
5) Subtransient reactance - quadrature axis (Xq).
6) Negative sequence reactance (X2).
7) Zero sequence reactance (X0).
h. Time constants:
1) Open circuit transient direct axis.
2) Short circuit transient direct axis.
3) Open circuit subtransient direct axis.
4) Short circuit subtransient direct axis.
5) Open circuit subtransient quadrature axis.
6) Short circuit subtransient quadrature axis.
7) Exciter time constant.
8) Armature short circuit.
i.
Short circuit ratio.
j.
Stator resistance.
k. Field resistance.
l.
I2t or K (heating time constant).
m. Voltage and frequency variation and duration with the step application and
removal of 25 percent, 50 percent, 75 percent, and 100 percent of
resistive load maximum.
n. Generator efficiency at:
1) 25 percent load.
2) 50 percent load.
3) 75 percent load.
4) 100 percent load.
o. Generator output characteristic curves:
1) Open circuit.
2) Short circuit.
3) Zero power factor.
4) Air gap.
p. Reactive capability curve.
q. Certified published engine horsepower curves showing manufacturer's
engine rating for generator set standby and prime power application.
r. Decrement curve.
s. Thermal damage curve.
Governor.
Voltage regulator.
Generator control panel:
a. Dimensions:
1) Length.
2) Width.
3) Height.
4) Weight.
b. Power requirements.
c. Controls.
d. NEMA enclosure rating.
Space and ambient temperature requirements.
Battery system:
May 2014
16232-5
9408A10
a.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
C.
Battery charger:
1) Dimensions:
a) Length.
b) Width.
c) Height.
d) Weight.
2) Input power requirements.
b. Batteries:
1) Number.
2) Dimensions:
a) Length.
b) Width.
c) Height.
d) Weight.
3) Amount of electrolyte.
4) Enclosure or rack.
Silencer:
a. Grade.
b. Dimensions:
1) Length.
2) Width.
3) Height.
4) Weight.
Free field mechanical noise level at 23 feet. Provide overall decibels (dBA)
rating referenced at 20 Pa.
Exhaust sound level in dBA at 5 feet from discharge end of silencer.
Recommended spare parts and special tools lists, specifying quantity of each
item.
Weatherproof acoustical housing:
a. Dimensions:
1) Length.
2) Width.
3) Height.
4) Weight.
b. Materials.
c. Acoustic rating.
d. Door locations and access requirements.
e. Finish.
Shop drawings:
1.
Provide detailed dimensional and to-scale layout drawings including:
a. A single drawing incorporating all equipment furnished:
1) Submittals that consist solely of individual drawings for each
component and require that these sheets be compiled by the
Engineer, in order to view the entire piece of equipment, are not
acceptable.
b. Conduit stub-out locations.
2.
Detailed electrical wiring diagrams of the engine and generator including:
a. Engine interconnection terminal box.
b. Generator interconnection terminal box.
c. Fuel system.
May 2014
16232-6
9408A10
d.
3.
4.
D.
All interfaces between the engine driven generator skid and the transfer
equipment.
e. All wire numbers and terminal block identifications:
1) Wire numbers are to correspond to the wire number on the
equipment.
2) All wires are to be numbered.
f. Complete interior and exterior control panel layout:
1) Scaled.
2) With device descriptions.
3) With nameplates.
Piping connection and instrumentation diagrams.
Mounting and installation drawings:
a. Detailing mounting requirements for the Project Site seismic requirements
as specified in Section 16232.
b. Prepared and sealed by a registered structural professional engineer in
the state where the Project is being constructed.

1.
Submit operating instructions and a maintenance manual presenting full
details for care and maintenance of equipment of every nature furnished
and/or installed under this Section.
2.
Operating manual:
a. The manual must detail the operational functions of all normally used
controls that have been placed on the front of the control equipment.
b. Standard operational manuals normally furnished by the manufacturer.
3.
Maintenance manual:
a. Printed and bound instructions covering all details pertaining to care and
maintenance of all equipment as well as data identifying all parts.
b. These manuals must include but are not limited to the following:
1) Electrical controls:
a) Adjustment and test instructions covering the steps involved in
the initial test, adjustment, and start-up procedures.
b) Detailed control instructions, which outline the purpose and
operation of every control device used in normal operation.
c) Description of the sequence of operation that outlines the steps
the controls follow during normal power failure and normal
power return conditions.
d) All schematic, wiring, and external diagrams. Also, internal
device wiring and schematic diagrams for all sub assemblies
used in the equipment:
(1) Drawing to be furnished in a reduced 11-inch by 17-inch
format and shall be fully legible at that drawing size.
2) Engine and generator:
a) Repair parts manuals normally furnished by the manufacturer.
(1) Detailing all parts and sub-assemblies, which are available
as repair parts.
3) Shop maintenance manuals:
a) Provide 1 shop manual on-site that is equivalent to the manual
used by factory-authorized shop repair personnel.
b) Manuals for the following equipment:
(1) Engine.
(2) Radiator.
May 2014
16232-7
9408A10
c.
d.
e.
f.
1.06
(3) Generator.
(4) Engine generator control panel.
Material safety data sheets:
1) Complete MSDS forms for all substances.
2) Located in O&M manual.
3) Include separate manual labeled MSDS with additional copies of all
MSDS forms.
Warranty Data
Maintenance Contract information.
E.
Test reports:
1.
Furnish complete test reports as specified in this Section.
F.
Certificates:
1.
Certification of the emissions performance of the generator set engine by the
engine manufacturer.
2.
Certification that a torsional analysis between the engine and generator has
been completed.
3.
Seismic certification, as required.
4.
Upon completion of installation, manufacturer must issue a certification of
compliance with the Contract Documents.
G.
Calculations:
1.
Complete loading calculations to support the recommended size of the enginegenerator based upon actual facility loads and specified maximum allowable
voltage drop.
2.
Supply documentation identifying the maximum static pressure acceptable for
the radiator fan. It is the manufacturers responsibility to then provide
calculations as part of the layout drawings, to ensure that the transition
ductwork at the discharge of the radiator does not exceed the maximum static
pressure acceptable for the radiator fan.
3.
Submit exhaust system silencer noise attenuation curves.
4.
Structural support system, mounting, and seismic calculations to be signed
and stamped by a licensed structural professional engineer, registered in the
state where the Project is located:
a. Vibration isolator selection calculations.
b. Vibration isolator anchoring calculations.
c. Exhaust silencer structural support calculations on indoor applications.
5.
Submit factory certification of the radiator ambient capability.
6.
Submit exhaust system pressure loss calculations:
a. Include piping, fittings, silencer, and rain cap in loss calculations on indoor
applications.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
Manufacturer qualifications:
1.
The manufacturer of the engine, generator, and all major items of auxiliary
equipment must be in current production of such equipment.
May 2014
16232-8
9408A10
2.
3.
C.
1.07
1.08
A.
B.
Furnish the generator skid with removable lifting and jacking angles, eye bolts, etc.,
attached to the structural base to facilitate unloading and move-in operations.
C.
Provisions on skid for the use of "Multiton" type rollers for moving the generator skid
into position and then removal of the "Multiton" rollers and then for setting the
engine generator skid in place.
D.
Provide the services of a manufacturers authorized representative to:

1.
Be present at the jobsite when the engine-driven generator arrives:
a. Act as an advisor in assisting the Contractor regarding the unloading and
move-in operations.
2.
Coordinate the delivery of the shipment with the Contractor.

SEQUENCING
A.
1.10
1.
In accordance with NFPA-110 Type 10 (ten second) transfer requirements.
2.
Fuel tanks:
a. UL listed.
b. Base tank shall be tested under pressure per the manufacturers
recommendation to check for leaks.
c. Comply with the following, if applicable:
1) NFPA 30 Flammable and Combustible Liquids.
2) NFPA 37 Standard for Installation and Use of Stationary
Combustible and Gas Turbines.
3) NFPA 110 Standard for Emergency and Standby Power Systems.
3.
Regulations of the Fire Prevention Bureau of the fire department having
jurisdiction.
4.
Fire Code as specified in Section 01410.
5.
Other applicable state and local codes.
6.
EPA approved.
7.
Requirements of local Air Quality Management District or Air Pollution Control
District.
8.
Comply with the Specifications that may be in excess of, and not contrary to,
the regulations.
A.
1.09
A factory authorized parts and service facility located within 100 miles of the
Project Site.
Manufacturer is responsible for furnishing, testing, installation supervising,
testing, and guaranteeing the system.
Complete factory prototype and factory production tests in accordance with

NFPA 110 before equipment is shipped.
May 2014
16232-9
9408A10
1.11
WARRANTY
A.
1.12
SYSTEM START-UP
A.
B.
Furnish manufacturer services to include, but are not limited to:

1.
During the start-up and adjustment period to ensure that all items furnished
are in proper operating condition:
a. Engine technician must be completely knowledgeable in the operation,
maintenance, and start-up of the mechanical system.
b. Electrical technician must be completely knowledgeable in the operation,
maintenance, and start-up of the electrical system.
c. Provide training as specified in this Section.
d. Engine technician and electrical technician may be the same individual if
certified by the respective equipment manufacturers in both engine and
electrical systems.
2.
Furnish a written report after the start-up:
a. Report must state that the installation is complete and satisfactory:
1) List the items requiring additional attention.
3.
Minimum required time on site by technician for start-up:
a. One day to inspect entire installation, start-up, test operation, and conduct
acceptance tests.
1.13
1.14
1.15
MAINTENANCE
A.

1.
Three sets of lube oil filters, fuel filters, and gaskets.
2.
Two sets of air filters.
3.
Two spare lamps of each different lamp type.
4.
Two fuses (for each control circuit).
5.
One set of crankcase breather filters, when used.
B.
Special tools: Furnish a set of specialty tools necessary for routine maintenance of
the equipment.
1.
Special tools are those that only the manufacturer provides, for special
purposes, or to reach otherwise inaccessible parts.
C.
Maintenance Contract:
1.
Refer to Section 01770 for maintenance contract time period.
2.
Provide at a minimum the following services:
a. Provide monthly inspections and maintenance services, including but not
limited to:
1) Engine generator exercising (coordinate with Owner prior to all work).
2) Oil changes, air filter changes, etc.:
a) Dispose of waste oil, filters, etc.
b) Provide oil type recommended by engine manufacturer.
May 2014
16232-10
9408A10
3)
4)
3.
PART 2
2.01
Diagnostic checks, with associated diagnostic reports and checklist.

Document all services and associated checks, parts, oil changes,
filter changes, etc. made during each service visit.
b. Oil sampling.
c. Safety checks.
d. Include all maintenance parts, labor, travel, etc.
e. Include all component parts and repairs, parts, labor, travel, etc.
Maximum response time to a maintenance call shall not exceed 24 hours.
PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS
A.
The following list of manufacturers is a general guideline and makes no statement

as to the capability of the manufacturer to meet the Specification requirements. The
burden of proof of conformance with these Specifications lies with the Contractor
and manufacturer. The Contractor must make special written application to use
other than these named manufacturers:
1.
Engine generators:
1) Caterpillar.
2) Cummins Power Generation.
2.
Governor:
1) Woodward.
2) Isochronous electronic by engine manufacturer.
3.
Engine starting battery:
1) Auto Start.
2) East Penn - Deka.
3) Hawker.
4.
Base mounted fuel tank:
1) Pryco.
2) Tramont.
3) Engine-generator manufacturer's equivalent.
5.
Diesel fuel maintenance system:
a. The following or equal:
1) Fuel additive:
a) Fuel Technologies International, LTSA-35A.
B.
Exhaust system:
1.
a. Silencer:
1) GTE Industries.
2) Harco Manufacturing.
3) Silex Innovations.
b. Corrugated, flexible engine connector:
1) DME.
2) GTE Industries.
3) Engine-generator manufacturer's equivalent.
May 2014
16232-11
9408A10
c.
d.
e.
Expansion joint:
1) DME Inc.
2) GTE Industries.
Exhaust pipe insulation:
Expansion joint insulation:
1) Pittsburgh-Corning/JPS Composite Materials Corp., Temp-Mat.
2.02
2.03
2.04
2.05
EQUIPMENT
A.
Characteristics of assembled unit:

1.
The engine-driven generator consists of a diesel engine directly coupled to an
electric generator providing electric power.
2.
The engine shall start, attain full speed, voltage, and assume full load within a
maximum of 10 seconds, with jacket water at 85 degrees Fahrenheit.
3.
Furnish the engine-driven generator on a steel sub-base to support engine,
generator, and accessories as a unit:
a. Base: Welded construction.
b. Engine direct connected through a flexible coupling to a single bearing
generator.
c. System free of injurious torsional and bending vibrations within a speed
range from 10 percent below to 10 percent above synchronous speed.
d. Engine-driven generator balanced such that the peak-to-peak amplitude
of vibration velocity in any direction does not exceed the engine or
generator manufacturer's published limits.
e. If shims are required under the feet of the generator for alignment
purposes, use 1-piece laminated shim stock that covers at least
90 percent of the foot.
f. Provide a complete assembled engine-driven generator skid requiring
only field electrical and mechanical connections.
4.
Connections to engine-driven generator skid:
a. Flexible connections are required on all connections to the engine
generator.
b. These connections include but are not limited to:
1) Exhaust.
2) Fuel lines.
3) Radiator discharge air ductwork.
c. The length of all flexible connections to exceed the flexible connector
manufacturers minimum length recommendations for the diameter used
and for the misalignment as measured after installation.
B.
Generator system performance requirements:

1.
Power output rating:
a. Minimum kilowatts and voltage as indicated on the Drawings.
b. 0.8 power factor.
c. 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 hertz.
May 2014
16232-12
9408A10
2.
3.
2.06
d. In accordance with NEMA MG-1 temperature rise limits.

It is the manufacturer's responsibility to properly size the engine generator
based upon site conditions and actual loads:
a. Allowable voltage drop: 10 percent.
b. The Drawings and Specifications indicate a minimum size that the
Engineer has determined based upon non-certified information.
c. No increase in Contract amount will be considered if the equipment size
needs to be increased to meet the load requirements after bids have been
submitted.
d. Provide all changes to the electrical system as required as a result of
manufacturers sizing including but not limited to:
1) Conduit.
2) Wire: Provide Nehr-McGrath calculations to verify appropriate cable
sizing in accordance with NEC when additional wire is required.
3) Circuit breakers.
4) Transfer equipment.
a. Specifically designed to meet the discharge of gaseous pollutants to the
atmosphere as required by the EPA statute and local agency issuing the
permit for the engine generator system.
COMPONENTS
A.
Engine generator base:

1.
Support system:
a. Bolt the engine-driven generator to steel pads that are an integral part of
structural support base.
b. Vibration isolators shall be provided with the engine-driven generator and
be installed between the engine generator and structural support base or
between the base and the floor:
1) As recommended by the isolator manufacturer.
2) Located for equal load distribution and deflection per isolator.
3) Designed for the load and seismic conditions as identified for the site.
B.
Engine:
1.
Full compression ignition, 4-cycle, turbocharged, and aftercooled meeting the
required emissions rating.
2.
The rated net horsepower of the engine with all accessories, including radiator
fan, must not be less than that required to produce the minimum specified
generator capacity at site altitude and maximum ambient temperature.
3.
Equipped and designed as follows:
a. Spin-on type replaceable lube oil filters.
b. Spin-on type replaceable fuel filters.
c. Heat treated forged steel crankshaft:
1) Dynamically balanced.
d. Forged steel connecting rods.
e. Crankshaft driven gear type lubricating pump.
f. Electric fuel shut-off valve.
g. Engine air cleaner: Dry type replaceable filter.
h. 12- or 24-VDC positive engagement solenoid shift-starting motor:
May 2014
16232-13
9408A10
1)
i.
j.
k.
The starting equipment must include the necessary devices to

prevent an overcrank and lockout if the starter pinion fails to engage
the flywheel ring gear on the initial crank attempt.
2) This starter disconnect shall electronically sense the speed of the
flywheel and when the flywheel setpoint speed has been reached,
the electronic control signals the starter disconnect to disengage.
Oil level dip stick and oil drain pipe with valve and pipe plug:
1) Oil drainpipe and valve are to extend 3 inches beyond edge of
engine base.
Engines requiring glow plugs are not acceptable.
Crankcase breather filter for engines not equipped with EPA Tier certified
engines crankcase emissions control equipment:
1) Provide crankcase ventilation system with coalescing filter/trap for
blowby:
a) Coalescing filter to be replaceable.
2) If engine manufacturer recommends an open crankcase breather
system, route outlet of breather filter to outside at 3 inches above
grade and away from engine components:
a) Provide on breather outlet Nelson "EcoVent" or equal, sized to
match engine breather flow.
3) If engine manufacturer recommends a closed crankcase breather
system, provide integral crankcase pressure regulator with an
automatic internal filter bypass and bypass indicator:
a) Racor Model CCV 4500 or equal.
C.
Governor:
1.
Isochronous type to maintain engine speed:
a. Within 0.5 percent for steady state conditions.
b. Within 5 percent for a no load to full load step with recovery to within 2
seconds of step load application.
c. Suitable for use on diesel engines.
d. Electronic governor control of fuel.
e. Suitable for automatic, unattended starts.
f. Speed sensing failure circuit to signal actuator to close if speed pick-up
signal is lost.
g. With speed pick-up sensor.
h. With capabilities of local speed settings.
i.
Adjustable acceleration rate control from 0 to 8 seconds.
j.
Personnel guards over all exposed moving parts.
k. Equipped with a continuous duty shutdown system for normal remote
stopping.
D.
Engine jacket water heater:

1.
Provide an in-line thermostat that disconnects power when coolant
temperature exceeds the manufacturers suggested setpoint.
2.
Contacts from an oil pressure switch or control panel contacts disconnect the
heater power when the engine is running.
3.
Provided with shutoff valves and unions to allow heater replacement without
draining the cooling system.
4.
Make all water heater connections with high temperature silicon type hoses
and constant torque hose clamps.
May 2014
16232-14
9408A10
5.
6.
7.
Size heater such that the engine block temperature is maintained at 85 to

100 degrees Fahrenheit in a 40-degree Fahrenheit ambient temperature.
Connect water heater and thermostat to the engine to minimize heated water
circulation through the radiator circuit.
Power supply:
a. Water heaters smaller than 3,000 watts shall be 120 volts, 1-phase.
b. Heaters 3,000 watts shall and larger be 208 volts, 3-phase.
E.
Alternator (generator):
1.
Brushless synchronous alternator.
2.
Re-connectable 12 lead if available.
3.
Self-ventilated.
4.
Full amortisseur windings.
5.
2/3 pitch windings, skewed for smooth voltage waveform.
6.
With permanent magnet generator pilot exciter.
7.
Drip-proof enclosure.
8.
Protected against corrosion.
9.
Single bearing design.
a. Alternators over 2,000 kW may be two bearing design.
10. Insulation:
a. Insulated for continuous operation at 40 degrees Celsius ambient
temperature.
b. Class F (105 degrees Celsius rise by resistance) for medium voltage.
c. Vacuum impregnated with epoxy varnish to be fungus resistant per MIL
I-24092.
d. Multiple dipped and baked with a non-hygroscopic varnish with a final dip
of epoxy.
11. Terminate alternator power leads using compression lugs on an insulator and
bus bar system within the alternator junction box:
a. These terminations must not require any taping to complete the
connection.
b. Provide a ground terminal inside the junction box to terminate the ground
cables between the alternator to the automatic transfer equipment ground
bus:
1) Minimum size of the equipment-grounding conductor: 12-1/2 percent
of the size of the phase conductors.
12. 120 VAC integral alternator winding heaters.
13. Maximum balanced telephone interference factor not to exceed 50.
14. Designed to supply power to the non-linear loads as specified and as indicated
on the Drawings:
F.
Alternator digital voltage regulator:

1.
Located in the engine control panel.
2.
a. Maintain the steady state voltage within 1 percent:
1) From 40 degrees Fahrenheit to 120 degrees Fahrenheit.
2) From no load to full load conditions.
3.
Constant volts per hertz characteristics with under frequency roll-off for better
transient response.
4.
Static type.
5.
Sized to match the power requirements of the exciter circuit and power from
the permanent magnet generator pilot exciter.
May 2014
16232-15
9408A10
6.
7.
8.
Include manual control to adjust voltage drop, voltage level, and voltage gain.
With 3-phase sensing.
Sealed from the environment and isolated from the load to prevent tracking
when connected to SCR loads.
9.
Include loss of sensing shutdown to protect the generator against uncontrolled
voltage output when the sensing circuit to the regulator is opened.
10. Shut down regulator when the sensing circuit to the regulator does not have
continuity.
11. Include over-excitation shutdown to protect the generator against thermal
damage caused by prolonged field forcing.
G.
Exhaust system:
1.
General:
a. Provide a complete exhaust system following as indicated on the
Drawings and as specified.
b. Back pressure:
1) Provide components such that the maximum back-pressure in the
exhaust system including piping and silencer is less than the
maximum allowable back-pressure published by the engine
manufacturer, measured at the exhaust manifold header:
a) Reduce back-pressure when recommended by the engine
manufacturer.
c. Provide each exhaust manifold header with a plugged, tapped connection
for the attachment of a test manometer.
2.
Exhaust silencer:
a. Heavy-duty industrial type fabricated of welded steel with ported tubes
and snubbing chambers, and a rating meeting the specified sound
attenuation.
b. Mounting: As specified in this section.
c. End connections: Steel flanges with Class 150-pound drilling pattern.
d. Shell:
1) Sufficiently heavy and reinforced to eliminate excessive vibration,
stress, or deflection and to support all operating loads with the
silencer at elevated temperatures and insulated as specified.
2) Loads include insulation weight and connecting piping.
e. Drain: Provide threaded, plugged condensate drain.
f. Sound attenuation: Attain the following minimum sound attenuation at the
listed octave band center frequencies with the engine at full load:
Frequency (Hz)
63
125 250 500
Attenuation (dB)
39
42
g.
h.
i.
H.
42
40
1,000
2,000
38
38
4,000 8,000
38
38
Supports: Provide shell lug supports suitable for supporting and mounting
the silencer as indicated on the Drawings; support design to account for
elevated temperatures under insulated shell.
Insulate as specified for engine exhaust piping in Section 15082.
Pressure drop not to exceed manufacturers recommendation at
maximum engine rating.
Radiator and cooling system:

1.
Unit mounted:
May 2014
16232-16
9408A10
a.
I.
Furnish a skid mounted closed type radiator system for the engine driven
generator:
b. Sized and selected by engine manufacturer to cool the engine and turbo
charge aftercooler under ambient conditions.
c. Provide all necessary coolant specifically suitable for the location and
conditions of service throughout the year:
d. Ship both the engine and the radiator with the coolant installed.
Generator control panel:
1.
Microprocessor-based control system that is designed to provide automatic
starting, monitoring, protection and control functions for the generator set.
2.
Mounted on the generator set:
a. Provide vibration isolation:
1) Prototype tested to verify the durability of all components in the
system under the vibration conditions encountered.
3.
Control system features and functions:
a. Control switches:
1) Mode selector switch:
a) Provide a rotary switch or control panel keypads with status
indicators.
b) The mode select switch initiates the following control modes:
c) RUN or Manual position:
(1) Generator set starts, and accelerates to rated speed and
voltage.
d) OFF or STOP position:
(1) Generator set immediately stops, bypassing all time delays.
e) AUTO position:
(1) Generator set accepts a signal from a remote device to
start and accelerate to rated speed and voltage.
2) EMERGENCY STOP switch:
a) Red mushroom-head pushbutton.
b) Activating the emergency stop switch causes the engine to
immediately stop, and be locked out from automatic restarting.
3) RESET switch:
a) Clears all faults and allow restarting the engine generator after it
has shut down for any fault condition.
4) PANEL LAMP switch or automatic display panel illumination.
b. AC output metering: Provide the control system with metering including
the following features and functions:
1) Provide digital metering:
a) 1.0 percent accuracy.
2) Voltmeter:
a) RMS voltage.
b) Line-to-line.
c) Line-to-neutral.
3) Ammeter:
a) RMS current.
4) Frequency.
5) Power Factor.
6) Kilowatts (kW):
a) kW-hours.
b) Output kW.
7) Kilovars (kVars):
May 2014
16232-17
9408A10
c.
d.
e.
a) kVar-hours.
b) Output kVar.
Generator alarm and status display:
1) Provide high-intensity LED alarm and status indication lamps.
Functions indicated include:
a) Red alarm-indicating lamps.
b) Red common shutdown lamp.
c) Green lamp to indicate the engine generator is running at rated
frequency and voltage based on actual sensed voltage and
frequency on the output terminals of the generator set.
d) Flashing red lamp to indicate that the control is not in automatic
state.
e) Amber common warning indication lamp.
2) Display the following alarm and shutdown conditions on an
alphanumeric digital display panel:
a) Low oil pressure (alarm).
b) Low oil pressure (shutdown).
c) Oil pressure sender failure (alarm or indication).
d) Low coolant temperature (alarm).
e) High coolant temperature (alarm).
f) High coolant temperature (shutdown).
g) High oil temperature (warning).
h) Engine temperature sender failure (alarm or indication).
i)
Low coolant level (alarm or shutdown selectable).
j)
Fail to crank (shutdown).
k) Fail to start/overcrank (shutdown).
l)
Overspeed (shutdown).
m) Low DC battery voltage (alarm).
n) High DC battery voltage (alarm).
o) High AC voltage (shutdown).
p) Low AC voltage (shutdown).
q) Under frequency (programmable for alarm or shutdown).
r) Overcurrent (programmed for warning or shutdown).
s) Short circuit circuit breaker function (trip).
t) Emergency stop (shutdown).
Engine status monitoring:
1) Display the following status conditions on an alphanumeric digital
display panel:
a) Engine oil pressure (pounds per square inch or kilopascal).
b) Engine coolant temperature (degrees Fahrenheit or Celsius).
c) Engine oil temperature (degrees Fahrenheit or Celsius).
d) Engine speed (revolutions per minute).
e) Number of start attempts.
f) Battery voltage (DC volts).
Data logging and display provision:
1) Log the last 10 warning or shutdown indications on the engine
generator.
2) Monitor the total load on the generator:
a) Maintain data logs of total operating hours at specific load levels
ranging from 0 to 110 percent of rated load, in 10 percent
increments.
May 2014
16232-18
9408A10
b)
4.
J.
Display total hours of operation at less than 30 percent load and

total hours of operation at more than 90 percent of rated load.
3) The control system to log:
a) Total number of operating hours.
b) Total kW hours.
c) Total control operational hours.
f. Engine control functions:
1) Provide a cycle cranking system, which allows for user selected
crank time, rest time, and number of cycles:
a) Initial settings shall be for 3 cranking periods of 15 seconds
each, with 15-second rest period between cranking periods.
2) Provide an engine governor control, which functions to provide
steady state frequency regulation as noted elsewhere in this
Specification, including adjustments for gain, damping, and a
ramping function to control engine speed and limit exhaust smoke
while the unit is starting.
3) Provide time delay start (adjustable 0 to 300 seconds) and time delay
stop (adjustable 0 to 600 seconds) functions.
g. Battery monitoring system:
1) Initiate alarms when the DC control and starting voltage is outside
the manufacturers tolerances.
2) Disable the low voltage limit during engine cranking (starter
engaged).
3) Monitor DC voltage as load is applied to the battery, to detect
impending battery failure or deteriorated battery condition.
h. Remote control interface:
1) Provide a minimum of 4 programmable output relays:
a) Configurable for any alarm, shutdown, or status condition.
b) Label as indicated on the Drawings.
2) Provide a minimum of 4 programmable inputs:
a) Label as indicated on the Drawings.
b) Labels shall match other control labels.
i.
Provide time delay start (adjustable 0 to 300 seconds) and time delay stop
(adjustable 0 to 600 seconds) functions:
1) Coordinate the cooldown timer for WRF generator with the
Generator/Switchgear Remote Control Panel VCP-ELEC provider to
meet the recommended manufacturer cooldown time:
a) Local E-stop still stops the generator, regardless of cooldown
timer.
b) Coordinate with work specified in Section 17101.
Communications:
a. Ethernet Modbus TCP/IP.
b. Capable of communicating all status and alarms listed above in this
Section.
Battery system:
1.
Installed on the engine-driven generator skid.
2.
Provide extra flexible minimum 4/0 welding cable to make the connection
between the battery and the engine:
a. Proper compression lugs and tooling must be used to terminate these
cables.
May 2014
16232-19
9408A10
3.
4.
K.
2.07
Provide a 12- or 24-volt lead acid recombination no maintenance engine start

battery system:
a. The battery shall have sufficient capacity, at the minimum and maximum
temperature specified, to provide the specified cranking periods.
Charger:
a. Sized to provide sufficient power to both fully charge a drained battery.
b. Location: Inside the generator enclosure.
c. DC ammeter and DC voltmeter.
d. On-Off switch.
e. Solid-state device with adjustable float voltage control.
f. Constant voltage design with current limit.
g. With an equalize switch which will allow the battery to be overcharged for
maintenance purposes or an automatic charging cycle that has an
equalize period.
h. Designed to meet the charge, float, and equalize requirement of the
battery furnished.
i.
Overload and short circuit protection.
Power distribution panelboard:

1.
Provide a 120/208V 3-phase/4-wire panelboard to distribute power to
generator auxiliary loads.
2.
Panelboard meeting Section 16445 requirements.
ACCESSORIES
A.
Fuel system:
1.
Base mounted fuel tank:
a. Unit mounted base tank with the capacity to hold 48 hours minimum of
fuel with the engine generator set operating at full load.
b. UL 142 listed tank with secondary containment rupture basin.
c. Construction:
1) Reinforced steel channel system.
2) Minimum thickness of 7-gauge for channels.
3) Minimum 12-gauge for tank construction.
d. Provide tank baffle to separate hot fuel return from cooler supply fuel.
e. Connections:
1) 1.25-inch minimum vents:
a) Pipe vent outside any room or enclosure containing the
generator set, using Schedule 40 black steel pipe.
2) Two-inch minimum fill connection.
3) Two-inch minimum main fuel storage level gauge.
4) 1.25-inch minimum low fuel level alarm with level switch connected to
control panel.
5) 0.5-inch minimum fuel supply with dip tube.
6) 0.5-inch minimum fuel return with dip tube.
f. Rupture basin level switch and alarm.
g. Finish:
1) Interior: Treated to inhibit corrosion until fuel is added.
2) Exterior: Epoxy coating with urethane top coat.
h. Ancillary equipment:
1) Provide the following base tank accessories as required by NFPA 30
for project application:
May 2014
16232-20
9408A10
a)
b)
i.
B.
Low fuel level float switch, set at 50 percent.

High fuel level / overfill prevention, audible alarm, set at 90
percent.
c) Overfill prevention valve on tank fill port, set at 95 percent.
d) Fill port drop tube to within 6 inches of the bottom of the tank.
e) Spill containment bucket or basin around fill port.
f) Interstitial monitoring float switch (leak detection).
g) Normal vents, extended 13 feet above grade, flame arrester
caps.
h) Emergency vents, on tank and containment basin.
i)
Provisions for connection of grounding conductor.
j)
Tank calibration chart in inches to gallons.
Warning signage:
1) No Smoking.
2) Flammable Liquids.
3) Diesel Fuel.
4) NFPA 704 Placards.
Weatherproof acoustical housing:

1.
Provide engine enclosure to protect engine, generator, starting system,
batteries, and other specified accessories from weather exposure.
2.
Meet seismic and wind requirements at the Project Site.
3.
Construction:
a. Minimum 14 gauge steel panel thickness.
b. All panels and members hot dip galvanized after fabrication.
c. Enclosure removable to allow for maintenance.
d. Fitted with lockable latches.
e. Stainless steel latches and hinges.
4.
Finishing: Factory or shop finished in epoxy and urethane coating system as
5.
Noise reduction:
a. Provide acoustical insulation and acoustical enclosure ventilation louvers
and fan discharge silencers as necessary to achieve a measured sound
pressure level of 67 dBA when measured at 23 feet from the enclosure.
b. Protect acoustical insulation with perforated metal covers and plastic
bagging to prevent damage from abrasion or weather elements.
c. Provide an exhaust silencer matched to the enclosure to reduce the
overall noise emissions level of the engine/generator assembly to the
levels required above.
6.
Thermostatically-controlled unit heater:
a. Sized to maintain interior temperature of enclosure within the engine
generator manufacturers requirements.
b. Factory-installed and wired to a local panelboard within the enclosure.
7.
Doors:
a. Lockable with 3-point latches:
1) Match same key as existing pre-fabricated enclosure and new prefabricated enclosure provided as part of this work.
b. Stainless steel latches and hinges.
8.
Interior light:
a. Pre-wired battery operated light powered from the engine cranking
batteries.
May 2014
16232-21
9408A10
b.
Located within the enclosure to illuminate the automatic transfer

equipment as well as the engine generator control panel.
c. Controlled by a switch located by one of the entrance doors:
1) Wind-up timer type switch that automatically shuts off after a preset
interval not to exceed one hour.
d. Increase the size of the battery charger and battery to accommodate this
additional load.
9.
Additional lighting:
a. Furnish and install fluorescent fixtures:
1) UL listed for wet locations:
a) Maintain a minimum lighting level of 30 foot-candles.
b. Mounting:
1) As recommended by the enclosure manufacturer.
c. Furnish weatherproof switches.
d. Power supplied through internal step down transformer and panelboard:
1) Power source 208 VAC, 3 phase.
10. Finish:
a. Upon final assembly, prime the enclosure with a minimum of 2 coats of a
zinc rich primer.
b. Final finish: minimum of 2 coats of paint of a color selected by the Owner,
and in conformance with the painting and finishes section of these
Contract Documents.
11. The engine generator manufacturer is solely responsible for all connections
within the generator, the enclosure power system, and the enclosure so that
the enclosure and engine generator are a single fully functional system.
C.
Wiring:
1.
All external wiring connections to and from the engine and alternator shall be
made via two engine mounted junction boxes:
a. One box shall be used for all control and DC power connections.
b. The other box shall be used for the alternator output connections:
1) The alternator output breaker may be used for these connections.
2.
Enclose wiring in an NEC approved and recognized conduit system selected
and sized by the engine generator manufacturer:
a. Suitable for the temperatures, vibrations, and conditions on the enginedriven generator skid.
3.
Control wiring shall terminate on terminal blocks in the control junction box:
a. All connections shall be made to terminal blocks:
1) 600 volt rated.
2) Wires terminated on box with compression type ring type lugs,
installed with proper tooling.
3) Terminal blocks shall be numbered.
4) All wiring in terminal box both internal and field connections shall be
routed in plastic wire duct.
4.
Terminate alternator output connection wires using solderless compression
type lugs when connecting to bus bar:
a. Lug manufacturers termination methods and tools must be used.
5.
Splices are not allowed:
a. All connections are to be made at the terminal blocks in the control
junction boxes.
D.
Miscellaneous engine generator skid items:
May 2014
16232-22
9408A10
1.
Provide the following items:

a. Sectionalized drip pans.
b. Rain shields for exhaust lines.
c. Roof jacks.
2.08
MIXES (NOT USED)
2.09
2.10
FINISHES (NOT USED)
2.11

A.
Design prototype tests as follows:

1.
Use design prototypes similar to the equipment specified in this Section for
testing, and not the actual equipment for the Project.
2.
Minimum testing requirements:
a. As required by NFPA.
b. Maximum power in kW.
c. Maximum starting kilovolt-ampere at 35 percent instantaneous voltage
dip.
d. Alternator temperature rise:
1) By embedded thermocouple.
2) By resistance method.
3) Per NEMA MG1-22.40 and 16.40.
e. Governor speed regulation under steady state and transient conditions.
f. Fuel consumption at 25 percent, 50 percent, 75 percent, and 100 percent
load.
g. Harmonic analysis, voltage wave form deviation, and telephone influence
factor.
h. Cooling airflow.
i.
Torsional analysis testing to verify that the generator set is free of harmful
torsional stresses.
j.
Endurance testing.
k. A certified copy of the test results will be furnished to the Owner.
B.
Test each engine generator under varying loads with all machine safety guards and
exhaust system in place.
C.
The complete engine generator system is to be tested at full load in the

manufacturers factory:
1.
Test must include:
a. Radiator.
b. Engine control panel.
c. Single-step load pickup.
d. Transient and steady-state governing.
e. Safety shutdown device testing.
f. Rated power.
g. Maximum power.
2.
During the full load tests, re-circulate the radiator cooling air through the
radiator as necessary to test the system under the maximum ambient
conditions specified in this Section.
May 2014
16232-23
9408A10
3.
4.
5.
PART 3
Run the unit for 2 hours at 100 percent load with the following recordings
made hourly:
a. Frequency.
b. Voltage.
c. Amperage.
d. Kilowatts.
e. Room temperature as measured at the generator end of the unit.
f. Radiator air inlet temperature.
g. Coolant temperature.
h. Oil pressure.
Record the following items:
a. Time required for the engine/generator to start and reach rated voltage
and frequency in seconds.
b. Maximum block load capabilities of the unit.
c. Point at which overtemperature shutdown occurs.
d. Point at which overspeed shutdown occurs.
e. Point at which low oil pressure shutdown occurs:
f. Point at which overcrank shutdown occurs.
g. Point at which overspeed shutdown occurs.
h. Low water temperature alarm.
i.
Low fuel level alarm.
j.
Fuel leak alarm.
k. Overvoltage alarm and shutdown.
l.
Undervoltage alarm and shutdown.
m. Under frequency alarm and shutdown.
n. Low battery voltage alarm.
Furnish a certified copy of the test results to the Owner:
a. These test results must record any minor adjustments made during the
test.
b. If major changes, as determined by the Engineer, are made, the 2-hour
test must be repeated.
EXECUTION
3.01
3.02
3.03
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
General:
1.
Install the equipment as indicated on the Drawings.
2.
Perform all Work in accordance with manufacturers instructions and shop
drawings.
3.
Before start-up, furnish written certification that the entire installation and all
connections, both mechanical and electrical, have been inspected and are
proper and consistent with the Drawings and Specifications.
C.
Installation shall be by personnel experienced and regularly engaged in field

installation of power generation systems:
May 2014
16232-24
9408A10
1.
Make all field mechanical and electrical connections.
3.04
3.05
3.06
3.07

A.
B.
Provide the services of a manufacturers representative for the following:

1.
Before start-up, furnish written certification that the entire installation and all
connections, both mechanical and electrical, have been inspected and are
proper and consistent with all Drawings and Specifications.
2.
Furnish the services of factory-certified technicians during the start-up and
adjustment period to make sure all items furnished are in proper operating
condition:
a. Engine technician must be completely knowledgeable in the operation,
maintenance, and start-up of the mechanical system.
b. Electrical technician must be completely knowledgeable in the operation,
c. These technicians to instruct the Owner's personnel regarding the
operation and maintenance of all items supplied:
1) Supply written handouts during the training period, and these
handouts should be suitable for future reference after the training
period is completed.
d. Furnish a written report after the start-up:
1) Report must state that the installation is complete and satisfactory.
2) List the items requiring additional attention.
C.
Manufacturer to perform installation check, start-up, and load test.
D.
Certify that fuel, lubricating oil, and antifreeze conform with the manufacturer's
recommendations under the environmental conditions present.
E.
Check accessories that normally function while the equipment is in standby mode
for proper operation, before cranking the engine:
1.
These accessories include but are not limited to:
a. Engine heaters.
b. Fuel heaters, when used.
c. Battery charger.
d. Generator strip heaters, when used.
F.
Start-up under manual mode:

1.
Check for the following items:
a. Exhaust leaks.
b. External path for exhaust gases.
c. Cooling airflow.
d. Movement during starting and stopping.
e. Vibration during running.
f. Normal and emergency line-to-line voltage and phase rotation.
May 2014
16232-25
9408A10
G.
3.08
Automatic start-up:
1.
By means of simulated power outage test the following:
a. Set all timers for proper system coordination.
b. Remote automatic starting.
c. Transfer of load.
d. Automatic shutdown.
2.
Continuously monitor the following parameters during this test:
a. Engine temperature.
b. Oil pressure.
c. Battery charge level.
d. Generator voltage.
e. Generator amperes.
f. Frequency.
ADJUSTING
A.
Make adjustments as necessary and recommended by the manufacturer, Engineer,

or testing firm.
3.09
CLEANING (NOT USED)
3.10

A.
B.
Demonstrate operation of equipment as specified in Section 01756.
C.
Generating system:
1.
Full-load test the generating system at the site in the presence of the Engineer
for a period of 2 hours, with the manufacturer providing the necessary resistive
load banks to test at 1.0 power factor:
a. Permanently installed load banks supplied as part of the project may be
utilized to provide part of the full load.
2.
Before acceptance of the installation, subject equipment to process system
load tests, with available motor load, but not to exceed the generator's
nameplate rating, for a period of 2 hours.
3.
Correct defects that become evident during testing.
4.
Measure flows, pressures and temperatures of fuel, coolant, exhaust gas, and
radiator air at inlets and outlets to system components.
5.
Measure radiator performance at full load including airflow, air inlet
temperature and air outlet temperature.
6.
Provide test report.
D.
Upon completion of the work, at a time to be designated by the Owner's

representative, manufacturer to demonstrate for the Owner the operation of the
engine installation, including any and all special systems furnished by them, or
installed under their supervision.
E.
Test all control functions in conjunction with the engine generator start-up:
1.
These tests must include all normal starting and stopping functions as outlined
in these Specifications.
F.
Training:
May 2014
16232-26
9408A10
1.
2.
3.11
PROTECTION
A.
3.12
Manufacturers technicians must provide all training:

a. Technicians to instruct the Owner's personnel regarding the operation and
maintenance of all items supplied:
1) Supply written handouts during the training period that are suitable
for future reference after the training period is completed.
b. Operations training covering and detailing the normal, exercising, and day
to day operations of the equipment:
1) Operations training duration:
a) Minimum of 4 hours.
b) Two sessions of 2 hours each.
c) Schedule around plant operations shifts.
Furnish complete manuals, and training DVD for:
a. Training up to 6 plant personnel.

END OF SECTION
May 2014
16232-27
9408A10
SECTION 16240
BATTERY SYSTEMS
PART 1
1.01
1.02
GENERAL
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes:
1.
Nickel-cadmium battery systems.
B.
Related sections:
1.
2.
3.
b. Section 01610 - Project Design Criteria.
d. Section 16445 - Panelboards.
REFERENCES
A.
B.

1.
693 - Recommended Practice for the Seismic Design of Substations.
2.
1115 - Recommended Practice for Sizing Nickel-Cadmium Batteries for
Stationary Applications.
3.
1375 - Guide for Protection of Stationary Battery Systems.
4.
1491 - Guide for Selection and Use of Battery Monitoring Equipment in
Stationary Applications.
C.

1.
PE 5-1997 - Utility-Type Battery Chargers.
D.

1.
70E Article 320 - Safety Requirements Related to Batteries and Battery
Rooms.
E.
Occupational Health and Safety Administration (OSHA):

1.
1926.441 - Batteries and Battery Charging.
F.

1.
94 - Standard for Tests for Flammability of Plastic Materials for Parts in
Devices and Appliances.
May 2014
16240-1
9408A10
2.
3.
1.03
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.04
1.05
1564 - Standard for Industrial Battery Chargers.

1989 - Standard for Standby Batteries.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
1.
Battery systems to provide DC power to equipment under normal and
emergency conditions as specified in the Contract Documents or indicated on
the Drawings.
2.
Switchgear and valve battery systems:
a. Voltage: 48 VDC.
b. Battery type: Nickel-cadmium.
B.
1.
Size battery system to meet the functional requirements of the equipment in
accordance with IEEE 1115 using the following factors:
a. Design margin: 1.15.
b. Aging factor: 1.25.
c. Temperature correction factor:
1) Select the temperature correction factor from the IEEE table based
on the temperature range specified in Section 01610.
2.
Size the switchgear battery system to meet the following criteria for the actual
equipment provided:
a. Operate all continuous loads for a period of 4 hours:
1) 8 digital multi-function relays.
2) 2 digital motor protection relays.
3) 2 valve actuator standby load.
b. After a period of 4 hours:
1) Operate all main, tie, and generator breakers through two complete
cycles of close, trip, and spring charge.
2) Operate 1 valve actuator through 4 complete open-close cycles.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Product data:
1.
Complete bill of material including quantity, description, manufacturer, and part
number.
2.
Battery cells:
a. Manufacturer.
b. Type.
c. Amp-hour rating.
d. Volts per cell/volts per string.
e. Hydrogen off-gassing rate per amp of charging current.
f. Volume of electrolyte.
3.
Battery charger:
a. Input power requirements.
b. Output voltage.
May 2014
16240-2
9408A10
c. Maximum output current.

d. Enclosure type.
e. Alarm and status contacts.
4.
Anchorage hardware.
5.
Spill containment hardware.
6.
Chemical neutralization.
7.
MSDS data sheets.
8.
Panelboard.
9.
Warning signs.
10. Warranty.
C.
Shop drawings:
1.
Plan, elevation, and section drawings for:
a. Battery cells.
b. Racks.
c. Spill containment.
2.
Point-to-point wiring diagrams including all components of the battery system,
with each component and terminal number labeled.
D.
Furnish panelboard submittals as specified in Section 16445.
E.
1.
Complete written instructions detailing the complete installation of the battery
system assembly, setting into place, and wiring connections.
2.
Provide anchorage instructions and requirements for the battery racks based
on the seismic conditions of the site as specified in Section 01610.
F.

1.
Furnish the manufacturers standard shop manual for troubleshooting and
maintenance tasks.
2.
Include a table listing each maintenance task and the recommended interval
for the task.
G.
Test reports:
1.
Provide a report indicating that each unit shipped has been factory tested to
verify initial system capacity and performance of all electrical connections.
H.
Certification letter:
1.
Provide a certificate indicating that the battery rack(s) supplied comply with the
seismic requirements of IEEE 693 under the criteria specified in
Section 01610.
I.
Calculations:
1.
Complete calculations used to size the battery system in accordance with
IEEE 1115.
a. Use manufacturers load data for the actual equipment provided, including
the actual demand for protective relays, lights, etc. and the trip, close, and
spring charge currents for the circuit breakers provided:
1) Provide a table showing the load for each piece of equipment used in
the calculations (including trip, close, and spring charge actions for
circuit breakers).
May 2014
16240-3
9408A10
1.06
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.07
1.08

A.
B.
Store batteries in a climate-controlled environment until installation in their final

location.

A.
B.
1.
The equipment shall be de-rated in accordance with the manufacturers
guidelines for the project altitude and ambient temperature as specified in
Section 16240.
1.09
1.10
1.11
WARRANTY
A.
B.
Provide 20-year pro-rata warranty on the battery units. An individual unit shall be
considered defective if its capacity degrades to less than 80 percent of its published
capacity within 20 years of acceptance.
1.12
1.13
1.14
1.15
PART 2
2.01
PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Nickel-cadmium batteries:
1.
Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Alcad.
b. HBL Power Systems.
c. SENS.
B.
Battery chargers:
1.
May 2014
16240-4
9408A10
a.
b.
c.
EnerSys.
SAFT.
SENS.
2.02
2.03
2.04
2.05
2.06
COMPONENTS
A.
2.07
Nickel-cadmium batteries:
1.
Plates:
a. Sealed pocket plates.
b. Welded connections to plates.
c. Plastic grid plate separators.
2.
Jar and cover:
a. Constructed of flame-retardant, translucent material, marked on the sides
to indicate electrolyte levels.
b. Safety venting cap:
1) Flame arresting type.
ACCESSORIES
A.
Battery racks:
1.
Designed and certified to conform to IEEE 693.
2.
Welded steel support frames and rails.
3.
Provisions for attachment of a grounding lug.
4.
Flame-retardant spacers between each unit.
5.
Seismic anchoring hardware.
B.
Battery charger:
1.
Designed to float and equalize the batteries per manufacturers requirements
and recommendations.
2.
Sized to recharge the batteries from a fully discharged state to a fully charged
state in a period of 8 hours, while operating all continuous DC loads.
3.
Input voltage as indicated on the Drawings.
4.
AC input circuit breaker.
5.
DC output circuit breaker.
6.
DC output ammeter and voltmeter.
7.
Voltage surge suppressors.
8.
Contacts rated 5 A at 120 VAC for remote monitoring of the following signals:
a. Low battery voltage.
b. Battery charger fail.
9.
Enclosure rating as specified in Section 16240 for the area of installation.
C.
Signage:
1.
Provide warning signs meeting the requirements of OSHA 1926.441 at all
entrances to spaces containing batteries or battery chargers.
May 2014
16240-5
9408A10
D.
DC panelboard:
a. Provide a DC panelboard as specified in Section 16445 with circuits as
2.
Breaker sizes shown on the drawings are approximate. Size circuit breakers
based on the DC load of the actual equipment provided.
2.08
MIXES (NOT USED)
2.09
2.10
FINISHES
A.
2.11
Finish battery racks with an acid-resistant, electrostatically applied epoxy powder

coat, ANSI-61 gray in color.

A.
PART 3
Factory test each unit shipped to verify initial system capacity and performance of
all electrical connections.
1.
Lot testing or testing of a typical unit is not acceptable.
EXECUTION
3.01
3.02
3.03
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
Install battery system in accordance the manufacturers guidelines and submitted

installation instructions.
3.04
3.05
3.06
3.07

A.
Provide the services of a qualified manufacturers representative to inspect the

battery system and verify that the installation complies with the manufacturers
guidelines and written installation instructions.
3.08
3.09
CLEANING
A.
May 2014
16240-6
9408A10
3.10

A.
3.11
PROTECTION
A.
3.12

END OF SECTION
May 2014
16240-7
9408A10
SECTION 16267
MEDIUM VOLTAGE VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE
PART 1
1.01
1.02
GENERAL
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes:
1.
Engineered integrated medium voltage variable frequency drive (VFD) system
for control of medium voltage motor as specified herein.
B.
Related sections:
1.
2.
3.
a. Section 01230 Bid Alternates.
b. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures.
e. Section 16123 - 600 Volt or Less Wires and Cables.
f. Section 16224 - Medium Voltage Motors.
g. Section 16295 - Protective Relays.
h. Section 16305 - Electrical System Studies.
i.
Section 16332 - Medium Voltage Fuses.
REFERENCES
A.
B.

1.
ICS 6 - Industrial Control and Systems Enclosures.
2.
ICS 7 - Industrial Control and Systems Adjustable Speed Drives.
3.
MGI, Part 31 - Motors with higher peak voltage capability.
C.

1.
519-1992 - IEEE Recommended Practices and Requirements for Harmonic
Control in Electrical Power Systems.
2.
1100 - Powering and Grounding Sensitive Electronic Equipment (Emerald
Book).
D.

1.
347 Medium-Voltage AC Contactors, Controllers, and Control Centers.
May 2014
16267-1
9408A10
1.03
1.04
DEFINITIONS
A.
B.

1.
PCC: Point of common coupling: The point of common coupling for all
harmonic calculations and field measurements for both voltage and current
distortion is defined as the input terminals to the VFD.
2.
The VFD manufacturer or VFD supplier shall be defined as the same entity for
the purposes of this document.
3.
Operating speed range: as referenced in this document, the operating speed
range is defined as 30 percent to 100 percent (18 hertz to 60 hertz).
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
Interlock with existing RVAT starters:

1.
The existing RVAT starters are to be reused as a manual bypass to the VFD.
There will be a manual-transfer switch provided on the load side of the VFD to
prevent back-feeding the VFD during bypass operation. There will also be
extensive electronic interlocks between the VFD controls and the RVAT
controls. These interlocks are indicated on the Drawings. Provide VFD
prewired for interconnection as shown. Refer to Drawings 03-E-05, 06-N-03,
06-N-04, 06-N-07, 10-N-05, and 10-N-06.
B.
1.
Each VFD system shall consist of all components required to meet the
performance, protection, safety, testing and certification criteria of this Section.
These components include, but are not limited to:
a. Input fuses/disconnect and isolation contactor.
b. Phase-shifting transformer.
c. VFD converter/direct current-link/inverter.
d. Protective devices.
e. Cooling System.
2.
The VFD system:
a. Is a fully integrated package.
b. Includes all material necessary to interconnect VFD system elements,
even if shipped separately.
3.
Any modifications to a standard product necessary to meet this Section shall
be made only by the VFD manufacturer.
4.
Each VFD shall be completely factory pre-wired, assembled and then tested
as a complete package by the VFD manufacturer to ensure a properly
coordinated, fully integrated drive system.
5.
Motor compatibility:
a. The VFD shall be capable of operating the motor as specified in Section
16224, or any standard squirrel cage induction AC motor of equivalent
rating (horsepower, amperage, and RPM) over the specified speed range.
b. The VFD must provide motor overload protection under all operating
conditions.
c. It is the responsibility of the VFD manufacturer to ensure that the drive will
not damage insulation or reduce motor life expectancy due to high carrier
frequency, reflected wave, dv/dt or other drive electrical characteristics:
May 2014
16267-2
9408A10
1)
d.
e.
f.
g.
C.
The VFD manufacturer shall furnish equipment necessary to mitigate

potential damage to motor insulation.
2) The VFD shall inherently protect motor from high-voltage dv/dt
stress, up to 1000 ft of cable length to motor:
a) The motor shall not require nonstandard insulation systems or
insulation ratings above the VFD output voltage rating.
3) The VFD system shall produce an output waveform that will allow
utilization of standard alternating current squirrel cage induction
motors, without the motor requiring special insulation, additional
service factor, or derating:
a) To ensure that that there are no problems with motor heating,
the VFD output current waveform shall be inherently sinusoidal,
with a total harmonic current distortion not exceeding 3 percent
at 100% loading and speed.
The system design shall not have any inherent output harmonic
resonance in the operating speed range.
The VFD output shall produce no electrically induced pulsating torque to
the output shaft of the mechanical system, thereby eliminating the
possibility of exciting a resonance caused by VFD induced torque
pulsations:
1) VFD systems that produce torque pulsations in excess of 1 percent
will require a torsional analysis to be supplied by the VFD
manufacturer as part of the scope of supply.
2) The price of the torsional analysis shall be included in the base price
of the VFD.
3) If the torsional analysis shows that a special coupling is required, the
VFD supplier shall be required to pay the total additional cost
associated with such couplings, at no additional cost to the Owner.
Provide an input phase-shifting copper wound isolation transformer for
motor common mode voltage protection:
1) Allow for the use of a standard motor. Special high-voltage motor
insulation is not an acceptable method for protection against
common mode voltages.
Coordinate bearing protection methods (grounding rings/insulated
bearings/etc.) to ensure that VFD currents will not damage the motor
bearings.
Performance:
1.
Operating envelope:
a. Speed and torque requirements:
1) Provide a variable torque VFD as required by the driven load.
2) The VFD shall be capable of producing a variable alternating
voltage/frequency output to provide continuous operation over the
operating speed range.
3) The VFD must be capable of sustained operation at 10 percent
speed to facilitate checkout and maintenance of the driven
equipment.
4) As a commissioning and troubleshooting feature, the VFD power
circuit shall be capable of operating without a motor connected to the
VFD output.
b. Current requirements:
1) Provide 100 percent of rated output current on a continuous basis.
May 2014
16267-3
9408A10
2)
2.
3.
Variable torque VFD:

a) Minimum 110 percent current overload for 1 minute.
3) Produce fully rated torque at any speed in the operating range.
Harmonics:
a. The VFD shall comply with IEEE 519-1992 for total harmonic and current
distortion calculations and measurements. The VFD shall meet the
following distortion limits:
1) Voltage harmonics: Individual or simultaneous operation of the
VFD(s) shall not add more than 3 percent total harmonic voltage
distortion while operating from the utility source or more than
5 percent total harmonic voltage distortion while operating from
standby generation at the PCC.
2) Current harmonics: The maximum allowable total harmonic current
distortion limit for each VFD shall not exceed 5 percent as measured
at the PCC.
System efficiency:
a. The guaranteed minimum total VFD system efficiency shall be no less
than:
1) 96 percent at 100 percent speed and 100 percent load.
2) 95 percent at 80 percent speed and 50 percent load.
b. VFD system efficiency shall be calculated as follows:
Efficiency (%)
c.
d.
Power ( Load )
x 100
Power ( Supply )
Power:
1) Load power is the total 3-phase power measured at the output
terminals of the drive system, including output filters.
2) Supply power is the total power measured at the input terminals of
the VFD including input filters, line reactors, phase shifting
transformer, harmonic distortion attenuation equipment, and auxiliary
equipment (e.g., controls, fans) for complete system operation.
If the motor power factor is poor (less than 0.85 at rated load), causing
the VFD to provide higher than normal reactive current to the machine,
the required total VFD system efficiency requirement may be reduced by
0.5 percent.
D.
System input power factor:

1.
The VFD system shall maintain a 95 percent minimum true power factor for
operating speed range and above 60% loading.
2.
The VFD system shall never have a leading power factor under either utility or
generator operation.
E.
Output frequency regulation of the VFD:

1.
Within 0.5 percent without encoder or tachometer feedback.
F.
Sound level:
1.
Maximum allowable audible noise from the VFD system shall be 80 dBA at a
distance of 1 meter (3.3 feet) at any speed or load condition.
2.
VFD systems with audible noise in excess of this limit shall be provided with
sufficient noise abatement treatment to reduce the sound pressure level below
80 dBA.
May 2014
16267-4
9408A10
1.05
G.
Space limitations - footprint:

1.
The VFD system must fit in the space indicated on the Project Drawings.
H.
Additional Control Requirements:

1.
Include additional input/outputs, relays, and programming as required to
provide all controls as shown and specified, including interlocks with manual
transfer switch for safe operation.
2.
The VFD will be required to operate the discharge valve associated with each
motor, and will also include hardwired interlocks for pressure and level. Refer
to VFD schematic in the Project Drawings for additional details.
3.
Provide VFD start sequence as indicated on the Drawings.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Furnish submittals as specified in Sections 01330 and 16050:

1.
Custom prepared by the VFD system manufacturer for this specific application,
and edited for the equipment furnished.
B.
Product data:
1.
Manufacturer of VFD.
2.
Manufacturer of all components of the VFD.
3.
Dimensions:
a. Height.
b. Width.
c. Depth.
4.
Weight.
5.
Nameplate schedule.
6.
Bill of material.
7.
a. Metering system.
b. Protective relaying.
c. Cooling system.
8.
Ratings:
a. Voltage.
b. Phase.
c. Input current.
d. Output current.
e. Interrupting rating (circuit breakers and fuses):
1) Furnish manufacturers time current curves, consistent with power
systems study software:
a) Refer to Section 16305, and coordinate actual curves with
power study provider.
f. Momentary current rating.
g. Cooling system data, including, but not limited to: cfm values, redundancy
criteria, fan horsepower data, fan motor starter and breaker data, etc.:
1) Provide all heat dissipation data necessary to design all auxiliary
HVAC systems.
2) Confirm temperature limits are maintained as specified herein.
9.
Catalog cut sheets for major components.
10. Surge protection data.
11. Design data:
a. Efficiency and power factor values.
May 2014
16267-5
9408A10
b.
Certification that the drive is sized for the full nameplate motor
horsepower and current (at motor RPM) of the driven load at the installed
altitude.
c. Certification that based upon the VFD design, cable length to motor, and
motor dielectric insulation level that the VFD will not damage motor due to
harmonic distortion, carrier frequency, reflected wave, dv/dt, or other VFD
produced characteristics.
d. Certification that based upon the VFD design:
1) There is no output harmonic resonance in the operating speed range.
2) There are no electrically induced pulsating torques to the output shaft
of the mechanical system.
e. Certification that all electronic circuits and printed circuit boards are
conformally coated.
12. List of recommended spare parts.
13. Name of dealers repair facility and parts stocking agreement with the factory:
a. Agreement shall outline in detail the manufacturers parts stocking
requirements and the method by which the manufacturers representative
verifies that the stock is at an acceptable level.
b. Agreement should also outline the method by which the manufacturers
representative determines that the service personnel meet factory
standards.
14. For equipment installed in structures designated as seismic design category C,
D, E, or F submit the following as specified in Section 16050:
a. Manufacturers statement of seismic qualification with substantiating test
data.
b. Manufacturers special seismic certification with substantiating test data.
C.
Shop drawings:
1.
Complete plan and elevation drawings including bus layout of each VFD
showing:
a. All dimensions.
b. Interfaces with all other equipment.
c. Panel, sub-panel and component layout indexed to the bill of material:
a) Front panel.
b) Sub-panels.
c) Interior panels.
d. Conduit connections/windows.
e. Required clearance around equipment.
f. Shipping splits.
2.
Assembly drawings, cross-section as a minimum, for each VFD with major
dimensions indicated.
3.
Block diagram showing the basic control and protection systems identifying the
protection, control, trip and alarm functions, the reference signals and
commands and the auxiliary devices:
a. Include cooling system functions and control interfaces.
4.
Complete schematic, wiring and interconnection diagrams showing
connections to both internal and external devices:
a. Wiring diagrams shall include terminal number and wire numbers.
b. Internal schematics, elementary diagrams, and wiring diagrams of each
unit or compartment, including wiring identification and terminals.
5.
Complete interface and connection diagrams for relaying system.
May 2014
16267-6
9408A10
6.
Complete 1-line and 3-line diagrams including, but not limited to: fuses, circuit
breakers, contactors, instrument transformers, meters, relays, timers, control
devices, and other equipment comprising the complete system:
a. Indicate all device electrical ratings (voltage, current, time ratings,
impedances, tolerances, etc.).
D.
1.
Detail the complete installation of the equipment including rigging, moving, and
setting into place.
2.
For equipment installed in structures designated as seismic design category A
or B:
a. Provide manufacturers installation instructions and anchoring details for
connecting equipment to supports and structures.
3.
D, E, or F:
a. Provide project-specific installation instructions and anchoring details
based on support conditions and requirements to resist seismic and wind
loads as specified in Section 16050.
b. Submit anchoring drawings with supporting calculations.
c. Drawings and calculations shall be stamped by a professional engineer
registered in the state where the Project is being constructed.
E.
Calculations:
1.
Torsional analysis:
a. If a torsional analysis is required, as defined by the output waveform
section of this Section, the price of the torsional analysis shall be included
in the base price of the VFD system.
b. The total rotating system shall be analyzed to determine its natural
resonant frequencies. Stresses are to be calculated for elements of the
rotating system, utilizing torsional excitation data from the drive and driven
system, taking into account potential fault conditions, and appropriate
amplification and damping factors of the rotating system.
c. Provide a written report that details the procedures used and the
assumptions that were considered. The results of the analysis must be
presented in both detailed and summary form. Specific data presented
shall include the following:
1) A diagram of the frequencies of the torque pulsations and the
mechanical resonant frequencies showing their coincident points.
2) A plot of total shaft stress versus operating speed for the most highly
stressed areas of the rotating system.
3) A diagram of the rotating system model and mode shapes for
resonance(s) of interest.
4) Tables summarizing total calculated stresses for each element of the
rotating system at operating speeds where interference(s) exist
between torsional excitations and torsional resonance.
5) Details of the rotating system used in the analysis, including the
specified or a recommended alternate coupling.
6) Recommendations for any modifications to the proposed system, if
indicated by the analysis to be advisable, which cost shall be borne
by the VFD system manufacturer.
May 2014
16267-7
9408A10
2.
3.
Input Harmonic study:

a. A preliminary harmonic analysis shall be performed. A power system short
circuit ratio of 20 shall be used. All VFDs shall be assumed to be
operating at maximum speed and maximum load. The short circuit current
(ISC) utilized for the harmonic analysis calculations is defined as:
1) ISC = 20 * (Sum Total Full Load Amps of all VFDs).
b. A separate harmonic analysis shall be performed based on the standby
generator system. Coordinate with the generator(s) manufacturer so the
actual characteristics for the generator(s) supplied, or existing, for this
Project are used in the harmonic analysis. At a minimum, the study should
include:
1) Generator(s) kW ratings:
2) Impedances (include values in ohms and as a percentage of the
generator(s) base) :
a) Subtransient - Direct Axis.
b) Subtransient - Quadrature Axis.
c) Transient Saturated.
d) Synchronous Direct Axis.
e) Synchronous Quadrature Axis.
f) Negative Sequence.
g) Zero Sequence.
Complete protective device and drive parameter study based upon the actual
power system configuration and the actual motor protection parameters.
F.
Test reports.
1.
Provide the following certified test reports for each actual VFD being furnished:
a. Efficiency at 25 percent, 50 percent, 75 percent, and 100 percent speed.
b. Power factor at 0 percent, 25 percent, 50 percent, 75 percent, and
100 percent speed.
c. Certified subassembly test results.
d. Certified system level test results.
e. Certification that the actual measured harmonic distortion for both voltage
and current is within the specification limits at the installed site.
f. Certification that the actual measured voltage at the motor terminations is
less than 90 percent of the motor insulation dielectric withstand level.
G.
Record documents:
1.
Certified Record Drawings of all equipment with information listed above.
H.
Manufacturers field reports:

1.
Certification letter from manufacturer that the VFD system has been inspected,
started up, and is installed in accordance with the manufacturers
requirements.
a. The report must state that the installation is complete and satisfactory, or
list items requiring additional attention and proposal for the actions.
b. If any items require attention after the initial startup, a final report is
required stating that the installation is complete and satisfactory.
2.
Report listing the setting of all VFD adjustable parameters and their values
after start-up.
3.
Recorded shock and vibration values (during shipping) shall be compared to
the maximum allowable shock and vibration tolerances.
May 2014
16267-8
9408A10
a.
4.
1.06
Certify that the actual recorded shock and vibration values did not exceed
maximum shock and vibration tolerances.
Certification that the actual measured harmonic distortion for both voltage and
current is within the specification limits at the installed site.
I.

1.
Spare parts list with supplier names and part numbers.
2.
Start-up and commissioning instructions and data.
3.
Complete bill of material indexed to the drawings, identifying the catalog or
part numbers, manufacturer, and quantities of components of the VFD system.
4.
Operating manuals:
a. Submit operating instructions and a maintenance manual presenting full
details for care and maintenance of each model of VFD provided under
this Contract.
5.
Operating instructions:
a. The written descriptions shall detail the operational functions of all
controls on the front panel, including the keypad functions and
parameters.
6.
Maintenance manual:
a. Furnish maintenance manuals with instructions covering all details
pertaining to care and maintenance of all equipment as well as identifying
all parts.
b. Manuals shall include but are not limited to the following:
1) Adjustment and test instructions covering the steps involved in the
initial test, adjustment, and start-up procedures.
2) Detailed control instructions that outline the purpose and operation of
every control device used in normal operation.
3) All schematic wiring and external diagrams:
a) Furnish drawings in a fully legible reduced 11-inch by 17-inch
format.
J.
Warranties:
1.
Submit proof of performance guaranty as specified herein.
2.
Manufacturers service and repair support during and after warranty.
K.
Certificates:
1.
Certify that the VFD system proposed has been in production for a minimum of
3 years.
2.
Certification letter:
a. Provide a letter from the VFD manufacturer that lists each paragraph,
subparagraph, etc. of this Section and states compliance/non-compliance
with said paragraph:
1) If non-compliance is indicated, provide an explanation for the
deviation and alternative method to address the non-compliance.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
May 2014
16267-9
9408A10
1.07
B.
Qualifications:
1.
Any third party certification, safety, or protection requirements shall be applied
to the VFD system as a whole. Certification or protection of system elements
or individual components by themselves is not acceptable.
2.
VFDs shall be manufactured, assembled, tested, and provided with UL
listing/label.
3.
VFDs shall be manufactured by the VFD manufacturer at its own facility, which
shall have a quality assurance program that is certified in accordance with
ISO 9001.
C.
The VFD manufacturer shall be able to demonstrate at least 10 years of experience

in manufacturing medium voltage VFDs, to demonstrate their capability to provide
parts and service support:
1.
Furnish a users list of similar design equipment, complete with contact names
and telephone numbers.
D.
Certificates:
1.
It is the intent of this document to specify dependable and reliable equipment
offering the best performance available from currently proven technology. All
equipment furnished under this Contract must therefore have documentation
showing proof of actual operation for a minimum of 3 years:
a. New components or design topologies that have less than 3 years of
actual operating experience will not be acceptable.
E.
Manufacturer shall have supplied at least 3 systems of similar nature and size,
which have been installed within a 500-mile radius of the Project location.
F.
The manufacturer shall have established an authorized dealer having parts and
service facility within a 200-mile radius of the Project:
1.
Pre-qualified service personnel shall be available on a 24-hour-a-day basis.
The personnel must be completely familiar with the items supplied so as to
return the equipment to service in the shortest possible time.
2.
The authorized dealer must have no less than 100 percent of recommended
spare parts, as identified in the product data submittal in its stock at all times:
a. A personal inspection of the facility may be made by the Owner to
substantiate claims of available replacement parts.

A.
B.
Ship VFDs to the job site on a dedicated air ride vehicle that will allow the
Contractor to utilize on site off loading equipment:
1.
VFDs shall be delivered to the site pre-assembled and wired:
a. Cabling for connection across shipping splits shall be neatly coiled and
identified.
b. Exposed sections of equipment shall be fully protected from damage
during shipment.
c. All necessary hardware for reconnecting shipping splits shall be provided.
2.
Furnish temporary equipment heaters within the VFD to prevent condensation
from forming.
May 2014
16267-10
9408A10
3.
1.08

A.
1.09
1.10
Ship each VFD with 2 tamperproof GPS-based accelerometers that record the
location, time, shock, and vibration experienced by the VFD during shipping
and handling:
a. Values in excess of the manufacturers submitted maximum values shall
require that the equipment is deemed unacceptable, and new equipment
shall be furnished in its place.
SEQUENCING
A.
Conduct the initial fault current study as specified in Section 16305 and submit
results for Engineers review.
B.
After successful review of the initial fault current study, as specified in

Section 16305, submit complete equipment submittal as specified in the Submittals
article of this Section for Engineers review.
C.
Following approved submittal, conduct internal factory test to ensure that all
systems and equipment are functional and submit certified test results for
Engineers review.
D.
Conduct factory acceptance test. The factory acceptance test shall be witnessed by
Owner and/or Owners representative at the Owners discretion.
E.
Ship equipment to project site after successful completion of factory acceptance

test.
F.
Install equipment in the field.
G.
Conduct final fault current and coordination study.
H.
Make all settings per study.
I.
Conduct field acceptance tests including harmonic testing and submit results for
Engineers review.
J.
Submit manufacturers certification that all equipment has been properly installed
and is fully functional for Engineers review.
K.
Conduct Owners training sessions.
L.
Formally energize, start-up and commission equipment.
SCHEDULING
A.
B.
Schedule the witnessed factory acceptance test 30 days before the test.
C.
Schedule Owners training sessions 30 days before the session:
May 2014
16267-11
9408A10
1.
D.
1.11
1.12
Conduct training sessions before formal energization of the equipment.
Schedule the formal energization, start-up, and commissioning of the equipment

30 days in advance.
WARRANTY
A.
B.
Performance guaranty:
1.
Perform factory test of each unit prior to shipping to confirm all following
performance requirements have been met as listed below:
a. VFDs that fail to meet the specified requirements shall be repaired or
replaced at the Owners discretion.
2.
Guaranty that the harmonics at the PCC, as defined herein, are at or below the
levels specified.
3.
Guaranty that the power factor at the input to the VFD meets the levels as
specified herein:
a. For each VFD that fails to meet the minimum specified input power factor,
the Owner shall be reimbursed for the difference between the specified
power factor and measured power factor at the rate of $0.05 per kilowatt
hour, for operation at 24 hours per day, 365 days per year, for 10 years.
4.
Guaranty that the measured reflected voltage at the motor is below the motor
insulation dielectric withstand level as specified herein.
5.
Guaranty that the efficiency of VFD as measured at the manufacturers facility
at 100% load is at or greater than the levels specified:
a. For each VFD that fails to meet the specified efficiency, the Owner shall
be reimbursed for the difference between the specified efficiency and
measured efficiency at the rate of $0.05 per kilowatt hour, for operation at
24 hours per day, 365 days per year, for 10 years.
SYSTEM START-UP
A.
B.
The VFD manufacturer shall be responsible for start-up of the VFDs in the presence
of the equipment suppliers, Contractor, Engineer and Owner.
C.
Any difficulties of problems that arise as a result of start-up shall be documented by

the VFD manufacturer and shall be corrected within 5 working days at no cost to the
Owner.
1.13
1.14
COMMISSIONING
A.
After start-up and training has been completed, the VFDs shall be commissioned by
the VFD manufacturer:
1.
The VFDs shall operate the driven load without failure under normal operating
conditions for a period of 30 days.
2.
Any failures shall be repaired by the VFD manufacturer. Following repair, a
new 30-day period shall start.
May 2014
16267-12
9408A10
3.
1.15
MAINTENANCE
A.
Maintenance service: Manufacturer shall describe the field service system available
to support the VFD system. As a minimum describe:
1.
Type of technical support available (e.g., system engineering and technician).
2.
Location of field service personnel.
3.
Field service daily rates in dollars per hour and dollars per day.
4.
Guaranteed response times to service requests.
5.
The VFD manufacturer shall provide maintenance service throughout the
warranty period at no additional cost to the Owner:
a. Maximum response time to a maintenance call shall not exceed 24 hours.
B.
Spare parts:
1.
a. Three of each type of power and control fuse.
b. One complete power module or four of each type of power semiconductor
(SCR, GTO, IGBT, IGCT, power diode, etc.) used in the converter/rectifier
or inverter.
c. Eight of each type or size of DC link capacitor if not included in complete
power module listed above.
d. Two of each type or size of input and output filter capacitor.
e. Five of each type of panel lamp.
f. One keypad.
g. One fiber optic connector of each type.
h. One set of replacement air filters.
i.
For VFDs with belt driven blowers, one set of belts.
j.
One of each control printed circuit board, 2 of each type gate firing
boards, include all diagnostic system printed circuit boards.
2.
All parts supplied with the equipment shall be properly labeled for ease of
identification and to permit the shortest possible time to repair:
a. Any parts that come from a sub-supplier shall be labeled with that
manufacturers name and part number.
3.
Manufacturer shall state closest point where spare parts are stocked and
where service can be obtained:
a. Minimum response time for trouble calls shall be 2 hours.
b. A qualified service technician shall be on site within 24 hours of a qualified
request.
4.
Manufacturer shall warrant that all parts shall be available for a minimum of
10 years.
PART 2
2.01
Commissioning shall only be complete once an uninterrupted 30-day period

has been completed.
PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS
A.
One of the following, no equal

1.
Refer to Section 01230 for bid alternates.
2.
Toshiba - T300MVi.
3.
Yaskawa MV1000.
May 2014
16267-13
9408A10
2.02
2.03
2.04
2.05
EQUIPMENT
A.
General:
1.
Sinusoidal pulse width modulated, (PWM), voltage source type drive with input
harmonic cancellation by:
a. An 24 pulse or greater phase-shifting isolation transformer
2.
Microprocessor based controls.
3.
VFDs that have an active input section for either harmonic or voltage control
are not acceptable.
B.
Ratings:
1.
Voltage:
a. Input voltage as indicated on the Drawings plus or minus 10 percent, 3phase 60 hertz.
2.
Current:
a. Sized per the continuous current rating of the VFD.
3.
Short-circuit and withstand rating:
a. Minimum 50 kA RMS symmetrical.
C.
Operational features:
1.
Protective features:
a. Provide protective features even if not specifically listed to ensure
protection of the drive for all operating conditions.
b. Relay protection:
1) Provide all potential transformers, current transformers, and a digital
motor protection relay with protective features as indicated on the
Drawings:
a) Refer to Section 16295.
2) The motor protection relay functions in addition to the VFD protective
features, and some functions are duplicated between the relay and
the drive protective features:
a) Coordinate all relay functions with the drive parameters to
ensure that the relay functions do not interfere with the drive
operation, while performing the best achievable protection.
c. Motor overload protection.
d. Instantaneous overcurrent.
e. Instantaneous overvoltage.
f. Undervoltage.
g. Power unit overtemperature.
h. Phase loss.
i.
VFD output short circuit.
j.
VFD output ground fault.
k. Blown fuse.
l.
Motor overtemperature protection:
1) Winding temperature RTDs:
a) as indicated on the Drawings and as specified.
May 2014
16267-14
9408A10
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
m. Ground fault withstand:

1) In the event of a ground fault, the VFD shall be capable of
annunciating the ground fault condition, safely operating and trip.
2) After a ground fault trip, the VFD shall be capable of being reset and
operating normally.
3) There shall be no risk of fire or electric shock as a result of the
ground fault.
n. The VFD system shall be protected from damage due to the following,
without requiring an output contactor:
1) Single-phase fault or 3-phase short circuit on VFD system output
terminals.
2) Failure to commutate inverter thyristor due to severe overload or
other conditions.
3) Loss of input power due to opening of VFD input disconnect device
or utility power failure during VFD operation.
4) Loss of one phase of input power.
5) Motor regeneration due to backspin or loss of VFD input power.
o. The VFD shall be able to withstand the following fault conditions without
damage to the power circuit components:
1) Failure to connect a motor to the VFD output.
2) VFD output open circuit that may occur during operation.
Control mode:
a. The VFD shall operate in a either a constant volts/hertz or sensorless
vector mode. The control mode shall be selectable using the programming
keypad.
Frequency control:
a. Minimum of 3 selectable skip frequencies with adjustable bandwidths.
b. Programmable minimum frequency.
c. Programmable maximum frequency.
Acceleration/Deceleration:
a. Separately adjustable acceleration and deceleration rates.
b. Each rate shall be adjustable from 0.01 to 3,600 seconds.
Spinning load:
a. Capable of determining the speed and direction of a spinning load, catch
the load and accelerate or decelerate it without damage to the load.
b. The user shall have the option of employing this feature or disabling it.
Programmable loss of signal:
a. Upon loss of reference speed signal the VFD shall be programmable to
either stop, maintain current speed, or default to preselected speed.
Power interrupt or voltage sag ridethrough:
a. Capable of continuous operation in the event of a power loss of 5 cycles
or less.
b. The VFD system must be capable of automatically restarting in the event
of a momentary loss of power:
1) The VFD system shall provide the user with the choice of
automatically restarting or not.
2) The user shall be able to selectively apply this feature and have the
ability to set the allowable restart time applicable to some, but not
necessarily all, conditions as determined by the user to be
appropriate for the specific application.
c. The VFD system shall be capable of continuous operation with 25 percent
voltage sag on the input power line.
May 2014
16267-15
9408A10
8.
Hardwired inputs and outputs:

a. Analog inputs.
1) Configurable as either 0 to 10 volts or 4 to 20 milliamperes.
b. Analog outputs.
1) Programmable 4 to 20 milliamperes isolated.
c. Discrete inputs.
1) Programmable.
d. Discrete outputs.
1) Programmable.
2) Form C relay contacts.
e. Potentiometer 3-wire input.
f. Provide additional inputs and outputs or control relays as required to meet
the control functions as indicated on the Drawings.
9.
Communications:
a. Provide each VFD with a modbus TCP/IP communications card for
Ethernet communications:
1) Refer to Section 17100 for required signals, to be communicated to
SCADA.
b. Complete control of the starter and monitoring of all starter parameters
and diagnostics shall be available odver the communications network.
10. Diagnostics and fault recording:
a. Fault memory shall be maintained in the event of a power outage.
b. The fault memory shall be accessible line by line on the keypad or via RS232, RS-485, and communications interface protocol as specified herein.
c. The control logic section shall be fully digital and not require analog
adjustment pots or fixed selector resistors.
d. The VFD shall include a comprehensive microprocessor based digital
diagnostic system that monitors its own control functions and displays
faults and operating conditions.
e. A FAULT LOG shall record, store, and display the following 32 most
recent events:
1) Date and time of day.
2) Type of fault.
f. A HISTORIC LOG shall record, store, and display the following variables
at an adjustable time interval for the last 32 events:
1) Speed demand.
2) VFD output frequency.
3) Demand (output) amps.
4) Feedback (motor) amps.
5) VFD output volts.
6) Type of fault.
11. Automatic restart:
a. User selectable, automatic restart feature allowing the VFD to restart
following a momentary power failure or other VFD fault:
1) Programmable for up to 9 automatic restart attempts with an
adjustable time delay between restart attempts.
12. Firing signals:
a. All internal firing signals and other communications that link operational
controls with power components (such as status and diagnostic signals)
shall meet noise immunity and safety requirements as defined by
applicable EN Norms and IEEE Standards.
May 2014
16267-16
9408A10
2.06
COMPONENTS
A.
Enclosure Sections:
1.
NEMA Type 1 gasketed.
2.
Microprocessor and control logic boards and their power supplies shall be
housed in a sealed, non-ventilated NEMA Type 1 gasketed section, safely
accessible without exposure to high voltages and without drive shutdown.
3.
Provide filtered cooling air inlets for fan-cooled equipment:
a. Inlet air filters shall be 100 percent washable.
b. Constructed of a progressively structured, corrosion-free media.
c. For cleaning purposes, filters shall be front replaceable while the VFD is in
operation without exposing maintenance personnel to any of the power
components.
4.
Cabinets and doors shall be fabricated in accordance with NEMA standards
for enclosures including considerations for door width and height, weight, and
spans to be supported using NEMA recommended gauge steel, for sturdy
construction and dimensional integrity to assure long-term fit and function.
5.
Interlocks:
a. Interlocking shall be fully coordinated to prevent access to all high voltage
compartments, including transformer, filters, or any switchgear that is part
of the supply, when line power is applied to the VFD system.
b. Interlocks must be mechanical to provide positive lock-out:
1) Electrical interlock switches alone are not acceptable.
6.
Design enclosures to avoid harmonic and inductive heating effects:
a. The enclosures shall be designed to shield any outside equipment from
interference, enclosing and shielding the complete system to eliminate
any radio frequency interference.
7.
All low voltage wiring shall be fully isolated from medium voltage
compartments by metal barriers.
B.
Grounding and Wiring:

1.
The main grounding of the VFD system shall have a common loop consisting
of 4/0 minimum copper cable placed in the enclosure base:
a. This cable shall loop the perimeter of the base and shall be attached to
stainless steel grounding pads welded to the base in at least two
locations, one at each end of the enclosure.
2.
Control wiring shall be prewired within the enclosure:
a. Ring type connectors.
b. Spade type connectors are not acceptable.
c. No soldering shall be used in connection with any wiring.
d. All terminal blocks shall have at least 20 percent spares.
3.
Wiring shall be adequately supported to avoid tension on conductors and
terminations.
4.
Wherever wiring passes metal edges or through holes, suitable guards or
grommets shall be provided to prevent cutting or chafing of the insulation.
5.
Install all wiring in surface mounted conduit or wire-ways:
a. Any section of wiring outside of conduit or wire-way shall be securely tied
with cable ties at intervals not exceeding 6 inches.
b. No cables shall be tied to or in any way supported from power busses.
6.
Tag all wiring with permanent labels at each termination, junction box, and
device:
a. Labels shall correspond to the schematic and wiring diagrams.
May 2014
16267-17
9408A10
C.
Bus:
1.
Power bus:
a. High-conductivity copper and tin-plated.
b. Sized for the VFD continuous current rating.
c. Suitably braced per the short circuit rating as specified herein.
d. All connections shall be bolted or continuously welded.
2.
Ground bus:
a. High-conductivity copper and tin-plated.
b. All connections shall be bolted or continuously welded.
c. Provide stainless steel grounding pads for each power cubicle.
d. Include ground cable connectors or lugs, sized to match ground cables as
indicated on the Drawings
D.
Input and output power terminations:

1.
Connected via isolated, supported, and plated bus strap connections.
2.
Sufficient space shall be provided for termination connections from the top or
the bottom of the VFD cubicle.
3.
Include provisions for application of standard stress cones.
4.
Include provisions for grounding of shielded cabling.
E.
Input disconnect and isolation contactor:

1.
Integrated into the VFD system and mounted within the VFD enclosure.
2.
Design and construction of the incoming enclosure shall provide visual
confirmation that the switch is opened and that an air gap is present between
the power source and the drive.
3.
Voltage and current ratings consistent with the system voltage and VFD
system continuous current:
a. Current rating shall be greater than the actual motor nameplate current or
inrush current, whichever is greater.
Suitably braced with the same or greater withstand rating as the power bus.
4.
Provide an air gap type input disconnect switch to isolate the entire VFD from
the power source:
a. Load break.
b. Non-load break is acceptable if interlocked with the VFD control system
such that the VFD is stopped before opening of the isolation switch.
c. Provide input protection fuses in accordance with Section 16332:
1) Provide blown fuse indication.
2) Sized in accordance with the fuse manufacturers standards.
d. Include provision for padlocking in the open position.
e. Grounds and isolates the disconnect switch in the open position.
5.
Isolation Contactor:
a. Medium voltage vacuum contactor.
b. Remains opened when the VFD is not operational as indicated on the
Drawings:
1) Provide all circuitry to control the contactor.
c. Mechanically and electrically interlocked to open when the disconnect
switch is opened.
d. Magnetically operated and held.
e. 3-pole vacuum break.
f. Provide single-break high-pressure type main contacts with weld-resistant
alloy contact faces.
g. Provide contact wear indicators.
May 2014
16267-18
9408A10
h.
i.
Provide all required auxiliary interlocks and auxiliary contacts.

120VAC coil operating voltage, unless otherwise specified or indicated on
the Drawings.
F.
Phase shifting transformer/rectifiers:

1.
Integral part of the VFD assembly and factory mounted and wired within the
VFD enclosure.
2.
Include power fuses on the input to the converter rectifier devices to protect
the secondary of the transformer from any potentially harmful fault currents:
a. Alternative arrangements that involve coordinated protection with an input
circuit breaker are not acceptable.
3.
Provide common mode voltage protection and phase shifting for 24 pulse or
higher converter bridge rectifier:
a. VFD systems utilizing input 3-phase alternating current line reactors that
require motors equipped with special higher voltage rated insulation
systems are not acceptable.
4.
Rated for rectifier duty.
5.
Copper windings with a maximum of 115 degrees Celsius rise and 220-degree
Celsius insulation with overtemperature protection.
G.
Direct current link inductors:

1.
Direct current link inductors, if required, shall be air core to prevent saturation.
2.
Separate inductors, split dual winding type, shall be provided in the positive
and negative leg of the direct current link to minimize stray magnetic fields.
3.
Maximum temperature rise shall not exceed 115 degrees Celsius with
minimum 220 degrees Celsius insulation and over-temperature protection.
4.
The inductors shall be integral to the VFD system lineup.
5.
If it is not possible to integrate the inductors into the VFD system enclosure,
the cabling and connecting must be entirely supplied and/or contracted by the
VFD system manufacturer, and approved by the Engineer.
6.
Inductors shall meet the requirements of ANSI C57.16 and shall be designed
to prevent saturation under maximum fault current conditions.
H.
Direct current link capacitors:

1.
Capacitors used in the converter direct current link shall be integral to the VFD
system lineup.
2.
Capacitors used in the converter direct current link shall contain discharge
resistors and capable of reducing the residual charge to 50 volts or less within
5 minutes after the capacitor is disconnected from the source of supply.
I.
Keypad:
1.
Furnished with a keypad for programming and control.
2.
Password security to protect drive parameters.
3.
Mounted on the door of the VFD.
4.
Back-lit LCD with a minimum of 2 lines of a minimum of 16 characters each.
5.
Programming and display features language: English.
6.
Parameters:
a. Stored in nonvolatile memory and settable in the field through the keypad.
7.
Capable of displaying the following parameters:
a. Speed (percent).
b. Output current (Amperes).
c. Output frequency (Hertz).
May 2014
16267-19
9408A10
8.
9.
2.07
d. Input voltage.
e. Input current (Amperes).
f. Output voltage.
g. Total 3-phase kilowatt.
h. Kilowatt hour meter.
i.
Elapsed run time meter.
j.
Revolutions per minute.
k. Direct current bus voltage.
In addition to all keys required for programming, the keypad shall have the
following:
a. Automatic/Manual selector.
b. Start pushbutton.
c. Stop pushbutton.
d. Jog pushbutton.
e. Speed increment.
f. Speed decrement.
g. RUN indicator.
h. PROGRAM indicator.
i.
FAULT indicator.
Diagnostics:
a. Include features as specified herein.
J.
Pilot devices and switches:

1.
Provide the VFD with hardwired controls as indicated on the Drawings.
K.
Hardwired I/O:
1.
Provide all hardwired I/O as indicated on the Drawings.
L.
Software Interfaced:
1.
Graphical tool suite to interface with the VFD.
2.
Capable of displaying and editing all VFD system parameters.
3.
Include fault diagnostics, and fault log download.
4.
Include trending.
5.
All parameters displayed on the PC tool shall be synchronized with the same
parameters as shown on the standard keypad display.
6.
Provide all connection cables to interface with computer.
M.
Control power:
1.
Furnish voltage transformers to derive control power mounted and wired inside
the drive enclosure. All control power shall be provided internally.
2.
Include primary and secondary fusing.
3.
Size the transformer to supply power to all VFD controls and options as well as
any external devices indicated on the Drawings including the motor winding
heater.
ACCESSORIES
A.
Surge Protection:
1. Metal oxide varistor arresters.
a. High voltage dead front design for elbow connection.
b. Distribution class.
c. Voltage ratings consistent with the system voltage.
May 2014
16267-20
9408A10
B.
Conformal coating:
1.
Provide conformal coating material applied to electronic circuitry and printed
circuit boards to act as protection against moisture, dust, temperature
extremes, and chemicals such as H2S and chlorine.
C.
Heat dissipation/cooling system:

1.
Thermostatically controlled within the VFD enclosure:
a. Sized to maintain the VFD operating temperature to 10 degrees Celsius
below the maximum allowable VFD operating temperature at maximum
rated operating load and maximum ambient temperature as identified in
Section 16050, as coordinated with the facility cooling system.
2.
Air-cooled:
a. Provide redundant bank of fans:
1) If a bank of fans fails, the system must automatically switch to the
alternate bank of fans and generate an alarm to notify operators of
initial fan system failure.
2) If both banks of fans fail, provide a fan fault signal.
b. Provide the ability to detect failed operation of the cooling system:
1) Using temperature detectors as the only protection against loss of
the fan system is not acceptable.
c. During normal operation, the system shall periodically cycle between the
two fan banks to exercise them.
d. Derive power for 480V fans from the tertiary winding in the phase shifting
transformer.
e. Provide fan protection and operation via internally mounted circuit
breakers and starters.
3.
Temperature switch:
a. Provide bimetallic switch transmitters (to measure internal cabinet
temperature in all enclosures) .
b. Sensor and electronic enclosure.
c. Accuracy: Within 2.0 degrees Fahrenheit.
d. Manufacturer: The following or equal:
1) Hoffman AMTECH.
e. Provide (1) switch for each isolated cabinet. If multiple switches are
required, wire switches in series to provide a single temperature alarm
output.
2.08
MIXES (NOT USED)
2.09
FABRICATION
A.
Accessibility and configuration:

1.
Front access:
a. VFD system shall be designed for front access only:
1) Equipment that requires side or rear access is not acceptable.
2.
Power component accessibility:
a. All power components in the converter sections shall be designed for
rack-out accessibility for ease of maintenance and to minimize repair
downtime.
b. Alternate access options must be described in the submittals for Owners
review and evaluation.
3.
Voltage isolation:
May 2014
16267-21
9408A10
a.
4.
5.
6.
2.10
FINISHES
A.
2.11
All low voltage components, circuits, and wiring shall be separated with
physical barriers from any sources of medium voltage.
Marking/labeling:
a. Machine printed sleeve type wire marker tags or other acceptable means
of permanent identification shall be applied to all power and control wiring.
b. Individual nameplates shall be provided for all major components of the
VFD system:
1) Refer to Section 16075.
Mean time to repair (MTTR):
a. The VFD design must demonstrate an actual mean time to repair of less
than 30 minutes, in the event of any power switching component failure.
VFD system wiring:
a. All Power, control, and protection wiring shall be located internally within
the VFD system enclosure.
b. Power wiring shall be isolated by voltage class.
c. Control and protection wiring shall be isolated from power wiring.
Cabinet color shall be manufacturers standard gray.

A.
Factory testing:
1.
General:
a. All VFDs furnished under this Section shall be tested and inspected as
specified below. Testing of VFDs based on sampling plans is not allowed.
b. The testing procedures specified are the minimum acceptable
requirements. The manufacturer may perform additional tests at its
discretion.
2.
Failure of any component during testing requires repair or replacement of the
faulted component and a complete retest.
3.
Testing sequence:
a. Submit a detailed test procedure for the VFD factory test:
1) A minimum of 8 weeks in advance of the proposed testing date.
2) No tests shall be performed until the test procedure is reviewed and
accepted by the Engineer.
4.
Subassembly tests:
a. Preliminary inspection:
1) Verify that all components are correct.
2) Verify that all connections are properly torqued.
b. Printed circuit boards shall be visually inspected and functionally tested:
1) All boards must be tested individually before assembly.
2) Each board shall be load and temperature cycled from no load to full
load and from ambient to plus 60 degrees Celsius during a 48-hour
burn-in test.
3) Any boards that exhibit drift during the test must be replaced with
boards that have successfully completed the burn-in without drift.
4) Apply control power to microprocessors, printed circuit boards,
diagnostic boards, and similar devices.
5) Test software for proper operation, sequencing, logic, and
diagnostics.
May 2014
16267-22
9408A10
6) Test operation of all analog and discrete inputs and outputs.

Power assemblies shall be visually inspected and then HIPOT tested:
1) Complete diagnostics and logic shall be tested.
2) The complete power conversion circuit shall be thoroughly tested at
100 percent load for a minimum of 1 hour and then tested for
1 minute at momentary overload rating.
System level tests:
a. The test may be observed by the Engineer and Owner.
b. The complete VFD shall be given preliminary checks including verification
of electrical connections including ground connections.
c. Perform a visual check to verify:
1) Degree of protection for cabinets.
2) Input isolation is lockable in the off-position.
3) Marking of terminals and wiring.
4) Space availability for cable termination.
5) Accessibility of components and ease of maintenance and repair.
d. The VFD system shall be fully checked against the approved drawings for
compliance and correct physical dimensions.
e. Confirm all control voltage levels.
f. Wiring:
1) Verify all control and power wiring continuity point-to-point.
2) Hi-pot all power and control wiring at manufacturers recommended
levels.
3) Resistance-test all wiring point-to-point.
4) Verify ground bond resistance.
g. Load testing:
1) No load testing in accordance with the manufacturers standard
factory test procedure:
a) Drive is to be connected to an unloaded motor and feedback
signals shall be verified.
b) Output voltage shall be calibrated.
c) All logic and interlocks including customer logic and
instrumentation shall be tested.
2) Full load testing:
a) This test shall be performed as a fully integrated system and
includes all components as specified herein, including any
filters.
b) Test each VFD and a representative motor with the system logic
and a dynamometer load to simulate field operation conditions
at 25 percent, 50 percent, and 100 percent of full load current.
c) Load test each VFD at a minimum ambient temperature of
40 degrees Celsius.
(1) Monitor and record temperature rise.
(2) Once temperature rise stops continue to operate the VFD
for a minimum of 2 hours.
(a) If operating temperature exceeds the rated value,
repair or replace the VFD and retest.
The VFD manufacturer shall perform the tests as required by the performance
guaranties as specified herein.
c.
5.
6.
B.
The system shall not be shipped unless specified performance criteria are met.
May 2014
16267-23
9408A10
1.
PART 3
In the event the equipment must be re-tested, comply with all of the testing
requirements and treat the re-test the same as the initial test:
a. Bear all costs associated with this test including but not limited to travel,
lodging, meals, travel time, time to witness tests, etc. A minimum of
8 hours per day per individual for 2 individuals shall be included.
EXECUTION
3.01
3.02
3.03
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
site.
C.
General:
1.
Furnish all cables, conduit, lugs, bolts, expansion anchors, sealants, and other
accessories needed to complete installation of the VFD.
2.
Provide labor and materials to set and install all equipment in place.
3.
Assemble and install the VFD in the locations and with the layouts indicated on
the Drawings.
4.
Perform Work in accordance with the manufacturers instructions and shop
drawings.
5.
Furnish components and equipment as required to complete the installation.
6.
Replace any hardware lost or damaged during the installation or handling to
provide a complete installation.
7.
Provide openings in top or bottom of the VFD enclosure for conduit only; no
additional openings will be allowed:
a. Improperly cut holes will require that the entire panel be replaced:
1) No hole closers or patches will be allowed.
8.
Bundle wires together and terminate in each unit:
a. Tie with nylon wire ties. As specified in Section 16123.
b. Label all wires at each end with wire numbers shown on the approved
Control Drawings.
c. All connections to and from the VFD enclosure must be made via terminal
blocks.
d. Isolate control and protection wiring from all power wiring.
9.
If one or more VFD system power components must utilize external cabling or
connections to complete the VFD system, this cabling and connecting must be
entirely supplied by the Contractor, as approved by the Engineer, at no
additional cost to the Owner.
10. All external power conductors, bus or cable, shall be insulated.
11. Provide all necessary hardware for reconnecting shipping splits.
3.04
3.05
May 2014
16267-24
9408A10
3.06
3.07
3.08
A.
B.
Provide the services of a VFD manufacturer representative for start-up assistance

and training:
1.
Inspection and field adjustment:
a. Supervise the following and submit written certification that the equipment
and controls have been properly installed, aligned, adjusted, and readied
for operation.
2.
Start-up field testing:
a. Provide technical direction for testing, checkout, and startup of the VFD
equipment in the field.
b. Under no circumstances are any portions of the drive system to be
energized without authorization from the manufacturer's representative.
c. Compliance with the following specified parameters shall be verified by
the VFD manufacturer:
1) Power factor:
a) Make field measurements at the input terminals of the VFD with
and without the VFD in operation.
b) Make measurements at 0 percent, 25 percent, 50 percent,
75 percent and 100 percent of rated speed and rated power.
c) Measurements shall be made with a recording type power factor
meter.
2) Efficiency:
a) Make field measurements at the input terminals of the VFD.
b) Make measurements at rated speed and rated power.
c) Make measurements with a recording type kilowatt hour meter.
3) Motor terminal voltage:
a) Make field measurements at the motor connection box.
b) Make measurements of the full speed range of the VFD.
4) Harmonics:
a) Make field measurements at the input terminals of the VFD with
and without the VFD in operation.
b) Make measurements at rated speed and rated power.
c) Harmonic testing shall include utility power as well as generator
standby power.
d) Make measurements with a recording type harmonic analyzer
displaying individual and total harmonic currents and voltages:
(1) Record currents and voltages for a minimum of 10 minutes.
(2) Analyzers using snapshots are not acceptable.
ADJUSTING
A.
Make all adjustments as necessary and recommended by the manufacturer,

Engineer, or testing firm.
B.
Provide the services of a VFD manufacturer factory technician to make all drive
parameter and protective device settings:
May 2014
16267-25
9408A10
1.
2.
3.09
CLEANING
A.
3.10
Protective device settings provided by the VFD manufacturer in accordance

with the manufacturer of the driven equipment requirements.
Provide documentation of VFD settings including, but not limited to:
a. Minimum speed.
b. Maximum speed.
c. Skip speeds.
d. Current limit.
e. Acceleration time.
f. Deceleration time.
g. Carrier frequency.

A.
B.
Demonstrate the operation to the Engineer's and Owner's satisfaction.
C.
Training:
1.
Provide instruction of the Owners operation and maintenance staff on the
operation and maintenance of the VFD.
2.
The training school shall include classroom discussion on the theory of
operation of the equipment, as well as maintenance and service methods for
the purchased equipment.
3.
Topics covered shall include:
a. Safety.
b. Hardware layout and functions.
c. Power and control wiring, diagnostic indicators.
d. Keypad/display interface.
e. Software mapping.
f. Programming.
g. Setup.
h. Configuration.
i.
Operational indicators, faults, diagnostic tools, troubleshooting and
preventative maintenance.
4.
Hands-on training shall be provided on equipment of the same design as that
provided.
5.
Documentation shall be provided which shall include actual manuals for the
equipment and drawings and schematics of the equipment supplied.
6.
Separate classes shall be held for the operations staff and maintenance staff:
a. Operations staff training shall consist of 2 identical training sessions, each
consisting of 1 session per day for 2 days, with each session lasting 4
hours for a total class time of 16 hours:
1) The sessions shall be scheduled with the Owner to ensure all
operators have the opportunity to attend.
b. Maintenance staff training shall consist of 1 session per day for 2 days
with each session lasting for 8 hours, for a total class time of 16 hours.
c. Instruction shall occur at the Owners facility and shall utilize the actual
VFDs installed at the site.
May 2014
16267-26
9408A10
3.11
PROTECTION
A.
3.12

END OF SECTION
May 2014
16267-27
9408A10
SECTION 16272
DRY-TYPE TRANSFORMERS
PART 1
1.01
1.02
GENERAL
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes:
1.
Enclosed dry-type transformers:
a. Rated 1 to 1,000 kilovolt-amperes, single and 3-phase.
b. Primary voltage 600 volts and below.
B.
Related sections:
1.
2.
3.
b. Section 16272 Common Work Results for Electrical.
REFERENCES
A.
B.

1.
C57.96 Distribution and Power Transformers, Guide for Loading Dry-Type.
2.
389 - IEEE Recommended Practice for Testing Electronics Transformers and
Inductors.
C.

1.
C57.12.01 - Standard General Requirements for Dry-Type Distribution and
Power Transformers Including Those with Solid Cast and/or Resin
Encapsulated Windings.
D.

1.
TP-1 - 2002 - Guide for Determining Energy Efficiency for Distribution
Transformers.
2.
TP-2 - Standard Test Method for Measuring the Energy Consumption of
Distribution Transformers.
E.
Underwriters Laboratory (UL):

1.
1561 - Standard for Dry-Type General Purpose and Power Transformers.
May 2014
16272-1
9408A10
1.03
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.04
SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS
A.
1.05
Provide 3-phase or 1-phase, 60 hertz dry-type with voltage ratings, kilovolt-ampere

capacities, and connections as indicated on the Drawings:
1.
Transformers shall provide full capacity at the Project elevation and
environmental conditions as specified in Section 16272 after all derating
factors have been applied.
2.
Suitable for continuous operation at full rating with normal life expectancy in
accordance with ANSI C57.96.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Product data:
1.
Catalog cut sheets.
2.
Nameplate data.
3.
Dimensions:
a. Height.
b. Width.
c. Depth.
4.
Inrush current.
5.
Insulation system and temperature constraints.
6.
Number and rating of taps.
7.
Sound levels.
8.
Connection diagrams:
a. Primary.
b. Secondary.
9.
BIL rating.
10. Required clearances.
11. Percent impedance.
12. Efficiency.
13. Certification of full capacity capability at the Project elevation and ambient
conditions.
data.
C.
1.
setting into place.
2.
or B:
May 2014
16272-2
9408A10
1.06
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.07

A.
1.08

A.
1.09
1.10
1.11
WARRANTY
A.
1.12
SYSTEM START-UP
A.
1.13
1.14
1.15
PART 2
2.01
PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS
A.

1. General Electric.
2. Jefferson.
3. Schneider Electric/Square D.
4. Eaton/Cutler-Hammer.
2.02
2.03
MATERIALS
A.
Cores:
1.
Non-aging, grain-oriented silicon steel.
2.
Magnetic flux densities below the saturation point.
B.
Windings:
1.
High-grade magnet wire.
2.
Impregnated assembly with non-hydroscopic, thermo-setting varnish:
a. Cured to reduce hot-spots and seal out moisture.
May 2014
16272-3
9408A10
3.
Material electrical grade:

a. Copper.
2.04
2.05
EQUIPMENT
A.
General:
1.
10 kilovolts BIL for 600-volt class windings.
2.
Sound levels, in accordance with ANSI 389 test conditions, not to exceed:
Kilovolt-Amperes Range
Audible Sound Level (db)
3.
4.
5.
1-9
40
10-50
45
51-150
50
151-300
55
301-500
60
501-700
62
701-1000
64
Taps:
a. 15 kilovolt-amperes and less:
1) Two 5 percent full capacity primary taps below rated voltage.
b. 25 kilovolt-amperes and larger:
1) Four 2.5 percent full capacity primary taps below rated voltage.
2) Two 2.5 percent full capacity primary taps above rated voltage.
c. Operated by a tap changer handle or tap jumpers accessible through a
panel.
Terminals:
a. UL listed for either copper or aluminum conductors.
b. Rated for 75 degrees Celsius.
c. Provide double lugs on primary terminals where indicated on the
Drawings.
Daily overload capacities, at rated voltage and without reduction in life, in
accordance with ANSI C57.96.
B.
Energy efficient transformers 15 kilovolt-amperes and larger:

1.
Insulation class: 220 degrees Celsius.
2.
Temperature rise: 80 degrees Celsius, except as noted below:
a. 150-degree Celsius rise for dry-type transformers located in motor control
centers.
3.
Efficiency:
a. In accordance with NEMA TP-1.
b. Measured in accordance with NEMA TP-2.
C.
Enclosures:
1.
Heavy gauge steel:
a. Outdoor: Moisture and water resistant with rodent screens over all
openings and in a weather-protected enclosure, NEMA Type 3R.
b. Indoor: NEMA Type 2.
May 2014
16272-4
9408A10
2.
3.
Louvers to limit coil temperature rise to the value stated above, and case
temperature rise to 50 degrees Celsius.
Built-in vibration dampeners to isolate the core and coils from the enclosure:
a. Neoprene vibration pads and sleeves.
2.06
2.07
ACCESSORIES
A.
Nameplates:
1.
Non-corrosive metal or UL listed non-metallic:
a. Stamped, engraved or printed with the following information:
1) Phases.
2) Frequency.
3) Kilovolt-ampere rating.
4) Voltage ratings.
5) Temperature rise.
6) Impedance.
7) Insulation class.
8) BIL rating.
9) Connection diagram.
10) Weight.
11) Manufacturer.
12) The identification transformer.
13) Classes of cooling.
14) Tap voltage(s).
15) Vector diagram.
2.08
MIXES (NOT USED)
2.09
2.10
FINISHES
A.
2.11

A.
PART 3
3.01
Finish to consist of de-greasing, phosphate cleaning, and an electrodeposited

manufacturers standard gray enamel rust-inhibiting paint.
Factory tests:
1.
Applied voltage test to each winding and from each winding to the core:
a. 600-volt class winding 4.5 kilovolt.
2.
Induced voltage test at 2 times normal voltage and 400 hertz for 1,080 cycles.
3.
Voltage ratio and polarity.
4.
Sound level, performed in a test room with ambient sound level not exceeding
24 db.
5.
Perform all tests in accordance with UL 1561.
EXECUTION
May 2014
16272-5
9408A10
3.02
3.03
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
site.
C.
General:
1.
Floor, wall, platform, motor control center, packaged power supply, or roof
mounted, as indicated on the Drawings.
2.
Locate where not in direct contact with building structure.
3.
Install on double-deflection mounts selected for maximum isolation
manufactured by Korfund or equal.
4.
Make any necessary connections to the enclosure with liquidtight flexible
conduit having neoprene gaskets and insulated ground bushings.
5.
Ground the enclosure:
a. To an equipment ground conductor in the conduit.
b. To the facility grounding electrode system.
6.
Floor mounted transformers:
a. Install transformers with adequate space from walls or other enclosures
for proper ventilation in accordance with the manufacturers
recommendations.
3.04
ERECTION, INSTALLATION, APPLICATIONS, CONSTRUCTION (NOT USED)
3.05
3.06
3.07

A.
3.08
ADJUSTING
A.
3.09
Set the transformer taps as required to obtain nominal output voltage on the
secondary terminals.
CLEANING
A.
3.10
3.11
PROTECTION
A.
3.12
May 2014
16272-6
9408A10
END OF SECTION
May 2014
16272-7
9408A10
SECTION 16273
LIQUID FILLED PAD MOUNTED TRANSFORMERS
PART 1
1.01
1.02
GENERAL
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes:
1.
Medium voltage outdoor liquid-filled pad mounted transformers.
A.
Related sections:
1.
2.
3.
d. Section 16950 - Field Electrical Acceptance Tests.
REFERENCES
A.
General:
1.
B.
American National Standards Institute (ANSI).
C.

1.
D877-2 Standard Test Method for Dielectric Breakdown Voltage of Insulating
Liquids using Disk Electrodes.
D.
Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE):

1.
C57.12.00 - Standard General Requirements for Liquid-Immersed Distribution,
Power and Regulating Transformers.
2.
C57.12.26 - Pad-Mounted, Compartmental-Type, Self-Cooled, Three-Phase
Distribution Transformers.
3.
C57.12.28 - Standard for Pad-Mounted Equipment-Enclosure Integrity.
4.
C57.12.70 - Standard Terminal Markings and Connections for Distribution and
Power Transformers.
5.
C57.12.80 - Terminology for Power and Distribution Transformers.
6.
C57.12.90 Standard Test Code for Liquid-Immersed Distribution, Power and
Regulating Transformers.
7.
C57.91 Guide for Loading Mineral-Oil-Immersed Power Transformers up to
and including 100 MVA with 65 degrees or 55 degrees Average Winding Rise.
8.
C57.93 - Guide for Installation of Liquid-immersed Power Transformers.
May 2014
16273-1
9408A10
9.
C57.98 - Guide for Transformer Impulse Tests.
10. C57.106 - Guide for Acceptance and Maintenance of Insulating Oil in
Equipment.
1.03
E.
National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA).

1.
TR-1 - Transformers, Regulators, and Reactors.
F.
U.S. Department of Energy (DOE):

1.
10 CFR Part 431 - Energy Efficiency Program for Certain Commercial and
Industrial Equipment.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.04
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
1.05
Provide outdoor oil-filled, pad mounted transformers for operation on a 60 Hertz

system with voltage and kilovolt-ampere ratings as indicated on the Drawings:
1.
Suitable for continuous operation at full load at the Project location and
elevation after applying any derating factors.
2.
Pad mounted transformers shall be compartmental type, designed for outdoor
installation on a concrete pad.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Product data:
1.
Complete installation instructions.
2.
Complete storage and handling instructions.
3.
Kilovolt-ampere rating, including derating calculations.
4.
Primary/secondary connections.
5.
Primary voltage and available taps.
6.
Secondary voltage.
7.
BIL rating.
8.
Temperature rise.
9.
Lightning arrester data.
10. %Z, %X, %R, X/R.
11. Efficiency.
12. Gross weight.
13. Torque values for all bolted connections for secondary cable connections.
14. Manufacturers suggested hi-potential test procedures and test levels for fieldtesting:
a. Initial field test.
b. Subsequent maintenance tests.
15. Certification from the manufacturer stating the transformer design complies
with ANSI C57.
16. Type of oil.
17. Gallons of oil.
18. Weight of oil.
19. Complete MSDS sheets.
May 2014
16273-2
9408A10

data.
1.06
C.
Shop drawings:
1.
Complete detailed, dimensioned drawings showing the equipment being
furnished, with all pertinent information, including the following:
a. Dimensions and locations of conduit entrance windows.
2.
Complete nameplate schedule, except impedance.
D.
1.
setting into place.
2.
or B:
3.
D, E, or F:
E.

1.
Complete as-built dimensioned and scaled drawings for transformer.
2.
Recommended periodic maintenance requirements.
3.
Maintenance instructions including schedules, parts identification,
troubleshooting, assembly instructions, parts list, and predicted life of parts
subject to wear and deterioration.
4.
Recommended field test levels and procedures before installation and for
maintenance purposes after being placed in service.
5.
Periodic and preventative maintenance torque values for all bolts.
6.
Copies of factory test reports.
F.
Test reports:
1.
Certified copies of test reports from factory tests.
G.
Record documents.
H.
Calculations:
1.
Detailed calculations or details of the actual physical testing performed on the
transformers to prove the transformers are suitable for the seismic
requirements at the Project Site.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
May 2014
16273-3
9408A10
B.
1.07
1.08

A.
B.
Ship transformers to the job site on a dedicated air ride vehicle that will allow the
Contractor to utilize onsite off-loading equipment:
1.
Each transformer shall be shipped with a global positioning system (GPS) unit
to record the shipping route.
2.
Provide monitoring of the acceleration the transformer experiences during
shipment:
a. The GPS unit can record the acceleration.
b. Utilize a G-force gauge that indicates that the acceleration has exceeded
allowed values.
3.
Transformers that experience vertical accelerations greater than 3 G or
horizontal accelerations greater than 5 G shall not be accepted.
C.
Furnish temporary equipment heaters within the transformer to prevent

condensation from forming.

A.
1.09
1.
Manufacturer shall be in the business of regularly manufacturing the specified
transformers for minimum 10 years with satisfactory performance record.
SEQUENCING
A.
Make all necessary field measurements to verify the equipment will fit in the
allocated space in full compliance with the minimum clearances required by the
NEC and local codes.
B.
Furnish complete equipment submittal for Engineers review.
C.
Submit factory test results for Engineers review before shipping.
D.
Provide manufacturers services and install the equipment.
E.
Conduct all field tests.
F.
Make all protective device settings.
G.
Energize the equipment.
H.
Set taps.
1.10
1.11
WARRANTY
A.
May 2014
16273-4
9408A10
1.12
SYSTEM START-UP
A.
B.
Provide the services of a manufacturer's authorized representative:

1.
Inspect installation before start-up.
2.
Witness energization.
1.13
1.14
1.15
PART 2
2.01
PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS
A.

1.
Asea Brown Boveri ABB.
2.
General Electric GE.
3.
Cooper Power Systems.
4.
Schneider Electric/Square D Company.
2.02
2.03
MATERIALS
A.
Windings:
1.
Primary and secondary windings shall be high conductivity copper.
B.
Insulating fluid:
1.
Envirotemp FR3.
2.
Insulating fluid shall meet or exceed the requirements of the appropriate ANSI
and ASTM fluid standards.
2.04
2.05
EQUIPMENT
A.
The transformer and associated terminal compartments designed and constructed

to be tamper-resistant:
1.
No externally removable screws, bolts, or other devices.
B.
Ratings:
1.
3-phase, 60 Hertz.
2.
Self-cooled.
3.
65-degree Celsius rise.
4.
Primary voltage as indicated on the Drawings.
5.
Primary connection as indicated on the Drawings.
6.
Secondary voltage as indicated on the Drawings.
7.
Secondary connection as indicated on the Drawings.
May 2014
16273-5
9408A10
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
2.06
Kilovolt-ampere rating as indicated on the Drawings.

Basic impulse insulation level (BIL):
a. 1.2 kV Class: 30 kV.
b. 2.5 kV Class: 45 kV.
c. 5.0 kV Class: 75 kV.
Sound levels:
a. In accordance with NEMA TR1.
b. Measurement procedure in accordance with ANSI C57.12.90.
Efficiency:
a. Transformers 2,500 kVA and less shall have an efficiency rating in
accordance with DOE 10 CFR Part 431.
Short-circuit capacity:
a. Mechanical short-circuit capability in accordance with ANSI C57.12.90.
Thermal short-circuit capability in accordance with ANSI C57.12.00.
COMPONENTS
A.
Core and coil:

1.
Manufactured from burr-free, grain-oriented silicon steel laminations and
stacked to eliminate gaps in the corner joints.
2.
Insulated with B-stage, epoxy coated, diamond pattern, insulating paper,
thermally cured under pressure to ensure proper bonding of conductor and
paper.
3.
Clamped and braced to resist distortion caused by short-circuit stresses within
ratings or by shipping and handling and to prevent the shifting of core
laminations.
4.
Vacuum processed to ensure maximum penetration of insulating fluid into the
coil insulation system:
a. Energize the windings under vacuum to heat the coils and drive out
moisture.
b. While under a vacuum and the coils are heated, fill the tank with
preheated, filtered and degassed insulating fluid.
B.
Tank:
1.
Conforming to the enclosure integrity requirements of ANSI C57.12.28.
2.
Equipped with extra-heavy duty, welded-in-place lifting lugs and jacking pads.
a. Provide adequate cross-bracing of the base to allow skidding or rolling in
any direction.
3.
Capable of withstanding a pressure of 7 pounds per square inch gauge without
permanent distortion, and 15 pounds per square inch gauge without rupturing.
4.
Provide a pressure relief valve as a means to relieve pressure in excess of
pressure resulting from normal operation:
a. Cracking pressure: 10 pounds per square inch gauge within 2 psig.
b. Resealing pressure: 6 pounds per square inch gauge minimum.
c. Zero leakage from reseal pressure to 8 pounds per square inch gauge.
d. Flow at 15 pounds per square inch gauge: 35 scfm minimum.
C.
Terminal compartments:
1.
Conforming to the enclosure integrity requirements of ANSI C57.12.28.
2.
Full-height, air filled primary and secondary terminal compartments with
hinged doors shall be located side-by-side separated by a steel barrier, with
the primary compartment on the left, complete with tamper resistant hardware.
May 2014
16273-6
9408A10
3.
4.
5.
6.
Hinges and pins to be passivated Type 304 stainless steel or equivalent

corrosion-resistant metal.
Doors and compartment hood shall be removable:
a. Removable doorsill on compartments shall be provided to permit rolling or
skidding of unit into place over conduit stubs in foundations.
The doors in both the high voltage section and the low voltage section shall be
able to be latched in the open position.
The entire terminal compartment for the transformer shall be bolted to the
transformer so that the terminal compartment may be unbolted from the
transformer and the transformer removed without disturbing conduits that enter
the compartment from the side or top.
7.
8.
Minimum of 18 inches deep.

Secondary compartment:
a. The secondary compartment shall enclose the low voltage bushings and
provide for incoming cable from below the compartment.
b. This compartment shall also house:
1) Liquid level indicator.
2) Drain valve with sampling device.
3) Dial type thermometer.
4) Pressure relief valve.
5) Vacuum pressure gauge.
c. Door to low voltage section shall have a 3-point latching mechanism with
pad-locking provision.
9.
Primary compartment:
a. The primary line compartment shall enclose the high voltage bushings
and provide for incoming cables from below the compartment.
1) Coordinate primary bushing size with incoming cables size as
b. This compartment shall also house:
1) Dead front lightning arresters.
2) No-load tap changer.
3) Parking stands for 6 elbows.
c. The primary compartment shall be accessible only after the door for the
secondary compartment has been opened. The door shall be held closed
by a captive bolt; access to this bolt shall be provided only when the door
to the low voltage section is opened.
10. Primary terminals:
a. Dead front construction, in accordance with ANSI C57.12.26, utilizing high
voltage elbows for connections to primary cable and lightning arresters.
b. Terminal arrangement with 6-bushing wells:
1) 3 for terminating primary power cables.
2) 3 for connecting lightning arresters.
c. Supporting structure within cabinet to support cables and eliminate
mechanical stress on insulators.
11. Secondary terminals:
a. Four low voltage spade bushings with 2 holes for each cable, in
accordance with ANSI C57.12.26.
b. Extend low voltage bushings as necessary to accommodate the cable
arrangement indicated on the Drawings or indicated on the conduit
schedule:
1) Extension via a fully rated, tin-plated, copper bus system braced to
withstand the available fault current.
May 2014
16273-7
9408A10
c.
d.
D.
2.07
Neutral brought out through an insulated bushing and externally grounded

to the tank with a removable ground strap.
Supporting structure within cabinet to support cables and eliminate
mechanical stress on insulators.
De-energized tap changer:

1.
Furnish with full capacity high-voltage taps:
a. Two 2-1/2 percent taps above and below rated voltage.
2.
Labeled to indicate that the transformer must be de-energized before
operating the tap changer as required by IEEE C57.12.10.
3.
Externally operated no-load tap changer switch with snap action switch and
lever handle.
4.
Padlocking provision in each tap position.
5.
Position indication.
ACCESSORIES
A.
Lightning arresters:
1.
High voltage dead front design for elbow connection.
2.
Metal oxide varistor arresters.
3.
Distribution class arresters.
4.
Rating as indicated on the Drawings and/or consistent with the distribution
voltage.
B.
Tank ground pads:

1.
Two stainless steel pads, welded to the tank wall, with unpainted surfaces:
a. One pad in primary compartment.
b. One pad in secondary compartment:
1) If additional load ground connections are required, a tin-plated,
copper equipment ground bus shall be bolted to the pad.
C.
Dial-type thermometer:
1.
Direct stem mounted in a closed well so that the thermometer can be removed
without breaking the tank seal:
a. The well shall be threaded into a fitting that is welded to the transformer
tank wall.
2.
The thermometer shall have a slave hand which is moved by the indicating
hand to indicate maximum oil temperature. The slave hand shall be externally
resettable.
D.
Sampling device:
1.
Allow for sampling of the transformer insulating fluid.
2.
Threaded into a fitting that is welded to the transformer tank wall.
E.
Liquid level gauge:

1.
Dial-type liquid level gauge.
F.
Vacuum pressure gauge:

1.
10 pounds per square inch gauge vacuum to plus 10 pounds per square inch
gauge scale:
May 2014
16273-8
9408A10
G.
Pressure relief device:

1.
Located in the air space in the transformer tank to provide a method of
relieving internal tank pressure.
2.
Self-relieving.
3.
Indicating.
4.
Operating pressure: 10 within 2 pounds per square inch gauge.
H.
Nameplates:
1.
Provide nameplate as specified in Section 16075 and the following:
a. Provide complete nameplates identifying equipment, caution, voltage, etc.
b. Provide complete nameplates for both inside and outside of the
transformer terminal compartments.
c. Provide diagrammatic nameplate.
I.
Bolted 8-inch (minimum) diameter round handhold on cover.
J.
Lifting lugs at each corner of tank for lifting complete transformer.
K.
Jacking facilities at each corner of base for jacking the complete transformer.
L.
Base designed for rolling or skidding in any direction.
2.08
MIXES (NOT USED)
2.09
FABRICATION
A.
2.10
Tanks:
1.
Construction: Sealed tank construction with welded cover. Permanently locate
an inorganic gasket between the cover and the tank flange during the welding
of the transformer cover to prevent the entrance of weld spatter into the tank.
2.
Large handhole with bolted cover and protected with a weather cover.
3.
4 lifting hooks.
4.
Jacking pads.
5.
Fluid sample valve.
6.
Designed for 7 pounds per square inch gauge without permanent distortion;
12 pounds per square inch gauge when silicone oil insulating fluid is specified.
FINISHES
A.
In accordance with ANSI C57.12.28 including the following performance

requirements:
1.
Salt spray test.
2.
Crosshatch adhesion test.
3.
Humidity test.
4.
Impact test.
5.
Oil resistance test.
6.
Ultraviolet accelerated weathering test.
7.
Abrasion resistance - taber abraser.
B.
Procedure:
1.
Clean with an alkaline cleaning agent to remove grease and oil.
2.
Chemically bond iron phosphate coating to metal surface to assure coating
adhesion and retard corrosion.
May 2014
16273-9
9408A10
3.
4.
5.
2.11
Prime metal surface with an electrodeposited powder epoxy to provide a

barrier against moisture, salt, and corrosives.
Coat with an electrostatically applied, oven-cured polyester powder coat to
enhance abrasion and impact resistance.
Topcoat: Liquid polyurethane coating to seal and add ultraviolet protection.
a. Color: Munsell Green 7GY.

A.
Perform the following factory tests as required by IEEE C57.12.00 and in

accordance with ANSI/IEEE C57.12.90:
1.
No-load (85 degrees Celsius) losses at rated current. (Maximum allowable no
load losses: 10 percent.)
2.
Total (85 degrees Celsius) losses at rated current. (Maximum allowable total
losses: 6 percent.)
3.
Percent impedance (85 degrees Celsius) at rated current.
4.
Excitation current (100 percent voltage) test.
5.
Winding resistance measurement tests.
6.
Turns ratio tests using all tap settings.
7.
Polarity and phase relation tests.
8.
Temperature test.
B.
Verification of performance:
1.
Submit manufacturer's certified test results before shipping the transformer.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
3.02
3.03
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
site.
C.
General:
1.
Furnish concrete pad and all lugs, bolts, anchors, sealants, and other
accessories needed to complete the installation of the transformer.
2.
Assemble and install the transformer in the location and layout indicated on
the Drawings.
3.
Perform Work in accordance with manufacturers instructions and shop
drawings.
4.
Raise the tank above the pad to protect the bottom finish during installation
and to minimize corrosion due to moisture accumulation.
5.
6.
Replace any hardware lost or damaged during installation or handling.
May 2014
16273-10
9408A10
7.
Position the transformer so all required working space and clearance

requirements of the National Electrical Code and the local building authorities
are met.
3.04
3.05
3.06
3.07
3.08
A.
B.
Provide the services of a qualified manufacturers representative to:

1.
Install all transformer equipment shipped separately from the transformer.
2.
Fill the transformer with insulating fluid.
3.
Install the nitrogen blanket.
C.
Any and all other Work required to make the transformer ready for testing and
energization.
ADJUSTING
A.
3.09
Set the transformer taps as required to obtain nominal output voltage on the
secondary terminals.
CLEANING
A.
3.10
3.11
PROTECTION
A.
3.12

END OF SECTION
May 2014
16273-11
9408A10
SECTION 16285
SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES
PART 1
1.01
1.02
1.03
GENERAL
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes:
1.
High-energy surge protective devices.
B.
Related sections:
1.
2.
3.
The following sections are related to the Work described in this Section. This list
of related sections is provided for convenience only and is not intended to
c. Section 16950 - Field Electrical Acceptance Tests.
REFERENCES
A.
B.

1.
C62.41 Recommended Practice on Surge Voltages in Low Voltage AC Power
Circuits.
2.
C62.45 Guide on Surge Testing for Equipment Connected to Low-Voltage
(1000 V and Less) AC Power Circuits.
3.
C62.62- Standard Test Specifications for Surge Protective Devices for Low
Voltage AC Power Circuits.
C.
Underwriters Laboratory:
1.
1449, 3rd Edition, Standard for Surge Protective Devices.
DEFINITIONS
A.
B.
1.
SPD: Surge protective device.
2.
SAD: Silicon avalanche diode.
3.
MOV: Metal oxide varistor.
4.
MCOV: Maximum continuous operating voltage.
5.
In: Nominal discharge current.
6.
VPR: Voltage protection rating.
May 2014
16285-1
9408A10
7.
1.04
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
1.05
1.06
SCCR: Short circuit current rating.
Surge protective devices as an integral component of the electrical equipment or

externally mounted as indicated on the Drawings.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Product data:
1.
Furnish complete product data confirming detailed compliance or exception
statements to all provisions of this Section.
2.
Manufacturers catalog cut sheets indicating:
a. Manufacturer and model numbers.
b. Ratings of each SPD including but not limited to:
1) Short circuit current rating.
2) Nominal discharge current.
3) Maximum continuous operating voltage.
4) Voltage protection rating.
5) System voltage.
6) System frequency.
7) Surge current capacity.
3.
Submit independent test data from a nationally recognized testing laboratory
verifying the following:
a. Overcurrent protection.
b. UL 1449.
C.
Shop drawings:
1.
Provide electrical and mechanical drawings by the manufacturer that detail:
a. Unit dimensions.
b. Weights.
c. Components.
d. Field connection locations.
e. Mounting provisions.
f. Connection details.
g. Wiring diagram.
D.

1.
Provide the manufacturers manual with installation, start-up, spare parts lists,
and operating instructions for the specified system.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
Provide SPD units that are designed, manufactured, tested and installed in
compliance with the following codes and standards:
1.
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE C62.41, C62.45, C62.62).
2.
Federal Information Processing Standards Publication 94 (FIBS PUB 94).
3.
National Electrical Manufacturer Association.
4.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA 20, 75 and 780).
May 2014
16285-2
9408A10
5.
6.
7.
1.07

A.
1.08

A.
1.09
National Electric Code (NFPA 70).

Underwriters Laboratories (UL 1449 3rd Edition and UL 1283).
International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC 801).
SEQUENCING
A.
Coordinate with and provide SPD equipment to the electrical equipment manufacturer
before final assembly and factory testing.
1.10
1.11
WARRANTY
1.12
A.
B.
Extended warranty:
1.
Furnish a manufacturers full 5-year parts and labor warranty from date of
shipment against any part failure when installed in compliance with
manufacturer's written instructions, UL listing requirements, and any applicable
national, state, or local electrical codes.
2.
Warranty shall include:
a. Direct, factory trained employees must be available within 48 hours for
assessment of the problem.
b. A 24-hour toll-free 800-number for warranty support.
SYSTEM START-UP
A.
1.13
1.14
1.15
PART 2
2.01
PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS
A.

1.
Liebert.
2.
Eaton/Cutler-Hammer.
3.
Schneider Electric/Square D.
4.
General Electric.
May 2014
16285-3
9408A10
2.02
2.03
2.04
MANUFACTURED UNITS
A.
Provide Type 1 or Type 2 SPD units as required for the locations indicated on the
Drawings.
B.
Electrical requirements:
1.
SPD ratings are to be consistent with the nominal system operating voltage,
phase, and configuration as indicated on the Drawings.
2.
MCOV:
a. For the SPD and all components in the suppression path (including all
MOVs, SADs, and selenium cells): Greater than 115 percent of the nominal
system operating voltage.
3.
Operating frequency:
a. 47 to 63 hertz.
4.
SCCR:
a. 65 kAIC minimum, but not less than the equipment it is connected to as
b. The SCCR shall be marked on the SPD in accordance with UL 1449 and
the NEC.
5.
Nominal discharge current In:
a. 20 kA.
6.
Maximum VPR:
7.
Modes
240/120
208Y/120
480Y/277
L-N, L-G, N-G
900
900
1,500
L-L
1,200
1,200
2000
Peak surge current:

a. Service entrance locations:
1) 240 kA per phase minimum.
2) 120 kA per mode minimum.
b. Branch locations:
1) 120 kA per phase, minimum.
2) 60 kA per mode minimum.
C.
Protection modes:
1.
Provide SPD protection modes as follows:
a. Line to Neutral (L-N) where applicable.
b. Line to Ground (L-G).
c. Neutral to Ground (N-G), where applicable.
D.
1.
Storage temperature:
a. -40 degrees to +50 degrees Celsius.
2.
Operating temperature:
a. -0 degrees to +60 Celsius.
3.
Relative humidity:
a. 5 percent to 95 percent.
May 2014
16285-4
9408A10
4.
5.
E.
Audible noise:
a. Less than 45 dBa at 5 feet (1.5 m).
Operating altitude:
a. Zero to 12,000 feet above sea level.
Provide surge protective devices that are suitable for application in IEEE C62.41
Category A, B and C3 environments, as tested to IEEE C62.45.
2.05
2.06
COMPONENTS
2.07
A.
Enclosure:
1.
Located in electrical equipment as indicated on the Drawings.
B.
Internal connections:
1.
Provide low impedance copper plates for intra-unit connections:
a. Attach surge modules using bolted connections to the plates for low
impedance connections.
2.
Size all connections, conductors, and terminals for the specified surge current
capacity.
C.
Surge diversion modules:

1.
MOV:
a. Where multiple MOVs are used in parallel, utilize computer matched MOVs
to within 1 volt variance and tested for manufacturer's defects.
D.
Overcurrent protection:
1.
Individually fuse all components, including suppression, filtering, and monitoring
components:
a. Rated to allow maximum specified nominal discharge current capacity.
b. Overcurrent protection that limits specified surge currents is not acceptable.
E.
Connections:
1.
Provide terminals to accommodate wire sizes up to #2 AWG.
ACCESSORIES
A.
Unit status indicators:

1.
Provide red and green solid-state indicators, with printed labels, on the front
cover to redundantly indicate on-line unit status:
a. The absence of the green light and the presence of the red light indicate
that surge protection is reduced and service is needed to restore full
operation.
b. Indicates the status of protection on each mode or phase.
B.
Dry contacts for remote monitoring:

1.
Electrically isolated Form C dry contacts (1 A/125 VAC) for remote monitoring of
system integrity, and indication of under voltage, phase and/or power loss.
C.
Provide an audible alarm which activates under any fault condition.

1.
Provide an alarm On/Off switch to silence the alarm.
2.
A visible LED will confirm whether alarm is On or Disabled.
May 2014
16285-5
9408A10
3.
Locate both switches and the audible alarm on the units front cover.
2.08
MIXES (NOT USED)
2.09
2.10
FINISHES (NOT USED)
2.11

A.
Permanently affix surge rating to the SPD.
B.
Perform manufacturers standard factory test.

1.
Perform testing in accordance with UL 1449.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
3.02
3.03
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
Follow the manufacturer's recommended installation practices and comply with all
applicable codes.
C.
Special techniques:
1.
Install the SPD with as short and straight conductors including ground conductor
as practically possible:
a. Twist the input conductors together to reduce input conductor inductance.
2.
Do not subject SPD to insulation resistance testing.
3.04
3.05
3.06
3.07

A.
3.08
3.09
CLEANING (NOT USED)
3.10
May 2014
16285-6
9408A10
3.11
PROTECTION
A.
3.12

END OF SECTION
May 2014
16285-7
9408A10
SECTION 16295
PROTECTIVE RELAYS
PART 1
1.01
1.02
GENERAL
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes:
1.
Protective relays.
2.
Current transformers.
3.
Potential transformers.
B.
Related sections:
1.
2.
3.
b. Section 01756 - Testing, Training, and Facility Start-Up.
e. Section 16305 - Electrical System Studies.
REFERENCES
A.
B.

1.
C39.1 - Requirements for Electrical Analog Indicating Instruments.
C.

1.
C37.90 - IEEE Standard for Relays and Relay Systems Associated with
Electric Power Apparatus.
2.
C37.90.1 - IEEE Standard Surge Withstand Capability (SWC) Tests for Relays
and Relay Systems Associated with Electric Power Apparatus.
3.
C37.90.2 - IEEE Standard for Withstand Capability of Relay Systems to
Radiated Electromagnetic Interference from Transceivers.
4.
C37.90.3 IEEE Standard Electrostatic Discharge Tests for Protective Relays
5.
C57.13 IEEE Standard Requirements for Instrument Transformers.
D.
International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC):

1. 60255-5 Electrical Relays Part 5: Insulation coordination for measuring
relays and protection equipment Requirements and tests.
2.
60255-22-1 - Measuring relays and protection equipment Part 22-1:
Electrical disturbance tests MHz burst immunity tests.
May 2014
16295-1
9408A10
1.03
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.04
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
1.05
General: Provide protective relays, current transformers, and potential transformers

with the protective functions as indicated on the Drawings:
1.
Provide all relays from a single manufacturer unless otherwise noted.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Furnish submittals as specified in Sections 01330 and 16295:

1.
Provide the Protective Relay submittal as part of the switchgear submittal.
B.
Product data:
1.
Manufacturer of relay.
2.
Relay ANSI device functions.
3.
Power requirements.
4.
Communications provisions.
5.
Controls.
6.
Mounting.
7.
Nameplate schedule.
8.
Bill of material.
9.
Description of operation.
10. Manufacturers time current curves for protective devices, printed on
11-inch by 17-inch log-log paper.
11. List of recommended spare parts.
12. Name, address, telephone number, and cell phone number of relay
manufacturers authorized local field service technician.
C.
Shop drawings:
1.
Provide fully dimensioned and to scale equipment layout drawings which
include:
a. Equipment furnished: Plan, front and side views.
2.
Complete electrical wiring diagrams:
a. Indicate wire numbers.
D.

1.
Submit operating and installation instructions and a maintenance manual
presenting full details for care and maintenance of equipment of every nature
furnished and/or installed under this contract.
2.
Maintenance manual:
a. Furnish maintenance manuals with instructions covering details pertaining
to care and maintenance of the equipment as well as data identifying the
parts.
b. These manuals shall include but are not limited to the following:
1) Adjustment and test instructions covering the steps involved in the
initial test, adjustment, and start-up procedures.
2) Detailed control instructions that outline the purpose and operation of
every control device used in normal operation.
May 2014
16295-2
9408A10
1.06
1.07
E.
Test reports:
1.
Switchgear manufacturer to furnish a certified report after the shop tests.
2.
Switchgear manufacturer's start-up representative to furnish a written report
after the start-up:
a. Report must state that the installation is complete and satisfactory, or list
items requiring additional attention and a proposal for the actions.
3.
If items require attention after the initial start-up, a final report is required
stating that the installation is complete and satisfactory.
F.
Calculations:
1.
Direct current power and current requirements needed to operate the
protective relays and associated equipment.
2.
Current transformer sizing calculations to substantiate that the current
transformers will not saturate under a maximum fault current event.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
Relays, instrument transformers, and associated equipment shall be UL listed and

labeled.

A.
1.08
1.09
1.10
1.11
WARRANTY
A.
1.12
SYSTEM START-UP
A.
1.13
1.14
1.15
PART 2
2.01
PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Distribution relays:
1.
May 2014
16295-3
9408A10
a.
b.
B.
Schweitzer.
Multilin.
Motor protection relays:

1.
One of the following, no substitutions or equal:
a. Multilin.
2.02
2.03
2.04
2.05
2.06
COMPONENTS
A.
Distribution relays:
1.
General:
a. Furnish relays complete with devices and associated circuitry necessary
to perform the required functions as specified or indicated on the
Drawings.
b. Manufacturers of relays and controls are listed to describe system
operating requirements:
c. Furnish material not specifically listed or shown but necessary to perform
required functions.
d. Mounting:
1) Mount relays on hinged panels secured to the metal-clad unit:
a) Enclose cases with dull black finish, semi-flush mounting.
e. Provide nameplates as specified in Section 16075.
2.
Lockout relay:
a. Where indicated on the Drawings provide an ANSI function 86 lockout
relay.
b. Operating voltage: 48 VDC.
c. Trip control.
d. Block close control.
e. Green LED for ready indication.
f. Red LED for tripped indication.
g. Black RESET target.
h. Orange TRIP target.
i.
Manual reset.
j.
Electroswitch Series 24 or equal.
3.
Solid state digital relays:
a. General:
1) Multifunction, microprocessor based with monitoring and
communications capabilities.
2) Continuous self-diagnostics.
3) Fault recording:
a) The relay shall monitor and record fault data.
b) Fault events shall be stored in event reports.
c) Event reports saved to non-volatile memory.
4) Communications:
a) Ethernet:
May 2014
16295-4
9408A10
b.
c.
(1) RJ-45 port.

(2) Modbus TCP/IP protocol.
(3) Relay capable of communicating power monitoring
information and relays status over ethernet.
5) Front keypad and display for programming and configuration:
a) One control pushbutton programmed to set relay protective
functions to the minimum values.
b) Password protection for security.
6) A minimum of 2 programmable digital inputs and 4 form C
programmable outputs.
7) Installation and control connections, one of the following:
a) Draw-out case that allows removal of the relay without having to
disconnect wiring. CT circuits shall be self-shorting with
make-before-break operation on removal of the relay.
b) Connectorized terminals with shorting for each current input.
8) ANSI curves.
9) Power supply suitable for operation on 48 VDC to 125 VDC or as
Main breaker protection relays:
1) Provide the following functions as a minimum: The functions
specified below are typical for multifunction relays. Relay functions
not indicated on the Drawings are to be disabled:
a) Phase time overcurrent - 51P.
b) Phase instantaneous overcurrent - 50P.
c) Ground fault time overcurrent - 51G.
d) Instantaneous ground overcurrent - 50G.
e) Undervoltage - 27.
f) Overvoltage - 59.
g) Negative sequence - 47N.
h) Power monitoring including the following functions at a
minimum:
(1) Voltage Phase
(2) Voltage LL
(3) Amps
(4) KW
(5) KVA
(6) Frequency
2) Manufacturers:
a) Multilin 750.
b) Schweitzer SE-451.
Feeder breaker protection relays:
1) Provide the following functions as a minimum:
a) Phase time overcurrent - 51P.
b) Instantaneous phase overcurrent - 50P.
c) Ground time overcurrent - 51G.
d) Instantaneous ground overcurrent - 50G.
e) Power monitoring including the following functions at a
minimum:
(1) Voltage Phase
(2) Voltage LL
(3) Amps
(4) KW
May 2014
16295-5
9408A10
2)
d.
e.
B.
Manufacturers:
a) Schweitzer SEL-351S.
b) Multilin 350.
High impedance bus relay:
a) Differential current - 87.
2) Manufacturers:
a) Schweitzer SEL-587Z.
b) Multilin MIB.
Generator breaker protection relays:
a) Undervoltage - 27.
b) Overfrequency/underfrequency - 81O/U.
c) Phase overcurrent - 51P.
d) Ground overcurrent - 50/51G.
e) Differential 87.
f) Power monitoring including the following functions at a
minimum:
(1) Voltage Phase
(2) Voltage LL
(3) Amps
(4) KW
(5) KVA
(6) Frequency
2) Manufacturers:
a) Multilin 489.
b) Schweitzer SEL-300G.
Motor protection relay:

1.
Provide all potential transformers, current transformers, and a digital motor
protection and management relay as indicated on the Drawings.
2.
General:
a. Power Supply:
1) 48 VDC. Forty-five VA maximum.
3.
a. Multilin to match existing. Power relays are not required to be of the same
manufacturer as motor protection relays.
4.
Protection:
a. Thermal model:
1) Primary protective function shall be a thermal model, consisting of:
a) Overload curves.
b) Negative sequence unbalance/single phase biasing.
c) RTD biasing (hot/cold motor compensation).
d) Motor cooling time constants.
e) Start inhibit and emergency restart.
f) RTD biasing.
2) Combine inputs from positive and negative sequence currents and
RTD winding feedback.
3) Dynamic in nature in order to follow the loading and temperature of
the motor.
4) Provide protection of the rotor during stall and acceleration:
a) The stall/acceleration curve shall be voltage compensated.
May 2014
16295-6
9408A10
b) A speed switch input shall be available.

Other protective features:
1) Start supervision and inhibit.
2) Mechanical jam.
3) Voltage compensated acceleration.
4) Undervoltage, overvoltage.
5) Underfrequency.
6) Stator differential protection.
7) Thermal overload.
8) Overtemperature protection.
9) Phase and ground overcurrent.
10) Current unbalance.
11) Power elements.
12) Torque protection.
13) Dual overload curves for 2 speed motors.
14) Reduced voltage starting control.
15) Stall.
c. Short circuit:
a) A simulation feature shall be available for testing of the relay.
b) Metering:
(1) Amps, volts, watts, volt-amps, volt-amps reactive power
factor, frequency watt-hours, VARH demand.
(2) Torque, temperature.
(3) Event recorder:
(a) Date and time stamped.
(b) Stores up to 256 events.
(4) Oscillography and data logger (trending):
(a) Sixty-four cycles with 12 samples per cycle for 10
waveforms.
(b) Date and time stamped.
(5) Statistical information & learned motor date.
(6) Motor starting reports.
c) User interface:
(1) Front panel LCDs, full keypad, and backlit LCD display.
(2) RS232, and RS485 ports - up to 19,200 bps.
(3) 10BaseT, 10Mbs Ethernet port.
(4) ModBus RTU Protocol.
d) Inputs and outputs:
(1) Twelve RTDs, programmable.
(2) Five pre-defined and 4 assignable digital inputs.
(3) Six output relays.
(4) Four analog inputs.
(5) Four programmable analog outputs.
d. User Interfaces:
a) A 40 character illuminated vacuum fluorescent display.
b) Keypad and navigation keys.
c) Status LEDs.
e. Provide interface software in a Windows format.
f. Drawout construction to facilitate testing, maintenance and interchange
flexibility.
Inputs:
a. Nine digital inputs:
b.
5.
May 2014
16295-7
9408A10
1)
6.
7.
Five preassigned to:

a) Access switch: allows changing setpoint values from faceplate.
b) Test switch: protects statistical data while relay is being tested.
c) Emergency restart: allows a hot motor to be restarted.
d) Remote reset: allows resetting trips or latched alarms.
e) Starter status: configured as an a or b contact.
2) Four inputs programmable as:
a) Remote alarm.
b) Remote trip.
c) Load shed trip.
d) Process switch alarm.
e) Process switch trip.
f) Tachometer.
g) Waveform capture.
h) Digital counter.
i)
Simulation:
(1) Prefault.
(2) Fault.
(3) Pre-fault to fault.
j)
General switch functions.
b. Four 4-20 mA inputs:
1) Configurable for tripping and alarming from transducer input.
c. Twelve RTD inputs:
1) Selectable RTD Type:
a) One hundred ohm platinum.
b) One hundred and twenty ohm nickel.
c) One hundred ohm nickel.
d) Ten ohm copper.
2) Configurable as:
a) Stator.
b) Bearing.
c) Ambient.
d) Other.
d. Voltage transformer inputs.
e. Current transformer inputs.
f. Six differential current transformer inputs.
Outputs:
a. Six output relays, configured as:
1) Trip relay.
2) Alarm relay.
3) Two auxiliary relays.
4) Block start relay.
5) Service relay.
b. Analog outputs:
1) Four 4-20 mA scalable outputs.
2) Assignable to any measured parameter.
Communications:
a. Ethernet:
1) RJ-45 port.
2) Modbus TCP/IP protocol.
May 2014
16295-8
9408A10
2.07
ACCESSORIES
A.
Current transformers:
1.
Ring type current transformers:
a. Suitable for service within low or medium voltage switchgear as indicated
on the Drawings.
b. Designed to have a mechanical and thermal rating to withstand shortcircuit current, stresses, and heating effects equal to the rating of the
circuit breaker of the application.
2.
Current ratio: As indicated on the Drawings, for use as a guideline:
a. It is the switchgear manufacturers responsibility to size the current
transformers to ensure that they will not saturate under the maximum
available fault current at the installed location based upon the fault current
study as preformed as specified in Section 16305.
3.
Rated in accordance with ANSI Standard C57.13 with accuracy of the current
transformers suitable for relay accuracy class and rated for 200 percent
burden for the required connected devices.
4.
Identify polarity with standard marking or symbols.
5.
Capable of carrying rated primary current continuously without damage.
6.
Install secondary wiring from current transformers in a suitable wiring trough,
or conduit to proper short-circuiting type terminal blocks for connection to
relays, instruments, and other devices.
7.
Located behind the breaker compartment mechanical safety shutter and shall
be front accessible once the safety shutter is removed.
B.
Potential transformers:
1.
Indoor dry type, single-phase, 60 hertz, with a minimum thermal capacity of
not less than 400 volt-amperes at 55 degrees Celsius rise above 40 degrees
Celsius ambient.
2.
Accuracy classification in accordance with ANSI Standard C57.13, suitable for
relay accuracy class, and 200 percent burden, for the required connected
devices, with the secondary voltage 120 volts.
3.
Insulation levels as required for the switchgear system voltage but not less
then:
a. 600 VAC, 10 kV BIL for 480 VAC systems.
b. 5.6 kilovolts, 60 kilovolts BIL for 2300 and 4160 VAC systems.
c. 15.5 kilovolts, 110 kilovolts BIL for 12.47 kilovolts and 13.2 kilovolts
systems.
4.
Identify polarity with standard markings or symbols.
5.
Connect secondaries to potential buses as required.
6.
Protect medium voltage potential transformers on the primary side with
medium voltage current-limiting fuses.
7.
Protect low voltage potential transformers on the primary side and secondary
side with current-limiting fuses.
8.
Mount medium voltage potential transformers in a separate compartment on a
drawout device which, when in the FULLY WITHDRAWN position, disconnects
both primary and secondary terminals of the transformer and grounds the
primary potential fuses.
C.
Control wiring:
1.
As specified in the switchgear specifications.
May 2014
16295-9
9408A10
D.
Miscellaneous:
1.
Provide terminal blocks, wireways, wiring, device mounting brackets, and other
miscellaneous items.
2.08
MIXES (NOT USED)
2.09
2.10
FINISHES (NOT USED)
2.11
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
3.02
3.03
INSTALLATION
A.
Provide the services of the switchgear manufacturer is to:

1.
Inspect, verify, and certify that the mechanical installation meets the
manufacturers requirements.
3.04
ERECTION, INSTALLATION, APPLICATION CONSTRUCTION (NOT USED)
3.05
3.06
3.07

A.
3.08
ADJUSTING
A.
3.09
Adjust trip settings in accordance with the protective device coordination study as
accepted by the Engineer and in accordance with the manufacturers
recommendations.
CLEANING
A.
3.10

A.
B.
Demonstrate the operation to the Engineers and Owners satisfaction.
C.
Training:
May 2014
16295-10
9408A10
1.
3.11
PROTECTION
A.
3.12
Provide as specified in Section 01756 and supplemented by the conditions

below:
a. Training on the relays provided under this section shall be conducted as
part of the associated switchgear training.

END OF SECTION
May 2014
16295-11
9408A10
SECTION 16305
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM STUDIES
PART 1
1.01
1.02
GENERAL
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes:
1.
Short circuit fault analysis study.
2.
Protective device coordination study.
3. Arc-flash hazard study.
B.
Related sections:
1.
2.
3.
REFERENCES
A.
B.

1. 141 - IEEE Recommended Practice for Electric Power Distribution for
Industrial Plants (Red Book).
2. 242 - IEEE Recommended Practice for Protection and Coordination of
Industrial and Commercial Power Systems (Buff Book).
3. 315 - IEEE Standards Electrical and Electronics Graphic and Letter Symbols
and Reference Designations.
4. 399 - IEEE Recommended Practice for Industrial and Commercial Power
Systems Analysis (Brown Book).
5.
902 - IEEE Guide for Maintenance, Operation and Safety on Industrial and
Commercial Power Systems (Yellow Book).
6.
1015 - IEEE Recommended Practice For Applying Low Voltage Circuit
Breakers Used in Industrial and Commercial Power Systems - Corrigendum 1
(Blue Book).
7. 1584 - IEEE Guide for Performing Arc Flash Hazard Calculations.
C.

1.
70E - Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace.
May 2014
16305-1
9408A10
1.03
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.04
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
General study requirements:

1.
Scope:
a. The short-circuit fault analysis, protective device coordination and arcflash hazard studies shall include all new and existing equipment in the
power distribution system including but not limited to:
1) Utility equipment.
2) Switchgear.
3) Generator.
4) Transformers:
a) Including all dry-type transformers.
5) Motor control centers.
6) Free standing variable frequency drives and starters.
7) Disconnect switches.
8) Motors.
9) Panelboards:
a) Including all 240 and 208 volt systems.
10) HVAC equipment.
b. Study scenarios:
1) The studies shall include all possible electrical system configurations,
for example:
a) Operation on normal (utility) source.
b) Operation on generator source.
2.
Obtain, for all equipment, the required data for preparation of the study,
including, but not limited to:
a. Transformer kilovolt-ampere (kVA) and impedances.
b. Generator impedances.
c. Generator decrement curves.
d. Bus withstand ratings.
e. Cable and bus data.
f. Protective device taps, time dials, instantaneous pickups, and time delay
settings.
3.
Obtain the Electric Utility information on the minimum and maximum available
fault current, minimum and maximum utility impedances, utility protective
device settings including manufacturer and model number, interrupting ratings,
X/R ratios, and model information one level above the point of connection:
a. Utility tolerances and voltage variations.
4.
The individual performing the studies shall visit the site and collect all
necessary field data in order to perform and complete comprehensive
electrical system studies.
5.
Obtain equipment layouts and configurations from the manufacturers final
submittal requirements and project layout drawings as required.
6.
Bus and conductor data:
a. Use impedances of the actual installed or specified conductors, unless
otherwise indicated.
b. Use cable and bus impedances calculated at 25 degrees Celsius, unless
otherwise indicated.
May 2014
16305-2
9408A10
c.
7.
8.
Use 600-volt cable reactance based on typical dimensions of actual

installed or specified conductors, unless otherwise indicated.
d. Use bus withstand values for all equipment having buses.
e. Use medium voltage cable reactances based on typical dimensions of
shielded cables with 133 percent insulation levels, unless otherwise
indicated.
Motors:
a. Each motor shall be individually modeled:
1) Grouping of motors for fault contribution current is not acceptable.
b. Motors with variable frequency drives may be assumed to have no
contribution to fault current.
Use the equipment, bus, and device designations as indicated on the
Drawings for all studies.
B.
Short-circuit fault analysis study additional requirements:

1.
The short-circuit fault analysis shall be performed and submitted in 2 phases:
a. Initial short-circuit fault analysis:
1) Based on the Contract Documents and Electric Utility information.
2) The initial short-circuit fault analysis report shall indicate the
estimated available short-circuit current at the line side terminals of
each piece of equipment covered by the scope of the study.
3) Provide a list of assumptions used in the initial study.
b. Final short-circuit analysis:
1) The final short-circuit fault analysis shall modify the initial analysis as
follows:
a) Utilize the actual equipment provided on the project.
b) Utilize conductor lengths based on installation.
2.
Calculate 3-phase bolted fault, line-to-line fault, line-to-ground fault, double
line-to-ground fault, short-circuit 1/2 cycle momentary symmetrical and
asymmetrical RMS, 1-1/2 and 4 cycle, interrupting symmetrical RMS, and
30 cycle steady state short-circuit current values at each piece of equipment in
the distribution system.
3.
Evaluate bus bracing, short circuit ratings, fuse interrupting capacity and circuit
breaker adjusted interrupting capacities against the fault currents, and
calculate X/R values:
a. Identify and document all devices and equipment as either inadequate or
acceptable.
4.
Calculate line-to-ground and double line-to-ground momentary short circuit
values at all buses having ground fault devices.
5.
Provide calculation methods, assumptions, one-line diagrams, and source
impedance data, including Utility X/R ratios, typical values, recommendations,
and areas of concern.
C.
Protective device coordination study additional requirements:

1.
Furnish protective device settings for all functions indicated on the Drawings,
a. Current.
b. Voltage:
1) Provide settings for all voltage relays based upon actual Utility and
generator tolerances and specifications.
c. Frequency:
May 2014
16305-3
9408A10
1)
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.
Provide settings for all frequency relays based upon actual Utility and
generator tolerances and specifications.
d. Negative sequence.
e. Reverse power.
f. Machine protection functions:
1) Provide settings for all motor and generator protective relays based
on the manufacturers recommended protection requirements.
Provide log-log form time-current curves (TCCs) graphically indicating the
coordination proposed for the system:
a. Include with each TCC a complete title and one-line diagram with legend
identifying the specific portion of the system covered by the particular
TCC:
1) Typical time-current curves for identical portions of the system, such
as motor circuits, are acceptable as allowed by the Engineer.
b. Include a detailed description of each protective device identifying its type,
function, manufacturer, and time-current characteristics:
1) These details can be included on the TCC.
c. Include a detailed description of each protective device tap, time dial,
pickup, instantaneous, and time delay settings:
1) These details can be included in the TCC.
TCCs shall include all equipment in the power distribution system where
required to demonstrate coordination. Include Utility relay and fuse
characteristics, medium voltage equipment protective relay and fuse
characteristics, low-voltage equipment circuit breaker trip device
characteristics, transformer characteristics, motor and generator
characteristics, and characteristics of other system load protective devices:
a. Include all devices down to the largest branch circuit and largest feeder
circuit breaker in each motor control center, main breaker in branch
panelboards and fused disconnect switches.
b. Provide ground fault TCCs with all adjustable settings for ground fault
protective devices.
c. Include manufacturing tolerances and damage bands in plotted fuse and
circuit breaker characteristics.
d. On the TCCs show transformer full load currents, transformer magnetizing
inrush, ANSI transformer withstand parameters and transformer damage
curves.
e. Cable damage curves.
f. Terminate device characteristic curves at a point reflecting the maximum
symmetrical or asymmetrical fault current to which the device is exposed
based on the short-circuit fault analysis study.
g. Coordinate time interval medium-voltage relay characteristics with
upstream and downstream device to avoid nuisance tripping.
Site generation: When site generation (including cogeneration, standby, and
emergency generators) is part of the electrical system, include phase and
ground coordination of the generator protective devices:
a. Show the generator decrement curve and damage curve along with the
operating characteristic of the protective devices.
Suggest modifications or additions to equipment rating or settings in a
tabulated form.
Arc-flash hazard study additional requirements:
May 2014
16305-4
9408A10
1.
2.
3.
4.
E.
Include the calculated arc-flash boundary and incident energy (calories/square

centimeter) at each piece of equipment in the distribution system:
a. Perform study with 15 percent arcing fault variation as defined by
IEEE 1584.
b. Perform arc-flash calculations at minimum and maximum utility and
generator fault contributions.
c. Perform arc-flash calculations for both the line side and load side of
switchgear, switchboard, motor control center and panelboard main
breakers.
d. Perform arc-flash calculations for all short-circuit scenarios with all motors
on for 3 to 5 cycles and with all motors off.
e. Protective device clearing time shall be limited to 2 seconds, maximum.
Provide executive summary of the study results.
a. Provide summary based upon worst case results.
Provide a detailed written discussion and explanation of the tabulated outputs.
a. Include all scenarios.
Provide alternative device settings to allow the Owner to select the desired
functionality of the system:
a. Minimize the arc-flash energy by selective trip and time settings for
equipment maintenance purposes.
b. Identify the arc-flash energy based upon the criteria of maintaining
coordination and selectivity of the protective devices.
Electrical system study meetings:

1.
The individual conducting the short circuit analysis, protective device
coordination, and the arc-flash hazard studies shall meet with the Owner and
Engineer 3 times.
2.
The purpose of the 3 meetings is as follows:
a. Initial meeting:
1) Meet with the Owner and Engineer to discuss the scope of the
studies.
2) Discuss the Owners operational requirements for both normal
operation and maintenance.
b. Preliminary results meeting:
1) This meeting will be held after the studies have been completed,
reviewed, and accepted by the Engineer.
2) The purpose of this meeting is to inform the Owner of the results of
the study and impacts on normal operation and maintenance
including:
a) Protective device coordination problems and recommended
solutions.
b) Explanation of the arc-flash study results and its potential impact
on operations.
c) Recommendations for reduction of arc-flash category levels
including reduction of protective device settings or changes in
operational practices.
c. Final meeting:
1) Discuss changes to the reports based on the previous meeting.
2) Discuss with the Owner how changes to the electrical system may
change the arc-flash hazard category.
3) Deliver the final electrical system studies report.
3.
The meetings will be at the Owners facility:
May 2014
16305-5
9408A10
a.
4.
F.
1.05
Provide a minimum of 3 weeks notice to the Owner and Engineer in

advance of the projected meeting date.
b. Submit a draft of the meeting agenda when each meeting is requested.
Meeting materials:
a. Prepare and provide the following materials:
1) Meeting agenda. Include at a minimum the scope of the meeting,
estimated time length for the meeting and meeting goals.
2) 6 copies of the project one-line diagrams for the initial meeting.
3) 6 copies of the studies of the submitted study.
By virtue of the fact that this is a professional study the Owner reserves the right to
modify the requirements of the study to comply with its operational requirements.
The protective device coordination study and the arc-flash study shall be modified
based on the results of the meetings with the Owner.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Initial studies and reports:

1.
Include the following in the initial short-circuit current report:
a. List of all devices included in the studies.
b. A description of all operating scenarios.
c. Form and format of arc flash labels.
C.
Final studies and reports:

1.
Format and quantity:
a. Provide 6 bound copies of all final reports.
b. Provide 3 complete sets of electronic files on CD or DVD media, including
the electrical system model(s), configuration files, custom libraries, any
other files used to perform the studies and produce the reports. Also
provide an electronic version of the bound reports in PDF format.
c. Provide the number of copies specified in Section 01330.
2.
Include the sections below in the final report:
a. Copies of correspondence and data obtained from the Electric Utility
Company.
b. Letter certifying the inspection and verification of existing equipment.
c. One-line diagrams:
1) The following information shall be included at a minimum:
a) Motor horsepower.
b) Transformer data:
(1) kVA.
(2) Configuration.
c) Cable data:
(1) Insulation.
(2) Size.
(3) Length.
2) One-line diagrams shall be fully legible at 11-inch by 17-inch size.
d. Include in the short-circuit fault analysis study:
1) Descriptions, purpose, basis, assumptions, recommendations, and
scope of the study.
May 2014
16305-6
9408A10
2)
e.
f.
1.06
Normal system connections and those, which result in maximum fault

conditions.
3) Tabulation of circuit breaker, fuse, and other protective device ratings
compared to maximum calculated short-circuit duties.
4) Fault current calculations for the cases run including a definition of
terms and guide for interpretation of computer software printouts.
Protective device coordination study shall include:
scope of the study.
2) List all requirements used in the selection and setting criteria for any
protective devices.
3) TCCs graphically indicating the coordination proposed for the system
on log-log graphs. At least 3 of the copies shall be in color.
4) Tabulation of relay, fuse, circuit breaker, and other protective devices
in graphical form with a one-line diagram to display area
coordination.
5) Where coordination could not be achieved, an explanation shall be
included in the report to support the statement along with
recommendations to improve coordination. Recommended
equipment modifications or settings shall be in a tabulated form.
Include in the arc-flash study:
scope of the study.
2) Normal system connections and those, which result in maximum arcflash conditions.
3) Arc-flash raw data, calculations, and assumptions.
4) Arc-flash label data:
a) Identifying the content of each label.
b) Identifying the location of each label.
D.
Certification:
1.
Submit written certification, sealed, and signed by the professional engineer
conducting the study, equipment supplier, and electrical subcontractor stating
that the data used in the study is correct.
E.
Submit the credentials of the individual(s) performing the study and the individual in
responsible charge of the study.
F.
The Engineer will review all studies and reports. After review, the Engineer will
make recommendations and/or require changes to be made to the short-circuit
analysis, protective device coordination or arc-flash studies. These changes shall
be provided as part of the scope of work.
G.
Submit course outline for Owners training.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
Qualifications of the entity responsible for electrical system studies:

1. The studies shall be performed, stamped, and signed by a professional
engineer registered in the state where the project is located.
May 2014
16305-7
9408A10
2.
3.
C.
A minimum of 5 years experience in power system analysis is required for the

individual in responsible charge of the studies.
The short-circuit analysis, protective device coordination, and arc-flash hazard
studies shall be performed with the aid of a digital computer program:
a. Point-to-point calculations are not acceptable.
The study shall be performed by the equipment manufacturer of the medium voltage
switchgear SWGR-2020.
1.07
1.08
1.09
SEQUENCING
A.
Submit the initial short-circuit analysis study before submittal of any electrical
equipment.
B.
Initial electrical system study meeting.
C.
Submit the preliminary short-circuit analysis protective device coordination and arc
flash studies.
D.
Second electrical system study meeting for preliminary results.
E.
Final arc-flash meeting and final short-circuit analysis, protective device

coordination, and arc-flash studies.
F.
Label equipment with approved arc flash labels.
G.
Owners training.
1.10
1.11
WARRANTY (NOT USED)
1.12
SYSTEM START UP (NOT USED)
1.13
1.14
1.15
PART 2
2.01
PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Electrical system study software one of the following or equal:

1.
ETAP by Operation Technology Inc.
2.
Powertools by SKM Systems Analysis.
3.
Paladin DesignBase by Power Analytics Corporation.
May 2014
16305-8
9408A10
2.02
2.03
2.04
2.05
2.06
COMPONENTS
A.
Arc-flash hazard labels:

1.
Dimensions:
a. Minimum 5 inches by 3.5 inches.
2.
Materials:
a. Polyester with polyvinyl polymer over-laminate.
b. Self-adhesive.
c. Resistant to:
1) UV.
2) Chemicals and common cleaning solvent resistant.
3) Scuffing.
4) Wide temperature changes.
3.
Contents:
a. Short-circuit bus identification.
b. Calculated incident energy (calories/square centimeter) range.
1) Based on worst case study results.
c. Hazard/risk, personnel protective equipment category number.
d. Arc-flash protection boundary.
e. Shock hazard boundary:
1) The CONTACTOR may provide separate labels for indication of the
shock hazard boundary.
f. Description of the combined level of personnel protective equipment.
4.
Color scheme:
a. For locations above 40 calories/square centimeter:
1) White label with red DANGER strip across the top.
2) Black lettering.
b. For locations below 40 calories/square centimeter:
1) White label with orange WARNING strip across the top.
2) Black lettering.
2.07
2.08
MIXES (NOT USED)
2.09
2.10
FINISHES (NOT USED)
2.11
PART 3
3.01
EXECUTION
May 2014
16305-9
9408A10
3.02
3.03
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
After review and acceptance of the arc-flash hazard study by the Engineer, install all
arc-flash hazard labels:
1.
Install labels at all locations required by NFPA, ANSI, or IEEE standards.
2.
At a minimum install labels in the following locations:
a. The front of each main or incoming service compartment.
b. The front of each medium voltage circuit breaker door.
c. The front of each accessible auxiliary or conductor compartment.
d. Each accessible rear or side vertical section.
e. Each motor control center compartment.
f. Each panelboard covered by the study.
g. Each control panel, individual starter or VFD or other equipment covered
by the scope of the study.
3.
Install labels prior to equipment energization.
4.
Install labels on existing equipment as well as new equipment.
C.
After review and acceptance of the arc-flash hazard study and coordination study by
the Engineer, adjust protective device settings per final study prior to equipment
energization.
1.
Devices which require power for configuration may be set during energization,
but before any subfed loads are energized.
2.
Ensure that settings for upstream equipment are set prior to energizing
downstream devices.
3.04
3.05
3.06
3.07

A.
B.
The individual performing the arc-flash hazard study shall direct the installation of
the arc-flash hazard labels:
1.
Remove and replace any improperly applied labels.
2.
Repair the equipment finish damaged by removal of any label.
3.
Install labels to within 1/64 inch of level or plumb across the entire dimension
of the label.
3.08
3.09
CLEANING (NOT USED)
3.10

A.
May 2014
16305-10
9408A10
B.
Training:
1.
Provide a minimum of 2 training sessions for the Owners electrical
maintenance personnel:
a. Each session shall be a minimum of 4 hours.
2.
The training shall cover at a minimum:
a. Hazards associated with arc-flash.
b. Causes of arc-flash.
c. Explanation of the arc-flash labels installed on the Owners electrical
equipment.
d. Proper use of personal protective equipment.
e. PPE requirements for maintenance work.
3.
The individual in charge of the arc-flash study or qualified representative shall
conduct the training sessions.
3.11
3.12

END OF SECTION
May 2014
16305-11
9408A10
SECTION 16332
MEDIUM VOLTAGE FUSES
PART 1
1.01
1.02
GENERAL
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes:
1.
Medium voltage fuses.
B.
Related sections:
1.
The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one
is as binding as if called for by all.
2.
It is the Contractors responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the
Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities
performing or furnishing any of Contractors Work.
3.
The following sections are related to the Work described in this
Section. This list of related sections is provided for convenience only
and is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty of the
Contractor to see that the completed Work complies accurately with the
Contract Documents.
c. Section 16305 - Electrical System Studies.
REFERENCES
A.
B.
C.
ASTM International (ASTM).
D.

1.
C37.40 - Standard Service Conditions and Definitions for High-Voltage
Fuses, Distribution Enclosed Single-Pole Air Switches, Fuse
Disconnecting Switches, and Accessories.
2.
C37.46 - American National Standard for High-Voltage Expulsion and
Current-Limiting Power Class Fuses and Fuse Disconnecting Switches.
3.
C37.48 Guide for Application, Operation and Maintenance of High
Voltage Fuses, Distribution Enclosed Single-Pole Air Switches, Fuse
Disconnecting Switches, and Accessories.
E.
International Organization for Standardization (ISO):

1.
9001 - Quality Management Systems - Requirements.
F.
G.
May 2014
16332-1
9408A10
1.03
1.04
DEFINITIONS
A.
B.
Definition of terms in accordance with IEEE C37.40.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
1.05
Provide complete fuse assemblies that are accurate and of the correct
capacity for:
1.
Rated voltages as indicated on the Drawings.
2.
Proper interrupting rating to quickly and safely interrupt maximum
available fault currents and prevent extensive damage to associated
equipment.
3.
Rated continuous current.
4.
Proper overcurrent protection.
5.
Protection against thermal damage.
6.
Ambient temperatures and altitudes as specified in Section 16332.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Product data:
1.
Catalog cut sheets.
2.
Complete fuse schedule:
a. Indicate manufacturer, rating, and location where each fuse is to
be installed.
3.
Catalog cut sheets for applicable accessories included, but not limited
to:
a. Mountings.
b. Fittings.
c. Disconnecting switches and blades.
d. Refill units.
e. Insulating assemblies, holders, and connectors.
4.
Melting and clearing time-current characteristics for each fuse current
rating and type:
a. Fuse characteristics shall match curves within a maximum total
tolerance of 10 percent in terms of current.
b. Minimum melting curves.
c. Maximum clearing type curves.
5.
Preloading adjustment factors.
6.
Ambient temperature adjustment factors.
7.
Documentation that fuses are sufficient for available fault conditions at
installed locations per fault coordination study as specified in
Section 16305.
8.
Current-limiting fuses:
a. Peak let-through curves for each fuse current rating and type:
1) Fuse characteristics shall match curves within a maximum
total tolerance of 10 percent in terms of current.
b. Peak arc voltage data.
9.
Installation requirements.
May 2014
16332-2
9408A10
10. Verification that supplied fuses are consistent for feasible coordination
with corresponding fuses, breakers, and other protection devices.
11. Manufacturers certifications:
a. Provide test results that show the medium voltage fuse design that
has been tested in accordance with ANSI and NEMA standards.
C.
1.06
1.07
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
The manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 certified.

1.
Provide documentation certifying an approved test method (such as a
helium mass spectrometer leak test) that demonstrates compliance
with this requirement.

A.
1.08

A.
1.09

1.
Complete assembly, installation, and testing manuals for each major
component.
2.
Include product data information, as well as spare fuse cabinet
information.
SEQUENCING
A.
Conduct the initial fault current study as specified in Section 16305 and
submit results for Engineers review.
B.
After successful review of the initial fault current study, submit complete
equipment submittal.
1.10
1.11
WARRANTY
A.
1.12
SYSTEM START-UP
A.
1.13
1.14
May 2014
16332-3
9408A10
1.15
MAINTENANCE
A.
PART 2
2.01
Spare fuses:
1.
Minimum 6 of each type and size installed under any section of these
Specifications.
2.
For fuse units with replaceable fuse units, provide 2 spare fuse holder
assemblies and 6 spare replaceable elements for each type and size
installed under any section of these Specifications.
PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS
A.

1.
S&C Electric Company.
2.
2.02
2.03
2.04
MANUFACTURED UNITS
A.
General:
1.
Provide durable, readily visible label inside each fuse enclosure, clearly
indicating the correct type, size, and rating for replacement fuses.
2.
Label all fuse units, refill units, or fuse links in accordance with IEEE
C37.46.
3.
Explosion-proof.
4.
Include all necessary accessories and mounting:
a. Disconnect-type fuse mountings shall not be used as loadbreaking devices.
5.
Permanently accurate to match time-current characteristic curves.
6.
Non-aging and non-damageable fuse element construction:
a. It shall be unnecessary to replace un-blown companion fuses
following a fuse operation.
7.
Equipped with a blown-fuse indicator to provide visible evidence of fuse
operation while installed in the fuse mounting.
8.
To assure selective coordination of protective devices:
a. Provide fuses for new facilities by the same manufacturer.
b. Provide fuses for renovations of the same manufacturer as
existing fuses.
c. Verify that supplied fuses are consistent for feasible coordination
with corresponding fuses, breakers, and other protection devices:
1) Submit coordination data to Engineer.
9.
Ratings:
a. The interrupting rating shall equal or exceed the maximum
available short circuit current at the installed location based upon
the fault current study specified in Section 16305.
b. Frequency: 60 hertz.
c. Voltage: Equal to or greater than the nominal voltage indicated on
the Drawings.
May 2014
16332-4
9408A10
B.
Fuses:
1.
Fuses for potential transformers, control power transformers, power
transformers, and feeder circuits:
a. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1) General Electric Company, Type EJ-1.
2) Eaton/Cutler-Hammer, Type CLE.
b. Ratings:
1) In accordance with manufacturers recommendations or as
c. Supports:
1) Non-disconnect type unless otherwise indicated on the
Drawings.
2.
Fuses for motor starter duty:
1) General Electric Company, Type EJ-2.
2) Eaton/Cutler-Hammer, Type CLS.
b. Characteristics:
1) Ensuring positive interruption of faults to limit the magnitude
of short circuit currents and electro-mechanical stresses to
values within allowable design of component apparatus of
motor control assembly.
2) Control surge voltage, produced during limited short circuits,
to maximum twice-nominal voltage rating.
3) Protect power transformers, control transformers, potential
transformers, feeder circuits, and motor starter equipment.
4) Withstand frequent severe heating and cooling cycles without
fatigue failure.
5) Characteristic curves used for coordination adjusted to allow
for the effects of starting inrush current, loading, and
manufacturing tolerances.
6) Blown fuse, easily identified by positive action indicator.
7) Prevent flame or gas discharge when operated without
discharge filters, fireboxes, special vents, or reinforcing.
8) Mounted on draw out assemblies.
3.
Fuses for power factor correction capacitors:
a. Ratings:
1) In accordance with manufacturers recommendations or as
b. Adequately protect systems from failed capacitor units.
c. Prevent damage to adjacent capacitors and associated equipment.
2.05
2.06
2.07
2.08
MIXES (NOT USED)
2.09
2.10
FINISHES (NOT USED)
May 2014
16332-5
9408A10
2.11
PART 3
3.01
EXECUTION
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine the Contract Documents to verify that Project conditions are within
usual service conditions, in accordance with IEEE C37.40.
1.
Notify the Engineer of any installation conditions that may be shown at
variance with these conditions and the manufacturers
recommendations.
3.02
3.03
INSTALLATION
A.
Install all equipment in accordance with the manufacturers

recommendations.
B.
Evenly torque mounting bolts and nuts in accordance with ASTM

recommendations for type and diameter of mounting bolts or studs provided.
1.
Affix a label to the inside of fuse access doors indicating recommended
torque for fuse mounting bolts or studs.
C.
Check all fuses for correct resistance values before start-up.
D.
Securely lock, latch, or hold fast in the closed position all fuses as
recommended by manufacturer.
E.
Provide all necessary hardware to secure complete assembly in place.
F.
Completely install, connect, and test for insulation integrity all equipment that
requires fuses before installation of fuses.
3.04
3.05
3.06
3.07

A.
May 2014
16332-6
9408A10
3.08
3.09
CLEANING (NOT USED)
3.10
3.11
PROTECTION
A.
3.12

END OF SECTION
May 2014
16332-7
9408A10
SECTION 16341
5 KILOVOLT MEDIUM VOLTAGE METAL CLAD SWITCHGEAR
PART 1
1.01
1.02
GENERAL
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes:
1.
Metal-clad, 5 kilovolt class switchgear assembly with vacuum interrupter power
circuit breakers.
2.
Switchgear remote control panel.
B.
Related sections:
1.
2.
3.
e. Section 16240 - Battery Systems.
f. Section 16295 - Protective Relays.
g. Section 16305 - Electrical System Studies.
h. Section 16433 - Switchgear Remote Control Panel (With Automatic
Controls).
i.
Section 17101 - Specific Control Strategies.
j.
Section 17710 - Control Systems - Panels, Enclosures, and Panel
Components.
REFERENCES
A.
B.

1.
C37.04 IEEE Standard for Rating Structure for AC High-Voltage Circuit
Breakers Corrigendum 1.
2.
C37.06 - IEEE Standard for AC High-Voltage Circuit Breakers Rated on a
Symmetrical Current Basis - Preferred Ratings and Related Required
Capabilities for Voltages Above 1000 V.
3. C37.09 - IEEE Standard Test Procedures for AC High-Voltage Circuit
Breakers Rated on a Symmetrical Current Basis Corrigendum 1.
4. C37.2 IEEE Standard Electrical Power System Device Function Numbers,
Acronyms, and Contact Designations.
5. C37.20.2 IEEE Standard for Metal-Clad Switchgear.
May 2014
16341-1
9408A10
6.
7.
8.
9.
C.
1.03
National Electrical Manufacturers' Association (NEMA):

1. SG 2 - High Voltage Fuses.
2. SG 4 Alternating-Current High-Voltage Circuit Breakers.
3. SG 5 - Power Switchgear Assemblies.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.04
C37.20.6 - IEEE Standard for 4.76 kV Rated Ground and Test Devices Used
in Enclosures.
C37.90 -IEEE Standard for Relays and Relay Systems Associated with
Electric Power Apparatus.
C57.13 IEEE Standard Requirements for Instrument Transformers.
C62.11 - IEEE Standard for Metal Oxide Surge Arresters of AC Power Circuits
(> 1 kV).
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
General:
1.
Metal-clad, 5 kilovolt switchgear designed and manufactured in accordance
with the reference standards listed in this Section.
2.
Switchgear and major components to be products of a single manufacturer
a. Circuit breakers.
b. Related equipment specified in the Contract Documents or indicated on
the Drawings.
3.
In addition to the specified basic equipment common to switchgear sections,
equip the various individual sections with instruments, protective relays and
control devices as indicated on the Drawings and/or specified below.
4.
Arrange the equipped sections side by side to form continuous switchgear
lineups as indicated on the Drawings.
5.
Provide Switchgear Remote Control Panel VCP-2020.
B.
Description of sections:
1.
Incoming line compartment:
a. Hinged door with catch and lockable handle, bolted closed.
b. Service entrance cables to enter the incoming line compartment, in a
manner as indicated on the Drawings.
c. Incoming line termination pads suitable for the size and number of
conductors indicated on the Drawings and/or conduit schedule.
d. Lightning arresters.
2.
Breaker compartment:
a. Main, generator, or feeder breaker as indicated on the Drawings.
b. Protective relays and other protective devices and interlocks as indicated
on the Drawings.
c. Multi-function solid state meters as indicated on the Drawings.
d. Current transformers: Quantity and ratios as indicated on the Drawings.
3.
Future breaker/space compartments:
a. As indicated on the Drawings:
1) Furnish with hardware necessary to accommodate installation of
future circuit breakers, instruments, relays, and controls.
May 2014
16341-2
9408A10
2)
4.
C.
1.05
Wire relay and circuit breaker control power to the compartment and
terminate on terminal strips.
Transformer compartment:
a. Potential transformers: Fused, with quantities, ratio, and configuration as
Switchgear Remote Control Panel (VCP-2020) operation:
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Product data:
1.
Manufacturer of switchgear.
2.
Manufacturers of all components and accessories.
3.
Weight of each circuit breaker of different frame sizes.
4.
Dimensions:
a. Height.
b. Length.
c. Width.
d. Weight.
5.
Nameplate schedule.
6.
Bill of material.
7.
a. Metering system.
b. Protective relaying.
8.
Ratings:
a. Voltage.
b. Phase.
c. Current.
d. Interrupting rating (circuit breakers and fuses).
e. Momentary current rating.
9.
List of recommended spare parts.
10. Name of dealers repair facility and parts stocking agreement with the factory:
a. Agreement shall outline in detail the manufacturer's parts stocking
requirements and the method by which the manufacturer's representative
verifies that the stock is at an acceptable level.
b. Agreement shall outline the method by which the manufacturer
determines that the service personnel meet factory standards.
data.
C.
Shop drawings:
1.
Layout drawings:
a. Provide fully dimensioned, to scale, equipment layout drawings which
include:
1) Equipment furnished: Plan, front and side views.
2) Shipping splits.
3) Bus layout.
May 2014
16341-3
9408A10
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
4) Interfaces with other equipment.

5) Minimum distances to walls and breaker roll-out distances.
6) Bottom conduit windows.
b. Complete, detailed, and scaled switchgear layout:
1) Front panel.
2) Sub-panels.
3) Interior panels.
4) Assembly drawings cross-section as a minimum for each cubicle with
major dimensions indicated.
Complete electrical wiring diagrams:
a. Indicate wire numbers.
Complete interface and point-to-point connection diagrams for wiring between
switchgear and remote switchgear control panel.
Internal schematics, elementary diagrams, and wiring diagrams of each unit or
compartment, including wiring identification and terminals.
Internal cell-to-cell interconnection wiring diagrams, including wiring
identification and terminal numbers.
Complete 1-line and 3-line diagrams for each switchgear line-up:
a. Identify all components comprising the switchgear assembly including, but
not limited to, circuit breakers, control power and instrument transformers,
meters, relays, control devices, monitoring devices, and terminal blocks.
b. Clearly indicate device electrical ratings on the drawings.
D.
1.
setting into place.
2.
or B:
E.

1.
Operating instructions:
a. Detail the operational functions of custom controls that have been placed
on the front panel of the switchgear and internal PLC programming if
applicable.
2.
Maintenance manual:
a. Furnish maintenance manuals with instructions for maintenance of the
equipment and data identifying the parts.
b. Include all information needed to maintain the switchgear including but not
limited to the following:
1) Instructions for testing, adjustment, and start-up.
2) Detailed control instructions that outline the function and operation of
every control device.
3) Schematic and wiring diagrams:
a) Showing all internal and external connection.
b) Furnish in a reduced 11-inch by 17-inch fully legible format.
F.
Test reports:
1.
Furnish a manufacturers certified report after the factory tests.
2.
Furnish a manufacturers written report after the start-up:
May 2014
16341-4
9408A10
a.
b.
1.06
1.07
1.08
Report must state that the installation is complete and satisfactory, or list
items requiring additional attention and a proposal for the corrective
actions.
If items require attention after the initial start-up, furnish a final report
G.
Calculations:
1.
DC power and current requirements needed to operate the 5-kilovolt metalclad switchgear circuit breakers and protective relays.
2.
switchgear to prove the switchgear is suitable for the seismic requirements at
the project site.
H.
Training documents:
1.
Submit all training documentation to be used during the Owners training
sessions as specified in this Section.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
The switchgear shall be UL labeled and listed Suitable for Service Entrance.
C.
Manufacturer shall have supplied at least 4 systems of similar nature and size,
which have been installed within a 500-mile radius of the Project location.
D.
The manufacturer shall have established an authorized dealer having parts and
service facility within a 200-mile radius of the Project:
1.
Pre-qualified service personnel available on a 24-hour-a-day basis. The
personnel must be completely familiar with the items supplied so as to return
the equipment to service in the shortest possible time.
2.
The authorized dealer must have no less than 80 percent of switchgear parts
and 100 percent of recommended spare parts, as identified in the product data
submittal in its stock at all times:
a. A personal inspection of the facility may be made by the Owner to
substantiate claims of available replacement parts.
E.
Sections and devices shall be UL listed and labeled.

A.
B.
Ship the switchgear and associated equipment to the Project Site on a dedicated air
ride vehicle that will allow the Contractor to utilize onsite off-loading equipment:
1.
Furnish temporary equipment heaters within the switchgear to prevent

A.
May 2014
16341-5
9408A10
1.09
1.10
1.11
SEQUENCING
A.
B.
After successful review of the initial fault current study, submit complete equipment
submittal as specified in the Submittals article of this Section for Engineers review.
C.
Conduct internal factory test to ensure that systems and equipment are functional
and submit certified test results for Engineers review.
D.
Conduct factory acceptance test.
E.
Ship equipment to Project Site after successful completion of factory acceptance

test.
F.
Assemble equipment in the field.
G.
H.
Set all relays per coordination study.
I.
Conduct field acceptance test and submit results for Engineers review.
J.
Submit manufacturers certification that the equipment has been properly installed
K.
L.
Energize, start-up and commission equipment.
SCHEDULING
A.
B.
Schedule the witnessed factory acceptance test 30 days before the test.
C.
Schedule Owners training sessions 30 days before the session:

1.
Conduct training sessions before energization of the switchgear.
D.
Schedule the formal energization, start-up, and commissioning of the equipment

30 days in advance.
WARRANTY
A.
1.12
SYSTEM START-UP
A.
1.13
May 2014
16341-6
9408A10
1.14
1.15
PART 2
2.01
PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS
A.

1. General Electric Company.
2. Schneider Electric/Square D Company.
3. Eaton/Cutler-Hammer.
4. Powell.
B.
Circuit breakers: Same manufacturer as metal-clad switchgear.
2.02
2.03
2.04
2.05
EQUIPMENT
A.
Switchgear:
1.
Provide medium-voltage 5-kilovolt class metal-clad switchgear as specified in
the Contract Documents and indicated on the Drawings.
2.
Provide complete and functional lineups of switchgear with associated
controls.
3.
Provide devices or accessories not specified in this Section but necessary for
the proper installation and operation of the equipment.
B.
Voltage ratings:
1.
2.
Basic impulse insulation level: Minimum 60 kilovolts.
C.
Main bus:
1.
High conductivity, tin-plated copper:
a. Flat bar with rounded edges.
b. Suitably braced and supported on high dielectric strength insulators.
2.
Continuous current carrying capacity as indicated on the Drawings.
3.
Insulate each bus with fluidized bed epoxy flame retardant and track resistant
insulation.
4.
Mount insulated bus on flame retardant, track resistant supports and brace to
withstand magnetic stresses developed by fault currents equal to the close
and latch rating of the circuit breakers.
5.
Bus connections:
a. Plated.
b. Bolted with Belleville spring washers.
c. Install insulated boot over joint.
6.
Document temperature rise of the bus and connections by design tests.
May 2014
16341-7
9408A10
D.
Ground bus:
1.
Tin-plated copper bar, 1/4 inch by 2 inches minimum, extended through each
section:
a. Firmly secure to each vertical section.
b. Provide termination lugs for termination of copper ground cable at each
end of the bus.
2.
Ground each section directly to ground bus.
E.
Stationary structure:
1.
Utilize unit type construction in formation of housing in order to provide a rigid,
self-supporting and self-contained enclosure for each circuit breaker unit and
other units comprising switchgear:
a. Fabricate each stationary structure of heavy, formed, smooth, and level
steel sheets and structural members, bolted or welded to form a rigid
assembly with hinged steel panel suitable for mounting of instruments,
meters, relays, and control devices.
b. Provide bolted, hinged front and rear cubicle doors with locks.
2.
Dead front construction with rear access via lockable, hinged doors.
3.
Sections shall be approximately 95 inches high, 36 inches wide, front and rear
aligned:
a. Maximum dimensions as indicated on the Drawings.
4.
Isolate circuit breaker units, bus, instrument and control transformers, and
outgoing cables within separate compartments formed by sheet steel barriers:
a. Mount heavy close-fitting bus supports at bus openings between units:
1) The supports shall form a barrier to isolate each unit from adjacent
units.
b. Provide each compartment with a separate cover for individual servicing
without exposing the circuit in adjacent compartment.
5.
Provide automatic shutters to isolate the circuit breaker compartment from the
bus when the circuit breaker unit is moved to the TEST or WITHDRAWN
position.
6.
NEMA type:
a. NEMA Type 1 gasketed:
1) Switchgear sections shall have an open bottom in the rear for cable
terminations.
7.
Front access to devices accessible through a formed, bolted, hinged
removable cover:
a. Captive knurled type knob screws are to hold covers in place.
8.
Provide switchgear with lifting channels having provisions for attachment of
crane slings to facilitate lifting and handling each shipping-assembly unit:
a. Remove lifting channels after equipment is installed.
F.
Cable compartment:
1.
Support circuit breaker disconnecting contacts by means of flame-retardant,
track-resistant polyester glass or porcelain supports.
2.
Provide cable terminals:
a. NEMA 4-hole pads suitable for connection and termination of 5 kilovolt
shielded cables.
3.
Design switchgear so that high voltage, low voltage, control and
instrumentation cables can enter the switchgear from either the top or bottom.
4.
Provide cable supports with provisions for stress relief cones and cable bends.
May 2014
16341-8
9408A10
G.
2.06
Removable element:
1.
Provide a racking screw and moving block for breaker insertion and
withdrawal:
a. The racking screw shall be capable of holding the breaker in the
CONNECTED position.
2.
Utilize master jigs to determine accurately the correct stud locations of the
removable and the stationary elements.
3.
Provide means for mechanically locking the removable element in any
position:
a. Lock shall not interfere with the operation of the breaker and its
mechanism.
4.
Provide a ground shoe to ground the breaker in all positions.
5.
Provide breaker CONNECTED position indication.
6.
Provide interlock on each circuit breaker unit to prevent circuit breaker from
being removed from CONNECTED position and from being placed in
CONNECTED position while breaker is closed:
a. If the circuit breaker is closed, the interlock shall trip the breaker before it
can be placed into or removed from the CONNECTED position.
7.
Accurately align stud and socket primary disconnecting devices:
a. Furnish tin-to-tin pressure contacts to prevent harmful temperature rise
due to oxidation, together with nonmagnetic corrosion-resisting springs to
provide high-pressure line contacts.
b. Mount stationary contact in a 1-piece glass, polyester, or porcelain shell to
provide ample insulation from the framework.
c. Mount movable contact on the circuit breaker stud to ensure direct
contact.
8.
Provide secondary disconnecting devices for bringing control leads to circuit
breaker operating mechanism and auxiliary switches on removable element:
a. Spring mount self-aligning receptacles on stationary framework.
b. Mount the plugs on the removable element.
c. Contacts in the receptacles shall be recessed to ensure against accidental
short-circuit of control or secondary wiring.
9.
Mechanism-operated compartment switch:
a. Provide up to 12 normally closed and up to 15 normally open contacts.
b. Switches shall be activated by breaker mechanism.
10. Truck operated cell switch:
a. Provide normally closed switch contacts to indicate the breaker is in the
CONNECTED position.
COMPONENTS
A.
Circuit breakers:
1.
Power circuit breaker unit including:
a. One set of primary disconnecting devices with automatic shutters.
b. One set of secondary disconnecting devices.
2.
Oilless, vacuum Type 3 pole:
a. Horizontal draw-out type capable of being withdrawn on rails.
b. Electrically and mechanically trip-free with anti-pumping features.
3.
Ratings: In accordance with IEEE C37.06, with the following minimum ratings,
for indoor breaker with K equal to 1:
a. Voltage:
1) Operating voltage: As indicated on the Drawings.
May 2014
16341-9
9408A10
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
2) Maximum design voltage: 4.76 kilovolts.

3) 60 hertz withstand test voltage: 60 kilovolts.
4) Basic impulse insulation level: 60 kilovolts minimum.
b. Current:
1) Continuous current rating: As indicated on the Drawings.
2) Short circuit current/peak closing and latching current at rated
maximum kilovolts:
a) 2,000 amp continuous current rating:
(1) 40,000/104,000 amps.
c. Rated interrupting time: 5 cycles:
Operation:
a. Operable by means of a stored-energy mechanism, normally charged by
a universal motor, which can be charged by a manual handle for
emergency closing or test.
b. The mechanism closing speed of the contacts to be independent of both
control voltage and operator.
c. Provide contact wear gap indicator for each vacuum interrupter to indicate
available contact life, which requires no tools and is easily visible when
breaker is removed from its compartment.
d. Provide each circuit breaker with a receptacle for connection to a handheld control station to allow for remote open and closing of the breaker.
Provide secondary disconnecting contacts that automatically engage in the
OPERATING and TEST position to complete circuits as required.
Provide 2 sets of normally open, a, and 2 sets of normally closed, b, circuit
breaker auxiliary contacts wired to terminal strips.
Breaker control voltage:
a. Open/Trip: 48 VDC.
b. Close: 48 VDC.
Circuit breakers of equal rating shall be interchangeable.
B.
Direct current battery systems:

1.
C.
Relays and instrument transformers:

1.
Provide protective relays complete with devices and associated circuitry
necessary to perform the required functions specified in the Contract
Documents or indicated on the Drawings.
2.
D.
Control wiring:
1.
Switchgear wire:
a. Type SIS, single-conductor, stranded copper, rated 600 volts.
b. Provide flexible stranding for swinging panels.
c. Minimum wire size:
1) Number 14 for control circuits.
2) Number 12 for potential and current transformer circuits.
2.
Route outgoing control wires to master terminal blocks with suitable numbering
strips numbered in agreement with the manufacturer's detailed wiring
diagrams:
a. Terminate control wiring in molded, screw-type terminal blocks.
b. Provide a minimum of 10 percent spare terminal blocks for each unit.
c. Compression type terminal blocks are not acceptable.
May 2014
16341-10
9408A10
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.07
Terminate foreign circuits entering the switchgear on "pull-apart" terminal

blocks.
Number wiring with machine-printed tag devices at both ends consistent with
the manufacturer's detailed wiring diagrams:
a. Duplication of wire numbers and terminal block numbers is not
acceptable.
b. Uniquely number every wire.
When a power source other than the source that is interrupted is present in the
switchgear compartment, provide a switch for each remote source inside the
compartment to isolate the source in compliance with the NEC.
Terminate control wire with insulated barrel, ring type connectors
manufacturers: The following or equal;
a. Stakon.
E.
Lightning arresters:
1.
Heavy-duty distribution class MOV type surge arresters, 5-kilovolt class, for
installation on the specified nominal voltage system.
2.
Provide brackets, wiring, and other hardware as necessary for cubicle
mounting.
3.
Designed and manufactured in accordance with the latest edition of IEEE
C62.11.
F.
Miscellaneous:
1.
Furnish wiring, potential bus, necessary fuses, and terminal blocks within each
unit.
2.
Requirements for items mounted on panels:
a. Semi-flush mounting for 1/8 inch panels unless otherwise noted.
ACCESSORIES
A.
Remote breaker operation cabinet:

1.
Selector switches: as indicated on the Drawings.
2.
Pushbuttons and pilot lights:
b. Quantity and function as indicated on the Drawings.
3.
Switchgear Remote Control Panel Enclosure:
a. NEMA 12 enclosure, in accordance with Section 17710.
B.
Nameplates:
1.
Provide nameplates to identify:
a. Switchgear units:
1) Label front and rear doors of each cubicle.
b. Door mounted components.
c. Interior mounted devices.
2.
3.
Engraved with the circuit number and circuit name as indicated on the
Drawings.
C.
Warning signs:
1.
Voltage:
a. Provide a minimum of 2 warning signs on the front of the switchgear
lineup and 2 on the back.
May 2014
16341-11
9408A10
b.
2.
Red laminated plastic engraved with white letters approximately 1/2-inch

high.
c. Signs shall read:
1) "WARNING-HIGH VOLTAGE-KEEP OUT.
Arc flash:
a. Provide 1 warning sign for each switchgear compartment.
b. Signs shall have read a minimum of:
1) DANGER ELECTRIC ARC FLASH HAZARD.
2) Signs shall meet the requirements of the NEC.
D.
Portable lifting device for removing the breaker from the breaker cell.
E.
One transfer truck (turning dolly) for removing and transporting circuit breakers.
F.
Remote circuit breaker racking mechanism:

1.
Cord and plug: 50-foot, minimum.
2.
Connection of the mechanism shall be made with the circuit breaker
compartment door closed:
a. Mechanism shall rack the breaker to the disengaged position with the
compartment door closed.
G.
Manual levering crank.
H.
Rail extensions and rail clamps: 1 set.
I.
Secondary couplers for operating a power circuit breaker in the DISCONNECTED

position.
J.
Mimic bus:
1.
Laminated plastic material fastened to the front surface of the switchgear
reflecting bus routing and power devices.
K.
Test blocks and plugs:

1.
Molded polycarbonate material.
2.
Make-before-break connections for CT circuits.
3.
Provide cover for each test block.
4.
Acceptable manufacturers:
a. Multilin PK-2.
b. ABB FT-1.
L.
Circuit breaker indicating lights and control switches:

1.
Indicating lights:
a. Low voltage LED:
1) Green for "OPEN.
2) Red for "CLOSED.
2.
Control switches:
a. Rotary cam operated switchgear rated type with means for maintaining
contact position.
b. Contacts to be silver-to-silver, enclosed in removable protective covers.
c. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1) General Electric Company, Type SB.
2) Electroswitch.
May 2014
16341-12
9408A10
2.08
MIXES (NOT USED)
2.09
2.10
FINISHES
A.
2.11
Manufacturers standard epoxy paint applied to chemically-cleaned and primed

steel for internal and external parts:
1.
Coating to have corrosion resistance of 300 hours to 5 percent salt spray.
2.
Paint complete assembly with a 1.5- to 2.0-mil thick exterior finish spray coat
of Manufacturers standard gray paint before shipment.

A.
PART 3
Factory tests:
1.
Along with all internal switchgear components specified in this section, the
factory acceptance test shall include a fully-functional test of the switchgear
remote breaker panel:
a. Provide all temporary wires, connections, etc. as needed to perform the
testing.
2.
Test the complete switchgear at the manufacturers establishment:
a. The test may be observed by the Engineer and Owner.
3.
Furnish a certified copy of the test results for review:
a. Record minor adjustments made during the test.
b. If major changes must be made, repeat the test.
4.
Completely assemble, wire and test switchgear at the factory:
a. Detailed inspections before and after assembly to assure correctness of
design and workmanship.
b. Provide groups of wires leaving the shipping-assembled equipment with
terminal blocks with suitable numbering strips.
5.
a. Bear all costs associated with this test including but not limited to travel,
lodging, meals, travel time, time to witness tests, etc. A minimum of
8 hours per day per individual for 1 individual shall be included.
EXECUTION
3.01
3.02
3.03
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
site.
May 2014
16341-13
9408A10
C.
General:
1.
Furnish cables, conduit, lugs, bolts, expansion anchors, sealants, and other
accessories needed to complete the installation of the switchgear.
2.
Assemble and install the switchgear in the location and layout indicated on the
Drawings.
3.
Make bus splice connections.
4.
Perform Work in accordance with manufacturers instructions and shop
drawings.
5.
6.
Replace hardware lost or damaged during the installation or handling to
7.
Install floor-mounted switchgear in accordance with manufacturers
recommendations and as follows::
a. Provide structural leveling channels in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations to provide proper alignment of the units.
b. Weld and/or bolt switchgear frame to leveling channels mounted to the
floor.
D.

1.
Make control connections across the shipping splits.
2.
Install and align all circuit breakers.
3.04
3.05
3.06
3.07
3.08
A.
B.

1.
Be present at the Project Site when the switchgear arrives.
2.
Act as an advisor in assisting the Contractor regarding the unloading and
move-in operations.
3.
Furnish the services of a factory-certified technician during the start-up and
adjustment period to ensure that items furnished are in proper operating
condition:
a. Technician must be completely knowledgeable in the operation,
4.
Before start-up, furnish written certification that the entire installation and
electrical connections have been inspected and are proper and consistent with
Drawings and Specifications.
5.
Furnish a written report after start-up signed by the manufacturer:
a. Report must state that the installation is complete and meets the
b. List items requiring additional attention.
ADJUSTING
A.

May 2014
16341-14
9408A10
B.
3.09
CLEANING
A.
3.10
3.11

A.
B.
Demonstrate the operation to the Engineers and Owners satisfaction.
C.
Training:
1.
Provide as specified in Section 01756.
2.
Manufacturer shall instruct the Owner's personnel regarding the operation and
maintenance of items supplied:
a. Supply written handouts during the training period and these handouts
shall be suitable for future reference after the training period is completed.
b. Held at the Owners facility.
c. Video record the training session in DVD format and deliver to the Owner
within 2 weeks of the training session.
d. Supply complete training documents for attendees, as determined by the
Owner:
e. Engineer reviewed and accepted training documents are to be supplied a
minimum of 4 weeks before the training session, and to be used by the
Owner as reference documents during the training period.
f. Held in a formal classroom environment that utilizes the actual equipment
in the field:
1) Training sessions that are conducted during start-up and
commissioning will not be accepted as part of this requirement.
g. Training sessions consist of both operational and maintenance training
and consist of one 4-hour session.
PROTECTION
A.
3.12

1.
Adjust the carriages and racking mechanisms.
2.
Adjust doors for proper operation.
3.
Adjust shutters for proper operation.

END OF SECTION
May 2014
16341-15
9408A10
SECTION 16346
5-KILOVOLT MEDIUM-VOLTAGE METAL-ENCLOSED INTERRUPTER SWITCHGEAR
PART 1
1.01
1.02
GENERAL
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes:
1.
Narrow-Design Indoor 5 kilovolt class metal-enclosed interrupter switchgear
with load interrupter switches.
a. Switches are to be provided in configuration as indicated on the Drawings.
b. Switches are to be provided to act as a manually operable maintenance
bypass switch. This function will be performed with two adjacent switches
with Kirk-key interlocks. The output should be directly bussed as any
fusing could allow for the VFD to operate against an open circuit, leading
to VFD damage.
B.
Related sections:
1.
2.
3.
e. Section 16124 - Medium Voltage Cables.
REFERENCES
A.
B.

1.
D 522 - Standard Test Methods for Mandrel Bend Test of Attached Organic
Coatings.
2.
D 2794 - Standard Test Method for Resistance of Organic Coatings to the
Effects of Rapid Deformation (Impact).
3.
D 3363 - Standard Test Method for Film Hardness by Pencil Test.
C.

1.
C37.20.3 - IEEE Standard for Metal-Enclosed Interrupter Switchgear.
May 2014
16346-1
9408A10
1.03
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.04
1.05
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
Factory assembled, factory wired and factory tested dead-front completely metalenclosed switchgear. Switchgear and major components to be products of a single
manufacturer including, but not limited to
1.
Load interrupter switches.
2.
Control devices.
3.
Kirk-key interlocks.
4.
Incoming and outgoing connections.
5.
Other equipment of the number, rating and type specified or supplemented by
data indicated on the Drawings.
B.
Arrange the equipped sections side by side to form continuous switchgear lineups
1.
Available room footprint is very limited. Provide narrow-design switchgear
sections with a width dimension of 18 inches or less per section.
C.
Description of sections:
1.
Incoming line compartment:
a. Hinged door with catch and lockable handle, bolted closed.
b. Incoming line termination pads suitable for the size and number of
conductors indicated on the Drawings and/or conduit schedule.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Product data:
1.
Manufacturer of switchgear.
2.
Manufacturers of all components and accessories.
3.
Weight of each switch of different frame sizes.
4.
Dimensions:
a. Height.
b. Length.
c. Width.
d. Weight.
5.
Nameplate schedule.
6.
Bill of material.
7.
Ratings:
a. Voltage.
b. Phase.
c. Current.
d. Momentary current rating.
8.
List of recommended spare parts.
9.
data.
May 2014
16346-2
9408A10
B.
Shop drawings:
1.
Plan, front, and side view drawing including overall dimensions and bus layout
of each switchgear lineup. Identify shipping splits and show conduit stub-up
area locations.
2.
Internal schematics (elementary diagrams) and wiring diagrams of each unit or
compartment, including wiring identification and terminal numbers.
3.
Internal cell-to-cell interconnection wiring diagrams, including wiring
identification and terminal numbers.
4.
Complete 1-line diagrams for each switchgear lineup and complete 3-line
diagrams for each cubicle.
a. Drawings shall indicate devices comprising the switchgear assembly
including, but not limited to, load interrupter switches, relays, control
devices, and monitoring devices.
b. Clearly indicate device electrical ratings on Drawings.
5.
Assembly drawings (cross-section as a minimum) for each cubicle with major
layout dimensions indicated.
6.
Complete bill of material list and equipment data sheets identifying appropriate
information specific to switchgear being supplied.
7.
Nameplate schedule.
C.
1.
setting into place.
2.
or B:
3.
D, E, or F:
D.

1.
Operating instructions.
2.
Maintenance manual:
a. Furnish maintenance manuals with instructions for maintenance of the
equipment and data identifying the parts.
b. Include all information needed to maintain the switchgear including but not
limited to the following:
1) Instructions for testing, adjustment, and start-up.
2) Detailed control instructions that outline the function and operation of
every control device.
3) Schematic and wiring diagrams:
a) Showing all internal and external connection.
b) Furnish in a reduced 11-inch by 17-inch fully legible format.
E.
Test reports:
1.
Furnish a manufacturers certified report after the factory tests.
May 2014
16346-3
9408A10
2.
1.06
1.07
1.08
F.
Calculations:
1.
switchgear to prove the switchgear is suitable for the seismic requirements at
the project site.
G.
Training documents:
1.
Submit all training documentation to be used during the Owners training
sessions as specified in this Section.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
All sections and devices shall be UL listed and labeled.

A.
B.
Ship the switchgear and associated equipment to the Project Site on a dedicated air
ride vehicle that will allow the Contractor to utilize onsite off-loading equipment:
1.
Furnish temporary equipment heaters within the switchgear to prevent

A.
1.09
Furnish a manufacturers written report after the start-up:

a. Report must state that the installation is complete and satisfactory, or list
items requiring additional attention and a proposal for the corrective
actions.
b. If items require attention after the initial start-up, furnish a final report
SEQUENCING
A.
Conduct fault current study as specified in Section 16305 and submit results for
Engineers review.
B.
After successful review of the initial fault current study, submit equipment submittal
for Engineers review.
C.
Conduct internal factory test to ensure that all systems and equipment are
functional and submit certified test results for Engineers review.
D.
Conduct factory acceptance test.
E.
Ship equipment to project site after successful completion of factory acceptance

test.
F.
May 2014
16346-4
9408A10
1.10
G.
H.
Conduct field acceptance test and submit results for Engineers review.
I.
Submit manufacturers certification that all equipment has been properly installed
J.
K.
SCHEDULING
A.
1.11
WARRANTY
A.
1.12
SYSTEM START-UP
A.
1.13
1.14
1.15
PART 2
2.01
PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Switchgear: One of the following or equal:

1.
2.
B.
Load interrupter switch: Same manufacturer as metal-enclosed switchgear.
2.02
2.03
2.04
2.05
EQUIPMENT
A.
Switchgear:
1.
Provide metal-enclosed switchgear with the required voltage Class for the
indicated voltage.
May 2014
16346-5
9408A10
2.
3.
Provide complete and functional lineups of switchgear and respective controls.

Provide devices or accessories not herein described but necessary for the
proper installation and operation of the equipment.
Provide one terminal pad per phase suitable for connecting 2 conductors per
phase of the sizes indicated on the Drawings.
a. Provide sufficient space for electrical stress relief termination devices
specified in 16151.
B.
Voltage ratings:
1.
Design and construct load interrupter switches for use on the electrical system
2.
Basic insulation level shall be consistent with the applicable system voltage.
C.
Main bus and insulation systems:

1.
Fabricate buses of high conductivity, flat, tin-plated copper bar having rounded
edges.
2.
NEMA-rated for the voltage class specified.
3.
Buses to have a continuous current-carrying capacity of not less than 600
Amps.
4.
Splice plates and ends of buses shall be tin-plated.
5.
Mount bus on insulated supports with coordinated dielectric properties and
with strength to withstand magnetic stresses developed by current at least
equal to the momentary withstand rating of the load interrupter switch.
6.
Fabricate bus insulated supports from insulation possessing flame-retardant
and self-extinguishing, dielectric and anti-hydroscopic properties.
D.
Ground bus:
1.
Tin-plated copper bar, 1/4 inch by 2 inch minimum:
a. Extended through all cubicles.
b. Firmly secure to each vertical section.
c. Provide termination lugs for termination of copper ground cable at each
end of the bus.
d. Ground each section directly to ground bus.
E.
Stationary structure:
1.
Maximum width per section: 18 inches.
2.
Provide a rigid, self-supporting and self-contained for the switchgear
assembly.
a. Fabricate structure of heavy, formed, smooth and level steel sheets, at
least 11 gauge for doors and 14 gauge for all other sheets.
b. Structural members bolted or electrically welded to form a rigid assembly
with hinged steel panel suitable for mounting of instruments, meters,
relays, and control devices.
3.
Provide each switch cubical with a single, full length, flanged front door over
the switch and/or fuse assembly.
4.
Flanged door: Closing over a projecting doorframe; equipped with high
strength latches to seal the door; with 3 concealed hinges and a high impact
glass or high impact polycarbonate sheet observation window.
5.
Provide tamper-resistant padlockable door handles.
6.
Provide adequate lifting means to roll and move into the switchgear installation
position. Bolt directly to the floor.
May 2014
16346-6
9408A10
7.
8.
2.06
Provide adequate conduit space. Coordinate conduit space with conduit layout
drawings.
Arrange the equipped sections side by side to form continuous switchgear
lineups as indicated on the Drawings.
F.
Cable compartment:
1.
Provide NEMA bolt hole pads at incoming and outgoing terminals:
a. Suitable for connection and termination of shielded cables as specified in
Section 16124.
b. Number of holes in accordance with IEEE C37.20.3 requirements.
G.
Top and bottom power cable entry with provisions for termination of cables.
COMPONENTS
A.
Load interrupter switch:

1.
Multipurpose 2-position (open-close), quick-make, quick-break, 3-pole, gangoperated load-break interrupter switch with manually recharged stored-energy
operating mechanism, and permanent "open-closed" position indicators; rated
5 kilovolts, 600 amperes continuous, 600 amperes interrupting,
40,000 amperes asymmetrical momentary and fault closing.
a. Switch insulation may be air, vacuum, or SF6.
2.
Duty cycle: 1 time.
a. As a minimum, the switch (fused or un-fused) shall be capable of closing
once against a 3-phase fault with asymmetrical current in at least one
phase equal to the rated value with the switch remaining operable and
able to carry and interrupt rated current.
3.
Operated (opening and closing) by means of an externally operable handle
with provisions for padlocking in both the open and closed positions.
4.
Provide a set of auxiliary contacts for remote indication of switch position.
5.
Provide maintenance provision for slow closing of the switch to check switch
blade engagement.
B.
Control wiring:
1.
Wire switchgear to satisfy the requirements of the operation specified.
2.
Switchgear wiring: NEC Type SIS, single-conductor, stranded copper, rated
600 volts. Provide flexible stranding for swinging panels.
a. Minimum wire size: Number 14 for control circuits.
3.
Route outgoing control wires to master terminal blocks with suitable numbering
strips numbered in agreement with the manufacturer's detailed wiring
diagrams and the drawings.
4.
Terminate control wiring in molded, screw-type terminal blocks acceptable to
the Engineer.
a. Provide a minimum of 10 percent spare terminal blocks for each unit.
b. Compression type terminal blocks are not acceptable.
5.
Terminate foreign circuits entering the switchgear on "pull-apart" terminal
blocks that meet the requirements of the state where the Project is located.
6.
Identify wiring as specified in 16075.
C.
Miscellaneous:
1.
Furnish wiring, bus, and terminal blocks within each unit.
2.
Requirements for items mounted on panels:
May 2014
16346-7
9408A10
a.
2.07
2.08
Semi-flush mounting for 1/8 inch panels unless otherwise noted.
ACCESSORIES
A.
Kirk key Interlocks: Provide as indicated on the Drawings.
B.
Nameplates:
1.
Provide nameplates to identify:
a. Switchgear units:
1) Label front and rear doors of each cubicle.
b. Door mounted components.
c. Interior mounted devices.
2.
3.
Engraved with the circuit number and circuit name as indicated on the
Drawings.
MIXES (NOT USED)
2.09
2.10
FINISHES
A.
2.11
Before assembly, all enclosing steel shall be cleaned and phosphatized or a

zirconization application.
1.
For indoor switchgear, apply a powder coating electrostatically, then fused on
by baking in an oven.
2.
Coating thickness shall not be less than 1.5 mils.
3.
Finish shall have the following properties:
a. Impact resistance (ASTM D 2794): 60 direct/60 indirect.
b. Pencil hardness (ASTM D 3363): H.
c. Flexibility (ASTM D 522): Pass 1/8-inch mandrel.
d. Salt Spray (ASTM B 117): 600 hours.
e. Color: Manufacturers standard gray.

A.
Factory tests:
1.
Test the complete switchgear at the manufacturers establishment.
2.
Furnish a certified copy of the test results for review:
a. Record minor adjustments made during the test.
b. If major changes must be made, repeat the test.
3.
Completely assemble, wire and test switchgear at the factory:
a. Detailed inspections before and after assembly to assure correctness of
design and workmanship.
b. Provide groups of wires leaving the shipping-assembled equipment with
terminal blocks with suitable numbering strips.
4.
May 2014
16346-8
9408A10
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
3.02
3.03
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
site.
C.
General:
1.
Furnish cables, conduit, lugs, bolts, expansion anchors, sealants, and other
accessories needed to complete the installation of the switchgear.
2.
Physically assemble and install the switchgear in the location and layout
3.
Make bus splice connections.
4.
5.
Perform work in accordance with the manufacturers instructions and shop
drawings.
6.
Replace hardware lost or damaged during the installation or handling to
7.
Weld and/or bolt switchgear frame to leveling channels in accordance with
manufacturers recommendations:
a. Provide structural leveling channels in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations to provide proper alignment of the units.
b. The installation shall meet the seismic requirements of the site.
D.

1.
Make control connections across the shipping splits.
2.
Install and align all circuit breakers.
3.04
3.05
3.06
3.07

A.
B.
Manufacturers services:
1.
Provide technical assistance to the Contractor during installation, connection,
and testing.
2.
Inspect the complete installation and provide a certificate stating that the
equipment was properly installed before energizing the equipment.
C.
Submit copies of field tests in accordance with the submittal requirements specified
in Section 01330.
May 2014
16346-9
9408A10
3.08
ADJUSTING
A.
3.09
CLEANING
A.
3.10
3.11

A.
B.
Demonstrate operation of equipment to Owner and Owners Representative as

C.
Training:
1.
Provide training as specified in Section 01756.
2.
Training shall be provided by manufacturers qualified engineer.
PROTECTION
A.
3.12


END OF SECTION
May 2014
16346-10
9408A10
SECTION 16351
MEDIUM VOLTAGE REDUCED VOLTAGE STARTERS
PART 1
1.01
1.02
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes:
1.
Modifications to existing medium voltage reduced-voltage motor starters for
use with 3-phase, squirrel cage induction motors.
B.
Related sections:
1.
2.
3.
REFERENCES
A.
1.03
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.04
GENERAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
Provide modifications to existing reduced voltage auto-transformer (RVAT) starters

as required by this section and as indicated on the Drawings.
1.
Existing conditions indicated on the Drawings are based on information
provided by the City. Field verify all existing conditions and provide detailed
record drawings showing final state of equipment after the modifications
performed under this contract.
2.
Partially demolish controls for Pump Nos. 1, 2, and 3 as indicated on the
Drawings. Reconnect existing starter controls to new control logic in new PCM
cabinet PCM-2031.
3.
Partially demolish controls for Pump Nos. 4 and 5 as indicated on the
Drawings. Reconnect existing starter controls to new control login in new PCM
cabinet PCM-2031. This includes interconnection with new VFDs to utilize
RVAT starter as a manual bypass starter.
4.
Demolish power feeds for Pump Nos. 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 as indicated on the
Drawings. Refeed power from existing starters as indicated on the Drawings.
May 2014
16351-1
9408A10
1.05
1.06
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Shop drawings:
1.
Complete, detailed, and scaled starter layout drawings indexed to the bill of
material showing:
a. Front panel.
b. Sub-panels.
c. Interior panels.
2.
Complete schematic, wiring, and interconnection drawings showing
connections to all internal and external devices:
a. Indicate wire and terminal numbers.
3.
Complete interface and connection diagrams for communications and relaying
systems.
4.
Complete 1-line and 3-line diagrams including but not limited to, main power
isolation switch, contactors, instrument transformers, power electronics, and
other equipment comprising the complete system:
a. Clearly indicate device electrical ratings on the drawings.
C.
Record documents:
1.
Certified record drawings of all equipment with information listed above.
2.
Record documents to reflect final state of starter including field verification of
existing conditions to remain in place as well as modified portions of the
starter.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.07

A.
1.08
1.10

A.
1.09
SEQUENCING
A.
Field verify existing conditions to confirm modifications will perform as designed.
B.
Perform field modifications.
C.
Submit record drawings showing final state of modified starters.
D.
SCHEDULING
A.
May 2014
16351-2
9408A10
1.11
WARRANTY
A.
1.12
SYSTEM START-UP
A.
B.
Start up the starter in the presence of the driven equipment manufacturer, motor
manufacturer, Engineer and Owner.
1.13
1.14
1.15
PART 2
2.01
PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Existing RVAT starters are Eaton contactors in Powell switchgear.
2.02
2.03
2.04
2.05
2.06
COMPONENTS
A.
Control power transformer:

1.
Provide new control power transformers for existing starters where indicated
on the Drawings.
1.
Size the transformer to supply power to all starter controls as well as any
external devices indicated on the Drawings including the motor winding heater.
2.
Primary and secondary fusing.
3.
120 VAC, single-phase secondary.
B.
Wiring:
1.
Control wire:
a. Tinned copper.
b. Stranded.
c. Isolated from medium voltage components.
d. 14 AWG minimum.
e. 600 volt insulation.
2.
Terminal strips:
a. 600 volt.
May 2014
16351-3
9408A10
2.07
ACCESSORIES
A.

1.
2.
Existing motor protection relay is a Multilin 369.
B.
Nameplates and wire markers:

1.
2.
Provide new nameplates for all pump starters to match new equipment
numbers indicated on the Drawings.
2.08
MIXES (NOT USED)
2.09
2.10
FINISHES (NOT USED)
2.11
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
3.02
3.03
INSTALLATION
A.
3.04
3.05
3.06
3.07

A.
3.08
ADJUSTING
A.
3.09
Make adjustments as necessary and recommended by the manufacturers,

CLEANING
A.
3.10

A.
May 2014
16351-4
9408A10
3.11
PROTECTION
A.
3.12

END OF SECTION
May 2014
16351-5
9408A10
SECTION 16411
DISCONNECT SWITCHES
PART 1
1.01
1.02
1.03
GENERAL
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes:
1.
Fusible and non-fusible disconnect switches.
B.
Related sections:
1.
2.
3.
d. Section 16305 - Electrical System Studies.
e. Section 16494 - Low Voltage Fuses.
REFERENCES
A.
B.

1.
20 - General-Use Snap Switches.
2.
98 - Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches.
3.
508 - Standard for Industrial Control Equipment.
C.
National Electric Manufacturers Association (NEMA):

1.
250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment.
2.
KS 1-2001- Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches
(600 Volts Maximum).
DEFINITIONS
A.
B.
1.
Safety switches and disconnect switches are to be considered synonymous.
May 2014
16411-1
9408A10
1.04
1.05
1.06
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
Provide heavy-duty type disconnect switches as indicated on the Drawings and

specified in the Contract Documents.
B.
Provide disconnect switches with the number of poles, voltage, current, short circuit,
and horsepower ratings as required by the load and the power system.
C.
Provide a local horsepower rated disconnect switch as indicated on the Drawings.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Product data:
1.
Manufacturer.
2.
Manufacturer's specifications and description.
3.
Ratings:
a. Voltage.
b. Current.
c. Horsepower.
d. Short circuit rating.
4.
Fused or non fused.
5.
NEMA enclosure type.
6.
Dimensions:
a. Height.
b. Width.
c. Depth.
7.
Weight.
8.
Cross-referenced to the disconnect schedule indicated on the Drawings.
C.
Shop drawings:
1.
Manufacturer's installation instructions:
a. Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product
testing agency specified under Quality Assurance, Regulatory
Requirements below.
b. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination,
preparation, installation, and operation of product.
2.
Identify motor or equipment served by each switch; indicate nameplate
inscription.
D.
1.
Provide anchorage instructions and requirement based on the seismic
requirements at the Project Site as specified in Section 16411 and
calculations:
a. Stamped by a professional engineer registered in the state where the
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
May 2014
16411-2
9408A10
1.
2.
C.
1.07

A.
1.09
Disconnect switches shall be UL listed and labeled.

A.
1.08
NEMA KS1- Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Switches (600 V

Maximum).
UL 98 - Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches.
SEQUENCING
A.
B.

Section 16305, submit complete equipment submittal as specified in the Submittal
1.10
1.11
WARRANTY
A.
1.12
SYSTEM START-UP
A.
1.13
1.14
1.15
PART 2
2.01
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.02
PRODUCTS

1.
2.
3.
General Electric.
4.
Siemens.
5.
Appleton.
6.
Crouse-Hinds.
May 2014
16411-3
9408A10
2.03
2.04
2.05
EQUIPMENT
A.
Switch mechanism:
1.
Quick-make, quick-break heavy-duty operating mechanisms:
a. Provisions for padlocking the switch in the Off position.
b. A minimum of 90-degree handle travel position between Off and On
positions:
1) Provide handle position indicators to identify the handle position.
c. Full cover interlock to prevent opening of the switch door in the On
position and to prevent closing the switch mechanism with the door open:
1) With an externally operated override.
B.
Switch interior:
1.
Switch blades visible when the switch is Off and the cover is open.
2.
Lugs:
a. Front accessible.
b. Removable.
c. UL listed for 60/75-degree Celsius copper conductors.
3.
Current carrying parts completely plated to resist corrosion.
4.
Removable arc suppressors to facilitate easy access to line side lugs.
5.
Furnish equipment ground kits for every switch.
C.
Ratings:
1.
UL horsepower rated for AC or DC with the rating not less than the load
served.
2.
Current:
a. 30 to 1,200 amperes.
3.
Voltage:
a. 250 volts AC, DC.
b. 600 volts (30 A to 200 A, 600 volts DC).
4.
Poles:
a. 2, 3, 4, and 6 poles.
5.
UL listed short circuit ratings:
a. 10,000 RMS symmetrical amperes when used with or protected by
Class H or K fuses (30-600 amperes).
b. 200,000 RMS symmetrical amperes when used with or protected by
Class R or J fuses (30-600 amperes employing appropriate fuse
rejection).
c. 200,000 RMS symmetrical amperes when used with or protected by
Class L fuses (800-1,200 amperes).
6.
Where not indicated on the Drawings, provide switches with the NEMA ratings
specified in Section 16411 for the installed location.
D.
Size, fusing and number poles as indicated on the Drawings or as required:

1.
Provide solid neutral where indicated on the Drawings.
May 2014
16411-4
9408A10
2.06
2.07
ACCESSORIES
A.
Disconnect switches to have provisions for a field installable B type electrical

interlock for position indication as indicated on the Drawings.
B.
Disconnect switches to have provisions for a field installed insulated groundable

neutral kit as indicated on the Drawings.
2.08
MIXES (NOT USED)
2.09
2.10
FINISHES (NOT USED)
2.11
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
3.02
3.03
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
site.
C.
General:
1.
Use Myers hubs or bolt-on hubs for all conduit penetrations on NEMA
Type 12, Type 4, and Type 4X enclosures.
2.
Provide all mounting brackets, stands, supports and hardware as required:
a. Match finish and materials for all brackets, stands, and hardware with the
switch installed.
b. Provide adequate supporting pillar(s) for disconnect switches in
accordance with the approved seismic calculations, and locate
aboveground or above decks, where there is no structural wall or surface
for box.
3.
When possible, mount switches rigidly to exposed building structure or
equipment structural members:
a. For NEMA Type 4 and Type 4X locations, maintain a minimum of 7/8 inch
air space between the enclosure and supporting surface.
b. When mounting on preformed channel, position channel vertically so that
water may freely run behind the enclosure.
4.
Provide a nameplate for each disconnect switch:
a. Provide per requirements specified in Section 16075.
b. Identify voltage, circuit, fuse size, and equipment served on the
nameplate.
May 2014
16411-5
9408A10
3.04
3.05
3.06
3.07

A.
3.08
3.09
CLEANING
A.
3.10
3.11
PROTECTION
A.
3.12

END OF SECTION
May 2014
16411-6
9408A10
SECTION 16412
LOW VOLTAGE MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
PART 1
1.01
1.02
1.03
1.04
GENERAL
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes:
1.
Low voltage molded case circuit breakers as indicated on the Drawings and as
specified.
B.
Related sections:
1.
2.
3.
c. Section 16305 - Electrical System Studies.
REFERENCES
A.
B.

1.
AB 3. - Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Their Application.
C.

1.
489 - Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches, and CircuitBreaker Enclosures.
2.
943 - Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters.
DEFINITIONS
A.
B.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
Molded case thermal magnetic or motor circuit protector type circuit breakers as
indicated on the Drawings and connected to form a completed system.
May 2014
16412-1
9408A10
1.05
1.06
1.07
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Product data:
1.
Catalog cut sheets.
2.
Manufacturers time-current curves for all molded case circuit breakers
furnished.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
Low voltage molded case circuit breakers shall be UL listed and labeled.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A.
1.08

A.
1.09
1.10
1.11
WARRANTY
A.
1.12
SYSTEM START-UP
A.
1.13
1.14
1.15
PART 2
2.01
PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS
A.

1.
2.
General Electric Company.
3.
4.
ABB.
May 2014
16412-2
9408A10
2.02
2.03
2.04
MANUFACTURED UNITS
A.
General:
1.
Conforming to UL 489.
2.
Operating mechanism:
a. Quick-make, quick-break, non-welding silver alloy contacts.
b. Common Trip, Open and Close for multi-pole breakers such that all poles
open and close simultaneously.
c. Mechanically trip free from the handle.
d. Trip indicating handle - automatically assumes a position midway between
the manual ON and OFF positions to clearly indicate the circuit breaker
has tripped.
e. Lockable in the "OFF" position.
3.
Arc extinction:
a. In arc chutes.
4.
Voltage and current ratings:
a. Minimum ratings as indicated on the Drawings.
b. Minimum frame size 100A.
5.
Interrupting ratings:
a. Minimum ratings as indicated on the Drawings.
b. Modify as required to meet requirements of the short circuit fault analysis as specified in Section 16305.
c. Not less than the rating of the assembly (panelboard, switchboard, motor
control center, etc.)
B.
Motor circuit protectors:

1.
Instantaneous only circuit breaker as part of a listed combination motor
controller.
2.
Each pole continuously adjustable in a linear scale with LO and HI settings
factory calibrated.
2.05
2.06
COMPONENTS
A.
Terminals:
1.
Line and load terminals suitable for the conductor type, size, and number of
conductors in accordance with UL 489.
B.
Case:
1.
Molded polyester glass reinforced.
2.
Ratings clearly marked.
C.
Trip units:
1.
Provide thermal magnetic or solid-state trip units as indicated on the Drawings.
2.
Thermal magnetic:
a. Instantaneous short circuit protection.
b. Inverse time delay overload.
c. Ambient or enclosure compensated by means of a bimetallic element.
May 2014
16412-3
9408A10
3.
D.
Solid state:
a. With the following settings as indicated on the Drawings.
1) Adjustable long time current setting.
2) Adjustable long time delay.
3) Adjustable short time pickup.
4) Adjustable short time delay.
5) Adjustable instantaneous pickup.
Molded case circuit breakers for use in panelboards:

1.
Bolt-on type.
a. Plug-in type breakers are not acceptable.
2.
Ground fault trip devices as indicated on the Drawings.
2.07
2.08
MIXES (NOT USED)
2.09
2.10
FINISHES (NOT USED)
2.11

A.
PART 3
Test breakers in accordance with:

1.
UL 489.
2.
Manufacturers standard testing procedures.
EXECUTION
3.01
3.02
3.03
INSTALLATION
A.
Install breakers to correspond to the accepted shop drawings.
3.04
3.05
3.06
3.07

A.
3.08
ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust trip settings in accordance with Protective Device Coordination Study as

accepted by the Engineer and in accordance with manufacturers
recommendations.
May 2014
16412-4
9408A10
B.
Adjust motor circuit protectors in accordance with NEC and the manufacturers
recommendation based on the nameplate values of the installed motor.
3.09
CLEANING (NOT USED)
3.10
3.11
PROTECTION
A.
3.12

END OF SECTION
May 2014
16412-5
9408A10
SECTION 16433
SWITCHGEAR REMOTE CONTROL PANEL (WITH AUTOMATIC CONTROLS)
PART 1
1.01
1.02
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes:
1.
Switchgear Remote Control Panel (VCP-2020).
2.
Medium voltage switchgear automatic transfer system.
B.
Related sections:
1.
2.
3.
c. Section 16341 - 5 Kilovolt Medium Voltage Metal Clad Switchgear.
d. Section 17050 - Common Work Results For Process Control And
Instrumentation Systems.
e. Section 17710 - Control Systems: Panels, Enclosures, and Panel
Components.
f. Section 17720 - Control System: Programmable Logic Controllers.
REFERENCES
A.
1.03
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.04
GENERAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
Provide an automatic transfer system as an integral part of the medium voltage

Switchgear/Switchgear Remote Control Panel (VCP-2020):
1.
The requirements of Section 16341 apply.
B.
Switchgear Control Panel (VCP-2020) Operation:

1.
Reference Drawings/specifications:
a. 03-E-03.
b. 03-E-04.
c. 01-N-01.
d. 06-N-05.
May 2014
16433-1
9408A10
2.
3.
e. 20-N-06.
f. 20-N-07.
g. 20-N-08.
h. 16232.
i.
16341.
Abstract:
a. The hardwired controls for the switchgear are on the Remote Breaker
Panel, VCP-2020 (panel provided by the switchgear manufacturer). This
control panel is located remotely from the switchgear and includes
hardwired switches and hardwired pilot lights for remote
monitoring/control of the switchgear and the generator.
b. VCP-2020 utilizes breaker status, relay, and switch inputs to control the
switchgear sequence of operation and generator start/stop. VCP-2020
outputs energize circuit breaker close and trip circuits and initiates the
generator starting command.
c. The transfer scheme controls the normal source breaker (52-1) and the
standby source breaker (52-1G) to allow power transfer from the
generator when utility power is lost or if engine exercise is desired. This
transfer is performed upon operator initiation either at VCP-2020 or at
plant SCADA. The steps in the transfer process are controlled
automatically by VCP-2020, but the system will not automatically transfer
to generator upon power loss.
d. The system functions in an opened transition mode for all operations.
e. The Switchgear supplier shall coordinate with the Generator Supplier and
the Instrumentation and Controls Subcontractor to provide a complete and
operating system.
f. VCP-2020 shall provide hardwired I/O to PCM-2031 as indicated on the
Drawings. These signals shall either be duplicated from their source using
a control relay in VCP-2020, or shall be sourced as DI/DO points from the
VCP-2020 controller.
Hardwired control:
a. Refer to P&ID Drawings/Schematics for specific I/O required from the
switchgear to Remote Breaker Panel.
b. With the SWGR/GEN TRANSFER LOCAL/REMOTE Switch (located in
the Remote Breaker Panel) in the LOCAL position, all of the switchgear
breakers are manually controlled via the hardwired switches.
c. With the SWGR/GEN TRANSFER LOCAL/REMOTE Switch in the
REMOTE position:
1) All of the Switchgear Breakers are controlled by the VCP-2020
controller.
d. With the Generator RUN/OFF/AUTO Switch (located locally at the
generator skid control panel) is in the RUN or OFF position, the generator
is controlled manually as described in Section 16232.
e. With the Generator RUN/OFF/AUTO Switch (located locally at the
generator skid control panel) is in the AUTO position, the generator is
controlled via the Remote Breaker Panel controls as follows:
1) With the SWGR/GEN TRANSFER LOCAL/REMOTE Switch
(located in the Remote Breaker Panel) in the LOCAL Position:
a) The generator is started/stopped via the start/stop pushbuttons
(located in the Remote Breaker Panel).
May 2014
16433-2
9408A10
2)
4.
5.
6.
With the SWGR/GEN TRANSFER LOCAL/REMOTE Switch

(located in the Remote Breaker Panel) in the REMOTE Position, the
generator is started/stopped via the controller.
Hardwired interlocks:
a. The Switchgear manufacturer shall provide fail-safe electrical interlocks
such that no source breakers can be paralleled in any mode of operation:
1) Refer to Allowable Open/Close Modes Table on 03-E-03.
2) Refer to requirements in Section 16341.
3) Provide a contact from the main breaker that trips the generator
breaker when the main breaker is closed.
4) Provide a contact from the generator breaker that trips the main
breaker when the generator breaker is closed.
5) Interlocks shall not prevent both breakers from being open at the
same time.
6) If source breakers are racked to the test position, then the electrical
interlocking may be bypassed on that breaker, allowing the breaker
open/close operation to be tested, and allowing the other breaker(s)
to be closed as necessary even though the tested breaker is closed.
HMI control and monitoring:
a. Provide monitoring of all switchgear breakers and relays as indicated on
the Drawings:
1) Provide as a minimum the points indicated on the P&ID Drawings.
b. Provide adjustable timer setpoints for all timers as specified in this
Section:
1) Display time remaining for each timer on HMI timer screen.
c. Refer to Section 17100 for power monitoring points required.
d. General failure alarm:
1) Alarms on any abnormal condition including, but not limited to: fault
conditions, VCP-2020 power supply failure, etc.
e. System operational status:
1) Signals when everything is normal and within normal operating
parameters.
2) System on Source:
a) Defined as when a source breaker (52-1A, 52-1GA, 52-1GB, 521B) is closed and the associated source is available.
VCP-2020 controller control:
a. With the SWGR/GEN TRANSFER LOCAL/REMOTE Switch in the
REMOTE position:
1) The operator may initiate breaker open/close operations for the
feeder breakers, but HAND controls for the source breakers (52-1
and 52-1G) are performed via the controller, with no direct
open/close PCIS HAND controls available.
b. With the Generator RUN/OFF/AUTO Switch (located locally at the
generator skid control panel) is in the AUTO position, the generator is
controlled via the Remote Breaker Panel controls as follows:
1) With the SWGR/GEN TRANSFER LOCAL/REMOTE Switch
(located in the Remote Breaker Panel) in the REMOTE Position, the
generator is started/stopped via the VCP-2020 controller, with no
direct start/stop PCIS HAND controls available.
c. When the utility source 52-1 voltage fails (27/59) or if a single-phase
condition occurs (47N), the control system shall:
1) Initiate a UTILITY SOURCE FAILURE timer.
May 2014
16433-3
9408A10
2)
d.
Upon completion of the UTILITY SOURCE FAILURE timer:

a) Initiate a UTILITY SOURCE FAIL Alarm.
b) Prompt the Operator to Transfer to Generator.
(1) Do not perform transfer without operator selection.
3) Upon operator selection of Transfer to Generator:
a) Open breaker 52-1.
b) Signal the engine generator to start and run by latching closed a
dry contact to the generator control panel.
c) Initiate an OPEN TRANSITION DELAY timer.
4) When the generator has reached normal operating voltage
(27/59/47N) and frequency (81O/U) for a GENERATOR CRANK
FAIL DELAY time and upon completion of the OPEN TRANSITION
DELAY timer, the control system shall:
a) Verify the normal source breaker (52-1) is opened.
b) Close the standby source breaker (52-1G).
5) When the control system detects the return of utility source voltage
(27/59/47N) for an adjustable period of time, the control system shall:
a) Initiate a UTILITY RESTORE DELAY timer.
b) Upon completion of the UTILITY RESTORE DELAY timer:
(1) Alert the operator that utility source power has returned to
normal.
6) Upon operator selection of Transfer to Utility Power:
a) Open the standby source breaker (52-1G).
b) Initiate an OPEN TRANSITION DELAY timer.
c) Upon completion of the OPEN TRANSITION DELAY timer,
close the normal source breaker (52-1).
d) After the control system has opened the standby source
breaker:
(1) Initiate a COOLDOWN timer.
(2) Upon completion of the COOLDOWN timer, unlatch the run
contact to the engine generator control panel.
When the user desires to exercise the generator:
1) Upon operator selection of Transfer to Generator (Exercise):
a) Signal the engine generator to start and run by latching closed a
dry contact to the generator control panel.
2) When the generator has reached normal operating voltage
(27/59/47N) and frequency (81O/U) for a GENERATOR CRANK
FAIL DELAY time the control system shall:
a) Open breaker 52-1.
b) Initiate an OPEN TRANSITION DELAY timer.
3) Upon completion of the OPEN TRANSITION DELAY timer,
a) Verify the normal source breaker (52-1) is opened.
b) Close the standby source breaker (52-1G).
4) Upon operator selection of Transfer to Utility Power:
a) Verify utility source voltage (27/59/47N) has been available for
an adjustable period of time.
(1) If utility source voltage is not available, alert operator before
performing any action.
(2) If the operator still wants to transfer to utility power, allow
the operation.
b) Open the standby source breaker (52-1G).
c) Initiate an OPEN TRANSITION DELAY timer.
May 2014
16433-4
9408A10
5)
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
1.05
Upon completion of the OPEN TRANSITION DELAY timer, close the

normal source breaker (52-1).
6) After the control system has opened the standby source breaker:
a) Initiate a COOLDOWN timer.
b) Upon completion of the COOLDOWN timer, unlatch the run
contact to the engine generator control panel.
Software interlocks:
a. Prohibit transferring if one of the source breakers (52-1 or 52-1G) has
tripped due to any fault condition (50/51/50G/51G/87).
b. If any of these conditions has occurred:
1) The fault condition must be removed.
2) The SWGR/GEN TRANSFER LOCAL/REMOTE Switch must be
cycled to LOCAL mode and back to REMOTE mode in order to
reset the SCADA transfer controls.
c. Perform no action (breaker open/close or generator start/stop) if DC
power is lost. Alarm on loss of DC signal.
SCADA control and monitoring:
a. SCADA computer hardware, shall be provided by the Instrumentation and
Controls Subcontractor; coordinate to provide a complete and operable
system.
Indicators and alarms:
a. As indicated on P&IDs.
Failure modes:
a. Refer to Software Interlocks.
Engine Generator Coordination:
a. Coordinate work as specified in Section 16232.
b. Coordinate COOLDOWN timer to meet intended function of these
specifications.
c. Depending on engine operating parameters, additional programming may
be required to program a fully functional automatic transfer system;
coordinate this work with the Engine Generator provider.
Switchgear Coordination:
b. Depending on switchgear operating procedures, additional programming,
control relays, I/O monitoring points may be required to program a fully
functional automatic transfer system; coordinate this work with the
switchgear provider.
Instrumentation and Controls Subcontractor coordination:
b. Depending on switchgear operating procedures and engine operating
procedures, additional programming and I/O may be required to provide a
fully functional automatic transfer system; coordinate this work with the
Instrumentation and Controls Subcontractor.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Product data:
1.
Include the following in the product data submittal for the low voltage
switchgear:
a. Description of the automatic transfer system.
May 2014
16433-5
9408A10
b.
2.
Catalog data for all automatic transfer system components.

1) Including product data requirements in Section 17710.
c. Product data describing the controller.
d. Product data describing the HMI screen.
e. Complete power requirements for the control and relaying system to be
used in sizing the switchgear battery system.
Submit operator interface displays in full color as they will appear on the
display screen:
a. Uniquely title each display.
b. Provide alarm and graphic displays.
c. At a minimum, the submittal shall include the following screens:
1) Provide a 1-line screen of all controllable breakers, their states, and a
color-coded representation of which bus(es) are energized.
2) Provide a timers screen showing selected value, default, and
allowable range for each adjustable timer:
a) Match timer designations to those specified in the automatic
transfer system operation description.
3) Provide an input/output screen showing all discrete and analog
hardwired input/output points, with each points current state:
a) Indicate current state in color-coded form:
(1) Discrete points: Active/not active.
(2) Analog point: In engineering units.
C.
Shop drawings:
1.
Include the following in the shop drawing submittal for the low voltage
switchgear:
a. Complete interface and connection diagrams between the medium
voltage switchgear and Switchgear Remote Control Panel VCP-2020.
b. Schematic and interconnection diagrams for the controller.
c. Refer to submittal requirements in Section 17710.
D.
1.
The written instructions must detail the complete installation of the switchgear
including rigging, moving, and setting into place.
2.
Provide anchorage instructions and requirements for the switchgear based on
the seismic requirements at the project site as indicated in Section 16433:
a. Stamped by a professional engineer registered in the State where the
E.

1.
Include the following in the operation manuals submittal for the low voltage
automatic transfer switchgear:
a. Description of the sequence of operation that outlines the steps the
controls follow during normal power failure and normal power return
conditions.
b. Detail the operational function of all controls and internal controller
programming.
c. Report listing the installed setting of all adjustable parameters for
automatic transfer system.
d. Provide an HMI Screen that includes the complete Sequence of Operation
within the HMI.
May 2014
16433-6
9408A10
1.06
1.07
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
The automatic transfer system and all components shall be UL listed and labeled.

A.
1.08

A.
1.09
SEQUENCING
A.
1.10
1.11
WARRANTY
A.
1.12
SYSTEM START-UP
A.
1.13
1.14
1.15
PART 2
2.01
PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Section.
2.02
2.03
2.04
2.05
EQUIPMENT
A.
B.
Automatic switchgear transfer system configuration:
May 2014
16433-7
9408A10
1.
2.
3.
2.06
Utilizes circuit breakers as the transfer mechanisms.

Provide equipment for operation, including but not limited to:
a. Interface circuits.
b. Relays.
c. Interlocks.
d. Control fuses.
e. Fuse blocks.
Provide DC power for pilot lights, protective relays, automatic transfer system
control power, and shunt trip circuits from the switchgear battery system
panelboard circuits as indicated on the Drawings.
COMPONENTS
A.
Control system:
1.
Microprocessor based controller:
a. Either a board level microprocessor controller that has been specifically
designed for the control of automatic transfer systems, or a programmable
logic controller programmed for the control of automatic transfer systems.
b. Non-volatile logic memory:
1) Controller power interruption shall not result in memory loss or
improper operation, or require any manual operations to reprogram
or restart the controller.
c. Powered from the switchgear battery system panelboard:
1) A standby UPS system will not be allowed as a power source for the
controller.
d. Provide LED indicators on all inputs and outputs.
e. Provide all hardwired I/O required for the system to function as described
previously in this Section. Coordinate with generator supplier and
Instrumentation and Controls Subcontractor.
f. Provide manufacturer standard controller for this application.
B.
Pilot lights:
1.
Panel mounted as indicated on the Drawings.
2.
C.
Selector switches:
1.
D.
Control relays:
1.
As required and as specified in Section 17710.
E.
Enclosure:
1.
Gasketed NEMA 1 enclosure, in accordance with Section 17710.
F.
HMI:
1.
Manufacturer standard manufacturer and size.
G.
General programming requirements:

1.
Use variable names or aliases derived from tag and loop identification on the
P&IDs for all process values.
2.
Controller status:
a. Furnish all information that depicts the status of all enclosures containing
PLC or I/O in the control system, including but not limited to the following:
May 2014
16433-8
9408A10
3.
1) PLC cabinet over-temperatures from high temperature switch.

2) Intrusion status on all enclosures equipped with intrusion switches.
3) DC power supply failure.
System communication or general failure status:
a. Generate a communications alarm if any communication fault or general
failure alarm is detected.
2.07
2.08
MIXES (NOT USED)
2.09
2.10
FINISHES (NOT USED)
2.11

A.
B.
Along with all internal switchgear components specified in Section 16341, the
factory acceptance test shall include a fully-functional test of the Switchgear
Remote Control Panel VCP-2020:
1.
Provide all temporary wires, connections, etc. as needed to perform the
testing.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
3.02
3.03
INSTALLATION
A.
3.04
3.05
3.06
3.07

A.
3.08
ADJUSTING
A.
3.09
CLEANING
A.
May 2014
16433-9
9408A10
3.10

A.
3.11
PROTECTION
A.
3.12

END OF SECTION
May 2014
16433-10
9408A10
SECTION 16444
LOW VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS
PART 1
1.01
1.02
1.03
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes:
1.
Low voltage motor control centers.
B.
Related sections:
1.
2.
3.
d. Section 16123 - 600-Volt or Less Wires and Cables.
e. Section 16150 - Low Voltage Wire Connections.
g. Section 16412 - Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers.
h. Section 16445 - Panelboards.
REFERENCES
A.
B.
National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA):

1.
ICS 18-2001 - Motor Control Centers.
C.

1.
845 - Motor Control Centers.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.04
GENERAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
Modifications to existing Powell MCC:

1.
Demolish existing valve breakers and starters as indicated on the Drawings.
2.
Demolish existing panel breakers as indicated on the Drawings.
3.
Furnish and install new valve feeder breakers as indicated on the Drawings.
May 2014
16444-1
9408A10
4.
5.
1.05
Furnish and install new breakers in existing lighting panel as indicated on the
Drawings.
Furnish and install new equipment nameplates for MCC and all MCC cubicles
to match equipment numbers indicated on the Drawings.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Product data:
1.
Manufacturer of motor control center parts.
2.
Nameplate schedule.
3.
Bill of material.
4.
Ratings:
a. Voltage.
b. Phase.
c. Short circuit withstand rating.
d. Protective device interrupting rating.
5.
Catalog cut sheets:
a. Submit complete manufacturers catalog information:
1) Clearly indicate the features of the equipment including any options
necessary to meet the required functionality.
6.
Furnish circuit breaker submittals as specified in Section 16412.
C.
Shop drawings:
1.
Layout drawings:
a. Provide fully dimensioned and to scale layout drawings which include:
1) Dimensions:
a) Overall length.
b) Overall width.
c) Overall height.
d) Overall weight and weight of individual shipping splits.
2.
Interfaces to other equipment.
3.
Complete component and unit layout drawings.
4.
Indicate lug sizes, type, and manufacturer based on the cable size specified in
the Contract Documents and as indicated on the Drawings.
5.
Elementary schematics:
a. Provide one custom schematic diagram for each compartment:
1) Include all remote devices.
2) Show wire numbers on the schematics:
a) Provide wire numbering as specified in Section 16075.
6.
External connection diagram showing the wiring to the external controls and
devices associated with the motor control center.
7.
One-line diagrams:
a. Provide complete one-line diagrams for each motor control center,
including but not limited to: protective devices and other equipment.
b. Indicate electrical ratings of the equipment shown on the one-line
diagrams.
D.
1.
setting into place.
May 2014
16444-2
9408A10
1.06
E.

1.
Provide complete operating and maintenance instructions presenting full
details for care and maintenance of all types of equipment furnished and/or
installed under this Section. Include the following:
a. Electrical ratings:
1) Phase.
2) Wire.
3) Voltage.
4) Ampacity.
5) Bus bracing and protective device interrupting ratings.
b. Manufacturers operating and maintenance instructions for the motor
control center and all component parts, including:
1) Protective devices including, but not limited to, fuses, circuit breakers
and protective relays.
c. Complete renewal parts list.
F.
Record Documents:
1.
Submit MCC elevation and one-line showing complete final condition of MCC.
a. Record drawings to show all existing buckets and modified buckets in
their final state.
b. Existing conditions indicated on the Drawings are to be field verified
during construction.
2.
Elementary schematics:
a. Furnish as-built elementary schematics indicating final:
1) Wire numbers.
2) Interfaces with other equipment.
b. Provide one custom schematic diagram for each compartment:
1) Include all remote devices.
2) Show wire numbers on the schematics.
c. Layout drawings: Provide complete dimensioned component and unit
layout drawings.
3.
The Record Documents shall reflect all modifications made during the
submittal review process and during construction.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.07

A.
1.08

A.
1.09
SEQUENCING
A.
May 2014
16444-3
9408A10
1.10
B.

Section 16305, submit complete equipment submittal as specified in the Submittals
C.
Ship equipment to the Project Site after successful completion of factory

acceptance test.
D.
E.
Submit record documents and Operation and Maintenance documents.
F.
Submit manufacturers certification that the equipment has been properly installed
G.
Formally energize, start-up and commission equipment.
SCHEDULING
A.
1.11
WARRANTY
A.
1.12
SYSTEM START-UP
A.
1.13
OWNERS INSTRUCTION (NOT USED)
1.14
1.15
PART 2
2.01
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.02
PRODUCTS
Provide breakers for existing Powell MCC. MCC S.O.# 62356.
EXISTING PRODUCTS
A.
Existing motor control centers:

1.
Provide complete motor control center vertical sections or individual motor
control center units to be added to existing motor control centers as specified
in this Section and as indicated on the Drawings.
2.
Provide additions that are of the same manufacturer, type, rating, and color as
the existing motor control centers:
a. Provide all hardware necessary to connect the busses of the new and
existing motor control centers, including ground busses.
3.
Provide enclosures to match the NEMA ratings and colors of the existing
motor control centers.
May 2014
16444-4
9408A10
2.03
2.04
2.05
EQUIPMENT
2.06
A.
General:
1.
Provide wire markers at each end of every wire as specified in Section 16075.
2.
Provide devices or accessories not specified in this Section but necessary for
the proper installation and operation of the equipment.
3.
Match construction of existing MCC as closely as possible to provide a uniform
MCC after modifications.
B.
Design and construct motor control center to operate at the voltage level and
configuration indicated on the Drawings.
C.
Units:
1.
Handle:
a. Provide a flange mounted handle mechanism to operate each new
disconnect switch or circuit breaker.
b. Provide kirk-key interlocks where indicated on the Drawings:
1) Match key to corresponding kirk-key located in new panelboard.
c. Door mounted operators or operator handles are not acceptable.
d. Engaged with the disconnect device at all times as an integral part of the
unit independent of the door position.
e. Lockable in the OFF position with up to 3 padlocks.
f. Mechanically interlocked so that the door cannot be opened with the
handle in the ON position.
1) Provide a means for qualified personnel to defeat this interlock.
g. Interlocked so the unit cannot be inserted or withdrawn with the handle in
the ON position.
h. Lockable in the ON position:
1) This shall not prevent the circuit breaker from operating and opening
the contacts in the event of a fault condition.
i.
Color-coded to indicate position.
j.
Located so the center of the grip when it is in its highest position is not
more than 6 feet 7 inches above the finished floor, including the height of
any housekeeping pad or mounting channels.
2.
Where indicated on the Drawings, provide units for spaces and future
equipment:
a. Equip these units to accept a future plug-in unit without modification to the
vertical sections.
COMPONENTS
A.
Provide components contained within the motor control center as specified in:
1.
Section 16075.
2.
Section 16123.
3.
Section 16150.
4.
Section 16412.
May 2014
16444-5
9408A10
2.07
ACCESSORIES
A.
Wiring:
B.
Lugs and terminals:

1.
Compression type, requiring a hydraulic press and die for installation.
C.
Nameplates:
1.
Provide nameplates for all MCC buckets, including existing buckets to remain
in place.
2.
Provide nameplates as specified in Section 16075:
a. Identifying the motor control center designation as indicated on the
Drawings.
3.
Furnish individual nameplates for each unit indicated on the Drawings:
a. 1 nameplate to identify the unit designation.
b. 1 nameplate to identify the load served.
c. Furnish space units with blank nameplates.
2.08
MIXES (NOT USED)
2.09
2.10
FINISHES
A.
2.11
Match color of existing MCC as closely as possible.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
3.02
3.03
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
site.
C.
General:
1.
Furnish all cables, conduit, lugs, bolts, expansion anchors, sealants, and other
accessories necessary to completely install the motor control center for the
line, load, and control connections.
2.
Assemble and install the motor control center in the locations and with the
layouts as indicated on the Drawings.
3.
Perform work in accordance with manufacturers instruction and shop
drawings.
4.
Furnish all components, and equipment necessary to complete the installation.
May 2014
16444-6
9408A10
5.
D.
Replace hardware, lost or damaged during installation or handling, in order to

Bundle circuits together and terminate in each unit:

1.
Tie with nylon wire ties as specified in Section 16123.
2.
Label all wires at each end with wire markers as specified in Section 16075 as
shown on the approved elementary schematics.
3.04
3.05
3.06
3.07
3.08
A.
B.
Provide the services of a manufacturers representative to:

1.
Inspect, verify, and certify that the motor control center installation meets the
ADJUSTING
A.
3.09
CLEANING
A.
3.10
PROTECTION
A.
3.12

A.
3.11


END OF SECTION
May 2014
16444-7
9408A10
SECTION 16445
PANELBOARDS
PART 1
1.01
1.02
1.03
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes:
1.
Panelboards serving facility feeder circuits, branch circuits or other utilization
equipment at the voltage levels and configurations indicated on the Drawings.
B.
Related sections:
1.
2.
3.
d. Section 16285 - Surge Protective Devices.
e. Section 16412 - Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers.
REFERENCES
A.
B.
Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. (UL):

1.
67 - Standard for Panelboards.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.04
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
1.05
GENERAL
Circuit breaker panelboards as indicated in the panelboard schedules, one-lines,

and where indicated on the Drawings:
1.
Service voltage and configuration as indicated on the panel schedules.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Product data:
1.
Manufacturer of panelboard.
May 2014
16445-1
9408A10
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Bill of material.
Assembly ratings including:
a. Voltage.
b. Phase.
c. Continuous current.
d. Short circuit interrupting rating.
NEMA enclosure type.
Cable terminal sizes based upon actual feeder and sub-feeder conductors
used.
Furnish circuit breaker submittals as specified in Section 16412.
data.
C.
Shop drawings:
1.
Drawings to contain:
a. Overall panelboard dimensions, interior panel dimensions, and wiring
gutter dimensions:
1) Height.
2) Length.
3) Width.
b. Weight.
c. Anchoring locations.
d. Breaker layout drawing with dimensions:
1) Location of the main, branches, solid neutral, and ground.
e. Conduit entry/exit locations.
1) Identify all conduit entry/exit locations and restrictions.
f. Individual panel schedules identifying breaker locations, ratings, and
nameplate designations within the panelboard, for every panelboard.
D.
1.
setting into place.
2.
or B:
3.
D, E, or F:
E.
Operations and maintenance manual:

1.
Provide a complete manual for the operation and maintenance of the
panelboard, circuit breakers, devices, and accessories:
a. Including but not limited to:
May 2014
16445-2
9408A10
1)
2)
3)
F.
1.06
1.07
Calculations:
1.
panelboard to prove the panelboard is suitable for the seismic requirements at
the Project Site.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
Panelboards shall be UL listed and labeled.

A.
1.08
Instruction narratives and bulletins.

Renewal parts lists.
Time-current curves for all devices.

A.
1.09
1.10
1.11
WARRANTY
A.
1.12
SYSTEM START-UP
A.
1.13
1.14
1.15
PART 2
2.01
PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS
A.

1.
2.
General Electric Company.
3.
B.
Circuit breakers:
1.
Same manufacturer as the panelboard.
May 2014
16445-3
9408A10
2.02
2.03
2.04
2.05
EQUIPMENT
2.06
A.
Provide panelboards with:

1.
Molded-case circuit breakers with trip ratings as shown on the panel
schedules.
2.
Spares and spaces for future circuit breakers in panels as shown on the panel
schedules.
B.
Short circuit rating:

1.
Provide panelboards with short-circuit ratings as indicated on the Drawings:
2.
Testing method in accordance with UL 67.
3.
Mark each panelboard with its maximum short circuit rating at the supply
voltage.
4.
Panelboards shall be fully rated.
COMPONENTS
A.
Enclosure:
1.
NEMA enclosure type as indicated on the Drawings.

a. Where not indicated on the Drawings, as specified in Section 16445 for
the installed location.
2.
Minimum width: 20 inches.
3.
Gutter space in accordance with the NEC:
a. Minimum of 4 inches of gutter space.
4.
Dead-front, no live parts when the panelboard is in service.
5.
Enclose entire panelboard bus assembly in a corrosion resistant galvanized
steel cabinet.
6.
4-piece front to provide ease of wiring access.
7.
Lockable, hinged door over the protective devices with a flush, cylinder
tumbler-type lock with catch and door pull.
a. Minimum 2 keys per panelboard.
b. Key all panelboard locks alike.
8.
Circuit directory frame and card on the inside of the door.
9.
Interior design such that replacement of circuit breakers does not require
disturbing adjacent units or removal of the main bus connectors.
10. Provide NEMA Type 4X enclosures with a NEMA Type 4X stainless steel outer
enclosure (with a hinged door) and a NEMA Type 1 interior panelboard.
B.
Bus:
1.
General:
a. Tin-plated copper
2.
Phase bus:
a. Full size and height without reduction.
b. Sized in accordance with UL standards to limit temperature rise on any
current carrying part to a maximum of 50 degrees Celsius:
1) Limit current density to less than 1,000 amps per square inch.
May 2014
16445-4
9408A10
c.
3.
4.
5.
2.07
Insulate all current carrying parts from ground and phase-to-phase with a
high dielectric strength insulator.
Ground bus:
a. Copper, solidly bonded.
Neutral bus:
a. Provide where indicated on the Drawings.
b. 200 percent rated.
c. Provide lugs for each outgoing feeder requiring a neutral connection.
Provide insulation barriers over the vertical bus behind the dead front shield to
provide increased safety during field service.
C.
Lugs:
1.
UL listed for copper and aluminum wire:
a. Provide lugs rated for 75-degree Celsius terminations.
b. Provide bolted or compression main lug terminations as required for the
incoming cable size.
D.
Circuit breakers: As specified in Section 16412 and as indicated on the Drawings:

1.
Provide all circuit breakers with bolt-on connections:
a. Plug-in circuit breakers are not allowed.
ACCESSORIES
A.
Surge protective devices:

1.
Furnish panelboards with surge protective devices as indicated on the
Drawings.
2.
B.
Nameplates:
1.
2.
Install on outside of door.
3.
Indicating:
a. Panel designation.
b. Voltage.
c. Number of phases and configuration.
C.
Circuit identification labels:

1.
Provide index cards behind heavy clear plastic in cardholders on the inside of
the doors.
2.
Type all information on the cards using designations in the panel schedules.
3.
Laminated on both sides.
D.
Pad locking mechanism:

1.
Provide a pad locking attachment to allow circuit breakers to be locked in the
off position.
2.
At a minimum, provide 1 mechanism per panelboard:
a. Provide multiple mechanisms if required to accommodate all circuit
breaker frame sizes in the panelboard.
May 2014
16445-5
9408A10
2.08
MIXES (NOT USED)
2.09
2.10
FINISHES
2.11
A.
Finish stand-alone panelboards with a primer, rust-resistant phosphate undercoat,

and 2 coats of oven-baked enamel with manufacturers standard gray.
B.
Finish panelboards mounted in motor control centers to match the motor control
center finish and color.

A.
PART 3
Perform standard factory tests on the panelboards:

1.
Test in accordance with the latest version of NEMA and UL standards.
EXECUTION
3.01
3.02
3.03
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
site.
C.
General:
1.
Surface, mounted as indicated on the Drawings.
2.
Mount rigidly to structural members with exposed surfaces plumb and level to
within 1/32 inch.
3.
Perform work in accordance with the manufacturers instructions and shop
drawings.
4.
Provide all brackets, hangers, supports, and hardware for mounting as
required.
5.
In all NEMA Type 4 and NEMA Type 4X locations, mount panelboards on
7/8-inch deep stainless steel preformed channel, with channel running
vertically from top to bottom of panelboard:
a. Use only stainless steel mounting hardware.
6.
Mount panelboard so that top operating handle is not more than 6 feet7 inches above the operating floor.
7.
Provide kirk-key interlocks where indicated on the Drawings:
a. Match key to corresponding kirk-key located in existing motor control
center.
May 2014
16445-6
9408A10
3.04
3.05
3.06
3.07

A.
3.08
3.09
CLEANING
A.
3.10
3.11
PROTECTION
A.
3.12
SCHEDULES
A.
Circuiting within the panelboard shall match the panel schedules as indicated on the
Drawings.
B.
Provide typewritten schedule in each panelboard.

END OF SECTION
May 2014
16445-7
9408A10
SECTION 16494
LOW VOLTAGE FUSES
PART 1
1.01
1.02
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes:
1.
Fuses: 600 volt class and lower.
B.
Related sections:
1.
2.
3.
REFERENCES
A.
1.03
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
1.05
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.04
GENERAL
Fuses for overcurrent protection and/or current limiting applications as indicated on

the Drawings.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Product data:
1.
Catalog cut sheets.
2.
Complete fuse schedule.
3.
Manufacturer original 11-inch by 17-inch, time current curves for all fuses
furnished.
C.
Shop drawings:
1.
Include drawings of spare fuse cabinets.
May 2014
16494-1
9408A10
1.06
1.07
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
All low voltage fuses shall be UL listed and labeled.

A.
1.08

A.
1.09
1.10
1.11
WARRANTY
A.
1.12
SYSTEM START-UP
A.
1.13
1.14
1.15
MAINTENANCE
A.
PART 2
2.01
Spare parts:
1.
Provide 6 spare fuses for each size and type used or supplied under any
Section of the Contract Documents.
2.
Provide spare fuse cabinet(s):
a. Metal cabinet with hinged door and shelves or fuse holders.
b. Gray enamel finish.
c. Mount near equipment and label "Spare Fuses" on face of cabinet.
d. Suitable pocket inside door of each cabinet with typewritten spare fuse
inventory in clear plastic protective insert.
e. Provide as many cabinets as required to hold entire spare fuse inventory.
PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS
A.

1.
Ferraz Shawmut.
2.
Littelfuse.
3.
Bussmann.
May 2014
16494-2
9408A10
2.02
2.03
2.04
MANUFACTURED UNITS
A.
General:
1.
Provide durable, readily visible label inside each fuse enclosure, clearly
indicating the correct type, size, and ratings of replacement fuse:
a. Label shall not cover or interfere with equipment manufacturer's
instructions.
2.
Affix a label indicating recommended torque for fuse mounting bolts or studs to
the inside of fuse access doors.
3.
To ensure selective coordination of protective devices:
a. Provide fuses for new facilities by the same manufacturer.
b. Provide fuses for renovations of the same manufacturer as existing fuses.
4.
Provide fuses rated for the voltage and available short circuit current at which
they are applied.
B.
Fuses for services, switchboard mains, feeders, and branch circuits:

1.
600 amperes and less:
a. Provide UL listed RK1 dual-element, time-delay fuses with ampere ratings
as indicated on the Drawings except as may be modified by the Contract
Documents.
C.
Fusing of control circuits:

1.
Provide:
a. Time-delay Class CC fuses installed in UL listed Class CC fuse blocks as
specified in the Contract Documents.
2.
Provide minimum protection for control circuits in accordance with the latest
revision of UL Standard 508 for Industrial Control.
3.
Fuse both the primary and secondary circuit of control power transformers:
a. Fuse ratings shall be in accordance with NEC requirements.
2.05
2.06
2.07
2.08
MIXES (NOT USED)
2.09
2.10
FINISHES (NOT USED)
2.11
PART 3
3.01
EXECUTION
May 2014
16494-3
9408A10
3.02
3.03
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
General:
1.
Install fuses properly aligned, electrically and mechanically secure.
2.
Evenly torque mounting bolts and nuts to ASTM recommendations for type
and diameter of mounting bolts or studs provided.
3.
Paralleling of fuses is not permitted.
4.
Install fuses so that the fuse nameplate and rating are easily readable in the
equipment.
C.
Replace fuses, on all phases, for any fuses that opened during start-up and testing.
D.
After completion of testing, deliver spare fuses in quantities specified:

1.
Fuses shall be new, in manufacturer's original packaging, and stored in a
clean, dry location.
E.
Install spare fuse cabinets where instructed by the Owner.
3.04
3.05
3.06
3.07

A.
3.08
3.09
CLEANING
A.
3.10
3.11
PROTECTION
A.
3.12

END OF SECTION
May 2014
16494-4
9408A10
SECTION 16500
LIGHTING
PART 1
1.01
1.02
1.03
GENERAL
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes:
1.
Luminaires, drivers, poles, and accessories.
B.
Related sections:
1.
2.
3.
The following Sections are related to the Work described in this Section. This
list of Related Sections is provided for convenience only and is not intended to
REFERENCES
A.
B.
IEEE:
1.
IEEE C62.41 IEEE Recommended Practice for Surge Voltages in LowVoltage AC Power Circuits.
C.
Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (IESNA):

1.
LM-79 IES Approved Method for the Electrical and Photometric
Measurements of Solid-State Lighting Products.
2.
LM-80 IES Approved Method: Measuring Lumen Maintenance of LED Light
Sources
3.
TM-21 Projecting Long Term Lumen Maintenance of LED Light Sources.
D.

1.
C82.11 - High Frequency Fluorescent Lamp Ballast.
E.

1.
1029 - High -Intensity Discharge Lamp Ballast.
DEFINITIONS
A.
B.
May 2014
16500-1
9408A10
1.
CCT: Correlated color temperature - Scientific scale to describe how warm or

how cool the light source is, measured in Kelvin.
2.
Crest factor - ratio of peak lamp current to RMS or average lamp operating
current.
3.
Efficacy - Lumen output per unit of power supplied to ballast (lumens per watt).
4.
EMI: Electromagnetic Interference - Electrical interference (noise) generated
by electrical and electronic devices.
5.
Diver:- Device that manages power and controls the current flow for an LED
lighting product.
6.
FC: Foot Candles - Measure of light level on a surface being illuminated.
7.
LED light source- LED package(s), module(s), and arrays(s)
8.
Lumen ambient temperature multiplier - LED light source relative lumen output
when compared to a standard ambient temperature.
9.
Lumen maintenance factor - How well a LED light source is able to retain its
intensity when compared to new
10. Luminaire - Lighting unit.
11. THD: Total harmonic distortion - The combined effect of harmonic Distortion
on the AC waveform produced by a ballast or other device.
1.04
1.05
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
Provide luminaires, and accessories for all lighting systems, complete and operable,
in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.
B.
Individual luminaire types are indicated on the Drawings and on the Luminaire
Schedule.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Product data:
1.
Luminaires:
a. Catalog literature for each luminaire specified, cross-referenced to the
luminaire type on the Luminaire Schedule in the Drawings.
b. Provide for each luminaire type:
1) Materials.
2) Type of diffuser.
3) Hardware.
4) Gasketing.
5) Reflector.
6) Chassis.
7) Finish and color.
8) LEDs:
a) Driver current.
b) Efficacy.
c) Initial Lumen Output at 40 degrees C ambient.
d) Correlated color temperature.
e) Lumen ambient temperature multiplier.
f) Lumen maintenance factors.
g) Color temperature.
h) LED Driver: Provide for each driver type:
May 2014
16500-2
9408A10
2.
(1) Type of driver.

(2) Output wattage.
(3) Input voltage.
(4) Maximum input power.
(5) Operating line current.
(6) Power factor.
(7) Operating temperature range.
9) Picture of luminaire.
10) Dimensioned drawings:
a) Effective projected area rating for pole mounted luminaires.
11) Weight.
12) Photometric data:
a) Coefficient of utilization tables based on the IES zonal cavity
system by an approved testing laboratory.
b) Luminaire dirt depreciation factor.
c) Candlepower distribution curves.
d) Average luminaire brightness.
e) Lumen output charts.
13) Furnish support method for interior luminaires weighing more than
30 pounds and all wall-mounted luminaires:
a) Support methods shall be based on seismic requirements at the
project site as specified in Section 16500.
c. Luminaire substitutions:
1) Provide complete literature for each luminaire substitution:
2) Submittals for substituted luminaires shall be sufficient for competent
comparison of the proposed luminaire to the originally specified
luminaire:
a) Photometric data:
(1) IES file in standard IES format.
(2) Coefficient of utilization tables based on the IES zonal
cavity system by an approved testing laboratory.
(3) Candlepower distribution curves.
(4) Average luminaire brightness.
(5) Lumen output charts.
(6) Power requirements in watts and volt-amperes.
b) Calculations:
(1) Provide software generated calculations showing
illuminance levels in footcandles and power usage in watts
per square foot for each of the areas in which substitutions
are proposed:
(a) Use surface reflectance values and luminaire light loss
factors approved by the Engineer to perform all
calculations.
3) Substitutions for specified luminaires will be evaluated upon quality of
construction, light distribution, energy use, appearance, and
maintenance.
4) Substitutions shall comply with all applicable building codes.
Photocell:
a. Provide for each photocell type:
1) Switching capacity.
2) The means of adjusting the lighting pickup level.
3) Enclosure type.
May 2014
16500-3
9408A10
4)
1.06
C.
Calculations:
1.
Provide complete design calculations and installation documents for pole
mounting piers and poles mounted from structures:
a. Include in the calculations the wind and seismic requirements at the
project site.
b. Calculations and design shall be performed by and signed by a
Professional Engineer registered in the state where the project is being
constructed:
D.
Record documents:
1.
Update the Luminaire Schedule in the Drawings to reflect the acceptable
substitutions, after the substitution has been reviewed and accepted by the
Engineer.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.07

A.
1.08
Mounting method.

A.
1.09
1.10
SCHEDULING
1.11
1.12
A.
Exterior and outdoor lighting system operation shall be demonstrated during the
hours of darkness.
B.
Lighting demonstration shall occur within 2 weeks before substantial completion.
WARRANTY
A.
B.
LED light source:

1.
5-year warranty from the date of installation including material, workmanship,
photometrics, driver, and LED modules.
SYSTEM START-UP
A.
1.13
1.14
May 2014
16500-4
9408A10
1.15
MAINTENANCE
A.
PART 2
2.01
Furnish 1 complete spare LED light source with driver of each type provided.
PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Luminaires: One of the following or equal:

1.
As noted on the Luminaire Schedule.
B.
Drivers: One of the following or equal:

1.
Intermatic.
2.
Tork.
3.
Paragon Electrical Products.
C.
Photo-electric cells: One of the following or equal:

1.
Intermatic.
2.
Tork.
3.
Paragon Electrical Products.
D.
Driver: One of the following or equal:

1.
Advance.
E.
Substitutions:
1.
The lighting design and luminaire selection has been based upon the
photometric data of the identified luminaire. It is the Contractors responsibility
to ensure and prove to the Engineer at time of submittal the substitutions meet
the quality and photometric requirements of the original design.
2.02
2.03
2.04
2.05
EQUIPMENT
A.
Luminaires:
1.
General:
a. Pre-wired with leads of 18-AWG, minimum, for connection to building
circuits.
b. Provide the luminaires furnished per the Luminaire Schedule in the
Drawings:
1) The Specifications noted herein are an addition or supplement to the
Luminaire Schedule.
2.
Exterior/outdoor luminaires:
a. Luminaires in combination with their mounting pole and bracket shall be
capable of withstanding:
1) Wind levels at the project site without damage.
2) Seismic levels at the project site.
b. Corrosion-resistant hardware and hinged doors or lens retainer.
May 2014
16500-5
9408A10
c.
Luminaires furnished with integral photoelectrical control shall be of the

luminaire manufacturer's standard design.
A.
LED light source:

1.
Ambient temperature range of 0 degrees Celsius to 40 degrees Celsius.
2.
Minimum rated life of 70,000 hours when operated at 25 degrees Celsius.
3.
Minimum efficacy of 70 lumens/watt.
4.
Minimum Color Rendering Index of 70.
5.
Tested according to IESNA LM-79 and LM-80.
6.
Lumen maintenance projection per IESNA TM-21.
7.
RoHS compliant.
8.
Integral driver.
9.
Suitable for fry or damp locations.
10. Drivers:
a. Dimmable, with dimming signal protocol of 0-10 VDC or DALI.
b. Input power source:
1) As indicated on the Drawings.
c. Drive current:
1) As indicated in Luminaire Schedule.
d. Power factor: greater than 0.90.
e. Ambient temperature
f. Total harmonic distortion of the input current less than 20 percent.
g. Rated life of 100,000 hours in an LED light source operated at an ambient
temperature of 25 degrees Celsius.
h. Minimum operation temperature of 0 degrees Celsius.
i.
Sound rating: Class A or quieter.
j.
UL listed Class 2 Outdoor.
k. Comply with ANSI C62.41 Category A for transient protection.
l.
No light out feature. Redundant power drivers, single driver fixtures not
acceptable. If a single LED fails, the circuit will provide enough usable
light to remaining LEDs. Driver to be field replaceable.
m. Class 1 electronic driver with power factor greater than 90 percent and
THD less than 20 percent. Driver to be internal with one-piece die cast
aluminum heat sink housing with driver in direct contact to ensure that
driver does not exceed manufacturers temp rating across all specified
ambient conditions. To be mounted with 3 separation from LED optics
board.
B.
Photo-electric cells:
1.
Photoelectric cells for control of multiple luminaires:
a. Self-contained.
b. Weatherproof.
c. Provided with time-delay features.
d. Sized to meet switching capacity of the circuit:
1) Based on ballast VA as indicated on the Drawings.
2.
Photoelectric cell for control of a single luminaire:
a. Integral to the luminaire.
May 2014
16500-6
9408A10
2.06
2.07
2.08
MIXES (NOT USED)
2.09
2.10
FINISHES (NOT USED)
2.11
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
3.02
3.03
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
Install luminaires per the manufacturers guidelines and submitted installation

calculations to meet seismic and wind requirements at the project site.
C.
Raceway sizes per requirements in Section 16130 for conduit fill, 3/4 conduit
minimum.
D.
Apply proper conductor derating factors for multiple circuits in a single conduit.
E.
3-wire or 4-wire circuits shall not be allowed for lighting circuits. Each circuit shall
have a dedicated neutral to the panelboard.
F.
Use same materials for conduits and fittings as identified for process power and
control.
G.
Under no circumstances shall the contractor penetrate containment wall in chemical

storage areas.
H.
Mounting heights of wall switches and receptacles shall be according to Typical

Detail EM725 unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
I.
Special techniques:
1.
Support luminaires from structural elements capable of carrying the total
weight.
2.
Install luminaires plumb and square with building and wall intersections:
a. Suspend pendant-mounted luminaries that are mounted from sloping
ceilings with ball hangers, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
b. Install luminaires in machinery rooms after machines have been installed,
so as to ensure no conflict with machinery, piping, or duct work.
3.
In all cases, coordinate luminaire locations with work of other trades to prevent
obstruction of light from the fixtures:
May 2014
16500-7
9408A10
a.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Locate bottom of luminaire approximately at the bottom of ductwork,

unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings.
Support luminaires weighing more than 25 pounds independently of the outlet
box and the conduit.
Provide ceiling or pendent mounted HID luminaires with a safety chain
connecting the lens, reflector, ballast and other components to the building
structure.
Provide recessed luminaires with auxiliary safety supports attached directly to
the building structure:
a. The safety supports shall consist of number 12 AWG soft drawn
galvanized wires.
Install luminaires in accordance with the architectural reflected ceiling
Drawings:
a. Center luminaires on ceiling tiles unless otherwise indicated.
Support luminaires installed in suspended grid ceilings, independently of the
grid:
a. Provide seismic restraint clips for all luminaires installed in suspended grid
ceilings.
3.04
3.05
3.06
3.07

A.
3.08
ADJUSTING
A.
3.09
3.10
Aim and verify all exterior and outdoor luminaires alignment, during dark evening
hours, as directed by Owner or the Engineer.
CLEANING
A.
B.
Clean all lenses, diffusers, and reflectors.
C.
Refinish all luminaires trim, poles and support brackets, where finish has been
damaged.

A.

1.
Perform the lighting demonstration, in accordance with this Section, witnessed
by the Owner and the Engineer. The entire lighting system shall be observed
to verify luminaires are properly focused and aimed.
2.
Switching functions are in accordance with the Contract Documents and verify
all:
a. Photocell operation.
b. Switching operations.
May 2014
16500-8
9408A10
3.11
PROTECTION
A.
3.12
SCHEDULES
A.
Refer to the Luminaire Schedule in the Drawings.

END OF SECTION
May 2014
16500-9
9408A10
SECTION 16670
LIGHTNING PROTECTION
PART 1
1.01
1.02
1.03
GENERAL
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes:
1.
Design and installation of a complete lightning protection system protecting the
new pre-fabricated electrical building, existing pre-fabricated electrical building,
and the new generator enclosure.
2.
Materials and components for the lightning protection system.
B.
Related sections:
1.
2.
3.
a. Section 01312 - Project Meetings.
c. Section 01610 Project Design Criteria.
d. Section 01770 - Closeout Procedures.
e. Section 16670 - Common Work Results for Electrical.
f. Section 16060 - Grounding and Bonding.
g. Section 16920 Pre-Fabricated Walk-In Electrical Enclosures.
REFERENCES
A.
B.
Lightning Protection Institute (LPI).
C.

1.
780 - Standard for the Installation of Lightning Protection Systems.
D.

1.
96 - Standard for Lightning Protection Components.
2.
96A - Standard for Installation Requirements for Lightning Protection Systems.
DEFINITIONS
A.
B.
1.
LPI: Lightning Protection Institute.
May 2014
16670-1
9408A10
1.04
1.05
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
Retain the services of a lightning protection contractor to design, furnish, and install
a complete lightning protection system, connected to the facility grounding system.
B.
Lightning protection system: NFPA 780 certify system(s) protecting electrical

building and generator enclosure, consisting of:
1.
Air terminals on roof(s).
2.
Bonding of structure and other metal objects.
3.
4.
Interconnecting conductors.
C.
Connect the lightning protection system to the facility grounding electrode:

1.
Provide common ground connections as necessary to the service conductors.
D.
The installing contractor is responsible for all costs associated with inspection of the
lightning protection system.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Product data:
1.
Provide samples and pertinent catalog data for:
a. Air terminals.
b. Conductors.
c. Connectors.
d. Accessories.
e. Include dimensions and materials of each component, and include
indication of listing in accordance with UL 96.
C.
Shop drawings:
1. Including but not limited to:
a. Layout of air terminals with the respective configuration of the zone of
protection.
b. Grounding electrodes, and bonding connections to structure and other
metal objects.
c. Type, size and locations for:
1) Terminal.
2) Electrode.
3) Conductor.
d. Conductor routing details.
e. Connection details.
f. Termination details.
g. Applicable air terminal and other calculations.
2. Details showing installation of air terminals, conductors, and connectors.
D.
Certificates:
1. Submit written confirmation of having obtained LPI certification for each
2. Photocopy of LPI Installers' Certificate(s) for installation of lightning protection
systems.
May 2014
16670-2
9408A10
3.
E.
1.06
1.07
Written confirmation regarding the system manufacturer's and the system

installer's membership in the Lightning Protection Institute. Proof of the
manufacturer and installer having been LPI-certified for at least 5 years.
Record Documents:
1. Provide Record Documents as specified in Sections 01770 and 16670.
2. Accurately record actual locations of air terminals, grounding electrodes,
bonding connections, and routing of system conductors.
3. Manufacturer's installation instructions.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
Conform to the requirements of the UL and NFPA standards for lightning protection
systems:
1.
Components shall be listed in accordance with UL 96.
C.
Manufacturers qualifications:
1.
Company specializing in lightning protection equipment with minimum 5 years
documented experience and a fully certified manufacturer member of the
Lightning Protection Institute:
a. Listed in section "Lightning Conductor, Air Terminals and Fittings" of the
UL "Electrical Construction Materials Directory" for at least 5 years
previous to this Contract's bid opening date.
D.
Installers qualifications: Authorized installer for manufacturer with minimum 5 years

experience and member of the Lightning Protection Institute. Authorized installed
shall also be listed in section "Lightning Protection Installation" of the UL "Electrical
Construction Materials Directory" for at least 5 years previous to this Contract's bid
opening date and be an LPI-certified installer for installation of lightning protection
systems for at least 5 years previous to this Contractor's bid opening date.
E.
The lightning protection system shall meet the applicable requirements of

NFPA 780.

A.
1.08
1.09
SEQUENCING
A.
Pre-installation conference:
1.
Convene a pre-installation conference 1 weeks before commencing the Work
of this Section, as specified in Sections 01312 and 16670.
B.
Coordinate Work with other trades to ensure neat, correct, and unobtrusive
installation.
May 2014
16670-3
9408A10
C.
Coordinate the Work of this Section with roofing and exterior and interior finish
installations. Coordinate with the pre-fabricated building manufacturer responsible
for the equipment specified in Section 16920.
1.10
1.11
WARRANTY
A.
1.12
SYSTEM START-UP
A.
1.13
1.14
1.15
PART 2
2.01
PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS
A.

1. Erico.
2. Thompson Lightning Protection, Inc.
3. Harger Lightning and Grounding.
4. VFC, Inc.
2.02
2.03
MATERIALS
A.
Air terminals:
1.
Material: Copper or aluminum as required for roof type.
2.
Size: 3/8-inch by 18-inch minimum extending a minimum of 12 inches above
the object to be protected.
3.
Air terminal bases:
a. Cast bronze with bolt pressure cable connections securely mounted with
stainless steel screws and bolts.
B.
Ground rods:
1.
C.
Ground plate: Copper.
D.
Conductors:
1.
Perimeters:
a. Match material of air terminals.
2.
Down conductors:
a. Copper.
May 2014
16670-4
9408A10
b.
3.
4.
At least 32 strands of 17 gauge or larger copper wire weighing not less

than 215 pounds per 1000 feet.
UL listed for the application.
Cable fasteners:
a. Electrolytically compatible with conductors and mounting surface:
1) Spaced in accordance with LPI and NFPA requirements.
E.
Connectors and splicers:

1.
Make connections between dissimilar metals with approved bimetallic
connectors.
F.
Miscellaneous materials:
1.
Copper of type and size recommended by the manufacturer of the lightning
protection system.
2.
Stainless steel bolts, screws, and other threaded fasteners.
2.04
2.05
2.06
2.07
2.08
MIXES (NOT USED)
2.09
2.10
FINISHES (NOT USED)
2.11
PART 3
3.01
EXECUTION
EXAMINATION
A.
It is the responsibility of the lightning protection subcontractor to review the

electrical system design, and provide any and all additional equipment and
materials needed in order to construct a lightning protection system meeting the
requirements of NFPA 780.
B.
Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work.
C.
Verify that field measurements are as specified elsewhere in this Section.
D.
Protect elements surrounding Work of this Section from damage or disfiguration.
3.02
3.03
INSTALLATION
A.
May 2014
16670-5
9408A10
B.
Install systems in accordance with manufacturer's instructions unless otherwise

specified in this Section.
C.
Installation must be made by an LPI certified master installer.

1.
Coordinate sealing roofing penetrations with Section 16920 to prevent
leakage.
D.
Conductor installations:
1.
Install the lightning protection roof system(s) grounding and bending
conductors exposed on flat roof areas and concealed at ridge roof areas.
2.
Install main downloads completely concealed and sleeved.
3.
Install down conductors in PVC schedule 80 conduit to protect conductors.
Install conduits internal to building structures.
a. Use minimum 1-inch PVC conduits to protect lightning system conductors
from damage.
E.
Clearances: Assure 6-foot minimum distance required by NEC:

1. From lightning rod conductors to non-current-carrying metal parts of electrical
equipment unless they are bonded to the rods.
2. From lightning system conductors to open conductors of communication
systems.
3. From lightning protection grounding electrodes to electrodes of other
grounding systems.
F.
Extend air terminals a minimum of 12 inches above object to be protected.
G.
Maintain horizontal or downward coursing of main conductor and ensure that bends
have at least an 8-inch radius and that no bend of a conductor forms an included
angle of less than 90 degrees.
H.
Install ground electrodes not less than 1 foot below grade and not less than 2 feet
from foundation walls.
I.
Interconnection of metals:
1.
Bond all metal bodies within 6 feet of the conductor to the system with
approved fittings and conductor.
2.
Connections between dissimilar metals shall be made with approved bimetallic
connections.
3.
Bond metal bodies of inductance located within 6 feet of a conductor or object
with secondary bonds.
J.
Bond all isolated metallic bodies at or below the roof subject to inductance and
within 6 feet of lightning protection system conductors.
K.
Ensure that air terminals are installed to withstand calculated wind force due to
100 miles per hour winds or as specified in Section 01610, whichever is greater with
a 1.3 gust factor without structural damage and without damage to integrity of the
3.04
3.05
May 2014
16670-6
9408A10
3.06
3.07

A.
As specified in Section 16670:
B.
Obtain LPI system certification reports and LPI system certification.
3.08
3.09
CLEANING (NOT USED)
3.10
3.11
PROTECTION
A.
3.12

END OF SECTION
May 2014
16670-7
9408A10
SECTION 16710
FIRE ALARM AND SMOKE DETECTION SYSTEM
PART 1
1.01
1.02
GENERAL
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes requirements for:

1.
Design, supply and installation of a complete conventional type fire alarm
system for the new electrical prefabricated building, including:
a. Initiating devices.
b. Notification appliances.
c. Controls.
d. Supervisory devices.
e. Software.
B.
Related sections:
1.
2.
3.
b. Section 01782 - Operation and Maintenance Data.
d. Section 16123 - 600-Volt or Less Wires and Cables.
C.
Utilize a single Fire Alarm System Supplier (FASS) to design, furnish, and install all
materials, equipment, labor, and services required to achieve a fully integrated and
operational fire alarm system, in complete compliance with the NFPA Class and
Style specified.
D.
Coordinate the fire alarm system with related equipment and materials furnished
under other sections of these Specifications.
E.
Coordinate with the existing fire alarm control panel (FACP) so that the system will
operate as a single system. Connect to the existing FACP. Utilize spare conduits
provided between the new and existing electrical building to connect new and
existing FACPs.
REFERENCES
A.
May 2014
16710-1
9408A10
B.
FM Global (FM).
C.

1.
70 - National Electric Code (NEC).
2.
72 - National Fire Alarm Code.
D.
Factory Mutual (FM).
E.

1.
268 - Standard for Smoke Detectors for Fire Alarm Systems.
2.
268A - Standard for Smoke Detectors for Duct Application.
3.
464 - Standard for Audible Signal Appliances.
4.
1971 Standard for Signaling Devices for the Hearing Impaired.
1.03
DEFINITIONS
1.
1.04
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1.05
A.
Provide a complete, non-coded, conventional, microprocessor-based fire alarm

system with initiating devices, notification appliances, and controls and supervisory
devices as indicated on the Drawings and as specified in this Section.
1.
System connections for initiating (signaling) circuits and notification appliance
circuits shall be Class B Style 4.
2.
Circuit supervision: Circuit faults shall be indicated by a trouble signal at the
FACP. Provide a distinctive audible tone and alphanumeric annunciation.
B.
Provide a complete and operable fire detection and alarming system for the new
electrical building. Design and provide applicable detection devices and a central
fire alarm control panel.
1.
Interconnect fire alarm control panel with existing panel in existing building.
Provide all components required for operable interconnection.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Product Data:
1.
Data sheets for system components highlighted to indicate the specific
products, features, or functions required to meet this specification including
electrical characteristics such as voltage and current ratings, connection
requirements, software and firmware versions and operational details of all
equipment.
2.
Alternate or as-equal products submitted under this contract must provide a
detailed line-by-line comparison of how the submitted product meets, exceeds,
or does not comply with this Specification.
C.
Shop drawings:
1.
Fire detection system block diagram.
a. Fire detection functions and control interconnections for each building as
described in this Section, and as indicated on the Drawings.
b. FACP layout, schematic, and wiring diagrams, panel displays, and LED
arrangement.
May 2014
16710-2
9408A10
c.
d.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
1.06
1.07
D.
Manufacturer's installation instructions.
E.
Designer, manufacturer and installer qualifications.
F.
Submit the equipment layout drawings and product data to the local authority having
jurisdiction (AHJ), for review and approval of the proposed system.
1.
Contractor is responsible for paying plan check, permit and inspection fees as
necessary.
2.
Submit AHJs approval to Engineer.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
Designer qualifications:
1.
Designer of similar installations for a minimum of 5 years with a satisfactory
performance record.
C.
Manufacturer qualifications: Manufacturer of proposed system for a minimum of 10

years with satisfactory performance record.
D.
Installer qualifications: Manufacturer approved installer of products similar to

specified products on a minimum of 10 projects of similar scope as this project with
a satisfactory performance record.
E.
Installation to be supervised by NICET Level II Technician.
F.
Fire alarm systems shall be UL approved.

A.
1.08

A.
1.09
Detection device type, features, and setpoints.

Number and size of wires, type of wire insulation required for devices
specified, and conduit size for proposed circuits.
System power and battery charts with performance graphs and voltage drop
calculations to assure that system will operate per the specified backup time
periods and under all voltage conditions per UL and NFPA standards.
Test reports indicating satisfactory completion of required tests and
inspections.
System layout on floor plan drawings, drawn to scale using AutoCad software.
Fire alarm system input-output point list.
Spare parts list for extra materials being furnished.
Operating and Maintenance data as specified in Section 01782.
SEQUENCING
A.
Submit plans to AHJ for approval.
May 2014
16710-3
9408A10
B.
Make submittals, including AHJs approval to the Engineer.
1.10
1.11
WARRANTY
A.
1.12
SYSTEM START-UP
A.
1.13
1.14
1.15
MAINTENANCE
A.
PART 2
2.01
Furnish service and maintenance of fire alarm system for 1 year from date of
Substantial Completion.
PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Fire alarm and smoke detection systems: One of the following or equal:
1.
Siemens.
2.
Simplex Grinnell.
3.
Honeywell, Incorporated.
4.
Notifier.
5.
ADT Security System.
6.
General Electric.
2.02
2.03
2.04
2.05
EQUIPMENT
A.
Provide the fire alarm system with all necessary hardware and software to perform
the following functions:
1.
Fire alarm and detection operations.
a. Provide all required network interface modules, fiber optic communication
modules, relay modules, and zone modules for interconnections as
required and specified in this Section.
2.
Monitoring of smoke detectors, and other equipment as indicated in the
Specifications or as indicated on the Drawings.
3.
Annunciation:
a. Operation of alarm and supervisory initiating devices shall be annunciated
at the FACP indicating the location and type of device.
May 2014
16710-4
9408A10
b.
4.
5.
6.
2.06
Signal transmission:
1) Alarms from the FACP shall be routed to
a) PLC.
b) Existing FACP.
System general alarm sequence:
a. Indication of alarm condition at the FACP.
b. Identification of the device that is the source of the alarm at the FACP.
c. Operation of audible and visible notification devices throughout the
building until silenced at FACP.
Alarm silencing:
a. When the Alarm Silence button is pressed, all audible alarm signals turn
off.
System reset:
a. Provide a system reset button that returns the system to its normal state.
b. Display messages providing operator assurance of the sequential steps
as they occur.
c. The system shall verify all circuits or devices are restored before resetting
the system to avoid the potential for re-alarming the system.
d. Should an alarm condition continue, the system remains in an alarmed
state.
COMPONENTS
A.
Fire alarm control panel (FACP):

1.
Power requirements:
a. 120 VAC input power via a dedicated circuit.
b. Battery system:
1) Provided with sufficient battery capacity to operate the entire system
upon loss of normal 120 VAC power in a normal supervisory mode
for a period of 24 hours with 5 minutes of alarm operation at the end
of this period.
2) The system shall automatically transfer to battery standby upon
power failure.
3) Provide automatic battery charging and recharging operations.
4) Supervise the system batteries so that a low battery condition or
disconnection of the batteries indicates a trouble at the FACP.
c. All circuits requiring system operating power shall be 24 VDC with
individual fuses at the FACP.
d. Supervise the incoming power to the system so that any power failure will
be indicated at the control unit.
1) A green "power on" LED shall be displayed continuously while
incoming power is present.
2) FACP shall sound a trouble signal at loss of primary power and to
indicate when the system is operating on battery power.
2.
Alphanumeric display and system controls:
a. Include an LCD display to indicate alarm, supervisory, and component
status messages and include a keypad for use in entering and executing
control commands.
b. Display battery voltage and amperage readouts on LCD display.
3.
System supervision: Component or power supply failure places system in
trouble mode.
May 2014
16710-5
9408A10
4.
5.
6.
Group actuating devices together in zones represented by zone light emitting

diodes, LED.
a. Provide provisions for supervised zone remote annunciator outputs.
b. Actuation of a UL approved alarm-initiating device shall cause the
respective red alarm LED to flash.
1) This LED should continue to flash until the alarm acknowledge switch
is actuated.
2) Once acknowledged, the LED or zone LED will be constantly
illuminated until the actuating device is restored to normal and the
system is reset.
Supply with an alarm silence/acknowledge switch to silence the audible
alarms.
a. Should a subsequent alarm actuation of a different zone occur, the alarm
devices shall sound until silenced.
Cabinet:
a. UL listed, lockable steel enclosure.
b. Front access only.
c. If more than a single unit is required to form a complete control unit,
provide matching modular unit enclosures.
B.
Software:
1.
Allows for loading and editing instructions and operating sequences as
necessary.
2.
Capable of on-site programming to accommodate system expansion and
facilitate changes in operation.
3.
Stored in a non-volatile programmable memory within the fire alarm control
unit.
4.
Loss of primary and secondary power shall not erase the instructions stored in
memory.
5.
Capable of full system operation during a new configuration download.
C.
Smoke detectors:
1.
2.
Provide with the following features:
a. Factory nameplate: Serial number and type identification.
b. Operating voltage: 24 VDC, nominal.
c. Plug-in arrangement: Detector and associated electronic components are
mounted in a module that connects to a fixed base with a twist-locking
plug connection.
1) Base to provide break-off plastic tab that can be removed to engage
the head/base locking mechanism.
2) No special tools required to remove head once it has been locked.
3) Removal of the detector head shall interrupt the supervisory circuit of
the fire alarm detection loop and cause a trouble signal at the control
unit.
d. LED that will flash each time it is scanned by the FACP (once every
4 seconds). In alarm condition, the detector head LED shall be on steady.
e. Magnetically actuated test switch to provide for easy alarm testing at the
detector location.
f. Type: Photoelectric smoke.
3.
Provide end-of-line resistors as required.
May 2014
16710-6
9408A10
D.
Circuit interface modules:

1.
Type 1: Monitor circuit interface module:
a. For conventional 2-wire smoke detector and/or contact device monitoring
with Class B or Class A wiring supervision.
1) Supervision of the zone wiring will be Class B.
2) Module shall communicate status (normal, alarm, trouble) to the
FACP.
b. For conventional 4-wire smoke detector with Class B wiring supervision.
1) Module shall provide detector reset capability.
2) Fuse to provide over-current power protection for the 4-wire detector:
2 amp.
3) Module will communicate status (normal, alarm, trouble) to the
FACP.
2.
Type 2: Control circuit interface module:
a. Module for signals and other device control with Style 4 and Style 6 wiring
supervision.
b. For non-supervised control.
c. Provide double pole double throw relay switching for 1 A at 28 VDC
resistive, power limited and at 1/2 A at 120 VAC resistive, non-power
limited.
d. The system shall be capable of energizing 100 percent of the relays
connected to the signaling line circuit.
3.
The circuit interface module to be supervised and uniquely identified by the
control unit.
a. Identification to be transmitted to the control unit for processing according
to the program instructions.
b. On-board LED to provide an indication that the module is powered and
communicating with the FACP.
c. LEDs provide a troubleshooting aid since the LED blinks on poll whenever
the peripheral is powered and communicating.
E.
Wiring:
1.
2.
Wire and cable shall be a type listed for its intended use by an approval
agency acceptable to the AHJ.
3.
SLC channel wiring shall be unshielded twisted pair.
a. Capacitance rating of less than 60 pf/ft.
b. Minimum 3 twists (turns) per foot.
2.07
2.08
MIXES (NOT USED)
2.09
2.10
FINISHES (NOT USED)
2.11
PART 3
3.01
EXECUTION
May 2014
16710-7
9408A10
3.02
3.03
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
Install system components and all associated devices in accordance with applicable
NFPA Standards and manufacturers recommendations.
C.
Smoke detectors shall not be installed until after construction cleanup on all trades
is complete and final in accordance with NFPA 72.
D.
Locate FACP as indicated on the Drawings.
E.
Device location-indicating lights: Locate in the public space immediately adjacent to

the device.
F.
Wiring:
1.
System wiring:
a. Installed in accordance with the appropriate articles from NEC 70.
2.
Color coding:
a. Color-code fire alarm conductors differently from the normal building
power wiring.
b. Use 1 color code for alarm initiating device circuits wiring and a different
color code for supervisory circuits.
c. Color-code notification appliance circuits differently from alarm-initiating
circuits.
d. Paint fire alarm system conduits, junction boxes, and covers red.
e. Circuit that provides power to the FACP shall have a red marking and be
identified as FIRE ALARM CIRCUIT in accordance with NFPA 72.
3.04
3.05
3.06
3.07

A.
B.
Manufacturer's field services: Provide services of a factory-authorized service

representative to:
1.
Supervise the field assembly and connection of components and the pretesting, testing, and adjustment of the system.
2.
Verify proper installation, correct deficiencies, and be present at the jobsite
during final inspection by the Engineer.
C.
Field tests:
1.
Notify the Engineer and the AHJ in writing a minimum of 2 weeks before the
scheduled day for the field acceptance tests.
2.
Furnish the services of a field service engineer, and any special tools,
equipment and labor to perform the tests.
May 2014
16710-8
9408A10
3.
4.
Each device and control function shall be individually witness tested and
recorded:
a. All acceptance tests shall be witnessed by and signed off by the Engineer,
the FASSs field engineer, the installing Subcontractor, and a
representative of the AHJ.
The approved Field Acceptance Test Binder shall form the basis of the
documentation of the system acceptance tests:
a. Furnish 2 certified copies of the tests.
3.08
3.09
CLEANING
A.
3.10

A.
B.
Training:
1.
Provide the services of a factory-authorized service representative to
demonstrate the system and train Owner's maintenance personnel:
a. Train Owner's maintenance personnel in the procedures and schedules
involved in operating, troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining the
system. Provide a minimum of 2 hours training.
3.11
3.12
SCHEDULE (NOT USED)

END OF SECTION
May 2014
16710-9
9408A10
SECTION 16920
PRE-FABRICATED WALK-IN ELECTRICAL ENCLOSURES
PART 1
1.01
1.02
GENERAL
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes:
1.
Pre-fabricated walk-in electrical enclosures, completely engineered and
assembled.
B.
Related sections:
1.
2.
3.
a. Section 01140 Work Restrictions.
c. Section 01410 - Regulatory Requirements.
d. Section 01610 - Project Design Criteria.
e. Section 03301 - Concrete Work.
f. Section 15732 - Air Conditioning Units.
g. Section 15812 - Metal Ductwork.
h. Section 16920 - Common Work Results for Electrical.
i.
Section 16070 - Hangers and Supports.
j.
Section 16075 - Electrical Identification.
k. Section 16123 - 600 Volt or Less Wires and Cables.
l.
Section 16134 - Boxes.
m. Section 16130 - Conduits.
n. Section 16140 - Wiring Devices.
o. Section 16150 - Low Voltage Wire Connections.
p. Section 16240 - Battery Systems.
q. Section 16267 - Medium Voltage Variable Frequency Drive.
r. Section 16341 - 5 Kilovolt Medium Voltage Metal Clad Switchgear.
s. Section 16500 - Lighting.
t. Section 16670 - Lightning Protection.
REFERENCES
A.
B.
Air-Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute (AHRI):

1.
210/240 - Performance Rating of Unitary Air-Conditioning & Air-Source Heat
Pump Equipment.
2.
270 - Sound Rating of Outdoor Unitary Equipment.
May 2014
16920-1
9408A10
3.
340/360 - Performance Rating of Commercial and Industrial Unitary

Air-Conditioning and Heat Pump Equipment.
C.
Air Moving and Conditioning Association International, Inc. (AMCA):

1.
Standard 210 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Certified Aerodynamic
Performance Rating.
D.
American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA)

1.
101 - Voluntary Specifications for Aluminum, Vinyl (PVC) and Wood Windows
and Glass Doors.
2.
507 - Performance Characteristics of Fenestration Systems Installed in
Commercial Buildings (AAMA 507)
3.
702 Voluntary Specifications for Pile Weatherstripping and Replaceable
Fenestration Weatherseals.
4.
1503 - Voluntary Test Method for Thermal Transmittance and Condensation
Resistance of Windows, Doors, and Glazed Wall Sections.
E.
American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc,

(ASHRAE):
1.
Standard 15 - Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems.
2.
Standard 52.2 - Method of Testing General Ventilation Air Cleaning Devices
for Removal Efficiency by Particle Size.
3.
Standard 62 - Ventilation and Acceptable Indoor Air Quality in Low-Rise
Residential Buildings.
F.

1.
A 36 - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.
2.
A 500 - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless
Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes.
3.
B 221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded
Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes.
4.
C 864 - Standard Specification for Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal
Gaskets, Setting Blocks, and Spacers
5.
E 283 - Standard Test Method for Determining Rate of Air Leakage Through
Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure
Differences Across the Specimen
6.
E 330 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows,
Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference
7.
E 331 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows,
Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference
8.
F 588 - Standard Test Methods for Measuring the Forced Entry Resistance of
Window Assemblies, Excluding Glazing Impact
G.
International Organization for Standardization (ISO):

1.
9001 - Quality Management Systems Requirements.
H.

1.
NEMA Type TEFC enclosure in accordance with NEMA 250.
I.
National Fire Protection Association:

1.
NFPA 70 - National Electric Code (NEC).
2.
NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.
May 2014
16920-2
9408A10
1.03
1.04
J.
Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC):

1.
SP-1 - Solvent Cleaning.
2.
SP-2 - Hand Tool Cleaning.
3.
SP-3 - Solvent Cleaning.
K.
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL).
DEFINITIONS
A.
B.
The pre-fabricated electrical enclosure manufacturer or pre-fabricated electrical

enclosure supplier shall be defined as the same entity for the purposes of this
document.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
Pre-fabricated electrical enclosure design requirements:

a. Electrical Room: Minimum interior size shall be: 12-0 H; length and width
b. Control Room: Minimum interior size shall be: 12-0 H; length and width
c. Battery Room: Minimum interior size shall be: 12-0 H; length and width
2.
Designed and environmentally controlled to provide protection to all equipment
it contains under the specified Project Site conditions.
a. Size the enclosure to accommodate the actual equipment furnished
including all Code required clearances and access.
3.
Design enclosure to conform to all requirements set forth in the building code
a. Design loading criteria shall be as specified in Section 01610 and this
Section.
4.
Enclosure floor and wall framing shall be located and of sufficient strength to
support loads and seismic anchorage forces from equipment.
5.
Design enclosure for installation on the concrete foundation as indicated on
the Drawings.
a. Communicate any requests for adjustments to foundation to the Engineer
well in advance of foundation detailing and construction. Obtain
Engineers acceptance of proposed adjustments before proceeding with
design and fabrication of enclosure.
1) Provide such adjustments to foundation at no additional cost to the
Owner.
2) If foundation adjustments are required, and if these adjustments are
accepted by the Engineer, Engineer will provide Engineers
anticipated costs for revisions to the design and the associated
Contract Documents. Contractor shall notify Engineer of its decision
on whether or not to proceed with adjustments. Contractors decision
to proceed with adjustments will be interpreted as Contractors
agreement that the Engineers costs for revisions will be deducted
from the Contractors price for the Work, and that those costs will be
reimbursed to the Engineer by the Owner.
May 2014
16920-3
9408A10
B.
1.05
Internal equipment supplied within pre-fabricated building:

1.
Several pieces of equipment have been identified in the Contract documents,
including, but not limited to: lighting and receptacles, switchgear, battery
system, conduits, wiring, transformers, panelboards, HVAC equipment, etc.
a. This equipment may be provided by either the pre-fabricated building
supplier or the Contractor, but all equipment must conform to the
requirements indicated on the Contract documents or as specified,
regardless of who provides the equipment or installation.
b. If the internal equipment is supplied by the pre-fabricated building
manufacturer, all submittal requirements apply, including, but not limited
to:
1) Section 15732 - Air Conditioning Units.
2) Section 16070 - Hangers and Supports.
3) Section 16075 - Electrical Identification.
4) Section 16123 - 600 Volt or Less Wires and Cables.
5) Section 16134 - Boxes.
6) Section 16130 - Conduits.
7) Section 16140 - Wiring Devices.
8) Section 16150 - Low Voltage Wire Connections.
9) Section 16240 - Battery Systems.
10) Section 16267 - Medium Voltage Variable Frequency Drive.
11) Section 16272 - Dry-Type transformers.
12) Section 16341 - 5 Kilovolt Medium Voltage Metal Clad Switchgear.
13) Section 16445 - Panelboards.
14) Section 16500 - Lighting.
15) Section 16670 - Lightning Protection.
c. If the internal equipment is supplied by the pre-fabricated building
manufacturer, all drawing requirements apply. For example, if lighting and
receptacles are provided by the pre-fabricated building manufacturer:
1) Provide lighting, receptacles, photocells, etc. as indicated on Drawing
20-E-03 and the luminaire schedule, including number of lights,
circuit designations, etc.
2.
The Contractor shall coordinate all work, and furnish/install any equipment not
provided by the pre-fabricated building manufacturer to provide a complete
and operating system:
a. Contractor shall coordinate all work as specified in the SEQUENCING
requirements listed herein.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Furnish submittals for all electrical equipment contained within the enclosure as
required by the section covering the equipment.
C.
Product data:
1.
Manufacturer of enclosure.
2.
Manufacturer of component parts of enclosure.
3.
Weight of enclosure.
4.
Complete bill of material indicating quantity, description, and part number.
5.
Anchorage hardware.
May 2014
16920-4
9408A10
6.
Doors, windows, and associated hardware and glazing: Full product data
showing details of construction and demonstrating compliance with the
provisions of these Specifications.
D.
Shop drawings:
1.
Layout drawings:
a. Provide fully dimensioned and to scale equipment layout drawings which
include:
1) Enclosure plan view including layout of internal equipment.
2) Enclosure elevations of front, back and both sides.
3) Enclosure base/skid plan including mounting details, cable/ductbank
entry areas and floor openings, and door swing requirements.
4) Room separation and associated entry/exit doors to match layout as
5) Shipping splits for building equipment (if the unit needs to be
provided in multiple pieces for shipment, and assembled in the field):
a) Include attachment details for assembly in the field.
6) Framing plans, showing member sizes and locations and
demonstrating that members provided are arranged and have the
structural capacity to support the weight and seismic anchoring loads
of the specific equipment to be installed in the structure.
7) Viewing window framing and design characteristics.
b. Structural drawings for the enclosure shall be sealed and signed by a
qualified professional engineer, licensed in the State of Oklahoma.
c. Concurrently with submittal of enclosure manufacturers shop drawings,
submit a project data notebook containing details of equipment to be
installed in the enclosure (See paragraphs on SEQUENCING in this
section for specific information to be included.)
E.
1.
Provide written instructions detailing the complete installation of the enclosure,
including rigging, moving, setting into place, and combination of shipping splits
where applicable.
2.
Provide complete instructions and requirements for anchoring the enclosure to
meet the seismic requirements at the Project Site as specified in
Section 16920:
a. Instructions and requirements must be stamped by a professional
engineer licensed in the State of Oklahoma.
F.
Calculations:
1.
Provide complete structural calculations indicating that the enclosure,
anchorage, and structural foundation indicated on the Drawings are designed
to conform to the requirements of the building code specified in Section 01410,
the project design criteria specified in Section 01610, and the requirements of
this Section.
a. Calculations must be stamped by a professional engineer licensed in the
State of Oklahoma.
2.
Provide complete structural calculations indicating that the structural supports
for the enclosure are suitable for the seismic and wind requirements at the
project site:
a. Calculations must be stamped by a professional engineer licensed in the
State of Oklahoma..
May 2014
16920-5
9408A10
3.
4.
1.06
1.07
1.08
1.09
Provide complete heating and cooling calculations indicating that the HVAC
system supplied will maintain the internal enclosure temperature specified in
this Section under the Project/Site Conditions as specified in Section 16920
and Section 01610.
Provide lighting as specified or indicated on drawings or complete substitution
lighting calculations as specified in Section 16500.
G.
Certifications:
1.
Submit written certification that the enclosure mounting requirements have
been fully coordinated with the enclosure foundation.
2.
Provide certification plate that states the enclosure, its internal equipment,
structural design, etc. is suitable for its intended use and shipping to site:
a. Include all information required by the State of Oklahoma.
b. Attach certification plate to structure prior to shipping.
H.
Provide samples of available exterior finish colors to Owner for selection.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
The manufacturer of the enclosure shall be ISO 9001 certified.

A.
B.
If equipment is shipped internally with the pre-fabricated building, refer to the

associated equipment specification requirements for shipping requirements
(dedicated air ride truck, internal GPS accelerometer tracking, etc.).
PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
A.
B.
1.
Provide enclosures that are suitable for operation under the project site
conditions specified in the Contract Documents, including, but not limited to,
material compatibility, site altitude, site seismic, ambient temperature, and
humidity conditions.
SEQUENCING
A.
Do not install conduit or ductbanks that will enter the enclosure from below until final
approval of the enclosure submittal.
B.
Early in the construction phase, prior to initial submittals for the associated
components, the Contractor shall arrange for a meeting with the Engineer, electrical
subcontractor, instrumentation subcontractor, prefabricated enclosure supplier, VFD
manufacturer, switchgear manufacturer, lightning protection supplier/installer, and
HVAC subcontractor to confirm penetrations, placement and loading of equipment
into the building, timing of submittal data, etc.:
1.
Refer to Section 01312.
May 2014
16920-6
9408A10
C.
At the conclusion of this meeting, the following items will be determined and
coordinated by the Contractor (as accepted by Engineer):
1.
Preliminary dimensions of all major equipment listed.
2.
Expected underground penetrations and locations.
3.
Confirmation of equipment locations within the building:
a. The location of equipment shall match the layout as indicated on the
electrical drawings, with minor adjustments required to update
dimensional data, adjustments to the incoming conduit windows so that
incoming ductbanks do not interfere with structural piers, etc.
4.
Confirmation of all equipment that will be either:
a. Provided by pre-fabricated manufacturer or furnished to pre-fabricated
manufacturers site, to be shipped to project site with pre-fabricated
building.
b. Provided separately and shipped to building site, to be installed by
Contractor at the project site.
5.
Agreed-upon dates for submittals development dates, equipment fabrication
release dates, and required coordination to meet scheduling constraints as
specified in Section 01140 and Special Provisions.
D.
As a condition for acceptance, the pre-fabricated walk-in enclosure manufacturer

shall:
1.
Obtain from the Contractor detailed information for each piece of equipment to
be installed in the enclosure:
a. Provide the following information with the prefabricated enclosure
submittal:
1) Dimensions and anchoring details for each cabinet and piece of
equipment.
2) Equipment shipping and operating weights.
3) Instructions for handling and moving cabinets (to evaluate loads on
the floor of the structure).
4) Location of penetrations and conduit windows through the enclosure
required to complete the installation.
2.
Prepare and submit items described in SUBMITTALS paragraph of this
Section for Engineers review.
3.
Fabricate enclosure based on submittals accepted by the Engineer.
4.
Install and wire all electrical, HVAC and other equipment required that is not
being provided by the Contractor.
5.
Ship entire pre-fabricated enclosure and internal equipment to the site for
installation.
1.10
1.11
WARRANTY
A.
1.12
SYSTEM START-UP
A.
1.13
1.14
May 2014
16920-7
9408A10
1.15
PART 2
2.01
PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS
A.

1.
Atkinson Industries.
2.
3.
General Electric.
4.
Pederson Power Products.
5.
Powell Electrical Manufacturing Company.
2.02
2.03
2.04
MANUFACTURED UNITS
A.
General:
1.
Metal construction; self-supporting and freestanding. Free from burrs and
sharp edges.
2.
Interlocked, self-framing design, or framed design using minimum 3-inch
square ASTM A 500 structural grade steel tubing and welded connections.
B.
Base:
1.
All welded, seamless construction utilizing ASTM A 36 structural steel
members sized by structural design calculations to meet or exceed the
required static and dynamic loads.
2.
Locate structural members to coordinate with the enclosed equipment; to
properly support the equipment and to allow maximum access to equipment
floor openings for cable penetration; and to span between foundation supports
3.
Provide lifting lugs capable of lifting the fully equipped electrical enclosure at
the specified lifting points with deflection not exceeding L/240.
4.
Provide 2 copper grounding pads located at diagonally opposite corners of the
structure.
a. Mechanically bond ground pads to the base steel of the enclosure.
b. Include two 3/8-inch -16 UNC threaded brass studs on each ground pad
assembly to permit connection of a NEMA Type 2-hole cable lug.
C.
Floor:
1.
Constructed of minimum 1/4-inch thick ASTM A 36 smooth steel plate securely
welded to the structural steel members of the enclosure base.
2.
Rated to withstand not less than 250 pounds per square foot distributed load,
and rated to withstand the concentrated load of any equipment installed into
the enclosure.
a. Floor framing and plate shall be of sufficient strength and stiffness to
resist applied seismic anchorage forces without failure or excessive
deformation of materials.
3.
Where bottom access is required for electrical equipment, provide floor cutouts
with gasketed removable 12-gauge galvanized steel cover plates.
May 2014
16920-8
9408A10
D.
Walls:
1.
Constructed with an exterior wall of minimum 18-gauge steel and an interior
wall of minimum 16-gauge steel. Provide additional wall framing and support
for locations designed to support power/lighting panelboards and control
panels.
a. Wall framing and skin shall be of sufficient strength and stiffness to resist
all equipment anchorage forces, including seismic forces, without failure
or excessive deformation of materials.
2.
Where wall penetrations are required, cutouts shall be completely framed by
coverplates with neoprene gaskets.
E.
Enclosure roof and ceiling:

1.
Enclosures shall be constructed with a roof panel of minimum 18-gauge steel
and a ceiling panel of minimum 16-gauge steel.
2.
The roof shall be designed to withstand a minimum live load of 40 pounds per
square foot, and shall be designed to support that live load along with interior
and exterior equipment loads without deflections that will result in ponding of
precipitation on the roof, and without excessive deflection.
3.
Where roof penetrations are required, provide flashing, adequately sealed, to
maintain the weatherproof integrity of the roof.
4.
Coordinate roof penetrations for the lightning protection system specified in
Section 16670.
5.
Provide gutters and leaders (downspouts) to collect precipitation and direct
flow to the ground. Confirm location of leaders as part of submittals.
6.
Coordinate roof penetrations for the lightning protection system specified in
Section 16670.
F.
Insulation:
1.
Walls and roof insulated to the R-11 level using fiberglass batt material
installed between the inner and outer steel panels.
2.
Floor insulated to the R-11 level using polyurethane foam installed on the
underside of the floor.
G.
Doors:
1.
Personnel and equipment doors:
a. Provide doors keyed identical to locks on existing prefabricated building.
b. Provide doors sized and located as indicated on the Drawings.
c. Double wall steel construction with R-15 thermal insulation.
d. Include interior panic hardware with exterior knob and cylinder lock,
interior automatic closure devices and integrated hold open devices.
e. Outwards opening with a minimum swing of 105 degrees.
f. Provide drip shields above each door.
g. Equipment doors sized to allow for all equipment to be moved in and out
of the enclosure:
1) Provide a 24-inch removable transom above each equipment door to
allow for additional clearance.
2.
Equipment rear access doors:
a. Provide equipment doors allowing rear access to equipment where
indicated on the Drawings or required to meet the working clearance
requirements of the NEC.
b. Hinged and lockable with padlock.
c. Gasketed to maintain a weatherproof seal when closed.
May 2014
16920-9
9408A10
d.
H.
Sized to match the installed equipment, with an individual door for each
panel or switchgear section, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings..
Viewing Window - Exterior:

1.
Provide windows at locations and with minimum dimensions indicated on the
Drawings. (See Sheet 20-E-02.)
2.
a. Comply with testing and performance requirements of AAMA 001.
b. Air infiltration: Maximum 0.10 cubic feet per minute per foot of window
perimeter seal at static pressure differential of 6.24 pounds per square
foot inward test pressure when tested in accordance with ASTM E 283.
c. Water resistance- fixed windows: No water infiltration as defined by the
test method when tested at a static air pressure differential of 12 pounds
per square foot in accordance with ASTM E 331.
d. Uniform load performance: Pressures indicated are applied first to one
side, then to the opposite side.
1) Provide resistance to wind load pressures as specified in Section
01610.
2) Deflection: Maximum 1/175 of span of any framing member when
tested in accordance with ASTM E 330 at static air pressure of 100
pounds per square foot.
3) Structural resistance: No glass breakage, permanent damage to
fasteners, hardware, or other items that would cause the unit to be
unserviceable when tested in accordance with ASTM E 330 at static
air pressure difference of 150 pounds per square foot.
e. Condensation resistance: When tested in accordance with AAMA 1503
with clear glass, condensation resistance factor (CRF) not less than
(CRF-f 59) frame and (CRF-g 57) glass.
f. Thermal transmittance: When tested in accordance with AAMA 1503,
conductive thermal transmittance (U-factor) not more than 0.58
BTU/hr/sf/oF per AAMA 507.
g. Forced entry resistance: Minimum Grade 10 when tested in accordance
with ASTM F 588.
3.
Type: Fixed aluminum window(s) conforming to AAMA 101, Class F-DW-HCHC40.
a. Frame:
1) Members: One part framing members with thermal barrier.
a) Extrusions: 6063-T5 alloy and temper in accordance with ASTM
B 221, Alloy G.S. 10A-T5. 2 1/4-inch overall depth, minimum
1/8-inch thick.
b) Thermal barrier: 2-part, chemically cured, high-density
polyurethane.
2) Corners: Permanently leak-proof; coped and tenoned and forged: or
mortised and tenoned and sigma arc welded.
3) Weep slots: Providing positive drainage to the exterior, and protected
by snap-in weep covers or integral drips.
4) Finish: Exposed aluminum. Anodize in accordance with AA 45,
Architectural Class 1 Anodic Coating AA-M12C22A41, without
gripper marks. (Nonspecular, as-fabricated; medium matte;
architectural class 1 (minimum 0.7 mils), clear.
May 2014
16920-10
9408A10
b.
4.
5.
Glass:
1) Insulating: Hermetically sealed units consisting of minimum 1/4-inch
thick tinted exterior light; minimum 1/4-inch thick clear interior light;
and 1/2-inch wide air space, dehydrated with blended molecular
sieve and silica gel desiccant. Fabricated with metal spacer channel
with factory-bent corners; one welded splice on one vertical side; and
polyisobutylene primary and silicone secondary seals.
c. Glazing system:
1) Compatible with aluminum, sealants and sealing materials, and
gasketing.
2) Wet/dry type in accordance with manufacturers standards.
3) Glazing rabbets: Minimum 13/16-inch deep by width required for
glass.
4) Glazing method: Inside.
5) Exterior: Silicone black bedding sealant.
6) Interior: Snap-in type, minimum 0.050 inch glazing bead with interior
gasket in accordance with AAMA 702 or ASTM C 864.
Manufactured by one of the following, or equal:
a. Kawneer Co., Visalia CA, Model 8225TL Isolock (thermally broken).
b. Hope Architectural Products, Jamestown NY Model 201T Series.
Installation:
a. Set windows in pre-fabricated structure to be plumb, square, level, free of
warp and twist, and in exact alignment.
b. Anchor frames securely to structure.
1) Separate or isolate dissimilar metals and materials with dielectrical
breaks and coatings.
2) For coated separations:
a) Apply minimum 2 coats at a thickness of note less than 5 mils
each to isolate aluminum from steel.
c. Coordinate installation and attachment of vapor barriers, flashing, and
closures to ensure weathertight installation. Seal joints using flexible,
weatherproof sealants.
d. Lead collected moisture to outside as directly as possible.
Wiring and raceways:

6.
Wire and cable as specified in Section 16123.
7.
Use one of the following raceway types to route wiring within the enclosure:
a. Conduit as specified in Section 16130.
2.05
EQUIPMENT
A.
Furnish, install, and test all equipment within the enclosure in conformance with the
applicable equipment section.
2.06
2.07
ACCESSORIES
A.
HVAC system:
1.
HVAC equipment as indicated on the HVAC drawings, Section 15732, and the
HVAC schedules. HVAC system to consist at minimum of the following units
along with the associated controls.
May 2014
16920-11
9408A10
2.
3.
Provide a fully functioning and operable HVAC system as required by this

section and as indicated on the Drawings. Coordinate enclosure penetrations
for all HVAC units and ducting in and out of the building.
Locate equipment as indicated on the HVAC Drawings.
B.
Locks:
1.
All building locks to match locks on existing building.
C.
Skirting:
1.
Provide pre-painted galvanized steel skirting around perimeter at base of new
Power/Control Building No. 2.
a. Match general configuration and color of skirting around perimeter at base
of existing Power/Control Building No. 1.
2.
Skirting shall be corrugated sheet steel, not less than 20 gage thickness and
with a zinc coating of not less than 0.30 oz of zinc per square foot of surface
coated.
3.
Provide associated flashings, corners, joints, U and J channels, and
accessories required for a complete and finished installation.
4.
Fasten skirting to structure using Type 304 stainless steel fasteners and
flashings that prevent water from being trapped between trim and skirting.
a. Allow for frost heave.
5.
Skirting/under-building ventilation.
a. Provide ventilation louvers with aluminum cloth insect screens. Screen
shall be 18 by 16 aluminum mesh cloth, secured in screen frame by
means that allow replacement and re-screening.
b. Provide not less than 1 square foot of new free ventilation area for each
150 square feet of building floor surface, or portion thereof.
c. Place louvers as high above ground as possible.
6.
Access: Provide not less than one access opening, at least 24 inches wide
and 24 inches high located as directed by Owners Project Representative.
2.08
MIXES (NOT USED)
2.09
2.10
FINISHES
A.
General:
1.
Thoroughly clean and prepare all surfaces according to SSPC-SP-1 and either
SSPC-SP-2 or SSPC-SP-3, as required to remove all oil, grease, soil, rust,
and scale before applying any coatings or paint.
B.
Base:
1.
Sandblast the entire base to completely remove to rust and scale before
painting.
2.
Coat the base with an industrial grade, high solid, high build epoxy with a
minimum dry film thickness of 4 mils.
C.
Floor:
1.
Thoroughly coat the floor with an epoxy primer with a final dry film thickness of
2-3 mils and finish with a coat of non-skid manufacturers standard gray epoxy
with a dry film thickness of 2 to 3 mils.
May 2014
16920-12
9408A10
2.11
D.
Interior walls and ceiling:

1.
Either electrostatically apply a white polyester powder with a final baked on
thickness between 2 and 4 mils or apply a white epoxy paint applied to a dry
film thickness of between 2 and 3 mils.
E.
Exterior walls and roof panels:

1.
Either electrostatically apply polyester powder with a final baked on thickness
between 2 and 4 mils or apply a vinyl wash primer coat with a minimum dry
film thickness of 1 mil followed by a final coat of epoxy paint with a dry film
thickness of between 2 to 3 mils:
a. Provide UV resistant coatings or paint on all exterior walls and roof
panels.
b. Exterior color shall match that of the existing Power/Control Building
No. 1.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
3.02
3.03
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
Install the enclosure per manufacturers guidelines and submitted installation

instructions to meet the seismic requirements at the project site.
C.
Any components or internal equipment that is damaged during installation or

shipping shall be replaced at the sole discretion of the Engineer.
D.
Install enclosures so that their surfaces are plumb and level within 1/8 inch over
their entire base.
E.
Install gasket and sealing material under enclosures with floor slab cutouts for
conduit and cables to prevent entry of dust, debris, or vermin into the enclosure and
equipment contained therein.
3.04
3.05
3.06
3.07

A.
May 2014
16920-13
9408A10
3.08
3.09
CLEANING
A.
3.10
DEMONSTRATION (NOT USED)
3.11
PROTECTION
A.
3.12

END OF SECTION
May 2014
16920-14
9408A10
SECTION 16950
FIELD ELECTRICAL ACCEPTANCE TESTS
PART 1
1.01
1.02
GENERAL
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes:
1.
Responsibilities for testing the electrical installation.
2.
Routine tests during installation.
3.
Adjusting and calibration.
4.
Acceptance tests.
5.
Demonstration of electrical equipment.
6.
Commissioning and plant start-up.
B.
Related sections:
1.
2.
3.
c. Section 16060 - Grounding and Bonding.
C.
Copyright information:
1.
Some portions of this Section are copyrighted by the InterNational Electrical
Testing Association, Inc (NETA). See NETA publication ATS for details.
REFERENCES
A.
B.
C.

1.
D 877 - Standard Test Method for Dielectric Breakdown Voltage of Insulating
Liquids Using Disk Electrodes.
2.
D 923 - Standard Practices for Sampling Electrical Insulating Liquids.
3.
D 971 - Standard Test Method for Interfacial Tension of Oil Against Water by
the Ring Method.
4.
D 1298 - Standard Test Method for Density, Relative Density, or API Gravity of
Crude Petroleum and Liquid Petroleum Products by Hydrometer Method.
5.
D 1500 - Standard Test Method for ASTM Color of Petroleum Products (ASTM
Color Scale).
May 2014
16950-1
9408A10
6.
7.
8.
1.03
D 1524 - Standard Test Method for Visual Examination of Used Electrical

Insulating Oils of Petroleum Origin in the Field.
D 1816 - Standard Test Method for Dielectric Breakdown Voltage of Insulating
Liquids Using VDE Electrodes.
D 3612 - Standard Test Method for Analysis of Gases Dissolved in Electrical
Insulating Oil by Gas Chromatography.
D.

1.
43 - IEEE Recommended Practice for Testing Insulation Resistance of
Rotating Machinery.
2.
81 - IEEE Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance, and
Earth Surface Potentials of a Grounding System.
3.
95 - IEEE Recommended Practice for Insulation Testing of AC Electric
Machinery (2300 V and Above) With High Direct Voltage.
4.
450 - IEEE Recommended Practice for Maintenance, Testing, and
Replacement of Vented Lead-Acid Batteries for Stationary Applications.
5.
C57.13 - IEEE Standard Requirements for Instrument Transformers.
6.
C57.13.1 - IEEE Guide for Field Testing of Relaying Current Transformers.
7.
C57.13.3 - IEEE Guide for Grounding of Instrument Transformer Secondary
Circuits and Cases.
8.
C57.104 - IEEE Guide for the Interpretation of Gases Generated in OilImmersed Transformers.
E.
Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA).
F.
InterNational Electrical Testing Association (NETA).

1. ATS-2009 Standard for Standard for Acceptance Testing Specifications for
Electrical Power Equipment and Systems.
G.
International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC).
H.
Manufacturers testing recommendations and instruction manuals.
I.

1.
70 - National Electrical Code (NEC).
2.
110 - Standard for Emergency and Standby Power Systems.
J.
National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST).
K.
Specification sections for the electrical equipment being tested.
L.
Shop drawings.
DEFINITIONS
A.
B.
1.
Testing laboratory: The organization performing acceptance tests.
May 2014
16950-2
9408A10
1.04
1.05
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
Testing of all electrical equipment installed under this Contract in accordance with
the manufacturers requirements and as specified in this Section.
B.
Conduct all tests in the presence of the Engineer or the Engineers representative:
1.
The Engineer will witness all visual, mechanical and electrical tests and
inspections.
C.
The testing and inspections shall verify that the equipment is operational within the
tolerances required and expected by the manufacturer, and these Specifications.
The results of the tests shall determine the suitability for continued reliable
operation.
D.
Responsibilities:
1.
Contractor responsibilities:
a. Ensure that all resources are made available for testing, and that all
testing requirements are met.
2.
Electrical subcontractor responsibilities:
a. Perform routine tests during installation.
b. Demonstrate operation of electrical equipment.
c. Commission the electrical installation.
d. Provide the necessary services during testing, and provide these services
to the testing laboratory, Contractor, and other subcontractors, including
but not limited to:
1) Providing electrical power as required.
2) Operating of electrical equipment in conjunction with testing of other
equipment.
3) Activating and shutting down electrical circuits.
4) Making and recording electrical measurements.
5) Replacing blown fuses.
6) Installing temporary jumpers.
3.
Testing laboratory responsibilities:
a. Perform all acceptance tests as defined in this Section.
b. Provide all required equipment, materials, labor, and technical support
during acceptance tests.
E.
Upon completion of testing or calibration, attach a label to all serviced devices:

1.
The label shall indicate the date serviced and the company that performed the
service.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
LAN cable test form:

1.
LAN cable test reports:
a. Submit 3 copies of test reports showing the results of all tests specified in
this Section:
1) Test type.
2) Test location.
3) Test date.
4) Cable number.
May 2014
16950-3
9408A10
b.
1.06
5) Cable length.
6) Certification that the cable meets or exceeds the specified standard.
Furnish hard copy and electronic copy for all traces.
C.
Test report:
1.
Include the following:
a. Summary of Project.
b. Description of equipment tested.
c. Description of tests performed.
d. Test results.
e. Conclusions and recommendations.
f. Completed test forms.
g. List of test equipment used and calibration dates.
h. LAN cable test reports.
D.
Testing laboratory qualifications:

1.
Submit a complete resume and statement of qualifications from the proposed
testing laboratory detailing their experiences in performing the tests specified:
a. This statement will be used to determine whether the laboratory is
acceptable, and shall include:
1) Corporate history and references.
2) Resume of individual performing test.
3) Equipment list and test calibration data.
E.
Division of responsibilities:
1.
Submit a list identifying who is responsible for performing each portion of the
testing.
F.
Manufacturers testing procedures:

1.
Submit manufacturers recommended testing procedures and acceptable test
results for review by the Engineer.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
Testing laboratory qualifications:

1.
The testing laboratory may be qualified testing personnel from the electrical
subcontractors staff or an independent testing company.
2.
Selection of the testing laboratory and testing personnel is subject to approval
by the Engineer based on testing experience and certifications of the
individuals and testing capabilities of the organization.
1.07
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION (NOT USED)
1.08

A.
1.09
SEQUENCING
A.
Perform testing in the following sequence:

1.
Perform routine tests as the equipment is installed including:
May 2014
16950-4
9408A10
2.
3.
4.
5.
a. Insulation resistance tests.

b. Continuity tests.
c. Rotational tests.
Adjusting and preliminary calibration.
Acceptance tests.
Demonstration.
Commissioning and plant start-up.
1.10
1.11
WARRANTY
A.
1.12
1.13
1.14
COMMISSIONING
1.15
A.
Commissioning and plant start-up, as described in the Specifications, shall not

begin until acceptance testing is complete, and operation has been demonstrated to
the satisfaction of the Engineer.
B.
Commissioning shall only be attempted as a function of normal plant operation in

which plant process flows and levels are routine and equipment operates
automatically in response to flow and level parameters or computer command, as
applicable:
1.
Simulation of process parameters will be considered only upon receipt of a
written request by the Contractor.
C.
Record all motor currents during normal operation.
D.
Record the indications of all power meters every half-hour during commissioning.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
2.02
2.03
2.04
2.05
2.06
2.07
May 2014
16950-5
9408A10
2.08
MIXES (NOT USED)
2.09
2.10
FINISHES (NOT USED)
2.11

A.
PART 3
General:
1.
Test instrument calibration:
a. Utilize a testing laboratory with a calibration program which maintains all
applicable test instrumentation within rated accuracy.
b. The accuracy shall be traceable to the NIST in an unbroken chain.
c. Calibrate instruments in accordance with the following frequency
schedule:
1) Field instruments: 6 months maximum.
2) Laboratory instruments: 12 months maximum.
3) Leased specialty equipment where the accuracy is guaranteed by the
lessor (such as Doble): 12 months maximum.
d. Dated calibration labels shall be visible on all test equipment.
e. Maintain an up-to-date instrument calibration record for each test
instrument:
1) The records shall show the date and results of each calibration or
test.
f. Maintain an up-to-date instrument calibration instruction and procedure for
each test instrument.
EXECUTION
3.01
3.02
PREPARATION
A.
Do not begin testing until the following conditions have been met:
1.
All instruments required are available and in proper operating condition.
2.
All required dispensable materials such as solvents, rags, and brushes are
available.
3.
All equipment handling devices such as cranes, vehicles, chain falls and other
lifting equipment are available or scheduled.
4.
All instruction books, calibration curves, or other printed material to cover the
electrical devices are available.
5.
Data sheets to record all test results are available.
3.03
INSTALLATION (NOT USED)
3.04
3.05
3.06
May 2014
16950-6
9408A10
3.07

A.
Switchgear and switchboard:

1.
Visual and mechanical inspection:
a. Compare equipment nameplate data with that indicated on the Drawings
b. Inspect physical and mechanical condition.
c. Inspect anchorage, alignment, grounding and required area clearances.
d. Inspect equipment for cleanliness.
e. Verify that circuit breaker/fuse sizes and types correspond to the
approved submittals and the coordination study.
f. Verify that current and voltage transformer ratios correspond to that
g. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one of the
following methods:
1) Use of low resistance ohmmeter.
2) Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by the
calibrated torque wrench method:
a) Refer to manufacturers instructions for proper foot-pound levels
or NETA ATS tables.
h. Mechanical and electrical interlocks:
1) Attempt closure on locked-open devices.
2) Attempt to open locked-closed devices.
3) Make/attempt key-exchanges in all positions.
i.
Lubrication requirements:
1) Verify appropriate lubrication on moving current-carrying parts.
2) Verify appropriate lubrication on moving and sliding surfaces.
j.
Inspect insulators for evidence of physical damage or contaminated
surfaces.
k. Verify correct barrier and shutter installation and operation.
l.
Exercise all active components.
m. Inspect all indicating devices for correct operation.
n. Verify that filters are in place and/or vents are clear.
o. Perform visual and mechanical inspection of instrument transformers as
p. Inspect control power transformers:
1) Inspect for physical damage, cracked insulation, broken leads,
tightness of connections, defective wiring, and overall general
condition.
2) Verify that primary and secondary fuse/circuit breaker ratings match
the submittal drawings.
3) Verify correct functioning of drawout disconnecting and grounding
contacts and interlocks.
2.
Electrical tests:
a. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with a lowresistance ohmmeter if applicable.
b. Perform insulation-resistance tests on each bus section, phase-to-phase
and phase-to-ground for 1 minute.
1) Perform test in accordance with NETA ATS tables.
c. Perform a dielectric withstand voltage test on each bus section, each
phase to ground with phases not under test grounded, in accordance with
May 2014
16950-7
9408A10
3.
manufacturers published data or NETA ATS tables. Apply the test voltage
for 1 minute.
d. Perform insulation-resistance tests on control wiring with respect to
ground. Applied potential shall be 500 VDC for 300-volt rated cable and
1,000 VDC for 600-volt rated cable. Apply the test voltage for 1 minute:
1) For solid state devices that cannot tolerate the applied voltage, follow
the manufacturers recommendation.
e. Perform electrical tests on instrument transformers as specified in this
Section.
f. Perform ground-resistance tests:
1) Perform point-to-point tests to determine the resistance between the
main grounding system and all major electrical equipment frames,
system neutral and derived neutral points.
g. Determine the accuracy of all meters.
h. Control power transformers:
1) Perform insulation resistance tests. Perform measurements from
winding-to-winding and each winding-to-ground:
a) Test voltages shall be in accordance with NETA ATS tables or
as specified by the manufacturer.
2) Perform secondary wiring integrity test:
a) Disconnect transformer at secondary terminals and connect
secondary wiring to a rated secondary voltage source:
(1) Verify correct potential at all devices.
3) Verify correct secondary voltage by energizing primary winding with
system voltage:
a) Measure secondary voltage with the secondary wiring
disconnected.
i.
Voltage transformers:
1) Perform secondary wiring integrity test:
a) Verify correct potential at all devices.
2) Verify correct secondary voltage by energizing primary winding with
system voltage.
j.
Perform current injection tests on the entire current circuit of each
switchgear or switchboard:
1) Perform current tests by secondary injection with magnitudes such
that a minimum current of 1.0 ampere flows in the secondary circuit:
a) Verify the correct magnitude of current at each device in the
circuit.
k. Perform system function tests.
l.
Verify operation of space heaters.
m. Perform phasing check on double-ended or dual-source equipment to
ensure correct bus phasing from each source.
Test values:
a. Compare bolted connection resistance values to values of similar
connections:
1) Investigate values which deviate from those of similar bolted
connections by more than 50 percent of the lowest value.
b. Bolt-torque levels shall be in accordance with manufacturers published
data:
1) Refer to NETA ATS tables in the absence of manufacturers
published data.
c. Compare bus connection resistances to values of similar connections.
May 2014
16950-8
9408A10
1)
Investigate values which deviate from those of similar bolted

2) Insulation-resistance values of bus insulation shall be in accordance
with manufacturers published data:
a) Refer to NETA ATS tables in the absence of manufacturers
published data.
b) Investigate insulation values less than the allowable minimum.
c) Do not proceed with dielectric withstand voltage tests until
insulation-resistance values are above minimum values.
d. If no evidence of distress or insulation failure is observed by the end of the
total time of voltage application during the dielectric withstand test, the
test specimen is considered to have passed the test.
e. Insulation-resistance values for control wiring shall not be less than
2 megohms.
f. Instrument transformer test values as specified in this Section.
g. Investigate grounding system resistance values that exceed 0.5 ohm.
h. Meter accuracy shall be in accordance with manufacturers published
data.
i.
Control power transformers:
1) Insulation resistance values of control power transformers shall be in
accordance with manufacturers published data:
published data.
2) Secondary wiring shall be as indicated on the Drawings and specified
3) Secondary voltage shall be as indicated on the Drawings.
j.
Voltage transformers:
1) Secondary wiring shall be as indicated on the Drawings and specified
2) Secondary voltage shall be as indicated on the Drawings.
k. Current-injection tests shall prove current wiring is as indicated on the
Drawings and specified in the Specifications.
l.
Results of system function tests shall match the Drawings and
Specifications.
m. Heaters shall be operational.
n. Phasing checks shall prove the switchgear or switchboard phasing is
correct and as indicated on the Drawings and specified in the
Specifications.
B.
Dry type transformers:

1.
c. Inspect anchorage, alignment, and grounding.
d. Verify that resilient mounts are free and that any shipping brackets have
been removed.
e. Inspect equipment for cleanliness.
May 2014
16950-9
9408A10
f.
2.
3.
C.
Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one of the
following methods:
or NETA ATS tables.
g. Verify that as-left tap connections are as specified.
Electrical tests:
a. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with a lowresistance ohmmeter.
b. Perform insulation-resistance tests winding-to-winding and each windingto-ground:
1) Apply voltage in accordance with manufacturers published data.
published data.
c. Calculate dielectric absorption ration or polarization index.
d. Verify correct secondary voltage, phase-to-phase and phase-to-neutral
after energization and before loading.
Test values:
connections:
data:
published data.
c. Tap connections are left as found unless otherwise specified.
d. Minimum insulation resistance values of transformer insulation shall be in
published data.
2) Investigate insulation values less than the allowable minimum.
e. The dielectric absorption ratio or polarization index shall not be less than
1.0.
f. Turns-ratio results should not deviate more than 1/2 percent from either
the adjacent coils or calculated ratio.
g. Phase-to-phase and phase-to-neutral secondary voltages shall be in
agreement with nameplate data.
Liquid-filled transformers:
1.
c. Inspect impact recorder before unloading.
d. Test dew point of tank gases if applicable.
e. Inspect anchorage, alignment, grounding and required clearances.
f. Verify the presence of PCB content labeling.
g. Verify removal of any shipping bracing after placement.
h. Verify the bushings are clean.
May 2014
16950-10
9408A10
i.
2.
Verify that alarm, control and trip settings on temperature and level
indicators are as specified.
j.
Verify operation of alarm, control, and trip circuits from temperature and
level indicators, pressure relief device, gas accumulator, and fault
pressure relay, if applicable.
k. Verify that cooling fans operate correctly and that fan motors have correct
overcurrent protection.
l.
following methods:
or NETA ATS tables.
m. Verify correct liquid level in tanks and bushings.
n. Verify that positive pressure is maintained on gas-blanketed transformers.
o. Perform inspections and mechanical tests as recommended by the
manufacturer.
p. Test load tap-changer in accordance with NETA ATS requirements.
q. Verify presence of transformer surge arresters.
r. Verify de-energized tap-changer position is left as specified.
Electrical tests:
b. Perform insulation-resistance tests winding-to-winding and each windingto-ground:
1) Apply voltage in accordance with manufacturers published data:
published data.
2) Calculate polarization index.
c. Perform turns ratio tests at all tap positions.
d. Perform insulation power-factor or dissipation-factor tests on all windings
in accordance with test equipment manufacturers published data.
e. Perform power-factor or dissipation-factor tests on each bushing equipped
with a power-factor/capacitance tap:
1) In the absence of a power-factor/capacitance tap perform hot-collar
tests.
2) Perform tests in accordance with test equipment manufacturers
published data.
f. Perform excitation-current tests in accordance with test equipment
manufacturers published data.
g. Measure the resistance of each primary winding in each no-load tap
changer position. Measure the resistance of each secondary winding in
each no-load tap changer position.
h. Remove a sample of insulating liquid in accordance with ASTM D 923 and
test per the following standards::
1) Dielectric breakdown voltage: ASTM D 877 or ASTM D 1816.
2) Acid neutralization number: ASTM D 974.
3) Specific gravity: ASTM D 1298.
4) Interfacial tension: ASTM D 971
5) Color: ASTM D 1500.
6) Visual condition: ASTM D 1524.
May 2014
16950-11
9408A10
i.
3.
Remove a sample of insulating liquid in accordance with applicable

standards. Sample shall be tested for the following:
1) Dissolved-gas analysis: IEEE C57.104 or ASTM D 3612.
j.
Perform electrical tests on instrument transformers as specified in this
Section:
k. Test surge arresters as specified in this Section.
l.
Test transformer neutral grounding impedance device if applicable.
Test values:
a. Alarm control, and trip circuits from temperature and level indicators as
well as pressure relief device and fault pressure relay shall operate within
manufacturers recommendations for their specified settings.
b. Cooling fans and pumps shall operate.
c. Compare bolted connection resistance values to values of similar
connections:
d. Bolt-torque levels shall be in accordance with manufacturers published
data:
published data.
e. Liquid levels in the transformer tanks and bushings shall be within
indicated tolerances.
f. Positive pressure shall be indicated on pressure gauge for gas-blanketed
transformers.
g. Minimum insulation resistance values of transformer insulation shall be in
published data.
h. The polarization index shall be greater than 1.0:
1) Compare to any previous values.
i.
Turns-ratio test result shall not deviate by more than 1/2-percent from
either the adjacent coils or the calculated ratio.
j.
Maximum winding insulation power-factor/dissipation-factor values shall
be in accordance with the manufacturers published data:
published data.
k. Investigate bushing power factors and capacitances that vary from
nameplate values by more than 10 percent. Hot collar tests are evaluated
on a milliampere/milliwatt loss basis and the results shall be compared to
values of similar bushings.
l.
Typical excitation-current test data pattern for a three-legged core
transformer is 2 similar current readings and 1 lower current reading.
m. Temperature corrected winding-resistance values shall compare within
1 percent of previously obtained results.
n. Core insulation values shall be comparable to previously obtained results
but not be less than 1.0 megohm at 500 VDC.
o. Investigate the presence of oxygen in the nitrogen gas blanket.
p. Insulating liquid values shall be in accordance with NETA ATS tables.
q. Evaluate results of dissolved-gas analysis in accordance with IEEE
C57.104.
May 2014
16950-12
9408A10
r.
s.
t.
D.
Results of electrical tests on instrument transformers shall be as specified

in this Section.
Results of surge arrester tests shall be as specified in this Section.
Compare grounding impedance device results to the manufacturers
published data.
Cables, 600 volts and less:

1.
a. Compare cable data with that indicated on the Drawings and specified in
the Specifications.
b. Inspect exposed sections of cables for physical damage and correct
connection as indicated on the Drawings.
c. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one of the
following methods:
or NETA ATS tables.
d. Inspect compression-applied connectors for correct cable match and
indentation.
e. Inspect for correct identification and arrangements.
f. Inspect jacket insulation and condition.
2.
Electrical tests:
a. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with lowresistance ohmmeter.
b. Perform insulation-resistance tests on each conductor with respect to
ground and adjacent conductors:
1) Applied voltage shall be:
a) 500 VDC for 300-volt rated cable.
b) 1,000 VDC for 600-volt rated cable.
2) Test duration shall be 1 minute.
c. Perform continuity tests to ensure correct cable connection.
d. Verify uniform resistance of parallel conductors.
3.
Test values:
connections:
data:
published data.
c. Insulation resistance values shall be in accordance with manufacturers
published data:
published data.
2) Investigate values of insulation resistance less than the allowable
minimum.
d. Cables shall exhibit continuity.
e. Investigate deviations in resistance between parallel conductors.
May 2014
16950-13
9408A10
E.
Medium voltage cables:

1.
a. Compare cable data with that indicated on the Drawings and specified in
the Specifications.
b. Inspect exposed sections of cables for physical damage.
following methods:
or NETA ATS tables.
d. Inspect compression-applied connectors for correct cable match and
indentation.
e. Inspect shield grounding, cable support, and terminations.
f. Verify the visible bends meet or exceed ICEA and manufacturers
published minimum allowable bending radius.
g. If cables are terminated through window-type current transformers,
inspect to verify that neutral and ground conductors are correctly placed
and that shields are correctly terminated for operation of protective
devices.
h. Inspect for correct identification and arrangements.
i.
Inspect jacket insulation and condition.
2.
Electrical tests:
a. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with lowresistance ohmmeter.
b. Perform an insulation resistance test individually on each conductor with
all other conductors and shields grounded:
1) Apply voltage in accordance with manufacturers published data:
published data.
c. Perform shield-continuity test on each power cable.
d. In accordance with ICEA, IEC, IEEE, and other power cable consensus
standards, testing can be performed by means of direct current, power
frequency alternating current or very low frequency alternating current.
These sources may be used to perform insulation resistance tests, and
baseline diagnostic tests such as partial discharge analysis, and power
factor or power dissipation factor. The selection shall be made after an
evaluation of the available test methods and a review of the installed
cable system. Some of available test methods are as follows:
1) Dielectric withstand:
a) Direct current dielectric withstand voltage.
b) Very low frequency dielectric withstand voltage.
c) Power frequency dielectric withstand voltage.
2) Baseline diagnostic tests:
a) Power factor/dissipation factor (tan delta):
(1) Power frequency.
(2) Very low frequency.
b) Direct current insulation resistance.
c) Off-line partial discharge:
(1) Power frequency.
(2) Very low frequency.
May 2014
16950-14
9408A10
3.
F.
Test values:
connections:
data:
published data.
c. The minimum bend radius to which insulated cables may be bent for
permanent training shall be in accordance with NETA ATS tables.
d. Insulation resistance values shall be in accordance with manufacturers
published data:
published data.
minimum.
e. Shielding shall exhibit continuity:
1) Investigate resistance values in excess of ten ohms per 1,000 feet of
cable.
f. If no evidence of distress of insulation failure is observed by the end of the
g. Based on the test methodology chosen, refer to the applicable standards
or manufacturers literature for acceptable values.
Low voltage molded case and insulated case circuit breakers:

1.
c. Inspect anchorage and alignment.
d. Verify the unit is clean.
e. Operate circuit breaker to ensure smooth operation.
f. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance by one of the
following methods:
or NETA ATS tables.
g. Inspect operating mechanism, contacts, and arc chutes in unsealed units.
h. Perform adjustments for final protective device settings in accordance with
the coordination study.
2.
Electrical tests:
a. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with a low
resistance ohmmeter.
b. Perform insulation resistance tests for 1 minute on each pole, phase-tophase and phase-to-ground with the circuit breaker closed and across
each open pole:
May 2014
16950-15
9408A10
2)
3.
Refer to NETA ATS tables in the absence of manufacturers

published data.
c. Perform a contact/pole-resistance test.
d. Determine long-time pickup and delay by primary current injection.
e. Determine short-time pickup and delay by primary current injection.
f. Determine ground-fault pickup and delay by primary current injection.
g. Determine instantaneous pickup value by primary current injection.
h. Perform minimum pickup voltage tests on shunt trip and close coils in
accordance with manufacturers published data.
i.
Verify correct operation of any auxiliary features such as trip and pickup
indicators, zone interlocking, electrical close and trip operation, trip-free,
antipump function and trip unit battery condition:
1) Reset all trip logs and indicators.
j.
Verify operation of charging mechanism.
Test values:
connections:
data:
published data.
published data:
published data.
minimum.
d. Microhm or dc millivolt drop values shall not exceed the high levels of the
normal range as indicated in the manufacturers published data:
1) If manufacturers data is not available, investigate any values which
deviate from adjacent poles or similar breakers by more than
50 percent of the lowest value.
e. Insulation resistance values of control wiring shall not be less than
2 megohms.
f. Long-time pickup values shall be as specified, and the trip characteristic
shall not exceed manufacturers published time-current characteristic
tolerance band including adjustment factors:
1) If manufacturers curves are not available, trip times shall not exceed
the value shown in NETA ATS tables.
g. Short-time pickup values shall be as specified, and the trip characteristic
shall not exceed manufacturers published time-current tolerance band.
h. Ground fault pickup values shall be as specified, and the trip characteristic
shall not exceed manufacturers published time-current tolerance band.
i.
Instantaneous pickup values shall be as specified and within
manufacturers published tolerances:
published data.
j.
Pickup values and trip characteristics shall be within manufacturers
published tolerances.
May 2014
16950-16
9408A10
k.
Minimum pickup voltage of the shunt trip and close coils shall conform to
the manufacturers published data:
published data.
l.
Breaker open, close, trip, trip-free, antipump, and auxiliary features shall
function as designed.
m. The charging mechanism shall operate in accordance with manufacturers
published data.
G.
Medium voltage vacuum circuit breakers:

1.
c. Inspect anchorage and alignment and grounding.
d. Verify that all maintenance devices, such as special tools and gauges
specified by the manufacturer, are available for servicing and operating
the breaker.
e. Verify the unit is clean.
f. Perform all mechanical operation tests on the operating mechanism in
g. Measure critical distances such as contact gap as recommended by the
manufacturer.
h. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance by one of the
following methods:
or NETA ATS tables.
i.
Verify cell fit and element alignment.
j.
Verify racking mechanism operation.
k. Lubrication requirements:
l.
Record as-found and as-left operation counter readings.
2.
Electrical tests:
b. Perform insulation resistance tests for 1 minute on each pole, phase-tophase and phase to ground with the circuit breaker closed, and across
each open pole:
1) Test voltage shall be in accordance with manufacturers published
data.
published data.
c. Perform insulation-resistance tests on control wiring with respect to
ground. Applied potential shall be 500 VDC for-300 volt rated cable and
1) For solid state devices that can not tolerate the applied voltage,
follow the manufacturers recommendation.
d. Perform a contact/pole-resistance test.
May 2014
16950-17
9408A10
e.
3.
Perform minimum pickup voltage tests on trip and close coils in

f. Verify correct operation of any auxiliary features such as electrical close
and trip operation, trip-free and antipump function.
g. Trip circuit breaker by operation of each protective device.
1) Reset all trip logs and indicators.
h. Perform vacuum bottle integrity (dielectric withstand) test across each
vacuum bottle with the breaker in the open position in strict accordance
with the manufacturers published data. Do not exceed the maximum
voltage stipulated for this test:
1) Provide adequate barriers and protection against x-radiation during
this test.
2) Do not perform this test unless the contact displacement of each
interrupter is within manufacturers published tolerance.
3) Be aware that some dc high-potential test sets are half-wave rectified
and may produce peak voltages in excess of breaker manufacturers
recommended maximum.
i.
Perform a dielectric withstand voltage test in accordance with
j.
Verify operation of heaters.
k. Test instrument transformers as specified in this Section.
Test values:
a. Critical distance measurements such as contact gap shall be in
b. Compare bolted connection resistance values to values of similar
connections:
c. Bolt-torque levels shall be in accordance with manufacturers published
data:
published data.
d. Travel and velocity values shall be accordance with manufacturers
published data.
e. Operations counter shall advance 1 digit per close-open cycle.
f. Insulation resistance values shall be in accordance with manufacturers
published data:
published data.
minimum.
g. Insulation resistance values of control wiring shall not be less than
2 megohms.
h. Microhm or dc millivolt drop values shall not exceed the high levels of the
normal range as indicated in the manufacturers published data:
1) If manufacturers data is not available, investigate any values which
deviate from adjacent poles or similar breakers by more than
50 percent of the lowest value.
i.
Minimum pickup voltage of the trip and close coils shall conform to the
manufacturers published data:
published data.
May 2014
16950-18
9408A10
j.
Auxiliary features shall operate in accordance with manufacturers

published data.
k. Protective devices shall operate the breaker per system design.
l.
If no evidence of distress of insulation failure is observed by the end of the
total time of voltage application during the vacuum bottle integrity test, the
m. If no evidence of distress of insulation failure is observed by the end of the
n. Heaters shall be operational.
o. The results of instrument transformer tests shall be as specified in this
Section.
H.
Protective relays, microprocessor based:

1.
a. Record model number, style number, serial number, firmware revision,
software revision and rated control voltage.
b. Verify operation of light-emitting diodes, display, and targets.
c. Record passwords for all access levels.
d. Clean the front panel and remove foreign material from the case.
e. Check tightness of connections.
f. Verify that the frame is grounded in accordance with manufacturers
instructions.
g. Set the relay in accordance with the coordination study.
h. Download settings from the relay. Print a copy of the settings for the
report and compare the settings to those specified in the coordination
study.
2.
Electrical tests:
a. Perform insulation resistance tests from each circuit to the grounded
frame in accordance with the manufacturers published data.
b. Apply voltage or current to all analog inputs and verify correct registration
of the relay meter functions.
c. Functional operation:
1) Check functional operation of each element used in the protection
scheme.
2) 27 undervoltage relay:
a) Determine dropout voltage.
b) Determine time delay.
c) Determine time delay at a second point on the timing curve for
inverse time relays.
3) 47 phase sequence or phase balance voltage relay:
a) Determine positive sequence voltage to close the normally open
contact.
b) Determine positive sequence voltage to open the normally
closed contact (undervoltage trip).
c) Verify negative sequence trip.
d) Determine time delay to close the normally open contact with
sudden application of 120 percent of pickup.
e) Determine time delay to close the normally closed contact upon
removal of voltage when previously set to rated system voltage.
4) 50 instantaneous overcurrent relay:
a) Determine pickup.
May 2014
16950-19
9408A10
d.
e.
I.
b) Determine dropout.
c) Determine time delay.
5) 51 time overcurrent:
a) Determine minimum pickup.
b) Determine time delay at 2 points on the time current curve.
6) 59 overvoltage relay:
a) Determine overvoltage pickup.
b) Determine time delay to close the contact with sudden
application of 120 percent of pickup.
7) 81 frequency relay:
a) Verify frequency setpoints.
b) Determine time delay.
c) Determine underfrequency cutoff.
8) 87 differential:
a) Determine operating unit pickup.
b) Determine the operation of each restraint unit.
c) Determine slope.
d) Determine harmonic restraint.
e) Determine instantaneous pickup.
f) Plot operating characteristics for each restraint.
Control verification:
1) Functional tests:
a) Check operation of all active digital inputs.
b) Check all output contacts or SCRs preferably by operating the
controlled device such as circuit breaker, auxiliary relay or
alarm.
c) Check all internal logic functions used in the protection scheme.
d) For pilot schemes, perform a loop-back test to check the receive
and transmit communications circuits.
e) For pilot schemes, perform satellite synchronized end-to-end
tests.
f) For pilot schemes with direct transfer trip (DTT) perform transmit
and received DTT at each terminal.
g) Upon completion of testing reset all min/max recorders,
communications statistics, fault counters, sequence of events
recorder and all event records.
2) In-service monitoring:
a) After the equipment is initially energized, measure magnitude
and phase angle of all inputs and compare to expected values.
Metering verification:
1) Verify accuracy of meter at all cardinal points.
2) Calibrate meters in accordance with manufacturers published data.
Instrument transformers:
1.
c. Verify correct connection of transformers with system requirements.
d. Verify that adequate clearances exist between primary and secondary
circuit wiring.
e. Verify the unit is clean.
May 2014
16950-20
9408A10
f.
2.
3.
following methods:
2) Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by
or NETA ATS tables.
g. Verify that all required grounding and shorting connections provide
contact.
h. Verify correct operation of transformer withdrawal mechanism and
grounding operation.
i.
Verify correct primary and secondary fuse sizes for voltage transformers.
j.
Verify appropriate lubrication on moving current-carrying parts and on
moving and sliding surfaces.
Electrical tests - current transformers:
b. Perform insulation resistance test of each current transformer and its
secondary wiring with respect to ground at 1,000 VDC for 1 minute:
c. Perform a polarity test of each current transformer in accordance with
IEEE C57.13.1.
d. Perform a ratio verification test using the voltage or current method in
accordance with IEEE C57.13.1.
e. Perform an excitation test on current transformers used for relaying
applications in with accordance with IEEE C57.13.1.
f. Measure current circuit burdens at transformer terminals in accordance
with IEEE C57.13.1.
g. When applicable perform insulation resistance tests on the primary
winding with the secondary grounded:
1) Test voltages shall be in accordance with NETA ATS tables.
h. When applicable perform dielectric withstand tests on the primary winding
with the secondary grounded:
1) Test voltages shall be in accordance with NETA ATS tables.
i.
Perform power-factor or dissipation-factor tests in accordance with test
equipment manufacturers published data.
j.
Verify that current transformer secondary circuits are grounded and have
only 1 grounding point in accordance with IEEE C57.13.3:
1) That grounding point should be located as specified by the Engineer
in the Contract Documents.
Electrical tests - voltage transformers:
b. Perform insulation resistance tests winding-to-winding and winding-toground:
1) Test voltage shall be applied for 1 minute in accordance with NETA
ATS requirements.
c. Perform a polarity test on each voltage transformer to verify the polarity
marks on H1- X1 relationship as applicable.
May 2014
16950-21
9408A10
d.
e.
f.
4.
J.
Perform a turns ratio test on all tap positions.

Measure voltage circuit burdens at transformer terminals.
Perform a dielectric withstand test on the primary windings with the
secondary windings grounded:
1) The dielectric voltage shall be in accordance with NETA ATS tables.
2) Apply the test voltage for 1 minute.
g. Perform power-factor or dissipation-factor tests in accordance with test
equipment manufacturers published data.
h. Verify that voltage transformer secondary circuits are grounded and have
only 1 grounding point in accordance with IEEE C57.13.3:
1) That grounding point should be located as specified by the Engineer
in the Contract Documents.
Test values:
connections:
data:
published data.
c. Insulation resistance values of instrument transformers shall be in
published data.
d. Polarity results shall agree with transformer markings.
e. Ratio errors shall be in accordance with IEEE C57.13.
f. Excitation results for current transformers shall match the curve supplied
by the manufacturer or be in accordance with IEEE C57.13.1.
g. Measured burdens shall be compared to instrument transformer ratings.
h. If no evidence of distress or insulation failure is observed by the end of the
current transformer primary winding is considered to have passed the test.
i.
If no evidence of distress or insulation failure is observed by the end of the
voltage transformer primary windings are considered to have passed the
test.
j.
Power-factor or dissipation-factor values shall be in accordance with
published data.
k. Test results shall indicate that the circuits have only 1 grounding point.
Grounding systems:
1.
a. Inspect ground system for compliance with that indicated on the
Drawings, specified in Specifications, and in the National Electrical Code.
following methods:
May 2014
16950-22
9408A10
2)
2.
3.
K.
Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by

or NETA ATS tables.
d. Inspect anchorage.
Electrical tests:
b. Perform fall of potential test or alternative test in accordance with IEEE 81
on the main grounding electrode or system.
c. Perform point-to-point tests to determine the resistance between the main
grounding system and all major electrical equipment frames, the system
neutral and any derived neutral points.
Test values:
a. Grounding system electrical and mechanical connections shall be free of
corrosion.
connections:
c. Bolt torque levels shall be in accordance with manufacturers published
data:
published data.
d. The resistance between the main grounding electrode and ground shall
be as specified in Section 16060. Investigate point-to-point resistance
values that exceed 0.5 ohm.
Rotating machinery:
1.
a. Compare equipment nameplate information with that indicated on the
d. Inspect air baffles, filter media, cooling fans, slip rings, brushes, and brush
rigging.
e. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one of the
following methods:
or NETA ATS tables.
f. Perform special tests such as gap spacing and machine alignment if
applicable.
g. Verify correct application of appropriate lubrication and lubrication
systems.
h. Verify that resistance temperature detector (RTD) circuits conform to that
2.
Electrical tests:
May 2014
16950-23
9408A10
b.
3.
Perform insulation resistance test in accordance with IEEE 43:

1) On motors 200 horsepower and smaller, test duration shall be
1 minute. Calculate dielectric absorption ratio.
2) On motors larger than 200 horsepower, test duration shall be
10 minutes. Calculate polarization index.
c. Perform dc dielectric withstand voltage tests on machines rated at
2,300 volts and greater in accordance with IEEE 95.
d. Perform phase-to-phase stator resistance test on machines rated at
2,300 volts and greater.
e. Perform insulation resistance test on insulated bearings in accordance
with manufacturers published data.
f. Test surge protection devices as specified in this Section.
g. Test motor starter as specified in this Section.
h. Perform resistance tests on resistance temperature detector (RTD)
circuits.
i.
Verify operation of motor space heater.
j.
Perform vibration test.
k. Perform a rotation test to ensure correct shaft rotation.
l.
Measure running current and evaluate relative to load conditions and
nameplate full-load amperes.
Test values:
a. Inspection:
1) Air baffles shall be clean and installed in accordance with the
2) Filter media shall be clean and installed in accordance with the
3) Cooling fans shall operate.
4) Slip ring alignment shall be within manufacturers published
tolerances.
5) Brush alignment shall be within manufacturers published tolerances.
6) Brush rigging shall be within manufacturers published tolerances.
connections:
c. Bolt-torque levels shall be in accordance with manufacturers published
data:
published data.
d. Air-gap spacing and machine alignment shall be in accordance with
e. The dielectric absorption ratio or polarization index shall not be less than
1.0. The recommended minimum insulation (IR1 min) test results in
megohms shall be corrected to 40 degrees Celsius and read as follows:
1) IR1 min equals 100 megohms for dc armature and ac windings with
form-wound coils above 1 kilovolt.
2) IR1 min equals 5 megohms for machines and random-wound stator
coils and form-wound coils rated below 1 kilovolt.
a) Dielectric withstand voltage and surge comparison tests shall
not be performed on machines having lower values than those
indicated above.
May 2014
16950-24
9408A10
f.
If no evidence of distress or insulation failure is observed by the end of the

g. Investigate phase-to-phase stator resistance values that deviate by more
than 10 percent.
h. Power factor or dissipation factor values shall be compared to
1) In the absence of manufacturers published data compare values of
similar machines.
i.
Tip-up values shall indicate no significant increase in power factor.
j.
If no evidence of distress, insulation failure or waveform nesting is
observed by the end of the total time of voltage application during the
surge comparison test, the test specimen is considered to have passed
the test.
k. Bearing insulation resistance measurements shall be within
manufacturers published tolerances:
1) In the absence of manufacturers published data compare values of
similar machines.
l.
Test results of surge protection devices shall be as specified in this
Section.
m. Test results of motor starter equipment shall be as specified in this
Section.
n. RTD circuits shall conform to the design intent and machine protection
device manufacturers published data.
o. Heaters shall be operational.
p. Vibration amplitudes shall not exceed values in NETA ATS tables:
1) If values exceed those in the NETA ATS tables, perform a complete
vibration analysis.
q. Machine rotation should match required rotation of connected load.
r. Running phase-to-phase voltages should be within 1.0 percent. Running
currents shall be balanced and proportional to load condition and
nameplate data.
L.
Variable frequency drive systems:

1.
e. Ensure vent path openings are free from debris and that heat transfer
surfaces are clean.
f. Verify correct connections of circuit boards, wiring, disconnects, and
ribbon cables.
g. Motor running protection:
1) Verify drive overcurrent setpoints are correct for their application.
2) If drive is used to operate multiple motors, verify individual overload
element ratings are correct for their application.
3) Apply minimum and maximum speed setpoints. Verify setpoints are
within limitations of the load coupled to the motor.
h. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one of the
following methods:
May 2014
16950-25
9408A10
1)
2)
2.
3.
Use of low resistance ohmmeter.

Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by the
or NETA ATS tables.
i.
Verify correct fuse sizing in accordance with manufacturers published
data.
j.
Perform visual and mechanical inspection of input circuit breaker as
Electrical tests:
a. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with
low-resistance ohmmeter.
b. Test the motor overload relay elements by injecting primary current
through the overload circuit and monitoring trip time of the overload
element.
c. Perform insulation-resistance tests on control wiring with respect to
ground. Applied potential shall be 500 VDC for 300-volt rated cable and
d. Test for the following parameters in accordance with relay calibration
procedures specified in this Section or as recommended by the
manufacturer:
1) Input phase loss protection.
2) Input overvoltage protection.
3) Output phase rotation.
4) Overtemperature protection.
5) Direct current overvoltage protection.
6) Overfrequency protection.
7) Drive overload protection.
8) Fault alarm outputs.
e. Perform continuity tests on bonding conductors as specified in this
Section.
f. Perform start-up of drive in accordance with manufacturers published
data. Calibrate drive to the systems minimum and maximum speed
control signals.
g. Perform operational tests by initiating control devices:
1) Slowly vary drive speed between minimum and maximum. Observe
motor and load for unusual noise or vibration.
2) Verify operation of drive from remote start/stop and speed control
signals.
h. Perform electrical tests of input circuit breaker as specified in this Section.
Test values:
a. Compare bolted connection resistances to values of similar connections:
data:
published data.
c. Overload test trip times at 300 percent of overload element rating shall be
in accordance with manufacturers published time-current curve.
May 2014
16950-26
9408A10
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
M.
Test values for input circuit breaker shall be as specified in this Section.
Insulation-resistance values for control wiring shall not be less than
2.0 megohms.
Relay calibration results shall be as specified in this Section.
Continuity of bonding conductors shall be as specified in this Section.
Control devices shall perform in accordance with system requirements.
Operational tests shall conform to system design requirements.
Surge arresters, medium and high voltage:

1.
c. Inspect anchorage, alignment, grounding, and clearances.
d. Verify the arresters are clean.
following methods:
or NETA ATS tables.
f. Verify that the ground lead on each device is individually attached to a
ground bus or ground electrode.
g. Verify that stroke counter is correctly mounted and electrically connected,
if applicable.
h. Record stroke counter reading.
2.
Electrical tests:
a. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with a
low-resistance ohmmeter.
b. Perform an insulation-resistance test on each arrester, phase
terminal-to-ground:
published data.
c. Test grounding connection as specified in this Section.
3.
Test values:
a. Compare bolted connection resistances to values of similar connections.
data:
published data.
published data:
published data.
d. Resistance between the arrester ground terminal and the ground system
shall be less than 0.5 ohm.
May 2014
16950-27
9408A10
e.
N.
Watts-loss values are evaluated on a comparison basis with similar units

and test equipment manufacturers published data.
Engine generator:
1.
2.
Electrical and mechanical tests:
a. Perform insulation-resistance tests in accordance with IEEE 43:
1) Machines larger than 150 kilowatts: Test duration shall be
10 minutes. Calculate polarization index.
b. Test protective relay devices as specified in this Section.
c. Verify phase rotation, phasing, and synchronized operation as required by
the application.
d. Functionally test engine shutdown for low oil pressure, overtemperature,
overspeed, and other protection features as applicable.
e. Perform vibration test for each main bearing cap.
f. Conduct performance test in accordance with NFPA 110.
g. Verify correct functioning of governor and regulator.
3.
Test values:
a. Anchorage, alignment, and grounding should be in accordance with
manufacturers published data and system design.
b. The dielectric absorption ratio or polarization index shall be compared to
previously obtained results and should not be less than 1.0. The
recommended minimum insulation (IR1 min) test results in megohms shall
be corrected to 40 degrees Celsius and read as follows:
1) IR1 min equals kilovolt + 1 for most windings made before 1970, all
field windings, and others not described below.
a) kilovolt is the rated machine terminal-to-terminal voltage in rms
kilovolt.
2) IR1 min equals 100 megohms for most dc armature and ac windings
built after 1970 (form-wound coils).
3) IR1 min equals 5 megohms for most machines and random-wound
stator coils and form-wound coils rated below 1 kilovolt.
a) Dielectric withstand voltage and surge comparison tests shall
not be performed on machines having lower values than those
indicated above.
c. Protective relay device test results shall be as specified in this Section.
d. Phase rotation, phasing, and synchronizing shall be in accordance with
system design requirements.
e. Low oil pressure, overtemperature, overspeed, and other protection
features shall operate in accordance with manufacturers published data
and system design requirements.
f. Vibration levels shall be in accordance with manufacturers published data
and shall be compared to baseline data.
g. Performance tests shall conform to manufacturers published data and
NFPA 110.
h. Governor and regulator shall operate in accordance with manufacturers
published data and system design requirements.
May 2014
16950-28
9408A10
O.
LAN cable testing:

1.
Visual and mechanical inspections:
a. Compare cable type and connections with that indicated on the Drawings
b. Inspect cable and connectors for physical and mechanical damage.
c. Verify that all connectors are correctly installed.
2.
Pre-testing:
a. Test individual cables before installation:
1) Before physical placement of the cable, test each cable while on the
spool with a LAN certification test device.
2) Before the cable is installed, verify that the cable conforms to the
manufacturers attenuation specification and that no damage has
been done to the cable during shipping or handling.
3) The test shall be fully documented and the results submitted to the
Engineer, including a hard copy of all traces, before placement of the
cable.
4) The Engineer shall be notified if a cable fails to meet specification
and the cable shall not be installed unless otherwise directed by the
Engineer.
3.
Electrical tests:
a. Perform cable end-to-end testing on all installed cables after installation of
connectors from both ends of the cable.
b. Test shall include cable system performance tests and confirm the
absence of wiring errors.
4.
Test results:
a. Cables shall meet or exceed TIA standards for a Category 6 installation.
5.
Test equipment:
a. LAN certification equipment used for the testing shall be capable of testing
Category 6 cable installation to TIA proposed Level III accuracy. Tests
performed shall include:
1) Near end cross talk.
2) Attenuation.
3) Equal level far end cross talk.
4) Return loss.
5) Ambient noise.
6) Effective cable length.
7) Propagation delay.
8) Continuity/loop resistance.
b. LAN certification test equipment shall be able to store and produce plots
of the test results.
c. Acceptable manufacturers: The following or equal:
1) Agilent Technologies, WireScope 350.
P.
Direct-current systems, batteries, flooded lead-acid:

1.
a. Verify that battery area ventilation system is operable.
b. Verify existence of suitable eyewash equipment.
c. Compare equipment nameplate data with that indicated on the Drawings
d. Inspect physical and mechanical condition.
e. Verify adequacy of battery support racks, mounting, anchorage,
alignment, grounding and clearances.
May 2014
16950-29
9408A10
f.
2.
3.
Verify electrolyte level. Measure electrolyte specific gravity and

temperature levels.
g. Verify presence of flame arresters.
h. Verify the units are clean.
i.
Inspect spill containment installation.
j.
Verify application of an oxide inhibitor on battery terminal connections.
k. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one of the
following methods:
1) Use of low-resistance ohmmeter.
calibrated torque-wrench method.
NETA ATS tables.
Electrical tests:
a. Perform resistance measurements through all bolted connections with a
low-resistance ohmmeter if applicable.
b. Measure charger float and equalizing voltage levels. Adjust to battery
manufacturer's recommended settings.
c. Verify all charger functions and alarms.
d. Measure each cell voltage and total battery voltage with charger
energized and in float mode of operation.
e. Measure intercell connection resistances.
f. Perform internal ohmic measurement tests.
g. Perform a load test in accordance with manufacturer's published data or
IEEE 450.
h. Measure the battery system voltage from positive-to-ground and negativeto-ground.
Test values:
a. Test values - visual and mechanical:
1) Electrolyte level and specific gravity shall be within normal limits.
2) Compare bolted connection resistance values to values of similar
connections.
a) Investigate values which deviate from those of similar bolted
3) Bolt-torque levels shall be in accordance with manufacturer's
published data.
a) Refer to NETA ATS tables in the absence of manufacturer's
published data.
b. Test values - electrical:
connections.
a) Investigate values which deviate from those of similar bolted
2) Charger float and equalize voltage levels shall be in accordance with
battery manufacturer's published data.
3) The results of charger functions and alarms shall be in accordance
with manufacturer's published data.
4) Cell voltages shall be within 0.05 volt of each other or in accordance
with manufacturer's published data.
connections.
May 2014
16950-30
9408A10
a)
6)
7)
Q.

Cell internal ohmic values (resistance, impedance, or conductance)
shall not vary by more than 25 percent between identical cells in a
fully charged state.
Results of load tests shall be in accordance with manufacturer's
published data or IEEE 450.
Motor control centers, low voltage:

1.
Provide testing for modified portions of existing MCC.
2.
c. Inspect equipment for cleanliness.
d. Verify that circuit breaker/fuse sizes and types correspond to the
approved submittals and coordination study.
following methods:
or NETA ATS tables.
3) Thermographic survey.
f. Mechanical and electrical interlocks:
1) Attempt closure on locked-open devices.
2) Attempt to open locked-closed devices.
g. Lubrication requirements:
h. Inspect insulators for evidence of physical damage or contaminated
surfaces.
i.
Verify correct barrier and shutter installation and operation.
j.
Exercise all active components.
k. Inspect all indicating devices for correct operation.
l.
Verify that filters are in place and/or vents are clear.
m. Perform visual and mechanical inspection of circuit breakers as specified
in this Section.
3.
Electrical tests:
a. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with a lowresistance ohmmeter if applicable.
b. Perform insulation-resistance tests on each bus section, phase-to-phase
and phase-to-ground for 1 minute:
1) Perform test in accordance with NETA ATS tables.
c. Perform an dielectric withstand test on each bus section, each phase to
ground with phases not under test grounded, in accordance with
manufacturers published data or NETA ATS tables. Apply the test voltage
for 1 minute.
d. Perform electrical tests of circuit breakers as specified in this Section.
4.
Test values:
a. Compare bus connection resistances to values of similar connections:
May 2014
16950-31
9408A10
1)
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
R.

Bolt-torque levels shall be in accordance with manufacturers published
data:
published data.
Compare bus connection resistances to values of similar connections:
2) Insulation-resistance values for bus and control power transformers
shall be in accordance with manufacturers published data:
published data.
Bus insulation shall withstand the overpotential test voltage applied.
Insulation-resistance values for control wiring shall not be less than
2.0 megohms.
Meter accuracy shall be in accordance with manufacturers published
data.
Test values for circuit breakers shall be as specified in this Section.
Motor starters:
1.
Provide testing for existing RVAT starters for Pump Nos. 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5.
2.
a. Compare equipment nameplate information with that indicated on the
c. Verify the unit is clean.
d. Inspect contactors:
1) Verify mechanical operation.
e. Motor-running protection:
1) Verify overload element rating is correct for its application.
2) If motor running protection is provided by fuses, verify correct fuse
rating.
f. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one of the
following methods:
or NETA ATS tables.
3) Thermographic survey.
g. Lubrication requirements:
3.
Electrical tests:
May 2014
16950-32
9408A10
b.
4.
S.
Perform insulation resistance tests for 1 minute on each pole, phase-tophase and phase to ground with the starter closed, and across each open
pole for 1 minute:
1) Test voltage shall be in accordance with manufacturers published
data.
published data.
c. Test motor protection devices in accordance with manufacturers
published data.
d. Perform operational tests by initiating control devices.
Test values:
connections:
data:
published data.
c. Results of the thermographic survey shall be in accordance with NETA
ATS requirements.
d. Insulation resistance values shall be in accordance with manufacturers
published data:
published data.
minimum.
e. Insulation resistance values of control wiring shall not be less than
2 megohms.
f. Motor protection parameters shall be in accordance with manufacturers
published data.
g. Circuit breaker test results shall as specified in this Section.
h. Control devices shall perform in accordance with system design
requirements.
Pump Nos. 4 and 5 Bypass Testing:

1.
Provide additional testing for Pump Nos. 4 and 5 to test interlocking of the new
VFD with the existing RVAT starters.
a. Test interrupter switchgear (hereafter referred to as transfer switch) in
accordance with the switchgear requirements of this section.
b. Test variable frequency drives in accordance with the requirements of this
section.
c. Test existing RVAT starters in accordance with the requirements of this
section.
d. Coordinate with instrumentation and control system contractor to test the
complete control system to ensure that it is completely operational as
defined in Section 17101 and as indicated on the Drawings.
e. Coordinate with instrumentation and control system contractor to ensure
that all SCADA points associated with Pump Nos. 4 and 5 function
correctly during this testing.
2.
Test transfer switch to ensure that VFD and RVAT sources cannot be
paralleled.
May 2014
16950-33
9408A10
3.
4.
5.
6.
3.08
3.09
3.10
3.11
With the transfer switch in bypass condition, attempt to start the VFD both from
the VFD front panel and from the PCM and ensure that the start is prevented.
With the transfer switch in VFD condition, attempt to start the RVAT bypass
starter from the PCM and ensure that the start is prevented.
With the PCM selector for the pump in BYPASS condition, attempt to bump
start the pump from the local control panel. Ensure that the bypass RVAT
starter is energized and the VFD does not start.
With the PCM selector for the pump in LOCAL or REMOTE condition, attempt
to bump start the pump from the local control panel. Ensure that the VFD is
energized to start the pump and the bypass RVAT does not start.
ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust limit switches and level switches to their operating points before testing.
B.
Set pressure switches, flow switches, and timing relays to anticipated values before
testing:
1.
Final settings shall be as dictated by operating results during testing.
CLEANING
A.
B.
After the acceptance tests have been completed, dispose of all testing
expendables, vacuum all cabinets, and sweep clean all surrounding areas.

A.
B.
Subsystem demonstration:
1.
Subsystem, as used in this Section, means individual and groups of pumps,
conveyor systems, chemical feeders, air conditioning units, ventilation fans, air
compressors, blowers, lighting control systems and other electrically operated
or controlled equipment.
2.
Before demonstrating any subsystem:
a. Demonstrate proper operation of all alarm and status contacts.
b. Adjust and calibrate all process and control devices as accurately as
possible.
3.
Operate each subsystem in its manual mode:
a. Demonstrate compliance with all Contract requirements.
4.
After each subsystem has operated successfully in its manual mode, perform
automatic and remote operation demonstrations:
a. Verify that all features are fully operational and meet all Contract
requirements.
b. Demonstrate all operating modes and sequences, including proper start
and stop sequence of pumps, proper operation of valves and proper
speed control.
PROTECTION
A.
May 2014
16950-34
9408A10
3.12
SCHEDULES
A.
At least 30 days before commencement of the acceptance tests, submit the

manufacturers complete field testing procedures to the Engineer and to the testing
laboratory, complete with expected test results and tolerances for all equipment to
be tested.
END OF SECTION
May 2014
16950-35
9408A10
SECTION 16990
CONDUIT SCHEDULE
PART 1
1.01
GENERAL
SUMMARY
A.
PART 2
1.
Conduits:
a. ARM:
b. GRC:
c. PCS:
d. IMC:
e. EMT:
f. PVC:
g. SLT:
h. RAC:
i.
FLX:
j.
NFC:
2.
Cables:
a. DN Thick:
b. DN Thin:
c. PBPA:
d. PBDP:
e. PBDPP:
f. FFBUS:
g. RS-485
h. CAT5e:
i.
CAT6:
j.
CNET:
k. DH+:
l.
RIO:
m. DF1:
n. MODB:
o. MODB+:
p. */FO:
q. 2/C#16S:
r.
3/C#16S:
s.
*/C#Y:
t.
MFR:
Armored cable.
Galvanized rigid conduit.
PVC jacketed rigid steel conduit.
Intermediate metallic conduit.
Electrical metallic steel tubing.
Polyvinyl chloride rigid plastic conduit.
Sealtight - liquidtight flexible conduit.
Rigid aluminum conduit.
Flexible metallic conduit.
Non-metallic flexible conduit.
DeviceNet thick cable.
DeviceNet thin cable.
Profibus PA cable.
Profibus DP cable.
Profibus DP cable with 24VDC power.
Foundation Fieldbus cable.
RS-485 cable.
Category 5 enhanced Ethernet cable.
Category 6 Ethernet cable.
ControlNet cable.
Data Highway Plus cable.
Remote I/O cable.
Serial cable.
Modbus cable.
Modbus Plus cable.
Fiber optic cable (* indicates number of fibers).
2 conductor, 16 gauge, twisted shielded pair.
(*/2/C#16S * indicates number of pairs).
3 conductor, 16 gauge, twisted shielded triplet.
(*/3/C#16S * indicates number of triplets).
Multiconductor cable (* indicates number of conductors,
Y indicates conductor size and insulation).
Manufacturer or vendor furnished cable.
PRODUCTS
Not Used.
May 2014
16990-1
9408A10
PART 3
3.01
EXECUTION
CONDUIT SCHEDULE
A.
Conduit Schedule is presented on the following pages.
May 2014
16990-2
9408A10
SECTION 16990
CONDUIT SCHEDULE
AREA 10
PART 1
1.01
GENERAL
SUMMARY
A.
Conduit requirements:
1. As defined in Section 16050 and Section 16130.
B.
Cable requirements and definitions:

1. As defined in Section 16050 and Section 16123.
2. 2/CS#16:
2 conductor, 16 gauge, twisted shielded pair.
3. 3/CS#16:
3 conductor, 16 gauge, twisted shielded triplet.
4. CAT6:
Category 6 Ethernet cable.
5. MFR:
Manufacturer or vendor furnished cable.
6. PULL:
Pull Rope.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3
3.01
EXECUTION
CONDUIT SCHEDULE
A.
May 2014
Conduit Schedule is presented on the following pages.
16990-1
9408A10
CONDUIT SCHEDULE AREA 10
ENGINEER
MRT
CITY OF STILLWATER
REVISION
DATE
5/28/14
KAW RAW WATER PUMP STATION

CONDUIT
CONDUCTORS
GROUND
NUMBER
DWG
SIZE
SIZE
TYPE
SIZE
M-10-001
02-E-01
20-E-02
5"
500:5KV
5KV-EPR
#1/0
X-10-001
C-10-005
L-10-005
02-E-01
20-E-02
02-E-01
20-E-02
02-E-01
20-E-02
5"
2"
2"
18
PULL
#14
#6
M-10-005
02-E-01
20-E-02
4"
#3/0:5KV
N-10-005
02-E-01
20-E-02
2"
CAT6
X-10-005
02-E-01
20-E-02
2"
PULL
XHHW-2
XHHW-2
5KV-EPR
4"
250:5KV
5KV-EPR
X-10-010
02-E-01
20-E-02
4"
PULL
ROPE
M-10-011
EXISTING
CONDUIT
20-E-01
M-10-015
02-E-01
20-E-02
2.5"
#4:5KV
5KV-EPR
X-10-015
02-E-01
20-E-02
2"
PULL
ROPE
P-10-016
P-10-017
X-10-020
02-E-01
20-E-02
02-E-01
20-E-02
02-E-02
20-E-02
3"
2"
4"
250:5KV
350
PULL
PULL
5KV-EPR
XHHW-2
#14
#10
#4
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
#14
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
#2/0
#2/0
#8
#1/0
ROPE
ROPE
PULL
ROPE
FR:
TO:
ROPE
#3/0:5KV
CAT6
GEN-2100
PCM-2031
>> GEN-2100 NETWORK
PULL
GEN-2100
CONDUIT CAP
>> SPARE
250:5KV
HH-3
SWGR-2020
>> SWGR-1901 POWER
PULL
HH-3
SWGR-2020
>> SPARE
250:5KV
SWGR-1901
HH-3
>> SWGR-1901 POWER (NEW CABLE)
#4:5KV
XFMR-2101
SWGR-2020
>> XFMR-2101
PULL
XFMR-2101
SWGR-2020
>> SPARE
350
DP-2021
XFRM-2101
>> DP-2021 POWER
PULL
DP-2021
XFRM-2101
>> SPARE
PULL
DUCT BANK STUB

CONDUIT CAP
>> SPARE
PULL
DUCT BANK STUB

SWGR-2020
>> SPARE
PULL
DUCT BANK STUB

CONDUIT CAP
>> SPARE
PULL
DUCT BANK STUB

CONDUIT CAP
>> SPARE
PULL
DUCT BANK STUB

PCM-2031
>> SPARE
PULL
DUCT BANK STUB

PCM-2031
>> SPARE
10
#14
EDR-1001
J-BOX
>> EDR-1001 CONTROL
FR:
TO:
X-10-027
02-E-02
20-E-02
2"
PULL
ROPE
FR:
TO:
X-10-028
02-E-02
20-E-02
2"
PULL
ROPE
FR:
TO:
May 2014
GEN-2100
SWGR-2020
>> GENERATOR POWER FEED
FR:
TO:
XHHW-2
GEN-2100
LP-2033
>> GEN-2100 AUX LOADS
FR:
TO:
2"
#14
#6
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
02-E-02
20-E-02
10
FR:
TO:
X-10-025
1"
#14
#14
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
FR:
TO:
H
01-E-01
8
10
GEN-2100
PCM-2031
>> GEN-2100 CONTROL
>> SPARE
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
ROPE
C-10-050
HH-2
SWGR-2020
>> SPARE
FR:
TO:
PULL
PULL
PULL
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
FR:
TO:
4"
2"
HH-2
SWGR-2020
>> PRIMARY POWER FEED
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
02-E-02
20-E-02
02-E-02
20-E-02
500:5KV
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
X-10-021
X-10-026
3
FR:
TO:
ROPE
02-E-01
20-E-02
DESCRIPTION
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
ROPE
M-10-010
4"
TYPE
#14
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
16990-2
CONNECTING
SEGMENTS
C-10-057
9408A10
ENGINEER
MRT
CITY OF STILLWATER
REVISION
DATE
5/28/14

CONDUIT
CONDUCTORS
GROUND
NUMBER
DWG
SIZE
SIZE
TYPE
SIZE
L-10-050
01-E-01
1"
#8
XHHW-2
#8
P-10-050
01-E-01
0.75"
#12
XHHW-2
#12
TYPE
DESCRIPTION
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
#8
STR-1001 HEAT TRACE

J-BOX
>> STR-1001 HEAT TRACE POWER
L-10-057
#12
EDR-1001
EDR-1001 DISCONNECT
>> EDR-1001 POWER
P-10-051
P-10-057
#12
EDR-1001 DISCONNECT
J-BOX
>> EDR-1001 POWER
C-10-057
10
#14
EDR-1003
J-BOX
>> EDR-1003 CONTROL
#8
STR-1002 HEAT TRACE

J-BOX
L-10-057
P-10-056
#12
EDR-1003
EDR-1003 DISCONNECT
>> EDR-1003 POWER
#12
EDR-1003 DISCONNECT
J-BOX
>> EDR-1003 POWER
P-10-055
10
10
#14
#14
J-BOX
LCP-1200 J-BOX
>> EDR-1001 CONTROL
>> EDR-1003 CONTROL
C-10-050
C-10-055
2
2
#8
#8
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
P-10-051
01-E-01
1"
#12
XHHW-2
#12
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
C-10-055
01-E-01
0.75"
10
#14
XHHW-2
#14
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
L-10-055
01-E-01
1"
#8
XHHW-2
#8
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
P-10-055
01-E-01
0.75"
#12
XHHW-2
#12
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
P-10-056
01-E-01
0.75"
#12
XHHW-2
#12
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
C-10-057
L-10-057
P-10-057
C-10-060
01-E-01
10-E-01
01-E-01
20-E-01
01-E-01
20-E-01
10-E-01
1.5"
2"
2"
1"
20
#14
#8
#12
#14
S-10-060
10-E-01
1"
2/CS-#16
L-10-070
10-E-01
0.75"
#8
S-10-070
10-E-01
0.75"
2/CS-#16
C-10-095
10-E-01
2"
2
22
#8
#14
S-10-095
X-10-095
P-10-096
May 2014
10-E-01
02-E-02
20-E-02
01-E-01
10-E-01
20-E-01
2"
2"
2"
XHHW-2
XHHW-2
XHHW-2
XHHW-2
XHHW-2
XHHW-2
XHHW-2
2/CS-#16
PULL
#10
#14
#8
#12
#14
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
#14
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
#8
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
#14
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
#8
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
#14
XHHW-2
#10
PDSH-1006
J-BOX
>> PDSH-1006 CONTROL
C-10-095
#14
S-10-095
2/CS-#16
PDIT-1007
J-BOX
>> PDIT-1007 SIGNAL
#8
LCP-1200
J-BOX
>> LCP-1200 HEATER POWER
C-10-095
S-10-095
2/CS-#16
LCP-1200
J-BOX
>> LCP-1200 SIGNAL
10
10
2
2
#14
#14
#8
#14
>>
>>
>>
>>
1
1
2/CS-#16
2/CS-#16
J-BOX
HH-1
>> PDIT-1007 SIGNAL
>> LCP-1200 SIGNAL
PULL
HH-1
PCM-2031
>> SPARE
#10
#10
#10
J-BOX
MCC-1902
>> EDR-1015 POWER
>> EDR-1025 POWER
>> EDR-1035 POWER
3
3
3
16990-3
L-10-050
L-10-055
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
C-10-095
#12
#12
FR:
TO:
P-10-057
3
3
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
ROPE
J-BOX
MCC-1902 LIGHTING PANEL
P-10-050
J-BOX
MCC-1902
>> EDR-1001 POWER
>> EDR-1003 POWER
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
CONNECTING
SEGMENTS
J-BOX
HH-1
EDR-1001 CONTROL
EDR-1003 CONTROL
LCP-1200 HEATER POWER
PDSH-1006 CONTROL
P-10-051
P-10-056
C-10-097
C-10-057
C-10-057
L-10-070
C-10-060
S-10-097
S-10-060
S-10-070
P-10-114
P-10-124
P-10-134
9408A10
ENGINEER
MRT
CITY OF STILLWATER
REVISION
DATE
5/28/14

CONDUIT
CONDUCTORS
NUMBER
DWG
SIZE
SIZE
TYPE
X-10-096
02-E-02
20-E-02
2"
PULL
ROPE
C-10-097
L-10-097
S-10-097
X-10-097
L-10-098
X-10-098
L-10-099
May 2014
02-E-02
20-E-02
02-E-02
20-E-02
02-E-02
20-E-02
02-E-02
20-E-02
02-E-02
20-E-02
02-E-02
20-E-02
02-E-02
20-E-02
4"
2"
2"
2"
2"
2"
2"
12
180
24
12
#12
#14
#10
XHHW-2
XHHW-2
XHHW-2
2/CS-#16
PULL
#8
PULL
#8
GROUND
SIZE
TYPE
FR:
TO:
#12
#10
#14
HH-1
PCM-2031
>> SPARE
10
10
2
2
8
4
2
2
2
6
2
8
4
2
2
2
6
2
8
4
2
2
2
6
2
2
5
10
2
2
4
6
10
4
2
5
10
2
2
4
6
10
4
#14
#14
#14
#12
#14
#14
#12
#14
#14
#14
#14
#14
#14
#12
#14
#14
#14
#14
#14
#14
#12
#14
#14
#14
#14
#12
#14
#14
#14
#14
#14
#14
#14
#14
#12
#14
#14
#14
#14
#14
#14
#14
#14
>>
>>
>>
>>
>>
>>
>>
>>
>>
>>
>>
>>
>>
>>
>>
>>
>>
>>
>>
>>
>>
>>
>>
>>
>>
>>
>>
>>
>>
>>
>>
>>
>>
>>
>>
>>
>>
>>
>>
>>
>>
>>
>>
2
2
#10
#10
HH-1
LP-2011 VIA J-BOX
>> EDR-1045 DC POWER
L-10-144
L-10-154
1
1
2/CS-#16
2/CS-#16
HH-1
PCM-2031
>> PDIT-1007 SIGNAL
>> LCP-1200 SIGNAL
S-10-095
S-10-095
PULL
HH-1
CONDUIT CAP
>> SPARE
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
#8
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
ROPE
XHHW-2
PULL
FR:
TO:
#8
16990-4
HH-1
LP-2033
PMP-1010 HEAT TRACE POWER
POLE LIGHT POWER
RECEPTACLE POWER
#8
#8
#8
#8
#8
#8
#8
>>
>>
>>
>>
>>
>>
>>
PULL
HH-1
CONDUIT CAP
>> SPARE
2
10
#8
#8
HH-1
LP-2033
>> LCP-1200 HEATER POWER
>> RECEPTACLE POWER
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
HH-1
PCM-2031
EDR-1001 CONTROL
EDR-1003 CONTROL
LCP-1200 CONTROL
PDIT-1007 POWER
EDR-1015 CONTROL
SPARE
MWH-1010 POWER
PSH-1013 CONTROL
LCP-1010 CONTROL
SPARE
PSL-1012 CONTROL
EDR-1025 CONTROL
SPARE
MWH-1020 POWER
PSH-1023 CONTROL
LCP-1020 CONTROL
SPARE
PSL-1022 CONTROL
EDR-1035 CONTROL
SPARE
MWH-1030 POWER
PSH-1033 CONTROL
LCP-1030 CONTROL
SPARE
PSL-1032 CONTROL
MWH-1040 POWER
PMP-1040 VIBRATION CONTROL
SPARE
PSH-1043 CONTROL
PSL-1042 CONTROL
LCP-1040 CONTROL
SPARE
EDR-1045 CONTROL
SPARE
MWH-1050 POWER
SPARE
PDSH-1053 CONTROL
PSL-1052 CONTROL
LCP-1050 CONTROL
SPARE
EDR-1055 CONTROL
SPARE
4
2
2
4
4
4
4
FR:
TO:
CONNECTING
SEGMENTS
1
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
ROPE
XHHW-2
DESCRIPTION
C-10-095
C-10-095
C-10-095
C-10-095
C-10-114
C-10-114
C-10-114
C-10-114
C-10-114
C-10-114
C-10-114
C-10-124
C-10-124
C-10-124
C-10-124
C-10-124
C-10-124
C-10-124
C-10-134
C-10-134
C-10-134
C-10-134
C-10-134
C-10-134
C-10-134
C-10-144
C-10-144
C-10-144
C-10-144
C-10-144
C-10-144
C-10-144
C-10-144
C-10-144
C-10-154
C-10-154
C-10-154
C-10-154
C-10-154
C-10-154
C-10-154
C-10-154
C-10-154
L-10-118
L-10-118
L-10-118
L-10-128
L-10-138
L-10-148
L-10-158
C-10-095
9408A10
ENGINEER
MRT
CITY OF STILLWATER
REVISION
DATE
5/28/14

CONDUIT
CONDUCTORS
GROUND
NUMBER
DWG
SIZE
SIZE
TYPE
SIZE
L-10-110
10-E-02
0.75"
#12
XHHW-2
#12
M-10-110
S-10-110
C-10-113
P-10-113
C-10-114
P-10-114
C-10-115
C-10-116
L-10-118
01-E-01
10-E-01
10-E-02
20-E-01
2.5"
01-E-01
10-E-01
10-E-02
20-E-01
2"
10-E-02
1"
10-E-02
10-E-01
10-E-02
10-E-01
10-E-02
10-E-02
10-E-02
10-E-01
10-E-02
0.75"
1.5"
1"
1"
1"
1.5"
12
2
24
2
12
#6:5KV
5KV-EPR
3/CS-#16
#14
#10
#12
#14
#10
#14
#12
#14
#8
XHHW-2
XHHW-2
XHHW-2
XHHW-2
XHHW-2
XHHW-2
XHHW-2
XHHW-2
XHHW-2
#10
#14
#14
#10
#12
#10
#14
#12
#8
TYPE
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
L-10-119
10-E-01
2"
#8
XHHW-2
#8
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
M-10-120
S-10-120
C-10-123
May 2014
01-E-01
10-E-01
10-E-02
20-E-01
2.5"
01-E-01
10-E-01
10-E-02
20-E-01
2"
10-E-02
1"
12
#6:5KV
5KV-EPR
3/CS-#16
#14
XHHW-2
#10
#14
#14
PMP-1010 RTD BOX

EXISTING RVAT STARTER
>> PMP-1010 RTDS
8
4
#14
#14
EDR-1015
J-BOX
>> EDR-1015 CONTROL
>> SPARE
#10
EDR-1015
EDR-1015 DISCONNECT
>> EDR-1015 POWER
8
4
2
2
2
6
2
#14
#14
#12
#14
#14
#14
#14
>>
>>
>>
>>
>>
>>
>>
J-BOX
HH-1
EDR-1015 CONTROL
SPARE
MWH-1010 POWER
PSH-1013 CONTROL
LCP-1010 CONTROL
SPARE
PSL-1012 CONTROL
#10
EDR-1015 DISCONNECT
J-BOX
>> EDR-1015 POWER
P-10-096
#14
PSH-1013
LCP-1010
>> PSH-1013 CONTROL
C-10-116
C-10-114
2
2
2
6
2
#12
#14
#14
#14
#14
>>
>>
>>
>>
>>
LCP-1010
J-BOX
MWH-1010 POWER
PSH-1013 CONTROL
LCP-1010 CONTROL
SPARE
PSL-1012 CONTROL
#8
#8
#8
PMP-1010 HEAT TRACE

HH-1
>> PMP-1010 HEAT TRACE POWER
>> POLE LIGHT POWER
>> RECEPTACLE POWER
L-10-098
4
2
2
C-10-116
#14
PSL-1012
LCP-1010
>> PSL-1012 CONTROL
#8
#12
PMP-1020
LCP-1020
>> MWH-1020 POWER
#6:5KV
PMP-1020
>> PMP-1020 POWER
3/CS-#16
PMP-1020 RTD BOX

>> PMP-1010 RTDS
8
4
#14
#14
EDR-1025
J-BOX
>> EDR-1025 CONTROL
>> SPARE
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
#12
3/CS-#16
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
#14
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
XHHW-2
PMP-1010
>> PMP-1010 POWER
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
XHHW-2
#12
#6:5KV
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
#14
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
0.75"
PMP-1010
LCP-1010
>> MWH-1010 POWER
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
0.75"
10-E-02
#12
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
10-E-02
PUMP-110 HEAT TRACE JUNCTION BOX

POLE LIGHT
>> POLE LIGHT POWER
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
16990-5
CONNECTING
SEGMENTS
2
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
C-10-119
L-10-120
DESCRIPTION
C-10-116
C-10-114
C-10-097
C-10-113
C-10-113
C-10-116
C-10-116
C-10-116
C-10-116
C-10-116
L-10-110
C-10-115
C-10-119
L-10-119
L-10-118
C-10-126
C-10-124
9408A10
ENGINEER
MRT
CITY OF STILLWATER
REVISION
DATE
5/28/14

CONDUIT
CONDUCTORS
GROUND
NUMBER
DWG
SIZE
SIZE
TYPE
SIZE
P-10-123
10-E-02
0.75"
#10
XHHW-2
#10
C-10-124
10-E-01
10-E-02
1.5"
2
24
#12
#14
XHHW-2
XHHW-2
#12
TYPE
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
10-E-01
10-E-02
1"
#10
XHHW-2
#10
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
C-10-125
10-E-02
1"
#14
XHHW-2
#14
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
L-10-128
10-E-02
10-E-01
10-E-02
1"
1.5"
2
12
#12
#14
#8
XHHW-2
XHHW-2
XHHW-2
#12
#8
#10
EDR-1025
EDR-1025 DISCONNECT
>> EDR-1025 POWER
8
4
2
2
2
6
2
#14
#14
#12
#14
#14
#14
#14
>>
>>
>>
>>
>>
>>
>>
P-10-096
#10
EDR-1025 DISCONNECT
J-BOX
>> EDR-1025 POWER
#14
PSH-1023
LCP-1020
>> PSH-1023 CONTROL
C-10-126
#12
#14
#14
#14
#14
>>
>>
>>
>>
>>
LCP-1020
J-BOX
MWH-1020 POWER
PSH-1023 CONTROL
LCP-1020 CONTROL
SPARE
PSL-1022 CONTROL
C-10-124
2
2
2
6
2
L-10-098
#8
#8
PMP-1020 HEAT TRACE

HH-1
>> RECEPTACLE POWER
C-10-126
#14
PSL-1022
LCP-1020
>> PSL-1022 CONTROL
#12
PMP-1030
LCP-1030
>> MWH-1030 POWER
C-10-136
#6:5KV
PMP-1030
>> PMP-1030 POWER
3/CS-#16
PMP-1030 RTD BOX

>> PMP-1010 RTDS
8
4
#14
#14
EDR-1035
J-BOX
>> EDR-1035 CONTROL
>> SPARE
#10
EDR-1035
EDR-1035 DISCONNECT
>> EDR-1035 POWER
8
4
2
2
2
6
2
#14
#14
#12
#14
#14
#14
#14
>>
>>
>>
>>
>>
>>
>>
#10
EDR-1035 DISCONNECT
J-BOX
>> EDR-1035 POWER
P-10-096
C-10-136
#14
PSH-1033
LCP-1030
>> PSH-1033 CONTROL
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
4
2
C-10-129
10-E-02
0.75"
#14
XHHW-2
#14
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
L-10-130
10-E-02
0.75"
#12
XHHW-2
#12
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
M-10-130
S-10-130
C-10-133
01-E-01
10-E-01
10-E-02
20-E-01
2.5"
01-E-01
10-E-01
10-E-02
20-E-01
2"
10-E-02
1"
12
#6:5KV
5KV-EPR
3/CS-#16
#14
XHHW-2
#10
#14
#14
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
P-10-133
10-E-02
0.75"
#10
XHHW-2
#10
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
C-10-134
10-E-01
10-E-02
1.5"
2
24
#12
#14
XHHW-2
XHHW-2
#12
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
P-10-134
C-10-135
10-E-01
10-E-02
10-E-02
1"
1"
#10
#14
XHHW-2
XHHW-2
#10
#14
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
2
May 2014
16990-6
CONNECTING
SEGMENTS
3
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
P-10-124
C-10-126
DESCRIPTION
J-BOX
HH-1
EDR-1025 CONTROL
SPARE
MWH-1020 POWER
PSH-1023 CONTROL
LCP-1020 CONTROL
SPARE
PSL-1022 CONTROL
J-BOX
HH-1
EDR-1035 CONTROL
SPARE
MWH-1030 POWER
PSH-1033 CONTROL
LCP-1030 CONTROL
SPARE
PSL-1032 CONTROL
C-10-097
C-10-123
C-10-123
C-10-126
C-10-126
C-10-126
C-10-126
C-10-126
L-10-120
C-10-125
C-10-129
C-10-134
C-10-097
C-10-133
C-10-133
C-10-136
C-10-136
C-10-136
C-10-136
C-10-136
9408A10
ENGINEER
MRT
CITY OF STILLWATER
REVISION
DATE
5/28/14

CONDUIT
CONDUCTORS
GROUND
NUMBER
DWG
SIZE
SIZE
TYPE
SIZE
C-10-136
10-E-02
1"
2
12
#12
#14
XHHW-2
XHHW-2
#12
TYPE
DESCRIPTION
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
2
2
2
6
2
L-10-138
C-10-139
C-10-140
L-10-140
M-10-140
10-E-01
10-E-02
10-E-02
1.5"
1"
02-E-01
10-E-02
20-E-02
20-E-03
2"
10-E-02
0.75"
#14
#10
#12
XHHW-2
XHHW-2
XHHW-2
#14
#10
#12
10-E-01
10-E-02
20-E-01
2"
#10
XHHW-2
#10
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
M-10-141
20-E-01
3"
#1/0:5KV
5KV-EPR
#6
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
S-10-141
X-10-141
C-10-142
M-10-142
10-E-02
2"
02-E-01
10-E-02
20-E-02
20-E-03
2"
10-E-02
1"
20-E-01
20-E-02
3"
15
PULL
MFR
PULL
#14
#1/0:5KV
S-10-142
10-E-01
10-E-02
20-E-01
2"
3/CS-#16
C-10-143
10-E-02
1"
14
#14
5KV-EPR
XHHW-2
#10
#12
MWH-1040
LCP1-1040
>> MWH-1040 POWER
#1:5KV
PMP-1040 POWER BOX

MTS-1040
>> PMP-1040 POWER
3/CS-#16
PMP-1040 RTD BOX

VFD-1040
>> PMP-1040 RTDS TO VFD
PULL
CONDUIT CAP
CONDUIT CAP
>> SPARE
FR:
TO:
#14
#10
#1/0:5KV
MFR
PULL
CONDUIT CAP
CONDUIT CAP
>> SPARE
5
10
#14
#14
LCP2-1040
LCP1-1040
>> PMP-1040 VIBRATION CONTROL
>> SPARE
MTS-1040
RVAT-1040B EXISTING STARTER
#1/0:5KV
>> VFD-1040 POWER
PMP-1040 RTD BOX

3/CS-#16
>> PMP-1040 RTDS TO BYPASS
10
4
#14
#14
EDR-1045
J-BOX
>> EDR-1045 CONTROL
>> SPARE
#10
EDR-1045
EDR-1045 DISCONNECT
#1/0:5KV
MTS-1040
VFD-1040
>> VFD-1040 POWER
FR:
TO:
#14
#6
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
#14
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
#14
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
10-E-02
0.75"
#10
XHHW-2
#10
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
M-10-143
20-E-02
3"
#1/0:5KV
5KV-EPR
#6
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
16990-7
L-10-130
C-10-135
C-10-139
C-10-146
PMP-1040 POWER BOX

>> PMP-1040 CTS TO BYPASS
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
L-10-143
May 2014
PMP-1040 POWER BOX

VFD-1040
>> PMP-1040 CTS TO VFD
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
ROPE
XHHW-2
#14
PSL-1032
LCP-1030
>> PSL-1032 CONTROL
C-10-136
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
ROPE
CABLE
#8
#8
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
C-10-141
L-10-098
4
2
PMP-1030 HEAT TRACE

HH-1
>> RECEPTACLE POWER
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
2"
#14
>>
>>
>>
>>
>>
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
02-E-01
10-E-02
20-E-02
20-E-03
#6
C-10-134
#12
#14
#14
#14
#14
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
2"
3/CS-#16
#8
02-E-01
10-E-02
20-E-02
20-E-03
X-10-140
5KV-EPR
3"
#1:5KV
XHHW-2
02-E-01
10-E-02
20-E-02
20-E-03
S-10-140
#8
LCP-1030
J-BOX
MWH-1030 POWER
PSH-1033 CONTROL
LCP-1030 CONTROL
SPARE
PSL-1032 CONTROL
CONNECTING
SEGMENTS
VFD-1040
SWGR-2020
>> VFD-1040 POWER
PMP-1040 VIBRATION BOX
LCP2-1040
>> PMP-1040 VIBRATION
C-10-146
C-10-144
9408A10
ENGINEER
MRT
CITY OF STILLWATER
REVISION
DATE
5/28/14

CONDUIT
CONDUCTORS
GROUND
NUMBER
DWG
SIZE
SIZE
TYPE
SIZE
C-10-144
10-E-01
10-E-02
1.5"
2
43
#12
#14
XHHW-2
XHHW-2
#12
L-10-144
C-10-145
C-10-146
L-10-148
10-E-01
10-E-02
10-E-02
10-E-02
10-E-01
10-E-02
1"
1"
2"
1.5"
2
29
#10
#14
#12
#14
#8
XHHW-2
XHHW-2
XHHW-2
XHHW-2
XHHW-2
#10
#14
#12
#8
TYPE
DESCRIPTION
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
#14
XHHW-2
#14
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
C-10-150
02-E-01
10-E-02
20-E-02
20-E-03
2"
#10
XHHW-2
#10
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
L-10-150
10-E-02
0.75"
#12
XHHW-2
#12
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
M-10-150
02-E-01
10-E-02
20-E-02
3"
#1:5KV
5KV-EPR
#6
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
02-E-01
10-E-02
20-E-02
20-E-03
2"
02-E-01
10-E-02
20-E-02
20-E-03
2"
10-E-01
10-E-02
20-E-01
2"
20-E-01
3"
X-10-150
C-10-151
M-10-151
3/CS-#16
PULL
#10
#1/0:5KV
XHHW-2
5KV-EPR
10-E-02
2"
MFR
CABLE
X-10-151
02-E-01
10-E-02
20-E-02
20-E-03
2"
PULL
ROPE
10-E-02
1"
15
#14
XHHW-2
#14
PDSH-1043
LCP1-1040
C-10-146
#10
#6
#14
#14
#8
#8
PMP-1040 HEAT TRACE

HH-1
>> RECEPTACLE POWER
L-10-098
4
2
C-10-146
#14
PSL-1042
LCP1-1040
>> PSL-1042 CONTROL
#10
PMP-1050 POWER BOX

VFD-1040
>> PMP-1050 CTS TO VFD
#12
MWH-1050
LCP1-1050
>> MWH-1050 POWER
#1:5KV
PMP-1050 POWER BOX

MTS-1050
>> PMP-1050 POWER
3/CS-#16
PMP-1050 RTD BOX

VFD-1050
>> PMP-1050 RTDS TO VFD
PULL
CONDUIT CAP
CONDUIT CAP
>> SPARE
#10
#1/0:5KV
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
16990-8
C-10-156
VFD-1050
SWGR-2020
>> VFD-1050 POWER
PMP-1050 VIBRATION BOX
LCP2-1050
>> PMP-1050 VIBRATION
MFR
PULL
CONDUIT CAP
CONDUIT CAP
>> SPARE
#14
#14
LCP2-1050
LCP1-1050
>> PMP-1050 VIBRATION CONTROL
>> SPARE
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
L-10-140
C-10-142
C-10-142
C-10-145
C-10-149
PMP-1050 POWER BOX

>> PMP-1050 CTS TO BYPASS
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
5
10
May 2014
C-10-144
>>
>>
>>
>>
>>
>>
>>
FR:
TO:
LCP1-1040
J-BOX
MWH-1040 POWER
SPARE
PSH-1043 CONTROL
PSL-1042 CONTROL
LCP-1040 CONTROL
SPARE
#12
#14
#14
#14
#14
#14
#14
FR:
TO:
C-10-146
C-10-146
C-10-146
C-10-146
C-10-146
C-10-146
C-10-146
C-10-143
C-10-143
2
5
10
2
2
4
6
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
ROPE
S-10-151
C-10-152
#14
#10
EDR-1045 DISCONNECT
HH-1
L-10-097
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
>>
>>
>>
>>
>>
>>
>>
>>
>>
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
0.75"
S-10-150
#12
#14
#14
#14
#14
#14
#14
#14
#14
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
10-E-02
C-10-097
2
5
10
2
2
4
6
10
4
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
C-10-149
J-BOX
HH-1
MWH-1040 POWER
SPARE
PSH-1043 CONTROL
PSL-1042 CONTROL
LCP-1040 CONTROL
SPARE
EDR-1045 CONTROL
SPARE
CONNECTING
SEGMENTS
C-10-156
9408A10
ENGINEER
MRT
CITY OF STILLWATER
REVISION
DATE
5/28/14

CONDUIT
CONDUCTORS
GROUND
NUMBER
DWG
SIZE
SIZE
TYPE
SIZE
M-10-152
20-E-01
20-E-02
3"
#1/0:5KV
5KV-EPR
#6
S-10-152
C-10-153
L-10-153
10-E-01
10-E-02
20-E-01
2"
10-E-02
1"
10-E-02
0.75"
14
3/CS-#16
#14
#10
XHHW-2
XHHW-2
#14
#14
#10
TYPE
DESCRIPTION
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
#1/0:5KV
5KV-EPR
#6
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
C-10-154
10-E-01
10-E-02
1.5"
2
43
#12
#14
XHHW-2
XHHW-2
#12
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
C-10-155
C-10-156
L-10-158
C-10-159
N-10-205
C-10-210
X-10-210
C-10-211
X-10-211
May 2014
10-E-02
10-E-02
10-E-01
10-E-02
10-E-02
1"
1.5"
1.5"
0.75"
02-E-01
20-E-01
20-E-02
2"
20-E-01
1.5"
02-E-01
20-E-01
20-E-02
2"
20-E-01
1.5"
02-E-01
20-E-01
20-E-02
2"
2
29
28
28
#10
#14
#12
#14
#8
#14
XHHW-2
XHHW-2
XHHW-2
XHHW-2
XHHW-2
XHHW-2
CAT6
#14
PULL
#14
PULL
XHHW-2
#10
#14
#12
#8
#14
#14
#14
10
4
#14
#14
EDR-1055
J-BOX
>> EDR-1055 CONTROL
>> SPARE
#10
EDR-1055
EDR-1055 DISCONNECT
#1/0:5KV
MTS-1050
VFD-1050
>> VFD-1050 POWER
2
5
10
2
2
4
6
10
4
#12
#14
#14
#14
#14
#14
#14
#14
#14
>>
>>
>>
>>
>>
>>
>>
>>
>>
#10
EDR-1055 DISCONNECT
HH-1
L-10-097
#14
PDSH-1053
LCP1-1050
C-10-156
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
#14
#8
#8
PMP-1050 HEAT TRACE

HH-1
>> RECEPTACLE POWER
L-10-098
4
2
#14
PSL-1052
LCP1-1050
>> PSL-1052 CONTROL
C-10-156
CAT6
PCM-2030
PCM-2031
>> PCM-2030 NETWORK
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
23
5
#14
#14
PULL
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
23
5
#14
#14
PULL
FR:
TO:
16990-9
C-10-154
>>
>>
>>
>>
>>
>>
>>
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
ROPE
LCP1-1050
J-BOX
MWH-1050 POWER
SPARE
PDSH-1053 CONTROL
PSL-1052 CONTROL
LCP-1050 CONTROL
SPARE
C-10-097
C-10-156
C-10-156
C-10-156
C-10-156
C-10-156
C-10-156
C-10-156
C-10-153
C-10-153
#12
#14
#14
#14
#14
#14
#14
FR:
TO:
J-BOX
HH-1
MWH-1050 POWER
SPARE
PDSH-1053 CONTROL
PSL-1052 CONTROL
LCP-1050 CONTROL
SPARE
EDR-1055 CONTROL
SPARE
C-10-154
2
5
10
2
2
4
6
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
ROPE
XHHW-2
PMP-1050 RTD BOX

3/CS-#16
>> PMP-1050 RTDS TO BYPASS
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
3"
1"
6
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
20-E-02
10-E-01
10-E-02
MTS-1050
#1/0:5KV
>> VFD-1050 POWER
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
M-10-153
L-10-154
CONNECTING
SEGMENTS
PMP-1010 RVAT STARTER

CONDUIT TEE
>> PMP-1010 CONTROL
>> SPARE
L-10-150
C-10-152
C-10-152
C-10-155
C-10-159
C-10-215
CONDUIT CAP
PCM-2031
>> PCUA FIBER PULL
CONTUIT TEE
>> PMP-1020 CONTROL
>> SPARE
C-10-215
CONDUIT CAP
PCM-2031
>> SPARE
9408A10
ENGINEER
MRT
CITY OF STILLWATER
REVISION
DATE
5/28/14

CONDUIT
CONDUCTORS
GROUND
NUMBER
DWG
SIZE
SIZE
TYPE
SIZE
C-10-212
20-E-01
1.5"
28
#14
XHHW-2
#14
TYPE
DESCRIPTION
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
#14
#14

CONTUIT TEE
>> PMP-1030 CONTROL
>> SPARE
PULL
CONDUIT CAP
PCM-2031
>> SPARE
23
5
23
5
#14
#14
#14
#14
>>
>>
>>
>>
CONDUIT TEE
CONDUIT TEE
PMP-1010 CONTROL
SPARE
PMP-1020 CONTROL
SPARE
C-10-210
C-10-210
C-10-211
C-10-211
23
5
23
5
23
5
#14
#14
#14
#14
#14
#14
>>
>>
>>
>>
>>
>>
CONDUIT TEE
PCM-2031
PMP-1030 CONTROL
SPARE
PMP-1010 CONTROL
SPARE
PMP-1020 CONTROL
SPARE
C-10-212
C-10-212
C-10-215
C-10-215
C-10-215
C-10-215
#12
#14
#14

CONDUIT TEE
>> RVAT-1050B CONTROL POWER
>> RVAT-1050B CONTROL
>> SPARE
C-10-222
2
16
10
#12
#14
#14

CONDUIT TEE
>> RVAT-1040B CONTROL POWER
>> RVAT-1040B CONTROL
>> SPARE
C-10-222
2
16
10
23
5
X-10-212
02-E-01
20-E-01
2"
PULL
ROPE
C-10-215
20-E-01
2"
56
#14
XHHW-2
C-10-216
C-10-220
C-10-221
C-10-300
02-E-01
20-E-01
20-E-02
2.5"
20-E-01
1.5"
20-E-01
20-E-02
1.5"
3"
84
2
26
2
26
140
#14
#12
#14
#12
#14
#14
XHHW-2
XHHW-2
XHHW-2
XHHW-2
XHHW-2
XHHW-2
FR:
TO:
#14
#14
#12
#12
#14
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
140 #14
N-10-300
20-E-02
20-E-02
1.5"
CAT6
#14
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
20-E-02
2.5"
110
#14
XHHW-2
#14
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
L-10-305
20-E-02
2"
#1/0
XHHW-2
#6
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
P-10-306
20-E-02
1.5"
#1
XHHW-2
#6
20-E-01
20-E-02
02-E-01
2"
#1
XHHW-2
#6
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
L-10-320
20-E-02
0.75"
#10
XHHW-2
#10
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
L-10-321
20-E-02
0.75"
#10
XHHW-2
#10
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
L-10-322
20-E-02
0.75"
#10
XHHW-2
#10
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
16990-10
C-10-216
>>
>>
>>
>>
>>
>>
>>
>>
SWGR-2020
PCM-2031
SWGR-2020 (REL-2020.1) NETWORK
SWGR-2020 FUTURE RELAY
110 #14
VCP-2020
PCM-2030
>> SWGR-2020 CONTROL
#1/0
LP-2033
XFMR-2033
>> LP-2033 POWER
#1
XFMR-2033
DPP-2032
>> XFMR-2033 POWER
#1
XFMR-2033
MCC-1902
>> XFMR-2033 SECONDARY POWER
2
2
#10
#10
SWGR-2020
LP-2011
>> BREAKER 52-1 DC POWER
>> 87 RELAY DC POWER
#10
SWGR-2020
LP-2011
>> BREAKER 52-1G DC POWER
2
2
#10
#10
SWGR-2020
LP-2011
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
P-10-307
May 2014
CAT6
CAT6
CAT6
CAT6
CAT6
CAT6
CAT6
CAT6
C-10-216
SWGR-2020
VCP-2020
>> SWGR-2020 CONTROL
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
C-10-301
CONNECTING
SEGMENTS
9408A10
ENGINEER
MRT
CITY OF STILLWATER
REVISION
DATE
5/28/14

CONDUIT
CONDUCTORS
GROUND
NUMBER
DWG
SIZE
SIZE
TYPE
SIZE
L-10-323
20-E-02
0.75"
#10
XHHW-2
#10
TYPE
DESCRIPTION
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
#10
#10
SWGR-2020
LP-2011
2
2
#10
#10
SWGR-2020
LP-2011
>> FUTURE BREAKER
#4
LP-2011
BCH-2010
>> LP-2011 POWER
#12
BCH-2010
LP-2033
>> BCH-2010 POWER
350
LP-2011
BATTERY RACK
>> BATTERY POWER CONNECTION
#10
VCP-2020
CONDUIT TEE
>> VCP-2020 POWER
L-10-342
L-10-342
2
2
#10
#10
PCM-2031
CONDUIT TEE
>> PCM-2031 UPS POWER
>> PCM-2031 AUX POWER
2
2
2
#10
#10
#10
CONDUIT TEE
LP-2033
>> VCP-2020 POWER
>> PCM-2031 UPS POWER
>> PCM-2031 AUX POWER
2
34
10
#12
#14
#14
VFD-1040
CONDUIT TEE
>> VFD-1040 CONTROL POWER
>> VFD-1040 CONTROL
>> SPARE
2
2
#10
#10
VFD-1040
CONDUIT TEE
>> VCP-2020 POWER
>> MPR-1040 VDC POWER
CAT6
CAT6
VFD-1040
CONDUIT TEE
>> VFD-1040 NETWORK
>> VFD-1040 MPR NETWORK
N-10-352
1
1
2/CS-#16
3/CS-#16
VFD-1040
CONDUIT TEE
>> VFD-1040 SIGNAL
>> VFD-1040 SPEED POT
S-10-352
2
1
C-10-352
#12
#14
#14
VFD-1050
CONDUIT TEE
>> VFD-1050 CONTROL POWER
>> VFD-1050 CONTROL
>> SPARE
L-10-352
#10
VFD-1050
CONDUIT TEE
CAT6
CAT6
VFD-1050
CONDUIT TEE
>> VFD-1050 NETWORK
>> VFD-1050 MPR NETWORK
N-10-352
1
1
S-10-352
2/CS-#16
3/CS-#16
VFD-1050
CONDUIT TEE
>> VFD-1040 SIGNAL
>> VFD-1040 SPEED POT
2
2
L-10-324
L-10-330
20-E-02
20-E-02
0.75"
1"
#10
#4
XHHW-2
XHHW-2
#10
#4
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
L-10-331
20-E-02
0.75"
#12
XHHW-2
#12
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
L-10-332
20-E-02
2"
350
XHHW-2
#4
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
L-10-340
L-10-341
L-10-342
C-10-350
L-10-350
N-10-350
S-10-350
C-10-351
20-E-02
20-E-02
20-E-02
20-E-02
20-E-02
20-E-02
20-E-02
20-E-02
0.75"
0.75"
0.75"
1.5"
0.75"
0.75"
1"
1.5"
2
44
1
2
2
44
#10
#10
#10
#12
#14
#10
XHHW-2
XHHW-2
XHHW-2
XHHW-2
XHHW-2
XHHW-2
CAT6
3/CS-#16
2/CS-#16
#12
#14
XHHW-2
XHHW-2
#10
#10
#10
#12
#10
#14
#14
#12
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
2
34
10
L-10-351
20-E-02
0.75"
#10
N-10-351
20-E-02
0.75"
CAT6
S-10-351
20-E-02
1"
1
2
3/CS-#16
2/CS-#16
XHHW-2
#10
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
#14
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
#14
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
2
1
May 2014
16990-11
CONNECTING
SEGMENTS
L-10-340
L-10-341
L-10-341
C-10-352
L-10-352
L-10-353
9408A10
ENGINEER
MRT
CITY OF STILLWATER
REVISION
DATE
5/28/14

CONDUIT
CONDUCTORS
GROUND
NUMBER
DWG
SIZE
SIZE
TYPE
SIZE
C-10-352
20-E-02
2.5"
4
88
#12
#14
XHHW-2
XHHW-2
#12
L-10-352
N-10-352
S-10-352
20-E-02
20-E-02
20-E-02
0.75"
1"
1.5"
2
4
#10
XHHW-2
CAT6
3/CS-#16
2/CS-#16
#10
#14
#14
TYPE
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
#10
XHHW-2
#10
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
C-10-355
20-E-02
0.75"
10
#14
XHHW-2
#14
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
C-10-357
L-10-360
N-10-360
20-E-02
20-E-02
20-E-02
0.75"
1.5"
0.75"
0.75"
10
20
#14
#14
#12
XHHW-2
XHHW-2
XHHW-2
CAT6
#14
#14
#12
#14
MFR
CABLE
#14
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
P-10-370
20-E-04
1"
#6
XHHW-2
#10
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
MFR
CABLE
#14
20-E-04
1"
#6
XHHW-2
#10
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
C-10-375
20-E-04
0.75"
MFR
CABLE
#14
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
May 2014
20-E-04
0.75"
#12
XHHW-2
#12
CAT6
CAT6
CAT6
CAT6
>>
>>
>>
>>
CONDUIT TEE
PCM-2031
VFD-1040 NETWORK
VFD-1040 MPR NETWORK
VFD-1050 NETWORK
VFD-1050 MPR NETWORK
N-10-350
N-10-350
N-10-351
N-10-351
2
1
2
1
2/CS-#16
3/CS-#16
2/CS-#16
3/CS-#16
>>
>>
>>
>>
CONDUIT TEE
PCM-2031
VFD-1040 SIGNAL
VFD-1040 SPEED POT
VFD-1040 SIGNAL
VFD-1040 SPEED POT
S-10-350
S-10-350
S-10-351
S-10-351
L-10-350
#10
VCP-2020
CONDUIT TEE
>> VCP-2020 POWER
#14
#14
MTS-1050
CONDUIT TEE
>> MTS-1050 CONTROL
>> SPARE
C-10-357
4
6
C-10-357
4
6
#14
#14
MTS-1040
CONDUIT TEE
>> MTS-1050 CONTROL
>> SPARE
4
6
4
6
#14
#14
#14
#14
>>
>>
>>
>>
#12
PCM-2031
COM-2035
>> COM-2035 UPS POWER
CAT6
PCM-2031
COM-2035
>> PCUA NETWORK
MFR
RTU-01
RTU-01 THERMOSTAT
>> RTU-01 CONTROL
#6
MFR
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
P-10-371
P-10-375
1
1
1
1
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
CONDUIT TEE
LP-2011
>> VCP-2020 POWER
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
1"
1"
#10
#10
#10
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
20-E-04
20-E-04
2
2
2
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
C-10-370
C-10-371
>>
>>
>>
>>
>>
>>
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
0.75"
20-E-02
#12
#14
#14
#12
#14
#14
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
20-E-02
#6
MFR
#12
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
16990-12
CONDUIT TEE
PCM-2031
VFD-1040 CONTROL POWER
VFD-1040 CONTROL
SPARE
VFD-1050 CONTROL POWER
VFD-1050 CONTROL
SPARE
CONNECTING
SEGMENTS
2
34
10
2
34
10
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
L-10-353
C-10-356
DESCRIPTION
CONDUIT TEE
PCM-2031
MTS-1050 CONTROL
SPARE
MTS-1050 CONTROL
SPARE
C-10-350
C-10-350
C-10-350
C-10-351
C-10-351
C-10-351
L-10-350
L-10-350
L-10-351
C-10-355
C-10-355
C-10-356
C-10-356
RTU-01
DPP-2032 VIA DISCONNECT
>> RTU-01 POWER
RTU-02
RTU-02 THERMOSTAT
>> RTU-02 CONTROL
RTU-02
>> RTU-02 POWER
AC-01
AC-01 THERMOSTAT
>> AC-01 CONTROL
AC-01
>> AC-01 POWER
9408A10
ENGINEER
MRT
CITY OF STILLWATER
REVISION
DATE
5/28/14

CONDUIT
CONDUCTORS
GROUND
NUMBER
DWG
SIZE
SIZE
TYPE
SIZE
C-10-376
20-E-04
0.75"
MFR
CABLE
#14
P-10-376
20-E-04
0.75"
#12
XHHW-2
#12
TYPE
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
20-E-04
0.75"
#12
XHHW-2
#12
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
C-10-380
20-E-02
0.75"
#14
XHHW-2
#14
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
C-10-382
C-10-383
C-10-390
L-10-390
C-10-222
20-E-02
20-E-02
20-E-02
20-E-02
20-E-02
20-E-01
20-E-02
0.75"
0.75"
0.75"
0.75"
0.75"
2"
4
52
#14
#14
#14
#14
#12
#12
#14
XHHW-2
XHHW-2
XHHW-2
XHHW-2
XHHW-2
XHHW-2
XHHW-2
#14
#14
#14
#14
#12
#12
MFR
#12
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
L-10-377
C-10-381
DESCRIPTION
CONNECTING
SEGMENTS
AC-02
AC-02 THERMOSTAT
>> AC-02 CONTROL
AC-02
>> AC-02 POWER
#12
EF-01
LP-2033 VIA SWITCH
>> EF-01 POWER
#14
ZS-2019
CONDUIT TEE
>> ZS-2019 CONTROL
C-10-382
#14
ZS-2029
CONDUIT TEE
>> ZS-2029 CONTROL
C-10-382
2
2
#14
#14
CONDUIT TEE
PCM-2031
>> ZS-2019 CONTROL
>> ZS-2029 CONTROL
#14
ZS-2039A/ZS-2039B
PCM-2031
>> ZS-2039A/ZS-2039B CONTROL
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
2
#14
#12
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
FACP-2035
PCM-2031
>> PCM-2031 CONTROL
ANY ADDITIONAL TO EXISTING FACP
FACP-2035
LP-2033
>> FACP-2035 POWER
XHHW-2 FR:
TO:
2
16
10
2
16
10
#12
#14
#14
#12
#14
#14
C-10-380
C-10-381
>>
>>
>>
>>
>>
>>
CONDUIT TEE
PCM-2030
RVAT-1050B CONTROL POWER
RVAT-1050B CONTROL
SPARE
RVAT-1040B CONTROL POWER
RVAT-1040B CONTROL
SPARE
C-10-220
C-10-220
C-10-220
C-10-221
C-10-221
C-10-221
END OF CONDUIT SCHEDULE

END OF SECTION
May 2014
16990-13
9408A10
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
May 2014
16990-14
9408A10
SECTION 17050
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PROCESS CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION
SYSTEMS
PART 1
1.01
GENERAL
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes:
1.
General requirements applicable to all Process Control and Instrumentation
Work.
2.
General requirements for process control and instrumentation submittals.
B.
Related sections:
1.
2.
a. Items involving electrical, control, and instrumentation construction may
be indicated on the Drawings or specified in the Specifications that do not
apply specifically to electrical, control and instrumentation systems.
3.
a. Document 00700 - General Conditions.
b. Document 007D - Supplementary Conditions.
c. Section 01140 - Work Restrictions.
d. Section 01292 - Schedule of Values.
e. Section 01312 - Project Meetings.
f. Section 01324B - Progress Schedules and Reports.
g. Section 01329 - Safety Plan.
h. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures.
i.
Section 01410 - Regulatory Requirements.
j.
Section 01450 - Quality Control.
k. Section 01600 - Product Requirements.
l.
Section 01610 - Project Design Criteria.
m. Section 01756 - Testing, Training, and Facility Start-Up.
n. Section 01770 - Closeout Procedures.
o. Section 01782 - Operation and Maintenance Data.
p. Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Electrical.
q. Section 16075 - Electrical Identification.
r. Section 17100 - Control Strategies.
s. Section 17101 - Specific Control Strategies.
t. Section 17762 - Control Systems SCADA Software.
u. Section 17950 - Testing, Calibration, and Commissioning.
May 2014
17050-1
9408A10
C.
Interfaces to equipment, instruments, and other components:

1.
The Drawings, Specifications, and overall design are based on preliminary
information furnished by various equipment manufacturers, which identify a
minimum scope of supply from the manufacturers. This information pertains to,
but is not limited to, instruments, control devices, electrical equipment,
packaged mechanical systems, and control equipment provided with
mechanical systems.
2.
Provide all material and labor needed to install the actual equipment furnished,
include all costs to add any additional instruments, wiring, control system
inputs/outputs, controls, interlocks, electrical hardware etc., which may be
necessary to make a complete, functional installation based on the actual
equipment furnished:
a. Make all changes necessary to meet the manufacturers wiring
requirements.
3.
Submit all such changes and additions to the Engineer for acceptance as
specified in Document 00700
4.
Review the complete set of Drawings and Specifications in order to ensure
that all items related to the instrumentation and control systems are completely
accounted for. Include any items indicated on the Drawings or in Specifications
from another discipline in the scope of Work:
a. If a conflict between Drawings and Specifications is discovered, refer
conflict to the Engineer as soon as possible for resolution.
5.
Loop drawings:
a. Provide complete loop drawings for all systems, including packaged
equipment furnished as part of a vendor furnished package, and for all
pre-purchased equipment.
b. The form, minimum level of detail, and format for the loop drawings must
match that of the sample loop drawings included in the Contract
Documents.
c. The Owner and Engineer are not responsible for providing detailed loop
diagrams for Contractor furnished equipment.
D.
All instrumentation, and control equipment and systems for the entire project to
comply with the requirements specified in the Instrumentation and Control
Specifications, whether referenced in the individual Equipment Specifications or not:
1.
The requirements of the Instrumentation and Control Specifications apply to all
Instrumentation and Control Work specified in other Specifications, including
HVAC controls, packaged mechanical systems, LCPs, VCPs, etc.
2.
Inform all vendors supplying instrumentation, control systems, panels, and/or
equipment of the requirements of the Instrumentation and Control
Specifications.
3.
The Owner is not responsible for any additional costs due to the failure of the
Contractor to notify all subcontractors and suppliers of the Instrumentation
and Control Specifications requirements.
E.
Contract Documents:
1.
General:
a. The Drawings and Specifications are complementary and are to be used
together in order to fully describe the Work.
2.
Specifications:
a. Documents 00700 and 007D of the Contract Documents govern the Work.
b. These requirements are in addition to all General Requirements.
May 2014
17050-2
9408A10
3.
Contract Drawings:
a. The Instrumentation and Control Drawings show in a diagrammatic
manner, the desired locations, and arrangements of the components of
the Instrumentation Work. Follow the Drawings as closely as possible, use
professional judgment and coordinate with the other trades to secure the
best possible installation, use the entire Drawing set for construction
purposes.
b. Locations of equipment, control devices, instruments, boxes, panels, etc.
are approximate only, exercise professional judgment in executing the
Work to ensure the best possible installation:
1) The equipment locations and dimensions indicated on the Drawings
and elevations are approximate. Use the shop drawings to determine
the proper layout, foundation, and pad requirements, etc. for final
installation. Coordinate with all subcontractors to ensure that all
instrumentation and control equipment is compatible with other
equipment and space requirements. Make changes required to
accommodate differences in equipment dimensions.
2) The Contractor has the freedom to select any of the named
manufacturers as identified in the individual Specifications; however,
the Engineer has designed the spatial equipment layout based upon
a single manufacturer and has not confirmed that every named
manufacturers equipment fits in the allotted space. It is the
Contractors responsibility to ensure that the equipment being
furnished fits within the defined space.
c. Installation details:
1) The Contract Drawings include installation details showing means
and methods for installing instrumentation and control equipment.
For cases where typical details are not provided or compatible with
an installed location, develop installation details that are necessary
for completing the Work, and submit these details for review by the
Engineer.
d. Schematic diagrams:
1) All controls are shown de-energized.
2) Schematic diagrams show control function only. Incorporate other
necessary functions for proper operation and protection of the
system.
3) Add slave relays, where required, to provide all necessary contacts
for the control system or where needed to function as interposing
relays for control voltage coordination, equipment coordination, or
control system voltage drop considerations.
4) Mount all devices shown on motor controller schematic diagrams in
the controller compartment enclosure, unless otherwise noted or
indicated.
5) Control schematics are to be used as a guide in conjunction with the
descriptive operating sequences indicated on the Drawings or in the
Specifications. Combine all information and furnish a coordinated
and fully functional control system.
F.
Alternates/Alternatives:
1.
Substitute item provisions as specified in Document 00700 and Section 01600.
G.
Changes and change orders:
May 2014
17050-3
9408A10
1.
1.02
1.03
REFERENCES
A.
Code compliance:
1.
As specified in Section 01410:
a. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only. The
latest edition accepted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction of referenced
publications in effect at the time of Bid governs.
2.
The following codes and standards are hereby incorporated into this Section:
a. American National Standards Institute (ANSI).
b. American Petroleum Institute (API):
1) RP 550 Manual on Installation of Refinery Instruments and Control
Systems; Part II-Process Stream Analyzers; Section 5-Oxygen
Analyzers.
2) RP 551 - Process Measurement Instrumentation.
c. International Organization for Standardization (ISO):
1) 9001 - Quality Management Systems - Requirements.
d. International Society of Automation (ISA):
1) 5.1 - Instrumentation Symbols and Identification.
2) 5.4 - Instrument Loop Diagrams.
3) 20 - Specification Forms for Process Measurement and Control
Instruments, Primary Elements, and Control Valves.
e. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
1) 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 V Maximum).
f. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).
g. National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST).
h. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):
1) 508 - Standard of Safety for Industrial Control Equipment.
2) 508A - Standard of Safety for Industrial Control Panels.
B.
Compliance with Laws and Regulations:

1.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Definitions of terms and other electrical and instrumentation considerations in

accordance with:
1.
Factory Mutual (FM).
2.
International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC).
3.
4.
International Society of Automation (ISA).
5.
International Organization for Standardization (ISO).
6.
7.
8.
InterNational Electrical Testing Association (NETA).
9.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).
10. National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST).
11. Underwriters Laboratories (UL).
May 2014
17050-4
9408A10
B.
1.
Control circuit: Any circuit operating at 120 volts alternating current (VAC) or
direct current (VDC) or less, whose principal purpose is the conveyance of
information (including performing logic) and not the conveyance of energy for
the operation of an electrically powered device.
2.
Panel: An instrument support system that may be a flat surface, a partial
enclosure, or a complete enclosure for instruments and other devices used in
process control systems. Unless otherwise specified or clearly indicated by the
context, the term panel in these Contract Documents is interpreted as a
general term, which includes flat surfaces, enclosures, cabinets and consoles.
3.
Power circuit: Any circuit operating at 90 volts (AC or DC) or more, whose
principal purpose is the conveyance of energy for the operation of an
electrically powered device.
4.
Signal circuit: Any circuit operating at less than 50 VAC or VDC, which
conveys analog information or digital communications information.
5.
Digital bus: A communication network, such as PROFIBUS, Foundation
Fieldbus, or DeviceNet, allowing instruments and devices to transmit data,
control functions and diagnostic information.
6.
2-Wire transmitter (loop powered): A transmitter that derives its operating
power supply from the signal transmission circuit and requires no separate
power supply connections. As used in this Section, two-wire transmitter refers
to a transmitter that provides 4 to 20 milliamperes current regulation of a signal
in a series circuit with an external 24 VDC driving potential:
a. Fieldbus communications signal or both.
7.
Powered transmitters: A transmitter that requires a separate power source
(120 VAC, 240 VAC, etc.) in order for the transmitter to develop its signal. As
used in this Section, the produced signal may be a 4 to 20 milliampere current
signal, a digital bus communications signal or both.
8.
System supplier - As specified in ICSC Qualifications in the Quality Assurance
article of this Section.
9.
Modifications: Changing, extending, interfacing to, removing or altering an
existing circuit.
C.
NEMA:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Type 3R enclosure in accordance with NEMA 250.
5.
Type 3S enclosure in accordance with NEMA 250.
6.
Type 3X enclosure in accordance with NEMA 250.
7.
Type 3RX enclosure in accordance with NEMA 250.
8.
Type 3SX enclosure in accordance with NEMA 250.
9.
10. Type 4X enclosure in accordance with NEMA 250.
11. Type 5 enclosure in accordance with NEMA 250.
13. Type 6P enclosure in accordance with NEMA 250.
15. Type 12K enclosure in accordance with NEMA 250.
May 2014
17050-5
9408A10
D.
Acronym definitions:
1.
CCS:
The SCADA central computer system (CCS) consisting of personal
computers and software. The personal computer-based hardware
and software system that includes the operator interface, data
storage, data retrieval, archiving, alarming, historian, reports,
trending, and other higher level control system software and
functions.
2.
DPDT:
Double-pole, double-throw.
3.
ES:
Enterprise system: Computer based communications or data
sharing system utilized for non-process control functions such as
E-mail, sharing files, creating documents, etc.
4.
FAT:
Factory acceptance test.
5.
HART:
Highway addressable remote transducer.
6.
HOA:
Hand-Off-Auto control function that is totally PLC based. In the
Hand mode, equipment is started or stopped, valves are opened or
closed through operator direction under the control of the PLC
software. In the Auto mode, equipment is started or stopped and
valves are opened or closed through a control algorithm within the
PLC software. In the Off mode, the equipment is prohibited from
responding from the PLC control.
7.
HMI:
Human machine interface: PLC based operator interface device
consisting of an alphanumeric or graphic display with operator
input functionality. The HMI is typically a flat panel type of display
mounted on the front of a PLC enclosure with either a touch screen
or tactile button interface.
8.
ICSC:
Instrumentation and control system contractor: Subcontractor who
specializes in the design, construction, fabrication, software
development, installation, testing, and commissioning of industrial
instrumentation and control systems.
9.
IJB:
Instrument junction boxes: A panel designed with cord sets to
easily remove, replace or relocate instrument signals.
10. I/O:
Input/Output.
11. IP:
Internet protocol or ingress protection.
12. LCP:
Local control panel: Operator interface panel that may contain an
HMI, pilot type control devices, operator interface devices, control
relays, etc. and does not contain a PLC or RIO.
13. LAN:
Local area network: A control or communications network that is
limited to the physical boundaries of the facility.
14. LOR:
Local-Off-Remote control function. In the Remote mode, equipment
is started or stopped, and valves are opened or closed through the
PLC based upon the selection of the HOA. In the Local mode,
equipment is started or stopped, valves are opened or closed
based upon hardwired control circuits completely independent of
the PLC with minimum interlocks and permissive conditions. In the
Off mode, the equipment is prohibited from responding to any
control commands.
15. NJB:
Network junction box. An enclosure that contains multiple access
points to various networks within the facility. Networks could be
Ethernet, Ethernet/IP, Fieldbus, RIO etc.
16. OIT:
Operator interface terminal: PC-based interface device used for
operator interface with the SCADA system.
17. P&ID:
Process and instrumentation diagram.
May 2014
17050-6
9408A10
18. PC:
19. PCIS:
20. PCM:
21. PJB:
22. PLC:
23. RIO:
24. RTU:
25. SCADA:
26.
27.
28.
29.
SPDT:
SPST:
UPS:
VCP:
30. WAN:
1.04
Personal computer.
Process control and instrumentation system: Includes the entire
instrumentation system, the entire control system, and all of the
Work specified in the Instrumentation and Control Specifications
and depicted on the Instrumentation Drawings.
Process control module: An enclosure containing any of the
following devices: PLC, RTU, or RIO.
Power junction box: An enclosure with terminal blocks that
distribute power to multiple instruments.
Programmable logic controller.
Remote I/O device for the PLC consisting of remote I/O racks, or
remote I/O blocks.
Remote telemetry unit: A controller typically consisting of a PLC,
and a means for remote communications. The remote
communications devices typically are radios, modems, etc.
Supervisory control and data acquisition system: A general name
for the computerized system that gathers and processes data from
sensors and applies operational controls to the process equipment.
It includes the PLCs and/or RTUs, HMI PLC-based operator
interface units, related interconnecting communications systems,
and the CCS operator interface and data management system.
Single-pole, double-throw.
Single-pole, single-throw.
Uninterruptible power supply.
Vendor control panel: Control panels that are furnished with
particular equipment by a vendor other than the ICSC. These
panels may contain PLCs, RIO, OIT, HMI, etc.
Wide area network: A control or communications network that
extends beyond the physical boundaries of the facility.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
1.
The Work includes everything necessary for and incidental to executing and
completing the Instrumentation and Control System Work indicated on the
Drawings and specified in the Specifications and reasonably inferable there
from including but not limited to:
a. Preparing hardware submittals for field instrumentation.
b. Design, develop, and draft loop drawings, control panel designs, and all
other drawing submittals specified in the Instrumentation and Control
Specifications.
c. Prepare the test plan, the training plan, and the spare parts submittals.
d. Procure all hardware.
e. Provide all PCIS system hardware and software.
f. Fabricate panels.
g. Perform factory tests on panels.
h. Perform bench calibration and verify calibration after installation.
i.
Oversee and certify installation of the PCIS system.
j.
Oversee, document, and certify loop testing.
k. Oversee, document, and certify system pre-commissioning.
l.
Conduct the performance tests.
m. Prepare operation and maintenance manuals.
May 2014
17050-7
9408A10
n.
o.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Conduct training classes.

Integrate the PCIS with instrumentation and control devices provided
under other sections.
p. Prepare Record Drawings.
1) Develop all Record Drawings associated with instruments and
equipment provided under the
2) Contract Documents and all Owner furnished and any existing
equipment the system is interfacing.
3) Develop all requisite Record Loop Drawings associated with
instruments and equipment provided under the Contract Documents
and all Owner furnished and any existing equipment the system is
interfacing.
q. Resolve signal, power, or functional incompatibilities between the PCIS
and interfacing devices.
r. Perform all required corrective and preventative maintenance.
It is the intent of these Specifications that the entire electrical power,
instrumentation, and control system be complete and operable. Provide all
necessary material and labor for the complete system from source of power to
final utilization equipment, including all connections, testing, calibration of all
equipment furnished by others, as well as equipment furnished by the
Contractor, whether or not specifically mentioned but which are necessary for
successful operation.
Provide the complete operating PCIS to perform the specified monitoring,
communications, alarm, control, display, and reporting functions in accordance
with the SCADA requirements.
Coordinate all aspects of the Work between Contractor and all subcontractors
before bidding to ensure that all costs associated with a complete installation
are included. The Owner is not responsible for any change orders due to lack
of coordination of the Work between the Contractor, the ICSC, the other
subcontractors or suppliers.
Furnish detailed, complete, and thorough operations and maintenance
documentation, including but not limited to operations manuals, maintenance
manuals, as-built wiring drawings, training manuals, as-built software
documentation, and all other documentation required to operate, modify, and
maintain all parts of the PCIS.
The Programmer will provide as-built software documentation for the PLCs
and computers programmed by the Programmer. The Programmer will provide
training on hardware and software items provided by the Programmer. All
other documentation and training shall be by the Contractor.
Where demolition is indicated on the Drawings, the electrical subcontractor is
responsible for disconnecting equipment electrical connections and rendering
the equipment safe. The ICSC is responsible for physically removing all
instrumentation to be demolished and return it either to the Owner or dispose
of it as directed by the Owners representative. The ICSC shall be responsible
for any program modifications needed based on the demolition of the
equipment, both for the loops directly and indirectly affected.
Portions of this Project involve installation in existing facilities and interfaces to
existing circuits, power systems, controls, and equipment.
a. Perform and document comprehensive and detailed field investigations of
existing conditions (circuits, power systems, controls, equipment, etc)
before performing any Work.
May 2014
17050-8
9408A10
b.
Provide and document interface with, modifications to, upgrade, or

replacement of existing circuits, power systems, controls, and equipment.
9.
Revise in a manner as directed by the Engineer all I/O and addressing that the
Engineer determines to be unacceptable as a result of a lack of Contractor
coordination between Contract Documents and all suppliers.
10. Defective Work:
a. As specified in Document 00700.
B.
Existing system:
1.
The existing station pumps raw water from the Kaw Reservoir to a water
treatment plant in Stillwater, OK. The pump station currently has five pumps
powered and controlled from an existing electrical and control building. The
facility is controlled remotely via an existing leased line connection from
SCADA consoles at the treatment plant.
2.
Existing pump controls are located on the front of each pump starter, on the
front of the existing PCM cabinet, and at SCADA.
3.
Existing PLC communicates with the treatment plant via a leased line.
4.
Additional details regarding the existing control system are indicated on the
Drawings. Refer to Control System Block Diagram on drawing 01-N-01 for
further details.
5.
Historian server is existing.
C.
New system:
1.
The new prefabricated building has a control room which will contain the new
PCM. The new PCM will be integrated with the existing control system as
2.
The new control system shall utilize ControlLogix PLCs for monitoring and
controlling the pump station.
3.
The new PLC discrete I/O modules shall be rated for 120 VAC operation.
4.
The PLC cabinet shall contain the following but not limited to external panelmounted OIT (Operator interface terminal), managed copper Ethernet
switches, front-mounted hardwired controls, and a UPS.
5.
The PLC and OIT shall be programmed using the manufacturers latest
version of the compliant programming software package. The existing SCADA
system shall be programmed to accommodate the new system as indicated on
the Contract Documents.
6.
A new fiber network connection will be provided to the site by the local utility
Ponca City Utility Authority (PCUA).
a. Existing leased line to be left in place as a redundant connection. Switch
to direct network traffic on fiber network unless connectivity is lost.
b. Coordinate with PCUA to provide network drop. Fiber drop is to be
installed as late in the project as feasible. The City will be paying a
monthly fee for the fiber connection, therefore the fiber connection from
PCUA should not be in place prior to installation of the new PCM panel
and fiber connection box. Coordinate with the City and PCUA for
appropriate timing of installation.
c. Network connectivity from PCUA network to the existing City network shall
be provided by the City.
7.
New PLC shall interface with existing starters. Control relays and interlocks for
pump starters and drives are located in the PCM cabinet to remove low
voltage controls from medium voltage equipment for the safety of maintenance
personnel.
May 2014
17050-9
9408A10
8.
All new equipment to be remote operable from SCADA as indicated on the

Drawings and in the Control Descriptions.
9.
Coordinate with the City to program existing SCADA system. Existing SCADA
development console is located at the treatment plant.
10. Coordinate with Electrical Subcontractor, switchgear supplier, and generator
supplier regarding transfer system operation to provide a complete and
operable transfer system.
D.
1.05
Operating facility:
1.
2.
All control modifications indicated for existing pump Nos. 1, 2, and 3 must take
place while the pump is offline for process modifications. Refer to Section
01140 for requirements regarding pump downtime.
3.
Portions of this existing facility must remain fully functional throughout the
entire construction period. In consideration of this requirement, comply with the
following guidelines:
a. All outages must be of minimal duration and fully coordinated and agreed
to by the Owner. Adjust the construction to meet the requirements of the
Owner.
b. As weather and facility demand conditions dictate, re-adjust the
construction schedule to meet the demands placed upon Owner by its
users.
c. Where portions of the Work are in existing facilities and require interface
to existing circuits, power systems, controls and equipment, perform
comprehensive and detailed field investigations of existing conditions.
Determine all information necessary to document, interface with, modify,
upgrade, or replace existing circuits, power systems, controls, and
equipment.
4.
According to individual circumstances and in compliance with the Drawings,
extend or replace conduit and cable connections from existing locations.
5.
Where shown or specified, replace existing field instruments with new.
6.
The Contractor is responsible for the integrity and measurement accuracy of
all loops. However, any defect found in existing equipment is the responsibility
of the Owner.
7.
The standards of documentation, instrument tagging, cable and conductor
termination, terminal identification and labeling that apply to the new
installation apply equally to the existing installation. Provide new nameplates
for existing equipment showing new tag number indicated on the Drawings.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Furnish submittals as specified in Section 01330 and this Section.
B.
General:
1.
Instruct all equipment suppliers of submittals and operation and maintenance
manuals of the requirements in this Section.
2.
Furnish the submittals required by each section in the Electrical Specifications.
3.
Adhere to the wiring numbering scheme specified in Section 16075 throughout
the Project:
a. Uniquely number each wire.
b. Wire numbers must appear on all Equipment Drawings.
May 2014
17050-10
9408A10
4.
Use equipment and instrument tags, as indicated on the Drawings, for all
submittals.
C.
Submittal organization:
1.
First page:
a. Specification section reference.
b. Name and telephone number of individual who reviewed submittal before
delivery to Engineer.
c. Name and telephone number of individual who is primarily responsible for
the development of the submittal.
d. Place for Contractors review stamp and comments.
2.
Next pages:
a. Provide confirmation of specification compliance in a tabular form that
individually lists each specification section, paragraph, and subparagraphs and unequivocally states compliance with said requirement or
takes exception to the requirement and lists the reason for said exception
and offers alternative means for compliance.
b. Include a response in writing to each of the Engineers comments or
questions for submittal packages which are re-submitted:
1) In the order that the comments or questions were presented
throughout the submittal.
2) Referenced by index section and page number on which the
comment appeared.
3) Acceptable responses to Engineers comments are either:
a) Engineers comment or change is accepted and appropriate
changes are made.
b) Explain why comment is not accepted or requested change is
not made.
c) Explain how requirement will be satisfied in lieu of comment or
change requested by Engineer.
4) Any re-submittal, which does not contain responses to the Engineers
previous comments shall be returned for Revision and Re-submittal.
5) No further review by the Engineer will be performed until a response
for previous comments has been received.
3.
Remaining pages:
a. Actual submittal data:
1) Organize submittals in exactly the same order as the items are
referenced, listed, and/or organized in the specification section.
2) For submittals that cover multiple devices used in different areas
under the same specification section, the submittal for the individual
devices must list the area where the device is intended to be used.
D.
Submittal preparation:
1.
During the period of preparation of submittals, the Contractor shall authorize
direct, informal liaison between the ICSC and the Engineer for exchange of
technical information. As a result of this liaison, certain minor refinements and
revisions may be authorized informally by the Engineer, which do not alter the
scope of Work or cause increase or decrease in the Contract price or times.
During this informal exchange, no oral statement by the Engineer shall be
construed to give formal approval of any component or method, nor shall any
statement be construed to grant exception to, or variation from, these Contract
Documents.
May 2014
17050-11
9408A10
2.
E.
In these Contract Documents, some items of Work are represented

schematically, and are designated for the most part by numbers, as derived
from criteria in ISA-5.1:
a. Employ the nomenclature and numbers designated in this Section and
indicated on the Drawings exclusively throughout shop drawings, data
sheets, and similar submittals.
b. Replace any other symbols, designations, and nomenclature unique to a
manufacturers, suppliers, or subcontractors standard methods with those
identified in this Section and indicated on the Drawings.
Specific submittal requirements:

1.
Shop drawings:
a. Required for materials and equipment listed in this and other sections.
b. Furnish sufficient information to evaluate the suitability of the proposed
material or equipment for the intended use, and for compliance with these
Specifications.
c. Shop drawings requirements:
1) Front, side, and, rear elevations, and top and bottom views, showing
all dimensions.
2) Locations of conduit entrances and access plates.
3) Component layout and identification.
4) Schematic and wiring diagrams with wire numbers and terminal
identification.
5) Connection diagrams, terminal diagrams, internal wiring diagrams,
conductor size, etc.
6) Anchoring method and leveling criteria, including manufacturers
recommendations for the Project site seismic criteria.
7) Weight.
8) Finish.
9) Nameplates:
a) As specified in Section 16075.
10) Temperature limitations, as applicable.
d. Use equipment and instrument tags as depicted on the P&IDs for all
submittals.
e. Adhere to wiring numbering scheme outlined in Section 16075 throughout
the Project:
1) Uniquely number each wire per the Specifications.
f. Wire numbers must appear on all equipment drawings.
g. Organize the shop drawing submittals for inclusion in the Operation and
Maintenance Manuals:
1) Furnish the initial shop drawing submittal bound in one or more
standard size, 3-ring, D-ring, loose leaf, vinyl plastic, hard cover
binders suitable for bookshelf storage.
2) Binder ring size: 2 inches.
h. Include the letterhead and/or title block of the firm responsible for the
preparation of all shop drawings. Include the following information in the
title block, as a minimum:
1) The firm's registered business name.
2) Firm's physical address, email address, and phone number.
3) Owners name.
4) Project name and location.
5) Drawing name.
May 2014
17050-12
9408A10
2.
3.
4.
5.
6) Revision level.
7) Personnel responsible for the content of the drawing.
8) Date.
i.
The work includes modifications to existing circuits:
1) Clearly show all modifications to existing circuits.
2) In addition, show all existing unmodified wiring to clearly depict the
functionality and electrical characteristics of the complete modified
circuits.
Product data:
a. Submitted for non-custom manufactured material listed in this and other
sections and shown on shop drawings.
b. Include:
1) Catalog cuts.
2) Bulletins.
3) Brochures.
4) Quality photocopies of applicable pages from these documents.
5) Identify on the data sheets the Project name, applicable specification
section, and paragraph.
6) Identify model number and options for the actual equipment being
furnished.
7) Neatly cross out options that do not apply or equipment not intended
to be supplied.
c. Use equipment and instrument tags as depicted on the P&IDs for all
submittals.
d. Adhere to wiring numbering scheme outlined in Section 16075 throughout
the Project:
1) Uniquely number each wire per the Specifications.
e. Wire numbers must appear on all equipment drawings.
Detailed sequence of operation for all equipment or systems.
Completed Motor Data Sheet, as specified in Section 16224, for every motor
furnished:
a. Submit one copy of the Motor Data Sheet to the Engineer for review as
part of the associated equipment submittal.
b. Furnish the Engineer with a complete set of written operation and
maintenance manuals 8 weeks before energization start-up and/or
commissioning.
c. Submit preliminary sets of these manuals to the Engineer for review of
format and content:
1) Engineer will return 1 set with comments.
2) Revise and/or amend as required and submit the requisite number of
copies to the Engineer 15 days before Pre-commissioning of the
systems.
d. Incorporate changes that occur during startup and submit as part of the
final manuals.
e. Provide comprehensive information on all systems and components to
enable operation, service, maintenance, and repair.
f. Include Record Documents and the approved shop drawing submittals,
modified for conditions encountered in the field during the work.
g. Include signed results from Calibration, Loop Validation Tests, Precommissioning, and Performance Testing.
May 2014
17050-13
9408A10
h.
6.
7.
Provide installation, connection, operating, calibration, setpoints (e.g.,

pressure, pump control, time delays, etc.), adjustment, test,
troubleshooting, maintenance, and overhaul instructions in complete
detail.
i.
Provide exploded or other detailed views of all instruments, assemblies,
and accessory components together with complete parts lists and
ordering instructions.
j.
Operational Manual:
1) Prepare and provide a simplified version of the standard
manufacturers HMI software and system operations manual that
includes basic instructions in the application of the system as
required for operators in day-to-day operations.
k. Spare parts list:
1) Include a priced list of recommended spare parts for all the
equipment furnished under this Contract:
a) Include recommended quantities sufficient to maintain the
furnished system for a period of 5 years.
2) Annotate the list to indicate which items, if any and quantity are
furnished as part of this Contract.
3) Provide the name, address, and phone number of manufacturer and
manufacturer's local service representative of these parts.
l.
Control and SCADA System Software Record Documents:
1) Include complete documentation of all the software programs
provided for the entire control and SCADA systems, including:
a) Listings of all application software on both hard copy and CDROM.
b) Database, both hard copy and CD-ROM.
c) Communication protocols.
d) All documentation necessary to maintain, troubleshoot, modify,
or update the software system.
m. Organize the operation and maintenance manuals for each process in the
following manner:
1) Section A - Process and Instrumentation Diagrams.
2) Section B - Control Descriptions.
3) Section C - Loop Drawings.
4) Section D - Instrument Summary.
5) Section E - Instrument Data Sheets and Brochures.
6) Section F - Sizing Calculations.
7) Section G - Instrumentation Installation Details.
8) Section H - Test Results.
9) Section I - Operational Manual.
10) Section J - Spare Parts List.
11) Section K - Control and SCADA System Software.
Material and equipment schedules:
a. Furnish a complete schedule and/or matrix of all materials, equipment,
apparatus, and luminaries that are proposed for use:
1) Include sizes, names of manufacturers, catalog numbers, and such
other information required to identify the items.
Itemized instrument summary:
a. Submit a hard copy of the instrument summary.
b. List all of the key attributes of each instrument including:
1) Tag number.
May 2014
17050-14
9408A10
8.
9.
2) Manufacturer.
3) Model number.
4) Service.
5) Area location.
6) Calibrated range.
7) Loop drawing number.
c. Associated LCP, VCP, PCM, or PLC.
Instrument data sheets and cut sheets:
a. Furnish fully completed data sheets, both electronically in Microsoft Word
or Excel and in hardcopy, for each instrument and component according
to ISA-20 Specification Forms for Process Measurement and Control
Instruments, Primary Elements and Control Valves. The data sheets
provided with the instrument specifications are preliminary and are not
complete. They are provided to assist with the completion of final
instrument data sheets. Additional data sheets may be required. Include
the following information on the data sheet:
1) Component functional description specified in this Section and
2) Manufacturers model number or other product designation.
3) Tag number specified in this Section and indicated on the Drawings.
4) System or loop of which the component is a part.
5) Location or assembly at which the component is to be installed.
6) Input and output characteristics.
7) Scale range with units and multiplier.
8) Requirements for electric supply.
9) Requirements for air supply.
10) Power consumption.
11) Response timing.
12) Materials of construction and of component parts that are in contact
with, or otherwise exposed to, process media, and or corrosive
ambient air.
13) Special requirements or features, such as specifications for ambient
operating conditions.
14) Features and options that are furnished.
b. Provide a technical brochure or bulletin (cut sheet) for each instrument
on the project. Submit with the corresponding data sheets:
1) Where the same make and model of instrument is used in 2 or more
applications on the project, and the process applications are nearly
identical, and the materials, features and options are identical submit
one brochure or bulletin for the set of identical instruments.
2) Include a list of tag numbers for which it applies with each brochure
or bulletin.
3) Furnish technical product brochures that are complete enough to
verify conformance with all Contract Document requirements, and to
reflect only those features supplied with the device.
4) Cross out models, features, options, or accessories that are not
being provided.
5) Clearly mark and identify special options and features.
c. Organization: Index the data sheets and brochures in the submittal by
systems or loops.
Control panel hardware submittal:
a. Submit the following in 1 submittal package.
May 2014
17050-15
9408A10
b.
Complete and detailed bills of materials:

1) Including quantity, description, manufacturer, and part number for
each assembly or component for each control panel.
2) Include all items within an enclosure.
c. Complete grounding requirements for each system component including
any requirements for PLCs, process LANs, and SCADA equipment.
d. Requirements for physical separation between control system
components and 120 VAC, 480 VAC, and medium voltage power cables.
e. UPS and battery load calculations to show that the backup capacity and
time meet the specified requirements.
f. Provide a data sheet for each control system component together with a
technical product brochure or bulletin, which include:
1) The manufacturer's model number or other identifying product
designation.
2) Tag and loop number.
3) System to which it belongs.
4) Site to which it applies.
5) Input and output characteristics.
6) Requirements for electric power.
7) Device ambient operating requirements.
8) Materials of construction.
10. Schedule of values:
a. In addition to completing all items referred to in the schedule of values,
Section 01292, submit per unit instrument and labor costs used in
developing the final bid for the PCIS system, for the express purpose of
pricing and cost justification for any proposed change orders. It is the
responsibility of the ICSC subcontractor to prove to the Engineers
satisfaction that said per unit costs were used in the development of the
final Bid amount.
11. Installation recommendations:
a. Submit the manufacturers printed recommendations for installation of
instrumentation equipment.
12. Training submittals:
a. Develop and submit for review a general training plan. Include complete
descriptions of all planned training classes, a preliminary training
schedule, a list of all proposed instructors along with resumes, examples
of proposed training manuals, and a description of any special training
tools to be used (simulators, self-paced modules, personal computerbased training, etc.).
b. The Engineer will review the general training plan. Special emphasis will
be placed on review of the qualifications of the proposed instructors and
the timing of the individual courses to maximize their effectiveness. If, in
the opinion of the Engineer, the proposed instructors are not sufficiently
qualified to conduct the specified training courses, or lack experience,
where required, on the specific configuration of the system, provide more
qualified instructors.
c. Training course plan submittals:
1) For each training course or other training activity, submit a detailed,
complete outline and agenda for each lesson.
2) Describe any student pre-requisites for the course or training activity.
3) Provide an updated schedule for all sessions of the course, including
dates, times, durations, and locations.
May 2014
17050-16
9408A10
4) Submit training materials.

Incorporate all submittal review comments into the course.
Do not conduct training courses before review and acceptance of the
Course Plan submittal for the course.
13. Record documents:
a. Furnish as specified in Section 01770.
b. Provide record documents of all Instrumentation Drawings.
c. Record Drawing requirements:
1) Update Record Drawings weekly.
2) Record Drawings must be fully updated as a condition of the monthly
progress payments.
3) Submit Record Drawings upon completion of the Work for final
review.
4) Clearly and neatly show all changes including the following:
a) All existing pipe, conduit, wire, instruments or other structures
encountered or uncovered during construction.
d. Shop drawings:
1) General:
a) Coordinate all aspects of the Work so that a complete,
instrumentation, computer, and control system for the facility is
supported by accurate shop and record drawings:
(1) Clearly show every wire, circuit, and terminal provided
under this contract on one or more submitted wiring
diagrams.
b) Show all interfaces between any of the following: instruments,
vendor control panels, motor control centers, motor starters,
variable speed drives, control valves, flow meters, chemical
feeders and other equipment related to the PCIS.
c) Generate all drawings developed for this project utilizing
AutoCAD by Auto Desk Version 2004 or later:
(1) Furnish on CD-ROM disks containing the following for each
drawing:
(a) Original CAD files
(b) PDF version.
(2) Provide hard copies on 11 inch by 17 inch plain bond
paper.
d) Upon completion of the Work, update all shop drawings to
indicate the final as-built configuration of the systems:
(1) Should an error be found in a shop drawing during
installation or startup of equipment, note the correction,
including any field changes found necessary, on the
drawing and submit the corrections in the Record
Documents.
(2) Update, check, and revise all wiring drawings and other
submitted drawings and documents to show final installed
conditions.
(3) Provide as-built shop drawings for all instrumentation
equipment on 11-inch by 17-inch using plain Bond paper.
(4) Provide electronic copies of these documents on CD-ROM
disks in AutoCAD DWG format and Adobe PDF format..
Size all drawings to be readable and legible on 11-inch by
17-inch media.
d.
e.
May 2014
17050-17
9408A10
e)
Submittal Documents:
(1) Provide an interim submittal of Record Documents after the
PCIS system Pre-commissioning but prior to testing.
(2) Submit final Record Documents before Substantial
Completion or earlier if so specified in Section 01782 or the
General Requirements.
f) Review and Corrections:
(1) Correct any Record Documents or other documents found
to be incomplete, not accurate, of poor quality, or
containing errors.
(2) Promptly correct and re-submit Record Documents
returned for correction.
2) Furnish written information prepared specifically for this Project using
Microsoft Word.doc and Adobe .pdf formats and printed on 8.5-inch
by 11-inch plain bond paper:
a) Provide electronic copies of these documents on CD-ROM
disks.
e. Review and corrections:
1) Correct any record documents or other documents found to be
incomplete, not accurate, of poor quality, or containing errors.
2) Promptly correct and re-submit record documents returned for
correction.
14. Loop Drawings:
a. Submit loop drawings for every analog, discrete, and fieldbus signal and
control circuit:
1) Provide a loop drawing submittal that completely defines and
documents the contents of each monitoring, alarming, interlock, and
control loop on this Project.
2) This requirement applies to all signal and control circuits associated
with equipment on this Project including vendor supplied equipment
packages and control panels.
b. Show every instrument and I/O point on at least one loop diagram.
c. Provide a complete index in the front of each bound volume:
1) Index the loop drawings by systems or process areas.
d. Provide drawings showing definitive diagrams for every instrumentation
loop system:
1) Show and identify each component of each loop or system using
requirements and symbols from ISA-5.4.
2) Furnish a separate drawing sheet for each system or loop diagram.
e. In addition to the ISA-5.4 requirements, show the following details:
1) Functional name of each loop.
2) Reference name, drawing, and loop diagram numbers for any signal
continuing off the loop diagram sheet.
3) Show all terminal numbers, regardless of the entity providing the
equipment.
4) MCC panel, circuit, and breaker numbers for all power feeds to the
loops and instrumentation.
5) Designation of and, if appropriate, terminal assignments associated
with, every manhole, pull-box, junction box, conduit, and panel
through which the loop circuits pass.
May 2014
17050-18
9408A10
6)
Show vendor control panel, instrument panel, conduit, junction box,

equipment and PCIS terminations, termination identification, wire
numbers and colors, power circuits, and ground identifications.
7) If a circuit is continued on another drawing, show the name and
number of the continuation drawing on the loop drawing. Provide
complete references to all continuation drawings whether vendor
control panels, other loop drawings, existing drawings provided by
the Owner, or other drawings.
f. In addition to the above requirements, provide loop diagrams in
accordance with the example loop diagram as indicated on the Drawings.
15. Instrument Installation Drawings:
a. Submit, instrument installation, mounting, and anchoring details for all
components and assemblies, including access requirements and conduit
connection or entry details.
b. Furnish for each instrument a dedicated 8 1/2-inch by 11-inch installation
detail that pertains to the specific instrument by tag number.
c. For each detail, provide certification and the hard copies, by the
instrument manufacturer, that the proposed installation is in accordance
with the instrument manufacturer's recommendations and is fully
warrantable.
d. For each detail, provide, as a minimum, the following contents:
1) Necessary sections and elevation views required to define instrument
location by referencing tank, building or equipment names and
numbers, and geographical qualities such as north, south, east, west,
basement, first floor, etc.
2) Ambient temperature and humidity where the instrument is to be
installed.
3) Corrosive qualities of the environment where the instrument is to be
installed.
4) Hazardous rating of the environment where the instrument is to be
installed.
5) Process line pipe or tank size, service and material.
6) Process tap elevation and location
7) Upstream and downstream straight pipe lengths between instrument
installation and pipe fittings and valves.
8) Routing of tubing and identification of supports.
9) Mounting brackets, stands, anchoring devices, and sun shades.
10) Conduit entry size, number, location, and delineation between power
and signal.
11) NEMA ratings of enclosures and all components.
12) Clearances required for instrument servicing.
13) List itemizing all manufacturer makes, model numbers, quantities,
lengths required, and materials of each item required to support the
implementation of the detail.
16. Control Panel Drawings:
a. Layout Drawings:
1) Submit panel, enclosure, console, furniture, and cabinet layout
drawings for all items provided.
2) As a minimum, include the following information:
a) To scale front, side, and plan views.
b) Dimensions.
c) Interior and exterior arrangements.
May 2014
17050-19
9408A10
d)
e)
f)
Mounting information, including conduit entrance location.

Finish data.
Tag number and functional name of items mounted in and on
each panel, console, and cabinet.
g) Nameplate legend including text, letter size, and colors.
b. Wiring and Piping Diagrams:
1) Submit panel wiring and piping diagrams for every panel that
contains wiring and/or piping.
2) Include the following information:
a) Name of panel.
b) Wiring and piping sizes and types.
c) Terminal strip numbers.
d) Wire tags and labels.
e) Functional name and manufacturer's designation for items to
which wiring and piping are connected.
f) Electrical control schematics in accordance with ANSI
standards.
c. Installation drawings:
1) Provide site-specific installation drawings for all control equipment
panels, including dimensions.
2) Provide scaled drawings and show the position of the equipment at
its intended installation location.
3) Show the placement of all equipment being provided under this
Contract and its spatial relationship to all other equipment located in
the abutting and adjoining areas.
4) Show all required access and clearances associated with the
equipment with a statement of compliance to manufacturer's
recommendations, NEC, and other applicable codes.
17. Schematic Diagrams:
a. Submit schematic diagrams for all electrical equipment in ladder diagram
format.
b. Include device and field connection terminal numbers on all schematic
diagrams.
c. Incorporate equipment manufacturers shop drawing information into the
schematic diagrams in order to document the entire control system.
18. Control System Diagram:
a. Submit a complete set of control system diagrams including the following
information:
1) All PLCs, workstations, printers, communication devices, and
communication links:
a) Show all PLCs with their current I/O allocation, and future I/O
allocation, current plus spares provided, and maximum potential
I/O based on available slots.
2) All cables required for communication requirements.
3) Show each component fully annotated with conduit size and number
associated with the power source.
19. Process Control & SCADA Software Submittal:
a. In accordance with Product Data and Shop Drawing general
requirements.
b. Submit a complete description of the standard application software
programs, operating system and utility programs, including modifications
and explanation of how the specific functional requirements are met:
May 2014
17050-20
9408A10
1)
Provide a cross-reference between the Specification requirements

and the software submittal, in order to provide the Engineer the
ability to identify how each specified requirement or function is met.
c. A complete listing of the PCIS system point I/O database:
1) Include for each data point, relevant parameters such as range,
contact orientation, limits, incremental limits, I/O card byte, I/O
hardware address, and PLC assignment.
2) Organize on a site-by-site basis, separate by point type.
3) In addition to the active l/O points, list the implemented spare l/O
points and the available l/O points remaining on each card, as well as
other defined future points specified or shown.
d. Detailed descriptions of procedures used to implement and modify control
strategies and database construction.
e. Preliminary overview, screens, station graphic displays, and preliminary
reports.
f. Refer to Section 17762 for additional requirements.
20. Instrumentation and Control System Contractor Statement of Qualifications:
a. Submit statement of qualifications of the proposed ICSC in accordance
with subsequent requirements of this Section.
21. Control Descriptions:
a. For each control loop, provide a detailed functional description of the
operation of the equipment, signals, and controls as shown on the P&IDs:
1) Include all functions depicted or described in the Contract
Documents.
2) Include within the Control Description content:
a) All specific requirements.
b) All common requirements that pertain in general to all loops.
c) Listing all ranges, setpoints, timers, values, counter values, etc.
22. Testing, Calibration, and Start-up Submittal:
a. General testing submittal requirements are specified in this Section.
Additional requirements are specified in Section 17950 and other
Sections.
b. The Contractor is required to inform the Owner and Engineer of the day,
date and time for a scheduled test at least 15 calendar days before the
test takes place to allow the Owner and Engineer sufficient time to plan
travel to the test site.
c. Test Procedure Submittals:
1) Submit the proposed procedures to be followed during tests of the
PCIS and its components in two parts:
a) Preliminary Submittal: Outline of the specific proposed tests and
examples of proposed forms and checklists.
b) Detailed Submittal: After successful review of the Preliminary
Submittal, submit the proposed detailed test procedures, forms,
and checklists. Include a statement of test objectives with the
test procedures.
d. Provide certified and witnessed test and calibration checklists for each of
the following tests:
1) Calibration, adjustment, and test details for all components and
systems.
2) Factory Acceptance Tests.
3) Loop Validation Tests:
a) Loop Validation Certifications:
May 2014
17050-21
9408A10
(1) After the field device loop tests have been successfully
completed for all individual instruments, all separate analog
control networks, all valves, all VCPs, all motors, all local
operator interface panels, all motor control centers, etc.,
submit a certified copy of all test forms signed by the
Contractor, ICSC and the Owners Representative, with test
data entered, together with a clear and unequivocal
statement that all instrumentation has been successfully
calibrated, inspected, and tested.
4) Pre-commissioning Test.
5) Performance Test.
e. Factory Acceptance Test:
1) Include complete test procedures and forms to be used during the
test.
23. Test reports:
b. Additional requirements for acceptance test reports are specified in
Section 17950.
24. Factory acceptance test:
1.06
1.07
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacture instruments at facilities certified to the quality standards of ISO 9001.
B.
Furnish all equipment listed by and bearing the label of UL or of an independent

testing laboratory acceptable to the Engineer and the Authority Having Jurisdiction.
C.
The ICSC must have their own operating UL listed panel fabrication facility. All
panels must be fabricated at this facility and meet all UL 508/508A requirements.
D.
ICSC:
1.
The Contractor, through the use of a qualified ICSC, is responsible for the
implementation of the PCIS and the integration of the PCIS with other required
instrumentation and control devices.
2.
The ICSC assumes full responsibility, through the Contractor, to perform all
work to select, furnish, install, program, test, calibrate, and place into operation
all instrumentation, controls, telemetry equipment, control panels, and SCADA
system including application software, for a complete, integrated and
functional PCIS system.
3.
Due to the complexities associated with the interfacing of numerous control
system devices, it is the intent of these Specifications that the ICSC be
responsible for the integration of the PCIS with existing devices and devices
provided under the Contract Documents with the objective of providing a
completely integrated control system.

A.
Store all equipment and materials delivered to the job site in a location that will not
interfere with the construction or the Owners operations.
B.
Shipping precautions:
May 2014
17050-22
9408A10
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.08
After completion of shop assembly, successful FAT, pack all equipment,

cabinets, panels, and consoles in protective crates and enclose in heavy-duty
polyethylene envelopes or secured sheeting to provide complete protection
from damage, dust, and moisture.
Place dehumidifiers when required, inside the polyethylene coverings.
Skid-mount the equipment for final transport.
Provide lifting rings for moving without removing protective covering.
Display boxed weight on shipping tags together with instructions for unloading,
transporting, storing, and handling at the job site.
C.
Special instructions:
1.
Securely attach special instructions for proper field handling, storage, and
installation to each piece of equipment before packaging and shipment.
D.
Tagging:
1.
Tag each component and/or instrument to identify its location, instrument tag
number, and function in the system.
2.
Firmly attach a permanent tag indelibly machine marked with the instrument
tag number, as given in the tabulation, on each piece of equipment constituting
the PCIS.
3.
Tag instruments immediately upon receipt in the field.
4.
Prominently display identification on the outside of the package.
5.
Utilize the Tag and Loop Number identifications shown on the P&IDs.
E.
Delivery and inspection:

1.
Deliver products in undamaged condition, in manufacturers original container
or packaging with identifying labels intact and legible. Include date of
manufacture on label.

A.
Site conditions:
1.
Provide a PCIS, including all equipment, raceways and any other components
required for a complete installation that meets the environmental conditions for
the Site as specified in the General Requirements and below.
2.
Seismic classification:
a. Provide all equipment and construction techniques suitable for the seismic
requirements for the site, as specified in Section 01610.
3.
Wind:
a. Provide all equipment and construction techniques suitable for the site
wind loading criteria, as specified in Section 01610.
4.
Altitude, temperature and humidity:
b. Provide all equipment and instrumentation fully rated for continuous
operation at this altitude, temperature and humidity conditions with no
additional derating factors applied.
c. Provide additional temperature conditioning equipment to maintain all
equipment and instrumentation in non-conditioned spaces or outdoors
subject to these ambient temperatures 10 degrees Fahrenheit above the
minimum operating temperature and 10 degrees Fahrenheit below
maximum operating temperature as determined by the equipment
manufacturers guidelines:
May 2014
17050-23
9408A10
1)
5.
6.
1.09
Provide all power wiring for these devices (e.g., heaters, fans, etc.),
whether or not indicated on the Drawings.
Area classifications:
a. Furnish enclosures that match the area classifications as specified in
Section 17050.
Site security:
a. Abide by all security and safety rules concerning the Work on the Site, as
SEQUENCING
A.
General:
1.
2.
Testing requirements are specified in Section 17950 and other sections.
3.
General scheduling requirements are specified in Section 01324B.
4.
Work restrictions and other scheduling requirements are specified in
Section 01140.
B.
Pre-submittal conferences:
1.
Before producing any submittals, schedule a pre-submittal conference for the
purposes of reviewing the entire project, equipment, control philosophy,
schedules, and submittal requirements.
2.
The Contractor, instrumentation and control subcontractor, electrical
subcontractor, and all manufacturers furnishing major pieces of equipment
must attend, including but not limited to:
a. Vendor control panels.
b. Switchgear.
c. Variable frequency drives.
d. Lighting.
e. Engine generators.
C.
System configuration meetings:

1.
Requirements as specified in Sections 17100 and 17762.
D.
FAT:
1.
Before the delivery and installation of the PCIS system at the job site, but after
the procurement, assembly, and configuration of all components, perform the
FAT testing.
2.
Schedule the FAT after receiving approval of the FAT procedures submittal.
3.
Submit a copy of the test procedures including all forms at least 21 days
before any scheduled test date.
4.
Notify the Engineer of scheduled tests a minimum of 15 days before the date
of the test.
E.
Loop validation test.

1.
Notify the Engineer of scheduled tests a minimum of 30 days before the
estimated completion date of installation and wiring of the PCIS.
2.
Complete loop validation testing a minimum of 5 days before the precommissioning phase of the project.
3.
Loop validation certifications:
a. After the field device loop tests have been successfully completed as
specified in Section 17950 for all individual instruments, all separate
May 2014
17050-24
9408A10
analog control networks, all valves, all VCPs, all motors, all local operator
interface panels, all motor control centers, etc., submit a certified copy of
all test forms signed by the Contractor, ICSC, and the Owners
representative with test data entered, together with a clear and
unequivocal statement that all instrumentation, including all control and
signal wiring, has been successfully calibrated, inspected, and tested.
F.
Training:
1.
2.
Complete all training before the pre-commissioning phase of the project may
start.
3.
Schedule the training sessions a minimum of 15 days before the start date of
the courses.
4.
Submit training manuals to the Engineer a minimum of 10 days before starting
the training session.
5.
Within 10 days after the completion of each session, submit the following:
a. A list of all Owner personnel that attended the session.
b. A copy of the training materials utilized during the lesson with all notes,
diagrams, and comments.
G.
Pre-commissioning test:
1.
Commence after acceptance of all training, wire test, calibration tests, and
loop validation tests, and all inspections have demonstrated that the PCIS
complies with all Contract requirements.
2.
Acceptance of the PCIS pre-commissioning testing must be provided in writing
by the Engineer before the performance testing may begin.
H.
Provide all special tools and spare parts, as specified in the Maintenance paragraph
of this Section, before performance testing commences, suitably wrapped and
identified.
I.
Performance testing:
1.
Complete pre-commissioning test a minimum of 5 days before the
performance test.
J.
Substantial completion: The following conditions be fulfilled before the PCIS is

considered complete:
1.
All submittals have been completed and approved.
2.
The PCIS has been calibrated, loop tested and pre-commissioned.
3.
The Owner training has been performed.
4.
All required spare parts, expendable supplies, and test equipment have been
delivered to the Owner.
5.
The performance test has been successfully completed.
6.
All debris associated with installation of instrumentation has been removed.
7.
All probes, elements, sample lines, transmitters, tubing, and enclosures have
been cleaned and are in like-new condition.
1.10
1.11
WARRANTY
A.
Warrant the PCIS as specified in 01770:
May 2014
17050-25
9408A10
1.
1.12
Provide additional warranty as specified in the individual Instrumentation and

Control Specifications.
SYSTEM START-UP
A.
Replace or modify equipment, software, and materials that do not achieve design
requirements after installation in order to attain compliance with the design
requirements:
1.
Following replacement or modification, retest the system and perform
additional testing to place the complete system in satisfactory operation and
obtain compliance acceptance from the Engineer.
1.13
1.14
1.15
MAINTENANCE
A.
Before Substantial Completion, perform all maintenance activities required by the

Contract Documents including any calibrations, final adjustments, component
replacements or other routine service required before placing equipment or systems
in service.
B.
Furnish all spare parts as required by the Contract Documents.
C.
Provide additional spare parts specified in other sections of the Instrumentation and
Control Specifications.
D.
Submit all special tools and spare parts, suitably wrapped and identified, before
performance testing commences.
PART 2
2.01
PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Provide similar items from a single manufacturer throughout the PCIS portion of the
Project.
B.
Allowable manufacturers are specified in individual instrument and equipment

specifications in other sections of the Instrumentation and Control Specifications.
2.02
2.03
MATERIALS
A.
Furnish all materials under this Contract that are new, free from defects, and
standard products produced by manufacturers regularly engaged in the production
of these devices and that bear all approvals and labels as required by the
Specifications.
B.
Provide materials complying with the applicable industrial standard as specified in

May 2014
17050-26
9408A10
2.04
2.05
2.06
COMPONENTS
A.
Furnish all meters, instruments, and other components that are the most recent field
proven models marketed by their manufacturers at the time of submittal of the shop
drawings unless otherwise specified to match existing equipment.
B.
Unless otherwise specified, furnish individual instruments that have a minimum

accuracy of within 0.5 percent of full scale and a minimum repeatability of within
0.25 percent of full scale.
C.
Signal transmission:
1.
Analog signals:
a. Furnish analog measurements and control signals that vary in direct linear
proportion to the measured variable, unless otherwise indicated.
b. Furnish electrical analog signals outside control panels that are 4 to
20 milliamperes 24 VDC, except as indicated.
c. Analog signals within enclosures may be 1 to 5 VDC.
d. Electrically or optically isolate all analog signals from other signals.
e. Furnish regulated analog signals that are not affected by changes in
supply voltage or load resistance within the units rating.
f. Maintain the total 4 to 20 milliamperes loop impedance to 10 percent
below the published value at the loop operating voltage.
g. Where necessary, reduce loop impedance by providing current-to-current
(I/I) isolation amplifiers for signal re-transmission.
2.
Pneumatic Signals:
a. All pneumatic signals: 3 to 15 pounds per square inch gauge.
3.
Discrete input Signals:
a. As indicated in the controller hardware specification.
4.
Discrete output signals:
a. Dry contacts or TRIAC outputs (with express written approval by the
Engineer) as needed to coordinate with the field device.
b. Provide external terminal block mounted fuse with blown fuse indication
for all discrete outputs.
c. Provide interposing relays for all discrete outputs for voltage and/or
current compatibilities.
d. Provide interposing relays as required for functionality of the control
circuit.
D.
Discrete circuit configuration:

1.
Configure discrete control circuits to fail safe, on loss of continuity or loss of
power.
2.
Alarm contacts: Fail to the alarm condition.
3.
Control contacts fail to the inoperative condition unless otherwise indicated on
the Drawings.
E.
Grounding:
1.
Provide control panels with a signal ground bus, isolated from the power
ground bus:
May 2014
17050-27
9408A10
a.
2.
3.
2.07
Provide multiple panels in one location with a common point for signal
ground bus connection to ground.
Ground single point ground shields and measurement loops at the source
panel external terminals, unless otherwise noted, by bonding to the control
panel signal ground bus.
Provide isolating amplifiers within control panels for field equipment
possessing a grounded input or output, except when the panel circuit is
galvanically isolated.
ACCESSORIES
A.
Provide flow conditioning devices or other required accessories if necessary to meet

the accuracy requirements in the Contract Documents.
2.08
MIXES (NOT USED)
2.09
2.10
FINISHES (NOT USED)
2.11

A.
Provide all equipment that is new, free from defects, and standard products
produced by manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of these products
that bear all approvals and labels as required by the Specifications.
B.
Arrange with all manufacturers of the equipment and fabricators of panels and
cabinets, to allow the Owner and Engineer to inspect and witness the testing of the
equipment at the site of fabrication:
1.
Equipment includes the cabinets, special control systems, flow measuring
devices, and other pertinent systems and devices.
C.
Factory testing is specified in Section 17950 and other sections of the Electrical,
and the Instrumentation and Control Specifications.
PART 3
3.01
EXECUTION
EXAMINATION
A.
The ICSC is required to visit the site to examine the premises completely before
bidding. It is the ICSC's responsibility to be fully familiar with the existing conditions
and local requirements and regulations.
B.
Review the existing Site conditions and examine all shop drawings for the various
items of equipment in order to determine exact routing and final terminations for all
wiring and cables.
C.
Provide a complete instrumentation and control system:

1.
Install all extra conduits, cables, and interfaces as may be necessary to
provide a complete and operating electrical, and process control and
instrumentation system.
May 2014
17050-28
9408A10
3.02
3.03
INSTALLATION
A.
Equipment locations indicated on the Drawings may change due to variations in

equipment size or minor changes made by others during construction:
1.
Verify all dimensions as indicated on the Drawings:
a. Actual field conditions govern all final installed locations, distances, and
levels.
2.
Review all information indicated on the Drawings, including architectural,
structural, mechanical, instrumentation, and the accepted electrical,
instrumentation, and mechanical shop drawings, and coordinate Work as
necessary to adjust to all conditions that arise due to such changes.
3.
Make minor changes in location of equipment before rough in, as directed by
the Owner or Engineer.
B.
Perform all related Electrical Work in accordance with the applicable sections of the
Electrical Specifications.
C.
The PCIS configurations are diagrammatic:

1.
The locations of equipment are approximate unless dimensioned.
2.
Where Project conditions require, make reasonable changes in locations and
arrangements.
D.
Field instruments installation:

1.
Install field instruments as specified in the Contract Documents, API RP 550
and RP 551, and the manufacturers instructions.
2.
Mount field instruments so that they can be easily read, readily approached,
and easily serviced, and so they do not restrict access to mechanical
equipment:
a. Mount field instruments on a pipe stand or local panel, if they are not
directly mounted, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
b. Provide sun shields for all field electronic instruments exposed to direct
sunlight.
3.
Make connections from rigid conduit systems to field instruments with PVC
coated flexible conduit:
a. Type of flexible conduit required for the area classification:
1) Area classification as specified in Section 17050.
b. Maximum length of 18 inches.
4.
Connect field instruments with cable as specified in the Electrical
Specifications, except when the manufacturer requires the use of special
cable, or otherwise specified in this Section:
a. Special cable applications shall be in accordance with the NEC.
5.
Verify the correctness of each installation:
a. Polarity of electric power and signal connections.
b. Ensure all process connections are free of leaks.
E.
Process sensing lines and air tubing:

1.
Install individual tubes parallel and/or perpendicular to and near the surfaces
from which they are supported.
2.
Provide supports for rigid tubing at intervals of not more than 3 feet.
May 2014
17050-29
9408A10
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Slope horizontal runs of instrument tubing at a minimum of 1/16th inch per foot
to allow for draining of any condensate.
Bends:
a. Use proper tool.
b. Make bends for parallel lines symmetrical.
c. Make bends without deforming or thinning the walls of the tubing.
Square-cut and clean all ends of tubing before being inserted in the fittings.
Provide bulkhead fittings at all panels requiring pipe and/or tubing entries.
Use stainless steel tubing for all piping hard piped from the air header, unless
otherwise indicated on the Drawings or not compatible with the fluids or
atmosphere in the area:
a. Use flexible connections only on moving equipment and under the
constraint that the length shall be less than 1.5 times maximum travel of
the equipment.
F.
Conduit, cables, and field wiring:

1.
Provide all PCIS equipment cables, and process LAN communication
networks under the Instrumentation and Control Specifications.
2.
Provide terminations and wire identification as specified in the Electrical
Specifications.
3.
Protect all wiring from sharp edges and corners.
4.
Provide all conduits, fittings, boxes, etc. in accordance with all the
requirements of the Electrical Specifications.
G.
Equipment tie-downs:
1.
Anchor all instruments, control panels, and equipment by methods that comply
with seismic and wind bracing requirements, which apply to the Site.
2.
All control panels, VCPs, LCPs, RTUs, PCMs, etc., shall be permanently
mounted and tied down to structures.
H.
Instrument tagging:
1.
2.
Provide all field-mounted instruments with nameplates:
a. Nameplates engraved with the instruments full tag number as indicated
on the Drawings:
1) Affix tags with stainless steel wire fasteners.
3.
Provide all back of panel instruments with nameplates:
a. Engraved with the instruments full tag number as indicated on the
Drawings:
4.
Provide all front of panel instruments with a nameplate:
5.
Provide all front of panel instruments with a nameplate:
a. Engraving to include the following:
1) Instruments full tag number
2) Service description.
b. Nameplates:
1) Secure nameplates to the panel with stainless steel screws.
2) Use an approved adhesive if screws would violate the NEMA or other
ratings of the enclosure.
I.
Cable and conductor termination:

1.
Terminate all cables and conductors on terminal blocks.
2.
Terminal block enclosures:
May 2014
17050-30
9408A10
a.
J.
Suitable for the area classification as specified in Section 17050.
Surge protection:
1.
Provide outdoor field instrument loops with voltage surge protection units
installed on the instruments.
2.
Individually fuse each 4 to 20 milliamperes direct current loop with a 1/16
ampere fuse between power supplies and receiver surge protectors.
3.
Provide voltage surge protection for 4 wire transmitters and analyzers:
a. Protect both power source and signal loop.
3.04
3.05
3.06
3.07

A.
Inspection:
1.
Allow for inspection of PCIS installation as specified in Section 01450.
2.
3.
Engineer inspections may include, but are not limited to, the following:
b. Inspect installation for compliance with Drawings and Specifications.
c. Inspect installation for obstructions and adequate clearances around
equipment.
d. Inspect equipment installation for proper leveling, alignment, anchorage,
and assembly.
e. Inspect equipment nameplate data to verify compliance with design
requirements.
f. Inspect cable terminations.
g. Inspect/witness instrument calibrations/verifications.
4.
Inspection activities conducted during construction do not satisfy inspection
requirements specified in Section 17950.
B.
Instrument Installation Inspection:

1.
2.
Inspections may include, but are not limited to, the following:
b. Inspect the installed arrangement, lay lengths, orientation, piping
obstructions etc, that could effect the instruments accuracy or
repeatability.
c. Inspect installation for compliance with Drawings and Specifications.
d. Inspect installation for obstructions and adequate clearances around
equipment.
e. Inspect equipment installation for proper leveling, alignment, anchorage,
and assembly.
f. Inspect equipment nameplate data to verify compliance with design
requirements.
g. Inspect cable terminations.
h. Inspect/witness instrument calibrations/verifications.
3.
Inspection activities conducted during construction do not satisfy inspection
requirements specified in Section 17950.
May 2014
17050-31
9408A10
3.08
3.09
C.
Field testing is specified in Section 17950. Additional general requirements are

D.
Installation supervision:
1.
Ensure that the entire PCIS is installed in a proper and satisfactory manner. At
a minimum, the ICSC shall provide the following services:
a. Installation resources:
1) Coordinate with the Contractor regarding installation requirements of
b. Provide technical assistance to installation personnel by telephone:
1) Furnish installation personnel with at least one copy of the approved
submittals, including all installation details.
c. Periodic inspections during the construction period.
d. A complete check of the completed installation to ensure that it is in
conformance with the requirements of the equipment manufacturer and
e. Field verify accuracy and calibration of all instruments.
ADJUSTING
A.
Control valves:
1.
Stroke all control valves, cylinders, drives and connecting linkages from the
control system as well as local control devices and adjust to verify proper
control action, hand switch action, limit switch settings, torque settings, remote
control actions, and remote feedback of valve status and position.
2.
Check control valve actions and positioner settings with the valves in place to
ensure that no changes have occurred since the bench calibration.
B.
Make all revisions necessary to the control system software, as directed by the
Engineer. It is understood that the Contractor knows and agrees that changes will
be required in the control system software during the factory acceptance tests, the
pre-commissioning, performance testing, start-up and during the warranty period.
CLEANING
A.
B.
Vacuum clean all control panels and enclosures before start-up and again after final
completion of the project.
C.
Clean all panel surfaces.
D.
Return to new condition any scratches and/or defects.
E.
Wipe all instrument faces and enclosures clean.
F.
Leave wiring in panels, manholes, boxes, and other locations in a neat, clean, and
organized manner:
1.
Neatly coil and label all spare wiring lengths.
2.
Shorten, re-terminate, and re-label excessive spare wire and cable lengths, as
determined by the Engineer.
G.
As specified in other sections of the Contract Documents.
May 2014
17050-32
9408A10
3.10

A.
Demonstration requirements are specified in Section 17950.
B.
Training:
1.
General:
a. Provide system maintenance and operator training courses for all the
instrumentation and control systems furnished.
b. Conduct all training at the Project Site or treatment plant unless another
location is approved by the Engineer and Owner:
1) Include instruction on the use of all maintenance equipment and
special tools provided under the Contract.
c. Tailor training classes to the specific needs of the class participants:
1) Develop separate courses for operators, maintenance staff, and
supervisors:
a) The specific categories and number of personnel in each
category are identified below.
2) Furnish training courses that are a combination of classroom and
hands-on training:
a) To the greatest extent possible, utilize components from the
Owners PCIS system.
b) Limit classes that include extensive hands-on activities to a
maximum of 5 students per class.
3) Present the minimum number of sessions, specified in Table 170503.10-T1, for each course in order to satisfy class size restrictions and
limitations scheduling Owner staff.
4) Furnish additional sessions if required to accommodate the total
number of personnel identified for each course.
d. Schedule individual training classes with the Owner at least 3 weeks
before the start of the class:
1) Schedule all training classes Monday - Friday between 7:30 AM and
3:30 PM.
2) Each individual daily training session, travel time excluded:
a) Minimum duration of 4 hours.
b) Maximum duration of 7 hours.
c) Breaks scheduled at least every 90 minutes and 1 hour for
lunch.
3) Complete training for maintenance personnel 90 days before
performance testing.
4) Complete operator training classes before start-up of the SCADA
system, or any part of it:
a) As specified in the Sequencing article of this Section.
5) Schedule follow-up training classes after SCADA start-up on a
schedule determined by the Owner.
e. Furnish highly qualified training instructors for technical training with
demonstrated expertise in not only control system functionality but also
professional training techniques:
1) Instructors are subject to the approval of the Engineer.
2) Furnish training instructors thoroughly familiar with the PCIS system,
who are members of the SCADA system implementation team.
3) One of the individuals conducting the SCADA system training course
must be the same individual responsible for the majority of the
May 2014
17050-33
9408A10
2.
programming that was performed for the instrumentation and control

system.
Training manuals and materials:
a. Furnish training manuals and other materials for training courses.
b. Manuals are to be professionally written to present the course material in
a format that is easy to comprehend.
c. The manuals are to serve as teaching aids during presentation of the
training classes.
d. Manuals are to serve as reference material after the training has been
completed.
Table 17050-3.10-T1
Minimum
Course
Length
(days per
session)
Personnel
(Estimated
Number
of Students)
Minimum
Number
of
Sessions
Training
location
System Overview
0.5
KAW PS
Operator Training - Basic
0.5
WTP
KAW PS
0.5
KAW PS
PLC Hardware
KAW PS
PLC Software
WTP
0.5
KAW PS
KAW PS
Course Title
Operator Training Advanced

(including instrument training)
OIT Software
C.
Network Equipment
Follow-up Training and Reports
1.
Training course requirements:

a. System overview training:
1) Furnish training courses that give the Owners supervisory level
personnel an overview of all elements of the PCIS system that focus
on the overall functional aspect of elements of the control system and
provide an understanding of the interaction of the various
components.
b. Operator training:
1) Furnish training courses that instruct system operators in the efficient
operation of all aspects of the PCIS that include not only the general
operation of the control system but also the operation of specific
system features.
2)
Operators training shall include:
a) Control system overview: Architecture, equipment functions,
software components, etc.
b) Display navigation, overview, and types of displays.
c) Process and equipment monitoring and control: Basic principles
and operation.
d) Logging ON and OFF the system and description of the security
and access system.
e) Alarm subsystem.
May 2014
17050-34
9408A10
f)
c.
d.
e.
Control strategies: Present an average 15-minute review of each

control strategy, including a hands-on demonstration of screens
and operator functions for each.
OIT software training:
1) Furnish training courses that will enable the Owners staff to develop
and maintain all aspects of the operator interface system
applications.
2) Include topics:
a) Operating systems and utilities such as virus protection
software.
b) Point (tag) database development and modification.
c) Graphic screen creation and editing.
d) Scripting.
e) I/O servers, drivers, etc.
f) PLC interface functions and software.
g) Displays, scripts conventions, and documentation.
h) Trending.
i)
Alarms and events.
j)
System security, access levels, and areas of responsibility.
k) General system maintenance, including backups, history data
archive, version control, file naming and cataloging conventions,
and system file housekeeping.
3) Address not only the procedures associated with the control system's
standard software packages, but in addition include material
explaining the specific conventions used in developing the Projects
system applications (graphics, PLC/RTU interface, scripts, control
strategies, trends, etc.). In addition, provide instruction in the use of
techniques for developing and maintaining current, comprehensive
documentation for all installed system applications.
PLC hardware training:
1) Furnish training on PLC hardware and on related components,
including battery backup equipment, UPSs, HMI hardware, control
circuits, and analog circuits.
2) Furnish training on PLC hardware principles, product features, proper
installation, operation, troubleshooting, and maintenance.
3) PLC training may be provided by manufacturers certified trainers.
PLC software training:
1) Furnish training on PLC software.
2) Two types of training are required, basic and project-specific:
a) Basic PLC software training covers the principles of PLC
programming and the specific features and function of the PLC
products used on this Project, provided by one of the PLC
manufacturers certified trainers.
b) Project-specific PLC software training covers the programming
conventions, new standardized software modules, specific
control strategy programs, and documentation created for the
Work performed under this Contract. This training includes the
specific knowledge needed to modify, expand, duplicate,
troubleshoot, and repair the PLC programs provided under this
Contract, provided by a qualified member of the ICSC who is
thoroughly familiar with the delivered system, and is one of the
senior programmers who programmed the PLCs for this Project.
May 2014
17050-35
9408A10
f.
2.
HMI hardware and software training:

1) Provide the following:
a) Overview of hardware and firmware, including starting, stopping,
and PLC interface.
b) Configuration of tag database.
c) Creating, editing, and saving display screens.
d) Troubleshooting.
g. Network equipment training:
1) Furnish basic training on all network hardware, switch and router
configuration and software, and network monitoring software.
2) Include a detailed description and explanation of the installed
network architecture, media, and functions.
3) Furnish an overview of the function and operation of each piece of
network equipment.
4) Furnish training on network maintenance troubleshooting and repair.
5) Furnish training on how to install spare or off-line backup equipment.
h. Follow-up training:
1) Provide a series of on-site follow-up training classes beginning after
start-up of the SCADA/PCIS system. The intent for these classes is
to provide the Owners personnel the opportunity for a review and
refresher of the training topics and material after they have had
some experience using the system.
2) Mutually schedule and develop the content of these classes with the
Owner no later than 1 month before the beginning of the first session:
a) Schedule at the Owners discretion on non-consecutive days
spaced out over the start-up and warranty period.
i.
Instrumentation training:
1) Furnish training covering all instruments and control panels.
2) Furnish the specified quantity of training, allocated to cover new
instruments and hardwired controls as specified in this Section and
specifically determined in the approved training plan.
3) Train maintenance staff in the use, cleaning, calibration,
maintenance, and troubleshooting of all the instruments furnished
within this Project.
4) Furnish training on the operation of new hardwired controls.
j.
Analytical instrument training:
1) Furnish training covering all analytical instruments.
2) Furnish the specified quantity of training, allocated to cover new
analytical instruments as specified in this Section and specifically
determined in the approved training plan.
3) Train maintenance staff in the use, cleaning, calibration,
maintenance, and troubleshooting of all the analytical instruments
furnished within this Project.
4) Provide training by manufacturer.
Recording training sessions:
a. Record all training.
b. Furnish digital video disk (DVD) format.
c. These disks become the property of the Owner and cover, in detail, the
training for the specific hardware and software of all the systems provided
for the Project.
d. Provide all the necessary cameras and recording equipment.
May 2014
17050-36
9408A10
3.11
PROTECTION
A.
3.12
Protect all Work from damage or degradation until date of Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION
May 2014
17050-37
9408A10
SECTION 17100
CONTROL STRATEGIES
PART 1
1.01
1.02
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes:
1.
Contractor-developed loop description submittal requirements.
2.
General programming requirements.
3.
Common control functions:
a. General control and monitoring functions to be provided throughout the
PCIS system.
1) These requirements apply to all systems, and supplement the
specific loop descriptions in Section 17101 and information indicated
on the Drawings.
A.
Related sections:
1.
2.
3.
a. Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and
b. Section 17101 - Specific Control Strategies.
REFERENCES
A.
1.03
GENERAL
DEFINITIONS
A.
B.
Hardwired control: Control circuitry that does not utilize software to initiate
functionality.
C.
Hardwired interlocks: A safety or protective feature that will interrupt operation of the
equipment in all operating modes with no required operator intervention.
D.
Software interlocks: A safety or protective feature that will interrupt operation of the
equipment when the PLC has control.
E.
Slew rate: Rate of change in respect to time.
May 2014
17100-1
9408A10
F.
Clamp: Imposed upper and lower limits on setpoints to eliminate entries outside the
allowable control parameters.
G.
Watchdog timer: Timers imposed to test components such as discrete I/O to verify
the health of the card.
1.04
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION (NOT USED)
1.05
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.06
1.07
1.08
1.09
1.10
1.11
WARRANTY
A.
1.12
1.13
1.14
1.15
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
2.02
2.03
2.04
2.05
2.06
2.07
2.08
MIXES (NOT USED)
May 2014
17100-2
9408A10
2.09
2.10
FINISHES (NOT USED)
2.11
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
3.02
3.03
3.04
ERECTION, INSTALLATION, APPLICATION, CONSTRUCTION

A.
B.
General programming requirements:

1.
Use variable names or aliases derived from tag and loop identification on the
P&IDs for all process values.
2.
Store all adjustable parameters in the PLC, and configure so that an operator
with sufficient security access can change the parameters from the HMI or
OIT. Update and display the current value at all locations, regardless of where
the last change was made.
3.
Program slew rates for all setpoints to limit the effect of updated setpoints on
the process:
a. Provide for control setpoints and manual speed and position selections.
b. Store new setpoints in one register, and gradually ramp the actual
setpoint register at the slew rate until it reaches the new value.
c. Provide operator access to change slew rates from the OIT.
4.
Saved setpoints:
a. Provide an operator selection to save all setpoint values.
b. Furnish 1 or more screens at the OIT that display the initial values for all
setpoints defined during start-up and the value for each setpoint the last
time they were saved.
c. Provide an operator selection to restore all setpoints to the initial start-up
value.
d. Provide an operator selection to restore all setpoints to the last saved
value.
5.
Store a copy of all adjustable parameters and accumulated and integrated
totals in SCADA:
a. Upon re-loading of the PLC program, re-load these values to the PLC
from SCADA.
6.
Calculated values:
a. Program calculations such that division by zero errors cannot occur.
b. Prevent calculations from generating values that exceed the limits of the
equipment or data type structures (integers) internal to the PLC.
c. Configure counting functions (start counts and operation counts) to allow
a minimum of 10,000 counts, and to roll-over to zero at an even decimal
interval (1 followed by 4 or more zeros).
May 2014
17100-3
9408A10
d.
7.
8.
9.
Configure integrating functions to accurately accumulate the maximum

rate from the instrument/equipment (totalizers, run time meters) for
30 years.
Timers:
a. Provide programmable settling and proving timers in all control sequences
for starting and stopping of equipment to allow the process to settle down
before proceeding with any additional control functions.
b. Embed the timers in the PLC logic, tune in the field, and list separately as
part of the software submittal and O&M manual.
PCM status:
a. Design the PLC system to function as a stand-alone unit that performs all
of the control functions described herein completely independent from the
functions of the SCADA system PC-based operator interfaces:
1) Failure of the SCADA system shall not impact data acquisition,
control, scaling, alarm checking, or communication functions of the
PLC.
b. Furnish a minimum of 1 screen that depicts the status of all enclosures
containing PLCs or I/O in the control system, including but not limited to
the following:
1) PLC cabinet over-temperatures from high temperature switch.
2) Intrusion status on all enclosures equipped with intrusion switches.
3) AC power failure:
a) Monitor ahead of UPS.
4) DC power supply failure:
a) For redundant power supplies, alarm when either power supply
fails.
5) UPS failure signal.
PLC system communication status:
a. Furnish a minimum of 1 screen to display all communication errors and
status within the PCIS:
1) Communication between SCADA and PLCs, PLC to PLC, PLC to
RIO.
2) Display status of each node, and summary of failures over the past
60 minutes.
b. Generate a communications alarm if any communication fault is detected
or there is no response from a node for more than a user specified time.
c. In the event of communications loss:
1) Continue normal operation at each PLC.
2) Where control parameters are received over a communications link:
a) If a link fails where process elements use the remote value for
closed-loop control, hold operating status, speed and position, of
the process elements at their last state before the
communication alarm, unless other I/O local to that PLC
indicates shutdown or over-ride conditions:
(1) Ensure that the operator can control the process using
PCIS HAND mode at the local HMI.
b) If a link fails where process elements use the remote value to
determine setpoints, settings or control levels, continue to
operate using the last value received:
(1) Provide a manual over-ride entry at the local HMI to allow
an operator to enter a different value for any such remote
signal.
May 2014
17100-4
9408A10
(2) Generate an alarm whenever an over-ride value is in use.

C.
Common control functions:

1.
Incorporate common control functions into all control loops and devices and
into the control programming, whether or not specifically shown in the specific
control descriptions or elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
2.
Alarms:
a. Generate alarms within the PLC logic.
b. Indicate alarms at the HMI and OIT. Enable acknowledgement from either
the OIT or the HMI.
c. Generate high, high-high, low, and low-low level alarms where indicated:
1) Provide an alarm reset deadband for each analog value to prevent
excessive repeated alarms.
2) Provide logic and timers to inhibit analog alarms based on process
events. For example, inhibit low flow alarms when a pump is
stopped, or has not been running long enough to establish flow.
d. Flash all alarm and fail conditions and their respective indicators on the
PCIS graphic screens and local indicating lights until the condition is
acknowledged by the operator, even if the alarm condition is no longer
present.
e. Once the alarm is acknowledged by an operator, display alarm conditions
in a steady state (not flashing) while the alarm condition is still present:
1) Flash with a cycle rate of 1/2 second on and 1/2 second off.
f. Once the alarm has been cleared and the operator has acknowledged the
alarm or fail condition, turn the graphic alarm indicator off.
g. For all alarms that do not have inherent timers, provide an operatoradjustable proving timer to limit nuisance alarms, continuously adjustable
from zero seconds to 100 minutes. The initial setting of proving timers
shall be zero seconds:
1) The PLC shall start the timer when it first detects an alarm condition,
and shall only activate the alarm after the timer has expired.
2) If the alarm condition clears while the timer is running, the timer shall
reset, and the alarm shall not be activated.
h. Use interlocks and proving timers to prevent alarms from operating due to
power loss, except for loss of power alarms.
i.
Furnish an alarm silence pushbutton at each PCM, HMI, or LCP with an
audible alarm to signal the PLC to turn off the audible alarm until the next
alarm occurs.
j.
Any alarm that is not acknowledged after a setpoint period of time shall
activate the existing auto dialer.
k. Lamp test: Furnish lamp test pushbuttons at each control panel with more
than 10 pilot lights, that illuminates all pilot lights on the panel:
1) The lamp test may sequence through blocks of lights.
2) Minimum on time for each lamp during lamp test 15 seconds.
3.
Where a reset is shown for counts, totals and times maintained in the PLC:
a. Provide a reset selection on the OIT screen that displays the value.
b. Provide a preset function on the OIT to allow a operator-entered value to
become the current accumulated total.
c. Limit access to the reset and preset functions to operators with suitable
security level.
d. Log the value before reset, operator, time, and date of reset in the SCADA
archive.
May 2014
17100-5
9408A10
e.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Log the value before preset, preset value, operator, time, and date of
preset in the SCADA archive.
Where start counts are indicated on the Drawings, or required in this Section,
count starts for each piece of equipment (off to on transitions of running status)
in the PLC:
a. Display total starts on PCIS screens, and provide a reset function.
b. Where indicated, calculate number of starts for each day:
1) Display current day and previous day starts on PCIS displays.
2) Do not reset daily start count when overall count is reset.
3) Archive starts for each day through SCADA.
Where run time accumulation is indicated on the Drawings, or required in this
Section, integrate accumulated run time to the nearest 0.1 hour whenever the
running status input indicates that the equipment is running:
a. Display total run time in hours on PCIS screens.
b. Where indicated, calculate total run time for each day:
1) Display current day and previous day run time on the OIT to the
nearest 0.1 hour.
2) Do not reset daily run time when overall time is reset.
3) Archive run time for each day through SCADA.
For all monitored analog values:
a. Convert all values to engineering units within the PLC.
b. Maintain trends in SCADA.
c. Totalize flows in the PLC logic:
1) Where totalized flows are input to a discrete input, count input pulses
and multiply by the volume per pulse.
2) Where no totalizer input is shown, integrate the analog input over
time.
3) Display totals on the OIT and HMI.
4) Archive totals to the historical database through SCADA.
d. Calculate hourly, daily, and monthly averages:
1) Calculations may be performed by the PLC or SCADA.
2) Display averages on the OIT, and archive through SCADA.
e. Calculate minimum and maximum values for each hour, day, and month:
1) Calculations may be performed by the PLC or SCADA.
2) Display minima and maxima on the OIT, and archive through
SCADA.
f. Generate an alarm whenever an over-ride value is in use.
Analog data processing:
a. Engineering units conversion:
1) Use engineering units for all analog point values. Convert analog
inputs to engineering units.
b. Analog magnitude checking:
1) Provide upper and lower limits to prevent operator-entered values
(setpoints, etc.) from falling outside acceptable limits.
c. Analog value quality:
1) Monitor analog values received at each PLC from analog inputs or
communications from another PLC or RIO, and generate alarms for
the following conditions:
a) Rate of change in excess of acceptable limit:
(1) Provide a separate rate limit for each value.
b) Stale value:
May 2014
17100-6
9408A10
8.
9.
(1) For analog signals that come from analog inputs or

calculations using analog inputs, which are expected to
have some variation each time the input is read, alarm
when there is no change in the value for 10 times the
normal expected scan or communication update.
Analog device override (HMI and OIT):
a. Provide the following functions from the OIT and the local HMI for each
and every analog input:
1) An over-ride value to be used in place of the analog input:
a) Enter in engineering units:
(1) Display the calibrated range in engineering units.
(2) Only allow entries within the calibrated range of the
instrument.
b) When the analog input is enabled, track the analog input so that
the over-ride matches the analog input value when the input is
initially disabled.
c) Maintain over-ride status and value in the PLC.
d) Only allow access to over-ride selections and settings to
operators with sufficient security.
2) An enable/disable selection:
a) When enabled, the value used by the PCIS system is equal to
the analog input value.
b) When disabled, the analog input is ignored, and the over-ride
value is used for all control and display functions.
c) Generate an alarm whenever an analog input is disabled.
d) Enter a value for the analog input from the PCIS system to the
PLC.
3) Use the over-ride value for all display and control functions instead of
the actual analog input value.
b. Provide the following functions in the PLC, with selections and value entry
from the OIT and/or HMI:
1) An over-ride value to be used in place of the normal output value:
a) Enter in percent of output span.
b) When the analog output is enabled, track the analog input so
that the over-ride matches the analog output value when the
output is initially disabled.
2) An enable/disable selection:
a) When enabled, the value sent to the output is the value
determined by the PLC based on the control logic or operatorentered value in PCIS HAND.
b) When disabled, the calculated PCIS HAND values are ignored,
and the over-ride value is sent to the output.
c) Generate an alarm whenever an analog output is disabled.
Tank and vessel levels:
a. Display all tank and vessel levels as both a level (typically in feet) and a
volume (typically in gallons):
1) Some individual displays may be only level or volume, when agreed
to by the Owner and Engineer during screen meetings.
b. Monitor rate of change of volume on all tanks and vessels:
1) Establish the maximum withdraw rate at which the volume should
decrease (all pumps or feeders operating at maximum output).
May 2014
17100-7
9408A10
Generate an alarm whenever the volume decreases faster than this

rate.
2) Establish the minimum fill rate at which the volume should increase
when filling. Generate an alarm whenever the volume increases
faster than this rate. Verify tank and vessel level is fluctuating to
verify the validity of the IO register. If it is determined the register is
not active or failed in a manner that leaves a stagnant value generate
an alarm.
10. I/O filtering and processing:
a. Analog input filtering:
1) For each analog input provide an adjustable first order filter, for the
purpose of smoothing out spikes and other noise for analog
transmitter input signals. By default, configure analog inputs with no
filtering affect.
2) Monitor analog input signal quality:
a) Over range: The input value is above the normal range (typically
over 21 mA).
b) Under range: The input value is below the normal range
(typically under 3 mA, indicating a probable broken connection).
c) Generate alarms for over or under range inputs.
d) Do not use over or under range values for control or calculation
purposes:
(1) Where a second instrument is provided to monitor the same
condition (a redundant instrument, or additional instruments
furnished for averaging or different operating modes), and
has a valid signal, use that input for control.
(2) Otherwise, hold all outputs affected by the signal at their
last values before the signal went out of range.
3) Digital input filtering (proving timer):
a) Provide an adjustable time delay function (0-10 seconds) on
discrete input for the purpose of de-bouncing.
b) By default, discrete inputs shall be configured with de-bounce
timers set to zero seconds.
11. Instrument scaling (OIT/HMI):
a. Provide 1 or more maintenance screens to display ranges and trigger
points for all field instruments:
1) For analog instruments, use input scaling values in the PLC to
determine minimum and maximum calibration points.
2) For discrete instruments, display calibrated pick-up and drop-out
values.
12. PCIS HAND-OFF-AUTO:
a. Where indicated, provide HAND-OFF-AUTO and START-STOP
selections in the PCIS, accessed from an HMI or OIT for operators with
sufficient security, to provide the following operating modes:
1) PCIS AUTO: The normal, automatic control mode of the strategy
which allows full PLC control in response to process conditions and
programmed sequences.
2) PCIS HAND: Enables PCIS Manual control where control decisions
are made by an operator through the PCIS START-STOP,
OPEN/CLOSE, or other selections as indicated.
May 2014
17100-8
9408A10
3)
PCIS OFF: Automated PCIS control is disabled and PLC calls for all
associated equipment to stop and valves to close or go to their
identified safe state.
4) Program the PLC so that switching a strategy between AUTO and
HAND (either direction) occurs with a smooth transition. Keep
running or position status unchanged when control is switched to
HAND until a change is requested using the operator selections
(START, STOP, OPEN, CLOSE). Keep running and position status
unchanged when control is switched to AUTO until the control logic
determines a change is required.
13. Display the current status of all operator selections (PCIS HAND/AUTO, PCIS
START/STOP, etc.) on HMI and OIT.
14. Permissives:
a. Implement software permissives where indicated to place equipment in a
safe condition in response to impending hazardous process conditions.
Apply software permissives when equipment is operating in PCIS AUTO
or PCIS HAND:
b. Use hard-wired permissives for equipment protection where indicated.
15. Process control algorithms:
a. Jog and hold: Unless otherwise indicated, use jog and hold control
algorithms where possible:
1) When the error between process variable and setpoint is beyond a
setpoint deadband:
a) Jog valve or ramp speed in the required direction for a preset
Jog Time or until the process variable reaches or passes the
setpoint.
b) Then hold speed or position through a setpoint Hold Time.
c) Continue alternating jog and hold until the error is less than the
deadband.
2) Provide operator access to Jog Time and Hold Time setpoints from
the OIT.
b. PID algorithms: Use where indicated, or where necessary to provide fast
response:
1) Provide a PID faceplate with the following displays and functions for
each PID control algorithm:
a) Display Output, CV.
b) Display Setpoint, SP.
c) Display Process Variable, PV.
d) Allow for operator selection of Automatic or Manual control of
the output.
e) Under Manual control of output allow the operator to enter the
desired output value.
f) Allow for input of the 3 Proportional, Integral and Derivative
tuning parameters.
g) Configure PID loops to prevent reset windup when controlled
equipment is operating in Manual (local or PCIS), or when the
equipment has reached a physical limit.
h) When controlled equipment is being operated in remote PCIS
HAND, configure the PID function to track the process variable
to provide a smooth transfer between Manual and Automatic
modes.
May 2014
17100-9
9408A10
i)
Provide selectable slew rates with adjustable setpoints to allow

the PID algorithm to slowly ramp to its final value to minimize
system disturbance.
16. Equipment alternating and sequencing:
a. Distribute number of starts and run time equally between identical
equipment.
17. Motor control:
a. Monitor the devices LOCAL-OFF-REMOTE (LOR) switch (the hard-wired
switch at the MCC, drive or equipment) to determine when the PLC has
control of the associated equipment:
1) Display current REMOTE status on the PCIS screens.
b. Monitor the devices running status from the starter auxiliary or run status
input:
1) Display the current status (running or stopped) on the PCIS screens.
2) Use status to calculate total run time and daily run time, and to count
total starts and daily starts.
3) Provide time stamp for each start.
4) For motors 200 HP and greater, provide software to prevent
exceeding the manufacturers recommended maximum starts per
hour.
c. When equipment control has been given to the PLC as reported by the
LOCAL-OFF-REMOTE switch, allow selection of PCIS AUTO or PCIS
HAND control modes based upon operator selection using the PCIS
screens.
d. Starting, stopping and running when the device LOR is in LOCAL:
1) With the LOR switch in the LOCAL position, the motor is controlled
by the START and STOP pushbuttons.
2) With the LOR switch in the OFF position, the motor is prohibited from
running.
3) With the LOR switch in the REMOTE position, the motor is controlled
remotely.
e. Starting, stopping and running when the device LOR is in REMOTE:
1) When the motor is expected to be running (PLC has issued a START
or RUN due to process conditions or operator selection), LOR is in
REMOTE, and the device is not reported to be running, start an
operator adjustable Control Activation timer:
a) Provide Control Activation timers for each piece of controlled
equipment:
(1) If the LOR and required running status do not change, and
the PLC does not receive running status within the Control
Activation time period:
(a) De-activate the output.
(b) Place the device in a Failed state.
(c) Generate a Failed to Respond alarm.
2) When the motor is not expected to be running (PLC has issued a
STOP or removed the RUN output), LOR is in REMOTE, and the
device is reported to be running, start the Control Activation timer:
a) If the LOR and required stopped status do not change, and the
PLC does not lose the running status within the Control
(1) Keep the RUN output off or the STOP output on.
(2) Place the device in a Failed state.
May 2014
17100-10
9408A10
(3) Generate a Failed to Respond alarm.

Re-establish PLC control of a device in a Failed state only after the
following:
a) An operator turns the devices LOR switch out of REMOTE, and
back to REMOTE (i.e., REMOTE input to the PLC cycles off and
back on).
b) An operator acknowledges the fault from SCADA.
Where motor winding high temperature switches or RTD temperature
elements are shown, generate an alarm when high temperature is sensed
(contact opens or temperature above the high alarm setpoint), but do not
stop the motor unless otherwise indicated.
Control two-speed motors similar to other motors, except as listed below:
1) Motor states are RUN-FAST, RUN-SLOW, and STOP.
2) Start all two-speed motors in the RUN-SLOW state. If or when the
high speed is required (RUN-FAST operator selection or process
conditions), transition to RUN-FAST after a designated time.
3) When transitioning from RUN-FAST to RUN-SLOW, remove the
RUN-FAST output or issue a STOP, then wait for a Fast to Slow
time delay before energizing the RUN-SLOW or START-SLOW
output.
Simultaneous starts:
1) Prevent more than one motor-driven load 25 HP or larger in the
same facility from starting concurrently:
a) When starting one load, inhibit start logic for all other such
equipment until the load being started is up to speed (RVSS or
VFD), or after a setpoint time delay (full-voltage starters and
miscellaneous equipment).
2) Use the same logic to prevent multiple large devices from starting
concurrently on restoration of power after a power outage, whether
operating on generator or utility power.
Speed control:
1) Modulate speed on VFD-driven motors using jog and hold, or PID
control algorithms to maintain process conditions as described in the
specific loop descriptions.
2) Operate speed control within a pre-defined range:
a) Minimum speed as determined by equipment manufacturer. The
higher of:
(1) Minimum motor speed to maintain adequate cooling for the
type of load driven (constant or variable torque).
(2) Minimum equipment speed, such as minimum speed to
deliver flow or to deliver minimum flow for equipment
cooling or lubrication.
b) Maximum speed 100 percent (60 hertz) or as identified by
equipment manufacturer.
3) Where multiple equipment may operate together to maintain the
same process condition:
a) Provide an operator selection for starting sequence.
b) Start the first equipment at a preset starting speed.
c) When one or more equipment is running and the speed control
algorithm reaches a preset Start Next speed value (initially
95 percent of speed range) through a preset time delay:
3)
f.
g.
h.
i.
May 2014
17100-11
9408A10
(1) Start the next available equipment at the preset starting

speed.
(2) Ramp up the started equipment and ramp down the
previously running equipment to the mid operating speed
(adjustable in the PLC). Determine preset values for each
condition based on equipment and system characteristics
to provide approximately the same total flow or process
condition with the new load running at the mid speed (for
example if one pump is running and the second pump will
be added, then the total flow of both pumps running at mid
operating speed should be approximately the same as flow
of one pump at Start Next speed).
(3) Once both equipment reach the mid operating speed,
resume the speed control algorithm for those equipment.
(4) Operate all equipment at the same speed following the
output of the speed control algorithm.
d) When two or more pieces of equipment are running, monitor for
a Stop Next condition:
(1) Where flow rate is monitored, use a preset Stop Next flow
rate for each possible number and combination of
equipment:
(a) Determine initial Stop Next speed based on the flow
that can be provided with one fewer piece of
equipment running at a speed slightly below the Start
Next speed.
(2) When the Stop Next condition exists through a preset time
delay:
(a) Ramp speed of running equipment except for the
equipment to be stopped up to a preset value based
on the number of items running. Determine preset
values for each condition based on equipment and
system characteristics to provide approximately the
same total flow or process condition with one fewer
load running (typically slightly below the preset Start
Next speed) while ramping speed of equipment to be
stopped down to the preset minimum speed.
(b) Stop the load once it reaches minimum speed.
(c) Operate all remaining equipment at the same speed
following the output of the speed control algorithm.
18. Gate and valve control:
a. Monitor the devices LOCAL-OFF-REMOTE (LOR) switch(es) (the integral
switch in the actuator or hard-wired switch at the local control station):
1) Display current REMOTE status on PCIS screens.
b. Start an Open Activation timer whenever the device is expected to be
open (PLC has issued an OPEN command in PCIS AUTO, or OPEN was
selected in PCIS HAND):
1) Initially set Open Activation time to twice the normal opening time.
2) If the LOR position and open command do not change, and the PLC
does not receive fully open status feedback within the Open
a) De-activate the open output.
b) Place the device in a Failed state.
May 2014
17100-12
9408A10
c) Generate a Failed to Open alarm.

Start a Close Activation timer whenever the device is expected to be
closed (PLC has issued a CLOSE command in PCIS AUTO, or CLOSE
was selected in PCIS HAND):
1) Initially set Close Activation time to twice the normal closing time.
2) If the LOR position and close command do not change, and the PLC
does not receive fully closed status feedback within the Close
a) De-activate the close output.
c) Generate a Failed to Close alarm.
d. For modulating valves (valves controlled from either a 4-20 mA signal or
digital communications command) with position feedback, start a Position
Error timer whenever the position feedback differs from the required
position command by more than a setpoint error when the LOR is in
REMOTE:
1) For analog modulating devices, error is determined by position
feedback differing from position command by more than the setpoint
error.
2) For discrete modulating devices, error is determined by feedback not
changing in the correct direction, or changing at less than a setpoint
rate, when the OPEN or CLOSE PLC output is active.
3) Initially set the Position Error time to 60 seconds.
4) If the LOR position does not change, and position error stays outside
of the setpoint error through the Position Error time period:
a) Hold position output.
c) Generate a Position Fail alarm.
e. Provide separate time delay settings for each function and for each
device.
f. If the valve position inputs indicate an impossible state (i.e., valve open
and closed at the same time), place the device in a Failed state and
generate an Illegal State alarm.
g. Re-establish PLC control of a device in a Failed state only after one of
the following:
1) An operator turns the devices LOR switch out of REMOTE and back
to REMOTE (i.e., REMOTE input to the PLC cycles off and back on).
2) An operator acknowledges the fault from SCADA.
h. For all alarm conditions, control other devices (as stopping pumps, etc.)
as stated in the individual loop descriptions to make the system safe.
i.
For discrete modulating valves (valves positioned to intermediate
positions to control process values through discrete OPEN and CLOSE
outputs), count the number of actuations (OPEN or CLOSE commands) in
the PLC:
1) Display count on the OIT.
2) Provide a reset function for the count.
19. Breaker status:
a. Display the following data to the extent it is available from the specified
device:
1) Open.
2) Closed.
3) Tripped.
c.
May 2014
17100-13
9408A10
4) Ground fault.
Power and starter information:
a. Retrieve data via power quality meters, motor protection relays, digital bus
networks, or metering instruments, as indicated.
b. Display the following data to the extent it is available from the specified
device:
1) Current: XXXX.X A:
a) A-Phase.
b) B-Phase.
c) C-Phase.
2) Volts: XXXX.X V:
a) A-Phase.
b) B-Phase.
c) C-Phase.
3) Reactive power: XXXX.X kVAR.
4) Real power: XXXX.X kW.
5) Apparent power: XXXX.X kVA.
6) Power factor: 0.XX percent.
c. For engine/generator system monitoring, also display percent of rated
output.
21. Generator equipped with communications:
1) Voltage.
2) Ammeter.
3) Frequency.
4) Power Factor.
5) Kilowatts (kW).
6) Kilowatt-hours (kW-hr).
7) Kilovars (kVars).
8) Kilovar-hours (kVar-hr).
9) Number of start attempts.
10) Low oil pressure.
11) Oil pressure sender failure.
12) Low coolant temperature.
13) High coolant temperature.
14) High oil temperature.
15) Engine temperature sender failure.
16) Low coolant level.
17) Fail to crank.
18) Fail to start/overcrank.
19) Engine speed.
20) Overspeed.
21) Battery voltage.
22) Low DC battery voltage.
23) High DC battery voltage.
24) High AC voltage.
25) Low AC voltage.
26) Under frequency.
27) Overcurrent.
22. VFDs equipped with communications:
a. Communicate and display all values listed in the equipment specifications,
indicated on the Drawings, or listed below.
20.
May 2014
17100-14
9408A10
b.
Monitor the following additional values, and display on the OIT:

1) Motor current.
2) Over current alarm.
3) Under current alarm.
4) Running status.
5) Phase loss.
6) Stall.
7) Number of starts.
8) History of past 5 trips.
9) Motor runtime (hours).
10) Speed command.
11) Speed feedback.
12) Line voltage.
13) Frequency.
14) Horsepower.
15) kW.
16) Power factor.
17) Inverter DC volts.
18) Inverter air temperature.
19) Inverter power usage (kWh).
20) Over voltage alarm.
21) Under voltage alarm.
22) Over current alarm.
23) Under current alarm.
23. Plant shutdown:
24. Power failure:
a. Retain all operating setpoints during power failure.
b. All decisions to start or stop process equipment after a power failure shall
be made by the Operator. The PLC shall not automatically restart
equipment after a power failure.
3.05
3.06
3.07
3.08
3.09
CLEANING (NOT USED)
3.10

A.
3.11
3.12

END OF SECTION
May 2014
17100-15
9408A10
SECTION 17101
SPECIFIC CONTROL STRATEGIES
PART 1
1.01
1.02
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes:
1.
Loop descriptions:
a. Specific control requirements and functional descriptions for individual
control loops.
B.
Related sections:
1.
2.
3.
b. Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and
REFERENCES
A.
1.03
GENERAL
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.04
1.05
SUBMITTALS
A.
Develop detailed loop descriptions based on the information in the Contract

Documents, and submit as specified in Sections 01330 and 17050.
1.
For each control loop, provide a detailed functional description of the operation
of the equipment, signals, and controls shown on the P&IDs:
a. Include all functions depicted or described in the Contract Documents.
b. Include the following within each loop description:
1) All requirements specific to that loop.
2) Common control requirements applicable to that loop.
3) List of all ranges, setpoints, timers, values, counters, etc.
2.
Where there are similar loops with identical control, such as multiple loops for
individual raw water pumps, only 1 loop description need be developed and
the remaining loops may reference that loop description.
May 2014
17101-1
9408A10
B.
Loop description format:

1.
Loop number and title.
2.
References:
a. List P&IDs that are specifically referenced.
3.
Abstract:
a. General description of how the loop works, what devices are involved, and
how the process will be controlled.
b. Process values, setpoints, and limits, including units and ranges:
1) Show span and range values for analog inputs and outputs, and
operating point and deadband for discrete inputs.
4.
Hardwired control:
a. Detailed description of the control functions at the local level.
b. Function of local operator interfaces.
c. Operation of hardwired field pilot controls:
1) Pushbuttons.
2) Selector switches.
3) Potentiometers.
4) Pilot lights, indicators, and other displays.
5.
Hardwired interlocks:
a. Explanation of the operation of system interlocks and hardwired
permissive conditions.
6.
PLC control:
a. Detailed description of the control functions that are under control of the
PLC.
b. Operator controls and automatic controls.
c. Setpoints, alarms, etc.:
1) Include units and ranges for analog values.
2) Include span and range for analog inputs and outputs.
3) Include operating point and deadband for discrete inputs, and identify
conditions where contacts are open, and when they close.
d. Control sequences.
7.
Software interlocks:
a. Operation of system software interlocks.
8.
SCADA control:
a. Detailed description of the operator controls.
b. Setpoints, alarms, etc.
9.
Indicators and alarms:
a. List any indicators and alarms specific to the loop that are not covered in
the common control strategies.
10. Failure modes:
a. List any failure modes specific to the loop that are not covered in the
common control strategies.
May 2014
17101-2
9408A10
1.06
1.07
1.08
1.09
1.10
1.11
WARRANTY (NOT USED)
1.12
1.13
1.14
1.15
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
2.02
2.03
2.04
2.05
2.06
2.07
2.08
MIXES (NOT USED)
2.09
2.10
FINISHES (NOT USED)
2.11
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
3.02
3.03
May 2014
17101-3
9408A10
3.04

A.
Loop 1010, 1020, 1030 Constant Speed Pumps 1, 2, 3.

1.
References:
a. 10-N-01.
b. 10-N-02.
c. 10-N-03.
d. 10-N-04.
e. 06-N-01.
f. 06-N-02.
g. 02-N-01.
2.
Abstract:
a. Existing Pumps No. 1, 2, 3 are constant-speed pumps that are being
replaced, along with associated motors, instrumentation, and local
controls. The existing Reduced Voltage Auto-Transformer (RVAT) starters
are being reused.
b. These existing pumps are currently controlled and monitored via the
existing PLC-2030; all controls are being demolished from this PLC, and
all new controls/relays/etc. will be provided from the new PLC-2031. The
pumps and all associated equipment are being assigned with new
equipment tags.
c. Local control:
1) The local controls are performed via switches/buttons at the new
PCM-2031.
2) Each pump is equipped with a new local control panel that allows for
bump-start via a spring-return-to-center switch.
3.
Hardwired control:
a. With the LOR switch in the LOCAL position, the Pumps are controlled via
the START and STOP pushbuttons.
b. Pump start sequence.
1) A high pressure switch monitors pressure upstream of the pump
discharge valve. The pump starts with the discharge valve fully
closed. Pressure increases on the upstream side of the valve until
the pressure switch reaches its pressure setpoint and the switch is
activated. Upon activation of the pressure switch, the valve is
commanded to open via a hard-wired signal.
2) When the pump starts, an adjustable timer starts. If the timer expires
before the pump discharge pressure exceeds the high pressure
switch set point, the pump stops and an alarm is generated. This
results in a pump shut down if the valve has not been commanded to
open within a specific time of pump start.
c. Pump stop sequence.
1) When the pump is commanded to stop, the discharge valve is
commanded to close. The pump continues to run until the discharge
valve reaches 5% Open Status as determined by a dedicated limit
switch. The pump then stops.
2) The valve continues to close the remainder of the way.
4.
Hardwired Interlocks:
a. Pump permissives (not applicable for bump start):
1) The pump is only allowed to run if the inlet strainers are not plugged
as monitored by a strainer inlet/outlet differential pressure switch.
May 2014
17101-4
9408A10
2)
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
B.
The pump is only allowed to run if the pump inlet pressure (dedicated
pressure switch) is sufficiently high to allow pumping.
3) The pump is only allowed to run if the pump discharge valve LocalOff-Remote selector switch at the valve actuator is in the Remote
position.
b. Pump alarm shutdowns.
1) The pump shuts down on motor high-high temperature.
2) The pump shuts down on motor protection relay trip signal.
3) The pump shuts down on timeout of high discharge pressure
activation. This results in a pump shut down if the valve has not been
commanded to open within a specific time of pump start.
PLC Control:
a. With the LOR switch in the REMOTE position, the Pumps are controlled
via the PLC.
1) PCIS Hand:
a) Each pump is started and stopped using Start/Stop controls
displayed on the SCADA graphic screen.
2) Starts limitation:
a) Provide the following for each pump:
(1) Number of starts in last 24 hours.
(2) Time between starts in last 24 hours.
(3) Operator setpoint for minimum time between starts.
b) Limit the time between starts to an Operator-adjustable setpoint.
c) Limit the number of starts in a 24-hour period to an Operatoradjustable set point.
3) PCIS Auto:
a) None.
Software Interlocks:
a. If a hardwired pump shutdown occurs, the PLC is not allowed to send a
pump run command until the corresponding alarm is acknowledged by the
Operator at the SCADA graphic screen.
SCADA Control:
a. As indicated on the P&IDs and described herein.
Indicators and Alarms:
Failure modes:
a. None.
Loop 1040, 1050, Variable Speed Pumps 4, 5.

1.
References:
a. 10-N-05.
b. 10-N-06.
c. 06-N-03.
d. 06-N-04.
e. 06-N-08.
f. 02-N-01.
2.
Abstract:
a. Existing Pumps No. 4, 5 are currently constant-speed pumps. The pump
motors are being replaced, along with associated instrumentation, and
local controls, and they are being converted into variable speed pumps.
b. Each existing RVAT starter is being reused as an emergency bypass
starter in case the associated variable speed drive is unavailable. The
May 2014
17101-5
9408A10
3.
bypass controls are provided via a new medium voltage interrupter

switchgear lineup that functions as a transfer switch. The transfer switch
associated with each pump is located in the New Power/Control Building
No. 2.
c. The existing pumps are currently controlled and monitored via the existing
PLC-2030; all controls are being demolished from this PLC, and all new
controls/relays/etc. will be provided from the new PLC-2031. The pumps
and all associated equipment are being assigned with new equipment
tags.
d. Local control:
1) The local controls are performed via switches/buttons at the new
PCM-2031.
2) Each pump is equipped with a new local control panel that allows for
bump-start via a spring-return-to-center switch. The bump start will
function for either the VFD or the bypass RVAT starter depending on
the position of the transfer switch and the LOCAL-OFF-REMOTEBYPASS selector on the front of PCM-2031. The bump start
bypasses all interlocks and failure contacts except the bypass
interlocks and MPR trip.
Hardwired control:
a. Each pump has an associated lineup of medium voltage interrupter
switchgear that functions as a transfer switch. When the transfer switch is
in the VFD mode, the VFD controls will function as described below, and
the bypass controls will be disabled. When the transfer switch is in the
Bypass mode, the bypass controls will function as described below and
the VFD controls will be disabled.
b. With the transfer switch in VFD position and the LOCAL-OFF-REMOTEBYPASS (LORB) switch in the LOCAL position, the Pumps are
controlled/started via the VFD and VFD START and STOP pushbuttons,
and the speed is adjusted via a potentiometer.
1) The VFD start/stop sequence (programmed locally in the VFD)
controls the isolation contactor controls. Refer to schematic drawings
for details.
c. With the LORB switch in the BYPASS position and the transfer switch in
bypass mode, the Pumps are controlled/started via the RVAT and RVAT
START and STOP pushbuttons:
d. With the LORB switch in the BYPASS position and the transfer switch in
bypass mode, the bump-start button will start the bypass starter while the
bump-start is held in the start position. Upon release the bump start will
spring-return to off position and the pump will shut off.
e. With the LORB in LOCAL, OFF, or REMOTE positions, and the transfer
switch in VFD mode, the bump-start button will start the VFD starter while
the bump-start is held in the start position. Upon release the bump start
will spring-return to off position and the pump will shut off.
f. Pump start sequence.
1) A high differential pressure switch monitors pressure upstream and
downstream of the pump discharge valve. The pump starts with the
discharge valve fully closed. Pressure increases on the upstream
side of the valve until the differential pressure reaches its pressure
equalization set point indicating that pressure is equalized across the
valve. Upon reaching the equalization set point, the valve is
commanded to open via a hard-wired signal.
May 2014
17101-6
9408A10
2)
4.
5.
When the pump starts, an adjustable timer starts. If the timer times
out before the high differential pressure switch is activated, the pump
stops and a SCADA alarm is generated. This results in a pump shut
down if the valve has not been commanded to open within a specific
time of pump start.
g. Pump stop sequence.
1) When the pump is commanded to stop, the discharge valve is
commanded to close. The pump continues to run until the discharge
valve reaches 5% Open Status as determined by a dedicated limit
switch. The pump then stops.
2) The valve continues to close the remainder of the way.
Hardwired Interlocks:
a. Pump permissives (not applicable for bump start):
1) The pump is only allowed to run if the inlet strainers are not plugged
as monitored by a strainer inlet/outlet differential pressure switch.
2) The pump is only allowed to run if the pump inlet pressure (dedicated
pressure switch) is sufficiently high to allow pumping.
3) The pump is only allowed to run if the pump discharge valve LocalOff-Remote selector switch at the valve actuator is in the Remote
position.
b. Pump alarm shutdowns.
1) The pump shuts down on motor high-high temperature.
2) The pump shuts down on motor protection relay trip signal.
3) The pump shuts down on timeout of discharge differential pressure
equalization. This results in a pump shut down if the valve has not
been commanded to open within a specific time of pump start.
c. Starter interlocks:
1) The VFD is only allowed to run if the VFD switch is closed at the
transfer switch and the LORB is not in BYPASS position.
2) The RVAT starter is only allowed to run if the bypass switch is closed
at the transfer switch and the LORB is in BYPASS position.
PLC Control:
1) The RVAT bypass starter is only manually controlled. When in
bypass mode, all PLC control is disabled. PLC status shall remain
operational.
2) PCIS Hand:
a) With the transfer switch in VFD position and the LOCAL-OFFREMOTE-BYPASS (LORB) switch in the REMOTE position, the
Pumps are controlled/started via the PLC.
b) The pump is started and stopped using Start/Stop controls
displayed on the SCADA graphic screen.
c) The pump speed is manually adjusted using a manual speed
setpoint displayed on the SCADA graphic screen.
3) Starts limitation:
a) Provide the following for each pump:
(1) Number of starts in last 24 hours.
(2) Time between starts in last 24 hours.
(3) Operator setpoint for minimum time between starts.
b) Limit the time between starts to an Operator-adjustable setpoint.
c) Limit the number of starts in a 24-hour period to an Operatoradjustable set point.
4) PCIS Auto:
May 2014
17101-7
9408A10
6.
7.
8.
9.
C.
a) None.
Software Interlocks:
a. If a hardwired pump shutdown occurs, the PLC is not allowed to send a
pump run command until the corresponding alarm is acknowledged by the
Operator at the SCADA graphic screen.
SCADA Control:
Indicators and Alarms:
Failure modes:
a. None.
Loop 2020 Switchgear/Generator Controls:

1.
Provide at minimum the I/O indicated on the P&IDs. Depending on switchgear
operating procedures and engine generator operating procedures, additional
control relays, I/O monitoring points, and programming may be required to
perform a complete and operable transfer control system. The Instrumentation
and Controls Subcontractor shall coordinate with the Electrical subcontractor,
the generator supplier, and the switchgear supplier to provide a complete and
operating system.
2.
Reference Drawings/specifications:
a. 03-E-03.
b. 03-E-04.
c. 01-N-01.
d. 06-N-05.
e. 20-N-06.
f. 20-N-07.
g. 20-N-08.
h. 16232.
i.
16341.
j.
16433.
3.
SCADA control and monitoring:
a. Coordinate with switchgear supplier and generator supplier.
b. Provide monitoring of all switchgear breakers and relays as indicated on
the Drawings:
1) Provide as a minimum the points indicated on the P&ID Drawings.
2) The operation of the following SCADA points is described in Section
16433:
a) TRANSFER TO GEN.
b) TRANSFER TO UTILITY.
c) TRANSFER TO GEN (EXERCISE).
c. Refer to Section 17100 for power monitoring points required.
d. General failure alarm:
1) Alarms on any abnormal condition including, but not limited to: fault
conditions, bus differential trip, etc.
e. System operational status:
1) Signals when everything is normal and within normal operating
parameters.
2) System on Source:
a) Defined as when a source breaker (52-1 or 52-1G) is closed and
the associated source is available.
f. Screens:
May 2014
17101-8
9408A10
1)
Provide a One-Line Screen of all controllable breakers, their states,

and a color-coded representation of what loads are energized.
3.05
3.06
3.07
3.08
3.09
CLEANING (NOT USED)
3.10

A.
3.11
3.12

END OF SECTION
May 2014
17101-9
9408A10
SECTION 17402
PRESSURE/VACUUM MEASUREMENT: INSTRUMENT VALVES
PART 1
1.01
1.02
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes:
1.
Valve manifolds and instrument valves.
B.
Related sections:
1.
2.
3.
C.
Provide all instruments identified in the Contract Documents.
REFERENCES
A.
1.03
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.04
GENERAL
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Provide complete documentation covering the traceability of all calibration

instruments.
C.
Additional requirements:
1.
Product data:
a. Valve type.
b. Body material.
c. Size.
d. Options.
2.
Shop drawings:
a. Mounting details for all manifold valves.
May 2014
17402-1
9408A10
1.05
1.06
1.07
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
Examine the complete set of Contact Documents and verify that the instruments are
compatible with the installed conditions including:
1.
Process conditions: Fluids, pressures, temperatures, flows, materials, etc.
2.
Physical conditions:
a. Installation and mounting requirements.
b. Location within the process.
c. Accessories: Verify that all required accessories are provided and are
compatible with the process conditions and physical installation.
C.
Notify the Engineer if any installation condition does not meet the instrument
manufacturers recommendations or specifications.
D.
Provide instruments manufactured at facilities certified to the quality standards of

ISO 9001.

A.
B.
Protect valve manifolds and protective coatings from damage during handling and
installation. Repair coating where damaged.

A.
1.08
WARRANTY
A.
1.09
MAINTENANCE
A.
B.
Furnish all parts, materials, fluids, etc. necessary for operation, maintenance, and
calibration purposes throughout the warranty period. Deliver all of these supplies
before project substantial completion.
PART 2
2.01
Project environmental conditions as specified in Section 17050.

1.
Provide instruments suitable for the installed site conditions including, but not
limited to, material compatibility, site altitude, site seismic conditions, humidity,
and process and ambient temperatures.
PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Valve manifold manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

1.
Anderson Greenwood.
2.
Hex Valve.
May 2014
17402-2
9408A10
3.
4.
B.
2.02
Noshok.
Rosemount.
Gauge valve manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

1.
Anderson Greenwood.
2.
Hex Valve.
MANUFACTURED UNITS
A.
Valve manifolds:
1.
General:
a. Provide 2-valve, 3-valve, blowdown type 5-valve, or metering type 5-valve
manifolds as indicated on the Drawings.
b. Valve manifolds shall have one piece bonnet with a metal to metal seal to
the valve body below the bonnet threads.
2.
Requirements:
a. Bonnet lock pin to prevent accidental loosening.
b. Gas leak tested metal-to-metal hard seat design for hard seat valves.
c. Gas leak tested soft seat design with replaceable seat for soft seat valves.
d. Manifold valves shall have straight through portion for bi-directional flow
and easy roddable cleaning.
e. Manifold valves shall allow for direct or remote instrument mounting.
f. Shall be able to withstand pressures up to 6,000 psi for soft seat valves
and 10,000 psi for hard seat valves at maximum 200 degrees Fahrenheit.
g. Materials of construction:
1) Body material: Type 316 stainless steel.
2) O-Ring: Teflon.
h. 2-Valve manifolds:
1) 1 isolation valve and 1 drain/vent and calibration valve.
i.
3-Valve manifolds:
1) 2 isolation valves and 1 equalizing valve for differential pressure
applications.
2) Plugged vent connections used for vent/drain or calibration.
j.
Blowdown 5-valve manifold:
1) 2 isolation valves, 1 equalizing valve, 2 blowdown valves for
differential pressure applications.
k. Metering 5-valve manifold:
1) 2 isolation valves, 2 equalizing valves, 1 vent/drain and calibration
valve for differential pressure applications.
B.
Gauge valves:
1.
General:
a. Valve shall provide process isolation from pressure instrument.
b. Gas leak tested, metal-to-metal hard seat design for hard seat valves.
c. Gas leak tested soft seat design with replaceable seat for soft seat valves.
2.
Requirements:
a. Materials of construction:
1) Body material: Type 316 stainless steel.
2) O-Ring: Teflon.
May 2014
17402-3
9408A10
2.03
2.04
ACCESSORIES
A.
Provide tube fitting, female NPT, or pipe butt weld connections if necessary.
B.
Provide stainless steel concentric or eccentric pipe nipples when necessary.
C.
Provide sunshades for outdoor installations.

A.
B.
Factory calibrate each instrument with a minimum 3-point calibration or according to

Manufacturers standard at a facility that is traceable to the NIST.
1.
Submit calibration data sheets to the Engineer at least 30 days before
shipment of the instruments to the project site.
PART 3
3.01
EXECUTION
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine the installation location for the instrument and verify that the instrument will
work properly when installed.
1.
Notify the Engineer promptly if any installation condition does not meet the
instrument manufacturers recommendations or specifications.
3.02
3.03
INSTALLATION
3.04
A.
B.
Coordinate the installation with all trades to ensure that the mechanical system has
all necessary appurtenances including weld-o-lets, valves, etc. for proper installation
of instruments.

A.
3.05
3.06
ADJUSTING
A.
B.
Verify factory calibration of all instruments in accordance with the manufacturers

instructions:
1.
Return factory calibrated devices to the factory if they do not meet the field
verification requirements for calibration.
CLEANING
A.
May 2014
17402-4
9408A10
3.07
3.08

A.
B.
Demonstrate performance of all instruments to the Engineer before commissioning.
PROTECTION
A.
3.09
SCHEDULES
A.
The provided information does not necessarily include all required instruments.
Provide all instruments identified in the Contract Documents:
1.
Instruments may be indicated on the Drawings, specified in the Specifications,
or both.
END OF SECTION
May 2014
17402-5
9408A10
SECTION 17403
PRESSURE/VACUUM MEASUREMENT: SWITCHES
PART 1
1.01
1.02
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes:
1.
Pressure/vacuum switches.
B.
Related sections:
1.
2.
3.
c. Section 17402 - Pressure/Vacuum Measurement: Instrument Valves.
C.
Provide all instruments specified in the Contract Documents.
REFERENCES
A.
1.03
1.05
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.04
GENERAL
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
1.
Product data:
a. Accessories such as diaphragm seals, valve manifold, snubbers, and
pulsation dampeners.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
Examine the complete set of Contract Documents and verify that the instruments
are compatible with the installed conditions including:
May 2014
17403-1
9408A10
1.
2.
C.
1.06
PART 2
PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.02
MAINTENANCE
A.
2.01

1.
WARRANTY
A.
1.09

A.
1.08

A.
1.07

Mechanical type pressure switch: One of the following or equal:

1.
Ashcroft B Series Type 400.
2.
United Electric Controls 400 Series.
3.
ASCO S-Series.
MANUFACTURED UNITS
A.
Mechanical type pressure switches:

1.
General:
a. Pressure switch shall be diaphragm or diaphragm-sealed piston type.
2.
a. Pressure range:
1)
As shown on the P&IDs.
b. Accuracy:
1) Within 1.0 percent of range.
c. Repeatability:
1) Within 1.0 percent of range.
May 2014
17403-2
9408A10
3.
4.
2.03
ACCESSORIES
A.
2.04
Element:
a. Type: Diaphragm, diaphragm-sealed piston, or bourdon tube.
b. Overpressure:
1) Minimum 130 percent of maximum range pressure without damage
to switch or sensing element.
2) Minimum 400 percent of nominal range without leakage or rupture.
c. Sensing element shall not require ambient temperature compensation.
d. Wetted materials: Stainless steel.
e. Setpoint:
1) Single.
2) Switch shall activate at setpoint on increasing pressure for highpressure alarm applications and on decreasing pressure for lowpressure alarm applications.
f. Adjustable deadband.
g. Switch elements:
1) Snap acting.
2) Single pole-double throw (SPDT)
3) Rated at 5 A, 125/250 VAC.
4) Automatic reset type.
h. Enclosure: Epoxy coated:
1) NEMA Type 4X.
i.
Switch mounting:
1) Process connection: 1/2-inch NPT.
Components:
a. Provide all necessary hardware for pressure switch mounting.
Furnish block and bleed valves as specified in Section 17402.

A.
B.

Manufacturers standard at a facility that is traceable to the NIST.
1.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
3.02
3.03
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
all necessary appurtenances including weld-o-lets, valves, etc. for proper
installation of instruments.
May 2014
17403-3
9408A10
3.04

A.
3.05
ADJUSTING
A.
3.06
PROTECTION
A.
3.09

A.
3.08

instructions:
1.
CLEANING
A.
3.07
SCHEDULES
A.
Provide all instruments specified in the Contract Documents:
1.
Instruments may be indicated on the Drawings, specified in the Specifications
or both.
END OF SECTION
May 2014
17403-4
9408A10
A/E:
PRESSURE/VACUUM
SWITCHES
Carollo Engineers
Contractor:
Project:
Kaw Pump Station Improvements
City of Stillwater
Customer:
Kaw Raw Water Pump Station
Plant:
Location:
BOM No.:
File:
1
Type
D 2
Setting
E 3
Dead Band
V 4
Mtl :
Body Seat Tube
I 5
Element Type
C 6
Material
E 7
Connection
8
Mounting
9
Accuracy
10 Other
11 Type
12 Quantity
S 13 Form
W 14 Rating:
Amps
Volts Hertz
I 15 Other
T 16 Load
C 17 Enclosure
H 18 Enclosure Class
19 Conduit Connection
20 Other
21 Manufacturer
22 Model No.
Rev Tag Number
Adj. Range SP Process
PDSH-1006
0-50PSIG
PSL-1012
1-75PSIG
PSH-1013
25-200PSIG
PSL-1022
1-75PSIG
PSH-1023
25-200PSIG
PSL-1032
1-75PSIG
PSH-1033
25-200PSIG
PSL-1042
1-75PSIG
PDSH-1043
0-5PSIG
PSL-1052
1-75PSIG
PDSH-1053
0-5PSIG
No
By
Date
Revision
Spec. No.
17403
Contract
Date
Req.
P.O.
By
Rev.
Chk
App
Press: X
Vacuum:
Comp.:
Diff.Press: X Other
Set in Field: X Factory Set: Internal:
External:
Dial:
Fixed:
Adj.: X Min.: Other:
Diaphragm: X Bourdon: Bellows:
Other
Bronze:
SS: X Alloy St.:
Other
in NPT
Bottom:
Back:
Local: X
Surface: X Flush:
Mercury:
Snap: X Other
Single: X Dual: Other
SPST:
SPDT: X DPDT:
10
Other
120
Inductive:
Non-Inductive:
General Purpose:
Weatherproof: X
NEMA 4X
MFR STD: X Other
Signal SP
Op. Temp.
P&ID
10-N-01
10-N-02
10-N-02
10-N-03
10-N-03
10-N-04
10-N-04
10-N-05
10-N-05
10-N-06
10-N-06
60
None:
Explosion proof:
Service
Water
Water
Water
Water
Water
Water
Water
Water
Water
Water
Water
Notes
Differential
Differential
Differential
Notes:
Refer to Section 17402 for additional instrument valve requirements.
May 2014
17403-5
9408A10
SECTION 17404
PRESSURE/VACUUM MEASUREMENT: GAUGES
PART 1
1.01
1.02
1.03
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes:
1.
Pressure gauges.
B.
Related sections:
1.
2.
3.
c. Section 17402 - Pressure/Vacuum Measurement - Instrument Valves.
C.
REFERENCES
A.
B.
American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):

1.
B40.100 - Pressure Gauges and Gauge Attachments.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.04
1.05
GENERAL
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
1.
Product data:
a. Accessories such as diaphragm seals, valve manifold, snubbers, and
pulsation dampeners.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
May 2014
17404-1
9408A10
1.06
B.
1.
2.
C.

A.
1.07

A.
1.08
PART 2

PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.02
MAINTENANCE
A.
2.01
WARRANTY
A.
1.09

1.
Ashcroft.
2.
Wika.
3.
Ametek U.S. Gauge.
MANUFACTURED UNITS
A.
General:
1.
Pressure gauge assembly shall include pressure sensing element, gauge
case, and dial mechanism.
B.
1.
Pressure range:
a. As specified in the Contract Documents.
2.
Accuracy:
a. Grade 2A, as defined by ASME B40.100.
b. Within 1.0 percent of span after friction errors are eliminated by tapping or
vibration.
c. Maximum allowable friction inaccuracy: Within 1.0 percent of span.
3.
Element:
May 2014
17404-2
9408A10
a.
4.
2.03
2.04
Where the maximum pressure is less than 10 pounds per square inch,
provide socket and bellows; for all other pressure ranges, employ a
Bourdon tube.
b. Socket tips for bellows and Bourdon tube:
1) Materials: Type 316 stainless steel.
c. Overpressure: Minimum 130 percent of maximum range pressure without
damage to gauge or sensing element.
d. Wetted materials: Type 316 stainless steel.
Dial gauge:
a. Dial size: 4-1/2 inches.
b. Dial case material:
c. Maximum pressure less than 10 pounds per square inch:
1) Aluminum.
d. Maximum pressure greater than or equal to 10 pounds per square inch:
1) Stainless steel.
e. Provide safety gauge with rupture disk and safety blow out through the
back or top of the unit.
f. Dial face: Gasketed shatterproof glass or polycarbonate.
g. Provide gauge locks where possible.
h. Connection and mounting:
1) Direct mounted and suitable for outdoor installation.
2) 1/2 inch NPT.
3) Connection material: Stainless steel.
i.
Pointer: Externally adjustable.
ACCESSORIES
A.
Pulsation dampeners and snubbers:

1.
Provide pulsation dampener or snubber with each pressure gauge installed on
discharge of positive displacement type pump.
2.
Provide piston-type snubber if pressure spikes will exceed 130 percent of
gauge maximum range.
3.
Materials: Type 316 stainless steel.
4.
Mount pulsation dampener or snubber integrally to the pressure gauge.
5.
Connection: 1/2-inch NPT.
B.
Provide means for gauge isolation as specified in Section 17402:

1.
Mount valve manifold integrally to the gauge.
2.
Valve manifold and pressure gauge shall be assembled by manufacturer and
shipped as an assembly.

A.
B.
Factory calibrate each pressure gauge at a facility that is traceable to the NIST.
C.

instruments.
May 2014
17404-3
9408A10
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
3.02
3.03
INSTALLATION
3.04
A.
B.

A.
3.05
ADJUSTING
A.
3.06
PROTECTION
A.
3.09

A.
3.08

instructions:
1.
CLEANING
A.
3.07
SCHEDULES
A.
1.
Instruments may be indicated on the Drawings, specified in the Specifications
or both.
END OF SECTION
May 2014
17404-4
9408A10
A/E:
PRESSURE
GAUGES
Carollo Engineers
Spec. No.
Rev.
17404
Contractor:
No
By
Date
Revision
Project:
Contract
Date
City of Stillwater
Customer:
Plant:
Req.
P.O.
Location:
BOM No.:
By
Chk
App
File:
Receiver:
Other:
1 Type
Direct Rdg.:
Surface: Local:
Flush:
2 Mounting
Diameter: 4.5
Color:
3 Dial
4 Case
Cast Iron:
Aluminum:
Polished SS
Other:
Phenolic:
Screwed:
Hinged:
Slip:
Std:
Other:
5 Ring
None:
Disc:
Front:
Other:
Mfr. Std.
6 Blowout Protection
Plastic:
7 Lens
Glass:
Siphon: N/A
Material:
8 Options
Snubber:
9
Other
Pressure Limit Valve: N/A
10
Other
Movement Damping: N/A
11
Other
12 Nominal Accuracy Required
Bellows:
Other:
13 Pressure Element
Bourdon:
Bronze:
Steel:
Other:
14 Element Material
Type SS: 316
Bronze:
Steel:
SS: 316
Other:
15 Socket Material
in.:
Bottom:
Other:
16 Connection
in.:
Dampened:
Other:
17 Movement
Standard:
Mfr.:
Wetted Part Matl:
Type:
18 Diaphragm Seal
Other Matl:
Fill Fluid:
Model:
19 Other
20 Manufacturer
21 Model No.
Rev Tag Number
Range
P&ID
Service
Notes
PI-1013
25-200PSIG
10-N-02
RAW WATER
PI-1023
25-200PSIG
10-N-03
RAW WATER
PI-1033
25-200PSIG
10-N-04
RAW WATER
Notes:
May 2014
17404-5
9408A10
SECTION 17406
PRESSURE/VACUUM MEASUREMENT: DIFFERENTIAL
PART 1
1.01
1.02
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes:
1.
Differential pressure transmitters and indicators.
B.
Related sections:
1.
2.
3.
C.
REFERENCES
A.
1.03
1.04
GENERAL
DEFINITIONS
A.
B.
1.
Lower range value (LRV): Lowest pressure that the pressure transmitter is
capable of measuring.
2.
Upper range value (URV): Highest pressure that the pressure transmitter is
capable of measuring.
3.
Calibrated range: The range that the pressure transmitter is configured to
measure. The low end of the calibrated range must be greater than the LRV of
the transmitter. The high end of the calibrated range must be less than the
URV. The calibrated range corresponds to the pressure signal sent from the
transmitter.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Product data:
May 2014
17406-1
9408A10
1.
C.
1.05
1.06
A.
B.
1.
2.
C.
MAINTENANCE
A.
PART 2
2.01

1.
WARRANTY
A.
1.09
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.08

instruments.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.07
Accessories such as diaphragm seals, valve manifold, snubbers, and pulsation

dampeners.
PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS
A.
One of the following no equal:

1.
Rosemount Series.
2.
Yokogawa EJA Series.
3.
ABB 264 Series.
4.
Endress + Hauser Deltabar S Series.
May 2014
17406-2
9408A10
5.
2.02
SMAR LD300 Series.
MANUFACTURED UNITS
A.
Pressure transmitters - differential:

1.
General:
a. Differential pressure transmitter assembly shall include a diaphragm-type
pressure transducer and microprocessor-based transmitter for
measurement of differential pressure.
b. Differential pressure transmitters shall be used for differential pressure,
flow, or liquid level measurement as indicated on the Drawings.
2.
a. As specified in data sheets or instrument index.
b. Maximum ratio of total instrument range to calibrated span: 10 to 1.
c. Accuracy:
1) Reference accuracy: Plus or minus 0.075 percent of calibrated span,
including effects of hysteresis, nonlinearity, and repeatability.
2) Total performance accuracy: Plus or minus 0.30 percent of calibrated
span, including reference accuracy effects, static pressure and
ambient temperature effects.
3) Stability: Plus or minus 0.15 percent of upper range limit over
5 years.
3.
Element:
a. Diaphragm-type transducer integral to differential pressure transmitter.
b. Diaphragm material: Stainless steel or ceramic.
c. Wetted materials: Stainless steel:
1) Process material compatibility:
a) Verify all material compatibilities with the instrument
manufacturer.
d. Diaphragm fill fluid: Silicon Oil.
e. Process connection: 1/2 inch NPT.
4.
Transmitter:
a. Power supply:
1) 24 VDC - loop powered.
b. Outputs:
1) Isolated 4-20 mA DC with HART communication protocol.
c. Provided with electronic microprocessor.
d. Adjustments: Adjustable electronic zero and span, with elevated or
suppressed zero as required by application. Adjustment shall be possible
without mechanical fulcrum points or handheld configurator.
e. Square root extraction for flow calculation.
f. Local display:
1) 5-digit LCD.
2) Scaled in engineering units.
g. Enclosure: NEMA Type 4.
h. Overrange protection: To maximum process line pressure.
i.
Conduit connection: 1/2 inch male NPT.
5.
Components:
a. Transmitter mounting:
1) As specified in the data sheets or instrument index.
2) Provide all necessary hardware for transmitter mounting.
May 2014
17406-3
9408A10
2.03
ACCESSORIES
A.
2.04

A.
B.
Each differential pressure transmitter shall be factory calibrated with 5-point

calibration at a facility that is traceable to the NIST.
C.

instruments.
PART 3
3.01
EXECUTION

A.
1.
3.02
3.03
INSTALLATION
3.04
A.
B.

A.
3.05
ADJUSTING
A.
3.06

instructions:
1.
CLEANING
A.
3.07

A.
May 2014
17406-4
9408A10
3.08
PROTECTION
A.
3.09
SCHEDULES
A.
1.
Instruments may be indicated on the Drawings, specified in the Specifications,
or both.
END OF SECTION
May 2014
17406-5
9408A10
A/E:
Carollo Engineers
Contractor:
Project:
Customer:
Plant:
Location:
BOM No.:
File:
No
SERVICE
TRANSMITTER
ELEMENT
OPTIONS
MANIFOLD
By
Date

City of Stillwater
GENERAL
BODY
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE
TRANSMITTERS
Revision
Spec. No.
17406
Contract
Date
Req.
P.O.
By
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
Rev.
Chk
App
PDIT-1007
Raw Water
10-N-01
Instrument Tag No.

Service
P&ID
Pressure
Process Temperature
Ambient Temperature
Manufacturer
Model No.
Pressure Transmitter Type
Calibrated Span
Accuracy
Adjustable Range
Output Signal
Body Rating
Process Flange Type
Drain/Vent
Process Flange
Adapters
Wetted O-Ring
Housing
Bolts
Mounting Brackets
Conduit Entry Size
Isolating Diaphragm
Fill Fluid
Certification / Approval Type
Meter
Zero Span & Adjustment
Surge Protection
Custom Configuration
Manufacturer
Model Number
Manifold Style
Manifold Type
Direct
0-50psig
4-20 mA
NEMA 4X
Threaded
None
None
LCD Display
See note below

See note below
Notes:
May 2014
17406-6
9408A10
SECTION 17710
CONTROL SYSTEMS - PANELS, ENCLOSURES, AND PANEL COMPONENTS
PART 1
1.01
1.02
GENERAL
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes:
1.
Design, fabrication and assembly of all instrumentation enclosures, control
panels and components provided under this contract, including but not limited
to:
a. Custom built instrumentation and control panels, including all enclosures
for hand stations controllers, low voltage power distribution and
marshalling panels.
b. Control panels furnished as part of equipment systems specified in other
Divisions, such as vendor control panels (VCPs) and chemical feed
panels.
c. Control components.
d. Control panel installation.
B.
Related sections:
1.
2.
3.
b. Section 01610 Project Design Criteria.
e. Section 16412 - Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers.
f. Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and
C.
Provide all instruments identified in Contract Documents.
REFERENCES
A.
B.

1.
C62.41.1 Guide on the Surge Environment in Low-Voltage (1000 V and less)
AC Power Circuits.
C.

1.
508C - Standard for Industrial Control Equipment.
May 2014
17710-1
9408A10
2.
3.
1.03
1.04
1.05
1283 - Standard for Electromagnetic Interference Filters.

1449 - Standard for Surge Protective Devices.
DEFINITIONS
A.
B.
1.
The term panel in this Section is interchangeable with the term enclosure.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
Panel dimensions:
1.
Minimum dimensions are scalable from or as indicated on the Drawings and
are based upon manufacturers non-certified information. It is the responsibility
of the Contractor or manufacturer to design and size all panels:
a. Size panels to provide space for all equipment, wiring, terminations, and
other items in the panel, including space for future build out.
b. Panel sizes that substantially deviate (within 3 inches in any dimension)
from the sizes indicated on the Drawings must be approved by the
Engineer.
c. Maximum panel depth: 30 inches, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Structural design:
1.
Completed and installed panel work shall safely withstand seismic
requirements at the project site as specified in Section 17710. Enclosures and
internal equipment shall be braced to prevent damage from specified forces.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Provide submittals as specified in Sections 01330 and 17050.
B.
Provide a control panel hardware submittal, for each control panel and enclosure
being provided on this project, including but not limited to:
1.
Product data:
a. Enclosure construction details and NEMA type.
b. Manufacturer's literature and specification data sheets for each type of
equipment to be installed within or on the panel or enclosure.
2.
Shop drawings:
a. Scaled, detailed exterior panel (front and side views) and interior panel
layout showing equipment arrangement and dimensional information:
1) Provide draft for review and approval by Engineer. The Engineer has
the authority to substantially alter initial panel layouts.
b. Complete nameplate engraving schedule.
c. Structural details of fabricated panels.
3.
Calculations:
a. Provide installation details based on calculated shear and tension forces:
1) Calculations shall be signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer
licensed in the state where the cabinets and panels will be installed.
b. For assembled enclosures and other equipment with a weight of
200 pounds or more, provide calculations for:
1) Weight including panel internal components.
2) Seismic forces and overturning moments.
May 2014
17710-2
9408A10
c.
C.
1.06
1.07
A.
B.
Assemble panels, enclosures, and rack systems along with all internal and external
devices, wiring, equipment, and materials in a facility that is recognized by UL to
assemble and certify UL-labeled control panels:
1.
Provide all components and equipment with UL 508 listing.
2.
All control panels shall be UL 508A labeled, unless the equipment in the panel
and the design in the contract documents cannot be reasonably modified to
meet the requirements for UL 508A labeling:
3.
Provide fuses for all equipment that is not UL or UR listed.

1.

A.
1.09
Seismic design:
1.
Seismic panel construction:
a. Seismic anchorage: Provide seismic design calculations and installation
details for anchorage of all panels, enclosures, consoles, etc. to meet
seismic requirements in Section 01610:
1) Stamped by a Professional Engineer registered in the state where
the project is being constructed.
b. For floor mounted free standing panels weighing 200 pounds or more
(assembled, including contents), submit calculations, data sheets, and
other information to substantiate that panel, base, and framing meet
minimum design strength requirements and seismic requirements as
specified in Section 01610. Calculations shall be signed and sealed by a
Professional Engineer licensed in the state where the cabinets and panels
will be installed.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.08
3) Shear and tension forces in connections.

Cooling calculations, to include but not limited to:
1) Highest expected ambient temperature for the enclosure's location
2) Internal heat load.
3) Exposure to direct sunlight.
4) Dimensions of the enclosure in inches.
5) Maximum allowable temperature inside the enclosure, based on the
lowest operating temperature limit of the installed components.
May 2014
17710-3
9408A10
1.10
1.11
WARRANTY
A.
1.12
1.13
1.14
1.15
PART 2
2.01
2.02
MANUFACTURERS
A.
As listed below in the individual component paragraphs.
B.
Provide instruments and other components performing similar functions of the same
type, model, or class, and from 1 manufacturer.
EXISTING PRODUCTS
A.
2.03
2.04
PRODUCTS
Provide labor and materials to cover existing panel penetrations after existing PCM
cabinet controls are demolished as indicated on the Drawings.
MATERIALS
A.
Construct and finish enclosures using materials capable of withstanding the

mechanical, electrical, and thermal stresses, as well as the effects of humidity and
corrosion that are likely to be encountered in normal service:
1.
Enclosures shall have the following properties:
a. NEMA Type 1: Steel.
b. NEMA Type 4: Steel with gasketed door, rain tight.
c. NEMA Type 4X: Type 316 stainless steel (unless indicated Type 304 on
the drawings)
d. NEMA Type 4X: Polycarbonate or fiberglass reinforced polyester (FRP) in
corrosive areas where stainless steel is incompatible.
e. NEMA Type 12: Steel with gasketed door, dust-tight.
f. NEMA Type 7: Cast aluminum.
B.
Bolting material:
1.
Commercial quality 1/2-inch diameter, stainless steel hex-head grade 5 bolts,
nuts and washers, with unified coarse (UNC) threads.
2.
Carriage bolts for attaching end plates.
3.
All other bolted joints shall have S.A.E. standard lock washers.
MANUFACTURED UNITS
A.
Panels/enclosures:
May 2014
17710-4
9408A10
1.
2.

a. Rittal.
b. Hoffman Engineering.
c. Saginaw Control & Engineering.
Panel assembly:
a. General guidelines for panel fabrication include:
1) Continuous welds ground smooth.
2) Exposed surfaces free of burrs and sharp edges.
3) Base formed of heavy channel iron, either galvanized or powder
coated, minimum 1/2 inch holes at 12 inch spacing to accommodate
anchoring of freestanding enclosures to floor.
b. Construct enclosure and mounting panel using stretcher level quality
sheet metal having minimum thickness not less than the following sizes
(U.S. Standard Gauge):
Minimum Enclosure
Minimum Back
Enclosure Height
Steel Thickness
Mounting Panel
(inches)
(gauge)
Thickness (gauge)
c.
d.
e.
f.
Up to 57
12
12
57 - 69
12
10
69 - 82
12, except 10 on back
10
82 or more
10
10
1) Use heavier sheet metal to meet seismic requirements at the project
site or when required due to equipment requirements.
Construct supporting frame structure with angled, channeled, or folded
rigid section of sheet metal, rigidly attached to and having essentially the
same outer dimensions as the enclosure surface and having sufficient
torsional rigidity to resist the bending moments applied via the enclosure
surface when it is deflected.
Provide stiffeners for back mounting panels in enclosures larger than
4 feet. In addition, secure the panels in place by collar studs welded to the
enclosure.
Door construction:
1) Turned-back edges suitably braced and supported to maintain
alignment and rigidity without sagging.
2) Sufficient width to permit door opening without interference with rear
projection of flush mounted instruments.
3) Heavy gauge piano type continuous stainless steel hinges.
4) For NEMA Type 12, Type 4 and Type 4X, provide oil resistant
neoprene sealing gasket and adhesive to seal cover to enclosure.
5) Gasket installed to seal against roll lip on the enclosure opening.
Latches:
1) For panels each door provided with a 3-point latching mechanism
and locking handle with rollers on the ends of the latch rods. Latch
rods connected to a common door handle, hold doors securely,
forming a compressed seal between door and gasket, at the top,
side, and bottom.
a) Provide padlock for each enclosure with padlock provisions.
2) Include an oil-tight key-locking, 3-point latching mechanism on each
door:
a) Provide 2 keys per panel.
May 2014
17710-5
9408A10
b) All locks keyed alike.

For large type NEMA Type 4 and NEMA Type 4X cabinets, not
available with 3-point latching hardware, provide multiple clips and
padlock hasps.
4) Provide quick release latches for all NEMA Type 4 and Type 4X
enclosures.
g. Panel cut-outs:
1) Cut, punch, or drill cutouts for instruments, devices, and windows.
Smoothly finish with rounded edges.
2) Allow a minimum of 3-inch envelope around all displays, controllers,
and monitors.
3) Reinforce around cut-outs with steel angles or flat bars for the
following:
a) Large panel cutouts; for example, openings for local operator
interfaces.
b) Pilot device groupings, where the removed metal exceeds
50 percent of the available metal.
Outdoor panels. Supplementary requirements for panels located outdoors are
as follows:
a. All enclosures located outdoors shall be explicitly designed and rated for
outdoor service by the manufacturer.
b. Door hardware: stainless steel.
c. Provide rain canopy and sun shield.
d. Bases: Heavy channel, gasketed stainless steel bases, flanges up, for
anchoring to pad.
3)
3.
B.
Arrangement of components:
1.
Arrange panel internal components for external conduit and piping to enter into
panel either from above or below.
2.
Arrange panel instruments and control devices in a logical configuration
associating pushbutton and selector switches with related readout devices, or
3.
Mount internal control components on an internal back-panel. Devices may be
mounted on the side-panel only by special permission from the Engineer.
4.
All control panel mounted operator interface devices shall be mounted
between 3 feet and 5 feet above finished floor.
C.
Overcurrent protection:
1.
Main overcurrent device:
a. Where the electrical power supply voltage to the control panel is more
than 120 VAC, provide the panel with a flange mounted disconnect handle
operating a molded case circuit breaker, and provide a control power
transformer for 120 VAC circuits:
1) Door-mounted disconnect handles are not acceptable.
2) Mechanically interlocked the disconnect switch with the control
enclosure doors so that no door can be opened unless the power is
disconnected, and the disconnect switch cannot be closed until all
doors are closed.
3) Provide means to defeat the interlock.
4) Lockable in the off position.
b. Control panels supplied with 120 VAC:
May 2014
17710-6
9408A10
1)
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Provide an internal breaker with the line side terminals covered by a

barrier.
2) Provide a nameplate prominently positioned on the control panel
identifying the location of the power source and a warning statement
requiring the source to be disconnected before opening the door to
the enclosure.
Provide circuit breakers as specified in Section 16412.
Selection and ratings of protective devices:
a. Interrupting ratings: Not less than the system maximum available fault
current at the point of application.
b. Voltage rating: Not less than the voltage of the application.
c. Select current rating and trip characteristics to be suitable for:
1) Maximum normal operating current.
2) Inrush characteristics.
3) Coordination of the protective devices to each other and to the
source breaker feeding the panel.
Provide a separate protective device for each powered electrical device:
a. An individual circuit breaker for each 120 VAC instrument installed within
its respective control panel and clearly identified for function.
b. An individual fuse for each PLC discrete output. Provide with individual
blown fuse indication external of the I/O card:
1) Size external fuse to open before any I/O card mounted fuses.
c. An individual 5-ampere fuse for each discrete input loop.
d. An individual 1/2-ampere fuse for each 4 to 20 milliamperes analog loop
powered from the control panel.
e. Install protective devices on the back mounting panel and identify by a
service nameplate in accordance with the wiring diagrams.
Fuses for 4 to 20 milliamperes signals:
a. Provide durable, readily visible label for each fuse, clearly indicating the
correct type, size, and ratings of replacement fuse:
1) Label shall not cover or interfere with equipment manufacturer's
instructions.
b. Provide fuses rated for the voltage and available short circuit current at
which they are applied.
1) Ferraz Shawmut.
2) Littelfuse.
3) Bussmann.
Fuse holders:
a. Modular type:
1) DIN rail mounting on 35 millimeters rail.
2) Touch safe design: All connection terminals to be protected against
accidental touch.
3) Incorporates blown fuse indicator.
b. Provide nameplate identifying each fuse:
1) Phoenix Contact.
2) Allen-Bradley 1492-FB Series B.
Control circuit breakers:
a. DIN rail mounting on 35 millimeters rail.
b. Manual OPEN-CLOSE toggle switch.
May 2014
17710-7
9408A10
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
Rated 250 VAC.

Interrupting rating: 10 kiloampere (kA) or available fault current at the line
terminal, whichever is higher.
Current ratings: As indicated on the Drawings or as required for the
application.
Provide nameplate identifying each circuit breaker:
Manufacturer: One of the following or equal:
1) Phoenix Contact.
2) ABB.
3) Allen-Bradley Series.
4) Square D.
D.
Conductors and cables:

1.
Power and control wiring:
a. Materials: Stranded, soft annealed copper.
b. Insulation: 600 volts type MTW.
c. Minimum sizes:
1) Primary power distribution: 12 AWG.
2) Secondary power distribution: 14 AWG.
3) Control: 16 AWG.
d. Color:
1) AC power (line and load): BLACK.
2) AC power (neutral): WHITE.
3) AC control: RED.
4) DC power and control (ungrounded): BLUE.
5) DC power and control (grounded): WHITE with BLUE stripe.
6) Ground: GREEN.
2.
Signal cables:
a. Materials: Stranded, soft annealed copper.
b. Insulation: 600 volts, PVC outer jacket.
c. Minimum size: 18 AWG paired triad.
d. Overall aluminum shield (tape).
e. Copper drain wire.
f. Color:
1) 2 Conductor:
a) Positive (+): BLACK.
b) Negative (-): WHITE, RED.
2) 3 Conductor:
a) Positive (+): BLACK.
b) Negative (-): RED.
c) Signal: WHITE.
g. Insulate the foil shielding and exposed drain wire for each signal cable
with heat shrink tubing.
E.
Conductor identification:
1.
Identify each conductors and cables with unique wire numbers as specified in
Section 16075.
2.
Readily identified without twisting the conductor.
May 2014
17710-8
9408A10
F.
General wiring requirements:

1.
Wiring methods: Wiring methods and materials for panels shall be in
accordance with the NEC requirements for General Purpose (no open wiring)
unless otherwise specified.
2.
Install all components in accordance with the manufacturers instructions
included in the listing and labeling.
3.
Provide a nameplate on the cover of the control panel identifying all sources of
power supply and foreign voltages within the control panel.
4.
Provide transformers, protective devices, and power supplies required to
convert the supply voltage to the needed utilization voltage.
5.
Provide power surge protection for all control panels.
6.
Provide signal surge protection within control panels for each analog I/O,
discrete I/O and data line (Copper Ethernet, Coax, Fieldbus signals) that
originates from outdoor devices.
7.
Provide nonmetallic ducts for routing and organization of conductors and
cables:
a. Size ducts for ultimate build-out of the panel, or for 20 percent spare,
whichever is greater.
b. Provide separate ducts for signal and low voltage wiring from power and
120 VAC control wiring:
1) 120 VAC: Grey colored ducts.
2) 24 VDC: White colored ducts.
8.
Cables shall be fastened with cable mounting clamps or with cable ties
supported by any of the following methods:
a. Screw-on cable tie mounts.
b. Hammer-on cable tie mounting clips.
c. Fingers of the nonmetallic duct.
9.
The free ends of cable ties shall be cut flush after final adjustment and
fastening.
10. Provide supports at the ends of cables to prevent mechanical stresses at the
termination of conductors.
11. Support panel conductors where necessary to keep them in place.
12. Conductors and cables shall be run from terminal to terminal without splice or
joints. Exceptions:
a. Factory applied connectors molded onto cables shall be permitted. Such
connectors shall not be considered as splices or joints.
13. The control panel shall be the source of power for all 120 VAC devices
interconnected with the control panel including, but not limited to:
a. Solenoid valves.
b. Instruments both mounted in the control panel and remotely connected to
the control panel.
2.05
2.06
COMPONENTS
A.
Thermal management:
1.
Provide heating, cooling, and dehumidifying devices in order to maintain all
instrumentation and control devices to within a range as specified in
Section 17050.
2.
Heating:
May 2014
17710-9
9408A10
a.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Provide all panels located in areas that are not climate controlled with
thermostatically controlled strip heaters; except, where all of the following
conditions apply:
1) The panel is not supplied with 120 VAC power.
2) There are no electronics or moisture-sensitive devices in the
enclosure.
3) The panel is smaller than 38 inches high.
Heat exchanger:
a. Closed-loop design ensuring separation of ambient air and clean air inside
the cabinet.
b. Filterless design to facilitate easy cleaning of the core.
c. Mounting: Indicated on the Drawings.
Enclosure temperature sensor as indicated on the Drawings:
a. Provide wall mount RTD transmitter to measure internal cabinet
temperature, in all enclosures containing electrical components such as
PLCs, RTUs, RIO, and VFDs.
b. Platinum RTD.
c. 4 to 20 milliamperes output.
d. Sensor and electronic enclosure.
e. Accuracy: Within 2.0 degrees Fahrenheit.
f. Manufacturer: One of the following or equal:
1) Omega, EWS series.
2) TCS Basys Controls, TS Series as indicated on the Drawings:
Enclosure temperature switch:
a. Provide wall mount bimetallic switch transmitter (to measure internal
cabinet temperature in all enclosures) containing electrical components
such as PLCs, RTUs, RIO, and VFDs.
b. Sensor and electronic enclosure.
c. Accuracy: Within 2.0 degrees Fahrenheit.
d. Manufacturer: The following or equal:
1) Hoffman ATEMNC.
Fan ventilation:
a. Muffin style:
1) Provide 2 door/cabinet mounted vent fans for every 72 inches of
cabinet width.
2) Provide Finger Guard kit.
3) Filter kit with 2 spare filters for each intake fan.
4) Provide bezel and gasket kit.
b. Temperature control switch and alarm:
1) Power: 120 VAC.
2) Bimetallic temperature senor.
3) Adjustable setpoint range 30 degrees Fahrenheit to 140 degree
Fahrenheit.
4) Hoffman ATEM series or equal.
Pilot devices:
1.
General:
a. Provide operator pushbuttons, switches, and pilot lights, from a single
manufacturer.
b. Size:
1) 30.5 millimeters.
c. Heavy duty.
May 2014
17710-10
9408A10
d.
2.
Pushbuttons:
1) Contacts rated:
a) NEMA Type A600.
2) Furnish 1 spare normally open and normally closed contact with each
switch.
e. Selector switches:
1) Contacts rated:
a) NEMA Type A600.
b) Knob type:
2) Furnish 1 spare normally open contact and normally closed contact
with each switch.
3) Provisions for locking in the OFF position where lockout provisions
are indicated on the Drawings.
f. Pilot lights:
1) Type:
a) LED for interior installations.
2) Push to test.
3) Lamp color:
a) On/Running/Start: Blue.
b) Off/Stop: White.
c) Power: White.
d) Alarm: Amber.
e) Status or normal condition: White.
f) Opened: White.
g) Closed: Blue.
h) Failure: Red.
Indoor and outdoor areas:
a. NEMA Type 4/13.
b. Manufacturer: One of the following or equal:
1) Allen-Bradley Type 800T.
2) Square D Class 9001 Type K.
3) General Electric Type CR104P.
4) IDEC TWTD.
C.
Potentiometer and slidewire transmitters:

1.
Provide a DC output in proportion to a potentiometer input.
2.
Potentiometer input:
a. 100 ohms to 100 K ohms.
b. Impedance Greater or equal to 1 M ohms.
c. Zero turn-up: 80 percent of full scale input.
d. Span turn-down: 80 percent of full scale input.
3.
Field configurable output:
a. Voltage and current: All conventional current loops and voltage control
signals.
4.
Accuracy including linearity and hysteresis within 0.1 percent max at
25 degrees Celsius.
5.
Operating temperature: 0 degrees Celsius to 55 degrees Celsius.
6.
Supply power: 9 to 30 VDC.
7.
Manufacturer: The following or equal:
a. Phoenix Contact.
D.
Signal isolators and converters:
May 2014
17710-11
9408A10
1.
2.
E.
Furnish signal isolators that provide complete isolation of input, output, and
power input:
a. Minimum isolation level: 1.5 kilovolts AC/50 hertz for at least 1 minute.
b. Adjustable span and zero.
c. Accuracy: Within 1.0 percent of span.
d. Ambient temperature range: -20 degrees Celsius to +65 degrees Celsius.
a. Phoenix Contact MCR Series.
b. Acromag 1500, 600T, 800T, Flat Pack or ACR Series.
c. Action Instruments Q500 Series or Ultra SlimPakII.
d. AGM electronics Model TA-4000.
Relays:
1.
General:
a. For all types of 120 VAC relays, provide surge protection across the coil of
each relay.
b. For all types of 24 VDC relays, provide a free-wheeling diode across the
coil of each relay.
2.
General purpose:
a. Magnetic control relays.
b. NEMA Type A300 rated:
1) 300 volts.
2) 8 Amps continuous (minimum).
3) 7,200 volt-amperes make.
4) 720 volt-amperes break.
c. Plug-in type.
d. LED indication for energization status.
e. Coil voltages: As required for the application.
f. Minimum poles: DPDT.
g. Touch safe design: All connection terminals to be protected against
accidental touch.
h. Enclose each relay in a clear plastic heat and shock-resistant dust cover.
i.
Quantity and type of contact shall be as indicated on the Drawings or as
needed for system compatibility.
j.
Relays with screw-type socket terminals.
k. Provide additional (slave/interposing) relays when the following occurs:
1) The number or type of contacts shown exceeds the contact capacity
of the specified relays.
2) Higher contact rating is required in order to interface with starter
circuits or other equipment.
l.
DIN rail mounting on 35 millimeters rail.
m. Ice cube type relays with retainer clips to secure relay in socket.
n. Integrated label holder for device labeling.
o. Manufacturer: One of the following or equal:
1) Phoenix Contact PLC series.
2) Potter and Brumfield Type KRP or KUP.
3) IDEC R* series. (* = H, J, R, S, U).
4) Allen-Bradley Type 700 H Series.
5) Square D Type K.
3.
Time delay:
a. Provide time delay relays to control contact transition time.
b. Contact rating:
May 2014
17710-12
9408A10
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
F.
1) 240 volts.
2) 10 Amps continuous.
3) 3,600 volt-amperes make.
4) 360 volt-amperes break.
Coil voltage: as required for the application.
Provide pneumatic or electronic type with on-delay, off-delay, and on/off
delay:
1) For off delay use true power off time delay relays. Where the
required timing range exceeds capability of the off delay relay use
signal off delay where power loss will not cause undesirable
operation or pneumatic time delay relays.
Minimum poles: 2PDT.
Units include adjustable dial with graduated scale covering the time range
in each case.
Minimum timing range: 0.1 seconds to 10 minutes, or as required for the
application.
1) IDEC RTE series.
2) Agastat type Series 7000 series (pneumatic).
3) Allen-Bradley type 700HR Series.
Terminal blocks:
1.
Din rail mounting on 35 mm rail.
2.
Suitable for specified AWG wire.
3.
Rated for 15 amperes at 600 volts.
4.
Screw terminal type.
5.
Provide mechanism to prevent wire connection from loosening in
environments where vibration is present. This mechanism shall not cause
permanent deformation to the metal body.
6.
Finger safe protection for all terminals for conductors.
7.
Construction: Polyamide insulation material capable of withstanding
temperature extremes from - 40 degree Celsius to 105 degrees Celsius.
8.
Terminals: Plainly identified to correspond with markings on the diagrams:
a. Permanent machine printed terminal identification.
9.
Disconnect type field signal conductor terminals with socket/screw for testing.
10. Identify terminals suitable for use with more than 1 conductor.
11. Position:
a. So that the internal and external wiring does not cross.
b. To provide unobstructed access to the terminals and their conductors.
12. Provide minimum 25 percent spare terminals.
13. Manufacturer: One of the following or equal:
a. Phoenix Contact UK5 Series.
b. Allen-Bradley Series 1492.
14. Wire duct:
a. Provide flame retardant plastic wiring duct, slotted with dust cover.
b. Type:
1) Wide slot.
2) Narrow slot.
3) Round hole.
c. Manufacturer: The following or equal:
1) Panduit.
May 2014
17710-13
9408A10
G.
Surge protection devices:

1.
Control panel power:
a. 120-volt control power source: Non-UPS powered:
1) Provide surge protection device (SPD) for panel power entrances:
a) Nominal 120 VAC with a nominal clamping voltage of 200 volts.
b) Non-faulting and non-interrupting design.
c) A response time of not more than 5 nanoseconds.
2) Control panel power system level protection, non-UPS powered:
a) Design to withstand a maximum 10 kA test current of a 8/20 s
waveform according to IEEE C62.41.1 Category C Area.
b) For panels receiving power at 120 VAC, provide surge
protection at secondary of main circuit breaker.
c) Provide both normal mode noise protection (line to neutral) and
common mode (neutral to ground) surge protection.
d) DIN rail mounting.
e) Attach wiring to the SPD by means of a screw type cableclamping terminal block:
(1) Gas-tight connections.
(2) The terminal block: Fabricated of non-ferrous,
non-corrosive materials.
f) Visual status indication of MOV status on the input and output
circuits.
g) Dry contact rated for at least 250 VAC, 1 Amp for remote status
indication.
h) Meeting the following requirements:
(1) Response time: Less than or equal to 100 ns.
(2) Attenuation: Greater than or equal to -40 dB at 100 kilovolthertz as determined by a standard 50 ohms insertion test.
(3) Safety approvals:
(a) UL 1283 (EMI/RFI Filter).
(b) UL 1449 2nd Edition.
i)
(1) Phoenix Contact type SFP TVSS/Filter.
(2) Liebert Accuvar series.
(3) Islatrol.
b. 120-volt control power source: UPS powered.
1) Provide surge protection on the control power source at each panel
containing power supplies, or electronic components including PLCs,
I/O, HMI, and digital meters.
2) Location:
a) For panels with a UPS, install surge protection ahead of UPS
and maintenance bypass switch.
(1) Surge protection is not required for 120 VAC circuits that
are only used for panel lights and receptacles.
b) For panels receiving power at 480 VAC, provide surge
protection on the 120 VAC control power transformer secondary.
3) MCOV: 150 VAC.
4) Surge capability (8/20 microsecond wave): 10 kA.
5) Peak let-through: 620V L-N, 850V L-G.
a) Phoenix Contact Plugtrab PT series
b) MTL Surge Technologies MA15 series
May 2014
17710-14
9408A10
2.
Instrument, data and signal line protectors (traditional I/O) panel mounted:
a. Surge protection minimum requirements: Withstand a 10 kA test current of
a 8/20 s waveform in accordance with IEEE C62.41.1 Category C Area.
b. DIN rail mounting on 35 millimeters rail (except field mounted SPDs).
c. SPDs consisting of 2 parts:
1) A base terminal block.
2) A plug protection module:
a) Replacing a plug shall not require the removal of any wires nor
interrupt the signal.
b) Base and plug coded to accept only the correct voltage plug.
d. SPD Manufacturer: One of the following or equal:
1) Phoenix Contact Plugtrab Series.
2) Bournes Series 1800.
H.
Power supplies:
1.
Design power supply systems so that either the primary or backup supply can
be removed, repaired, and returned to service without disrupting the system
operation.
2.
Convert 120 VAC to 24 volt DC or other DC voltages required or as required
for the application.
3.
Provide backup 24 VDC power supply units to automatically supply the load
upon failure of the primary supply.
4.
Provide power supply arrangement that is configured with several modules to
supply adequate power in the event of a single module failure:
a. Provide Automatic switchover upon module failure.
b. Alarm contacts monitored by the PLC.
5.
Sized to provide 40 percent excess rated capacity.
6.
UL 508C listed to allow full rated output without de-rating.
7.
Provide fuse or short-circuit protection.
8.
Provide a minimum of 1 set of dry contacts configured to change state on
failure for monitoring and signaling purposes.
9.
Output regulation: Within 0.05 percent for a 10 percent line change or a
50 percent load change:
a. With remote voltage sensing.
10. Operating temperature range: 0 degrees Celsius to 50 degrees Celsius.
11. Touch safe design: All connection terminals to be protected against accidental
touch.
12. DIN rail mounting on 35 millimeters rail.
13. Provide self-protecting power supplies with a means of limiting DC current in
case of short circuit.
14. Manufacturer: One of the following or equal:
a. Phoenix Contact Quint series.
b. IDEC PS5R series.
c. Sola.
d. Acopian.
e. PULS.
I.
Variable frequency drives:

1.
J.
Limit switches:
1.
NEMA Type 4X.
May 2014
17710-15
9408A10
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
2.07
AC contact rating 120 volts, 10 A.

DC contact rating 125 volts, 0.4 A.
Provide robust actuation mechanism not prone to degradation.
Provide complete actuator mechanism with all required hardware.
Allows for contact opening even during contact weld condition.
UL approved.
Operating temperature range: -18 degrees to +110 degrees Celsius
(0 degrees to 230 degrees Fahrenheit).
a. Allen-Bradley 802.
b. Honeywell HDLS.
c. Omron D4.
d. Eaton E47, E49, E50.
e. ABB equal.
ACCESSORIES
A.
B.
Provide panels with an inside protective pocket to hold the panel Drawings. Ship
panels with 1 copy of accepted Shop Drawings including, but not limited to,
schematic diagram, connection diagram, and layout drawing of control wiring and
components in a sealed plastic bag stored in the panel drawing pocket.
C.
Provide 15 inch floor stands or legs where needed or as indicated on the Drawings.
D.
Provide a folding shelf for enclosures that contain programmable controllers. The
shelf shall be mounted on the inside surface of the door, capable of supporting a
laptop computer.
E.
Provide nameplate to each panel as indicated on the Drawings:

1.
Provide as specified in Section 16075 on all internal and external instruments
and devices.
2.
Provide a nameplate with the following markings that is plainly visible after
installation:
a. Manufacturers name, trademark, or other descriptive marking by which
the organization responsible for the panel can be identified.
b. Supply voltage, phase, frequency, and full-load current.
c. Power Source or Circuit ID.
d. Short-circuit current rating of the panel based on one of the following:
1) Short-circuit current rating of a listed and labeled assembly.
2) Short-circuit current rating established utilizing an approved method.
3.
Provide enclosures with a flange mounted disconnect that is interlocked with
the doors.
F.
Provide a window kit where indicated on the Drawings. The window shall meet the
following requirements:
1.
Safety plate glass.
2.
Secured by rubber locking seal.
3.
Allow full viewing of devices issuing visual process data or diagnostics.
G.
Lighting:
May 2014
17710-16
9408A10
1.
Provide 1 luminaire for each section, on the interior of the panel, spaced
evenly along the top-front of the enclosure door opening(s):
a. Covered or guarded.
b. Provide On-Off door-activated switches where indicated on the Drawings.
c. Provide 18-watt fluorescent lamp for indoor enclosures:
1) Provide additional fixtures for every 36 inches of width.
d. Provide LED lamp 40watt equivalent for exterior enclosures:
1) Provide additional fixtures for every 36 inches of width.
H.
Receptacles:
1.
Provide 1 duplex receptacle located every 4 feet of enclosure width, spaced
evenly along the back mounting panels.
2.
GFCI, 125-volt, single-phase, 15-amp style plug.
3.
Provide circuit breaker or fuse to limit receptacle draw to 5 amperes.
I.
Grounding:
1.
Provide the following:
a. Grounding strap between enclosure doors and the enclosure.
b. Equipment grounding conductor terminals.
c. Provide equipment ground bus with lugs for connection of all equipment
grounding wires.
d. Bond multi-section panels together with an equipment grounding
conductor or an equivalent grounding bus.
2.
Identify equipment grounding conductor terminals with the word GROUND,
the letters GND or the letter G, or the color green.
3.
Signal (24 VDC) Grounding: Terminate each drain wire of a signal (shielded)
cable to a unique grounding terminal block, or common ground bus at the end
of the cable as shown on the Loop Drawings.
4.
Ensure the continuity of the equipment grounding system by effective
connections through conductors or structural members.
5.
Design so that removing a device does not interrupt the continuity of the
equipment grounding circuit.
6.
Provide an equipment-grounding terminal for each incoming power circuit,
near the phase conductor terminal.
7.
Size ground wires in accordance with NEC and UL Standards, unless noted
otherwise.
8.
Connect all exposed, noncurrent-carrying conductive parts, devices, and
equipment to the equipment grounding circuit.
9.
Connect the door stud on the enclosures to an equipment-grounding terminal
within the enclosure using an equipment-bonding jumper.
10. Bond together all control panels both remote and local, processor racks, and
conductive enclosures of power supplies and connect to the equipment
grounding circuit to provide a common ground reference.
J.
2.08
MIXES (NOT USED)
2.09
2.10
FINISHES
A.
Finishes:
May 2014
17710-17
9408A10
1.
2.
B.
2.11
Colors:
1.
Exterior color of panels mounted indoors shall be manufacturers standard light
gray.
2.
Exterior of panels mounted outdoors shall be manufacturers standard white.
3.
Panel interiors shall be manufacturers standard white.

A.
As specified in 17050.
B.

manufacturers standard at a facility that is traceable to the NIST.
1.
PART 3
3.01
Metallic (non-stainless):
a. Metal surfaces of panels shall be prepared by chemical cleaning and
mechanical abrasion in accordance with the finish manufacturers
recommendations to achieve a smooth, well-finished surface.
b. Scratches or blemishes shall be filled before finishing. One coat of zinc
phosphate shall be applied per the manufacturers recommended dry film
thickness, and allowed to dry before applying the finish coat.
c. Finish coat shall be a baked polyester urethane powder, aliphatic air-dry
polyurethane, or epoxy enamel to meet NEMA rating specified application.
d. Exterior of enclosures located outdoors shall be UV resistant polyester
powder coating. Total dry film thickness shall be 3 mils, minimum.
Stainless steel:
a. Stainless enclosures shall be provided with a number 4 brushed finish not painted.
EXECUTION
EXAMINATION
A.
1.
3.02
3.03
INSTALLATION
A.
Install enclosures so that their surfaces are plumb and level within 1/8 inch over the
entire surface of the panel; anchor securely to wall and structural supports at each
corner, minimum. Direct attachment to dry wall is not permitted.
B.
Install the enclosure per guidelines and submitted installation instructions to meet
the seismic requirements at the project site.
C.
Provide floor stand kits for wall-mount enclosures larger than 48 inches high.
May 2014
17710-18
9408A10
D.
Install gasket and sealing material under panels with floor slab cutouts for conduit:
1.
Undercoat floor mounted panels.
E.
Provide a full size equipment-grounding conductor in accordance with NEC included

with the power feeder. Terminate to the incoming power circuit-grounding terminal.
F.
All holes for field conduits, etc. shall be cut in the field, there shall be no additional
holes, factory cut holes, or hole closers allowed. Incorrect holes, additional holes, or
miss-cut holes shall require that the entire enclosure be replaced.
G.
Provide individually fused analog input module points with blown fuse indicator
lights, mounted external of the module on the output terminal strip:
3.04
3.05
REPAIRS/RESTORATION (NOT USED)
3.06
3.07

A.
3.08
3.09
CLEANING
A.
3.10
3.11
PROTECTION
A.
3.12

END OF SECTION
May 2014
17710-19
9408A10
SECTION 17712
CONTROL SYSTEMS: UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLIES 10 KVA AND BELOW
PART 1
1.01
1.02
GENERAL
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes:
1.
Single-phase double conversion uninterruptible power supplies rated
10 kilovolt-amperes and below.
2.
Uninterruptible power supplies rated 10 kilovolt-amperes and below.
B.
Related sections:
1.
2.
a. Items involving electrical, control, and instrumentation construction may
be indicated on the Drawings or specified in the Specifications that do not
apply specifically to electrical, control and instrumentation systems.
3.
c. Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and
REFERENCES
A.
As specified in Sections 17712 and 17050.
B.
Federal Communications Commission (FCC):

1.
FCC Part 15, Class A.
2.
FCC Part 15, Class B.
C.

1.
519 - IEEE Recommended Practices and Requirements for Harmonic Control
in Electrical Power Systems.
2.
1184 - IEEE Guide for Batteries for Uninterruptible Power Supply Systems.
3.
C62.41 - IEEE Recommended Practice for Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC
Power Circuits.
D.

1.
UL 1778 - Standard for Uninterruptible Power Supply Systems and Equipment.
May 2014
17712-1
9408A10
1.03
1.04
1.05
DEFINITIONS
A.
As specified in Sections 17712 and 17050.
B.
1.
Critical load: Load supplied by the UPS.
2.
MOV: Metal oxide varistor.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
Provide complete, factory-assembled, wired, and tested, true on-line double

conversion UPS equipment including, but not limited to, rectifier, DC bus, inverter,
battery charger, batteries, automatic bypass, and ancillary components as specified
herein and as indicated on the Drawings.
B.
UPS loads as indicated on the Drawings.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Product data:
1.
Manufacturer and model number.
2.
Catalog data.
3.
Dimensions:
a. Height.
b. Width.
c. Depth.
d. Weight.
4.
Ratings:
a. Input voltage.
b. Output voltage.
c. Input/output power factor.
d. Efficiency.
e. Harmonic distortion.
f. Runtime.
5.
Noise specifications.
6.
Heat dissipation.
7.
Warranties and maintenance contracts:
8.
All communications requirements such as software, cards, etc.
9.
Alarms and status available for remote monitoring and system health.
C.
Shop drawings:
1.
Power distribution block diagrams.
2.
Front and rear views of equipment enclosures:
a. Front elevation including all control and indicating devices.
3.
Support points and weight of overall equipment.
4.
Schematic and control wiring diagrams including, but not limited to:
a. Line and load terminals.
b. Alarm and status terminals.
c. Manual maintenance bypass switch terminals.
d. External wiring requirements for all communication signals.
5.
Switching and overcurrent protective devices.
May 2014
17712-2
9408A10
1.06
1.07
D.
Calculations:
1.
Include derating for temperature and elevation as necessary.
2.
UPS sizing computation:
a. Apply safety factors as specified in this Section.
b. Provide itemized list of critical loads, including individual VA and watt
ratings.
3.
Battery time calculation based on specified runtime.
4.
Total battery recharge time as a function of capacity utilized.
E.
Design data:
1.
Design mounting and anchorage for seismic design criteria specified in
Section 01610:
a. Provide seismic kits as required to meet design criteria.
F.
Record documents:
1.
Provide Record Drawings of installed unit(s) including layout and wiring.
G.
Manufacturers field reports.
H.

1.
System instruction manuals that describe troubleshooting, installation,
operations, and safety procedures.
2.
Recommendations for maintenance procedures and intervals.
3.
Battery data / replacement information.
4.
Parts list.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.
A minimum of 10 years experience in the design, manufacture, and testing of
solid-state UPS systems.
2.
ISO 9001 certified.
B.
Regulatory requirements for complete UPS system:

1.
UL listed per UL Standard 1778
2.
IEEE C62.41, Categories A & B.
3.
FCC 15:
a. Greater than 2,000 VA - Class A.
b. Less than 2,000 VA - Class B.

A.
1.08

A.
1.09
1.10
May 2014
17712-3
9408A10
1.11
WARRANTY
A.
1.12
1.13
1.14
1.15
PART 2
2.01
PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Double-conversion true-online UPS manufacturers, one of the following or equal:

1.
Free-standing UPS, 700-3,000 VA:
a. Emerson Network Power - Liebert GXT3 (700 - 3,000 VA).
b. Eaton Corporation - Powerware 9130 (700 - 3,000 VA).
2.02
2.03
2.04
MANUFACTURED UNITS
A.
Double conversion true on-line UPS system requirements:

1.
System characteristics:
a. Provide rack-mount or free-standing UPS as specified and as indicated on
the Drawings.
b. The minimum VA rating of the UPS shall be greater than or equal to the
safety factor (as indicated in the UPS schedule) times the connected load
or 700 VA, whichever is greater.
c. Battery runtime at full load and site ambient temperature as indicated in
the UPS schedule.
d. Efficiency greater than 85 percent AC-AC, all modes.
e. Acoustical noise:
1) Less than 55 dBA at 5 feet.
f. Output connections:
1) Receptacles:
a) 700-2,500 VA units:
(1) Provide a minimum of four NEMA Type 5-15R or
Type 5-20R receptacles.
b) 3,000 VA units:
(1) Provide a minimum of four NEMA Type 5-20R receptacles.
(2) Provide at least one NEMA Type L5-30R receptacle.
2) Provide hardwired connections as indicated on the Drawings.
g. Protection:
1) Undervoltage:
a) Operate on battery power if incoming source voltage goes below
UPS system limits of operation.
May 2014
17712-4
9408A10
2)
2.
3.
Overvoltage:
a) Operate on battery power if incoming source voltage exceeds
UPS system limits of operation.
3) Overcurrent:
a) Provide input and output current-limiting protection to ensure
adequate overcurrent protection for UPS.
4) Surge protection:
a) MOV-based.
Electrical characteristics:
a. AC input:
1) Single phase.
2) Voltage as indicated in the UPS schedule.
a) Fully functional within +10 percent, -15 percent of nominal
voltage at full load without depleting battery.
b) 120 V input:
(1) 2-wire plus ground.
c) 208/120 V or 240/120 input:
(1) 3-wire plus ground.
3) Current:
a) Reflected total harmonic distortion (THD) less than 25 percent at
rated load.
4) Frequency range of operation:
a) 57-63 Hz.
5) Power factor:
a) Not less than 0.95 lagging at rated load.
b. AC output:
1) Single phase.
2) Voltage:
a) Regulation:
(1) 3 percent for 3,000 VA rating and below.
(2) 5 percent for greater than 3,000 VA rating - static load.
(3) 10 percent for greater than 3,000 VA rating - dynamic
load.
b) Total harmonic distortion (THD) when operating on incoming
power:
(1) Not more than 3 percent for linear loads with a crest factor
of 3:1.
(2) Not more than 5 percent for non-linear loads with a crest
factor of 3:1.
c) Transient response:
(1) Within 7 percent for a 20-100 percent step load.
(2) Transient recovery time to nominal voltage within
166 milliseconds.
3) Load power factor:
a) UPS shall be capable of supporting the critical loads for all
power factors experienced for their full range of operation.
4) Frequency regulation:
a) Within 3.5 Hz when on utility power.
b) Within 1.0 Hz when on UPS power.
a. Operating ambient temperature:
May 2014
17712-5
9408A10
1)
4.
UPS module: 50 degrees Fahrenheit to 104 degrees Fahrenheit

(10 degrees Celsius to 40 degrees Celsius).
2) Battery: 68 degrees Fahrenheit to 86 degrees Fahrenheit
(20 degrees Celsius to 30 degrees Celsius).
b. Operating altitude:
1) Project site conditions as specified in Section 01610.
System components:
a. Surge protective devices:
1) MOV-supplied protection.
b. Inverter:
1) Pulse-width modulated AC output signal.
2) Overload withstand minimum time without transferring to bypass:
a) 101 to 110 percent for 2 minutes.
b) 111 to 125 percent for 10 seconds.
c) 126 to 150 percent for 1 second.
d) Greater than 150 percent for 96 milliseconds.
3) Transfer load to bypass when overload capacity is exceeded.
c. Battery rectifier/charger:
1) Recharge batteries to 90 percent in 6 hours or less.
d. Batteries:
1) VRLA (valve regulated lead acid), sealed, maintenance free.
2) Minimum 3-year float service life at 25 degrees Celsius.
3) Integral to UPS enclosure or housed in a matching enclosure.
4) Less than and including 6,000 VA: Hot-swappable.
5) Automatically perform routine battery health monitoring and provide
visual, audible, and/or serial warnings if abnormal battery conditions
exist.
e. Automatic bypass switch:
1) Integral to UPS system.
2) Sense UPS overload, inverter failure, or overtemperature, and
automatically transfer loads to source power.
3) Maximum detect and transfer time of 4-6 milliseconds.
4) Automatic re-transfer without power interruption to critical load.
5) Input shall match output in phase, voltage, frequency, and grounding.
6) Rated to carry the full input current of the UPS.
7) Provide ability for manual operation.
f. Manual maintenance bypass switch:
1) Provides isolation of the UPS for maintenance purposes.
2) Make-before-break design so that UPS can be isolated from the
critical loads by placing these loads on source power without
interruption of operation.
3) Utility and UPS status indications.
4) Supply necessary input/output cords and receptacles for connections
with power source and UPS.
5) Transfer time less than 6 milliseconds.
6) Rated to carry the full input current of the UPS.
7) Standalone UL-listed.
8) Input match output in phase, voltage, frequency, and grounding.
9) UPS input connection and UPS output plug:
a) 700 to 3,000 VA units: NEMA receptacle and plug to match UPS
connections.
10) Utility and load connections:
May 2014
17712-6
9408A10
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
a) As indicated on the Drawings.

11) 700 to 3,000 VA units: One of the following or equal:
a) Liebert Micropod 2U.
b) Powerware Powerpass 9125.
UPS chassis:
1) Electrically isolate from AC output neutral.
2) Include an equipment ground terminal.
Cooling:
1) Forced air cooled.
Locally displayed system indicators:
1) Audible alarms during abnormal conditions:
a) UPS fault or overload condition.
b) Battery on.
c) Low battery.
d) Automatic bypass on/off.
e) Input power on.
f) Battery testing mode.
Controls:
1) Front-panel pushbuttons:
a) UPS start-up, shutdown, and manual bypass (for automatic
bypass).
b) Testing.
c) Visual/audible alarms reset.
2) Applicable controls as specified in Communications Requirements.
Alarm contacts:
1) Provide relay interface card and required interposing relays for
120 VAC discrete input status signals:
a) Low battery.
b) UPS fail.
c) On UPS power.
2.05
2.06
2.07
2.08
MIXES (NOT USED)
2.09
2.10
FINISHES (NOT USED)
2.11
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
3.02
May 2014
17712-7
9408A10
3.03
INSTALLATION
A.
Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Do not utilize extension cords, adapters, or other electrical connectors for UPS
input.
3.04
3.05
REPAIRS/RESTORATION (NOT USED)
3.06
3.07

A.
Perform inspections and test procedures before UPS startup:

1.
Inspect equipment for signs of damage.
2.
Verify installation as indicated on the Drawings and specified in the
Specifications.
3.
Inspect cabinets for foreign objects.
4.
Verify neutral and ground conductors are properly sized and terminated.
5.
Inspect battery cases.
6.
Inspect batteries for proper polarity.
7.
Check power and control wiring for tightness.
8.
Check terminal connectors for tightness.
9.
Assure connection and voltage of the battery string(s).
3.08
3.09
CLEANING
A.
3.10
3.11
PROTECTION
A.
3.12
SCHEDULES
TAG
UPS-2031
MINIMUM
RUNTIME
60 Minutes
INPUT VOLTAGE /
CONNECTION
120VAC 1 phase
SAFETY
FACTOR
1.5
NOTES
Free Standing
(Located in
PCM-2031)
END OF SECTION
May 2014
17712-8
9408A10
SECTION 17720
CONTROL SYSTEMS - PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS
PART 1
1.01
1.02
1.03
GENERAL
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes:
1.
Programmable logic controller (PLC) based control systems hardware.
2.
Development software to be used with the specified PLC hardware.
B.
Related sections:
1.
2.
3.
The following Sections are related to the Work described in this Section. This
c. Section 17733 - Control Systems - Network Materials and Equipment.
d. Section 17762 - Control Systems - SCADA Software.
REFERENCES
A.
B.
DEFINITIONS
A.
B.
1.
CPU: Central processing unit.
2.
I/O: Input/Output.
C.
1.
Development operating software: The software provided by the PLC
manufacturer for use in programming the PLC.
2.
Application software: The software that is programmed specifically for the
Project.
May 2014
17720-1
9408A10
1.04
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
1.05
1.06
Provide all PLC hardware as indicated on the Drawings and as specified in this
Section.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Product data:
1.
CPU:
a. Processor type.
b. Processor speed.
c. Memory.
d. Internal processor battery back-up time.
2.
I/O modules:
a. Type.
b. Standard wiring diagram.
C.
Calculations:
1.
Submit calculations or documented estimate to verify that memory
requirements of this Section are met, including spare requirements. If possible,
use PLC manufacturer's calculation or estimating worksheet.
2.
Submit calculations to verify that spare I/O requirements of this Section are
met.
3.
Submit calculations to verify that PLC power supply requirements of this
Section are met.
D.
Product data:
1.
Programming languages.
2.
Operating system requirements.
E.
Control logic:
1.
Fully annotated copy of programmed PLC logic.
2.
Cross-referenced index of all PLC registers or points.
F.
Provide application software for the specific Project process requirements.

1.
Fully annotated copy of programmed PLC logic in its native format.
2.
Cross-referenced index of all PLC registers or points.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
Provide PLC hardware manufactured at facilities certified to the quality standards of

ISO 9001.
C.
1.
Provide PLC system components by a single manufacturer:
a. Third-party communication modules may be used only for communication
or network media functions not provided by the PLC manufacturer.
May 2014
17720-2
9408A10
2.
3.
1.07

A.
1.08
Use PLC manufacturer approved hardware, such as cable, mounting

hardware, connectors, enclosures, racks, communication cable, splitters,
terminators, and taps.
All PLC hardware, CPUs, I/O devices, and communication devices shall be
new, free from defects and produced by manufacturers regularly engaged in
the manufacture of these products.

A.
1.09
1.10
1.11
WARRANTY
A.
1.12
1.13
1.14
1.15
MAINTENANCE
A.
B.
In addition to the spare parts requirements specified in Section 17050

1.
CPU: 1 spare for each type of CPU in the system.
2.
I/O cards: 3 spare for each type of I/O card in the system.
3.
Power supplies; 2 spare for every power supply in the system.
4.
Network/communications cards: 1 spare for every network or communications
card in the system.
5.
Remote adapter: 1 spare for every remote adaptor in the system.
6.
Chassis: 1 spare for each chassis size in the system.
C.
Installed spare requirements:

1.
I/O points:
a. Provide total of 25 percent spare I/O capacity for each type of I/O at every
PLC and RIO.
b. Wire all spare I/O points to field terminal blocks in the same enclosure the
PLC resides in.
2.
PLC backplane capacity:
a. Provide 25 percent or 3 spare backplane slots, whichever is greater in all
racks containing I/O
3.
PLC memory:
a. Provide 50 percent spare program volatile memory.
May 2014
17720-3
9408A10
PART 2
2.01
PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Acceptable manufacturers:
1.
Rockwell Automation:
a. CompactLogix, no equal.
B.
The PLC programming software system shall be manufactured by PLC hardware

manufacturer:
1.
Rockwell Software:
a. RSLogix 5000.
2.02
2.03
2.04
MANUFACTURED UNITS
A.
Programmable logic controller:

1.
Construction:
a. Furnish plug-in modular system.
b. Provide PLCs capable of operating in a hostile industrial environment
without fans, air conditioning, or electrical filtering:
1) Temperature: 0 60 degrees Celsius.
2) RFI: 80 to 1,000 MHz.
3) Vibration: 10 to 500 Hertz.
4) Humidity: 0 to 95 percent.
c. Provide internal power supplies designed to protect against over voltage
and frequency distortion characteristics frequently encountered with the
local power utility.
d. Design the PLC system to function as a stand-alone unit that performs all
of the control functions described herein completely independent from the
functions of the SCADA system PC-based operator interfaces:
1) Failure of the SCADA system shall not impact data acquisition,
control, scaling, alarm checking, or communication functions of the
PLC.
2.
Central processing unit:
a. Configure each central processor unit so that it contains all the software
relays, timers, counters, number storage registers, shift registers,
sequencers, arithmetic capability, and comparators necessary to perform
the specified control functions.
b. Capable of interfacing with all discrete inputs, analog inputs, discrete
outputs, analog outputs and communication cards to meet the specified
requirements.
c. Capable of supporting and implementing closed loop floating-point math
and PID control that is directly integrated into the CPU control program.
d. Provide each CPU with internal fault analysis incorporating a fail-safe
mode and a dry contact output for remote location alarming, as well as a
local indicator on the PLC frame in the event of a fault in the PLC.
May 2014
17720-4
9408A10
3.
4.
5.
6.
Memory:
a. Non-volatile memory: On-board complementary metal oxide semiconductor (CMOS), electrically erasable programmable read only memory
(EEPROM), PCMCIA, compact flash card, or SD card.
b. Supply with sufficient memory to implement the specified control functions
plus a reserve capacity as specified with the requirements of this Section:
1) This reserve capacity:
a) Totally free from any system use.
2) Programmed in a multi-mode configuration with multiple series or
parallel contacts, function blocks, counters, timers, and arithmetic
functions.
Programming:
a. Provide a system where processors are programmed by:
1) Portable laptop computer both locally and via the PLC control
network.
PLC power supply:
a. Input: 120 VAC.
b. Mounted in the PLC housing or as indicated in the Drawings.
c. Sized to power all modules mounted in that housing including an average
module load for any empty housing slots plus 50 percent above that total.
PLC input/output, I/O modules:
a. General:
1) Compatible with all of the PLCs being furnished under the contract
and by the same manufacturer as the PLCs.
2) Provide I/O modules that:
a) Isolated in accordance with IEEE Surge Withstand Standards
and NEMA Noise Immunity Standards.
b) Provide A/D and D/A converters with optically or galvanically
isolated inputs and outputs.
c) Accept dual ended inputs.
3) The use of common grounds between I/O points is not acceptable.
4) Provide modules that are removable without having to disconnect
wiring terminals:
a) Utilize a swing-arm or plug-in wiring connector.
5) Provide at each PLC the I/O modules for the following:
a) designated future I/O points contained in the I/O Lists and/or
shown on the P&IDs, control schematics, or described in the
control strategies
b) Installed spare capacity in accordance with the requirements of
this Section.
1) Wire all spares provided to the field terminal strip.
6) Condition, filter, and check input signals for instrument limit
conditions.
7) Filter, scale, and linearize the raw signal into an engineering units
based measurement.
8) Alarm measurements for high, low, rate-of-change limits, and alarm
trends.
9) Provide external fuses mounted on the field connection terminal
block for all discrete input, discrete output, and analog input I/O
points.
10) When multiple cards of the same I/O type are provided and parallel
equipment, instrumentation, or redundant processes exist, distribute
May 2014
17720-5
9408A10
7.
8.
I/O among cards to ensure that a single card failure will not render an
entire process unavailable.
b. Discrete input modules:
1) Defined as contact closure inputs from devices external to the input
module.
2) Provide inputs that are optically isolated from low energy common
mode transients to 1,500 volts peak from users wiring or other I/O
modules.
3) Individually isolated inputs.
4) With LED's to indicate status of each discrete input.
5) Input signal level: 120 VAC.
6) Provide input module points that are individually fused with blown
fuse indicator lights, mounted external of the module on the output
terminal strip:
a) Coordinate external fuse size with the protection located on the
module, so that the external fuse opens first under a fault
condition.
c. Discrete output modules:
1) Defined as contact closure outputs for ON/OFF operation of devices
external to the output module:
a) Triac outputs may be used, with the permission of the Engineer,
care must be used in applying this type of modules to ensure
that the leakage current through the output device does not
falsely signal or indicate an output condition.
2) Optically isolated from inductively generated, normal mode and low
energy, common mode transients to 1,500 volts peak.
3) LEDs to indicate status of each output point.
4) Each output point: Individually isolated.
d. Analog input modules:
1) Signal type: 4 to 20 mA DC.
2) Analog to digital conversion: Minimum 12-bit precision with the digital
result entered into the processor.
3) The analog to digital conversion updated with each scan of the
processor.Individually isolated each input.Coordinate the size of the
external fuse with the protection located on the module, so that the
external fuse opens first under a fault condition.
e. Analog output modules:
1) Signal type: 4 to 20 mA DC.
2) Individual isolated output points each rated for loads of up to
1,200 ohms.
Communications modules:
a. Network communications modules:
1) General:
a) Install communications modules in the PLC backplane.
2) Ethernet:
a) Ports: 1 RJ-45.
b) Communication rate: 100 Mbit/s.
3) Provide all network taps, connectors, termination resistors, drop
cables, and trunk cables necessary for remote I/O communications.
PLC backplane housing:
a. Mount the PLC power supply, CPU, communications module, and I/O
modules in a suitable standard PLC backplane or housing.
May 2014
17720-6
9408A10
b.
c.
Provide spare slots in each PLC and RIO location in accordance with the
requirements of this Section.
Provide blank slot filler module for each spare slot.
B.
SCADA system interface:

1.
As specified in Section 17733 and Section 17762.
C.
PLC programming software:

1.
Furnish operating software capable of monitoring and/or control of the PLCs
via the PLC data network:
a. Contain diagnostics to collect troubleshooting and performance data and
display it in easy to understand graphs and tables.
b. Monitor devices at each drop on the PLC data network for proper
communications.
c. Provide the ability to program all PLCs on the PLC data network from the
engineers console.
2.
Operating system:
a. Microsoft Windows 7.
3.
The PLC programming software shall be suitable for the PLCs specified
above.
4.
PLC programming software for all programming, monitoring, searching, and
editing:
a. Usable both on-line, while connected to the PLC, and off-line.
b. The operating software shall display multiple series and parallel contacts,
coils, timers, counters, and mathematical function blocks.
c. Capable of disabling/forcing all inputs, outputs, and coils to simulate the
elements of the ladder logic, forced elements shall be identifiable by
means of color change.
d. Include a search capability to locate any address or element and its
program location.
e. Display at the EC, PLC status information, such as faults and
communication errors and amount of memory remaining.
5.
PLC programming software shall support the following programming
languages:
a. Ladder Diagram.
b. Function Block Diagram.
c. Structured Text.
d. Sequential Function Chart.
6.
Generate a PLC program printout, which is fully documented, through the PLC
programming software:
a. Fully documented program listings include, as a minimum, appropriate
rungs, address, and coils shown with comments to clarify to a reader what
that segment of the program accomplishes on an individual line by line
basis.
b. Include a sufficient embedded comment for every rung of the program
explaining the control function accomplished in said rung.
c. Use a mnemonic associated with each contact, coil, etc, that describes its
function.
d. Utilize the tag and loop identification as contained in the P&IDs:
1) If additional internal coils, timers, etc. are used for a loop they shall
contain the loop number.
e. Provide a cross-reference report of program addresses.
May 2014
17720-7
9408A10
7.
Software functions automatically without operator intervention, except as

required to establish file names and similar information:
a. Furnish the operating system software that is the standard uncorrupted
product of the PLC manufacturer with the following minimum functions:
1) Respond to demands from a program request.
2) Dynamic allocation of the resources available in the PLC. These
resources include main memory usage, computation time, peripheral
usage, and I/O channel usage.
3) Allotment of system resources based on task priority levels such that
a logical allocation of resources and suitable response times are
assured.
4) Queuing of requests in order of priority if one or more requested
resources are unavailable.
5) Resolution of contending requests for the same resource in
accordance with priority.
6) Service requests for execution of one program by another.
7) Transfer data between programs as requested.
8) Management of all information transfers to and from peripheral
devices.
9) Control and recovery from all program fault conditions.
10) Diagnose and report real-time hardware device errors.
8.
Program execution:
a. Application software - program execution scheduled on a priority basis:
1) A multilevel priority interrupt structure is required.
2) Enter into a list of pending programs a program interrupted by a
higher priority program:
a) Resume its execution once it becomes the currently highest
priority program.
3) Schedule periodic programs.
4) Base the allocation of resources to a time-scheduled program on its
relative priority and the availability of resources.
9.
Start-up and restart:
a. Provide software that initializes and brings a PLC or any microprocessor
based hardware unit from an inactive condition to a state of operational
readiness.
b. Initialization:
1) Determination of system status before start-up of initializing operating
system software and initializing application software.
2) Loading of all memory resident software, initializing timers, counters,
and queues, and initialization of all dynamic database values.
10. Shutdown:
a. Where possible provide orderly shutdown capability for shutdowns
resulting from equipment failure, including other PLC processor failures,
primary power failure, or a manually entered shutdown command.
b. Upon loss of primary power, a high-priority hardware interrupt initiates
software for an immediate, orderly shutdown.
c. Hardware is quickly and automatically commanded to a secure state in
response to shutdown command or malfunction.
d. Alarm PLC failure at the operator interface level.
11. Diagnostics:
May 2014
17720-8
9408A10
a.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
Furnish diagnostic programs with the PLC software package to detect and
isolate hardware problems and assist maintenance personnel in
discovering the causes for system failures.
b. Use the manufacturer's standard diagnostic routines as much as possible.
c. Furnish diagnostic software and test programs for each significant
component in the control system.
d. As a minimum, provide diagnostic routines to test for power supply,
central processing unit, memory, communications, and I/O bus failures.
Calendar/time program:
a. The calendar/time program to update the second, minute, hour, day,
month, and year and transfer accurate time and date information to all
system level and application software.
b. Variations in the number of days in each month and in leap years must be
handled automatically by the program.
c. The operator must be able to set or correct the time and date from any
operator interface, only at the highest security level.
Algorithms:
a. Implementation of algorithms for the determinations of control actions and
special calculations involving analog and discrete data.
b. Algorithms must be capable of outputting positional or incremental control
outputs or providing the product of calculations.
c. Algorithms must include alarm checks where appropriate.
d. Provide, as a minimum, the following types of algorithms:
1) Performs functions such as summing several variables, raising to a
power, roots, dividing, multiplying, and subtracting.
2) A switch algorithm, which reads the current, value from its input
address and stores it as the value of its output address. 2 types of
switches shall be accommodated, 2 outputs with 1 input and 1 output
with 2 inputs.
3) A 3-mode proportional - integral - derivative, PID, controller
algorithm, with each of the 3 modes independently adjustable,
supporting both direct and reverse acting modes.
4) Lead, lag, dead time, and ratio compensators.
5) Integration and totalization of analog process variables.
Furnish a comprehensive database for the analog inputs, calculated values,
control modules, and outputs:
a. In addition, provide spare database points for future expansion.
One integrated database can be utilized for all types of analog points or
separate databases for each type, in either case the database for each point
must include all specified aspects.
All portions of the database must be available for use by the display, report,
and other specified software modules.
All of the data fields and functions specified below must be part of the point
definition database at the operator interface. Provide the capability to define
new database points through the point display specified below as well as
modifying defined points through these displays. This point definition and
modification must include all of the features and functions defined below. The
analog database software must support the following functions and attributes:
a. Analog input signal types:
1) Provide software at the RTUs and PLCs to read variable
voltage/current signals and pulse duration/frequency type analog
input signals.
May 2014
17720-9
9408A10
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
Input accuracy:
1) Inputs must be read with an accuracy of within 0.05 percent full scale
or better.
2) Data conversion errors must be less than 0.05 percent full scale.
3) Pulse accumulation error less than or equal to 1 count of actual input
count at a scan rate of once a minute.
4) Maintain for a minimum of 1 year the system accuracy stated above
without adjustments.
Blocking:
1) Provide mechanisms to inhibit or block the scanning and/or
processing of any analog input through the operator interface.
2) For any input so blocked, the operator may manually enter a value to
be used as the input value.
Filtering:
1) For each analog input provide a first order lag digital filter with an
adjustable filter factor.
Linearizing:
1) Where analog inputs require square root extraction or other
linearization, provide a mechanism to condition the filtered data
before the process of scaling and zero suppression takes place.
Calculated values:
1) Provide means to allow for pseudo-inputs calculated by algebraic
and/or Boolean expressions utilizing real inputs, other calculated
value, constants, etc.
2) These values must be handled the same as real inputs in terms of
record keeping, alarming, etc.
Scaling and zero suppression:
1) Provide a conversion program to convert input values into
engineering units in a floating-point format.
Alarms:
1) Provide an alarm program to check all analog variables against
high-high, high, low, and low-low alarm limits.
2) When an analog value exceeds a set limit, it must be reported as an
alarm based on individually set priority level for each alarm point.
3) Provide an adjustable hysteresis band in order to prevent excessive
alarms when a variable is hovering around an alarm limit.
4) Report return to normal shall also be reported.
5) Must be possible to inhibit alarms based on external events, i.e.,
Iock-out low pump flow alarm when the pump is off.
Averages:
1) Provide a program to calculate and store hourly, daily, and monthly
averages of analog variables.
2) Continuously compute averages, i.e., the average for the current
period to the present point in time must be stored in memory and
available for use in displays, etc.
3) Update hourly averages each minute or at the polling interval for the
selected variable.
4) Update daily averages at least once each hour and calculate using
the results of the hourly averages.
5) Update monthly averages at least once each day and calculate using
the results of the daily averages.
May 2014
17720-10
9408A10
6)
At the end of each averaging period, store the average values for the
period on the hard disk for historical record keeping and reset the
present period average register to the present value of the variable.
7) The active database must include the present period average and
previous period average for each variable and averaging period.
j.
Totals:
1) Provide a program to calculate and store hourly, daily, and monthly
totalization of analog variables.
2) Assign a scaling factor to each variable to convert to the appropriate
units based on a 1-minute totalizing interval.
3) Assign a separate factor for each totalizing interval.
4) Variables for which totalization is inappropriate must have scaling
factors of zero.
5) At the end of each totalizing period, store the totalized values for the
period on the hard disk for historical record keeping and reset the
present period totalization register to zero.
6) The active database must include the present period total and
previous period total for each variable and totalizing period.
k. Engineering units:
1) Provide software to allow the system and the operator to convert all
the measured analog variables to any desired engineering units.
2) The operator must be able to view displays and generate reports of
any measured variable in one or more engineering units such as flow
in gpm, mgd, cfs, and acre-feet per day.
3) Pre-program the conversion of the engineering units, and if not preprogrammed, the operator must be able to program new engineering
unit conversions by using simple methods, i.e., multiplication of the
database attributes by a constant.
4) The programming method must be at a level and compatible with the
specified training of the operator and the Owner's personnel.
5) New conversions must not require the services of a special
programmer and/or special, high-level, programming training.
l.
Control modules:
1) For each control function configured, whether processed at the RTU,
PLC, or operator interface, maintain a file of necessary data including
input values, setpoints, constants, intermediate calculated values,
output value and limit clamps, etc.
2) Input and output assignments, setpoints, and constants must be
adjustable by the operator through the operator interface.
3) Provide control algorithms for manual control with output values
adjustable by the operator.
m. Analog outputs:
1) Analog outputs must be maintained as part of the database.
2) These outputs must be adjustable manually by the operator through
the operator interface or through automatic control algorithms.
18. Some of the above functions may be better accomplished in the data
acquisition and graphic display software package; it is the responsibility of the
ICSC to optimize the location of the various functions between all software
packages.
D.
General control functions:

1.
Analog control functions:
May 2014
17720-11
9408A10
a.
b.
2.
3.
4.
5.
E.
PID, lead/lag, signal select, alarm, limit, delay, and time base.
Furnish the control system complete with a library of
mathematical/calculation software to support averaging, weighted
average, addition, subtraction, multiplication, division, square root
extraction, exponential, AND, OR, NAND, NOR, XOR and NXOR
functions.
c. All math utilities must be linkable to process data points or manual inputs
via control block configuration.
d. By linking control blocks to data points, the math library must support
system unit conversion and calculation requirements.
Discrete control functions:
a. AND, OR, NOT, EXCLUSIVE OR, comparators, delays and time base.
Software support:
a. Retain in firmware all control and logic functions at each RTU and PLC
and in RAM at the operator interface.
b. Call each function as required by the configured controls to perform the
intended function.
Control and status discrepancies:
a. Generate a discrepancy/fail alarm for any pump, valve, or final control
element if a discrepancy exists between a system or operator command
and the device status.
b. For example, the system commands to start (call), and the pump fails to
start (run status report back), within predetermined operator
programmable time delay (time disagree), and then a discrepancy (fail)
alarm shall be generated.
c. Involuntary change in the device's status must also generate an alarm:
1) For example, a pump starts when not commanded to do so, or a
pump shuts down while running even though it still has a command
to run.
d. Each command, status, and alarm must cause the color of the symbol to
change.
e. Because many discrete final control elements have a cycle time in excess
of the scan interval, provide each control output with an associated delay
period selected to be longer than the operating period of the control
element:
1) Delay periods for each final control element must be adjustable at the
operator interface.
2) List all time delays in the final documentation.
Some of the above functions may be better accomplished in the data
acquisition and graphic display software package; it is the responsibility of the
ICSC to optimize the location of the various functions between all software
packages.
Control configuration:
1.
Provide software to allow control strategies to be developed and their
operation initiated through the operator interface.
2.
Provide standardized control point displays for defining the control functions
including the function type, input/output addresses, setpoints and tuning
constants, etc.
3.
Provide a mechanism to link separate control functions together into an
integrated control strategy.
May 2014
17720-12
9408A10
4.
5.
6.
Provide a mechanism to download operational/control setpoints developed at

any operator interface to any PLC or RTU for operational implementation.
Provide a mechanism to define and implement operational/control setpoints
locally at the PLC or RTU and to upload them to the operator interface for
operational record keeping.
Perform control configurations on-line at the operator interface, the PLC or
RTU may be taken off-line when being configured or downloaded.
2.05
2.06
2.07
2.08
MIXES (NOT USED)
2.09
2.10
FINISHES (NOT USED)
2.11

A.
PART 3

EXECUTION
3.01
3.02
3.03
INSTALLATION
3.04
A.
B.
Utilize personnel to accomplish, or supervise the physical installation of all

elements, components, accessories, or assemblies:
1.
Employ installers who are skilled and experienced in the installation and
connection of all elements, components, accessories, and assemblies.
C.
All components of the control system including all data network cables are the
installation responsibility of the ICSC unless specifically noted otherwise.
D.
General:
1.
The control system logic program shall reside at the PLC level.
E.
Use the tag and loop identifications found on the P&IDs for all tags used and/or
assigned as part of the application software work provided by the ICSC.
F.
Program the PLC logic using the following language(s):

1.
Match existing PLC programming.
May 2014
17720-13
9408A10
A.
Provide a minimum of 4 CD/DVD copies of the following:

1.
Application software:
a. Finalized fully annotated copy of programmed PLC logic in its native
format.
b. Cross-referenced index of all PLC registers or points.
3.05
3.06
3.07

A.
3.08
3.09
CLEANING
A.
3.10
3.11

A.
B.
Tailor training specifically for this Project that reflects the entire control system
installation and configuration.
C.
Perform training by pre-approved and qualified representatives of the ICSC and or

manufacturer of the PLC hardware and programming software:
1.
A representative of the ICSC may perform the PLC hardware training only if
the representative has completed the Manufacturers training course for the
PLC hardware.
2.
A representative of the ICSC may perform the PLC programming software
training only if the representative has completed the Manufacturers training
course for the PLC programming software.
PROTECTION
A.
3.12

END OF SECTION
May 2014
17720-14
9408A10
SECTION 17730
CONTROL SYSTEMS - SCADA COMPUTER EQUIPMENT
PART 1
1.01
1.02
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes:
1.
PC-based SCADA system hardware, including:
a. SCADA Servers.
b. Operator Workstations.
c. Portable Computer.
B.
Related sections:
1.
2.
3.
c. Section 17950 - Testing, Calibration, and Commissioning.
REFERENCES
A.
1.03
1.04
GENERAL
DEFINITIONS
A.
B.
1.
CAL: Client access license.
2.
RAID: Redundant array of independent disks.
3.
SNMP: Simple network management protocol.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
Provide all SCADA computer equipment identified in the Contract Documents.
B.
Miscellaneous requirements:
1.
All material used in satisfying the equipment requirements shall be new and
unused and must be actively marketed by the original equipment manufacturer
for new applications at the time of the factory demonstration test. The
Contractor shall not use equipment destined for installation or spare parts for
May 2014
17730-1
9408A10
the Owners system for any reason other than development and testing of the
system.
1.05
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.06
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.07

A.
1.08

A.
1.09
1.10
1.11
WARRANTY
A.
1.12
1.13
1.14
1.15
PART 2
2.01
PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Commonality:
1.
The SCADA system shall utilize the same brand and type of computer for like
functions throughout the system.
2.
Where possible, use the same processor family throughout.
3.
B.
Manufacturers:
1.
As indicated below.
C.
Systems management architecture:

1.
All processors, servers, workstations, network software, bridges, and other
manageable objects shall have simple network management protocol (SNMP)
agents included.
May 2014
17730-2
9408A10
2.02
2.03
2.04
MANUFACTURED UNITS
A.
General:
1.
The hardware identified in this Section is considered the minimum, acceptable
configuration. It is the Contractors responsibility to upgrade and expand the
hardware configuration if necessary to satisfy software and system
performance requirements of the Project.
2.
Proposed substitutions must meet or exceed the specifications of the
equipment listed.
B.
Industrial panel computer:

1.
Industrial panel-mounted monitor with separate PC-architecture computer
running the Windows 7 Professional (NTFS) operating system.
a. Provide a complete set of backup/restore recovery CDs such that the
computer may be restored to factory condition in the event of a
catastrophic hard drive failure. Software recovery from a partition on the
hard disk drive is not acceptable.
b. Provide a complete set of all required cables and software.
c. Provide manufacturer's user and maintenance manuals.
d. Industrial panel-mounted monitor:
1) Display size: 15-inch.
2) Type: Active Matrix Color TFT LCD display with resistive antiglare
touchscreen.
3) Rating: NEMA Type 4X.
4) Faceplate/bezel material: Stainless steel.
5) MTBF: Minimum 50,000 hours.
6) Operating temperature: 0 - 55 Degrees Celsius.
7) Operating relative humidity: 20 90 percent non-condensing.
8) Power supply: 120 VAC.
9) Manufacturers. One of the following or equal:
a) GE.
b) Siemens.
c) Maple.
d) Allen Bradley Panelview.
e. Computer shall meet the following minimum requirements:
1) Processor speed: Intel Pentium 4, 3.0 GHz or better.
2) Main memory: 4GB DDR 533 MHz.
3) Hard disk: 320 GB, Serial ATA, 7,200 rpm; buffer cache 8.0 MB
minimum.
4) Video card: 64 MB DDR RAM.
5) Serial RS232 port.
6) 2 PCI slots.
7) 4 USB slots.
8) 8X DVD/RW SATA.
9) Internal 56 Kbps, V.92 modem.
10) Network port: 10/100 Base TX, Ethernet LAN.
11) Power supply: 120 VAC.
12) Manufacturers: The following or equal:
May 2014
17730-3
9408A10
a)
Dell Optiplex.
2.05
2.06
2.07
2.08
MIXES (NOT USED)
2.09
2.10
FINISHES (NOT USED)
2.11
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
3.02
3.03
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
General:
1.
Each display monitor shall be secured to the console or other work surface.
2.
Install equipment and cabling so that, in the event of an earthquake, seismic
movement will not damage cables. In particular, provide appropriate slack in
cables.
C.
Each device with a unique IP address shall be individually labeled with it IP

address. The labeling must be printed; handwritten labels will not be accepted.
3.04
3.05
3.06
3.07

A.
3.08
3.09
CLEANING
A.
May 2014
17730-4
9408A10
3.10

A.
B.
Training:
1.
3.11
3.12

END OF SECTION
May 2014
17730-5
9408A10
SECTION 17733
CONTROL SYSTEMS - NETWORK MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1
1.01
1.02
1.03
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes:
1.
Materials and equipment used in process control and LAN networks including:
a. Network Hubs.
b. Network switches.
c. Patch panels and other data network hardware.
d. Related accessories.
B.
Related sections:
1.
2.
3.
b. Section 16075 Electrical Identification.
d. Section 17730 - Control Systems - SCADA Computer Equipment.
e. Section 17950 - Testing, Calibration, and Commissioning.
REFERENCES
A.
B.

1.
802.3 - Ethernet.
2.
802.11 - Wireless LANs.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.04
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
1.05
GENERAL
Provide all network equipment identified in the Contract Documents.
SUBMITTALS
A.
May 2014
17733-1
9408A10
1.06
B.
Product data:
1.
Include information on all test equipment.
2.
Manufacturers operation and installation instructions.
C.
Shop drawings:
1.
Complete set of drawings including but not limited to:
a. System block diagram showing relationship and connections between
devices provided under this Contract and existing equipment. Include
manufacturer and model information, and address settings.
b. Network riser diagram.
c. Network port diagram, which physically locates all, ports within the facility,
and identifies their patch panel and switch port.
d. Construction drawings for all equipment cabinets, including dimensions,
identification of all components, preparation and finish data, nameplates
e. Electrical connection diagrams.
f. Complete grounding requirements.
2.
Furnish data sheets for each component together with a technical product
brochure or bulletin:
a. Manufacturer's model number.
b. Project equipment tag.
3.
Complete and detailed bills of materials broken up by each cabinet. Each bill
of material item will include the following:
a. Quantity.
b. Description.
c. Manufacturer.
d. Part numbers.
D.
Test reports:
1.
As specified in Section 17950 and noted in this Section.
2.
Signed test results as described in this Section.
3.
Test results shall include:
a. Narrative describing the test procedures followed.
b. Block diagram of test set up.
c. Manufacturers information on test equipment used.
d. Detailed test results.
e. A narrative summarizing the results of the testing and identifying any
further action required.
E.
Operating manuals:
1.
Complete installation, operation, calibration, and testing manuals as specified
in Section 17050.
F.
Record drawings:
1.
2.
Electrical connection diagrams shall be revised to reflect any changes made in
the field and submitted as record drawings.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
May 2014
17733-2
9408A10
1.07

A.
1.08

A.
1.09
1.10
1.11
WARRANTY
A.
1.12
1.13
1.14
1.15
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
2.02
2.03
2.04
MANUFACTURED UNITS
A.
Ethernet switches:
1.
Managed Process floor Ethernet switches:
a. Manufacturers: One of the following, no equal:
1) Cisco 2960 Series.
b. Properties:
1) Hardware:
a) Power supply:
(1) Provide redundant power supplies.
(2) 24 VDC, 350 Watts per power supply.
2) Performance:
a) Switch fabric speed: 8 Gbps, minimum.
b) Gigabit throughput.
3) Environment:
a) Operating temperature range: 32 to 131 Degrees Fahrenheit.
b) Humidity: 15 to 95 percent, non-condensing.
4) Capable of performing basic switching without special programming
or configurations. Additional features available through software
setup includes but not limited to:
May 2014
17733-3
9408A10
5)
6)
B.
a) Remote switch management.

b) Port Security.
c) Rapid Spanning Tree protocol.
Connector type:
a) Fiber: SC.
b) Copper: RJ-45.
(1) Quantity of copper and fiber ports as required to provide
connections as indicated on the Drawings: as required to
provide the number of connections required plus 20 percent
spare ports of each type used.
Mounting:
a) Provide hardware for 19 inch rack mounting hardware and
mount internal to the PCM cabinet
Patch panels:
1.
All optical fibers shall be provided with strain relief and terminated at a fiber
patch panel. All patch panel terminations shall be SC type. Final connections
between the patch panel and the fiber optic network equipment shall be made
via fiber optic patch cords.
2.
All fibers, active and dark, shall be terminated at the patch panels.
3.
Interconnect and patch panel housings shall provide space for excess fiber
and provide strain relief for the fiber cable.
4.
Fiber cables shall be installed such that the outer sheath of the cable is carried
into the interconnect enclosure or patch panels before breaking out buffer
tubes.
5.
Category 6 patch panels:
1) Hubbell Nextspeed.
2) Siemon HD.
3) Lucent Systemax.
b. Patch panels and connectors shall meet the following (minimum)
requirements:
1) Category 6, T569A/B.
2) RJ-45 patch cord termination: S110 UTP-STP cable termination.
3) Capacity: 24 ports (minimum).
4) Mounting: 19-inch rack mount.
5) Accessories: Rear cable management bracket, individual port labels.
c. Provide patch cables as required to support all network devices. Provide
four spare straight through patch cables. Provide 1 spare cross over
cable.
6.
Fiber patch panels:
a. Wall mounted interconnect:
1) Application: Use for the termination of a single cable outside of
cabinets, in small enclosures or as indicated on the plans.
2) Wall mounted fiber interconnects shall be provided as complete units
including the housing, the connector panels and the fiber connectors.
3) Wall mounted fiber interconnects shall provide physical protection for
both the incoming cable and the outgoing patch cords.
4) Capacity: As shown on the plans, minimum 6 connections.
5) Accessories:
a) Door lock.
b) Blanks for unused connector panels.
May 2014
17733-4
9408A10
6)
b.
Manufacturers: The following or equal:

a) Corning Cable Systems, Wall-Mountable Interconnect Center.
Rack mounted fiber patch panel:
1) Application: Use for the termination of one or more fiber cables
terminating on open EIA racks and in enclosures with EIA racks.
2) Fiber patch panels shall be provided as complete units including the
housing, the connector panels, mounting hardware and the fiber
connectors.
3) Patch panels shall be provided with hardware for standard 19-inch or
23-inch rack mounting, as required.
4) Capacity: As shown in the Contract Documents.
5) Manufacturers: The following or equal:
a) Corning Cable Systems, Connector Module Housing.
2.05
2.06
2.07
ACCESSORIES
A.
Provide duplex patch cords to connect the interface cards provided with the
associated patch panels.
B.
Furnish accessories as specified in Section 17730.
2.08
MIXES (NOT USED)
2.09
2.10
FINISHES (NOT USED)
2.11
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
3.02
3.03
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
Provide installation and configuration for the new and existing managed Ethernet
switches. Provide configuration of the Ethernet switch network for a complete,
functioning plant control system as indicated on the Drawings and as specified
herein:
1.
Refer to SCADA block diagrams for all new network connections.
2.
All PLC peer to peer communications, remote I/O for both the SCADA OIT
network shall be over a 1 Gbps network.
3.
Provide configuration for all managed Ethernet switches and other
components including but not limited to VLAN (virtual local area network),
May 2014
17733-5
9408A10
4.
5.
additional Plant PLC communication cards and separate managed Ethernet

switches as required, such that there is isolation of the following networks:
a. Field and PLC I/O network: This includes the connections between the
Plant PLC and:
1) Plant PLC expansion racks.
2) HMI part of a Plant PLC.
3) Vendor furnished Ethernet network components.
b. Process Control network: This includes the connections between the Plant
PLC and other Plant PLCs.
c. SCADA network: This includes the connections between the various
SCADA equipment including but not limited to servers (existing),
workstations and printers.
The process floor managed Ethernet switches for the process control network
shall be configured and programmed for rapid fail over protection.
The enterprise level managed Ethernet switches shall be configured for a
communication protocol that is compatible with the process control networks
rapid fail over protocol.
C.
All racks shall be level and plumb.
D.
Install Velcro wrap on all cable bundles within the network rack/enclosure.
E.
All cables and equipment shall be installed in strict conformance with the
manufacturers recommendations:
1.
Cables shall be installed avoiding sharp bends.
2.
Install cable using lubricant designed for cable pulling.
3.
Cable ties or other cable supports shall be installed without crimping the LAN
cables.
4.
Install LAN cables without splices.
5.
Installed bend radii shall not exceed 4 times the cable diameter.
6.
Terminated all pairs at the jack and the patch panel.
F.
Install cables a minimum of 40 inches away from electrical motors and transformers.
G.
Install cables a minimum of 12 inches away from fluorescent lighting.
H.
Individual pairs will be untwisted less than 1/2 inch at termination points.
I.
All cables and terminations shall be labeled with cable designations as specified in
Section 16075.
J.
Each data port shall be individually labeled with its patch panel/switch port ID:
1.
Labeling must be printed - no handwritten labels will be allowed.
K.
At the completion of the wiring installation, provide the following documentation:

1.
A plan-view of the premise(s) showing the jack numbering scheme.
2.
A printed certification report for the entire wiring installation showing
compliance with all EIA/TIA specifications for data cable.
3.
Reports such as those generated by Fluke DSP cable certification equipment
meet this requirement.
4.
Each device with a unique IP address shall be individually labeled with its IP
address. The labeling must be printed; handwritten labels will not be allowed.
May 2014
17733-6
9408A10
3.04
3.05
3.06
3.07
3.08
ADJUSTING
A.
3.09
CLEANING
A.
3.10
Perform all firmware installations, configuration and other set up, as required, to
place the network into proper operation.

A.
B.
After completion of the cable system tests and before placing the system in
operation, power up all devices installed on the LAN and verify communication
between the devices.
C.
Verify that all equipment is operable on the network simultaneously. Confirm that all
network device communications settings are properly configured.
3.11
3.12

END OF SECTION
May 2014
17733-7
9408A10
SECTION 17762
CONTROL SYSTEMS - SCADA SOFTWARE
PART 1
1.01
1.02
GENERAL
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes:
1.
SCADA system software to be used for application software development and
real time operation of the SCADA system.
B.
Related sections:
1.
2.
3.
c. Section 17100 - Control Strategies.
d. Section 17950 - Testing, Calibration, and Commissioning.
C.
1.
Software provided under this Contract represents a complete and operating
control software system. Achieve the functionality specified in this and other
sections through a combination of standard control system software and
application software developed specifically for this Project.
2.
The standard control software listed in this Section does not represent a
comprehensive list of software necessary to implement the functional
requirements of the Contract Documents. Provide all necessary supplemental
drivers, utility software and application software, as required, to meet the
functional requirements of the Contract Documents.
3.
Applications software requirements are described in Section 17100.
4.
License all software for proper operation as described in the Contract
Documents.
5.
License all software provided under this Contract to the Owner.
D.
Provide copies of all software on CD, or equivalent media.
REFERENCES
A.
May 2014
17762-1
9408A10
1.03
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.04
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
SCADA system node descriptors:

1.
SCADA client workstation: Client workstations shall be provided with all
graphic display and related software for interacting with the SCADA system
data. SCADA clients displays shall operate on data maintained by the SCADA
server. Display capabilities shall include, but not be limited to:
a. Process mimic displays.
b. Real time and historical trend displays.
c. Alarm summary and sub-summary displays.
d. System utilities.
2.
SCADA terminal server: SCADA terminal server is existing.
3.
SCADA terminal services client: Provide the SCADA system terminal services
client with the required software and licenses required to access and display
all graphic displays deployed from the SCADA terminal server.
4.
SCADA development node: Provide the SCADA system development node
with software and licenses required to edit the programs and configuration files
as part of the system application development. Unless otherwise indicated, the
development node shall be complete with run time software for fully testing the
application programs. Functions required at the development node include:
a. Edit the SCADA database.
b. Edit graphic displays.
c. Modify alarm files.
d. Modify PLC programs.
e. Modify programs and scripts executing at any of the workstations.
f. Set up trends and historical displays.
g. Edit user authorizations.
h. Other functions as may be required to modify the SCADA system
application software.
5.
Alarm node: Each client workstation is equipped with an alarm window on the
operator display with local annunciation. Where a separate alarm node has
been indicated, this node shall handle the interface to telephone, paging and
radio alarming systems.
B.
General:
1.
The Contractor shall provide SCADA software, as required for a complete and
functional SCADA system as indicated on the Drawings and as specified in
this Section:
2.
Existing SCADA software is Wonderware 10.5. Under this contract, upgrade
an existing Wonderware 10.0 runtime license to Wonderware 10.5
development edition. Coordinate with the City to determine which SCADA
node is to be upgraded as described. The SCADA nodes described are all
located at the existing treatment plant.
3.
Relocate the existing 10.5 runtime license to the new OIT device that will be
located at the pump station.
4.
System configuration:
a. SCADA server and historian server are existing. Existing historian is
limited to 500 tags, all of which are currently in use. Remove historian
May 2014
17762-2
9408A10
tags as determined by the City (assume 20 tags) to make space for new
signals to be tracked by the historian. Program the additional 20 tags to
monitor new tags as determined by the City.
1.05
C.
SCADA screen requirements:

1.
New SCADA screens to match the look and feel of the existing screens.
Existing screens are included at the end of this Section for reference. Final
screens, colors, and associated graphics will be agreed to during meetings as
described herein.
D.
Reports:
1.
The City has in-place a program that outputs SCADA data to excel
automatically every 24 hours. Incorporate all new and modified SCADA points
into with this excel program:
a. Program details are available from the City upon request.
2.
Generate an engine generator report, with details to be defined during the
project:
a. Assume the report will incorporate 10 columns of data (rows arranged by
date) and will output generator criteria such as usage frequency, userentered maintenance intervals, power demand, fuel tank levels, etc.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Remote alarm database:

1.
After development of the SCADA system database but before system start-up,
provide a list of points configured for alarming and submit to the Owner and
the Engineer. The Owner/Engineer will identify critical alarms for use in the
extended alarming system (e.g. dialer system, paging) and provide response
descriptions.
C.
Alarm descriptions shall be of sufficient detail for an accurate review by the Owner.
D.
After all shop drawings submittals required herein have been favorably reviewed by
the Engineer, the ICSC shall submit the following items, which must also be
favorably reviewed and implemented prior to the start of system testing, the entire
control system including all required software packages must be operational prior to
the required factory acceptance test:
1.
All operator interface display submittals shall be in full color as they will appear
on the display screen:
a. This submittal shall be prepared after the requisite graphics meetings.
b. The submittal shall include:
1) Graphic displays.
2) Trend displays.
3) Alpha numeric displays.
4) Alarm displays.
5) Historian points determined by the Owner.
2.
Each display shall be uniquely titled:
a. Locations for process data shall be clearly identified either through the
use of simulated data or by showing variables on the displays and
providing a reference list describing those variables.
May 2014
17762-3
9408A10
b.
3.
1.06
All dynamic points shall be identified by tag number as a minimum and

their operation shall be described on separate sheets:
1) Color change.
2) Symbol change.
c. Three sets of submittals, with screen prints in color on a white
background, are required for review by the Owner and Engineer.
d. One set will be returned with comments.
All periodic and custom reports for the entire control system:
a. Locations for process data shall be clearly identified, either through the
use of simulated data or by showing variables on the report and providing
a reference list describing those variables.
b. Three sets of reports shall be submitted for review by the Engineer.
1) One set will be returned with comments.
E.
Pre-acceptance test documentation as specified in the Sequencing article of this

Section.
F.
Operator's reference manual:

1.
The ICSC shall prepare and submit a user reference manual for the operator
interface system for use by the operators. This manual shall be bound in a
3-ring binder and meet the following minimum requirements:
a. An index to the manual.
b. A list of operator interface:
1) Display screens.
2) Trends.
3) Reports.
4) With display name and description.
c. A summary of all possible commands and operator inputs to these
screens including setpoints:
1) All control actions shall be included.
d. A control system block diagram with names and locations of major
components.
e. Instructions for manually printing screens or reports.
1) Real time.
2) Historical.
f. A summary of security levels and their privileges and limitations.
g. Spaces for operators to make notes.
2.
A copy of this manual shall be provided to each operator during training on the
operator interface operations:
a. The training class shall include a review of this manual with the operators
in addition to more detailed instruction on the operator interface
configuration and its use.
G.
Review meeting minutes submittals:

1.
Graphics review meeting:
a. Minutes of Graphic Review Meeting No. 1.
b. Minutes of Graphic Review Meeting No. 2.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
May 2014
17762-4
9408A10
B.
The manufacturer must have a formal and documented set of quality assurance
procedures that are applied to the engineering design, development, and
documentation of the software:
1.
The presence of a formal quality assurance department is required.
C.
Software provided under this Section shall be included in the testing specified in
Section 17950.
1.07
1.08
1.09
SEQUENCING
A.
The following items shall be submitted with the final sets of technical manuals
required as specified in the Submittals article of this Section, 15 working days
before the pre-commissioning test as specified in Section 17050:
1.
All program manuals supplied by the manufacturers with the standard software
packages.
2.
All original program disks supplied by the manufacturers with the standard
software packages, including any program revisions or updates issued by the
manufacturers during the construction period.
3.
All PLC program and operator interface application program files stored on
labeled disks:
a. The PLC program and operator interface application program file disks
shall also be updated as required if any changes or corrections are
required in this programming before Project completion.
B.
Operator interface graphics generation:

1.
The ICSC through the Contractor shall schedule the operator interface
graphics meetings.
2.
Topics shall include graphics for:
a. HMI graphics.
b. Data acquisition and graphics display system.
3.
The Owner and Engineer shall attend these meetings.
4.
Graphics Meeting No. 1: Held in conjunction with the Preliminary Meeting as
specified in Section 17050:
a. The ICSC shall chair and develop an agenda 3 weeks in advance of the
meeting, which shall address the basic criteria to be adhered to in the
configuration and development of graphic displays:
1) At this meeting, the ICSC shall distribute sample display formats for
illustration purposes.
2) As a minimum, this meeting shall address the following issues:
a) All in plant and remote site areas and conventions for identifying
tag names and descriptors.
b) Designation of groups within each plant area along with tag
names and descriptors.
c) The assignment of individual control loops and inputs to specific
groups.
d) Organization of the systems universal display hierarchy.
e) Paging schemes to be used to enable the movement from one
display to another.
May 2014
17762-5
9408A10
f)
5.
An itemization of the type of display to be used at each level in

the graphic hierarchy, i.e., pre-formatted displays, templates,
custom graphics, etc.
g) Color convention to be employed on all graphics for the
annotation of various status information, differentiation between
alarms based on alarm priority, background colors, static field
colors and dynamic field colors.
h) The utilization of blinking and conditional text.
i)
Definition of graphic symbolism to be used on the Project. This
listing shall include but not be limited to symbols to be used for
process instrumentation, process equipment, piping, vessels
and valves:
(1) All symbolism must be specific as opposed to generic in
that shapes must define both function and type, i.e.,
specific symbols for each valve design, each pump design,
each type of flowmeter, etc.
(2) If the ICSC's library of shapes does not adequately
describe plant or field conditions, the ICSC shall develop
additional shapes to meet the plant or field requirements.
(3) Shapes and symbols used on the P&IDs shall be used as a
guideline.
j)
Definition of all display select commands that enable the
operator to move within the display hierarchy.
k) The utilization of cursor movement commands which enable the
operator to move within a display.
l)
Definition of control input commands which enable the operator
to interact with face plates control stations and custom graphic
displays to implement control functions.
m) Definition of data input commands which enable the operator to
enter numeric values into the control system.
n) Definition of the utilization of "poke" points or fields that are
dynamically sensitive to operator inputs to facilitate operator
entry directly into graphic displays.
o) A review of graphic generation procedures.
p) Define Reports Criteria for automatic excel report and generator
report as defined herein.
b. Subsequent to the adjournment of Graphics Meeting No. 1, the ICSC shall
prepare and formalize a document titled "Graphics Criteria" which shall
contain detailed meeting minutes and a definition of all graphic guidelines
to be adhered to:
1) This report shall be supplemented by graphic examples which
illustrate the incorporation and application of each graphic criteria.
2) The report shall be submitted within 30 calendar days of the
meeting's adjournment.
Graphics Meeting No. 2: Held in conjunction with the intermediate review
meeting as specified in Section 17050:
a. Subsequent to the finalization of the overall system-wide graphics criteria,
the ICSC shall develop graphic packages for the entire operator interfaces
being furnished under this Project.
b. At this meeting the ICSC shall submit 5 copies including:
1) A review of the graphics and reports package developed for the
process areas for content and completeness.
May 2014
17762-6
9408A10
2)
6.
A review of all data fields that display automatically updated process

information.
3) A review of all required input commands associated with the graphic
access and control manipulation.
c. Subsequent to the adjournment of Graphics Meeting No. 2, the ICSC shall
prepare a formalized submittal of the graphic package for review along
with the detailed meeting minutes:
1) The report shall be submitted within 30 calendar days of the meeting
adjournment.
10 additional displays shall be configured on-line during the precommissioning test period.
1.10
1.11
WARRANTY
A.
1.12
1.13
1.14
May 2014
17762-7
9408A10
1.15
MAINTENANCE
A.
Provide 1-year extended manufacturers warranty as follows:

1.
Dedicated technical support department or handled by programming staff or
distributor.
2.
Telephone support available 24 hours per day.
3.
Email and web support addresses.
4.
FTP download area.
5.
Knowledge base.
6.
Bulletin board service.
7.
Field service.
B.
Provide system upgrades and maintenance fixes for a period of 1 year from
Substantial Completion.
PART 2
2.01
PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS
A.
One of the following, no equal:

1.
Wonderware Version 10.5.
2.02
2.03
2.04
MANUFACTURED UNITS
A.
General:
1.
Unless otherwise indicated, provide all run time and development software
licensed for:
a. Unlimited tags.
b. Unlimited screens.
c. No direct limits on the number of connections to a server machine.
d. Provide the number of client licenses as indicated by the number of
machines shown or specified, the addition of a new client shall not require
an upgrade to the server license.
2.
Provide software and licenses as required to implement the system
architecture and functionality as indicated on the Drawings and as described in
the System Description article of this Section.
3.
License/registered all software in the Owners name.
4.
Turn all software installed on the workstation, over to the Owner with disks,
keys and manuals.
5.
The system software specified as part of this Section support SCADA system
functions including, but not limited to:
a. Human machine interface (HMI) process graphics development and
display.
b. Real time point database development and display.
c. Historical database generation, collection, and display.
d. Alarming subsystem.
e. Trending and report subsystems.
f. Drivers and interfaces.
May 2014
17762-8
9408A10
B.
Operating system software:

1.
Provide all workstations and servers with operating system software
compatible with the software provided under this Section:
a. Client nodes: Verify existing client node software with the City.
b. Server nodes: Verify existing server node software with the City.
2.
Provide all operating system software as a clean install. Where workstations
have been loaded with OEM versions of software containing trial software or
other advertisements, remove the OEM software and reinstall the operating
system and all drivers from the original installation disks.
3.
Provide all workstations with recovery disks.
C.
SCADA I/O server software:

1.
Provide software and licenses for a full SCADA system node including I/O
drivers.
2.
Provide drivers for all control system devices as indicated on the Drawings.
3.
Configure historical data collectors to provide data for the historical database
on all I/O servers.
4.
License all software in the Owners name.
D.
Development workstations:
1.
For development workstations provide all software for the generation and
modification of the of graphic screens, SCADA system databases, access
control files and supervisory control programs.
2.
The development node contains all client software and licenses for use as an
additional operator display.
3.
License all software in the Owners name.
E.
Licensing:
1.
Provided hardware keys shall utilize the USB form factor.
F.
Alarm dialer software:

1.
Interface with existing alarm dialer to add new alarms and remove existing as
selected by the City.
G.
Miscellaneous software:
1.
Provide the following support software for use on the SCADA system
computers. Install all software on the appropriate system node. Provide all
software CD/DVD media. License all software to the Owner:
a. Provide all nodes with virus protection software.
2.05
2.06
2.07
2.08
MIXES (NOT USED)
2.09
2.10
FINISHES (NOT USED)
2.11
May 2014
17762-9
9408A10
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
3.02
3.03
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
Install all required software improvement modules (SIMs). At the completion of the
Project, and provide installation disk(s) containing all SIMs used on the Project to
the Owner.
3.04
3.05
3.06
3.07

A.
Test all software provided as part of this Section as part of the system tests
B.
Provide training for 2 of the Owners staff in the use of the following software
packages:
1.
Wonderware 10.5.
C.
Provide training by a factory-authorized vendor.
D.
The Contractor shall cover the costs of tuition, training materials, and related fees.
3.08
3.09
CLEANING (NOT USED)
3.10

A.
3.11
3.12

END OF SECTION
May 2014
17762-10
9408A10
SECTION 17903
SCHEDULES - I/O LIST
PART 1
1.01
GENERAL
SUMMARY
A.
The I/O list is not a take-off list. Additional information is as indicated on the
Drawings and specified in the Contract Documents. Where any discrepancies
between this list and the P&ID drawings arise, the P&ID shall govern.
B.
Abbreviations used in the I/O list are defined on the Drawings.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
Not used.
PART 3
3.01
EXECUTION
I/O LIST
A.
I/O list attached.

END OF SECTION
May 2014
17903-1
9408A10
PLC I/O Listing for PLC-2031

Tag
Loop
I/O
Location
PD
1007
AI
PLC-2031
SB
1040
AI
PLC-2031
SB
1050
AI
PLC-2031
1201
AI
PLC-2031
2018
AI
PLC-2031
2028
AI
2038
Description 1
Description 2
Drawing #
PLC-2031
9408A1010N001.DWG
SPEED IN
PLC-2031
9408A1010N005.DWG
SPEED IN
PLC-2031
9408A1010N006.DWG
PLC-2031
9408A1010N001.DWG
TEMP
PLC-2031
9408A1020N005.DWG
PLC-2031
TEMP
PLC-2031
9408A1020N005.DWG
AI
PLC-2031
TEMP
PLC-2031
9408A1020N005.DWG
Total AI Points = 7
SS
1040
AO
PLC-2031
SPEED OUT
PLC-2031
9408A1010N005.DWG
SS
1050
AO
PLC-2031
SPEED OUT
PLC-2031
9408A1010N006.DWG
Total AO Points = 2
HSAR
1001
DI
PLC-2031
REMOTE
PLC-2031
9408A1010N001.DWG
ZSC
1001
DI
PLC-2031
CLOSED
PLC-2031
9408A1010N001.DWG
ZSO
1001
DI
PLC-2031
OPENED
PLC-2031
9408A1010N001.DWG
HSAR
1003
DI
PLC-2031
REMOTE
PLC-2031
9408A1010N001.DWG
ZSC
1003
DI
PLC-2031
CLOSED
PLC-2031
9408A1010N001.DWG
ZSO
1003
DI
PLC-2031
OPENED
PLC-2031
9408A1010N001.DWG
PDSH
1006
DI
PLC-2031
PLC-2031
9408A1010N001.DWG
AUX1
1010
DI
PLC-2031
RUNNING
PLC-2031
9408A1010N002.DWG
AUX2
1010
DI
PLC-2031
FAILED
PLC-2031
9408A1010N002.DWG
AUX3
1010
DI
PLC-2031
MPR TRIPP
PLC-2031
9408A1010N002.DWG
HSAR
1010
DI
PLC-2031
REMOTE
PLC-2031
9408A1010N002.DWG
TSH
1010
DI
PLC-2031
TEMP HIGH
PLC-2031
9408A1010N002.DWG
CAROLLO - 5/29/2014
9408A10
PLC LISTING
Page 1 of 7

Tag
Loop
I/O
Location
Description 1
Description 2
Drawing #
TSHH
1010
DI
PLC-2031
TEMP HIGH HIGH
PLC-2031
9408A1010N002.DWG
PSL
1012
DI
PLC-2031
LOW PRESS
PLC-2031
9408A1010N002.DWG
PSH
1013
DI
PLC-2031
PLC-2031
9408A1010N002.DWG
HSAR
1015
DI
PLC-2031
REMOTE
PLC-2031
9408A1010N002.DWG
ZSC
1015
DI
PLC-2031
CLOSED
PLC-2031
9408A1010N002.DWG
ZSO
1015
DI
PLC-2031
OPENED
PLC-2031
9408A1010N002.DWG
AUX1
1020
DI
PLC-2031
RUNNING
PLC-2031
9408A1010N003.DWG
AUX2
1020
DI
PLC-2031
FAILED
PLC-2031
9408A1010N003.DWG
AUX3
1020
DI
PLC-2031
MPR TRIPP
PLC-2031
9408A1010N003.DWG
HSAR
1020
DI
PLC-2031
REMOTE
PLC-2031
9408A1010N003.DWG
TSH
1020
DI
PLC-2031
TEMP HIGH
PLC-2031
9408A1010N003.DWG
TSHH
1020
DI
PLC-2031
TEMP HIGH HIGH
PLC-2031
9408A1010N003.DWG
PSL
1022
DI
PLC-2031
LOW PRESS
PLC-2031
9408A1010N003.DWG
PSH
1023
DI
PLC-2031
PLC-2031
9408A1010N003.DWG
HSAR
1025
DI
PLC-2031
REMOTE
PLC-2031
9408A1010N003.DWG
ZSC
1025
DI
PLC-2031
CLOSED
PLC-2031
9408A1010N003.DWG
ZSO
1025
DI
PLC-2031
OPENED
PLC-2031
9408A1010N003.DWG
AUX1
1030
DI
PLC-2031
RUNNING
PLC-2031
9408A1010N004.DWG
AUX2
1030
DI
PLC-2031
FAILED
PLC-2031
9408A1010N004.DWG
AUX3
1030
DI
PLC-2031
MPR TRIPP
PLC-2031
9408A1010N004.DWG
HSAR
1030
DI
PLC-2031
REMOTE
PLC-2031
9408A1010N004.DWG
TSH
1030
DI
PLC-2031
TEMP HIGH
PLC-2031
9408A1010N004.DWG
TSHH
1030
DI
PLC-2031
TEMP HIGH HIGH
PLC-2031
9408A1010N004.DWG
LOW PRESS
PLC-2031
9408A1010N004.DWG
PLC-2031
9408A1010N004.DWG
PSL
1032
DI
PLC-2031
PSH
1033
DI
PLC-2031
HSAR
1035
DI
PLC-2031
REMOTE
PLC-2031
9408A1010N004.DWG
ZSC
1035
DI
PLC-2031
CLOSED
PLC-2031
9408A1010N004.DWG
CAROLLO - 5/29/2014
9408A10
PLC LISTING
Page 2 of 7

Tag
Loop
I/O
Location
Description 1
Description 2
Drawing #
ZSO
1035
DI
PLC-2031
OPENED
PLC-2031
9408A1010N004.DWG
AUX1
1040
DI
PLC-2031
VFD RUNNING
PLC-2031
9408A1010N005.DWG
AUX2
1040
DI
PLC-2031
VFD FAILED
PLC-2031
9408A1010N005.DWG
AUX3
1040
DI
PLC-2031
MPR TRIP
PLC-2031
9408A1010N005.DWG
AUX6
1040
DI
PLC-2031
VFD FAN ALARM
PLC-2031
9408A1010N005.DWG
AUX7
1040
DI
PLC-2031
VFD FAN FAULT
PLC-2031
9408A1010N005.DWG
HSAB
1040
DI
PLC-2031
BYPASS
PLC-2031
9408A1010N005.DWG
HSAR
1040
DI
PLC-2031
REMOTE
PLC-2031
9408A1010N005.DWG
TSH
1040
DI
PLC-2031
TEMP HIGH
PLC-2031
9408A1010N005.DWG
TSH2
1040
DI
PLC-2031
VFD TEMP HIGH
PLC-2031
9408A1010N005.DWG
TSHH
1040
DI
PLC-2031
TEMP HIGH HIGH
PLC-2031
9408A1010N005.DWG
XVSH
1040
DI
PLC-2031
VIBRATION
PLC-2031
9408A1010N005.DWG
XVSHH
1040
DI
PLC-2031
VIBRATION
PLC-2031
9408A1010N005.DWG
AUX1
1040B
DI
PLC-2031
RUNNING
PLC-2031
9408A1010N005.DWG
HSAB
1040B
DI
PLC-2031
BYPASS
PLC-2031
9408A1010N005.DWG
LOW PRESS
PLC-2031
9408A1010N005.DWG
PLC-2031
9408A1010N005.DWG
PSL
1042
DI
PLC-2031
PDSH
1043
DI
PLC-2031
HSAR
1045
DI
PLC-2031
REMOTE
PLC-2031
9408A1010N005.DWG
ZSC
1045
DI
PLC-2031
CLOSED
PLC-2031
9408A1010N005.DWG
ZSO
1045
DI
PLC-2031
OPENED
PLC-2031
9408A1010N005.DWG
AUX1
1050
DI
PLC-2031
VFD RUNNING
PLC-2031
9408A1010N006.DWG
AUX2
1050
DI
PLC-2031
VFD FAILED
PLC-2031
9408A1010N006.DWG
AUX3
1050
DI
PLC-2031
MPR TRIP
PLC-2031
9408A1010N006.DWG
AUX6
1050
DI
PLC-2031
VFD FAN ALARM
PLC-2031
9408A1010N006.DWG
AUX7
1050
DI
PLC-2031
VFD FAN FAULT
PLC-2031
9408A1010N006.DWG
HSAB
1050
DI
PLC-2031
BYPASS
PLC-2031
9408A1010N006.DWG
HSAR
1050
DI
PLC-2031
REMOTE
PLC-2031
9408A1010N006.DWG
CAROLLO - 5/29/2014
9408A10
PLC LISTING
Page 3 of 7

Tag
Loop
I/O
Location
Description 1
Description 2
Drawing #
TSH
1050
DI
PLC-2031
TEMP HIGH
PLC-2031
9408A1010N006.DWG
TSH2
1050
DI
PLC-2031
VFD TEMP HIGH
PLC-2031
9408A1010N006.DWG
TSHH
1050
DI
PLC-2031
TEMP HIGH HIGH
PLC-2031
9408A1010N006.DWG
XVSH
1050
DI
PLC-2031
VIBRATION
PLC-2031
9408A1010N006.DWG
XVSHH
1050
DI
PLC-2031
VIBRATION
PLC-2031
9408A1010N006.DWG
AUX1
1050B
DI
PLC-2031
RUNNING
PLC-2031
9408A1010N006.DWG
HSAB
1050B
DI
PLC-2031
BYPASS
PLC-2031
9408A1010N006.DWG
LOW PRESS
PLC-2031
9408A1010N006.DWG
PLC-2031
9408A1010N006.DWG
PSL
1052
DI
PLC-2031
PDSH
1053
DI
PLC-2031
HSAR
1055
DI
PLC-2031
REMOTE
PLC-2031
9408A1010N006.DWG
ZSC
1055
DI
PLC-2031
CLOSED
PLC-2031
9408A1010N006.DWG
ZSO
1055
DI
PLC-2031
OPENED
PLC-2031
9408A1010N006.DWG
ESL3
2010
DI
PLC-2031
BATT CHARGE FAIL
PLC-2031
9408A1020N008.DWG
2019
DI
PLC-2031
INTRUSION
PLC-2031
9408A1020N005.DWG
AUX3
2020
DI
PLC-2031
VCP FAIL STATUS
PLC-2031
9408A1020N008.DWG
Y7
2020
DI
PLC-2031
TRANSFER SYSTEM STATUS
PLC-2031
9408A1020N008.DWG
Y1
2020.1
DI
PLC-2031
STATUS
PLC-2031
9408A1020N006.DWG
Y2
2020.1
DI
PLC-2031
VOLT TRIP
PLC-2031
9408A1020N006.DWG
Y6
2020.1
DI
PLC-2031
FREQ TRIP
PLC-2031
9408A1020N006.DWG
ZSC
2020.1
DI
PLC-2031
CLOSED
PLC-2031
9408A1020N006.DWG
ZSO
2020.1
DI
PLC-2031
OPENED
PLC-2031
9408A1020N006.DWG
ZST
2020.1
DI
PLC-2031
TRIPPED
PLC-2031
9408A1020N006.DWG
Y1
2020.2
DI
PLC-2031
STATUS
PLC-2031
9408A1020N006.DWG
Y2
2020.2
DI
PLC-2031
VOLT TRIP
PLC-2031
9408A1020N006.DWG
ZSC
2020.2
DI
PLC-2031
CLOSED
PLC-2031
9408A1020N006.DWG
ZSO
2020.2
DI
PLC-2031
OPENED
PLC-2031
9408A1020N006.DWG
ZST
2020.2
DI
PLC-2031
TRIPPED
PLC-2031
9408A1020N006.DWG
CAROLLO - 5/29/2014
9408A10
PLC LISTING
Page 4 of 7

Tag
Loop
I/O
Location
Description 1
Description 2
Drawing #
Y1
2020.3
DI
PLC-2031
STATUS
PLC-2031
9408A1020N006.DWG
ZSC
2020.3
DI
PLC-2031
CLOSED
PLC-2031
9408A1020N006.DWG
ZSO
2020.3
DI
PLC-2031
OPENED
PLC-2031
9408A1020N006.DWG
ZST
2020.3
DI
PLC-2031
TRIPPED
PLC-2031
9408A1020N006.DWG
Y1
2020.4
DI
PLC-2031
STATUS
PLC-2031
9408A1020N006.DWG
ZSC
2020.4
DI
PLC-2031
CLOSED
PLC-2031
9408A1020N006.DWG
ZSO
2020.4
DI
PLC-2031
OPENED
PLC-2031
9408A1020N006.DWG
ZST
2020.4
DI
PLC-2031
TRIPPED
PLC-2031
9408A1020N006.DWG
Y1
2020.5
DI
PLC-2031
STATUS
PLC-2031
9408A1020N007.DWG
ZSC
2020.5
DI
PLC-2031
CLOSED
PLC-2031
9408A1020N007.DWG
ZSO
2020.5
DI
PLC-2031
OPENED
PLC-2031
9408A1020N007.DWG
ZST
2020.5
DI
PLC-2031
TRIPPED
PLC-2031
9408A1020N007.DWG
Y1
2020.6
DI
PLC-2031
STATUS
PLC-2031
9408A1020N007.DWG
ZSC
2020.6
DI
PLC-2031
CLOSED
PLC-2031
9408A1020N007.DWG
ZSO
2020.6
DI
PLC-2031
OPENED
PLC-2031
9408A1020N007.DWG
ZST
2020.6
DI
PLC-2031
TRIPPED
PLC-2031
9408A1020N007.DWG
Y1
2020.7
DI
PLC-2031
STATUS
PLC-2031
9408A1020N007.DWG
ZSC
2020.7
DI
PLC-2031
CLOSED
PLC-2031
9408A1020N007.DWG
ZSO
2020.7
DI
PLC-2031
OPENED
PLC-2031
9408A1020N007.DWG
ZST
2020.7
DI
PLC-2031
TRIPPED
PLC-2031
9408A1020N007.DWG
Y1
2020.8
DI
PLC-2031
STATUS
PLC-2031
9408A1020N007.DWG
ZST
2020.8
DI
PLC-2031
TRIPPED
PLC-2031
9408A1020N007.DWG
2029
DI
PLC-2031
INTRUSION
PLC-2031
9408A1020N005.DWG
AUX1
2031
DI
PLC-2031
ON UPS POWER
PLC-2031
9408A1020N004.DWG
JS1
2031
DI
PLC-2031
24V PWR SUP FAIL
PLC-2031
9408A1020N004.DWG
JS2
2031
DI
PLC-2031
24V PWR SUP FAIL
PLC-2031
9408A1020N004.DWG
JS3
2031
DI
PLC-2031
DIODE BRIDGE FAIL
PLC-2031
9408A1020N004.DWG
CAROLLO - 5/29/2014
9408A10
PLC LISTING
Page 5 of 7

Tag
Loop
I/O
Location
Description 1
Description 2
Drawing #
TSH
2031
DI
PLC-2031
PLC TEMP
PLC-2031
9408A1020N004.DWG
XA3
2031
DI
PLC-2031
LO BATT
PLC-2031
9408A1020N004.DWG
XA4
2031
DI
PLC-2031
UPS FAIL
PLC-2031
9408A1020N004.DWG
XA5
2031
DI
PLC-2031
ES FAIL
PLC-2031
9408A1020N004.DWG
XA6
2031
DI
PLC-2031
CPU FAIL
PLC-2031
9408A1020N004.DWG
ZS
2031
DI
PLC-2031
INTRUSION
PLC-2031
9408A1020N004.DWG
ESL1
2035
DI
PLC-2031
SMOKE ALARM
PLC-2031
9408A1020N008.DWG
2039A
DI
PLC-2031
INTRUSION
PLC-2031
9408A1020N005.DWG
2039B
DI
PLC-2031
INTRUSION
PLC-2031
9408A1020N005.DWG
AUX1
2100
DI
PLC-2031
RUNNING ENG
PLC-2031
9408A1020N008.DWG
AUX2
2100
DI
PLC-2031
FAIL ENG
PLC-2031
9408A1020N008.DWG
HSDA
2100
DI
PLC-2031
AUTO
PLC-2031
9408A1020N008.DWG
HSWA
2100
DI
PLC-2031
REMOTE
PLC-2031
9408A1020N008.DWG
LSL
2100
DI
PLC-2031
LOW FUEL ENG
PLC-2031
9408A1020N008.DWG
Y4
2100
DI
PLC-2031
ON GEN POWER
PLC-2031
9408A1020N008.DWG
Y5
2100
DI
PLC-2031
ON UTILITY POWER
PLC-2031
9408A1020N008.DWG
Y6
2100
DI
PLC-2031
ON GEN POWER (EXERCISE)
PLC-2031
9408A1020N008.DWG
Total DI Points = 137

MSC
1001
DO
PLC-2031
CLOSE
PLC-2031
9408A1010N001.DWG
MSO
1001
DO
PLC-2031
OPEN
PLC-2031
9408A1010N001.DWG
MSC
1003
DO
PLC-2031
CLOSE
PLC-2031
9408A1010N001.DWG
MSO
1003
DO
PLC-2031
OPEN
PLC-2031
9408A1010N001.DWG
HAR
1010
DO
PLC-2031
RESET
PLC-2031
9408A1010N002.DWG
MST
1010
DO
PLC-2031
START
PLC-2031
9408A1010N002.DWG
HAR
1020
DO
PLC-2031
RESET
PLC-2031
9408A1010N003.DWG
MST
1020
DO
PLC-2031
START
PLC-2031
9408A1010N003.DWG
CAROLLO - 5/29/2014
9408A10
PLC LISTING
Page 6 of 7

Tag
Loop
I/O
Location
Description 1
Description 2
Drawing #
HAR
1030
DO
PLC-2031
RESET
PLC-2031
9408A1010N004.DWG
MST
1030
DO
PLC-2031
START
PLC-2031
9408A1010N004.DWG
HSR1
1040
DO
PLC-2031
RESET MPR
PLC-2031
9408A1010N005.DWG
HSR2
1040
DO
PLC-2031
RESET VFD
PLC-2031
9408A1010N005.DWG
MST
1040
DO
PLC-2031
START
PLC-2031
9408A1010N005.DWG
HSR1
1050
DO
PLC-2031
RESET MPR
PLC-2031
9408A1010N006.DWG
HSR2
1050
DO
PLC-2031
RESET VFD
PLC-2031
9408A1010N006.DWG
MST
1050
DO
PLC-2031
START
PLC-2031
9408A1010N006.DWG
HSR
2020.1
DO
PLC-2031
RESET
PLC-2031
9408A1020N006.DWG
HSR
2020.2
DO
PLC-2031
RESET
PLC-2031
9408A1020N006.DWG
MSC
2020.3
DO
PLC-2031
CLOSE
PLC-2031
9408A1020N006.DWG
MSO
2020.3
DO
PLC-2031
OPEN
PLC-2031
9408A1020N006.DWG
MSC
2020.4
DO
PLC-2031
CLOSE
PLC-2031
9408A1020N006.DWG
MSO
2020.4
DO
PLC-2031
OPEN
PLC-2031
9408A1020N006.DWG
MSC
2020.5
DO
PLC-2031
CLOSE
PLC-2031
9408A1020N007.DWG
MSO
2020.5
DO
PLC-2031
OPEN
PLC-2031
9408A1020N007.DWG
MSC
2020.6
DO
PLC-2031
CLOSE
PLC-2031
9408A1020N007.DWG
MSO
2020.6
DO
PLC-2031
OPEN
PLC-2031
9408A1020N007.DWG
MSC
2020.7
DO
PLC-2031
CLOSE
PLC-2031
9408A1020N007.DWG
MSO
2020.7
DO
PLC-2031
OPEN
PLC-2031
9408A1020N007.DWG
HST2
2100
DO
PLC-2031
TRANSFER TO GEN
PLC-2031
9408A1020N008.DWG
HST3
2100
DO
PLC-2031
TRANSFER TO UTILITY
PLC-2031
9408A1020N008.DWG
HST4
2100
DO
PLC-2031
TRANSFER TO GEN (EXCERCISE)
PLC-2031
9408A1020N008.DWG
Total DO Points = 31
CAROLLO - 5/29/2014
9408A10
PLC LISTING
Page 7 of 7
SECTION 17950
TESTING, CALIBRATION, AND COMMISSIONING
PART 1
1.01
1.02
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes:
1.
Testing requirements that apply to all process control and instrumentation
systems for the entire Project.
B.
Related sections:
1.
2.
3.
d. Section 17100 - Control Strategies.
REFERENCES
A.
1.03
GENERAL
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.04
1.05
SUBMITTALS
A.
Furnish submittals as specified in Section 01330.
B.
General:
1.
Reference additional detailed test submittal scheduling and prerequisite
requirements as specified in the Sequencing article of Section 17050
2.
For each test described in this Section, and described in other Instrumentation
and Control Specifications, prepare and submit complete test plans, test
procedures, test forms, test binders, test reports, and other submittals, as
specified below.
3.
Submit manufacturers certifications and manufacturers field reports where
required.
May 2014
17950-1
9408A10
4.
5.
6.
Submit test plans, procedures, forms, and binders for approval by the
Engineer before scheduling or performing tests.
Develop the PCIS system test submittals in consultation and cooperation with
all applicable subcontractors.
Additional test form and test procedure requirements are specified with
individual test requirements.
C.
Overall test plan:

1.
Develop and submit an overall testing plan for the PCIS. The overall test plan
to be reviewed and approved by the Engineer before detailed test plans,
procedures, and forms will be reviewed.
2.
Describe the test phases as they apply specifically to this Project and each
process system.
3.
Provide a preliminary testing schedule to show the sequence of tests and
commissioning as they apply to each process system and each PLC.
4.
Provide a description of factory tests. Describe what equipment will be
included, what testing equipment will be used, and the simulator that will be
used.
5.
Provide examples of proposed forms and checklists.
D.
Test procedures:
1.
Develop and submit detailed test procedures to show that the integrated
SCADA system hardware and software is fully operational and in compliance
with the requirements specified in the Contract Documents.
2.
Provide a statement of test objectives for each test.
3.
Prepare specific procedures for each process system.
4.
Describe sequentially the steps to be followed in verifying the correct operation
of each process system, including all features described in the loop
descriptions, control strategies, and shown in the P&IDs. Implied or generic
test procedures are not acceptable.
5.
Specify who will perform the tests, specifically what testing equipment will be
used (including serial numbers and NIST-traceable calibration), and how the
testing equipment will be used.
6.
Describe the expected role of the Engineer, as well as any requirements for
assistance from Owners staff.
7.
Provide the forms and checklists to be used.
E.
Test forms:
1.
Provide test and calibration forms and checklists for each of the following:
a. Calibration.
b. Factory acceptance tests.
c. Loop validation tests.
d. Pre-commissioning test.
e. Performance test.
2.
Test forms shall include the detailed test procedures, or shall include clear
references to separate pages containing the complete test procedure
applicable to each form. If references to procedures are used, the complete
procedure shall be included with each test binder.
3.
Every page of each test form shall include project name, date, time, name of
person conducting the test, signature of person conducting the test, and for
witnessed tests, place for signature of person (Engineer and Owner)
witnessing the test.
May 2014
17950-2
9408A10
4.
1.06
Some sample test forms are included at the end of this Section. These test
forms show the minimum required test form content. They are not complete,
and have not been customized for this Project. The Contractor is to develop
and submit test forms customized for the Project and meeting all of the
specified test and submittal requirements.
F.
Testing binders:
1.
Sub-system to be tested, provide and submit a test binder containing all test
procedures and individual test forms for the test. References to other
documents for test procedures and requirements are not acceptable.
2.
Fill out in advance headings and all other information known before the test.
3.
Include applicable test plan information, as well as a list of all test
prerequisites, test personnel, and equipment.
4.
Include or list reference material and provide separately at the time of the test.
5.
Record test results and verify that all test requirements and conditions have
been met.
G.
Factory acceptance test procedure additional minimal requirements:

1.
Prepare and submit a factory acceptance test procedure which includes:
a. Control system testing block diagram.
b. Estimated test duration.
c. Details on the simulator construction, components, and operation.
H.
Test reports:
1.
At the conclusion of each test, submit a complete test report, including all test
results and certifications.
2.
Include all completed test binders, forms, and checklists.
3.
Submission, review, and acceptance of each test report is generally required
before the start of the sub-system.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Test personnel:
1.
Furnish qualified technical personnel to perform all calibration, testing, and
verification. The test personnel are required to be familiar with this Project and
the equipment, software, and systems before being assigned to the test
program.
1.07
1.08
1.09
1.10
SCHEDULING
A.
1.11
WARRANTY (NOT USED)
1.12
1.13
May 2014
17950-3
9408A10
1.14
1.15
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
2.02
2.03
2.04
2.05
2.06
2.07
2.08
MIXES (NOT USED)
2.09
2.10
FINISHES (NOT USED)
2.11

A.
Factory acceptance test - general:

1.
Before shipment to the Project Site, the complete PCIS system including all
operator stations, network equipment, PCMs, PLCs, LCPs, and other SCADA
equipment, shall be assembled, connected, and all software loaded for a fully
functional factory acceptance test (FAT) of the integrated system.
2.
Perform tests to show that the integrated system hardware and software is
fully operational and in compliance with the requirements specified in the
Contract Documents.
3.
Additional factory tests are specified in other sections of the Instrumentation
and Control Specifications.
4.
The Contractors test personnel shall be responsible for performing tests and
recording results.
5.
The FAT will be witnessed by the Engineer and/or other representatives of the
Owner.
6.
Right of observation: The Owner retains the right to observe all factory test
activities including any and all subsystem preparation, pretests,
troubleshooting, retests, warm-up, and software modification and/or update.
7.
The Owner reserves the right to test any specified function, whether or not
explicitly stated in the test submittal.
8.
Costs for repeating testing: The Contractor shall pay for Engineers and other
Owners representatives travel, subsistence, and labor costs for witnessing
the repetition of failed tests.
9.
Correction of deficiencies: Any deficiencies observed during the test shall be
corrected and retested before completion of the test.
May 2014
17950-4
9408A10
10. Any changes and/or corrections shall be noted on the test forms. Engineer
shall witness the revisions and/or corrections prior to leaving the test site.
11. If the corrections and/or revisions are too extensive to be made while the
Engineer is scheduled to be at the FAT test site, the FAT shall be, at the
Engineers sole discretion, considered failed, and the test shall be restarted at
a later date. All costs for the re-test shall be borne by the Contractor.
B.
Testing simulation:
1.
The FAT shall make use of hardware simulators that contain switches, pilot
lights, variable analog signal generators, and analog signal level displays,
which shall be connected to the I/O points within the SCADA system. All inputs
and outputs shall be simulated and proper control and system operation shall
be validated.
2.
The use of jumper wires, terminal block mounted pilot lights, and loose meters
to act as or supply the functionality of a simulator shall not be allowed.
C.
Preliminary factory acceptance test:

1.
A complete preliminary factory acceptance test (pre-FAT) shall be conducted
utilizing test procedures approved by the Engineer. The pre-FAT test
procedure shall be a subset of the full FAT.
2.
The purpose of the pre-FAT is to provide assurance to the Engineer that the
SCADA system is ready for the full, witnessed factory acceptance test, in
terms of both stability and functionality. Debugging of software and
troubleshooting of hardware shall occur during and before the pre-FAT, not
during the FAT. The Contractor shall fully test the SCADA system and fix all
deficiencies found before the full FAT.
3.
The Owner shall have the right to witness any or all of the pre-FAT testing and
shall be notified in writing 20 days before the start of the pre-FAT.
4.
The pre-FAT test results submittal shall include a letter, signed by the
Contractors project manager or company officer, certifying that the system is
complete, has been tested successfully, and is fully ready for the full,
witnessed FAT. The submittal shall include completed pre-FAT test forms,
signed by the Contractors staff, and shall be submitted for review before the
start of the FAT.
D.
Panel inspections:
1.
The Engineer will inspect each control panel for completeness, workmanship,
fit and finish, and compliance with the Contract Documents and the approved
shop drawings.
2.
Provide panel inspection forms as part of the factory acceptance test
procedures submittal.
3.
Inspection to include, as a minimum: Layout, mounting, wire and data cable
routing, wire tags, power supply, components and wiring, I/O components
layout (including terminals, wiring and relays), device layout on doors and front
panels, and proper ventilation operation.
E.
I/O test:
1.
Verify that I/O is properly wired to field terminals and is properly mapped into
the PLC and the rest of the SCADA system, including all operator interface
devices.
2.
Test methodology:
May 2014
17950-5
9408A10
a.
3.
Discrete inputs: Apply appropriate input at panel terminal, observe input

card indicator, observe data value at each indicated data address,
observe data received on all operator interface displays (SCADA
workstations and local operator interface (LOI) displays).
b. Discrete outputs: Issue commands from operator interface screen, verify
output card indicator light and measure response at field wiring terminals.
c. Analog inputs: Apply appropriate analog input signal at panel terminals,
observe data value at each indicated data address, and observe data
properly received at each operator screen. Check each point at 0 percent,
50 percent, and 100 percent of scale.
d. Analog outputs: Enter scaled values in the output buffer file, observe the
output data file value, and measure appropriate response at panel wiring
terminals.
Test forms to include, but not be limited to:
a. PLC and panel number.
b. I/O type.
c. I/O tag name.
d. Panel terminal block numbers.
e. Rack/slot/number of I/O point.
f. Check-off for correct response for each I/O point.
g. Space for comments.
h. Initials of individual performing test.
i.
Date test was performed.
j.
Witness signature lines.
F.
System configuration test:

1.
Demonstrate and test the setup and configuration of all operator stations,
servers, development stations, and peripherals.
2.
Demonstrate all utility software and functions, such as virus protection,
backup, optical drive burning, network monitoring, etc.
3.
Demonstrate the proper operation of all peripheral hardware.
4.
Demonstrate all general SCADA functions.
5.
Demonstrate proper operation of log-on and other access security functions.
6.
Demonstrate the proper operation of all historical data storage, trend, display,
backup, and report functions.
7.
Test automatic fail over of redundant equipment.
8.
Demonstrate the proper operation of the alarm display and acknowledgement
functions.
9.
Test forms:
a. For each test, list the specification page and paragraph of the function
demonstrated, and provide a description of the function.
b. List the specific tests and steps to be conducted.
c. For each function, list all of the different sub-functions or ways the function
can be used, and provide a test check-off for each:
1) Include signature and date lines.
G.
Control logic test:

1.
The purpose of this test is to verify that all software functions and logic work as
specified, along with any hardwired logic or functions in the tested control
panels.
2.
Testing requirements:
May 2014
17950-6
9408A10
a.
3.
PART 3
Demonstrate each function described in Section 17100. Demonstrate in

detail how each function operates under a variety of operating scenarios.
Test to verify the application of each general control strategy function to
each specific control strategy or loop description.
b. Demonstrate the proper operation of the programming and configuration
for each control strategy or loop description. Test each strategy or loop
description on a sentence by sentence and function by function basis.
Loops with similar or identical logic must each be tested individually.
c. Demonstrate the proper operation of all digital communication links and
networks. Verify each digital communication I/O point.
d. Failure testing: In addition to demonstrating correct operation of all
specified features, special effort shall be made to demonstrate how the
system responds to and recovers from abnormal conditions including, but
not limited to: equipment failure, operator error, communications
subsystem error, communications failures, simulated/forced software
lockups, power failure (both utility power and power to SCADA hardware),
process equipment failure, and high system loading conditions.
Test forms:
a. Include the fully revised and approved control strategy for the loop being
tested.
b. Identify the cause and effect as each I/O point is toggled through the
simulator. Check boxes shall be provided to track proper and/or improper
operation of the loop.
c. Any deficiencies or operational changes shall be noted on the forms for
correction and documentation:
1) Include signature and date lines.
EXECUTION
3.01
3.02
3.03
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
Installation supervision:
1.
3.04
3.05
3.06
3.07

A.
General:
1.
The Owner reserves the right to test any specified function, whether or not
explicitly stated in the test submittals.
2.
Failure testing:
May 2014
17950-7
9408A10
a.
3.
In addition to demonstrating correct operation of all specified features,

demonstrate how the system reacts and recovers from abnormal
conditions including, but not limited to:
1) Equipment failure.
2) Operator error.
3) Communications sub-system error.
4) Power failure.
5) Process equipment failure.
6) High system loading conditions.
Conduct testing Monday through Friday during normal working hours for no
more than 8 hours per day. Testing at other times requires approval of the
Engineer.
B.
Manufacturer services:
1.
C.
Sequencing:
1.
See additional requirements specified in the Sequencing article of
Section 17050
D.
Calibration:
1.
After installation but before starting other tests, calibrate and adjust all
instruments, devices, valves, and systems, in conformance with the
component manufacturer's instructions and as specified in these Contract
Documents.
2.
Components having adjustable features are to be set carefully for the specific
conditions and applications of this installation. Test and verify that components
and/or systems are within the specified limits of accuracy.
3.
Replace either individually or within a system, defective elements that cannot
achieve proper calibration or accuracy.
4.
Calibration points:
a. Calibrate each analog instrument at 0 percent, 25 percent, 50 percent,
75 percent, and 100 percent of span, using test instruments with
accuracies traceable to NIST.
5.
Field verify calibration of instruments that have been factory-calibrated to
determine whether any of the calibrations are in need of adjustment.
6.
Analyzer calibration:
a. Calibrate and test each analyzer system as a workable system after
installation. Follow the testing procedures directed by the manufacturers'
technical representatives.
7.
Complete instrument calibration sheets for every field instrument and analyzer.
8.
Calibration tags:
a. Attach a calibration and testing tag to each instrument, piece of
equipment, or system.
b. Sign the tag when calibration is complete.
E.
Loop check/validation:
1.
Check all control loops under simulated operating conditions by causing a
range of input signals at the primary control elements and observing
appropriate responses of the respective control and monitoring elements, final
control elements, and the graphic displays associated with the SCADA
May 2014
17950-8
9408A10
system. Issue commands from the SCADA system and verify proper
responses of field devices. Use actual process inputs wherever available.
2.
Provide end-to-end tests:
a. Test SCADA system inputs from field device to SCADA system operator
workstations.
b. Test SCADA system outputs from SCADA operator workstations to field
devices and equipment.
c. Observe and record responses at all intermediate devices.
d. Test and record operator commands and signal readouts to each operator
device where there is more than one operator interface point.
e. For each signal, perform separate tests for SCADA computer screens,
local operator interface (LOI) screens, and local control panels.
3.
Retest any loop following any necessary corrections.
4.
Apply simulated sensor inputs corresponding to 0 percent, 25 percent,
50 percent, 75 percent, and 100 percent of span for networks that incorporate
analog elements, and monitor the resulting outputs to verify compliance to
accuracy tolerance requirements.
5.
Apply continuously variable up and down analog inputs to verify the proper
operation and setting of discrete devices (signal trips, etc.).
6.
Apply provisional settings on controllers and alarm set points.
7.
Record all analog loop test data on test forms.
8.
Exercise each field device requiring an analog command signal, through the
SCADA system. Vary, during the validation process, the output from the PLC
SCADA system and measure the end device position, speed, etc. to confirm
the proper operation of the device for the supplied analog signal. Manually set
the output from the SCADA screen at 0 percent, 25 percent, 50 percent,
75 percent, and 100 percent and measure the response at the final device and
at any intermediate devices.
9.
Exercise each field device providing a discrete input to the SCADA system in
the field and observe the proper operation shall be observed at the operator
workstation:
a. Test limit switches, set limits mechanically, and observe proper operation
at the operator workstation.
b. Exercise starters, relay contacts, switch contacts, and observe proper
operation.
c. Calibrate and test instruments supplying discrete inputs, and observe
proper operation.
10. Test each device accepting a discrete output signal from the SCADA. Perform
the appropriate operator action at the SCADA operator stations (including
LOIs, if present) and confirm the proper operation of the field device:
a. Stroke valves through outputs from the SCADA system, and confirm
proper directional operation. Confirm travel limits and any feedback
signals to the SCADA system.
b. Exercise motors starters from the SCADA system and verify proper
operation through direct field observation.
c. Exercise solenoids and other field devices from the SCADA system and
verify proper operation through direct field observation.
11. Include in the test forms:
a. Analog input devices:
1) Calibration range.
2) Calibration data: Input, output, and error at each test value.
3) Analog input associated PLC register address.
May 2014
17950-9
9408A10
4)
5)
b.
c.
d.
e.
F.
Value in PLC register at each test point.

Value displayed at each operator interface station (local operator
interface displays and SCADA workstations).
Analog output devices:
1) Calibration range.
2) Test value at each test point.
3) Analog output associated PLC register address.
4) Control variable value at field device at each test point.
5) Physical device response at each test point:
a) Response to be actual valve position, or motor speed, etc.
Discrete instrument input devices:
1) Switch setting, contact action, and dead band.
2) Valve position switches:
a) Response in the PLC as the valve is stroked from the PLC.
b) Field observed actual valve position, and valve indicator position
as the valve is stroked from the PLC.
3) Operator interface switches (control stations and other pilot devices)
and associated response.
4) Starter and drive auxiliary device contact response.
5) Response of all other discrete inputs to the PLC.
Discrete output devices:
1) Observed response of field device to the discrete output from the
PLC.
2) Observe the proper operation of Open, Close, Start, Stop, On, Off,
etc.
Test equipment used and associated serial numbers.
Pre-commissioning (functional) test:

1.
General:
a. Commence pre-commissioning tests after completion of all loop
check/validation tests:
1) As specified in Section 17050, Sequencing and Scheduling article.
b. Pre-commissioning to demonstrate proper operation of all systems with
process equipment operating over full operating ranges under conditions
as closely resembling actual operating conditions as possible.
c. Pre-commissioning testing to generally occur in conjunction with
functional testing specified in Section 01756.
d. Additional tests are specified in other Instrumentation and Control
Sections.
e. Follow approved detailed test procedures and check lists for all precommissioning and test activities.
2.
Control logic operational validation:
a. The purpose of control logic validation is to field test the operation of the
complete control system, including all parts of the SCADA system, all
control panels (including vendor control panels), all control circuits, all
control stations, all monitored/controlled equipment, and final control
elements.
b. Demonstrate all control functionality shown on the P&IDs, control
schematics, and other drawings, and specified in the loop descriptions,
control strategies, Electrical Specifications, and Mechanical Equipment
Specifications.
c. Test in detail on a function-by-function and sentence-by-sentence basis.
May 2014
17950-10
9408A10
d.
3.
4.
Thoroughly test all hardware and software functions:

1) Including all hardwired and software control circuit interlocks and
alarms.
e. Test final control elements, controlled equipment, control panels, and
ancillary equipment under startup, shut down, and steady-state operating
conditions to verify all logic and control is achieved.
f. Control logic validation tests to include, but not limited to: a repeat of all
control logic tests from the factory acceptance tests, modified and
expanded to include all field instruments, control panels, circuits, and
equipment.
Loop tuning:
a. Optimally tune all electronic control stations and software control logic
incorporating proportional, integral, or derivative control. Apply control
signal disturbances at various process variable levels and adjusting the
gain, reset, or rate settings as required to achieve proper response.
b. Verify the transient stability of final control elements operating over the full
range of operating conditions, by applying control signal disturbances,
monitoring the amplitude and decay rate of control parameter oscillations
and making necessary controller adjustments as required to eliminate
excessive oscillatory amplitudes and decay rates. As a minimum, achieve
1/4 wave amplitude decay ratio damping (subsidence ratio of 4) under the
full range of operating conditions.
c. If excessive oscillations or system instability occur, as determined by the
Engineer, continue tuning and parameter adjustments, or develop and
implement any additional control algorithms needed to achieve
satisfactory control loop operation.
Pre-commissioning validation sheets:
a. Document each pre-commissioning test on an approved test form.
b. Document loop tuning with a report for each loop, including two-pen chart
recordings showing the responses to step disturbance at a minimum of
3 setpoints or process rates approved by the Engineer. Show tuning
parameters on the charts, along with time, date, and sign-off by
Contractor and Engineer.
c. Include on the form, functions which can be demonstrated on a loop-byloop basis:
1) Loop number and P&ID number.
2) Control strategy, or reference to specification tested.
3) Test procedures: Where applicable, use the FAT function-byfunction, sentence-by-sentence loop test checklist forms modified to
meet the requirements of the pre-commissioning test. Otherwise,
create new forms.
d. For functions that cannot be demonstrated on a loop-by-loop basis (such
as overall plant power failure), include on the test form a listing of the
specific steps and tests to be conducted. Include with each test
description the following information:
1) Specification page and paragraph of function demonstrated.
2) Description of function and/or text from specification.
3) Test procedures: use the FAT loop test checklist forms modified to
meet the specific testing conditions of the pre-commissioning test.
May 2014
17950-11
9408A10
5.
G.
Pre-commissioning certification:
a. Document via a certified report the completion of all pre-commissioning
and test activities:
1) Including all test forms with test data entered, submitted to the
Engineer with a clear and unequivocal statement that all precommissioning test requirements have been satisfied.
Pump Nos. 4 and 5 Bypass Testing:

1.
Provide additional testing for Pump Nos. 4 and 5 to test interlocking of the new
VFD with the existing RVAT starters.
a. Refer to Section 16950 for complete testing requirements.
b. Coordinate with the electrical contractor to test all control interlocks
between the new VFDs and existing RVAT starters and to ensure that all
SCADA points operate correctly for the interlock to function in accordance
with Section 17101 control descriptions.
3.08
3.09
CLEANING (NOT USED)
3.10

A.
Performance/reliability/operational tests:
1.
After successful completion of the pre-commissioning test as accepted by the
Engineer and Owner, the performance test can proceed.
2.
Complete training and instruction of the Owner's personnel as specified in the
Sequencing and Scheduling article of Section 17050.
B.
The performance test may be performed concurrently with the 7-day operational
test specified in Section 01756.
C.
General:
1.
The performance test is part of the Work that must be completed as a
condition of substantial completion for the entire Project.
2.
The complete PLC control and SCADA system must run continuously for the
duration of the performance test. During this period, exercise all system
functions, and log for cause of failure, any system interruption and
accompanying component, subsystem, or program failure:
a. Include time of occurrence and duration of each failure.
3.
Provide a competently trained technician or programmer on call for the Project
Site during all normal working days and hours from the start of the
performance test until final acceptance of the system. Response time to the
Project Site:
a. 24 hours or less, for a major failure.
4.
The performance test duration:
a. 10 days.
5.
Test and use the entire process control system under standard operating
conditions.
D.
SCADA system testing:

1.
Exercise each system function, e.g., status report, alarms, logs, and displays
several times at a minimum, and in a manner that approximates "normal"
system operation.
May 2014
17950-12
9408A10
2.
3.
Failure of the SCADA system during testing shall be considered as indicating

that the programs and operating system do not meet the requirements of the
specifications.
a. Corrective action is required before restarting the acceptance test.
Only those components, sub-systems, and systems covered in this Section
and supplied under this Contract shall be considered for this acceptance test.
Problems and failures of other systems shall not be considered as part of this
test, except as they display the capabilities of this system to detect failures.
E.
Failures:
1.
Classify failures as either major or minor.
a. Minor failure:
1) A small and non-critical component failure or software problem that
can be corrected by the Owner's operators.
2) Log this occurrence but this is not a reason for stopping the test and
is not grounds for non-acceptance.
3) Should the same or similar component failure occur repeatedly, this
may be considered as grounds for non-acceptance.
4) Failure of one printer or operator station is considered a minor failure
providing all functions can be provided by backup equipment, i.e.,
alternate printers and operator station, and repairs can be made and
equipment returned to service within 3 working days.
b. Major failure:
1) Considered to have occurred when a component, subsystem,
software control, or program fault causes a halt in or improper
operation of the system and/or when a technician's work is required
to make a repair or to re-initiate operation of the system.
2) Cause termination of the performance test.
3) Start a new acceptance test when the causes of a major failure have
been corrected.
4) A failure is also considered major when failure of any control system
that results in an overflow, underflow, overdose, or underdose
condition occurs.
F.
Technician report:
1.
Each time a technician is required to respond to a system malfunction, he or
she must complete a report, which includes details concerning the nature of
the complaint or malfunction and the resulting repair action required and taken.
2.
If a malfunction occurs which clears itself or which the operator on duty is able
to correct, no report is required or logged as specified above.
3.
If a technician has performed work but no report is written, then a major failure
is considered to have occurred.
4.
Each report shall be submitted within 24 hours to the Engineer and the Owner,
or its representative.
3.11
3.12
SCHEDULES
A.
Example test forms:
May 2014
17950-13
9408A10
1.
2.
Example test forms are attached at the end of this Section. They may be used
as a starting point for the development of Project-specific test forms for this
Project.
The example test forms are not intended to be complete or comprehensive.
Edit and supplement the forms to meet the requirements for testing and test
forms specified in this Section and other Contract Documents.
END OF SECTION
May 2014
17950-14
9408A10
INSTALLATION AND CERTIFICATION CHECKLIST

DOCUMENTATION
INSTRUMENT LOOP NO.

SERVICE DESCRIPTION
A COPY OF LATEST ISSUE OF THE FOLLOWING DOCUMENTS ARE INCLUDED IN THIS INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION
CERTIFICATION FILE:
INSTRUMENT SPECIFICATION SHEETS (FOR ALL INSTRUMENTS IN THE LOOP)
INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS (FOR ALL INSTRUMENTS IN THE LOOP)
INSTRUMENT LOOP WIRING DIAGRAMS
INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION CERTIFICATION CHECKLIST
SIZING CALCULATIONS
INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION SCHEDULE (APPLICABLE PART)
NAMEPLATE SCHEDULE (APPLICABLE PART)
VENDOR LITERATURE CALIBRATION INFORMATION
INSTRUMENT LOOP IS PART OF AN EQUIPMENT START UP/SHUTDOWN INTERLOCKS?
No
Yes
REMARKS:
CHECKED BY (COMPANY)
ACCEPTED BY (COMPANY)
SIGNATURE
SIGNATURE
DATE
DATE
May 2014
17950-15
9408A10
SWITCHES
INSTALLATION AND CALIBRATION CHECKLIST
INSTRUMENT LOOP NO.
SERVICE DESCRIPTION
CHECK BELOW, WHEN COMPLETED:
BENCH CALIBRATED PER SPEC SHEET
VERIFIED PER P&ID NO
CORRESPONDS TO SPECIFICATION SHEET NO.
WIRING CORRECT PER INSTRUMENT LOOP DRAWING NO.
INSTALLATION CORRECT PER DETAIL NO.
ACCESSORIES ARE PRESENT AND PROPERLY INSTALLED
INSTRUMENT IS ACCESSIBLE FOR MAINTENANCE OR REMOVAL
ENGRAVED LAMINATED NAMEPLATE (NO SPELLING ERRORS) PERMANENTLY INSTALLED
No
Yes
FIELD CALIBRATION CHECK

CONTACT
NO.
1
FOR
SIGNAL
CONTACT IS
TO
ALARM
INCR
S/D PERM
FUNCTION
AT SPECIFIED VALUE FOR
ACTUAL TRIP POINT WAS
OPEN
SET PT =
SET PT =
DECR
CLOSE
RESET =
RESET =
ALARM
INCR
OPEN
SET PT =
SET PT =
S/D PERM
DECR
CLOSE
RESET =
RESET =
ALARM
INCR
OPEN
SET PT =
SET PT =
S/D PERM
DECR
CLOSE
RESET =
RESET =
ALARM
INCR
OPEN
SET PT =
SET PT =
S/D PERM
DECR
CLOSE
RESET =
RESET =
NOTE: PERM IS ABBREVIATED FOR PERMISSIVE
May 2014
17950-16
9408A10
SWITCHES
REMARKS:
SIGNATURE
SIGNATURE
DATE
DATE
May 2014
17950-17
9408A10
TRANSMITTER/CONTROLLER/INDICATOR

INSTRUMENT TYPE INDICATOR
TRANSMITTER
No
Yes
CONTROLLER
OTHER
DESCRIPTION
INSTRUMENT TAG NO.
SERIAL NO.
SERVICE DESCRIPTION
BENCH CALIBRATION CHECK
INPUT RANGE =
OUTPUT RANGE =
HEAD CORRECTION =
LINEAR
CALIBRATED SPAN =
SQUARE ROOT
% CALIB
SPAN
DESIRED VALUE
ACTUAL VALUE
EXPECTED VALUE
ACTUAL VALUE
0
50
100
CHECK BELOW, WHEN COMPLETED:
BENCH CALIBRATED PER SPECIFICATION SHEET
VERIFIED PER P&ID NO
INSTALLATION CORRECT PER DETAIL NO.
FIELD CALIBRATION CHECK
INPUT RANGE =
% CALIB
SPAN
OUTPUT RANGE =
DESIRED VALUE
ACTUAL VALUE
EXPECTED VALUE
ACTUAL VALUE
0
50
100
May 2014
17950-18
9408A10
TRANSMITTER/CONTROLLER/INDICATOR
DIRECT
REVERSE
ACTION VERIFIED AT 50% SPAN

ACTION VERIFIED AT
SPAN
CONTROLLER SETTINGS
SETTING
GAIN
PB
RESET
(INTEGRAL)
DERIV.
(RATE)
HIGH
LIMIT
LOW
LIMIT
ELEV.
ZERO
ZERO
SUPP
PRE-TUNE
POST-TUNE
PRE-TUNE SETTINGS
GAIN
PB
RESET (REPEAT/MIN)
RESET (MIN/REPEAT)
DERIVATION (MINUTES)
FLOW:
1.0
100
10
0.1
N/A
LEVEL
1.0
100
MIN.
MAX.
N/A
PRESSURE
2.0
50
2.0
0.5
N/A
TEMP.
4.0
25
0.1
10
OFF
REMARKS
SIGNATURE
SIGNATURE
DATE
DATE
May 2014
17950-19
9408A10
CONTROL VALVES

VALVE TAG NO.
No
Yes
SERIAL NO.
TRANSDUCER TAG NO.
SERIAL NO.
SOLENOID TAG NO.
SERIAL NO.
VOLUME BOOSTER TAG NO.
SERIAL NO.
POSITIONER
SERIAL NO.
SERVICE DESCRIPTION
TRANSDUCER CHECK
INPUT RANGE =
OUTPUT RANGE =
CALIBRATED SPAN =
CALIBRATED SPAN =
BENCH
SPAN
DESIRED
ACTUAL
SPAN
0%
0%
50%
50%
100%
EXPECTED
ACTUAL
EXPECTED
ACTUAL
100%
FIELD
SPAN
DESIRED
ACTUAL
SPAN
0%
0%
50%
50%
100%
100%
CHECK BELOW, IF TRUE:

BENCH CALIBRATED PER ABOVE
VERIFIED PER P&ID NO.
VALVE SPECIFICATION NO.
TRANSDUCER SPECIFICATION NO.
SOLENOID SPECIFICATION NO.
INSTALLATION CORRECT PER INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS
VALVE DETAIL NO.
TRANSDUCER DETAIL NO.
SOLENOID DETAIL NO.
May 2014
17950-20
9408A10
CONTROL VALVES
VALVE CHECK
FLOW
CHECK
PROCESS FLOW DIRECTION THRU THE VALVE IS CORRECT
SAFETY
CHECK
ON LOSS OF AIR VALVE FAILS
TRAVEL
CHECK
FULL OPEN AT
SEATING
CHECK
OPEN
ON LOSS OF POWER SOLENOID FAILS
CLOSE
TO VENT
FULL CLOSED AT
PSI
MEASURED TRAVEL
PSI
ON BENCH
TO VALVE
RESULTS
INCHES
ACTUATOR BENCH SET
IN-LINE
POSITIONER CHECK
VALVE FULL OPEN AT
PSI TO POSITIONER
VALVE FULL CLOSED AT
PSI TO POSITIONER
VOLUME BOOSTER CHECK
BYPASS VALVE (GAIN) ADJUSTING SCREW BACKED OUT
TURNS FROM CLOSED TO ENSURE QUICK BUT
STABLE OPERATION (TYPICALLY 1-1/2 TO 2 TURNS)
REMARKS
SIGNATURE
SIGNATURE
DATE
DATE
May 2014
17950-21
9408A10

Waste Water Pumping Station

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Waste Water Pumping Station

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

DEPARTMENT OF WATER UTILITIES

KAW PUMP STATION IMPROVEMENTS

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISIONS 16 - 17

PROJECT MANUAL COVER

CITY ATTORNEY PERFORMANCE BOND

CITY ATTORNEY STATUTORY BOND

CITY ATTORNEY MAINTENANCE BOND

STANDARD GENERAL CONDITIONS

LIST OF DOCUMENTS REQUIRED

SIGNATURE DOCUMENTS REQUIRED

BUSINESS RELATIONSHIP AFFIDAVIT

CONTRACT DOCUMENT LANGUAGE

CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT

WEB BASED CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENT MANAGEMENT

PROGRESS SCHEDULES AND REPORTS

PHOTOGRAPHIC AND VIDEOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION

ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES

HAZARDOUS MATERIAL PROCEDURES

STORMWATER POLLUTION PREVENTION

SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS

CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL PLAN

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION

FILTER FABRIC FENCE

PROJECT DESIGN CRITERIA

CUTTING AND PATCHING

WORK WITHIN PUBLIC RIGHT-OF-WAY

TESTING, TRAINING, AND FACILITY START-UP

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

SOILS AND AGGREGATES FOR EARTHWORK

EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION

CONTROLLED LOW STRENGTH MATERIAL (CLSM)

PRECAST ELECTRICAL HANDHOLES AND ELECTRICAL MANHOLES

CONCRETE CURBS, GUTTERS, AND SIDEWALKS

FENCES AND GATES

PAVEMENT RESTORATION AND REHABILITATION

EPOXY BONDING REINFORCING BARS AND ALL THREAD RODS IN

EPOXY RESIN/PORTLAND CEMENT BONDING AGENT

MECHANICAL ANCHORING AND FASTENING TO CONCRETE AND

PRESERVATIVE PRESSURE TREATED WOOD

FLOOR ACCESS DOORS

VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR GENERAL PIPING

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR VALVES

STRAINERS AND FILTERS

STEEL TRANSMISSION PIPE: WELDED, GREATER THAN 22-INCH

AIR CONDITIONING UNITS

HEAT TRACING CABLE

HVAC SYSTEMS TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING

PIPING SYSTEMS TESTING

MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT TESTING

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL

GROUNDING AND BONDING

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

600 VOLT OR LESS WIRES AND CABLES

MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLES

LOW VOLTAGE WIRE CONNECTIONS

MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLE CONNECTIONS

MEDIUM VOLTAGE MOTORS

SINGLE DIESEL FUELED ENGINE GENERATOR ABOVE 200 KW

MEDIUM VOLTAGE VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE

LIQUID FILLED PAD MOUNTED TRANSFORMERS